| Popular Science https://www.popsci.com/ Awe-inspiring science reporting, technology news, and DIY projects. Skunks to space robots, primates to climates. That's Popular Science, 145 years strong. Mon, 23 Oct 2023 22:00:00 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.2.2 https://www.popsci.com/uploads/2021/04/28/cropped-PSC3.png?auto=webp&width=32&height=32 | Popular Science https://www.popsci.com/ 32 32 Start your holiday shopping early with this refurbished 13.3″ MacBook Pro, now under $250 https://www.popsci.com/sponsored-content/refurbished-13-inch-macbook-pro-deal/ Mon, 23 Oct 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=582725
Refurbished silver 13.3" MacBook Pro on a white background
Refurbished silver 13.3" MacBook Pro on a white background. Stack Commerce

This highly-rated laptop is further on sale for $235.97 through October 31.

The post Start your holiday shopping early with this refurbished 13.3″ MacBook Pro, now under $250 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Refurbished silver 13.3" MacBook Pro on a white background
Refurbished silver 13.3" MacBook Pro on a white background. Stack Commerce

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The holiday season is just around the corner, and early birds looking for a head start on their gift shopping are in for a treat. Apple enthusiasts and tech-savvy shoppers, in particular, have something to rejoice about with the remarkable deal on the Apple MacBook Pro 13.3″ Intel Core i5 4GB 500GB HDD in silver, now available as a refurbished model for just $235.97, down from its regular price of $349 and over $100 off.

The refurbished 2012 Apple MacBook Pro is an excellent contender for tech-loving individuals who need an updated, high-performance device. With a massive 500GB HDD storage capacity and a 2.5GHz processor, this laptop can easily handle large files and multitask. Simultaneously, its 13.3″ screen flaunts a remarkable 1366×768 Retina display, delivering impeccable clarity to all your visuals, such as images, photos, and videos. Whether working from home or needing a portable vessel for personal projects, this laptop helps users accomplish their goals and makes a great practical gift. 

Weighing only 4.5 pounds, the MacBook Pro is sleek, lightweight, and easy to carry, making it a perfect portable device for work or entertainment. It is compatible with various power ports and expansions, making connecting to multiple devices and peripherals easy.

The Intel Core i5 processor also performs quickly, making multitasking a breeze. This MacBook can handle everything, whether you’re working on a presentation, editing photos, or streaming your favorite TV shows. The laptop’s 4.8 out of 5-star customer reviews back up its high performance and eco-friendliness at an affordable price.

Take advantage of this limited-time deal with no coupon code needed and treat your loved one (or yourself) to an upgrade.

While the refurbished Apple MacBook Pro 13.3″ usually sells for $349, you can purchase it today for only $235.97. Don’t wait long; the offer ends on October 31 at 11:59 p.m. PT. 

Prices subject to change.

The post Start your holiday shopping early with this refurbished 13.3″ MacBook Pro, now under $250 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
At this epic off-roading event, traditional map skills and an EV win the day https://www.popsci.com/technology/rebelle-rally-2023/ Mon, 23 Oct 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=582613
The Rebelle Rally involves teams spending long days navigating off the grid, without any help from electronic devices.
The Rebelle Rally involves teams spending long days navigating off the grid, without any help from electronic devices. Regine Trias

Modern vehicles and old-fashioned navigation techniques intersect at the Rebelle Rally. No Google Maps allowed.

The post At this epic off-roading event, traditional map skills and an EV win the day appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The Rebelle Rally involves teams spending long days navigating off the grid, without any help from electronic devices.
The Rebelle Rally involves teams spending long days navigating off the grid, without any help from electronic devices. Regine Trias

Hundreds of years before Google Maps and other apps like it made navigation as easy as looking at your smartphone, explorers found their way around the planet by the light of the moon and stars, or by shadows cast by the sun. Today, humans rely on electronic devices, not their instincts or the study of celestial bodies. And of course before the smartphone came along, people also used maps printed on dead trees. But kids born recently aren’t using paper maps at all; instead they just punch in an address to receive a route to get where they’re going.

Off-roading champion Emily Miller wanted to teach others what she learned from years of navigating with a ruler, pencil, compass, and topographical map. With that in mind, she created the Rebelle Rally, the longest off-road time-distance navigational rally in the United States. The idea of a navigational rally might not be novel, but this one is: All competitors are required to disable any digital navigational aids on their vehicle and seal up their electronic devices (mobile phones, AirTags, tablets, laptops, and more) for the duration. It’s a test of driving precision and navigation skills, not a speed race pell-mell across the desert. 

Over eight days, Rebelle Rally competitors are shut off from the world, sleeping in tents near ghost towns and rock faces instead of hotels and cities. This year, the rally’s course started in Mammoth Lakes, California, crossed into Nevada, and finished in the southeast corner of California at the majestic Glamis Dunes. The only news participants hear is their daily standings in the competition—there’s no endless scrolling of social media feeds. Plotting latitude and longitude points requires one’s full attention, and by the end of a 10-hour day spent hunting checkpoints, there’s no need for entertainment. The competitors are wiped out physically and mentally, heading for their tents to sleep.

I just completed my second year of the rally; I was sponsored by Hyundai and we operated a Santa Cruz with a 1.5-inch lift in the front and a 1-inch lift in the back. We had off-road accessories (traction boards, shovels, and a spare tire) mounted to a custom Rally Innovations rack to help us along. This is what it’s like to compete at this crossroads of analog and high-tech. 

A team using a Rivian R1T took the top spot.
A team using a Rivian R1T took the top spot. Ernesto Araiza

Analog navigation

Now entering its ninth year, the Rebelle Rally just wrapped up its most recent competition with 65 teams of two women each; the all-female event concluded on October 20. Each morning, the teams were alerted that it’s time to get going by the gentle clanging sound of a cowbell at 5 a.m. Many teams are already up by that point, the sounds of tent zippers tearing the fabric of the silence even before that.

Each day, a race official distributes a list of 20 or more checkpoints to the teams long before dawn. Then teams plot latitude and longitude points along with distances and headings on their paper maps. On-the-ground checkpoints are marked with flags (mandatory green checkpoints, the easiest), or poles (blue checkpoints, which are more difficult to find) or invisible geofenced areas (black checkpoints, requiring precision within 200-300 meters to avoid a penalty). 

Once a team drives to the checkpoint and sees the flag, or sees what they believe to be the spot, one of the competitors clicks on a satellite tracker that displays the exact latitude and longitude point where the signal is traced. A company called YB Tracking and the Iridium satellite network track the competitors to keep them safe; the staff knows exactly where each car is, even if the teams themselves are lost. 

Teams also participate in enduro segments, which are a series of checkpoints that include time checks along the route and require intense focus and concentration to stay at the average dictated speed, which may change frequently. To prepare for these on-time sections, competitors use mathematical formulas to calculate the seconds and minutes of each segment in the precise roadbook based on the distance and speed. 

Using a solar-powered calculator and a basic stopwatch, we found our way. 

No Google Maps allowed; paper maps served as navigational tools.
No Google Maps allowed; paper maps served as navigational tools. Nicole Dreon

Green power takes the gold

After seven days of full-time driving plus the half-day prologue, it was a team called the Limestone Legends that took first place in a Rivian R1T all-electric pickup truck. Not only was it the first time an all-electric vehicle earned the gold medal in the Rebelle Rally, the second place vehicle was a hybrid: a Jeep Wrangler 4xe. Rivian has been a strong supporter of the Rebelle Rally starting in October 2020 with a pre-production model of an R1T, which became the first fully electric truck to ever compete in the event. 

Charging up an EV in the middle of the desert is a challenge. While gas-powered cars are fueled up by a tanker that travels from base camp to base camp with the rally, it’s not as easy to provide a boost for batteries that way. So, the Rebelle Rally partnered with Renewable Innovations to provide hydrogen-powered EV charging to the Rivian and Jeep 4xe models each day. 

Each base camp embraced green energy too, mobilizing a 53-foot mobile Renewable Innovations semi with high-density solar panels combined with “follow-the-sun” smart flowers on each side to collectively deliver 50 kilowatts of peak power for base camp. 

While our phones and navigation systems were unavailable by design, my team did have a Nextbase dash cam in the car so we could capture the beauty of the off-road trails in California and Nevada. It came in handy when we witnessed a crash—a Mitsubishi crossover tried to pass us and the full-size SUV in front of us on the left. We handed over our camera’s memory card to the police, providing an airtight record of what happened. And luckily, no one was seriously hurt. 

The post At this epic off-roading event, traditional map skills and an EV win the day appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heating pads in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-heating-pad/ Sun, 22 Aug 2021 17:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=389875
The best heating pads will help ease muscle aches and tension in your neck and shoulders.

Relax tense muscles and enjoy warm pain relief with a heating pad.

The post The best heating pads in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best heating pads will help ease muscle aches and tension in your neck and shoulders.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best budget The Carex Bed Buddy Heat Pad and Cooling Neck Wrap is the best budget heating pad. Carex Bed Buddy Heat Pad and Cooling Neck Wrap
SEE IT

This budget-friendly microwaveable option comes in four varieties including several filled with herbs and flowers.

Best overall A gray heating pad made by Pure Enrichment with some cords on a couch Pure Enrichment PureRelief Ultra-Wide Microplush Heating Pad
SEE IT

The super comfy heating pad has six levels of temperature and automatic shutoff after 2 hours for safety.

Best for cramps The black cordless heating pad from Sunbeam features an adjustable gray strap. Sunbeam Cordless Heating Pad
SEE IT

Sunbeam’s battery-powered portable heating pad provides targeted relief for cramps, and back and neck pain.

If you’ve got tense, sore, or injured muscles, consider heating pads before you reach for aspirin. They stimulate blood flow, help muscles relax, and offer fast pain relief. They come in different shapes and sizes to fit various areas of the body. Different types of heating pads, like weighted and microwaveable models, feature designs that fit certain needs and preferences. If you have problem areas, some models can mold to or specifically fit the shoulders, neck, or lower back. In addition, some heating pads can shape themselves to most areas of the body, so you can use the same one even if you’ve got many different sore spots. So get ready for some heat, and look at the best heating pads, along with tips on choosing the right one for your aching body.  

How we chose the best heating pads

At PopSci, we have an affinity for products that help keep readers warm, from the best heated clothing to the best electric garage heaters to the cousin of heating pads, the best heated blankets. In compiling our list of the best heating pads, we looked for options that served various needs, from arthritis and neck and back pain, to heating pads that just help keep people warm. We looked for heating pads from trusted brands like Sunbeam and Carex. We also considered user reviews in making our recommendations.

The best heating pads: Reviews & Recommendations

Both heat and cold can help soothe aches and pains. Heat attracts more blood flow and nutrients to the affected areas, helping to provide relief, according to WebMD. Heating pads can offer different types of heat, control features, and designs that make some pads more helpful under certain circumstances. For example, there’s dry heat, and there’s moist heat. Both types of heat are helpful, but there’s evidence that moist heat’s ability to penetrate soft tissue faster can boost the pad’s effectiveness. So, if you’re looking for the best heating pad for cramps, arthritis, neck and shoulders, or general muscle pains, our recommendations have you covered.

Best overall: Pure Enrichment PureRelief Ultra-Wide Microplush Heating Pad

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Microplush polyester, plastic
  • Heat range: 105-140℉
  • Size: 24 inches L x 20 inches W 
  • Weight: 1.9 pounds

Pros

  • Cozy
  • Six temperature settings
  • Provides dry and moist heat therapy
  • Automatic shutoff after 2 hours

Cons

  • Some users said it stopped working consistently

Pure Enrichment’s PureRelief Ultra-Wide Microplush Heating Pad is a cross between a super comfy blanket and a heating pad you can fine-tune to your preferences. Made of microplush, this heating pad provides six heat levels, which you can adjust using an ergonomic LCD controller. It’s designed to heat up instantly, and you can select between 105-140℉ of heat. You can also switch between dry and moist heat by dampening the pad. And automatically shuts off after 2 hours, should you doze off.

At just 1.9 pounds, this heating pad is lightweight, but its dimensions of 20 by 24 inches provide plenty of coverage for neck, shoulders, back, and legs. It provides plenty of warmth and relief for muscle soreness and joint pain. Plus, it’s machine-washable.

Best for cramps: Sunbeam Cordless Heating Pad

Sunbeam

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Micromink (double-sided polyester), lithium-ion battery
  • Heat range: Low to high
  • Size: 12 inches L x 9.5 inches W
  • Weight: One pound

Pros

  • Portable
  • Modern design
  • Operates at 60 hertz
  • Works on multiple parts of the body
  • Machine-washable cover

Cons

  • Battery may run out

Looking for targeted relief from cramps? Sunbeam’s Cordless Heat Pad is designed with a microplush covering that measures 12 inches by 9.5 inches, and strap that adjusts up to 55 inches. This heating pad provides three levels of heat and is battery-powered so that you can wear it around your home. The lithium-ion battery also runs for up to 4 hours on a single charge and runs at a frequency of 60 hertz. You can also use it on your back, neck, shoulders, and legs. Once you’re feeling better, the cover is removable and machine-washable.

Best for arthritis: Thermophore MaxHeat Arthritis Pad

Thermophore

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Fleece, plastic
  • Heat range: 50 to 165°F
  • Size: 14 inches W x 27 inches L  
  • Weight: N/A

Pros

  • Temperature goes higher than some other options
  • Shuts off after 25 minutes
  • Easy to clean

Cons

  • Some users say you can’t return it

The Thermophore MaxHeat Arthritis Pad heats quickly and reaches temperatures between 150 to 165°F. The intense, moist heat is delivered by a large 14- by 27-inch pad. With three heat settings and an automatic 25-minute shutoff feature, this portable heating pad relieves pain but keeps you safe, too.

Best for neck and shoulders: Sunbeam Heating Pad for Neck & Shoulder

Sunbeam

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Micromink, plastic
  • Heat range: Max of 176°F
  • Size: 22 inches L x 19 inches W
  • Weight: 2.7 pounds

Pros

  • Fits to your shoulders and neck
  • Very soft
  • Close fit

Cons

  • Some users say the heat is uneven
  • Cord is bulky

The Sunbeam Heating Pad for Neck & Shoulder features an extra-tall, adjustable collar to cover the entire back of the neck and into the scalp. In total, this pad measures 22 by 19 inches, making it large enough for men and women. The Sunbeam also includes four heating settings and a removable, washable cover made of soft micromink. Meanwhile, you can keep your feet warm with some of the best heated insoles or best heated slippers.

Best moist: Sunbeam Heating Pad for Back, Neck, and Shoulder Pain Relief

Sunbeam

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Polyester, vinyl
  • Heat range: 110 to 160°F
  • Size: 12 inches x 15 inches
  • Weight: One pound

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Lightweight
  • Easy to clean

Cons

  • May not cover as much of the body as other options
  • Not as cozy as other picks

If you’re looking for an inexpensive heating pad that provides moist heat, consider the Sunbeam Heating Pad for Back, Neck, and Shoulder Pain Relief. At 12 inches by 15 inches, this electric heating pad can help provide relief to a smaller area than some other heating pads. But you can adjust the temperature in the three settings, ranging from 110 to 160°F. Designed to help with arthritis, shoulder, neck, and back pain, this heating pad is also equipped with a sponge insert to provide moist heat in addition to dry heat. Plus, you can remove the cover to wash it.

Best weighted: Pure Enrichment WeightedWarmth 2-in-1 Body Pad

Pure Enrichment

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Micromink, glass beads
  • Heat range: 105-140℉
  • Size: ‎32 inches L x 21 inches W
  • Weight: 6 pounds

Pros

  • Weighted blanket and heating pad in one
  • Plush
  • Non-toxic
  • More attractive than other options

Cons

  • Some users had problems getting it to heat up
  • Glass beads may bunch

The Pure Enrichment WeightedWarmth 2-in-1 Body Pad is made of a diamond quilted mink. Each diamond contains non-toxic beads that help the pad conform to the shape of your shoulders, leg, or back. The quilting maintains an even distribution of the beads, so there’s no pooling. That also maintains the pad’s contouring so it can better reach tight, sore muscles. Want to explore the psychological benefits of weighted blankets minus the heat? We’ve got a guide for that, too.

Best eco-friendly: Caylee’s Creations Microweavable Corn-Filled Heating Pad and Cold Pack

Caylee’s Creations

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Cotton and corn
  • Heat range: N/A
  • Size: 7.5 inches W x 11 inches L; 5.25 inches W x 17.25 inches L
  • Weight: 2.8 pounds

Pros

  • Made of natural materials
  • Microwaveable
  • Provides both heat and cold therapy

Cons

  • Can’t adjust temperature
  • May not be the best solution for arthritis or chronic pain

If you’re looking for a low-tech heating pad that’s made from natural materials, consider Caylee’s Creations Microwavable Corn-Filled Heating Pad and Cold Pack. Yes, you read that right: corn-filled. When you heat one of these heating pads up in the microwave, it smells like popcorn. If you want cold relief instead, you can just pop this heating pad in the freezer. It’s available in two sizes (7.5 inches wide by 11 inches long and 5.25 inches wide by 17.5 inches long), and you can choose from 25 colorways and designs, including polka dot, plaid, and camo. And the 100 percent cotton cover is removable for washing.

Best budget: Carex Bed Buddy Heat Pad and Cooling Neck Wrap

Carex

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Nylon handles, natural filling (herbs, flowers)
  • Heat range: N/A
  • Size: 23 inches L x 4.25 inches W
  • Weight: 2 pounds

Pros

  • Comes in four versions (unscented, Balance Orange, Bliss Pink, Fresh Green)
  • Provides both hot and cold therapy
  • Inexpensive

Cons

  • May not provide heat and cold consistently

The Carex Bed Buddy Heat Pad and Cooling Neck Wrap contains an organic filling of grains and herbs that holds heat or cold. Pop it in the microwave to create moist heat, or store it in the freezer for a cooling wrap to treat swelling or injury. Handles on either end help it stay in place, or press the heating pad into the skin for deeper heat penetration.

What to consider before buying a heating pad

Whether you’re looking for a comfy heating pad to wrap your tired muscles in after a long, cold run, or you’d like to reduce tension in your neck, our recommendations can help address your needs. To find the option that’s the best for you, consider these factors:

Levels of heat

Heating pads with multiple or adjustable heat settings give you more control over your heat therapy. Areas of the body that don’t have a lot of soft tissue, like the ankle, may need less heat than the thigh, for example, where there’s ample soft tissue to disperse the heat. Of course, there are also comfort preferences and heat tolerance that may necessitate temperature adjustment. And those with a single heat setting may need closer monitoring to ensure the temperature stays comfortable. 

Location of pain and fit

Back pain, specifically low-back pain, causes more global disability than all other pain sources. Heat can help, whether that pain comes from overuse or stems from a chronic condition. Heating pads designed for back pain may be a simple rectangle shape that molds to the body. This type works for the back, but also for general pain in other areas of the body. 

Other designs fit like a vest or jacket, allowing freedom of movement with the arms. These electric heating pads aren’t usually battery-powered. Consequently, you can’t walk around while wearing one, but the pad will fit and stay in place better. However, these close-fitting designs can cause overheating, so pay attention to how you feel. Red skin, lightheadedness, or an upset stomach could indicate that you or your skin are overheating, and it’s time to take the pad off.

That said, a rectangle isn’t always the best shape for the body’s curves. Shoulder and neck pain are common complaints that may not get the heat they need from a standard rectangular heating pad. 

To address that need, neck-and-shoulder heating pads are made in the shape of the neck and/or shoulders with a collar and body that drapes across the shoulders and partially down the back. Some are for the neck only, and others are shoulders only. However, the magical ones do both at once. Look for a model that fits your body size and drapes far enough down the body to reach your problem areas.

Moist vs. dry heat

Heat is heat, right? Wrong. Moisture can help the heat penetrate deeper into the soft tissues and amplify the effects. The most efficient and consistent moist heating pads absorb moisture from the air, heat it, and let it penetrate the body. They don’t run out of moisture and keep heat exposure consistent. 

Look for models with adjustable temperature settings. Moist heat feels hotter and can easily burn the skin. Moist heating pads can also welcome mold and mildew if they aren’t maintained properly. Make sure that it is completely dry before putting it away.

Electric vs. microwaveable

Microwavable heating pads have two key benefits. First, they don’t require an electrical cord. You can manipulate the pad and adjust it to the body without wrestling with a cord. A lack of cord also lets you walk around with it in place. 

The second benefit is that some microwaveable heating pads offer moist heat. Some models allow you to put a small bowl of water in the microwave with the heating pad. The water releases steam, which the pad absorbs. It then releases that moisture against your body, letting the steam penetrate deeper into the tissue. 

The downside of these pads is that you have to be careful with them initially as they may be very hot, but they lose their heat relatively quickly. At that point, you’ll have to reheat them, but it’s a small price to pay for mobile heat.

Safety

It’s important to note that heating pads, when not used properly, can cause a burn or be a fire hazard. Safety features like an automatic shut-off and an internal thermometer prevent heating pad burns and fire. Some models feature a timer that shuts the heat off after 20 to 30 minutes, while others turn off once they reach a certain temperature. However, safety also requires that the user follow the manufacturer’s guidelines.

As far as safe use, don’t lay on a heating pad, which can trap heat against your body and potentially cause a burn or start a fire. Do not place the pad directly on your skin, and make sure you don’t fall asleep with one, even if it has an automatic shut-off feature. 

Weight

Weighted heating pads do a couple of things that other models don’t. First, they offer a better fit against the body. If there’s a gap between the pad and the body, heat cannot penetrate as well, and you might not get all of the benefits. Weighted models mold to the body and stay in place more readily, so you get a good fit no matter the pad’s placement. 

Second, weight and pressure have also been shown to help relieve anxiety. These heating pads can act as a mini weighted blanket while providing relaxing heat. It’s kind of a win-win situation—a better fit and relaxing heat all in one. If you’re looking for a DIY heating pad, you can fill an old sock with rice and heat it in the microwave, or warm towels. Just be careful of the heat when you first handle a homemade heating pad.

FAQs

Q: How much does a heating pad cost?

Heating pads range in price from about $85 for a higher-tech portable option like the Sunbeam Cordless Heating Pad to under $10 for the microwaveable Carex Bed Buddy Heat Pad and Cooling Neck Wrap.

Q: Are heating pads good for shoulder pain?

Heating pads are an excellent option for shoulder pain. The trick is getting a good fit to the part of the shoulder that hurts. Rectangular models can work. However, you’ll get better relief with one designed to fit around the neck and shoulders. Weighted models can also help the pad mold to your shape for a closer fit and better heat application.

Q: Are heating pads 100% safe?

You should exercise care when using a heating pad. Some can reach temperatures more than 175°F on the highest settings and microwaveable options can be very hot when initially heated. Many of the electric heating pads are designed with automatic shutoffs, but you should limit the time you use one at high settings.

Q: Can I use a heating pad while pregnant?

Yes, you can use a heating pad while pregnant to help alleviate back pain. The American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists recommends that you use the lowest temperature setting and wrap the heating pad in a towel to protect against burning. You should also limited the time you use a heating pad. Using the cold function of a heating pad can also provide relief for back pain.

Q: Is it OK to sleep with a heating pad every night?

No. You should not sleep with a heating pad every night. Even with a timer, there’s a risk of falling asleep, getting a burn, or potentially starting a fire. It’s OK to use a heating pad in bed as long as you’re awake, then take it out of bed when you’re done, and turn it off.

Q: Is there a heating pad that you can lay on?

Laying on a heating pad is a universal no-no. It traps heat and can potentially cause a burn or pose a fire hazard. 

Final thoughts on the best heating pads

Sweet relief is only a button touch away when you’ve got the best heating pad waiting for you. Whether it’s a moist heating pad, electric model, or microwavable, there’s a model that will fit your body and budget. Make sure it’s got safety features, even heat distribution, and the coverage your aching body needs. Now, it’s time to sit down, turn on the heat, and relax.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heating pads in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best rechargeable batteries for 2023, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-rechargeable-batteries/ Thu, 16 Sep 2021 17:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=393905
The Best Rechargeable Batteries
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Ditch the disposables and take charge of selecting long-lasting reusable batteries with this handy guide.

The post The best rechargeable batteries for 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The Best Rechargeable Batteries
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best bundle An open box from Pale Blue with the company's AA, AAA, 9V, and D batteries lined up in front. Pale Blue Home Conversion Kit
SEE IT

Take a comprehensive approach to battery power for your home with this kit that includes rechargeable AA, AAA, D, and 9V batteries, plus two USB chargers.

Best Overall Energizer Universal Rechargeable AA batteries product card Energizer Recharge Universal Rechargeable Batteries
SEE IT

These pioneering recycled batteries can be charged up to 1,000 times and are also available in AA, AAA, C, D, and 9V sizes.

Best USB-Rechargeable Keeppower USB rechargeable batteries product card Keeppower USB Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries
SEE IT

The included USB charger makes it easy to charge four batteries on the go.

There are some significant reasons to consider making the easy upgrade from using regular batteries to buying rechargeable batteries … easy unless you hate a good value. With the best rechargeable batteries good for hundreds or even thousands of charge cycles, making that switch could save you a lot of money over time. Follow our recommendations and say goodbye to the days when you’d need one or two batteries but be forced to rush to a store to get a big, expensive, single-use pack just to get your remote back up and running. Additionally, you can recycle your rechargeable batteries. Kinder for your budget and the planet? Sign us up. If it sounds like the best rechargeable batteries are a good proposition all around, that’s because they are, so we rounded up our recommendations, along with some chargers.

Why should I use rechargeable batteries?

On the whole, rechargeable batteries cost almost twice as much as regular batteries. However, when you consider that rechargeable batteries can be charged and recharged for years, it’s a worthwhile investment. Our winner, the Panasonic Eneloop can be charged a whopping 2,100 times. Yes, battery charging capabilities diminish over time, but the life cycle of a set of batteries will pay off after a mere handful of uses.

Then there are the issues of sustainability. According to the Sierra Club, if you use your rechargeable batteries for 150 cycles or more, the investment won’t simply be money-smart but environmentally friendly. Plus, it keeps single-use batteries out of landfills, considering less than 10 percent are recycled.

How we chose the best rechargeable batteries

To select the best rechargeable batteries, we identified the longest-lasting products with the most minimal environmental impact. We looked for rechargeable batteries that could spring into action even when stored in a drawer for years, as well as options that come equipped with the latest conveniences like USB charging that can be done directly to the battery with any compatible cable.

Differences can be very small, so it is important to look into the details. In terms of criteria, we prioritized the following:

Recharge cycles: The number of times a battery can be recharged is a key feature, though it is one that is sometimes overlooked. The comparison between expected life and cost gives a better view of value than price alone. It was an important factor in our choices.

Amp hours: If you have two batteries of the same type, but one has double the Ah (amp hours) of the other, it will run a device for twice as long. Not having to change batteries as often is simply more convenient so we have tried to choose rechargeable batteries that maximize this aspect.

Brand: Duracell, Energizer, and Panasonic dominate the rechargeable battery market. These are high-quality products, most of which are very affordable. Amazon Basics’ rechargeable batteries are also highly regarded. There are cheaper options, and we are keen to find bargains, but in this case, we have chosen to steer clear of no-name brands. Although it would be unfair to generalize, they frequently lack the performance and durability of big-name brands.

The best rechargeable batteries: Reviews & Recommendations

While regular batteries drain over time until they’re bricks, rechargeable batteries are much more energy-efficient and hold a consistent charge throughout the battery lifespan. Using rechargeable batteries keeps more in your wallet and less in landfills, so making the switch can make a difference in your household and beyond. Not sure where to start? We’ve got you.

Best overall: Energizer Recharge Universal AA Batteries

Energizer

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: Energizer came up with the world’s first battery made with other recycled batteries.

Specs

  • Comes pre-charged: Yes
  • Charge cycles: Up to 1,000 times
  • Capacity: Up to 2,000 mAh
  • Sold in: 4, 8, 16, and combo packs
  • Also available in: AAA, C, D, 9V sizes

Pros

  • Made with recycled batteries
  • Charge lasts 12 months in storage
  • Up to 5 years of usable battery life

Cons

  • Not pre-charged
  • Some chargers only charge pairs
  • Sensitive to overcharging

Energizer was the first to the market with a line of rechargeable batteries made with recycled materials—4 percent of the components inside are previously used batteries. These Energizer rechargeable batteries are made of nickel-metal hydride (NiMH), are more environmentally friendly, and can be charged up to 1,000 times at up to 2,000 mAh. They are available in quantities of four, eight, 16, and combo packs and also come in AA, AAA, C, D, and 9V sizes. While these particular rechargeable batteries do not come pre-charged and ready to use like some others in this round-up, once they are powered up, the charge lasts up to one year in storage, and you can also expect up to five years of usable battery life. One minor drawback is some customers have reported that this product can be sensitive to overcharging, so it’s best if they’re not plugged in to charge and left overnight.

Best bundle: Pale Blue Home Conversion Kit

Pale Blue

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Pale Blue’s home conversion kit provides the main batteries any household will need, plus two USB chargers to keep them ready to go.

Specs

  • Comes pre-charged? No
  • Charge cycles: Up to 1,000
  • Capacity: 1,560 mAh 
  • Sold in: Kit, with 12 AAA, eight AA, four D, four 9V batteries, and two USB chargers with four prongs
  • Also available in: AA, AAA, C, D, 9V, and AA and AAA combo kit

Pros

  • Kit comes with 28 batteries for comprehensive approach
  • Charges in under two hours
  • Comes with two four-pronged USB chargers
  • You can buy comprehensive kit or individual batteries

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Must have USB-compatible plug for chargers to work

Tired of having to root around for a battery when your alarm clock or flashlight stops working? Pale Blue’s Home Conversion Kit provides the power you need—AAA, AA, 9V, and D batteries—all in one kit, letting you take a more holistic approach. The Utah-based company’s batteries charge up to five times faster than NiMH batteries. The batteries also come with a micro-USB charging port that lets you charge four batteries at a time. And their 1,000-charge cycles put them in line with other top long-lasting rechargeable batteries.

Four AA rechargeable batteries made by Pale Blue in a plastic case, next to a four-pronged USB charger.
Jen McCaffery

The company also invests in sustainability, donating a portion of its proceeds to 1 Percent for the Planet. That said, if you don’t use a lot of batteries, this set is expensive and may lead to additional waste.

Best long-lasting: Panasonic eneloop AA Batteries

Jaime Carrillo

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: A reliable choice even if you put a pack in a drawer and forget about it for a long time.

Specs

  • Comes pre-charged: Yes
  • Charge cycles: Up to 2,100 times
  • Capacity: Up to 800 mAh
  • Sold in: 4, 8, and combo packs
  • Also available in: AAA, C, D sizes

Pros

  • Can be used worldwide
  • Thousands of charge cycles
  • Holds 70 percent charge after 10 years

Cons

  • Company advises against third-party chargers
  • Can get hot
  • A short circuit can expel gas

Panasonic’s eneloop line of rechargeable NiMH batteries is pre-charged at the factory by the wonders of solar power, which is one thoughtful choice you can make as a consumer when looking for the best rechargeable batteries for your needs. If you’re guilty of just throwing your batteries in a drawer and rarely using them, let alone charging them, you can have the satisfaction of knowing that these claim to hold up to 70 percent charge even after 10 years. You will rarely have to think about replacing these batteries, even if you feel like you are a pretty frequent user of gear that requires them. The eneloop batteries are designed to be able to be charged up to 2,100 times and recharged even if they have only been partially drained of their energy. They’re the ones that can be trusted to take a nap for the longest time, making them good candidates to sleep inside your flashlights.

Best value: AmazonBasics AA Performance Batteries

Jaime Carrillo

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: At around $1.45 each, these batteries offer great value for a bulk buyer.

Specs

  • Comes pre-charged: Yes
  • Charge cycles: Up to 1,000 times
  • Capacity: Up to 2,000 mAh
  • Sold in: 4, 8, 16, 24 packs
  • Also available in: AAA, C, D, 9V sizes

Pros

  • Priced to move
  • Useful quantity
  • Holds up to 80 percent charge after two years

Cons

  • Can fall apart
  • Reported lower-than-advertised charging cycles
  • Lower capacity than previous models

Smart shoppers may already know that buying goods in bulk quantities when they are available is a great way to get a price break on items that you want to pick up, but this always bears repeating when you’re ready to spend money. And with 24 NiMH batteries that can be charged up to 1,000 times each, this mega-pack from AmazonBasics will set you up for many years to come if you’re an average or even a prolific battery user with a lot of different gadgets that run on batteries. Priced at around $1.45 for each battery, you may even purchase some spares to share with family or friends if that’s just a few too many to conceive of having at one time. Another idea to consider is to preload gifts to those loved ones with these batteries, which are charged straight out of the package and ready to use.

Best USB-rechargeable: Keeppower USB Rechargeable Li-ion AA Batteries

Keeppower

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: Hassle-free micro-USB charging port on the battery makes this a serious universal choice.

Specs

  • Comes pre-charged: No
  • Charge cycles: Up to 1,000 times
  • Capacity: Up to 2,260 mAh
  • Sold in: 4-pack

Pros

  • Plugs into any USB port for charging
  • Blue light on battery indicates charge
  • Charges in 90 minutes

Cons

  • No cover for USB port
  • Micro-USB cables a challenge for big hands
  • Can short circuit

Keeppower’s USB Rechargeable Batteries are made of lithium-ion, which can store more energy than nickel-metal hydride batteries. This model can be charged at least 1,000 times and will last most people for many years. They are made to retain up to 90 percent power after one year and come with micro-USB ports built right into the batteries, so you don’t need to pop them into an external charger (nor do you always have to worry where said charger may actually be hiding in your house). A single battery can be charged with any micro-USB cable connected to a powered USB port, and the pack comes with a 4-in-1 charging cable (LED lights on top of the batteries indicate charging progress).

It’s important to note that while USB rechargeable batteries offer a lot of convenience, this variety of batteries also poses an inherent risk of short-circuiting, and some users have reported that this has happened to them, presumably at a most inconvenient time. You may want to consider keeping an eye on these to be mindful not to overcharge and minimize the chance of having some unwanted outcome.

Best with charger: Duracell Ion Speed 4000 Battery Charger with Batteries

Duracell

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: You don’t have to wait all day for these batteries to be powered up.

Specs

  • Comes pre-charged: Yes
  • Charge cycles: Up to 400 times
  • Capacity: Up to 2,400 mAh
  • Sold in: 4-pack
  • Also available in: AAA

Pros

  • Powers up in 1-2.5 hours
  • Charger works with any brand of battery
  • Lasts for up to 10 years in storage

Cons

  • Can only be charged 400 times
  • Charger works with just two or four batteries at a time
  • Can get hot while charging

Duracell rechargeable batteries last up to 10 years, so you can have a reasonable amount of confidence that you can open up an old pack and they won’t be duds. The included pre-charged NiMH rechargeable batteries are known to store less energy as compared to their lithium-ion counterparts, and they can only be charged about 400 times, which is a lot less than some of its leading competitors on the market. But the 4000 mW charger, which you can use for two or four batteries at a time (in matched size pairs), can get batteries up to 90 percent capacity within an hour, and it smartly powers off once the charge is completed, preventing potential problems that can arise in batteries when they are overcharged. Plus, it’s compatible with all rechargeable AA and AAA NiMH batteries. And suppose you’re a practical gift giver during the holiday season. In that case, this rechargeable batteries-charger set could also definitely make for a great stocking stuffer at a cost of about $20.

Best AA: Pale Blue AA Battery Pack

Jen McCaffery

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: Pale Blue’s batteries are designed with lithium-ion that charges five times faster than some other rechargeable batteries.

Specs

  • Comes pre-charged: No
  • Charge cycles: Up to 1,000 times
  • Capacity: Up to 1,560 mAh
  • Sold in: 4, 6, 8, and 12 packs
  • Also available in: Home Conversion Kit, AAA, C, D, 9V, AA and AAA combo kit

Pros

  • Charges in under two hours
  • Comes with a four-pronged USB charger
  • Company makes kits so you can buy a set

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Must have a USB-compatible plug for the charger to work

If you’re looking to take a more holistic approach to saving energy, Pale Blue AA batteries may be a good start. The lithium ion batteries charge up to five times faster than NiMH batteries. The batteries also come with a micro-USB charging port that lets you charge four batteries at a time. And their 1,000 charge cycles put them in line with other top long-lasting rechargeable batteries. 

Pale Blue has developed an entire line of batteries that includes AA, AAA, C, D, and PV batteries, in addition to its Home Conversion Kit above. That said, if you’re just looking for a few batteries, this set is expensive.

Best AAA: Duracell AAA Battery

Jaime Carrillo

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: Duracell’s batteries stand out for their high capacity when compared to other leading brands. As a result, they’ll power devices for longer before they need to be recharged.

Specs

  • Comes pre-charged: Yes
  • Charge cycles: Up to 400
  • Capacity: 900 mAh
  • Sold in: 2-pack, 4-pack, and 4-pack with charger
  • Also available in: AA, C, D

Pros

  • High capacity for their size
  • 10-year shelf life
  • Leak-proof design

Cons

  • Low recharging cycles

Although Duracell was by no means the first rechargeable battery maker, the company is perhaps the best known. A key claim is how long they will run between charges, which depends on the milliamp-hour capacity. While rivals typically deliver 800 mAh or 850 mAh, the Duracell AAA rechargeable batteries are rated at 900 mAh.

If long-term storage is a consideration, Duracell’s AAA batteries will hold a full charge for up to a year and are guaranteed to last up to 10 years uncharged, making them the best rechargeable AAA batteries. However, that life could be dramatically reduced in use, as they can only be recharged 400 times.

Best 9V: EBL 9V Battery and Charger

Jaime Carrillo

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: EBL 9V batteries are the best rechargeable 9V batteries because they have excellent durability, and a range of safety features that make them the ideal choice for smoke alarms, metal detectors, and walkie-talkies.

Specs

  • Comes pre-charged: Yes
  • Charge cycles: Up to 1,200
  • Capacity: 600 mAh
  • Sold in: 4-pack
  • Also available in: AA, AAA, C, D

Pros

  • Unrivaled service life
  • Pre-charged
  • No memory effect

Cons

  • Occasional reports of faulty chargers

9V rechargeable batteries like these from EBL are often used in devices like smoke alarms or portable testing and medical equipment where it is inconvenient to change batteries frequently. In these situations, the fact that lithium-ion chemistry holds a charge better than NiMH (nickel-metal hydride) batteries is a definite advantage.

These batteries are also extremely durable and capable of recharging up to 1,200 times. While a charger is included, any 9V PP3 size charger should work. The EBL 9V rechargeable batteries are also very safe, with overload, overcharging, and overheating protection. And they have low discharge in storage, holding 75 percent of capacity if unused for 3 years.

While these batteries are pre-charged, it’s only to 20 percent. According to the manufacturer, this is for shipping safety. They will actually take 3-5 charges to reach full capacity, but as lithium-ion has no memory effect, this has no impact on performance or service life.

Best C: Energizer C Battery

Jaime Carrillo

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: Energizer is one of the world’s best-known battery brands, and their rechargeable C batteries reflect the company’s reputation for performance, reliability, safety, and value.

Specs

  • Comes pre-charged: Yes
  • Charge cycles: Unknown, though typically 500 – 600
  • Capacity:  2,500 mAh
  • Sold in: 1-pack, 2-pack
  • Also available in: AA, AAA, C, D, 9V

Pros

  • Use 7 percent recycled battery material
  • Pre-charged
  • Very affordable

Cons

  • Relatively short life, though normal for C-cell batteries

Although C cells are one of the less common battery sizes, they are still found in flashlights, some bicycle headlights, and numerous toys. These are devices where you want to maximize run time, and the 2,500 mAh power of the Energizer rechargeable C battery can provide many hours of continuous power.

Although we were unable to find specific information, C-cell rechargeable batteries can typically be recharged 500 times. While they will hold a charge for a month in storage, shelf life is quite short at around 3 years. The NiMH battery chemistry can be disposed of safely but is notoriously difficult to recycle. Energizer’s use of 7 percent recycled battery material makes them the current world leaders.

Best D: Tenergy High Capacity D Battery

Jaime Carrillo

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: The best rechargeable D batteries from Tenergy deliver class-leading performance for devices that have high power requirements, and those that have lower demands but over extended periods.

Specs

  • Comes pre-charged: Yes
  • Charge cycles: Up to 1,o00
  • Capacity:  10,000 mAh
  • Sold in: 4-, 8-, and 16-packs 
  • Also available in: AA, AAA, C, D, 9V

Pros

  • Consistent high output
  • UL-certified for safety
  • Competitive pricing

Cons

  • Modest shelf life

Tenergy’s D cell rechargeable batteries are designed for what is called high-drain applications. In other words, devices like powerful flashlights make big energy demands. Many other brands are in the 3,000 to 5,000 mAh range, whereas these batteries provide 10,000 mAh. This also makes the Tenergy D cell rechargeable battery a good choice for lower drain but long-term applications such as field cameras, which might run a week or more unattended.

In addition, this battery has the ability to be recharged up to 1,000 times, with relatively low self-discharge. That said, the shelf life is only around three years. Nevertheless, Tenergy D rechargeable batteries represent good value when compared with other high-drain rivals.

Best 12V: Optima 12V Batteries RedTop

Jaime Carrillo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The durable, high-capacity Absorbent Glass Mat (AGM) battery from Optima provides consistent all-weather starting for cars, SUVs, and trucks, and aside from occasional recharging requires zero maintenance, making these the best rechargeable 12V batteries.

Specs

  • Comes pre-charged: Yes
  • Charge cycles: Typically 350 plus
  • Capacity: 800 CCA (Cold cranking amps)
  • Sold in: 1
  • Also available in: N/A

Pros

  • Suitable for a wide variety of vehicles
  • 100-minute standby
  • Spill-proof design

Cons

  • Premium price

Most people will recognize 12V batteries as the one that starts their vehicle, and the Optima 12V battery is one of the best currently available. ‘Deep Cycle’ versions of 12V rechargeable batteries can be used to power a range of items, from forklifts to other electric vehicles. These batteries typically provide 30Ah (30,000 mAh) capacity and cost around $1,000.

The Optima 12V battery is made with lead-acid technology but uses Absorbent Glass Mat (AGM) internally so there’s no fluid to spill if it gets tipped over, and it never needs to be topped up. AGM also offers excellent vibration resistance, which is particularly useful for off-road vehicles. Additionally, the Optima provides a 100-minute standby, which means it can deliver 12V power to any suitable appliance or device for that period before needing to be recharged.

The best chargers for rechargeable batteries

Best overall: Nitecore Digicharger D4 Battery Charger

Nitecore

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This universal charger works with lithium-ion and NiMH AA, AAA, and C batteries. 

Specs

  • Dimensions: ‎5.4 inches long x 3.7 inches wide x 1.4 inches high
  • Weight: 0.4 pounds
  • Volts: 240V

Pros

  • Works with a wide range of batteries
  • Made with fire-retardant material for safety
  • Compact and portable

Cons

  • May reset

If you’d prefer to have one device to recharge your batteries, the Nitecord Digicharger is a strong all-around choice. With the ability to charge most types of rechargeable batteries on the market, this smart device can sense the battery type and charge four batteries at once. This charger is also made with fire retardant materials and automatic shutoff when the maximum charge is reached. 

Best budget: Energizer Rechargeable AA and AAA Battery Charger

Energizer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This recharger from a trusted name works with both AA and AAA batteries.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 4.33 x 2.68 x 9.65 inches
  • Weight: 0.64 pounds

Pros

  • Can charge up to 4 batteries at once
  • Fast charging
  • Great for travel

Cons

  • Long charge time

This portable, plug-in charger from Energizer is easy to take with you. Able to charge up to four AAA batteries at once, this device works with AA NiMH batteries as well across a range of brands. The batteries will fully recharge in four hours; then the charger turns off automatically for safety. A light and audio signal will indicate when the full charge is reached.

What to consider when shopping for the best rechargeable batteries

When you’re considering what the best rechargeable batteries for your needs will be, take a moment to think practically about what sizes and quantities you should have for all the battery-powered gear that you keep around the house, in the garage, in the car, etc.

Note how many charge cycles are associated with the product you want to purchase. You may also think about if you want to get a small or large charger to go with your rechargeable batteries, depending on how many you need at once, or if you want just to buy a brand of rechargeables that have USB ports right on the batteries, so you can use any USB charger to give them a jolt. Here’s more of what to consider before making your selections.

Chemistry

NiCad: Most early rechargeable batteries were Nickel Cadmium (NiCad). However, cadmium is toxic, and batteries are considered hazardous waste. NiCad batteries also suffer from what’s called ‘memory effect.’ They don’t discharge completely, so each recharge is less effective, thus shortening useful life.

NiMH: Nickel Metal Hydride were the next round of batteries. They can store more energy, are not considered toxic waste, are cheaper, and suffer negligible memory effects. The majority of AA, AAA, C, and D cell rechargeable batteries available today are NiMH.

Li-ion: Lithium-ion is a more recent technology in batteries, though it is now widely available. The batteries are also non-hazardous, are capable of storing more energy than NiMH, and have no memory effect at all. However, they are more expensive and less tolerant of temperature variations.

Flow Batteries: Currently under development, this technology allows for an instantly rechargeable battery by swapping out the electrolyte fluid inside. It’s a bit like emptying a bucket of dirty water and filling it up with clean. Flow batteries are a very fast alternative to typical electric vehicle charging, but are unlikely to be practical for small rechargeable types.

Volts (V) and amps hours (Ah)

In most cases, voltage is of little concern. AA, AAA, C, and D rechargeable batteries all produce 1.2 volts. It’s simply a question of inserting the required number of batteries into the device. With other rechargeable battery types, voltage is normally made clear by the description, 9V, 12V, etc.

Amp-hours, or milliamp-hours (mAh) in the case of smaller batteries, can best be described as the amount of ‘fuel’ available. For example, with two otherwise identical AA batteries, one might be rated 900 mAh, the other 2,000 mAh. Although they are both putting out the same voltage, the latter will deliver the same level of performance for much longer before it needs to be recharged.

Recharge cycles

All batteries degrade eventually, but the speed with which they do so is an important consideration. The usual figure for comparison is the number of times a battery can be recharged. Again using AAs, as a guide, one brand might be rated as rechargeable several hundred times, while another could recharge a couple of thousand times. The latter, though initially more expensive, might actually work out to be a better value.

Although NiMH batteries have almost no memory effect, the amount of charge they hold does diminish if they are not used and recharged regularly. It is called self-discharge. In a typical example, manufacturer figures state that by the time the battery is a year old it will only retain 90 percent of its charge. By the time it is five years old, that figure has diminished to 75 percent.

Pre-charging

Some rechargeable batteries come pre-charged, while others need to be charged before using for the first time. Pre-charged rechargeable batteries are usually labeled as such on the package. If you don’t pick up pre-charged batteries, consider whether you have an appropriate charger at home or whether you should pick up a starter kit that includes one.

Lifespan

The sad truth is that rechargeable batteries start to degrade over time, meaning they can’t hold as much energy as they did initially. The rechargeable batteries we’re recommending can all be topped up roughly 1,000 times before needing to be replaced, which means they’ll last several years before you recycle them.

FAQs

Q: How much do rechargeable batteries cost?

This varies by brand, battery type, and package size, but you shouldn’t have to pay more than $35 for a four-pack of AAs. Popular AA and AAA rechargeable batteries cost between $1 and $3 each.

Q: Which rechargeable battery lasts the longest?

The longest-lasting battery can transcend eras. Our picks for best rechargeable batteries include the Panasonic eneloop AAA Batteries, which can retain up to 70 percent charge even after being stored for a decade.

Q: How many times can rechargeable batteries be recharged?

The life of a rechargeable battery varies from manufacturer to manufacturer but, in general, you won’t have to think about replacing them for a long, long time. Some products can be charged hundreds of times, while others can go through more than 1,000 cycles before they’re done.

Q: Do rechargeable batteries go bad if not used?

Yes, rechargeable batteries go bad if not used. While it’s not a bad idea to keep rechargeable batteries around, it is a bad idea not to use them once in a while. Chemicals within the batteries react together when unused and start reducing stored charge. Even if many rechargeable batteries can hold a charge for long periods, they will self-discharge if you don’t take advantage of it.

Q: Can I mix single-use and rechargeable in the same device?

While you might get a device to work with a mix of single-use and rechargeable batteries, technically, it’s better to avoid mixing and matching these different kinds of batteries. Regular batteries and rechargeables output slightly different volts of energy—the former uses 1.5 volts, while the latter uses 1.2 volts. There’s another key difference between the two: regular batteries start outputting at 1.5 volts, and that number decreases until the battery dies. In comparison, rechargeable batteries stay consistent at 1.2 volts throughout the hundreds or even thousands of charge cycles until it will no longer hold a charge.

Q: Should I recycle my old batteries?

Please recycle your rechargeable batteries—and your regular batteries, too! In some states, like California, if you throw them away, they’re actually considered to be hazardous waste. Batteries are accepted at select recycling centers (including nonprofits) and drop-off locations, including some organic groceries, Best Buy locations, and participating battery retailers, among others.

Q: How do I recharge the batteries?

In most cases, you’ll need to buy a separate charging station to recharge your batteries, but the good news is that the accessory is compatible with batteries from any company so you can mix and match.

Q: What brand of rechargeable battery is the best?

Generally speaking, Energizer, Panasonic, and Duracell consistently rank among the best rechargeable batteries in independent tests. The text above provides useful information to help you select the best rechargeable batteries of different sizes.

Q: Which rechargeable battery lasts the longest?

Some lithium-ion and Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH) rechargeable batteries can be recharged more than 2,000 times. They might also offer a storage life of up to 10 years. Li-ion versions charge faster, but NiMH is more tolerant of temperature variations and usually less expensive.

Final thoughts on the best rechargeable batteries

Time and money are valuable commodities, and rechargeable batteries help you save both. Factor in the bonus of being friendlier to the planet, and you’ve got an undeniably smart buy—a convenient, long-lasting investment that’s there when you need it. Stock up on the best rechargeable batteries, and the main thought you might have is how nice it is not to have to think about them.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best rechargeable batteries for 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heated clothing in 2023, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-heated-clothing/ Mon, 23 Oct 2023 20:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=582173
Four pieces of heated clothing dividing vertically into fourths on a plain background
Amanda Reed

Heated clothing can keep you warm during chilly morning dog walks, Friday night football games, and every occasion in between.

The post The best heated clothing in 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four pieces of heated clothing dividing vertically into fourths on a plain background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best jacket A Gobi Grit black heated work jacket on a plain background Gobi Grit Men's Heated Work Jacket
SEE IT

Working outside doesn’t mean you have to be chilly while you do it.

Best vest ORORO Men’s Lightweight Heated Vest is the best heated vest for men ORORO Men's Lightweight Heated Vest
SEE IT

This vest heats up fast to get you warm quick.

Best slippers A pair of Heated Slippers by Volt on a plain background Volt Resistance Rechargeable Heated Slippers
SEE IT

Perfect for walking the dog or fetching the morning paper.

If the temperatures are dropping and layers aren’t cutting it, consider upping your cozy game with heated clothing. Heated clothing provides covert, fireside-esque warmth while remaining sleek and lightweight. Clothing that uses thermal lining relies on your own body heat to create warmth. Heated clothing uses a network of small, heat-conducting flexible wires powered by a detachable, rechargeable battery. Both the wires and the rechargeable batteries are slim and hardly noticeable. Wearing a piece of heated clothing should feel just like wearing a regular jacket, vest, or pair of gloves. A button—usually on the glove’s cuff or front of the jacket—lets you control the temperature. The best heated clothing keeps you warm and comfy even when outside feels like the Arctic Circle.

How we chose the best heated clothing

It’s highly unlikely you can go the entire winter without going outside. Eventually, you’ll have to walk away from one of the best space heaters. However, just because you must stand out in the cold doesn’t mean you should freeze. We looked at our past heated gear coverage, rounded up our favorites, and tested new options. We also looked at critical reviews and user recommendations and conducted heavy research to separate the tepid from the hot.

The best heated clothing: Reviews & Recommendations

If you’ve considered wearing something, it most likely comes in heated form. One of our choices will channel your inner Heat Miser when you’re about to turn into Mr. Snow.

Best jacket: Gobi Grit Men’s Heated Work Jacket

Gobi

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Cotton with nylon lining
  • Max temp: 140 degrees
  • Heat settings: 3
  • Battery life: Up to 9 hours

Pros

  • 5 heating zones provide full coverage
  • Big, durable jacket with inner lining
  • Decent battery life

Cons

  • Fewer heat settings than other options

If you’re working outside in cold weather, not simply enduring it, you need something heavier than a shell, a fleece, or a hoodie. The Gobi Grit heated workwear jacket offers a heavier layer of electric warmth, ensuring you are ready to spend a full day in the cold. When things get rough, you can turn on the heat, which should last between 4.5 and 9 hours, depending on the setting. The company also makes heated hoodies for when you are enduring the cold. And, if you’re looking for something in a specific style, check out our other favorite heated jackets.

Best vest: ORORO Men’s Lightweight Heated Vest

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Nylon
  • Temperature settings: Low (100°F), Medium (120°F), High (130°F)
  • Battery life: 10 hours

Pros

  • Quick heating
  • Machine washable
  • Zippered pockets

Cons

  • Might be too tight to fit under bulkier jackets
  • Only a 10-degree difference between medium and high settings

This heated vest for men is tailored neatly to the body and is machine washable. In seconds, the heating elements warm up the vest, which can be adjusted according to your comfort. It even includes a USB charging port within the vest battery that you can use for your cell phone. If you’re looking for a heated vest for a specific activity, like riding your motorcycle, check out our complete list of heated vests.

Best gloves: SAVIOR HEAT Heated Gloves

SAVIOR HEAT

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Soft lambskin and polyester; cotton inner layer
  • Temperature range: 113°F (low)-150°F (high)
  • Battery life: 2200 mAh
  • Sizes: XS-3X
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive index finger and thumb, anti-slip material on palms

Pros

  • Soft and flexible
  • Anti-slip
  • Versatile
  • Warm even without heating element turned on

Cons

  • Not as effective in temperatures below 10°F
  • Not waterproof

Savior’s rechargeable heated gloves provide the best, most versatile protection from the cold that we’ve felt in a pair of gloves. They are well suited for a variety of outdoor adventures and reasonably priced, to boot.

In a field full of very similar products from companies with little reputation, they serve as a good example of what to look for in a pair of heated gloves. First and foremost, they’re quite warm with or without the heat turned on. They have three temperature settings, water-resistance and windproofing, heating elements that cover the back of your hand and fingertips, and touchscreen-sensitive material. Meanwhile, a leather palm ensures you won’t lose your grip when you need it the most.

They’re a bit thick but still flexible enough to shift gears on a bicycle or hold ski poles. One personal complaint about these heated gloves is that the “on” indicator light is oddly bright when it’s on in the dark—but we’ve always had issues with bright lights in darkness being distracting.

All in all, it’s exactly what you’re looking for, and you don’t need to spend too much to get it.

Best socks: Gobi Tread Heated Socks

Gobi

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Cotton
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high (113°F-140°F)
  • Approximate heat time: 12 hours
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Separate keychain remote
  • Slim battery pack
  • Long-lasting

Cons

  • Expensive

With a range of heat settings from a balmy 113 degrees to a toasty 140, these machine-washable heated socks from Gobi can last up to 12 hours on the lowest charge. The toes are designed with their own individual heat zone to keep your pinky from feeling frozen, plus the slim battery is hardly noticeable in its calf pocket or while wearing tight pants. Our favorite feature is the remote, which lets you change the heat settings without bending over. Consider our other favorite heated socks if you want to stock up on multiple pairs.

Best slippers: Volt Resistance Rechargeable Heated Slipper

Volt

SEE IT

Specs

  • Levels of heat: High, medium, and low
  • Power: Two included USB 5V VB550 batteries
  • Sizes: Small-3XL

Pros

  • Lasts for up to 12 hours on a single charge
  • Provides three levels of heat
  • Comes in multiple sizes for men and women
  • Can wear indoors and outside

Cons

  • Only come in one color
  • Heating pad may not provide a lot of warmth

Volt is one of the first brands to design heated slippers, and the company has continued to innovate since coming out with its first pair 10 years ago. These comfy slippers are heated with included rechargeable batteries. They provide three heat levels (high, medium, and low) and can last up to 12 hours on a single full charge. Best of all, you can wear them indoors or outside. The previous iteration had a faux fur lining—although we loved the extra snuggliness, the new version ditches the bulky, a-little-too-hot fur for soft fleece that doesn’t make your feet feel like a sauna. You can also get insole warmers (even battery-powered ones) to turn any house shoe into a heated slipper.

Best wearable electric blanket: Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap

Beautyrest

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Plush Fabric
  • Heat Settings: 3
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Affordable  
  • Hands-free design 
  • Heats up quickly

Cons 

  • Control panel is bulky and can be uncomfortable
  • Variations in heat

As a wearable heated blanket, the Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap lets you stay warm while your hands can type, scroll on your phone, or flip between TV channels. It sits on your shoulders just like a shawl with the added luxury of heat, which you can control through three different settings. And it’s available in 10 different designs to suit your unique style and fashion sense. It’s also fully reversible with an ultra-soft beige plush fabric on the reverse side. 

The 2-hour auto shut-off prevents overheating. Fully machine washable, this wearable heated blanket provides warmth and comfort to relax anywhere in your home. This blanket would suit teens in particular because of the range of colors and styles. Like our top budget pick, also made by Beautyrest, the controller can become quite hot if covered. Simply unplug to machine wash and keep your new favorite blanket clean. Need something a bit less wearable and a bit more shareable? Check out our other heated blanket picks.

Best hand warmers: HotHands Hand Warmer

Hot Hands

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: No
  • Temperature range: 140-160°F
  • Duration: Up to 10 hours

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • Long-lasting
  • Provides consistent heat

Cons

  • Not reusable
  • Takes 15-30 minutes to heat up

Want to save money on a handy choice from above? Any gloves are heated gloves with these disposable hand warmers from HotHands—a budget-friendly staple for keeping warm. All you need to do is shake the pack vigorously for a couple of seconds, triggering a safe chemical reaction that will lead to up to 10 hours of consistent heat in 15 to 30 minutes. Keep them in your glovebox or purse so you’ll never be caught with cold hands. If you’re looking for something reusable, we have an entire list for you.

Things to consider when buying the best heated clothing

With an entire closet’s-worth of options to choose from, what should you know when clicking “add to cart”? Here’s the short of it so you can spend more time exploring in your new hot digs:

Charging times

Heated clothing requires the use of a lithium-ion battery to power the heating elements. And, like other portable batteries and power banks, they take a bit of time to reach 100 percent. Prepare accordingly if you’re going to spend all day hitting the slopes or all night cheering in the stands. Most batteries in heated clothing also double as a portable charger in a pinch. We love killing two birds with one stone.

Machine washability

“Heated elements” plus “water” must equal “disaster” when it comes to heated clothing, right? Wrong! Most heated clothing can be washed—emphasis on the “most.” Read the care label before throwing the item in the wash, and make sure to remove the rechargeable batteries. You most definitely don’t want to run those through the washer.

Temperature

A piece of heated clothing that’s too hot leads to a sweaty person, which is not good when exposed to cold temperatures. You want to limit sweating since rapidly evaporating perspiration chills you … not exactly what you want when you’re wearing heated clothing to stay warm.

FAQs

Q: Can you wear a heated jacket in the rain?

It depends. If your jacket is machine washable or has a water-propelling shell, consider your jacket safe. Always check with the manufacturer’s care instructions before jumping in a puddle on a cold rainy day.

Q: Can you bring heated clothing on a plane?

Yes. TSA doesn’t prohibit heated clothing on planes. You only need to take electronic items larger than a cellphone or tablet from your carry-on. It’s highly unlikely the battery for your heated clothing is larger than a portable charger.

Q: Is battery-heated clothing safe?

Yes. We haven’t heard of any heated jackets or vests blowing up or catching fire. However, if you feel any sparks or electrocution, take the article off immediately, turn it off, and contact the manufacturer’s customer service line for guidance.

Final thoughts on the best heated clothing

If you’d rather not look like Randy in that one scene from A Christmas Story, consider some heated clothing for more warmth with fewer layers. The heated elements and batteries in heated clothing are thin and discreet—no one would know you’re wearing a heated jacket or vest unless you told them. And, with incredible choices like these, you’ll want to tell the entire world how cozy you are.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated clothing in 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
This Jurassic-era ‘sea murderer’ was among the first of its kind https://www.popsci.com/environment/lorrainosaurus/ Mon, 23 Oct 2023 19:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=582558
A life-sized reconstruction of the head and jaws of the oldest megapredatory pliosaur called Lorrainosaurus. The reptile is long and torpedo shaped, with closed jaws and sharp exposed teeth.
A life-sized reconstruction of the head and jaws of the oldest megapredatory pliosaur called Lorrainosaurus. Model By 10 Tons

Lorrainosaurus stalked the seas that cover present-day Europe and were the ecological equivalents of today’s killer whales.

The post This Jurassic-era ‘sea murderer’ was among the first of its kind appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A life-sized reconstruction of the head and jaws of the oldest megapredatory pliosaur called Lorrainosaurus. The reptile is long and torpedo shaped, with closed jaws and sharp exposed teeth.
A life-sized reconstruction of the head and jaws of the oldest megapredatory pliosaur called Lorrainosaurus. Model By 10 Tons

With its 19 feet-long torpedo-shaped body and long teeth the newly-described Lorrainosaurus was a fearsome mega predator. The fossilized remains of a 170-million-year-old marine reptile is the oldest-known pliosaur and dates back to the Jurassic era. The discovery is described in a study published October 16 in the journal Scientific Reports.

[Related: Millions of years ago, marine reptiles may have used Nevada as a birthing ground.]

Pliosaurs were members of a group of ocean-dwelling reptiles that are closely related to the more famous long-necked plesiosaurs. Unlike their cousins, these pliosaurs had short necks and massive skulls. From snout to tail, it was likely about 19 feet long and very little is known about the plesiosaurs from this time.

“Famous examples, such as Pliosaurus and Kronosaurus–some of the world’s largest pliosaurs–were absolutely enormous with body-lengths exceeding 10m [32 feet]. They were ecological equivalents of today’s killer whales and would have eaten a range of prey including squid-like cephalopods, large fish and other marine reptiles. These have all been found as preserved gut contents,” study co-author and Uppsala University paleontologist Benjamin Kear said in a statement.

An illustration of tje oldest megapredatory pliosaur, Lorrainosaurus, in the sea that covered what is now northern France 170 million years ago. The reptile has large jaws that are open, bearing two rows of very sharp teeth and four pectoral fins.
The oldest megapredatory pliosaur, Lorrainosaurus, in the sea that covered what is now northern France 170 million years ago. CREDIT: Joschua Knüppe

Pliosaurs first emerged over 200 million years ago and remained relatively small players in marine ecosystems. Following a landmark restructuring of the marine predator ecosystem in the early to middle Jurassic era (about 175 to 171 million years ago) they reached apex predator status.

“This event profoundly affected many marine reptile groups and brought mega predatory pliosaurids to dominance over ‘fish-like’ ichthyosaurs, ancient marine crocodile relatives, and other large-bodied predatory plesiosaurs,” study co-author and paleobiologist at the Institute of Paleobiology of the Polish Academy of Sciences Daniel Madzia said in a statement.

The fossils in this study were originally found in 1983 in northeastern France, but were recently analyzed by an international team of paleontologists who identified this new pliosaur genus called Lorrainosaurus. The teeth and bones represent what was once a complete skeleton that decomposed and was spread along the ancient seafloor by scavengers and ocean currents. 

[Related: The planet’s first filter feeder could be this extinct marine reptile.]

Lorrainosaurus was one of the first truly huge pliosaurs. It gave rise to a dynasty of marine reptile mega-predators that ruled the oceans for around 80 million years,” Sven Sachs, a study co-author and paleontologist from the Naturkunde-Museum Bielefeld in Germany, said in a statement.

Other than a short report published in 1994, these fossils remained obscure until the team reevaluated the specimens. Finding Lorrainosaurus’ remains indicates that the reign of gigantic mega-predatory pliosaurs likely began earlier than paleontologists previously thought. These giants were also locally responsive to the major ecological changes in the marine environments that covered present day Europe during the early Middle Jurassic.

Lorrainosaurus is thus a critical addition to our knowledge of ancient marine reptiles from a time in the Age of Dinosaurs that has as yet been incompletely understood,” said Kear.

The post This Jurassic-era ‘sea murderer’ was among the first of its kind appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Voyager probes get virtual tune-up to keep decades-long missions going and going https://www.popsci.com/technology/voyager-software-thruster-update/ Mon, 23 Oct 2023 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=582451
Artist rendition of Voyager 1 in space
Voyager 1 and 2 have traveled through space for nearly 50 years. NASA/JPL-Caltech

Voyager 1 and 2 received a software update and thruster tweak from 12 to 15 billion miles away.

The post Voyager probes get virtual tune-up to keep decades-long missions going and going appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Artist rendition of Voyager 1 in space
Voyager 1 and 2 have traveled through space for nearly 50 years. NASA/JPL-Caltech

Against all odds and expectations, both Voyager 1 and Voyager 2 are still going strong after nearly half a century of hurtling through—and far past—the solar system. To help boost the potential for the probes’ continued operations, engineers at NASA’s Jet Propulsion Laboratory have beamed out two software updates across the billions of miles separating them from the historic spacecraft. If successful, the pair of interstellar travelers could gain at least another five years’ worth of life, if not more.

On October 20, NASA announced plans to transmit a software patch to protect Voyager 1 and 2 against a glitch that occurred within the former’s system last year. In May 2022, NASA started noticing inaccurate readings coming from Voyager 1’s attitude articulation and control system (AACS). A few months later, engineers determined the AACS was accidentally writing commands into memory instead of actually performing them.

Although engineers successfully resolved an original data issue within Voyager 1 in 2022, the new patch will hopefully ensure such a problem won’t arise again in either probe. Receiving the patch will take over 18 hours to reach transmitters; Voyager 2 will get the patch first to serve as a “testbed for its twin” in case of unintended consequences like accidentally overwriting essential code. Given Voyager 1 and Voyager 2 are respectively 15 billion and 12 billion miles from Earth, engineers consider the farther craft’s data more valuable, as it still remains the farthest traveling human-made object. The NASA-JPL team will issue a command on October 28 to test the patch’s efficacy.

[Related: The secret to Voyagers’ spectacular space odyssey.]

The second planned tune-up for Voyager 1 and 2 involves the small thrusters responsible for controlling the probes’ communication antennas. According to NASA, spacecraft can generally rotate in three directions—left and right, up and down, as well as wheellike around a central axis. During these movements, propellant automatically flows through incredibly narrow “inlet tubes” to maintain the antennas’ contact with Earth.

But each time the propellant is used, miniscule residue can stick within the inlet tubings—while not much at first, that buildup is becoming problematic after the Voyager probes’ (many) decades’ of life. To slow the speed of buildup, engineers have edited the probes’ operational commands to allow both craft the ability to rotate nearly 1 degree farther in each available direction. This will reduce how often their thrusters need to fire. When engineers do need to enable thrusters, they now plan to fire them for longer periods of time, thus reducing the overall number of usages. 

[Related: How is Voyager’s vintage technology still flying?]

“This far into the mission, the engineering team is being faced with a lot of challenges for which we just don’t have a playbook,” Linda Spilker, Voyager mission project scientist, said via NASA’s update. “But they continue to come up with creative solutions.”

Experts estimate both the fuel lines and software adjustments could extend the Voyager program’s lifespan by another five years. According to NASA, however, “additional steps in the coming years to extend the lifetime of the thrusters even more.”

The post Voyager probes get virtual tune-up to keep decades-long missions going and going appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Scammers busted in India for impersonating Amazon and Microsoft tech support https://www.popsci.com/technology/amazon-microsoft-india-tech-support-scam/ Mon, 23 Oct 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=582278
The scammers in question used a combination of cold calls and pop-up ads to target individuals.
The scammers in question used a combination of cold calls and pop-up ads to target individuals. DepositPhotos

The schemes impacted over 2,000 people globally.

The post Scammers busted in India for impersonating Amazon and Microsoft tech support appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The scammers in question used a combination of cold calls and pop-up ads to target individuals.
The scammers in question used a combination of cold calls and pop-up ads to target individuals. DepositPhotos

Tech support scams are some of the most common methods of fraud, particularly targeting older demographics. Usually imitating a legitimate company’s customer service or IT department, tech support scammers trick victims into granting access to their computers, which they then use to extract payments. Last year, over 32,000 victims reported a cumulative loss of nearly $806.5 million stemming from just such fraud schemes. At least some reprieve may be coming for consumers, thanks to a collaborative effort by Microsoft, Amazon, and the Indian government.

On October 19, India’s Central Bureau Investigation (CBI) announced the completion of Operation Chakra-II, which involved 76 raids targeting illegal call centers located within several states across the country. According to an official CBI post on X, cyber criminals impersonated both Amazon and Microsoft customer support representatives, impacting over 2,000 customers—mostly in the US, but also in Australia, Canada, Germany, Spain, and the UK.

[Related: Fakes, rumors, and scams: PopSci’s fall issue is unreal.]

The scammers in question used a combination of cold calls and pop-up ads claiming to detect technical issues on a the victims’ computers and instructing them to call a toll-free number. After a variable amount of cajoling, scammers were then sometimes granted remote access to an individual’s computer. Then, they convinced some users to pay hundreds of dollars for unnecessary services under the “pretense of non-existing problems,” per the CBI.

In a blog post last week, Amazon confirmed Operation Chakra-II marked the first time the company collaborated with Microsoft to combat tech support fraud. “We are pleased to join forces with Microsoft, and we believe actionable partnerships like these are critical in helping protect consumers from impersonation scams,” Kathy Sheehan, vice president and associate general counsel of Amazon’s Business Conduct & Ethics, said via the announcement. Sheehan went on to stress “we cannot win this fight alone,” and encouraged other Big Tech industry heavyweights to “join us as a united front against criminal activity.”

“We firmly believe that partnerships like these are not only necessary but pivotal in creating a safer online ecosystem and in extending our protective reach to a larger number of individuals,” Amy Hogan-Burney, Microsoft’s Associate General Counsel for Microsoft Cybersecurity Policy & Protection, echoed in a separate statement.

Microsoft Tutorial on Tech Support Scams

Microsoft currently hosts a site reviewing the most popular versions of tech support scams, along with providing users with means to report and combat bad actors. According to a tutorial video from the Microsoft Security team, Microsoft reiterates that no reputable tech company will ever contact users via phone, email, or text message claiming to detect issues with a device. 

As Microsoft’s video also explains, scammers often also rely on scare tactics to pressure victims into falling prey to their schemes. Once access is granted to a device, the con artists can plant malware or even steal users’ personal information. Both regularly checking for devices’ software updates, as well as reporting fraud attempts can help deter and combat scammers.

In addition to tried-and-true scamming techniques, fraud rings are increasingly turning to more sophisticated methods while targeting victims. Earlier this year, a mother in Arizona reported scammers utilized AI voice-cloning technology to mimic her daughter’s voice while attempting to extract a fake kidnapping ransom.

The post Scammers busted in India for impersonating Amazon and Microsoft tech support appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to see which websites are sharing your data with Instagram https://www.popsci.com/diy/third-party-data-instagram/ Mon, 23 Oct 2023 16:23:01 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=582387
Instagram menu showing the Activity off-Meta technologies settings
Now you can know who's sharing data with Instagram about you. Screenshot: Instagram

Privacy setting allow users to manage what other websites share with Meta about you.

The post How to see which websites are sharing your data with Instagram appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Instagram menu showing the Activity off-Meta technologies settings
Now you can know who's sharing data with Instagram about you. Screenshot: Instagram

Meta, possibly in an effort to convince people it’s a transparent company, just equipped Instagram with a new feature that lets users know what it learns about them through other websites. Unfortunately, getting that information is not as easy as Meta wants you to believe.

Other than what you post and how you interact with the platform, Instagram’s parent company also gathers data about you through other sites and organizations that use the company’s products and services. That means that if you buy something from a vendor that uses Meta Pixel on their website, for example, Instagram will know about it. 

With this new feature, you can see who’s sharing your information, delete the data already in Instagram’s hands, and prevent any future sharing. That may sound like a lot of work, but we tried it and made mistakes so you don’t have to. 

How to find out what other sites share with Instagram about you

You can learn all the hot gossip other sites tell Meta about you on the Activity off-Meta technologies menu. This option was once only available to Facebook users, but it’s now an integral part of the company’s Account Center, which includes Instagram. 

[Related: How to make your social media posts truly private]

1. On the Instagram app, open your profile by tapping the silhouette of a person in the bottom right corner of your screen. Go to the hamburger menu (three lines) in the top right corner, choose Settings and privacy, and then Accounts Center

On the web, log into Instagram, click More in the bottom left corner of your screen, and go to Settings. There, click Accounts Center

Instragram menu showing how to get to Meta's account center
On the Accounts Center menu you can tweak details about all your Meta accounts. Screenshot: Instagram

2. From here on out, the options are the same no matter if you are on your phone or your computer. Go to Your information and permissions and then to Your activity off Meta technologies

Meta's Account Center menu on Instagram
Facebook users already had the option to see which third parties were sharing information with the platform. Screenshot: Instagram

On the next screen, you’ll be able to learn a bit more about the type of data Instagram receives from third parties when you interact with them. This data can be a number of things, such as when you opened an app, logged into it using Facebook or Instagram, added an item to your cart, bought something, or even made a donation. Meta says this information doesn’t include health or financial data, or other sensitive details like date of birth or passwords.  

3. Under the What you can do heading, go to Recent activity to see all the sites sharing your information with Instagram. You may need to enter your Instagram password to continue. You’ll see a list of companies, and you can click each one to learn more details. 

Instagram menu showing the Activity off-Meta technologies settings
Now you can know who’s sharing your data with Instagram. Screenshot: Instagram

Here’s the tricky part, though: when you click the number of interactions the company has shared with Meta, you won’t see a detailed account of the interactions the site shared with Instagram. Instead, you’ll see more information and a button you can hit to Download activity details.

The notification showed when you open the Activity Off-Meta technologies menu
Meta does a good job at explaining what third party data might be, but remember that this list is not exhaustive—it only includes examples. Screenshot: Instagram

You’d think that by that they mean downloading only the details of your interactions with other apps and websites, but you’d be wrong. You’ll actually need to request to download a file that contains your entire Instagram account information, and you still won’t find what exactly other sites shared about you. 

4. This leaves you with nothing to do except cut the data flow off at the source. Back in the Recent activity menu, you can click or tap Clear previous activity or Disconnect specific activity. The first one will remove everything Instagram has on you from third parties, but it won’t prevent the same sites from continuing to share information in the future.

To do a thorough job, start by choosing Disconnect specific activity and picking a site you want to cut off. It’s counterintuitive to start here, as it’s the second option, but clearing the activity will prevent you from disconnecting third parties, as their names and the option to disconnect will disappear. That means you’ll need to wait until they appear on the menu again to block them once and for all. 

Activity off-Meta technologies menu showing dark pattern
This is a dark pattern: you’re most likely to click the button at the top, but doing so will prevent you from blocking the data sharing between external sites and Instagram. Screenshot: Instagram

5. The next screen will show you a list of the websites sharing data with Instagram. Select the ones you want to sever ties with by checking the circle next to their name, then hit Continue

The Disconnect Specific Activity menu on Instagram showing an entry from Sephora.
You can disconnect sites one by one, but it’s easier (and faster) to cut sites off from the Disconnect specific activity menu. Screenshot: Instagram

6. The next screen will show you more information about severing ties between that third party activity and your account, including the fact that doing so might log you out of that external website if you used your Instagram account to log in. It also clarifies that you’ll still see ads from the site, albeit less personalized, and Meta will continue to receive information, but it just won’t be associated with you. Hit Confirm when you’re done and repeat the process with all the sites you don’t want sharing your data. 

[Related: How to go incognito on these 6 popular apps]

Back on the Recent activity menu, you can also tap on the name of a company and select Disconnect. This, of course, requires you to disconnect sites one by one, which is not as efficient as doing it by hitting the Disconnect specific activity button.   

Keep in mind that disconnecting these sites doesn’t mean they won’t keep sharing information with Instagram—it just means the data will be anonymized, so not tied to you specifically. This is something a lot of companies do to protect users’ privacy, but it’s also worth knowing there are studies claiming data can never be truly anonymized, especially when certain data points, like location, are involved

7. Now it’s time to delete what Instagram already has on you by clicking or tapping Clear previous activity. Continue by choosing your account and hitting Clear. Confirm your choice again by selecting Clear previous activity

The Clear third party activity menu on Instagram
Finish by making sure the data Instagram already has on you from third parties is wiped out. Screenshot: Instagram

As you can see, Instagram’s new way of managing third-party activity is, well, disappointing. Navigating the new menu is incredibly frustrating, as it’s mined with dark patterns, and even after doing a deep dive, we still don’t know what third-party websites shared about us, and we couldn’t prevent them from sharing more information in the future. Certainly not the best experience.

The post How to see which websites are sharing your data with Instagram appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best leaf mulchers in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-leaf-mulcher/ Tue, 23 Mar 2021 17:13:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=278407
Spend less time raking and more time composting with the help of one of the best leaf mulchers.

We'll help you find the best leaf mulcher to tackle your fall cleanup.

The post The best leaf mulchers in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Spend less time raking and more time composting with the help of one of the best leaf mulchers.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The WORX 12 TRIVAC 3-in-1 Electric Leaf Blower/Mulcher/Yard Vacuum sitting on top of a pile of leaves WORX 12 Amp TRIVAC 3-in-1 Electric Leaf Blower/Mulcher/Yard Vacuum
SEE IT

This 3-in-1 model lets you mulch, vacuum, and blow your leaves with one powerful tool.

Best gas landworks gas powered leaf mulcher Landworks Mini Wood Chipper Shredder Mulcher
SEE IT

If you need to chop wood, this machine can handle branches up to 3 inches in diameter.

Best budget BLACK+DECKER Leaf Blower & Leaf Vacuum BLACK+DECKER 3 in 1 Electric Leaf Blower
SEE IT

This option is great for homeowners looking for a basic, wallet-friendly mulcher.

Fall is gorgeous, but it’s also a grueling period for yard work, so a good leaf mulcher can come in handy. As stunning foliage falls from the trees, homeowners are faced with the Sisyphean task of clearing their yard of endlessly dropping debris. This step of lawn maintenance, important in preventing disease from hijacking your grass under the cover of wet leaves during the winter months, will be much easier if you have appropriate outdoor power equipment for the job. We’re here to help you identify the best leaf mulchers to clear your lawn and dispose of autumn debris.

How we chose the best leaf mulchers

Depending on your location, leaf disposal can be tricky. Some towns have a service for leaf pickup, but it often comes with a fee attached and the responsibility of tracking down a specific type of leaf bag. Other towns have a set location for residents to drop off their bagged leaves, which can be difficult if you don’t have a pickup truck to transport the hefty bags. 

A better option? Make leaf mulching a part of your yard maintenance. The process simply involves loading the leaves into a leaf shredder that cuts them up into tiny pieces, greatly reducing the heft of the load. Once shredded, leaves can be mulched around your plants and trees to retain moisture, protect from frost, and suppress weeds. 

Once you find the best leaf mulcher for your lawn care, disposing of leaves is a breeze. In compiling our recommendations, we looked at top brands and weighed a range of factors, including versatility, power, mulch ratio, ease of use, and price.

The best leaf mulchers: Reviews & Recommendations

Like any piece of outdoor power equipment, like a cordless leaf blower, an overwhelming number of leaf mulchers with different features are available for purchase. A little bit of research can ensure that your machine is tailored to your specific lawn care needs and worthy of space in your storage shed. We’ve gathered our recommendations and provided some tips below to consider when making your purchase.

Best overall: WORX 12 Amp TRIVAC 3-in-1 Electric Leaf Blower/Mulcher/Yard Vacuum

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Handheld
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Voltage: 120V
  • Mulch ratio: 16:1
  • Weight: 9 lbs.

Pros

  • Powerful
  • Contains mulcher, blower, and vacuum
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Some users had problems with attachments

Why invest in three different tools when you can blow your leaves, mulch, and vacuum with one device? WORX 12 Amp TRIVAC 3-in-1 Electric Leaf Blower/Mulcher/Yard Vacuum is lightweight at 9 pounds, and changes functions with the turn of a dial. The lightweight, handheld tool features a metal impeller with a shredder blade that provides a 16:1 leaves-to-mulch ratio. Once the mulch is collected, the bag is easy to detach for removal. This tool also provides a powerful 600 CFM (cubic feet per minute) for leaf blowing and switches between two speeds. So ditch the rake and dispense with your leaves quickly and easily with this versatile option.

Best electric: WORX 12 Amp 3-in-1 Electric Blower/Mulcher/Vacuum

WORX

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Handheld
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Voltage: 120V
  • Mulch ratio: 18:1
  • Weight: 9.3 lbs.

Pros

  • Versatile with mulcher, blower, and vacuum
  • Handheld
  • High mulch ratio
  • Environmentally friendly

Cons

  • Some users say suction is weak

This corded electric three-in-one model is lightweight but powerful. A simple switch quickly flips from blower to vacuum to mulching mode, and two speeds are available to accommodate different functions. It boasts an 18:1 mulching ratio, consolidating 18 bags of leaves into just one. As an electric device, this model is muted and environmentally friendly. 

Best gas: Landworks Mini Wood Chipper Shredder Mulcher

Landworks

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standalone
  • Power: Gas
  • Voltage: N/A
  • Mulch ratio: 15:1
  • Weight: 9.3 lbs.

Pros

  • Can handle heavy branches
  • Powerful engine
  • Professional quality

Cons

  • Expensive
  • No other tools
  • Not environmentally friendly

This Landworks machine has a mulching ratio of 15:1, and is able to tackle branches of up to 3 inches in diameter. You can adjust the discharge chute anywhere between 90 to 145 degrees for easy and efficient disposal. The 7HP engine takes 87 octane gas with no ethanol. This mulcher doesn’t have the versatility but can handle harder jobs.

Best standalone: SuperHandy Leaf Mulcher

SuperHandy

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standalone
  • Power: Electric
  • Voltage: 120V
  • Mulch ratio: 17:1
  • Weight: 46.5 lbs.

Pros

  • Can handle branches, leaves, and grass
  • Environmentally friendly
  • Affordable
  • High mulch ratio

Cons

  • Some users said it gets clogged
  • May not last long

The SuperHandy Leaf Mulcher is a smaller version of the SuperHandy Wood Chipper. While the mulcher can’t handle the sizable branches that the Wood Chipper can, it comes at a fraction of the price and is perfect for yearly leaf maintenance. It has a high 17:1 mulching ratio, and its electric belt-driven motor is quiet and eco-friendly. 

Best heavy-duty: Patriot Products 14 Amp Electric Wood Chipper/Leaf Shredder

Patriot Products

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standalone
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Voltage: 110V
  • Mulch ratio: N/A
  • Weight: 95 lbs.

Pros

  • Chops branches up to 2 ½ inches in diameter
  • Environmentally friendly
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Only one function
  • Heavy

This Patriot Products wood chipper/leaf shredder offers versatile performance for various levels of yard maintenance. A larger piece of outdoor power equipment, this electric mulcher remains smooth and quiet as it shreds leaves and chips branches up to 2 ½ inches in diameter. Simply slide your debris into the top of the feeder, and the mulch spits out the side.

Best budget: BLACK+DECKER 3 in 1 Electric Leaf Blower

BLACK+DECKER

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Handheld
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Voltage: 120V
  • Mulch ratio: 10:1
  • Weight: 8.1 pounds

Pros

  • Easy on the wallet
  • Includes mulcher, vacuum, and blower
  • Environmentally friendly

Cons

  • Low mulch ratio
  • Some users say it didn’t last long

This blower has options for more attachments, but even the bare-bones model is a blower, vacuum, and mulcher all in one. The corded electric blower is lightweight and easy to use, and it shreds 10 bags of leaves into one. This option is great for homeowners looking for a basic, wallet-friendly mulcher. 

Things to consider when buying the best leaf mulchers

With so many variations of leaf mulchers available, first narrow your options down by deciding what style mulching machine you’re looking for: handheld or stand-alone. Stand-alone mulchers are stationary machines into which you feed collected leaves for shredding. You can carry a handheld machine around the yard, and vacuum leaves straight into the machine. Handheld mulchers usually function as a leaf blower as well.

Also, think about what power source is best for you. A gas-powered mulcher is an excellent choice if you want more power and want to avoid plugging in the device or charging batteries, but that comes at the cost of a heavier machine. An electric or battery-powered mulcher leaves you at the mercy of your power source (so maybe keep a portable power station handy)—but can be significantly lighter and easier to maneuver. 

Lastly, pay attention to the mulching ratio of your leaf shredder. The mulch ratio basically tells you how much the shredder will cut down your leaves: the highest ratio of 18:1 will reduce 18 bags of leaves to fit into one bag. When choosing the best leaf mulchers for your needs, consider how many bags of leaves you typically have in the fall and what you plan to do with them after they’re shredded—larger shreds are fine for mulching around your trees, while smaller shreds are better for composting.

Electric vs. gas

A handheld mulching machine gives you the benefit of turning the two steps of gathering the leaves and then mulching them into one step. Most models can blow, vacuum, and shred, so one swift trip around the yard completes the entire cleanup. 

Electric leaf mulchers are significantly lighter than their gas-powered counterparts. Collecting leaves is done with relative ease, and while you’ll need a battery or connection to a power source, you can use a long extension cord or keep an extra battery charging.

For extended use without a power cord or having to stop and recharge batteries, gas-powered mulchers keep going for a lot longer than an electric model. Gas-powered models tend to be more expensive than electric, but you get what you pay for with more power and faster cleanup—just remember to keep extra gas in the shed so you can start with a full tank. 

Handheld vs. standalone leaf mulchers

The majority of the best leaf mulchers are handheld and come with blower and vacuum functions, but a standalone leaf mulcher has only one function: shred leaves. This is perfect for handling heavier loads, and if you go for a higher-end model, you’re ultimately purchasing a wood chipper that can even deal with small tree limbs. We found smaller and heavy-duty models for more extreme yard work. 

Versatility

If you’re willing to fork over some more green for a more versatile machine, a heavier-duty leaf shredder can reduce twigs, branches, and acorns. This is optimal for cleaning up debris after storms and heavy winds knock limbs into your yard. These powerful devices can make yard maintenance quick and efficient and leave you with aesthetically pleasing mulch for your landscaping.

Price

If your fall yard maintenance tends to be a small and simple job, the best leaf mulcher for you shouldn’t have to break the bank. While cheap mulchers often coincide with a smaller capacity for collection and a less powerful engine, we’ve found inexpensive models on the market that are still strong and efficient. 

FAQs

Q: What leaves are not good for compost?

The leaves that won’t compost well are higher in lignin, a polymer that makes them feel rigid, almost wooden. High-lignin leaves include those found on beech trees, oaks, and sweet cherry trees. Also, avoid black walnut, eucalyptus, and poison ivy leaves, as they can be toxic. The best leaves for mulching have high levels of calcium and nitrogen and are low in lignin, like poplar, maple, and ash leaves.

Q: What is the best way to shred leaves?

If you don’t have many trees around the yard and your fall blanket is minimal, a lawn mower could work as a leaf shredder in a pinch—simply mow over the leaves and collect them in the mower’s bag attachment. However, with several price-friendly options on the market, it’s better to take the easier route and buy a leaf mulcher. A specialized leaf vacuum and mulcher does a more thorough job picking up the leaves and shreds smaller than a mower can. 

Q: What is the best 3-in-1 blower, vacuum, and mulcher?

DeWalt and Husqvarna are both popular outdoor equipment brands, and each has excellent 3-in-1 leaf machines, but our favorite is the WORX WG518, a 12-amp 2-speed leaf blower, vacuum, and mulcher. This is a corded model, so you’ll need a power source, but in return it’s lightweight and easy to carry. Its mulch ratio is on the higher end at 16:1, so if you have a large amount of leaves to consolidate, this machine does the trick. 

Final thoughts on the best leaf mulchers

Finding the best leaf mulcher to clean up your lawn this fall will take a lot of heavy lifting, and raking, off your shoulders. The 3-in-1 models are especially efficient and can operate as a leaf blower, vacuum, and mulcher all in one. Removing the bed of leaves from your yard is an essential part of your yard maintenance schedule, as it keeps the leaves from molding and suffocating your lawn or becoming a breeding ground for debris. Find yourself the best leaf mulcher for your needs, and in no time, you’ll have your yard cleaned up and ready for next spring.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best leaf mulchers in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best Fitbits for kids in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-fitbits-for-kids/ Mon, 06 Jun 2022 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=447741
Fitbits for kids sliced header
Stan Horaczek

These full-featured fitness trackers can endure the rigors of childhood.

The post The best Fitbits for kids in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Fitbits for kids sliced header
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Ace 3 is the best overall Fitbit for kids. Ace 3
SEE IT

It’s made specifically for children. 

Best for style Fitbit Luxe is the best Fitbit for kids for style. Fitbit Luxe
SEE IT

Its good looks make it appealing to a wide audience.

Best for teens The Inspire 3 is the best Fitbit for teens. Inspire 3
SEE IT

Get slightly older kids some more advanced features.

Fitbits for kids can be a great way to encourage children to develop healthy habits and active lifestyles from an early age. Beyond serving as motivational tools to get moving, they also help you monitor how much exercise your child is getting. Some even offer kid-specific features to gamify movement, making it fun to get active. Fitbits don’t just monitor exercise, though. They can help keep track of stress levels, monitor heart rate, store music, receive phone notifications, and even track sleep. No matter your child’s age, there’s something for them on our list of the best Fitbits for kids. 

How we chose the best Fitbits for kids

When selecting the best Fitbits for kids, we started by comparing the entire Fitbit lineup, many of which we have actually reviewed. We focused on models offering kid-friendly features, reasonable pricing, and designs that appeal to a younger crowd. While one model is specifically made for kids, other models can appeal to slightly older children and teens with different needs. We also included a Fiitbit alternative if you want a budget-friendly fitness tracker outside the Fitbit brand.

The best Fitbits for kids: Reviews & Recommendations

A Fitbit, one of the leading brands of activity trackers, can motivate your child to get the recommended daily amount of exercise. According to the Centers for Disease Control, kids from ages 6 to 17 need about 60 minutes of physical movement per day to stay healthy. Fitbits can easily help track those minutes to ensure adequate movement. Below are the best Fitbits for kids, no matter what their current level of activity may be.

Best overall: Ace 3

Fitbit

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a touchscreen display, eight days of battery life, impressive memory, and Parent and Kid View, this is the obvious choice for most young ones.

Specs

  • Ages: 6+
  • Water resistance: Up to 164 feet
  • Battery life: Up to 8 days
  • Charge time: 2 hours

Pros

  • 8 days of battery life
  • Bedtime and alarms
  • Parent and Kid View
  • Water-resistant 
  • Interchangeable bands 

Cons

  • Pricey for young kids
  • No heart rate monitoring

The only Fitbit specifically made for children, the Ace 3 has many great features relevant to young ones. With eight days of battery life, a touchscreen display, bedtime alerts, reminders to move, a step counter, and gentle alarms to wake your kids up, this Fitbit comes fully stocked.

One of the most kid-friendly aspects of the Ace 3 is the fun virtual badges, animated clock faces, and personalized avatars that add a healthy sense of competition and play to their activity. Your kids can also personalize their Fitbit with interchangeable accessories, like Minions bands, for an added fee. 

There’s both parent and kid view, and it’s also water-resistant up to 164 feet, so they can even wear it while swimming. It’s by no means cheap, but with all the bells and whistles, we think it’s worth the investment. 

Best for teens: Inspire 3

Fitbit

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Easy to use and accessible for teens with a one-year premium trial included, this is a great starter tracker for young adults looking to track calories, heart rate, steps, and more at home and at school.

Specs

  • Ages: 13+
  • Water resistance: Up to 164 feet
  • Battery life: Up to 10 days
  • Charge time: 2 hours

Pros

  • Easy to use and accessible
  • Affordable 
  • Up to 10 days of battery
  • Six-month Fitbit Premium membership included
  • Competitive games

Cons

  • Screen may be hard to read in the sunlight
  • Band wears after some time

The Inspire 3 is Fitbit’s most accessible and easy-to-use fitness tracker, which makes it a solid option for teens. New Fitbit users get a six-month free trial of Fitbit Premium so they can have access to guided meditations, exercises, and accountability to make their fitness and health journey even easier. 

The Inspire 3 connects to a smartphone, providing call, text, and app notifications right on your teen’s wrist. That means they won’t have as much of an excuse for ignoring your calls or texts. Come nighttime, it offers a sleep mode to pause notifications and turns the screen off so that their sleep isn’t interrupted.

With its sleek design and simple interface, Inspire 3 is a great starter Fitbit for tracking steps, heart rate, distance, calories, food logging, menstrual health, sleep, and more. The battery lasts up to 10 days, and there are even fun games in the app like Get Fit Bingo, for more competitive-minded teens.

Best for style: Fitbit Luxe

Fitbit

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Fashion-forward and stylish, the Fitbit Luxe features a menstrual health tracker, several stress management tools, and sleep aids useful for teens.

Specs

  • Ages: 13+
  • Water resistance: Up to 164 feet
  • Battery life: Up to 5 days
  • Charge time: 2 hours

Pros

  • Call/text notifications 
  • Connects to phone GPS to track pace and distance
  • Menstrual health tracker
  • Stylish design
  • Stress management features

Cons

  • Pricey
  • Website says the battery lasts five days, but depletes quicker depending on use

Swimproof, slim, and fashion-forward, the Fitbit Luxe is the perfect tracker for teens who want to be more hands-on (or is that wrists-on?) with their health. It not only takes care of all-day tracking but also connects to a phone’s GPS to track pace and distance and allows wearers to stay connected with friends via call and text notifications. 

If your teenager has periods, they can track ovulation, record period symptoms, and log flow with the built-in menstrual health tracker, which can help them feel informed about their menstrual health. It also has several stress-management features, such as guided breathing, to help with mood and stress levels. We want to note that teenage girls have enough societal pressure, and we love that Fitbit’s team is committed to helping teenage girls stay healthy and happy without focusing on striving for perfection.

It’s not the cheapest option, but the Special Edition gorjana Soft Gold Stainless Steel Parker Link Bracelet doubles as a bracelet that goes with every outfit, making the perfect birthday or holiday gift!

Best with GPS: Fitbit Charge 6

Fitbit

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This Fitbit with GPS can track over 40 workouts, including swimming, and has a built-in GPS system for more accurate location and distance information during workouts. 

Specs

  • Ages: 13+
  • Water resistance: Up to 164 feet
  • Battery life: Up to 7 days
  • Charge time: 2 hours

Pros

  • Comfortable to wear 24/7
  • Built-in GPS with access to Google Maps
  • Bigger touchscreen display 
  • Heart rate tracker
  • Built-in YouTube Music controls

Cons

  • Music controls require a subscription
  • Expensive compared to other options

Fitbit’s most advanced fitness and health tracker yet, this Fitbit with GPS comes with tons of elite features in a slim and lightweight design. It features an on-wrist ECG app, step tracker, calorie tracker, automatic exercise recognition, swim-tracking, and sleep monitoring. It also allows your kids to set goals and buzzes when they hit certain heart rate zones. Plus, the main draw: built-in GPS for tracking routes and workouts.

The built-in GPS allows for much more accurate data related to distance and pace during workouts. The Charge 6 also comes with Google Maps, which provides turn-by-turn directions right on their wrist, giving you peace of mind that your child won’t get lost on a run or bike ride.

Fitbit also included YouTube Music controls on the Charge 6, though you will need a subscription to access that feature.

Best Fitbit alternative: Amazfit Band 7

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This budget-friendly Fitbit alternative offers accurate heart rate data, movement goals, and a vibrant display without the subscription fee.

Specs

  • Ages: 13+
  • Water resistance: Up to 164 feet
  • Battery life: Up to 18 days
  • Charge time: 2 hours

Pros

  • Long battery life
  • Accurate heart rate data
  • No subscription required to access all features
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Touchscreen is finicky
  • Lack of buttons takes time to get used to

While Fitbit makes some excellent fitness trackers, you’ll need a subscription to access all features and data. For many, that makes Fitbits for kids a less-than-ideal choice. The Amazfit Band 7 is a great alternative in part thanks to the lack of a subscription but also due to the initial budget-friendly price. You’ll spend less upfront and overtime with this cheap fitness tracker.

Despite the low price, the Band 7 has a lot to offer. Amazfit promises up to 18 days of battery life, and during my testing, I got 16 days or so with a daily workout. Of course, actual battery life heavily depends on how you use the watch and if you have the always-on display on, but it is still impressive for the price. It also charges quickly, so you can get back to tracking movement in no time.

The built-in BioTracker 3.0 PPG biometric sensor tracks heart rate and blood oxygen levels. I found the heart rate data to be very accurate during runs and weightlifting sessions, even when compared to more expensive hiking and Garmin watches. The watch uses that information to calculate VO2 Max, stress levels, and to track sleep. It also provides a PAI, or Personal Activity Intelligence, score, which gives you a picture of how active you are and what your activity level should be for you as an individual.

The Amazfit Band 7 can track 120 different workout types. That includes basics like running, cycling, and yoga but also more obscure things like kite-flying, jumping rope, and badminton. No matter what your child is into, there’s a good chance this fitness tracker can track it. It also pairs with a phone so that your kid can receive phone notifications on their wrist.

Check out our full review to learn more about the Amazfit Band 7.

What to consider when shopping for the best Fitbits for kids

The best Fitbits for kids will fall into the fitness tracker category due to the inherent lower price and slim design. While many of these options share features, there are still some key things to consider before purchasing a device for your child.

A quick note on the term “Fitbit”

For some people, the term “Fitbit” has taken on a more general meaning—it’s a catch-all that references any fitness tracker. It’s like how we often call plastic storage bags Ziploc bags. In reality, Fitbit is a specific brand that’s owned by Alphabet, Google’s parent company. We’re keeping this list almost entirely specific to that brand because the company makes a lot of excellent devices, but have included an alternative as well.

Battery life

Battery life is a key component of any device for kids. If their fitness tracker needs to be charged daily, there’s a good chance it won’t actually be worn very much. Most Fitbits promise a battery life of up to five days, but actual battery life is dependent on how your child is using the watch and what types of settings and features are turned on. You’ll want to consider how responsible your kid is—or how much you want to be hands-on with charging—and choose a watch with a battery life that matches.

Features

While Fitbit products have commonalities, some trackers come with unique features. It’s important to identify what you want to get out of your Fitbit. Do you want a hybrid tracker and smartwatch that can sync with a smartphone and offer more complex functionality? Or do you want simple fitness tracking? Do you need GPS built in? How important are stress management tools?

Sleep tracking may also be an important feature for your child. The Sleep Foundation says that sleep not only helps your child’s energy levels but also impacts a slew of other important developmental areas such as memory, focus, mood, learning, motor skill development, and overall happiness.

Luckily, Fitbit has a tool to help you narrow in on the best option for your particular needs. Take the company’s Fitbit quiz to help you make your decision. 

Budget

How much are you looking to spend? While some budget Fitbits are around $80, they can go all the way up to several hundred, depending on features and frills like GPS tracking and smartwatch capabilities. The kid-specific Ace is one of Fitbit’s cheaper models, which makes sense since kids are prone to breaking and losing gadgets on the regular. Buying a kid a $250 smartwatch can be a real gamble. 

Style

Your Fitbit’s style should reflect your child’s age and development. Some Fitbits, like the Ace 3, are meant for small children around six years, and others are meant for older teens, like the Inspire 3 or Luxe. A kid won’t wear something if they hate the way it looks.

FAQs

Q: How much does a Fitbit for kids cost?

The only Fitbit specifically designed for kids, the Ace 3, costs $79.95. Anything fancier than that, and you’re going to pay a premium. There are some other brands that offer cheaper fitness trackers, however. 

Q: Can an 11-year-old have a Fitbit account?

Whether or not your 11-year-old (or any minor) can have their own Fitbit account depends on your country’s privacy laws. Mostly, parents and legal guardians can create a family account to monitor their kids’ accounts. 

Q: Which Fitbit is best for a child?

Which Fitbit is best for a child depends on the needs and preferences of your unique child. If GPS is important, go with that model, or if the price point is most important, you’ll want a cheaper option. It’s all about what works for your individual needs. If you’re looking for a starter model for young kids, though, we’d recommend the Ace 3. 

Final thoughts on the best Fitbits for kids

More focused on fitness than the average smartwatches for kids, Fitbits for kids are a great tool to make healthy living a convenient part of your child’s daily life. From fun incentives, cool features, and built-in tracking, teaching your child how to have agency over their health has never been easier. Hopefully, this article helps you narrow down the best Fitbits for kids so you can find the one that is right for your child.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best Fitbits for kids in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best leaf blowers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-leaf-blower/ Tue, 20 Jul 2021 11:00:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/story/uncategorized/best-leaf-blower/
The best leaf blowers
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Rid your lawn, sidewalk, or back porch of pesky foliage.

The post The best leaf blowers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best leaf blowers
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Dewalt Cordless Leaf Blower XR DeWalt Corded Electric Handheld Leaf Blower
SEE IT

No need to fuel this pick up with gas—it runs on electricity alone and can clear out up to 450 cubic feet per minute.

Best cordless Worx Nitro 40V Pro Leafjet sitting on a pile of leaves Worx Nitro 40V PRO LEAFJET Cordless Leaf Blower
SEE IT

Clear away debris and leaves without the hassle of a tangled cord or short battery life.

Best budget BLACK+DECKER Leaf Blower & Leaf Vacuum BLACK+DECKER Leaf Blower & Leaf Vacuum
SEE IT

Get both a blower and a mulcher for the price of one (or less) without sacrificing power. This pick blows at up to 250 miles per hour for no-fuss cleaning.

A great leaf blower makes you want to wake up on a fall day and get to work. It makes you wish your yard was a few acres bigger so you can use your favorite power tool more. But who wants to bother with a leaf blower rental? And trying to borrow a neighbor’s noisy, old leaf blower can feel like pulling teeth. The wrong leaf blower can make you want to pick up a rake to move the few leaves that fell on your front lawn. Purchasing your own leaf blower can have higher upfront costs than renting, but it will save you plenty of headaches—there’s no need to pick up and drop it off, and you don’t have to worry about handling a leaf blower you hate. Effectiveness isn’t the only measure of a blower. If you want to be a good neighbor, you’ll also want to consider just how loud your lawn equipment is, as some communities ban the use of certain kinds of leaf blowers to reduce noise pollution. Here’s how to find the best leaf blower for you.

How we chose the best leaf blowers

We looked to product reviews, consumer impressions, and warranted advice from our landscape-loving dads, who are very proud of their yard tools. You deserved to be just as jazzed about a storage shed packed with your own collection of backyard tools as they are.

The best leaf blowers: Reviews & Recommendations

Looking for a tool to move leaves can be stressful, but don’t worry, we’ve got you covered—you don’t have to go back to raking leaves. This guide will take you through the main points to consider while buying a leaf blower while offering up our leaf blower reviews. You can save that stress for when it’s time to choose a snowblower.

Best overall: DeWALT Cordless XR Leaf Blower

Dewalt

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This professional-grade leaf blower brings crisp landscaping to your backyard.

Specs

  • Weight: 5.43 lbs.
  • Power source: Battery
  • Electric or gas: Electric
  • Air speed: 125 MPH

Pros

  • Part of DeWalt’s tool ecosystem
  • Brushless motor
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Doesn’t come with a battery

DeWALT’s cordless leaf blower offers an excellent combination of both power—courtesy of its 20V motor—and cost. This battery-powered model can push out air at up to 125 miles per hour, covering an area of 450 cubic feet per minute. A flat concentrator nozzle helps blow away heavier debris. This leaf blower runs on a battery, but DeWALT doesn’t include one with the box; you’ll have to pick one up separately. If you have another DeWALT power tool, there’s a good chance its battery is compatible with this leaf blower, which is one reason to stay within the company’s ecosystem. The company does offer a bundle with a battery and charger for an additional $50 in case you’re totally new to DeWALT power tools, or want a spare.

Best cordless: Worx Nitro 40V PRO LEAFJET Cordless Leaf Blower

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This lightweight cordless leafblower is designed with an efficient brushless motor, yet provides plenty of power, courtesy of two 20-volt batteries.  

Specs

  • Weight: 6.6 lbs.
  • Power source: Battery
  • Electric or gas: Electric
  • Air speed: 165 MPH

Pros

  • Designed with two powerful batteries
  • Features 620 CFM blower and has high capacity
  • Comes with charger

Cons

  • Somer users had issues with battery performance

The WORX Nitro Leaf Blower provides plenty of performance for a lightweight, cordless tool. It’s designed with a brushless motor that allows it to run longer and provides quite a bit of power. The two included lithium-ion batteries provide 40 volts of power and 165 MPH of blowing speed. The controls allow you to toggle between four speed settings and the blower also features dual air intakes. The batteries charge to full capacity in two hours, and this blower is compatible with other WORX tools. I also found it useful for blowing away spiderwebs.

Best rechargeable: RYOBI Brushless Cordless Jet Fan Leaf Blower

Ryobi

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This lightweight, quiet leaf blower packs a powerful punch.

Specs

  • Weight: 8.08 lbs.
  • Power source: Battery
  • Electric or gas: Electric
  • Air speed: 125 MPH

Pros

  • Quiet
  • Light
  • Brushless motor

Cons

  • Battery and charger sold separately

This Ryobi leaf blower buzzes along at 125 MPH and is fairly quiet at only 59 decibels. The cordless blower has a battery life approaching half an hour without using turbo mode. It weighs less than 10 pounds, meaning you can teach Junior how to help out in the yard without risking a hospital trip. Don’t let its weight and quietness fool you—this leaf blower runs at 550 CFM, or cubic feet per minute, and rivals the power of many gas-powered leaf blowers. This means you can clean the yard and driveway faster than Junior tries to bail out of their yard duties. Not today, Junior!

Best handheld: CRAFTSMAN Cordless Leaf Blower

CRAFTSMAN

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A large, translucent fuel tank takes the guesswork out of filling up this leaf blower.

Specs

  • Weight: 8 lbs.
  • Power source: Battery
  • Electric or gas: Electric
  • Air speed: 100 MPH

Pros

  • Completely wireless
  • Powerful
  • Includes multiple batteries and charger

Cons

  • Not for heavy use

This CRAFTSMAN leaf blower is relatively lightweight, runs on a battery, and includes all of the necessary charging accessories. With a maximum speed of 100 MPH, this leaf blower will offer respectable performance given its size. You’ll only be able to get through roughly a quarter of an acre of land per cleaning session off a single fully charged battery, but the bundle we’re recommending comes with two. If you have a larger backyard, it would be wise to invest in a more heavy-duty leaf blower.

Best backpack: ECHO Gas Backpack Blower

Echo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This powerful leaf blower takes the strain off your hands to make yard work a breeze.

Specs

  • Weight: 29 lbs.
  • Power source: Engine
  • Electric or gas: Gas
  • Air speed: 234 MPH

Pros

  • Powerful
  • Covers lots of ground
  • No tingly hands from vibrations

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Expensive

This ECHO leaf blower blows 234 MPH and has an airflow capacity of 765 CFM, which makes it perfect for those with plenty of acres to cover or who landscape on the side. Keep in mind that it weighs 29 pounds, though, so it might be cumbersome to wear for long periods of time. However, the comfortable straps help ease the burden on your shoulders. Although this leaf blower packs a hefty price tag, reviewers note its longevity and power, meaning this investment purchase pays for itself.

Best budget: BLACK+DECKER Leaf Blower & Leaf Vacuum

Black+Decker

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This versatile piece of equipment vacuum leaves not the cash in your wallet.

Specs

  • Weight: 8.1 lbs.
  • Power source: Corded
  • Electric or gas: Electric
  • Air speed: 250 MPH

Pros

  • Three tools in one
  • Easy leaf disposal

Cons

  • Needs practice to handle

This Black+Decker leaf blower provides leaf blowing and vacuuming and a bag for mulching. Twelve amps of power deliver up to 250 MPH of blowing speed. You can conveniently grind down up to 16 bags of mulch into one with this leaf blower vacuum. Reviewers note that it works on small debris, but be aware that it takes a bit of practice to handle—vacuuming too fast will clog the tube. It’s quiet despite its power, meaning you won’t alert the entire neighborhood that you’re doing yard work. Two disposable bags are included for fast clean-up.

What to consider when buying the best leaf blowers

Walking into a home and garden store can be overwhelming, between the high ceilings and bounty of charcoal grills. How can you focus on picking out the best leaf blower when there are at least 20 varieties of riding lawn mower five feet away? We’ve done all the work for you, so leave the choice paralysis for the chip aisle at the grocery store.

Power source

When considering the best leaf blower, you’ll first need to decide between gas, electric, and battery-powered models. Gas models are generally more powerful than electric models and freedom from a cord means they can go just about anywhere. However, they are considerably noisier, heavier than electric models, and put out pollution tied to fossil fuels. Electric models are lighter than gas and can provide the kind of power that will cover a large swath of jobs—however, their mobility is limited to about 100 feet of an outlet (give or take one of the best extension cords). Battery-powered models spare users from the maintenance required of gas blowers but have less power. The biggest mark against battery-powered leaf blowers is that batteries generally only last up to an hour. That means big jobs will take much longer, as you’ll need to recharge. (Of course, you can also check out the best solar generators so you can take a portable power station around with you to keep a steady rotation of charging battery packs.)

Power

To gauge the power of a blower, you’ll want to look at the cubic feet per minute (CFM) rating and promised miles per hour (MPH). The higher CFM, the more leaves you’ll be able to blow away at one time. The higher the MPH, the easier it will be to move heavier debris or wet leaves.

Once you get through that basic consideration, you might want to consider other features like vacuuming and mulching features, which store and shred yard waste. For professional-grade yard maintenance across multiple acres, you’ll want to consider backpack models that pack extra power, or even wheeled models. Keep in mind though, that wheeled models come with their own drawbacks, like a lack of features and considerably high noise levels.

Cordless vs. corded

When it comes to convenience, cordless leaf blowers are at the top of the pack. They dispense with the need for gas and maintenance required by gas-powered blowers as well as their noisiness. A cordless blower also tends to be fairly light and allows you to go wherever you need without worrying if you’re close to an outlet. However, even the best cordless blower doesn’t tend to have the same power as its gas-powered brethren and with a battery life of around one hour, you may have to charge once or twice before finishing your chores or consider investing in a second battery.

Corded leaf blowers are ideal for backyards that provide access to outlets at 100 feet of your work zone. They provide power nearly as strong as gas-powered motors and are generally much lighter.

Electric vs. gas

Gas leaf blowers feature high power and the convenience of not having a cord. However, they require regular maintenance, and two-stroke engines featured in the majority of gas blowers require mixing gas and oil. Try to look for four-stroke engines instead to do away with the need for mixing gas and oil and to reduce emissions. Another drawback to gas leaf blowers is their sound level—it’s often recommended to wear hearing protection when operating them. Most models also weigh about 10 pounds, which might be disqualifying for some users. Electric leaf blowers offer the convenience of a button-press start and do away with the noise and environmental pollution of gas blowers.

Backpack vs. handheld

Backpack leaf blowers arm users with power twice that of their handheld competitors. The tradeoff is the drawbacks associated with gas engines—maintenance, fuel mixing, noise pollution, and air pollution. They offer way more power than folks with a small front yard or even a sizable backyard need. But if you’re dealing with major acreage that has to be maintained meticulously and quickly, you may want to consider a backpack blower. Handheld leaf blowers are good for cleaning up your driveway, but the vibrations might make your hands hurt if used for an extended period of time.

Price range

A budget leaf blower will give you what you need to deal with your sidewalk and moderately sized yard. You’ll be able to find decent corded models for around $100. In some cases, you’ll find deals that get you models with useful features like mulching and vacuuming. Just expect lower CFM rates, which means you might have to spend longer blowing.

FAQs

Q: What cities have banned leaf blowers?

Over 20 cities in California have banned leaf blowers due to the noise they create, although enforcement of the ban is spotty. Some cities, including Greenwich, Connecticut, and Palm Beach, Florida, regulate the decibel volume and times of use of leaf blowers. To find your city’s rules on leaf blowers, you can check here. Your local government website may have more up-to-date information.

Q: What is the best kind of blower for gutter cleaning?

Cordless leaf blowers offer the kind of maneuverability to safely work on your roof. They are generally lighter than gas-powered models and won’t force you to deal with the noise of a gas-powered model as it ricochets off your roof and across the neighborhood. Yes, you might have to recharge your blower—but odds are your gutters aren’t going to need hours of power to get things clean.

Q: What is the best way to use a blower?

Before using your blower, make sure you’ve taken your safety into account. Put on a pair of safety goggles to protect your eyes from debris, and don a pair of earmuffs or earplugs to protect your hearing. Check that the leaves you are blowing are mostly dry, and that wind is low. Plan to blow your leaves in one direction using air pulses while pointing the nozzle at a shallow angle toward the ground. Sweep the blower from side to side while blowing leaves into a pile.

Q: Can you use a leaf blower on wet leaves?

If using a leaf blower to vacuum leaves, no. They can clog the fan, prevent other debris from being sucked up, weigh down the tool, and cause bag attachments to break. However, if you’re blowing away wet leaves, by all means, yes. It might take more work, but it can be done.

Q: Which is more important for a leaf blower, CFM or MPH?

It depends. A higher CFM pushes leaves further and helps you clear a larger area faster. This is important if you’re working with light materials. However, a higher MPH will help move heavier objects, like wet leaves and larger rocks. Take both into consideration when purchasing a leaf blower.

Q: How much does a leaf blower cost?

Our leaf blower recommendations cost between $92 and $529.

Finals thoughts on the best leaf blowers

When buying a leaf blower, your first major consideration should be the demands of the property you are tending. Do you have access to power outlets? Do you have acres or a small backyard? This will tell you whether it’s worth buying a larger gas-powered model, or if you can stick with a corded or wireless model. From there, you’ll want to consider what kind of power tool owner you are. Are you someone who likes maintaining your landscaping tools, checking the engine, and mixing gas? Or do you simply want to plug something in or charge a battery?

Your environment also comes into play when considering how much power you’ll need. Are you dealing with debris other than leaves? Do you have close neighbors who will object to loud engine noise? Once you’ve reached this conclusion, you’ll want to set a price range. Remember that CFM rating will tell you how many leaves your tool can move at once, and MPH will tell you how it can handle heavier debris. Now you’re well on your way to finding the best blower for your home.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best leaf blowers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best Fitbits for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-fitbits/ Mon, 18 Apr 2022 17:00:04 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=436415
four of the best Fitbits sliced together against a white background
Abby Ferguson

Fitbit makes a wide range of great fitness trackers for just about every kind of healthy living.

The post The best Fitbits for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
four of the best Fitbits sliced together against a white background
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Fitbit Versa 4 is the best Fitbit overall. Fitbit Versa 4
SEE IT

The Versa 4 is the company’s most well-rounded smartwatch.

Best fitness tracker The Fitbit Charge 6 against a white background Fitbit Charge 6
SEE IT

The Charge 6 offers advanced data-driven insights to help you optimize your workouts.

Best budget The Fitbit Inspire 3 is the best Fitbit at the most affordable price. Fitbit Inspire 3
SEE IT

The Inspire 3 is a low-cost fitness tracker for people who just want the basics.

For many tech and health enthusiasts, Fitbits are the first devices that come to mind when you say “fitness tracker.” In some circles, the company had briefly achieved that level of cultural ubiquity where people referred to all fitness trackers as “Fitbits.” The market is now saturated—with options from Garmin, Apple, Polar, and Amazfit, just to name a few—but there are still plenty of reasons to choose devices made by Fitbit. These fitness trackers and watches deliver outstanding levels of functionality, each with its own particular benefits. With so many types of Fitbits—not to mention multiple generations of each version—it might not be readily apparent which one makes the most sense for you. To that end, we’re looking at the top options for a range of intentions so you can work out (or even sleep) with confidence, knowing that these are truly the best Fitbits.

How we chose the best Fitbits

I selected these Fitbits like I do ebikes and gear for van-lifers (such as solar generators): through first-hand testing and input from real buyers. I tested these alongside fitness trackers from Fitbit and other leading brands, such as the Polar Ignite 2 Plus and the Garmin Venu 2 Plus. While testing, I looked to determine core functionality like tracker accuracy and battery, as well as the relative ease of use

The Fitbit versions that didn’t make the cut were not always significantly different from those included above, but our picks stood out for a reason. You can choose yours from these Fitbit reviews, knowing that these truly are the best options available right now.

The best Fitbits: Reviews & Recommendations

While the features offered by the various models tend to overlap—most build up from a base of 20 health and fitness metrics—each individual package tailors itself to a specific set of needs or parameters. Plenty of people want access to this data but don’t need the battery life for the backcountry and don’t necessarily want the bulk of a sensor-packed hiking/multisport watch. To that end, here are the best Fitbits for most people.

Best overall: Fitbit Versa 4

Fitbit

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its broad range of fitness tracking capabilities, smartwatch functions, and lower price, the Versa 4 is a balanced fitness watch that plays to Fitbit’s strengths.

Specs

  • Heart rate monitor: Yes
  • Built-in GPS: Yes
  • Battery life: 6 days
  • Premium membership: Free for 6 months

Pros

  • Plenty of fitness tracking functions
  • Detailed sleep-tracking information
  • Wide range of smart features

Cons

  • Higher price than most Fitbits
  • Relatively short battery life

For all practical purposes, the Fitbit Versa 4 can do everything that most users want from their fitness tracker. It provides info about steps, heart rate, blood oxygen levels, calories burned, and sleep tracking. It’s also water-resistant down to 50 meters, in case you’re a swimmer. It even buzzes to let you know when you’ve entered your personalized target heart rate for exercise, which it refers to as your “active zone.”

At the same time, the Versa 4 includes plenty of smart functions. You can use it to take calls and receive notifications from your phone or ask Alexa about the weather. Fitbit also features an app ecosystem that’s smaller than iOS or Android but includes apps for music, payments, and more. The Versa 4 and more powerful Sense watch bring a lot of value to the table, but the Versa does so at a lower price, making it a slightly more accessible pick. If you’re looking for a less expensive version, read our review of the Fitbit Versa 3.

Best fitness tracker: Fitbit Charge 6

Fitbit

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its expansive suite of fitness trackers and detailed workout insights, the Charge 6 is a gym rat’s best friend.

Specs

  • Heart rate monitor: Yes
  • Built-in GPS: Yes
  • Battery life: 7 days
  • Premium membership: Free for 6 months

Pros

  • Provides access to Google Maps, Wallet, and YouTube Music
  • Stress management tools
  • Provides recommendations for workouts, mindfulness, and challenges

Cons

  • Subscription required for advanced insights
  • Reply to calls and texts function for Android only

If you’re looking for the utmost in fitness-tracking power, the Fitbit Charge 6 delivers. With a full range of fitness and health tracking options, it records all the stats you need. What makes it stand out, however, is its workout intensity map, which leverages GPS and various physical data points to highlight when you’re getting the most and least out of your workout. Between workouts, it sends guidance to maintain mindfulness and workout optimization.

Though it’s primarily fitness-focused, it also features a smattering of basic smart functions that allow you to manage payments plus receive calls, texts, and calendar notifications. It also offers access to Google features such as YouTube Music controls, Google Wallet, and Google Maps. Some of these functions only work with Android phones, however.

The one drawback to the Charge 6—like all Fitbit devices—is its reliance on a subscription. Like the Whoop 4.0 and other recent high-end fitness trackers, Fitbit gates off many of its most detailed workout insights unless you pay for its Premium membership. You get six months of free access to see if it’s worth the $9.99 a month, but you should probably decide whether or not you’re even open to such an arrangement in the first place.

Best watch: Fitbit Sense 2

Why it made the cut: The Sense 2 is a sleek, powerful smartwatch with advanced fitness-tracking capabilities.

Specs

  • Heart rate monitor: Yes
  • Built-in GPS: Yes
  • Battery life: 6 days
  • Premium membership: Free for 6 months

Pros

  • Fitbit’s largest suite of smart apps
  • Includes ECG monitoring and EDA Scan for tracking heart health and stress
  • Works with Alexa

Cons

  • The most expensive Fitbit
  • Relatively short battery life
  • Large

If you want a fitness tracker that really leans into smart features, the sleek Fitbit Sense 2 delivers. With the largest suite of smart apps on any Fitbit device, as well as most of the key fitness and health tracking functions, it is the most powerful Fitbit we recommend. Most notably, the Sense includes an ECG for detecting heart health, as well as an EDA Scan app that monitors electrodermal activity and then provides a graph of how your body responds to stress. It is also the only Fitbit to come with a 6-month free trial of the guided meditation app Calm to support any stress management goals you might have.

Given all that, it’s worth noting that the Sense is the second most expensive device you can get from Fitbit right now. If you want all the features, the Sense may be the best choice, but it is bigger and more expensive than most of the pack.

Best for women: Fitbit Luxe

Fitbit

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Fitbit Luxe is a great option if you want a fitness tracker that can double as a piece of jewelry. 

Specs

  • Heart rate monitor: Yes
  • Built-in GPS: No
  • Battery life: 5 days
  • Premium membership: Free for 6 months

Pros

  • Stylish design
  • Heart tracking
  • Stress management tools included

Cons

  • Need to connect to phone for GPS
  • Doesn’t let you play music

If you’re looking for a fitness tracker that looks more like a bracelet than a military-grade smartwatch, the Fitbit Luxe is a good option. The slim design, polished stainless steel case, and bands available in a range of hues make this an option that works for both work and working out, and one of the best Fitbit watches for women. The Luxe also tracks heart rate, sleep, and breathing rate, plus provides some stress management tools. You can also text and receive call notifications, but you can’t access music or make calls. 

This tracker is water-resistant up to 50 meters, and has a battery life of up to five days. Unfortunately, you’ll need to connect to the GPS in your phone to see your pace in real-time, as it doesn’t offer built-in GPS. It won’t be the best option for those serious about accurate pace and mileage information as a result, but it does help keep the cost and size down.

Best for men: Google Pixel Watch 2

Google

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This sleek watch can double as a sophisticated timepiece and a high-end fitness tracker. 

Specs

  • Heart rate monitor: Yes
  • Built-in GPS: No
  • Battery life: 24 hours
  • Premium membership: Free for 6 months

Pros

  • Tracks heart rhythms 
  • Comes with emergency SOS system
  • Sophisticated design
  • Available with 4G LTE service as well

Cons

  • Only works for Android users

Google bought Fitbit in November 2019, and some of Fitbit’s fitness trackers feature the integration of the parent company’s features. Conversely, Google’s Pixel Watch 2 uses Fitbit’s tracking technology to monitor activity, calories burned, and sleep patterns. It also provides in-depth tracking of the heart rhythm with the ECG feature and can track skin temperature. Additionally, it has an SOS feature that allows users to contact 911 in case of an emergency. And the Android-compatible device pairs with Google’s Wear OS system, Pixel phones, and Pixel buds for running.

This Fitbit for men also allows users to get turn-by-turn guidance from Google Maps, make contactless payments, and receive calendar alerts. You can opt for a Bluetooth version if you want to keep your phone on you for notifications or spend $50 more for the 4G LTE version. But beyond the device’s functionality, it’s also a timepiece that looks great on the wrist with its domed design and AMOLED touchscreen display. Plus, it comes in a variety of color options, so you can choose one that fits your style best.

Best budget: Fitbit Inspire 3

Fitbit

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With all the essential fitness tracking capabilities, the Inspire 3 gives you the features you need at a more affordable price.

Specs

  • Heart rate monitor: Yes
  • Built-in GPS: No
  • Battery life: Up to 10 days
  • Premium membership: Free for 6 months

Pros

  • 20 fitness functions
  • Long battery life
  • Long premium trial

Cons

  • Limited smartphone notifications
  • Small, hard-to-read screen

If you just need a basic fitness tracker, try the Fitbit Inspire 3. It tracks all the basics—steps, calories, heart rate, etc. It also has more advanced features than other trackers, including active zone alert, cardio fitness scores, and a “daily readiness score” to make sure you let your body recover between workouts.

That said, this cheap Fitbit is very much an essentialist fitness tracker. It has some smartwatch functionality, including notifications for calls, text, and social media. It also offers stress management features and menstrual health tracking. These features require looking at the Inspire 3’s tiny screen, which isn’t ideal for anything beyond the quickest of glances. This is definitely a tracker for people who actively want to avoid the “smart features” and stay focused on working out. Looking to save a few dollars with an older version? Read our review of the Fitbit Inspire 2.

Best for kids: Fitbit Ace 3

Fitbit

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Arguably the most feature-rich fitness tracker designed specifically for kids, the Ace 3 helps keep your little one moving.

Specs

  • Heart rate monitor: No
  • Built-in GPS: No
  • Battery life: Up to 8 days
  • Premium membership: Not included

Pros

  • Parent View safety feature
  • Incentivizes fitness in kids
  • Bedtime reminders and sleep tracking

Cons

  • Single wristband size doesn’t fit all wrists
  • Some users have reported durability issues with the buckle

There aren’t too many quality fitness trackers designed specifically for kids, so the Fitbit Ace 3 is incredibly useful and the best Fitbit for kids. It primarily tracks steps and sleep but can also set challenges to keep kids motivated and active. You can also set reminders to prompt children to get up, move, stretch, or sleep at specific times. Its features are comparatively very limited beyond the basics, but it is water-resistant for up to 50 meters, so it is durable and can stay on in the pool.

The Ace 3 supports the Fitbit app, which features separate viewing modes for parents and kids when you activate the Family Account mode. In Parent View mode, parents can monitor their kid’s activity and approve any connections in the Fitbit social community. Meanwhile, Kid View presents a child-friendly version of the fitness tracker experience, with access to stats, badges, personalized avatars, and challenges. Like many of the best smartwatches for kids, it’s cute but quite feature-packed.

What to consider before buying a Fitbit

Each Fitbit variety offers its unique features and benefits, so it’s important to keep a few things in mind when choosing which is the best one for you and whether that’s the latest Fitbit or old Fitbit models. These are, for the most part, the same considerations to keep in mind when picking any fitness tracker or fitness watch

Health goals

To judge any fitness tracker, you must know how you plan to use it. Are you looking to track your high-impact workouts or simply ensure you get your steps in? Monitor heart health or blood oxygen levels? Or maybe sleep tracking and monitoring mindfulness? Different Fitbits come with varying feature sets that will accommodate different goals. Often, more complex trackers will be larger, more complicated, and more expensive. Finding the right balance among those three factors will set you up to use your Fitbit to the fullest.

Cost

Fitbits come in many shapes and sizes, meaning some are more expensive than others. Some models cost as little as $60. Others get as high as $400. Again, you want to find a balance between feature-set and price that works for you, but it’s also generally important to keep your budget in mind as you shop.

Smart functions

While some Fitbits act as fairly basic fitness trackers, others are much more elaborate smartwatches. Which is right for you depends on whether or not you need all those smarts.

FAQs

Q: How much does a Fitbit cost?

Prices range from under $60 for the Ace 3 to as much as $400 for the Google Pixel Watch 2, depending on the most current sale prices.

Q: Are Fitbits waterproof?

All the latest-generation Fitbit models boast strong water resistance in up to 50 meters. They’re all great for swimming laps or playing in a pool. If you’re diving, you may want to consider something a bit more durable.

Q: How do I get my Fitbit to sync?

Once you pair your Fitbit with your phone, it will sync periodically when the Fitbit smartphone app is open. You can manually sync on the app homepage by swiping down.

Q: How accurate are Fitbit devices?

No fitness tracker is 100% accurate. They approximate your activity by sensing movement, heart rate, and other factors. You can improve your tracker’s accuracy by feeding it more data. Enabling GPS and entering accurate height, weight, and stride length in the app settings will improve results.

That said, Fitbit trackers do fare comparatively well in general testing. A 2017 study found that Fitbits tend to have a 27% median error when tracking calories burned. While that might seem like a lot, they outperformed almost all major competitors. There hasn’t been much hard research done since then on the accuracy of Fitbit’s latest releases, but having compared them against other trackers that are well-regarded for their accuracy—as well as good old-fashioned paper-and-pencil calorie tracking—I can say that they seem to perform well.

Final thoughts on the best Fitbits

The best Fitbit for you comes down to one of two factors: whether you want a smartwatch or a fitness tracker and your budget. The core fitness tracking features are largely consistent among most models. Hence, you need to consider whether you care about smartphone-related lifestyle features and the advanced fitness analytics that come with Fitbit’s premium subscription. Ultimately, most Fitbits are great so long as their features and your expectations are in sync.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best Fitbits for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heated blankets of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-heated-blankets/ Wed, 08 Mar 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=517407
the best heated blankets composited
Stan Horaczek

Heated blankets provide comfortable warmth without tons of maintenance.

The post The best heated blankets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
the best heated blankets composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best wearable Beautyrest reversible heated blanket on a plain background as one of the best heated blankets Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap
SEE IT

Don’t pretend like you don’t want that wrapped around you.

Best battery-powered Onnetila heated blanket on a plain backdrop The Cozee Battery Operated Cordless Heated Blanket
SEE IT

A dedicated battery pack provides warmth without the grid.

Best overall Sunbeam best overall heated blanket Sunbeam Royal Luxe Heated Blanket
SEE IT

It’s comfortable, durable, and easy to use.

On cold nights, there’s nothing more comforting than getting into a pre-warmed bed thanks to a heated blanket. Heated blankets, sometimes called electric blankets, are just like a regular soft blanket but with wires inside that provide heat when supplied with current. You can even get wireless battery-powered options that allow you to stay warm all night long without the hassle of tangling cords. Whether you opt for smaller single sizes, which are often better at dispersing heat, or share the experience with a large blanket made for two, we have sourced the best heated blankets for you.

How we chose the best heated blankets

The writers and editors at Popular Science have decades of combined experience in writing about, reviewing, and recommending products across a wide variety of categories. For this list of the best heated blankets, we relied on spec comparisons, personal experience, editorial reviews, and user feedback. We prioritize reliability here at Popular Science, so we emphasized models that promise to last several years. While we haven’t tested them for years to guarantee durability, we prioritize brands with solid reputations and models built with long-lasting materials.

The best heated blankets: Reviews & Recommendations

Our picks for the best heated blankets promise to keep you toasty even when it’s cold outside and drafty in your home. Plus, they’re more convenient than sleeping in even the best, most comfortable heated gloves, socks, insoles, and vests. If you want to snuggle up for sound sleep and feel cozy without touching the thermostat or fiddling with a space heater, you can relax under the warmth of one of our top picks. 

Best overall: Sunbeam Royal Luxe Heated Blanket

Sunbeam

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Polyester microfiber
  • Heat Settings: 12
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Dual controllers
  • Easy to use
  • Soft, cozy fabric

Cons 

  • Thin fabric means you can feel the wires inside

Available in a range of colors—including beige, blue, red, and gray—this blanket scored top marks for comfort and durability. To machine wash, simply unplug the remote and toss the blanket in your washer and dryer. 

The dual controllers and large Queen size make it a good choice for couples sharing a bed. You’ll both be able to adjust the temperature and turn it on or off if your partner falls asleep before you. The control remote is also bright and easy to use, even in the middle of the night. It evenly distributes heat to prevent overheating, and the blanket material, although warm, isn’t too heavy. It comes with a five-year limited warranty for peace of mind. The automatic 12-hour shutoff was the longest shut-off from the blankets tested and means you can fall asleep knowing it will turn off by itself. This is our top choice to help you get a restful (and warm) night’s sleep.

Best battery-powered: The Cozee Battery Operated Cordless Heated Blanket

Onnetila

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Polyester & Polyester Blend
  • Heat Settings: 5
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Totally portable  
  • Wireless 
  • Modern design

Cons 

  • Battery life is poor on high setting

Instead of a bulky controller plugged into the wall, this portable heated blanket comes with a rechargeable large-capacity battery, not unlike a power brick you’d use to charge your phone. The blanket heats up in just five seconds, providing warmth when you need it most. It folds down to fit any 10 inches by 8 inches space, perfect for stowing in the car or a backpack on the road. 

Once heated, expect 2-8 hours of use, plenty of time to fall asleep soundly. The material is lightweight, machine-washable, and soft to the touch. Although this blanket would work well in bed, it excels as a portable option to keep you warm at sporting events, when traveling, or especially camping or staying in an RV. In fact, it makes a great present for anyone who loves warm gear gifts. However, the five heat settings don’t offer too much variation, and it’s worth keeping in mind that the highest setting will drain the battery considerably. Lower price options are available if a wireless design is not your priority.

Best for couples: Perfect Fit Ultra Soft Plush Electric Blanket

SoftHeat

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Polyester Blend micro plush
  • Heat Settings: 10
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Very large size  
  • Individual controls 
  • Small wires and even heat distribution

Cons 

  • Expensive

It’s a perfect solution for couples with different sleep styles and preferences. It features separate heating zones and individualized controls, and you can change the temperature silently so as not to wake your sleeping partner. The separate controls mean you can both choose your ideal temperature and sleep soundly. You can also adjust this temperature throughout the night for individualized comfort.

A large, easy-to-grasp dial-style controller and a non-slip bottom make this a very accessible device. If you forget to turn it off, an automatic shut-off at 10 hours will keep you safe. This blanket doesn’t feel overly hot to the touch and doesn’t get hot zones as the heat is evenly distributed. It also features very small wires that cannot be felt through the blanket for ultimate comfort while you both sleep. Choose from three colors—sage green, red, or beige—to complement your bedding.

Best wearable: Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap

Beautyrest

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Plush Fabric
  • Heat Settings: 3
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Affordable  
  • Hands-free design 
  • Heats up quickly

Cons 

  • Control panel is bulky and can be uncomfortable
  • Variations in heat

As a wearable heated blanket, the Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap lets you stay warm while your hands can type, scroll on your phone, or flip between TV channels. It sits on your shoulders just like a shawl with the added luxury of heat, which you can control through three different settings. And it’s available in 10 different designs to suit your unique style and fashion sense. It’s also fully reversible with an ultra-soft beige plush fabric on the reverse side. 

The 2-hour auto shut-off prevents overheating. Fully machine washable, this wearable heated blanket provides warmth and comfort to relax anywhere in your home. This blanket would suit teens in particular because of the range of colors and styles. Like our top budget pick, also made by Beautyrest, the controller can become quite hot if covered. Simply unplug to machine wash and keep your new favorite blanket clean. 

Best budget: Beautyrest Brushed Long Fur Electric Throw

Beautyrest

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: 100% Polyester
  • Heat Settings: 3
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Affordable price point 
  • Furry fabric offers extra warmth

Cons 

  • Only one size (oversize throw) available 
  • Controller overheats if covered by the blanket

The heating wires are laid throughout this throw in an “S” pattern, evenly distributing heat. Although only available in one size, the oversized 50 inches by 60 inches, it’s perfect for one person to keep warm. Expect heat ranges of 85 to 105 degrees Fahrenheit, although the long fur provides additional warmth as well. You’ll be limited to just three heat settings, but this heated blanket still offers good value for money at such a reasonable price. 

The two-hour auto shut-off provides peace of mind, although if you like to snuggle up while you watch TV before bed, you might need to reset it to keep you warm as you sleep. Some reviewers complained that the lifespan was short, which you should remember when researching heated to buy. As this blanket is on the smaller side, it could be a great option for keeping warm on the couch instead of at bedtime.

Things to consider before buying the best heated blankets 

While we’re happy to recommend specific models, we also like to provide some insight into what we consider the essential features that come with your new heated blanket. Here are some features and specs to look for while you’re shopping.

Safety

You might prefer the reassuring heavy feel of a weighted blanket instead of a heated blanket; after all, they don’t suit everyone. If you prefer to sleep wrapped up in a ball or your temperature fluctuates dramatically during the night, a heated blanket might not suit your needs. It’s also important to keep a few safety precautions in mind:

Damaged or frayed wires can make heated blankets unsafe. Get into the habit of checking them regularly and rolling rather than folding your blanket for storage. You should also choose a model with an automatic shut-off to prevent overheating. 

Heat settings 

The more heat settings your heated blanket has, the more you can customize it to your unique (and changing) needs. Depending on the weather, your other blankets and bedding, or the season, adjust the heat setting to suit your sleep habits best. You might also prefer to choose a heated throw blanket over one that you sleep with. 

Pets 

It’s not advised to use heated blankets with pets as they can become overheated and may chew or claw through the wires.

FAQs

Q: Is it safe to sleep with a heated blanket?

If used correctly, heated blankets are perfectly safe to use while sleeping. When selecting your blanket, make sure you choose one with an automatic shutoff so that you can rest easy knowing that you won’t overheat during the night. It’s also important to look after your blanket to prevent wires from shorting and to buy a new one when your blanket gets too old. 

Q: Do heated blankets use a lot of electricity?

Heated blankets are very economical and use very little electricity to run, and certainly much less than a space heater or turning up the thermostat.

Q: Can I wash my heated blanket?

Not all heated blankets can be machine washed, so it’s very important to check the manufacturer details to make sure you’ll be able to clean your blanket properly. 

Final thoughts on the best heated blankets

Heated blankets can be a great way to stay warm on chilly nights, save money on your heating bills, or just make your bed extra snuggly and cozy. If you share a bed with someone else, buying an extra large heated blanket is a good idea and ensures you both have access to the controls to individualize your sleep space to your comfort level. Even if you don’t like to fall asleep with your heated blanket on, you can still opt for a wearable blanket to keep warm around the house or use a heated blanket to warm up your sheets before you slip out of your comfy heated slippers and into bed.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated blankets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heated insoles of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-heated-insoles/ Wed, 15 Dec 2021 18:00:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-heated-insoles/
A lineup of the best heated insoles on a white background
Amanda Reed

Keep your feet nice and toasty with insoles designed to last well beyond the winter.

The post The best heated insoles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best heated insoles on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for skiing A Thermic C-Pack Set of foot warmers on a plain background Thermic C-Pack Set
SEE IT

The perfect boot warmer for skiers and snowboarders alike.

Easiest to trim A pair of Warmfits Rechargeable Heated Insoles on a plain background Thermrup Electric Heated Insole Foot Warmers
SEE IT

Consistent warmth and a custom fit.

Best customizable A pair of Hotronic S4 Universal Foot Warmers on a plain background Hotronic Foot Warmer S4+ Universal
SEE IT

Easily attach to your existing insoles with a long-lasting battery.

There’s nothing worse than heading home early from what should be a great snow day because all the heat has left your toes or having a tough time focusing at work because all you can think about is the cold creeping into your insoles. You might be dreaming of the space heater waiting for you at home, but you need a solution now. Heated insoles can quickly and comfortably take out any unwelcome chills that come your way. These impressively compact creations can be found in various sizes and suited to various activities. Some heated shoe insoles are disposable, some are powered by rechargeable batteries, and some are even water-resistant (we’re looking at you fellow frequent foot-sweaters). Plus, most models are designed to minimize bulk or extra padding, so you won’t have to worry about your toes being squished. The best heated insoles are a great way to stay warm and stay active even when the temperature starts to drop.

How we chose the best heated insoles

We’ve reviewed plenty of heated tech, but we’re practically experts in the realm of electric clothes. We looked at critical reviews, user recommendations, performed personal testing, and conducted heavy research to back our findings. The scientific method! It’s great!

The best heated insoles: Reviews & Recommendations

Heated shoe inserts are safe and easy to use; as long as you follow all included directions, you don’t need to worry about any damage to your skin, socks, or shoes. This makes them the perfect companion for many shoe types, including ski boots, hiking shoes, running sneakers, and more. Any one of our picks will be sure to toast up those tootsies.

Best overall: Thermacell Original Heated Insoles

Thermacell

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These bright red insoles have a matching remote so you can control the temperature and turn it on and off without bending over or taking off your shoes.

Specs

  • Weight: .75 lbs.
  • Material: Polyurethane
  • Power source: Battery powered
  • Heat range: 100°F-111°F

Pros

  • Remote control
  • Shock absorbent
  • Retains it shape well

Cons

  • Can accidentally control a different pair of heated insoles with universal remote

Although Thermacell is known for its mosquito-repelling tech, they aren’t a one-trick pony with these battery-operated inserts. The wireless, remote-controlled insoles can heat between 100°F-111°F—there’s also a No Heat setting in case you end up indoors. Polyurethane foam allows for even heat conduction and shock resistance for comfortable wear all day. No more cold feet this winter—just ensure you stay far enough from someone else wearing these insoles, as you can control their pair thanks to the universal remote.

Best for ski boots: Thermic C-Pack Set

Thermic

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These long-lasting heated insoles provide 17 hours of heat for warm feet all day on the slopes.

Specs

  • Weight: .75 lbs.
  • Material: Polyurethane
  • Power source: Battery powered
  • Heat range: Unknown

Pros

  • Bluetooth enabled to control from phone
  • Can use with existing insoles
  • Ultra-fine heat elements for comfort

Cons

  • Expensive

This set from Thermic are the best heated insoles for ski boots on the market. The batteries provide up to 17 hours of heat, perfect for overnight trips, and they can fit underneath the strap of your ski boot to increase your mobility and keep you comfortable. There are three heat settings—low, medium, and high—that you can control via Bluetooth from your phone. Plus, the heating element can be used with your existing insoles or arch supports without issue. If this high-end model’s price point isn’t right for you, Thermic has many other options for you to peruse.

Best high-temperature: Riomza Rechargeable Heated Insoles

Riomza

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These inserts reach up to 150°F—as Paris Hilton would say, “That’s hot!”

Specs

  • Weight: .75 lbs.
  • Material: Carbon fiber
  • Power source: Battery powered
  • Heat range: 104°F-150°F

Pros

  • Trimmable
  • Comes with a wireless remote control with LED display
  • Quickly heats up

Cons

  • Heels thick to fit battery

These heated shoe insoles have three different temperature settings easily controlled with an included remote. The highest setting can reach up to 150 degrees Fahrenheit. They come in three sizes that are easily trimmable to fit your shoe. Perhaps best of all, the battery for these guys sits inside the heel, so you don’t need to worry about strapping it elsewhere on your body—perfect for work or hunting—though this does tend to add a tiny bit of weight.

Best toe warmers: HotHands Heat Max Toe Warmers

Hot Hands

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These single-use toe warmers stop stinky feet and are perfect to throw in your car for warm feet at a hands’ reach.

Specs

  • Weight: Entire package is 2.2 lbs.
  • Material: Iron powder, water, salt, activated charcoal, and wood fiber
  • Power source: Air-activated
  • Heat range: 100°F-115°F

Pros

  • Thin
  • Odor-absorbing
  • Ingredients don’t hurt the environment

Cons

  • You’re bound to come across a dud pair of warmers
  • Can’t control temperature

These toe warmers from HotHands are our go-to when we need a little bit of extra insulation in our shoes. All you need to do is remove them from the pack and shake them for up to eight hours of heat. They are super thin so that you won’t feel any extra bulk, and they contain odor-absorbing activated charcoal, so if you do start to sweat, you won’t notice any stink.

Easiest to trim: Thermrup Electric Heated Insole Foot Warmers

Thermrup

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Get insoles for the whole family—with peace of mind that they’ll fit—with these lightweight, battery-operated inserts.

Specs

  • Weight: .62 lbs.
  • Material: Nylon, EVA foam
  • Power source: Battery powered
  • Heat range: Unknown

Pros

  • Comfortable
  • Washable
  • Even heat distribution

Cons

  • Short battery life compared to other insoles on our list

These heated insoles from Warmfits can last for up to four hours. The included cable connects to the battery, which can be charged using rechargeable batteries. Plus, you can cut the soles to fit your shoes and relax, knowing they’re made from comfortable EVA foam.

Best customizable: Hotronic S4+ Universal Foot Warmer

Hotronic

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Get the perfect fit with these insoles that can last you from 2.5-25 hours.

Specs

  • Weight: 1 lb.
  • Material: Polyurethane
  • Power source: Battery powered
  • Heat range: Uknown

Pros

  • Last up to 21 hours, depending on heat setting
  • Switch design prevents accidental turn-off
  • Wiring is thin and not noticeable

Cons

  • Expensive

These heated insoles for shoes from Hotronic are all you need for custom heat. Though it does include insoles, it also has two separate heating elements that can attach to the toe of your own orthotic, with four heat settings. The batteries can last up to 21 hours, depending on the heat output, in cold climates with temperatures that can get as low as -20 degrees Fahrenheit.

Best budget: HotHands Insole Foot Warmers

HotHands

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These feet warmers stick to the bottom of your socked feet and are cheap—and easy—to keep around.

Specs

  • Weight: Entire package is 2 lbs.
  • Material: Iron powder, water, salt, and wood fiber
  • Power source: Air-activated
  • Heat range: 100°F-115°F

Pros

  • Long-lasting
  • Won’t budge
  • Natural heat

Cons

  • You’re bound to come across a dud pair of warmers
  • Can’t control temperature

HotHands heated insoles are air-activated, safely made, and can last for up to nine hours. They’re great for winter sports and outdoor activities like tailgating, yard work, dog walks, and more.

What to consider when buying the best heated insoles

To find the best heated insoles for you, think about how often you’ll be using them, what kinds of outdoor activities you’ll be doing, and the temperatures you’re expecting. Do you need something that will last for hours, or do you want to prioritize heat settings? Do you already wear shoe supports and need something customizable? Are you looking for something disposable and budget-friendly? We’ve created this guide to help you answer those questions and get one step closer to warm feet.

Need the perfect boot warmer for your ski trip?

Perhaps the most popular reason for purchasing heated insoles is skiing. Using a heated insole can extend your time on the mountain by preventing pain and cramping caused by the cold.

If you’re looking for a warming insole to slip inside your ski boot, ensure you get one that you can customize to fit the room inside the boot, particularly around the toe box. You’ll also want a boot warmer that will last more than a couple of runs; if you’re looking for a full day of skiing, go for a unit that has at least five to six hours of battery life. We also recommend grabbing an insole with a water-resistant battery pack. Even though your feet are likely protected from the snow by your ski pants, there is still a chance moisture will sneak in; waterproof or resistant insoles will prevent damage over time, as well as keep you safe.

If you’re entirely new to rechargeable insoles, you should know that most models come with an external battery that can attach to your shoe or be placed in a pack to wrap around your leg or ankle. They require a set of wires to plug the insole into the battery. If you’re using a heated insole for skiing, make sure you select a pair with super durable wires that won’t stretch or snap if you take a tumble. Of course, when you go inside, you can change into your heated slippers to keep your feet warm and cozy.

Will you be outside in below-freezing temperatures?

Maybe you aren’t a winter sports fanatic, and you need something for everyday use because you live in a freezing locale. If this is the case, the most important thing to consider is the included heat settings.

Many heated insoles will come with a few heat levels; some need to be manually set; others can be controlled via remote. Remember, when you use the highest heat setting on any insole, you will decrease the battery life faster than a cooler heat setting. You’ll still be able to squeeze out a couple of hours with consistent heat, but you might not be able to make it through a winter trek before the battery dies. It’s a good idea to take the insoles out for a little test drive before committing to more prolonged activities like hikes or an errand marathon. That way, you can figure out which setting is right for you, keeping your feet warm, not sweaty. However, it’s recommended you wear socks with your heated insoles to absorb any potential sweat.

Are you constantly scrunching up your toes to get the blood flowing?

While evenly dispersed heat is never a bad thing, some people need to target specific areas in order to get the relief they need. Just like your fingers get chilly before your palms, your toes are usually the first part of your feet to feel the effects of extreme cold. How many times have you found yourself standing outside desperately wiggling your toes, scrunching them up, or jumping up and down just to try and feel them again? If this sounds like you, and you have good circulation elsewhere, maybe all you need is a set of really great toe warmers.

Toe warmers are significantly smaller than insoles, making them a little more susceptible to moving around or getting scrunched up in the shoe; they also have a bit more trouble connecting to a battery via wires (which are connected to the heel in most insoles). This is why we actually recommend sticking to a disposable, adhesive toe warmer. You’ll get the heat you need, for an extended period of time, without breaking the bank or struggling to flatten them out at the end of the day.

What are the best heated insoles that will last for hours on camping our hunting trips?

Some winter activities require you to be outside in the cold for long periods of time. Hunting, camping, and trekking can leave you feeling frozen, especially if you haven’t prepared properly. Similar to prioritizing heat over longevity, if you need the maximum amount of battery life out of your heated insoles, you might need to sacrifice the highest temperatures or a variety of temperature settings. However, not having tons of levels to choose from means more concentrated, evenly dispersed heat that won’t get cooler with each passing hour as the battery’s energy fades.

You can also look for extra features to keep your heated insoles lasting longer. The best heated insoles for long days will include batteries you can charge in the car. This means you can charge on the way to your trip or activity while also keeping the option open for a quick boost.

Do you want to stay warm but keep your current insoles?

Orthotics and insoles are extremely common and used by people of all ages to support their arches, relieve strain, cushion calluses, and minimize symptoms of tendinitis. More serious conditions are often treated with custom-molded insoles prescribed by podiatrists. If you already have insoles you love, but find yourself needing a little bit of extra warmth, there are options out there.

Some heated insoles come in a pack, and some sell their parts separately. This is great for folks who have orthotics but need a heating element. The packs will instruct you where to place the protected element on your insole, typically on the toe area, and how to connect all necessary cables or wires. You generally won’t need to do anything else; any individual heating element will be safe for you to use without adding anything extra. However, do not try to remove the heating element embedded in traditional heated insoles; this could be dangerous and result in injury. If you tend to get cold easily, you should also check a pair of heated hand warmers or heated gloves.

Best budget heated insoles

You don’t need to spend a ton of money on heated insoles, especially if you only need them a few days out of the year. You can easily address frigid feet for well under $45. Disposable foot warmers work great and are a better fit for tighter budgets. Most of them just need a quick shake to combine the chemicals inside before you adhere them to the bottom of your shoe. Disposable insoles have a three- to four-year shelf life, so you don’t have to use them right away. This makes them great for a couple of winter vacations.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best heated insoles cost?

Whether rechargeable or single-use, the best heated insoles can cost between $20-$200.

Q: Can heated insoles get wet?

As a general rule, you don’t want to submerge any batteries in water. We don’t recommend buying heated insoles if you suspect your feet will be soaked by the end of the day. However, some models are water-resistant and work well to wick away sweat and other droplets. To be safe, never assume something is waterproof unless specifically stated.

Q: Are heated insoles safe for children to use?

Yes, so long as your children can verbally express discomfort. Heated insoles are totally safe, but you want to make sure your child can tell you if they start to feel too hot. Look for an insole that says it’s specifically for kids to ensure the right fit and rest easy with the knowledge that all necessary safety precautions have been taken when it comes to the design.

Q: Are expensive insoles worth it?

If your toes are always cold, it is probably worth it to invest in a reliable model that will last. More expensive models typically have better batteries, consistent heat regulation, a more comfortable design, and longer life overall. If you only use foot warmers every so often, or you’re just looking for something to add a touch of heat, you won’t necessarily need to invest in an insole for the long term.

Q: Can I use heated insoles to treat foot pain?

Applying a warm compress is a great way to treat foot pain, so heated insoles are a sound swap. Consult with your doctor or physical therapist before slipping some heated insoles into your shoes for medical purposes.

Final thoughts on the best heated insoles

The best heated insoles are going to keep your feet warm so you can enjoy your favorite winter activities. From rechargeable to disposable, these foot warmers are a great way to relieve any pain or discomfort you feel during the coldest time of the year. Consider how much time you’ll be spending outside, how much extra heat you need, and what you’ll be doing while wearing your new foot warmers. Once you can answer these questions, you’ll be ready to purchase a great pair of heated insoles.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated insoles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How did mummified mice end up on volcanoes in the Atacama Desert? https://www.popsci.com/environment/mummified-mice-volcanoes/ Mon, 23 Oct 2023 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=582199
A view from the summit of Volcán Salín, one of three Andean volcanoes where researchers uncovered the mummified cadavers of mice. Analyses of the mummies, combined with the capture of live specimens, suggest that the rodents scaled the Mars-like peaks on their own — and are somehow managing to live on them.
A view from the summit of Volcán Salín, one of three Andean volcanoes where researchers uncovered the mummified cadavers of mice. Analyses of the mummies, combined with the capture of live specimens, suggest that the rodents scaled the Mars-like peaks on their own — and are somehow managing to live on them. Jay Storz/University of Nebraska,Lincoln

It’s still a mystery how the leaf-eared mouse survives these Mars-like conditions.

The post How did mummified mice end up on volcanoes in the Atacama Desert? appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A view from the summit of Volcán Salín, one of three Andean volcanoes where researchers uncovered the mummified cadavers of mice. Analyses of the mummies, combined with the capture of live specimens, suggest that the rodents scaled the Mars-like peaks on their own — and are somehow managing to live on them.
A view from the summit of Volcán Salín, one of three Andean volcanoes where researchers uncovered the mummified cadavers of mice. Analyses of the mummies, combined with the capture of live specimens, suggest that the rodents scaled the Mars-like peaks on their own — and are somehow managing to live on them. Jay Storz/University of Nebraska,Lincoln

It’s a little slice of Mars right here on Earth. The volcanoes of the dry and arid Atacama desert in Argentina and Chile climb roughly 20,000 feet above sea level, with blistering winds, parched conditions, and freezing temperatures. However, a team of biologists who discovered a living two ounce leaf-eared mouse three years ago, have now found multiple mummified mice in these extreme conditions. The findings are described in a study published October 23 in the journal Current Biology.

[Related: Male mice are utterly terrified of bananas.]

“The most surprising thing about our discovery is that mammals could be living on the summits of volcanoes in such an inhospitable, Mars-like environment,” study co-author and University of Nebraska, Lincoln evolutionary biologist Jay Storz said in a statement. “Well-trained mountain climbers can tolerate such extreme elevations during a one-day summit attempt, but the fact that mice are actually living at such elevations demonstrates that we have underestimated the physiological tolerances of small mammals.”

Finding freeze-dried mummy mice

As far back as the 1970s and 1980s, archaeologists reported seeing mouse cadavers at these extreme heights. The assumption was that they naturally must have hitched a ride up the summit with the Incas. These sites are considered sacred to the Inca and the belief was that they could have been brought up along with firewood up the slopes or potentially were offered up as sacrifices.

“You can’t fault the archaeologists for thinking this way, because what other explanation is there?” said Storz. “Nothing could be living up there, so they had to have been brought there.”

Inadvertently, doubts on the mice as hitchhikers theory were cast early in 2020. Storz and his friend and fellow mountaineer Mario Pérez Mamani, captured a live specimen of leaf-eared mouse atop the 22,000-foot peak of Llullaillaco, a volcano on Chile-Argentina border. 

Along with the discovery of more live mice, they’ve now found 13 mouse mummies on the summits of three neighboring volcanoes—Salín, Púlar, and Copiapo—all close to four miles above sea level.

“These are basically freeze-dried, mummified mice,” Storz said.

It’s all relative

The frozen in time state also helped preserve their DNA and crucial genetic information. Alongside collaborators from the University of Montana, Storz compared the genetic variation among the leaf-eared mice collected in the lowlands, midlands, and highlands of Atacama Desert. This cross-habitat zone analysis can help trace the evolutionary history of animal populations that are separated by physical barriers, distance, or altitude.

[Related: 1,000-year-old mummy with full head of hair and intact jaw found in Peru.]

The team questioned whether the mummified mice living on top of the Andes Mountains may be a different subpopulation of the leaf-eared rodent that has a colonization history that differs from their more low-land dwelling peers. According to Storz, they found that the mice from the summits and those from the flanks or the base of the volcanoes in the surrounding desert are “one big happy family.”

A leaf-eared mouse called Phyllotis vaccarum in a gloved hand. CREDIT: Marcial Quiroga-Carmona.
A species of leaf-eared mouse called Phyllotis vaccarum. CREDIT: Marcial Quiroga-Carmona.

Two pairs of the leaf-eared mummies found on Salín were also closely related, possibly siblings or parents and offspring. Along with the discovery of the live mouse burrows, the equal ratio of males to females found among the mummies, also points to the leaf-eared mouse living in and not just touring these summits. 

‘How in God’s name is anything living up there?’

Puna de Atacama is among Earth’s most inhospitable places and NASA has visited the Atacama to practice for future missions on Mars. Its less than 0.6 inches of annual rainfall make it a good analogue for the Red Planet and a rovers designed to dig in Martian soil to search for microbial life have been tested here. 

“Even at the base of the volcanoes, the mice are living in an extreme, Martian environment. And then, on the summits of the volcanoes, it’s even more so. It feels like outer space,” said Storz. “It just boggles the mind that any kind of animal, let alone a warm-blooded mammal, could be surviving and functioning in that environment. When you experience it all firsthand, it even further impresses upon you: How in God’s name is anything living up there?”

To learn more, Storz and team have established laboratory colonies of leaf-eared mice that were collected from various altitudes. They acclimated each group to conditions that simulate the Puna de Atacama, hoping to pinpoint the physiological adaptations that the rodents cope with life at the extreme. They’re are also continuing mountaineering surveys of small mammals living on high Andean peaks in Argentina, Bolivia, and Chile.

They believe it possible that avoiding predators such as birds of prey, foxes, mountain lions, and smaller cats could be what’s driving the mice to live here. 

“But why they’re ascending to these extreme elevations is still a mystery,” Stoz said.

The post How did mummified mice end up on volcanoes in the Atacama Desert? appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Get an 86-inch 4K LG TV cheaper than ever with Best Buy’s early Black Friday deal https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-buy-tv-deal-pre-black-friday-2023/ Mon, 23 Oct 2023 14:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=582228
An array of LG TVs arranged on a white backdrop. Each one has a logo and colorful pattern on the screen.
Stan Horaczek

LG's 86-inch LED TV is just $899 right now, which is cheaper than the price clubs.

The post Get an 86-inch 4K LG TV cheaper than ever with Best Buy’s early Black Friday deal appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
An array of LG TVs arranged on a white backdrop. Each one has a logo and colorful pattern on the screen.
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

It wasn’t too many years ago that an 86-inch TV wasn’t just expensive; it was almost impossible to get. Right now, however, Best Buy has the LG 86” Class UR7800 Series LED 4K UHD Smart webOS TV for just $899. That’s $100 cheaper than you can even get at the big price club stores that require an annual subscription. That’s a lot of TV for not a lot of money.

LG 86” Class UR7800 Series LED 4K UHD Smart webOS TV $899 (was $1,249)

This TV is a very solid deal even for its retail price, but at $899, it’s an absolute steal. It offers full 4K resolution and a powerful image processor to upscale all your older content into UHD. You get three HDMI ports, full HDR compatibility, and LG’s own WebOS operating system. It’s not the latest and greatest, but it’s huge, bright, and offers Filmmaker Mode to help movies look exactly as their directors intended. Imagine hanging this on your wall and watching Suits while all those other suckers battle it out for TVs on Black Friday.

More TV deals

The post Get an 86-inch 4K LG TV cheaper than ever with Best Buy’s early Black Friday deal appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Natural disasters can burn out our hormonal systems for years https://www.popsci.com/environment/tsunami-hormone-long-term/ Mon, 23 Oct 2023 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581188
A woman and man in Indonesia view the destruction from a tsunami.
A wife and husband hold hands as they view their former residential area that was leveled by the 2004 tsunami. Dimas ardian/Getty Images

Survivors' cortisol levels were affected more than a decade after a devastating tsunami.

The post Natural disasters can burn out our hormonal systems for years appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A woman and man in Indonesia view the destruction from a tsunami.
A wife and husband hold hands as they view their former residential area that was leveled by the 2004 tsunami. Dimas ardian/Getty Images

Our bodies are incredibly adept at reacting to stressors, fighting to keep our biological systems balanced whenever we encounter a new shock or threat. But this equilibrium act has limits, and new research suggests that traumatic weather events can set our hormones awry long term. 

In December 2004, a colossal tsunami hit the coast of Indonesia, killing more than 230,000 people. The disaster devastated communities, and many of those who survived reported symptoms of post-traumatic stress. But the health effects extend far beyond those initial weeks, months, or even years. More than a decade later, the tsunami continues to have health consequences for survivors, according to new research published in the journal Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences. 

As part of a larger project that aims to survey the wave’s long-term effects, scientists joined collaborators in Indonesia in 2018 to study the primary stress hormone cortisol. By sampling the molecule from the hair of adults, the researchers found that women who survived the tsunami had lower cortisol levels compared to those who did not live through the disaster. This pattern, researchers say, indicates a type of hormonal “burnout” in response to repeated stressors. The findings emphasize how the trauma of natural disasters and extreme weather events—which will only increase in frequency with climate change—can have extended effects on our well-being far after initial events. 

The authors of the new work homed in on a specific regulatory system, the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal (HPA) axis, which controls our levels of cortisol, among other hormones. Normally, cortisol rises as part of a healthy response to stressors, and lowers again when that stress has passed. But when faced with repeated high levels of stress, the HPA axis can experience “burnout,” which can lead to “longer term inability to mount the healthy response you want to react to your daily stressors,” says the study’s first author, Ralph Lawton, currently a doctoral student in health policy and economics at Harvard University. In other words, repeated high levels of stress can wear out your HPA axis, leaving it unable to produce adequate cortisol moving forward. 

[Related: The biggest tool we have to fight climate anxiety is community]

To conduct this research, they collected hair from more than 600 individuals from communities badly affected by the 2004 tsunami, and quantified the cortisol located in the 1.2 inches of hair closest to the scalp. HPA axis burnout was seen most strongly in women who were exposed to the tsunami’s direct impacts—their hair cortisol levels were 30 percent lower than counterparts not similarly exposed. It’s not that there wasn’t an effect in men, Lawton clarifies, but in their analyses the effect in men wasn’t statistically significant, so they can’t say for sure. 

“The consequences of large-scale disasters for stress have been established, but only over the short term,” says Duncan Thomas, an economist at Duke University and one of the leads of the new research. “But I’m not aware of a long term study that’s been able to show that they persist,” he says, “which is really the important contribution of our work.” 

But the long arm of health effects brought on by the tsunami is not surprising to Arun Karlamangla, a professor of medicine at the University of California, Los Angeles, who was not involved in this new research but has collaborated with several of the authors. There is plenty of evidence, for example, that traumatic and stressful events in childhood can affect the function of the HPA axis and cortisol levels of individuals well into adulthood, twenty years or more later, he says.

[Related on PopSci+: Stress can literally kill you. Here’s how.]

Having cortisol levels that are too low is significant for health, says Lawton. It’s associated with lethargy, feeling less resilient and adaptable to daily stressors, and difficulty processing anxiety and stress. And these study participants who have lower cortisol levels in their hair also tended to report poorer perceptions of their own health, says Thomas. Karlamangla also notes that cortisol is also important for memory and learning.

Natural disasters and extreme weather events will only become more frequent with climate change, and it’s possible that many of the long term effects that arise will be similar to those from this tsunami. In that way this research could be broadly applicable to the “long term effects of climate change,” Thomas says. These findings reiterate the need for resources to be funneled toward interventions, such as cognitive behavioral therapy, he says. Those should be made accessible to local communities—in their own languages—in the aftermath of disaster, he says. In the future, intervening this way will not only improve immediate outcomes for people, “it’s probably going to pay dividends long term.”

The post Natural disasters can burn out our hormonal systems for years appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best hand warmers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-hand-warmers/ Wed, 10 Feb 2021 13:59:28 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-hand-warmers-2/
Four different hand warmers separated into fourths on a plain background
Amanda Reed

Whether you’re looking for reusable, rechargeable, or disposable hand warmers, there’s one that’s right for you.

The post The best hand warmers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four different hand warmers separated into fourths on a plain background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best budget An orange box of HotHands Warmers on a plain background HotHands Warmers
SEE IT

Just shake-and-go to get warmth on-the-go with this wallet-friendly hand warmers.

Best rechargeable A blue OCOOPA Rechargeable Hand Warmer on a plain background OCOOPA Rechargeable Hand Warmer
SEE IT

Get up to 15 hours of warmth in just five seconds.

Best for hunting A Hunter Safety System Heated Muff on a plain background Hunter Safety System Heated Muff
SEE IT

This fleeced-line muff that contains heat coils that can stay active for up to five hours.

If you’re someone whose extremities suffer in the cold, think about investing in hand warmers. Have you ever tried tying your shoes, finding your car keys, or getting out your credit card when you can’t feel your fingers? Not fun. Cold weather can lead to poor circulation, which can, in turn, lead to uselessly frigid hands and frozen fingers. Hand warmers are a great way to keep you comfortable for hours at a time so you can get on with your life and stop desperately puffing warm air into cupped palms. They’re discreet, effective, and super portable, making them suitable for use on the go. They’re also great for camping, hiking, ice skating, and hockey, as well as non-sporting events like watching holiday parades, tailgating, waiting in line for the newest iPhone, you name it. You’ve probably used disposable hand warmers if you’ve ever gone skiing, but there are more long-lasting products we think you’ll want to see. The best hand warmers help you say goodbye to tripling up on gloves just to walk to the grocery store.

How we chose the best hand warmers

We didn’t want to leave you with cold feet looking for the best hand warmers, especially if you’re trying to prevent frostbite or pack your emergency car kit. We looked at critical reviews, under recommendations, and conducted heavy research to find the best hand warmers.

The best hand warmers: Reviews & Recommendations

Hand warmers are just one of the many things you can bring with you on an outdoor adventure to keep you warm. From football games to fall hikes, one of our choices should stop frozen fingers before they happen.

Best overall: HotSnapZ Reusable Hand Warmers

HotSnapZ

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: Yes
  • Duration: 30-40 minutes
  • Temperature range: 115-120°F

Pros

  • Reusable
  • Last 200-300 uses
  • Instant heat

Cons

  • Doesn’t last as long as other options on this list

These HotSnapz hand warmers produce instant heat without using electricity or other conducting material. They last for 30 to 40 minutes, so they’re the perfect companion for a brisk morning walk or a quick errand. After your first use, simply boil them for 10 to 15 minutes; (we recommend fixing yourself a cup of tea with some of the water while you wait), let cool, then snap the internal metal disk and soak up the heat.

Best reusable long-lasting warmers: Zippo Hand Warmer

Zippo

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: Yes
  • Duration: 6-12 hours
  • Temperature range: N/A

Pros

  • Refillable and reusable
  • Long-lasting
  • Flameless warmth

Cons

  • Not TSA-friendly

Zippo hand warmers are the way to go if you think a refillable option is right for you. Zippo makes both a six- and 12-hour model in various colors and styles; each comes with a protective case, lighter fluid funnel, and detailed safety guide. You can also easily purchase additional lighter fuel when you need to refill.

Best rechargeable: OCOOPA Rechargeable Hand Warmer

Ocoopa

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: Yes
  • Duration: Up to 15 hours
  • Temperature range: Up to 131°F

Pros

  • Safe on skin
  • Can be used as a power bank
  • All-day warming

Cons

  • Casing scratches easily

This rechargeable hand warmer helps you stay toasty all day. It lasts between eight to 15 hours with a full battery from just three-and-a-half hours of charging time. Simply plug the device into a USB-C or micro USB-compatible charger. Adjust the heat by selecting one of the three levels based on the outside temperature, calculated for 5, 32, and 50 degrees Fahrenheit. Bonus: This one is safe on the skin.

Best for skiing: Snow Deer Heated Gloves

Snow Deer

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: Yes
  • Duration: 2.5-6 hours depending on settings
  • Temperature range: Up to 150°F

Pros

  • Water-resistant
  • Can use with phone
  • Soft lining inside glove

Cons

  • Palm runs small

These rechargeable heated gloves come in five sizes, from small to XX-Large. They’re perfect for a day on the mountain and stay warm between two-and-a-half to six hours. There are three temperature settings, starting at 100 degrees Fahrenheit and going all the way up to 150 degrees. Durable and water-resistant, these are also equipped with touch sensors so you can still use your phone. For more options, here’s our list of the best heated gloves.

Best for hunting: Hunter Safety System Heated Muff

Hunter Safety System

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: Yes
  • Duration: N/A
  • Temperature range: N/A

Pros

  • Storage pockets
  • Soft lining
  • Ergonomic

Cons

  • Power bank not included

Looking for the best hand warmers for hunting? This muff from Hunter Safety System does, in fact, come heated, though you can also purchase a model sans extra heat. The interior is lined with fleece that contains heat coils that can stay active for up to five hours. You’ll need to charge and connect your own power bank, which can easily slide into the designated built-in pocket. Keep in mind that this model is less water-resistant than others, so if you foresee rain during an all-day hunt, look for something that is guaranteed waterproof.

Best budget: HotHands Warmers

HotHands

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: No
  • Duration: Up to 10 hours
  • Temperature range: 140-160°F

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • Long-lasting
  • Provides consistent heat

Cons

  • Not reusable
  • Takes 15-30 minutes to heat up

These disposable hand warmers from HotHands are a staple when it comes to keeping warm. All you need to do is shake the pack vigorously for a couple of seconds, triggering a safe chemical reaction that will lead to up to 10 hours of consistent heat in 15 to 30 minutes.

Things to consider when looking for the best hand warmers

The best hand warmers are designed to keep you toasty throughout the duration of your outdoor activity. Some are reusable, some are rechargeable, and some are disposable, perfect if you want to toss them in the trash after you hit the slopes or get a drink après ski. We’ve broken down the various types of hand warmers out there and also provided some of our favorite options below.

Let’s start with the basics: chemically activated, reusable hand warmers

Reusable hand warmers are a fantastic way to keep cozy in cold weather. They eliminate the need to run out to store for replacements, plus, they can be easily shared. There are a few popular types of reusable hand warmers, differentiated by heating mechanism.

Some reusable pairs look like ice/heat packs found in first aid kits. These are chemically activated. Inside each pack is a metal disk that needs to be snapped or bent to release a heat-generating compound. Inside, sodium acetate (a food-safe ingredient found in salt), water, and energy mix to form solid crystals. This process produces an exothermic reaction, raising the pack’s temperature to roughly 130 degrees Fahrenheit in under 10 seconds. After a pack’s first use, you’ll need to boil the hand warmers for approximately 10 minutes before using them again, effectively reactivating the chemicals and returning the sodium acetate to its liquid form. These typically last between 30 minutes to an hour, though you can extend the heating time by adding extra packs or keeping them in coat pockets. If you’re an athlete, you can use them for additional relief on sore muscles. They are safe on the skin, but of course, take precautions when handling hot objects.

What are the best hand warmers for longevity?

If you need more than an hour of heat time but like the idea of simple reusable hand warmers without worrying about recharging, lighter-fuel-based models are the best option for you. Yes, we understand that filling something with lighter fluid, activating it, and stuffing it in your pockets seems a little outlandish, but trust us when we say you’ll keep warm all day.

Much like a regular lighter, these hand warmers, once filled with fuel, use a catalytic burner to generate heat. (Unlike a regular burner, you won’t see any external flames.) To ignite, hold a flame to it for roughly 10 seconds. Doing so will create a small internal furnace that can burn anywhere from six to 12 hours, depending on the model. Remember, once the warmer is ignited, you won’t be able to stop the heat until it naturally burns off. You can, however, place the hand warmer on a fireproof surface once you’re done using it and let it naturally smolder out.

Refillable hand warmers are not meant to be applied directly to the skin; most come with a small pouch into which you can place the warmer and then hold or slip into a coat pocket. Due to the delicate nature of the fill material, a.k.a. flammable fluid, we don’t recommend using these for intense sports such as skiing, snowboarding, ice skating, or hockey. We do, however, recommend them for long hikes, camping trips, cold offices, and cross-country car rides. There’s nothing worse than driving through Colorado in the middle of winter when your heat is broken.

Consider rechargeable hand warmers

If you’re ready to get a little more high-tech, plenty of rechargeable hand warmers are out there. These typically use electricity and a lithium-ion battery to generate heat. The models might be slightly thicker than refillable options, but they don’t differ too much in overall size, so they’ll still fit nicely in pockets or gloves.

The pros of rechargeables include long-lasting warmth with the ability to heat between two to eight hours. Plus, if you’re done with your outdoor activity or sufficiently warmed up, you can simply turn off the device. Many have heat-customization settings and the ability to charge other electronic devices simultaneously. You just have to remember to charge them. Simply plug in the hand warmer when not in use, and you’ll never be left out in the cold.

While we love a rechargeable option, there are a few cons you should know about. Rechargeable hand warmers are susceptible to water damage, so it’s probably best to keep them away from snow and sleet. Also, heat consistency can be a bit sporadic depending on the temperature outside. The overall heating time can also be affected by the cold, impacting the battery lifespan. Overall, we consider these to be minor impediments because a rechargeable warmer’s heating time is guaranteed to be longer than a chemically activated option, and the custom control is far greater than a lighter fluid-filled hand warmer.

Do you plan on hitting the slopes?

One of the most common reasons to purchase hand warmers is to keep your fingers from freezing while on the mountains. Though there are some amazing regular ski and winter gloves out there (heated, featured above, and not heated), it doesn’t hurt to have a little extra warmth, especially if you’re outside shredding all day. Hand warmers for skiers or snowboarders usually need to fit inside the glove rather than slide inside a coat pocket; they also need to be relatively flexible or small if you’re skiing with poles.

Though certainly non-traditional, it’s worth looking for glove/hand-warmer hybrids. Heated gloves use the same lithium-ion battery technology as the rechargeable ones listed above, but the active heaters are fit to the glove, so you can maintain grip and flexibility without maneuvering around a large chunk of plastic and metal. Plus, you won’t have to worry about the snow because these gloves are designed with an outer waterproof shell, which protects the batteries from any liquid damage.

Our second favorite option for skiing is the disposable hand warmer from brands like HotHands or Little Hotties. We’ll dive deeper into disposable hand warmers when we talk about our favorite budget pick, but these are a good option to keep in the back of your brain when thinking about ski-appropriate heating options. And when you’re done skiing, you can slip into a pair of heated slippers, or shoes with heated insoles, for warmth and comfort in the lodge.

Do you need something classic for hunting?

While muffs aren’t going to help much if your hands need to be out and at the ready, they’re a traditional way to stay cozy in a blind or tree stand. Muffs are, of course, reusable and can be adjusted to fit your frame. They’re made from many materials, including fur, shearling, or synthetic fabric. The outer layer will often be water-resistant and windproof, so you won’t need to worry about inclement weather. Some muffs even have special internal pockets for extra hand warmers to slide in, and others come with external pockets or shell pockets, so not only will your hands stay warm, but you’ll also get some additional storage space. A muff’s durability and reliability make it a great choice for hunters everywhere. We recommend bringing this and maybe one or two disposable hand warmers along with you, just in case you need even more warmth on those brisk early mornings.

Best budget hand warmers: What you get for under $20

Luckily, hand warmers don’t tend to be prohibitively expensive, unless you’re looking for high-end gloves or a really large rechargeable battery. That being said, reusable options will be more expensive than disposable ones, though disposable ones may be less cost-effective over time, depending on how you use them. If you want a more budget-friendly reusable hand warmer, the first thing to look for is brand reputation and clear safety guidelines; this is especially true if you go for something chemically activated or lighter-fluid-based. Disposable hand warmers are likely to be the cheapest option and work great for almost any outdoor activity; They’re thin and flexible, and they slide easily into gloves or pockets.

FAQs

Q: Can hand warmers expire?

Technically, yes. The expiration for each product is brand-specific. For example, the HotHands warmers we listed above have a shelf life of three to four years. Rechargeable hand warmers usually have a life span that includes a certain amount of charges (typically 300). Low-tech chemically activated chargers also tend to have an expiration date; HotSnapZ usually become defective after 200 to 300 snaps. Check out each product’s specs for more information on lifespan.

Q: How do disposable hand warmers work?

Like reusable hand warmers, disposable hand warmers rely on chemical activation instead of lighter fluid or lithium batteries. Each pouch typically includes salt, iron powder, activated carbon, and a little water. When the pouch is taken out of its airtight seal and exposed to oxygen, the iron powder causes an exothermic reaction, generating heat. The carbon helps evenly disperse the heat, and an absorbent material like wood or a polymer helps retain it throughout the day.

Q: Do I need to order a separate pouch for hand warmers?

Generally speaking, you do not need to purchase a separate hand warmer pouch. Refillable hand warmers will definitely need to be placed in a pouch to avoid burns, but the model you buy should come with one. Of course, if you end up losing it, definitely place an order for another. Other hand warmers, including rechargeable, chemically activated, and disposable styles, are safe on the skin once they reach the appropriate temperature. If you want an extra barrier because it’s just a little too hot in the mitten, you can place them in bags or wrap them in a thin cloth. We recommend using sunglasses bags or thin socks.

Q: Can you take hand warmers on a plane?

Handwarmers using carbon, charcoal, and iron compounds are allowed in carry-on and checked baggage. Handwarmers that use hazardous or flammable liquids are not allowed. Check TSA and FAA guidelines for more details.

Final thoughts on the best hand warmers

The best hand warmers for you fit your lifestyle and needs. If you’re active in short bursts, a reusable, chemically activated option might be right for you. If you’re going on longer camping trips with no electricity in sight, grab a refillable, lighter-fuel-based model. If you’re constantly going numb in the fingertips and need something reliable and reusable, reach for the rechargeable one. And if you just need something to get you out and about or on the slopes with all-day protection from the cold, consider a disposable model. No matter what, stay bundled out there.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best hand warmers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best space heaters in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-space-heater/ Thu, 03 Feb 2022 18:33:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-space-heater/
A lineup of the best space heaters on a white background
Amanda Reed

Space heaters are efficient, safe, and powerful, keeping you warm and cozy no matter the weather (or the state of your furnace).

The post The best space heaters in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best space heaters on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A Lasko space heater on a blue and white background Lasko 5775 Electric 1500W Ceramic Space Heater Tower
SEE IT

With 1,500 watts of heating power and multiple settings, this heater can tailor the temperature of your space.

Best for large rooms Dr. Infrared Portable Space Heater Dr. Infrared Portable Space Heater
SEE IT

This quiet-running, powerful pick can warm even large spaces with a range of 50 to 85 degrees.

Best electric Dyson Pure Humidify+Cool Cryptomic Dyson Pure Hot + Cool HP07
SEE IT

This HEPA-approved Dyson space heater can also act as a purifier and fan for year-round functionality.

If you’re tired of stockpiling blankets, extra socks, and heated slippers to keep you warm, it might be time to consider getting a space heater. These powerful appliances are a great way to get cozy without installing a complicated heating system. If your radiator just isn’t cutting it or someone insists on keeping a window open to freshen the room up, a space heater could be the perfect solution. The best space heaters are designed specifically to warm up spaces both small and large; they should be portable, effective, and fast-acting.

Buying a space heater is a worthwhile investment, but you want to make sure you look at all the information available about each product to determine which will be right for you and your space. To get you started, we’ve created this brief guide to help you learn more about these lean, mean, cold-fighting machines. Get ready to cozy up with your favorite books without reaching for your hat and gloves with the best space heaters.

How we chose the best space heaters

To select the best space heaters that will stave off even the worst winter chills and frigid breezes, we compared over 50 products—looking at reviews, wattage, heat type, bonus features, and brands. From high-tech options like the Dyson Pure Hot + Cool to an energy-efficient oil-filled radiator, these space heaters can suit a variety of needs and spaces. Whether you have a massive room that needs high-wattage heating or are trying to warm up your apartment on a budget, we compared reviews and specs to choose only reliable and quality heaters.

The best space heaters: Reviews & Recommendations

The best space heaters can help you stay warm while you wait for your landlord to turn the radiators on. If you’re always cold, they provide an extra layer of warmth and comfort to your office, living room, bedroom, or garage. We’ve narrowed down some of the cozy space heaters on the market—at least one should melt your winter blues.

Best overall: Lasko 5775 Electric 1500W Ceramic Space Heater Tower

Lasko

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you’re looking for a high-quality space heater on a budget, look no further than this tower heater from Lasko.

Specs

  • Watts: 1500 watts
  • Dimensions: 23.5 x 8.5 x 7.5 inch.
  • Heating type: Convection

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • Degree increments
  • Remote control

Cons

  • Noisy compared to other heaters

Space heaters can get pricey. Get something that’s budget-friendly—and high-quality—with this Lasko 5775 Electric 1500W Ceramic Space Heater Tower. It’s from the same company as our best overall pick, just at a lower price point. Like pricier options, this one is 1500W with low, high, and thermostat-controlled settings. Built-in safety precautions include cool-touch housing and overheat protection. Plus, an auto-off timer gives you peace of mind if you forget to turn this appliance off. Although it doesn’t have a remote control, it does include an easy-to-read selection pad, carry handle, and six-foot cord for easy transport from room to room.

Best for large rooms: Dr. Infrared Portable Space Heater

Dr. Infrared

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This pick is well-equipped to heat larger spaces like living rooms, large bedrooms, studios, or garages with its high wattage and high temp settings.

Specs

  • Wattage: 1,500 watts
  • Dimensions: 13 x 12.5 x 17 inch.
  • Heating type: Radiant

Pros

  • 12-hour automatic shut-off
  • 50 to 85-degree heat range
  • Heats large spaces

Cons

  • Heavier and less portable

This radiant, infrared heater (its big brother is our best overall pick in this category) heats up big spaces easily and efficiently. With 1,500 watts of power and a heat output temperature of up to 85 degrees, perfect for large rooms, you can stay warm without needing to get up close. It has a 12-hour automatic shut-off timer, remote control, tip-over protection, a 72-inch electric cord, and caster wheels for maximum mobility.

Best energy saving: De’Longhi Oil-Filled Radiator Space Heater

De’Longhi

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Unlike the other space heaters on this list, the De’Longhi pick uses oil to maintain its heat for an energy-efficient and quiet-running design.

Specs

  • Wattage: 1,500 watts
  • Dimensions: 27.76 x 18.5 x 7.1 inch.
  • Heating type: Radiant

Pros

  • Portable design with wheels
  • Energy-efficient
  • Quiet heating

Cons

  • Pricier than some other models

This energy-efficient space heater will stay hot even after turning it off, extending its heating power without sucking up electricity. Additionally, you can select eco-mode, optimizing power usage with a built-in thermostat for additional energy saving. It has 1,500 watts of power, automatic shutoff to prevent overheating, and thermal slots that funnel hot air while maintaining a low surface temperature so you won’t be at risk of burning yourself.

Best for bedrooms: Vornado AVH10 Vortex Heater

Vornado

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This small space heater has safety features like tip-over protection, cool-touch base, and automatic shut-off, which make it a great pick for smaller spaces.

Specs

  • Watts: 750 watts
  • Dimensions: 11.7 x 9.3 x 12 inch.
  • Heating type: Convection

Pros

  • Compact design
  • Bonus safety features
  • Auto climate control

Cons

  • Less wattage than other options

The Vornado VH10 is a great space heater that comes equipped with thoughtful, extra safety features. It boasts tip-over protection, a cool-touch case, and automatic safety shut-off. It also has a timer and auto-climate control, which senses how much heat and circulation is required to maintain the set temperature. With two quiet heat settings at 750 and 1,200 watts, as well as a fan-only option, you will be comfortably basking at home, worry-free.

Best electric: Dyson Pure Hot + Cool HP07

Dyson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For those who want a multifunction device that can be used year-round, the Dyson Pure Hot + Cool does just that. It filters your air for allergens and dust with a HEPA-certified filter, heats in cooler months, and can act as a fan once the temperatures rise back up.

Specs

  • Watts: 1500 watts
  • Dimensions: 9.76 x 8.07 x 30.08 inch.
  • Heating type: Convection

Pros

  • HEPA Filter
  • Captures allergens
  • Sleek and aesthetic design

Cons

  • Expensive for a “space heater”
  • May be less effective than other models

The Dyson Pure Hot + Cool Air Purifier is a dream with all the high-tech, special features needed to heat and purify an entire room simultaneously (why another one of their models is our top overall pick for home air purifiers). This multifunction feat of engineering treats and projects air, cooling or heating it as needed. It offers 350-degree oscillation, a sealed HEPA filter to trap 99.7 percent of allergens, and voice-control compatibility with Alexa. Equipped with three intelligent sensors, this air purifier, cooling fan, and space heater will also monitor pollution events in real time, alerting you to any problematic airborne particles or gases via the Dyson app. The heater/fan has 10 speed settings, Bluetooth connectivity, quiet operation, and multiple additional settings.

Best wall heater: Dreo Smart Wall Heater

Dreo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: DIY your own home heating system with this easy-to-install wall-mounted heater that can be controlled via a smart assistant or app.

Specs

  • Wattage: 1,500 watts
  • Dimensions: 4 x 20 x 13 inch.
  • Heating type: Radiant

Pros

  • App and smart assistant connectivity
  • Easy to install
  • Quiet

Cons

  • Might not be the best at heating enclosed outdoor spaces

If your current heating system isn’t cutting it, consider adding this heater, which looks just like an AC unit but is mounted to your wall instead of a window. 120-degree wide oscillation heating distributes warm air evenly from ceiling to floor to quickly heat the room. You can schedule room heating hours to match when you leave for work or return from walking the dog. Access heater settings via the Dreo app (for iOS and Android) or via your Alexa or Google Home device. Its LED panel automatically adjusts, so you don’t have to worry about the light messing with your sleep. Mounting the wall heater is just as easy as using it. Simply follow the included drilling guide and simple instructions, and you’re done. No more chilly nights worrying about causing a fire hazard.

Best budget: Lasko 1500W Ceramic Tower Space Heater

Lasko

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This classic-design tower heater can fit in just about any space—and with an oscillating function and impressive wattage, it can heat up a room quickly and efficiently.

Specs

  • Wattage: 1,500 watts
  • Dimensions: 21.63 x 7.1 x 7.9 inch.
  • Heating type: Convection

Pros

  • 8-hour auto-off timer
  • Slim design
  • High wattage

Cons

  • Only two heat settings

This Lasko ceramic tower heater has a footprint of less than eight square inches but boasts 1,500 watts of heating power, making it ideal for warming up cold rooms in a hurry without taking up too much space. It includes a number of safety features like an 8-hour auto-shutoff timer, overheat protection, and a cool-touch exterior. Its widespread oscillation and adjustable thermostat make it a flexible choice that allows users to custom-tailor their heating experience. The heater’s cable is 72 inches in length, making this model a good choice for rooms with few outlets; plus, the unit includes a multifunction remote control for added convenience.

What to consider when picking the best space heaters

There are six things you should consider to find the best space heater for your needs. Think about what type of personal heater you want, how much space you’re trying to warm, how much power your heater will need, what the safety features are, and finally, what special features might be available. If you can get specific about your requirements, you won’t have any trouble finding a reliable, long-lasting unit you’re happy with.

What type of space heater best fits your needs?

There are three main types of heating, with a few subcategories you should know about.

Convection heating is the most common and efficient type for single-room use. These space heaters work by circulating currents across an element, such as an electric coil or oil, which are often blown out and drawn back in using a fan. Some models don’t include a fan, relying on natural airflow; this method is quieter but takes longer to heat an entire room. Ceramic heaters borrow from this method, using an internal, self-regulating ceramic element and fan to heat a room quickly.

Radiant heating is excellent for warming a targeted area like your bed or desk chair. They heat up almost instantaneously using quartz or other metals and a reflector to direct heat, though some will implement a fan. Infrared heaters are very similar, using infrared quartz bulbs to generate radiating heat. Unlike convection heating, this method will not warm up the air, making it better for targeted warmth. That said, it will heat a room if left on for a long time.

Micathermic heating is an efficient combination of convection and radiant processes. A micathermic heater radiates warmth off of a panel that is then circulated naturally throughout the room. To do this, these space heaters need to be reasonably large, but most models can be mounted on the wall to save space if necessary. Because micathermic heaters don’t use a fan, they are quiet and clean; they don’t circulate dust or pet dander, which makes them great for those who are allergy-prone or have asthma. Portable radiator heaters use micathermic methods to generate heat via oil encased inside.

How big of a room are you trying to heat?

While it’s clear that radiant heaters are best for targeted use and convection or micathermic models might be best for larger areas, there’s more to understand when it comes to room size and heater specs.

When it comes to heating, wattage is king. For space heaters, you want to have 10 watts of power per square foot; this is especially true if your portable heater is the primary source of warmth. If you have super tall ceilings, over 8 feet high, you’ll want to multiply your space’s total square footage by the ceiling height and 1.25. For rooms lacking insulation, add an extra 2 watts to the equation. If you just need a little extra blast of heat here and there, you can relax on the wattage rule, but only slightly.

If you have a lot of ground to cover, it can be hard to find a supplementary heater that will keep you and any guests cozy for hours at a time. Infrared heaters are a bit more flexible because they warm up people and objects; while small models won’t do much, a large infrared heater can cover a larger room because it will target objects as well as people. Below you can find our favorite model.

How much energy will your space heater use?

Using a space heater regularly can suck up a lot of power, so it’s essential to look for energy-efficient models that won’t cause your electric bill to skyrocket. If you want to figure out how much your heater will cost you look up how much you currently pay for electricity per kilowatt-hour (this info is often listed on your monthly bill), determine the amount of time your space heater will be on, and calculate the kilowatts used per hour by dividing the maximum wattage by 1,000. Finally, multiply all three together, and that’s your average cost per day.

Unfortunately, at this time, the United States Environmental Protection Agency hasn’t given any existing space heater an Energy Star rating, but that doesn’t mean you can’t look for models with energy-efficient features. First things first: Don’t buy a space heater that has more wattage than you need. Just because it’s powerful doesn’t mean it’s the best space heater for you. Oil-filled radiator heaters are a great option for energy-efficient heating in a tinier area because they remain hot for a time, even after they are turned off. Secondly, consider investing in a model that includes a built-in thermostat and multiple output settings. This will conserve energy over time because the heater won’t be overcompensating when the temperature in the room changes. Timed heat settings and automatic shutoff can also aid efficiency, especially if you tend to forget to shut off appliances. Some heaters will come with an auto-eco setting designed to monitor room temperature and suggest a lower output temperature to heat the room, keeping it warm but not hot.

What extra features make the best space heater?

Once you’ve figured out the size, specs, and safety settings you need to narrow down your selection, you can focus on the fun bonuses that make the best space heater. We’ve already mentioned a few helpful features, including a thermostat function, auto-eco mode, and timer settings. Another popular bonus feature is the inclusion of a remote for easy control. This is going to be a lifesaver for those times you get perfectly comfortable, all snuggled up in bed before remembering to turn the heater on. It gets better: Some space heaters are considered “smart,” which means they can connect via WiFi to your phone, providing a stream of information regarding your space’s air quality, humidity, and more. Some smart models come with a night-time mode to quiet noisy fans, HEPA filters for air purification, and dual-cooling systems that utilize the fan function, bypassing the heat generator. Of course, the more special features you tack on, the higher the price but depending on the frequency of use and overall efficiency of various models, you could end up saving money over time. Higher-quality products experience fewer breakdowns and don’t need to be replaced as often, plus who wouldn’t want to control their space heater using a voice assistant like Alexa? One step closer to building your fully equipped smart house.

What safety features should you keep in mind?

We cannot overstate how important safety features are when it comes to space heaters. These powerful appliances are one of the leading causes of house fires in America, and while we want you to be warm, we certainly don’t want you to be that warm. Luckily, newer models are frequently equipped with safety features that will keep you and your loved ones out of harm’s way.

You need to select a model with a shutoff sensor triggered if the unit starts to overheat or tip over. This small but significant add-on is imperative to keep things safe. You should also consider purchasing a model with a long extension cord, even if you don’t think you’ll need it. Why? Space heaters need to be directly plugged into the wall; a long cord means you can easily resist the temptation to plug it into existing power strips or extension cords for “just a minute.” Consider a model that has a cool-to-the-touch outer layer or handle so you can avoid any accidental burns. Finally, look for certifications from the Underwriters Laboratory and Intertek Group for added reassurance that your model meets safety standards.

While built-in features are important, there are also a few rules you’ll have to follow: as stated, never use power/extension cords to plug in your heater; never put one on a rug or elevated surface; unless specified otherwise, you won’t want to put a space heater near the kitchen or bathroom; and keep them out of reach/away from young kids or pets.

What brand best suits your needs?

There are some great brands out there dedicated to supplying safe space heaters worldwide, and we certainly have a few favorites. Vornado, Dyson, and De’Longhi are staples in the space heater game. Vornado has been around since 1930 and manufactures top-of-the-line space heaters, air purifiers, fans, humidifiers, and more. Likewise, Dyson was founded in 1991 by James Dyson and, today, not only manufactures high-end home staples—such as space heaters, washing machines, robot vacuums, and blowdryers—but also invests in research projects to improve medical equipment—such as ventilators, digital monitors, and electric vehicles.

The Italian company De’Longhi was incorporated in 1950 and is known for excellence in design when it comes to small home appliances such as espresso machines, portable air conditioners, dehumidifiers, space heaters, and more. De’Longhi has been the recipient of multiple awards and certifications for its dedication to high-end engineering, design, and production.

FAQs

Q: How much do space heaters cost?

Depending on size, wattage, type of heating, and various features, space heaters can start at $30 and go as high as $600.

Q: What space heater gives off the most heat?

The space heater that gives off the most heat is the Dr. Infrared Portable Space Heater, which has 1,500 watts to heat larger spaces and can crank up to 85 degrees for maximum power.

Q: What is the safest type of space heater?

The safest type of space heater is one with tip-over protection, a cool-touch case, and an automatic safety shut-off. Our safest pick is the Vornado AVH10 Vortex Heater—it has those features plus a timer and auto-climate control, which senses how much heat and circulation is required to maintain the set temperature.

Q: What kind of room heater is best?

An oscillating, adjustable, remote-controlled option can suit a wide variety of spaces, so the best space heater overall is the Lasko 1500W Ceramic Tower Space Heater, which has a classic shape, over 500 rave reviews, and an affordable price tag.

Final thoughts on the best space heaters

Space heaters are a great way to save space, stay warm, and snuggle up safely during cold times. Choose the best space heater for you by examining safety settings, power specs, heater type, and any additional features you find exciting. As long as you know what your space needs, we’re confident you can find the right tiny furnace to keep you from constantly re-wearing your favorite heated socks or heated slippers around the house. Give your puffy coat a break by taking it off indoors as you slowly sink into the warmth of your new space heater.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best space heaters in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best smokeless fire pits for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-smokeless-fire-pits/ Thu, 10 Aug 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=561939
The best smokeless fire pits composited
Stan Horaczek

A smokeless fire pit can provide a safe, simple way to get a blaze going for your next backyard get together or camping trip.

The post The best smokeless fire pits for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best smokeless fire pits composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 in action Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0
SEE IT

It’s simple to light, easy to store, and eradicates smoke.

Best large Tiki smokeless fire pit with a fire going in it Tiki Fire Pit
SEE IT

Gather up to 10 people around this ample fire pit for superior s’mores.

Best for patios Biolite's smokeless fire pit with a fire going inside BioLite Fire Pit+
SEE IT

The mesh sides offer a unique view of the flames inside and nice radiant heat.

The term “smokeless fire pit” almost sounds like an oxymoron. We love a controlled blaze for the light, the shadow, the warmth, and the crackle a fire provides to add a feeling of coziness and comfort to any conversation or gathering. But it’s not all s’mores and scary stories. It always feels like smoke blows right in your face, leaving you with stinging eyes and a nose full of soot no matter where you sit. And that’s if you can get it lit. Building a fire on the ground is tough, and you need a clear, safe space. Luckily, a quality fire pit can mitigate these issues.

These metal containers are built to control the flame and make it easy to start and finish. Not only do they make firing up easier, but they can also add a touch of class or a bit of flash to your patio, camp area, or backyard. A solid fire pit can turn a boring patio or backyard into a great place to spend an evening. Consider this your burn book, a list of the best smokeless fire pits of 2023.

How we chose the best smokeless fire pits

We started with a list of more than 30 models from hands-on testing and critical consensus before narrowing our options to the best we could find. The four main factors we considered were ease and effectiveness of use, aesthetics, value for price, and unique features. Our list represents our top choices, a couple for those who aren’t looking to spend as much money, and some situation-specific choices. After all, everyone’s needs when it comes to a fire pit are different, and it’s important to consider how and where you plan to use your fire pit before you buy it. The “best” is not always the “best for you.” Our list should help you avoid getting more fire pit than you really need, as every one of our picks is recommended.

The best smokeless fire pits: Reviews & Recommendations

Smokeless fire pits contain and elevate fires. Their design allows air to flow in such a way that it minimizes (and in some cases fully eliminates) smoke. There are different looks and focuses among our choices, so line up your desires as best you can with our recommendations.

Best overall: Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 28.25 lbs
  • Height: 18.5 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Single-piece construction

Pros

  • Excellent single-piece construction
  • Well-controlled fires with efficient burn
  • Light for the size and quality
  • Attractive, simple silhouette
  • Excellent smoke reduction

Cons

  • The aesthetic doesn’t necessarily fit with some more casual backyards
  • Outside gets very hot


It’s no secret that we think the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 is excellent. In fact, we think it’s the best choice on the market for a smokeless fire pit. The first point for the Solo Stove Bonfire is performance. It heats up quickly and burns efficiently with a stunningly small amount of smoke. The aesthetic is particular: It’s not quite industrial, but it does have a shiny, smooth finish that doesn’t scream “tiki bar” or “family gathering” like some other models, and it’s not uniquely edgy in its stylings. It may not help bring certain patio looks together, but it also doesn’t stand out or bring attention to itself. The look is very “elevated comfort food outdoor cafe.”

Among the mid-sized models we recommend, the Bonfire 2.0 is one of the more portable (though look further down for the real portable star). Twenty-eight pounds is quite light for this category, and while the Bonfire 2.0 doesn’t collapse or disassemble to make it easier to transport, you can use a cloth carrying card to make things a bit easier for a beach trip or some light camping. Wood pellets are best in the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0—that’s true of most circular-basin fire pits—but small firewood also works extremely well. The interior volume of the pit isn’t particularly large, but the burn is so efficient and controlled that the fires tend to outperform the amount of fuel.

The Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 comes at a semi-premium price, but its durable construction guarantees its long-term value. Unless your fire pit needs are particularly portable or particularly large, this is the one to get, the best overall smokeless fire pit.

Best for patios: BioLite Fire Pit+

BioLite

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 19.8 lbs
  • Height: 15.8 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Two-piece self-assembly with foldable legs

Pros

  • Bluetooth-enabled, battery-powered fan keeps fires going
  • Cool, see-through design
  • Foldable legs make storage easier
  • Battery is USB rechargeable
  • App allows control of the flame size
  • Sized for commercial firewood logs

Cons

  • Foldable legs aren’t particularly durable
  • The aesthetic is specific enough to not be everyone’s cup of tea
  • Rectangular design requires a more specific space arrangement than circular models

The BioLite Fire Pit+ is one of the most unique-looking fire pits on the market, with some interesting tech features. It’s an excellent overall fire pit and a contender for best overall, but it landed in best-for-patio because of its big, open flame, cool look, and innovations. The smoke elimination is not quite as good as a few other models, but it makes up for that.

Let’s look at those innovations first. One of its chief innovations is mesh side panels that allow more heat to radiate out and make the fire easy to observe. This does require a bit more work maintaining the Fire Pit+, but it is worth it for the cool view and unique shadows that are interesting and calming when sitting around the fire pit. Another great feature that really contributes to the comfort at a backyard gathering, and is absent on any other model, is the Bluetooth-enabled, app-controlled, battery-powered fan which controls airflow and can make the flames in the Fire Pit+ larger or small at will. This is simply something that isn’t seen elsewhere and really sets the Fire Pit+ apart. The battery pack, which is removable and charged via USB, gives the Fire Pit+ a retro-futuristic look, but it can be easily hidden on the least-seen side in a patio set-up if needed.

The biggest mark against the Fire Pit+ is the double-edged sword that is its legs. The foldable legs make moving and storing the Fire Pit+ much easier than some other models, but they’re also a bit less strong and stable than the circular or thicker-legged bases that competitors have. This means you can’t overfill the Fire Pit+ with firewood (it can fit standard commercial logs). That’s good advice in general with a fire pit, but particularly vital advice for the Fire Pit+.

The Fire Pit+ offers a unique look, unique control, and an overall very good performance, making it the best patio smokeless fire pit among our recommended ones, and a great complement to patio heaters.

Best large: Tiki Fire Pit

Tiki

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 45 lbs
  • Height: 18.75 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Single-piece construction

Pros

  • Extremely durable
  • Nice, classic design
  • Lots of space for fuel inside
  • Perfect size for a larger patio

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Works better with wood pellets which can be more expensive than firewood
  • Not intended to be portable; you can’t easily take it to the beach or camping

Most fire pits on this list are great for four-to-six people. The Tiki Fire Pit is much larger and is a better choice if your patio seating is couches and lounges for 8-10 rather than chairs. Additionally, the Tiki Fire Pit has a classic Tiki design, which may be just what you’re looking for in your backyard paradise.

The benefits of the Tiki Fire Pit’s size are the amount of fuel it can use and the length of burn your fire is going to get. Stronger, longer fires mean less time spent tending the flames during your evening get-togethers. Smoke elimination is very good thanks to the airflow design, and the small, strong legs lift the pit enough for performance while not detracting from the pleasing, rounded throwback style. 

The drawback is this fire pit is really not meant for moving around. Forty-five pounds is a lot, and it is large, meaning you will most likely need two people and plenty of space in a truck or van if you want to take this party starter to the beach. Honestly, the Tiki Fire Pit is much better served finding a permanent home on your patio. However, with that heft comes a lot of durability, so the included weather-resistant cover is probably enough to protect your fire pit outside of an extreme situation. 

If your lifestyle means bigger is better, the Tike Fire Pit is probably the better choice among our recommendations, making it the best large smokeless fire pit as far as we’re concerned.

Best stainless steel: Breeo X Series 24

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 62 lbs
  • Height: 14.75 in
  • Material: Corten steel (also available in stainless steel)
  • Structure: Single-piece construction

Pros

  • Extremely strong and durable
  • Sleek look that blends in well with a lot of decor
  • Excellent fire control and smoke elimination

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Extremely heavy

If construction and materials really matter to you, and you want a fire pit that might become an heirloom to pass down to your children, break out the wallet for the Breeo X Series 24. This beautiful, sturdy, heavy, and durable fire pit is not one to travel; the 62 pounds of metal means it doesn’t want to go to the beach or a campground. However, at home you’re not going to get a longer-lasting, better-put-together fire pit.

The “24” in Breeo X Series 24 refers to the diameter of the fire pit’s interior—a considerable amount of space, larger even than the interior of the Tiki Fire Pit. There are 19-inch and even larger models as well. The legs of the Breeo X Series 24 are built-in and incredibly stable. The interior wall sucks up air and creates a wonderful, even secondary flame that shoots out the small holes just below the top of the rim. Visually, the Breeo X Series makes one of the nicest flames on the market.

The price tag is almost as heavy as the pit itself. The Breeo X Series is a premium product at a premium price—two or three times more than a lot of our other recommended models. If you have the means to splurge and believe in buying a product that will last a lifetime, the value is there, even if the initial cost is high.

Big, bold, and built to last, the Breeo X Series 24 is a beast and a beauty in one. For that reason, it’s the best corten steel smokeless fire pit we can recommend.

Best portable: Solo Stove Ranger 2.0

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 15 lbs
  • Height: 15 in
  • Material: stainless steel
  • Structure: single-piece construction

Pros

  • Lightweight and compact
  • Good flame control and smoke elimination
  • Includes a carrying case
  • Sleek and strong design

Cons

  • Portable but not collapsible; still need a vehicle to transport longer distances
  • Grilling requires additional accessories for best results

If you want a multi-purpose fire pit, portability is really important. We know it ourselves, so we have a guide if this category is the one you are exclusively considering. For those looking at a wider range of options, the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 is the little sibling of our best overall smokeless fire pit and the best portable smokeless fire pit on the market. Smaller, lighter, and more portable—but no less efficient—the Ranger is a much easier carry than the Bonfire without sacrificing any of the quality.

The Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 fire pit with a fire going inside
Billy Cadden

The Ranger really sings when you add in grilling accessories. The Solo Stove product line’s design gives you a simple, flat top that placing any flat wire grill means producing nice results (though you’ll want to very carefully clean the inside of your fire pit later, as food can create some sticky burnt messes). Some official grilling accessories are available, as well as skewers for s’mores or hot dogs if you look at Solo Stove’s offerings. (However, we recommend a dedicated grill if you’re into cookouts more than casual entertaining.)

For a portable model, the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 isn’t particularly light. It’s not meant for trekking but more drive-to-the-national-park-or-beach style portable use. The included carrying case is probably enough for inside storage, but outside storage will need a thicker, more protective case (which is also available to purchase).

If you’re planning to head out with your fire pit a lot, we can heartily recommend the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 as the best portable smokeless fire pit on the market.

Best value: Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit

Innostage

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 33 pounds
  • Height: 18 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Two-piece construction

Pros

  • Two-piece design lets it travel smaller
  • Easy to set up
  • Good airflow for smoke elimination
  • Matte black coloration makes it blend in easily

Cons

  • The silhouette is a bit industrial
  • Clean-up is tougher than with some other brands

You’ll need firewood once you’ve purchased your pit, so buying something that leaves you with some cash left over isn’t a bad plan. For those a bit more thrifty, Inno Stage offers a line of fire pits that don’t quite match the higher-cost models for performance or style but more than do the job for a very reasonable cost.

Inno Stage’s design involves two pieces. When assembled, the larger piece sits on the smaller piece, which acts as the ash pan. For travel or storage, the smaller piece is turned upside down and slots into the larger piece’s basin, taking up less space and becoming easier to carry. This is the most convenient feature of the Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit, but it also results in less efficient burn.

In terms of looks, the Inno Stage is not the most beautiful fire pit. It has a bit of a utilitarian and industrial look, which doesn’t make it a star of the backyard. There’s a trio of options for the finish: chrome, matte black, and faux terracotta. The last is our suggestion; it softens the look a bit. There are also multiple sizes (four in all) depending on your needs.

If you need a highly functional, well-priced fire pit or just want to dip your toe into the world of fire pits without committing too many funds, the Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit is your best entry point. It’s inexpensive enough to upgrade later without feeling regretful and functional enough to use it for a long time, squeezing every ounce of use out of what we consider the best-value smokeless fire pit.

Best under $100: Blue Sky Outdoor Living Ridge

Blue Sky

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 23.4 lbs
  • Height: 12.49 in
  • Material: Steel
  • Structure: Two-piece construction

Pros

  • One piece tucks into the other for portability
  • Assembly is quick
  • Low price

Cons

  • Not quite as efficient burn as other models
  • Non-stainless steel means it’s a bit less durable and a bit harder to clean

Sometimes, price is the most important factor. If you want to get into the smokeless fire pit game for less than $100, choose the Blue Sky Outdoor Living Ridge. This two-piece smokeless fire pit has a similar tuck-in-and-carry construction as our best value option, the Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit, but an even lower base price. 

The design of the Ridge doesn’t allow air to flow as efficiently as higher-end models, meaning the smoke elimination is less impressive. However, it’s still an incredible improvement over typical fire pits. The matte black finish to the Ridge means it’s unobtrusive, but it’s also not a particularly attractive fire pit. Weight and size make the Ridge easy to move, and you’ll probably want to store it inside and bring it out to use it rather than leave it as patio furniture.

What to consider when choosing a smokeless fire pit

Smokeless fire pits offer a focal point for your patio set-up, allowing you to enjoy cooler days and nights in a comfortable and stylish way. To that end, picking the perfect smokeless fire pit means considering smoke elimination effectiveness, style, size, and durability.

Smoke elimination

When it comes to smoke elimination, all of these models will do an excellent job of minimizing the amount of smoke produced but the fire. This is due to airflow design, which allows for more complete combustion. Smokeless fire pits will have secondary fires popping out of the interior wall of the fire pit’s basin, using up more oxygen and producing very little smoke. The best models do this most efficiently, but even our recommended value and budget models do a great job.

Most of the design elements of smokeless fire pits are utilitarian due to wanting to offer the best possible airflow efficiency. The nicer models are sleep and round, while the budget models tend to have more edges or corners. A few of our models took their look more into consideration: the Tiki Fire Pit and the BioLite Fire Pit+ chief among them. Make sure you like the look of your fire pit if you’re planning to use it when entertaining guests. No matter how great the fire is, if the pit feels out of place and clashes with the motif you’re trying to achieve, you’ll be disappointed with your purchase.

Size

Most of the smokeless fire pits we recommend are medium-sized, built to be used with a smaller circle of people, maybe no more than 6. Portable models are best with 2 or 4. Larger models exist that can accommodate 8-10 people around them, but you’re looking at completely non-portable models at that point. In terms of warmth radius, most of these fire pits will be nice and toasty within 8 feet, but some of the smaller models will need a tighter formation.

Materials and durability

Lastly, durability is important as you want to be using your smokeless fire pit long term. Stainless steel is the material of choice. It holds up well to use and elements and is the easiest to clean. Some steel composite low-end models exist but should probably be avoided.

FAQs

Q: Is a smokeless fire pit really smokeless?

Not exactly. Smokeless fire pits will still produce some smoke. However, the amount of smoke is drastically reduced because the design allows airflow on nearly all sides, causing much more complete combustion. Even the smoke that does make its way out of the fire still won’t find its way into your face.

Q: Do smokeless fire pits give off good heat?

Absolutely. A smokeless fire pit can easily give off 50,000 BTU (British Thermal Units), which is extremely warm within 8 feet and comfortable from 8 feet to 10 feet.

Q: How much does a smokeless fire pit cost?

The ones we recommend can be had for as cheap as $75 on sale, and you could spend up to $1000 on the luxury models when you add in accessories.

Q: What type of fire pit is best?

It really depends on the space you’re most likely to have your fire. If you will almost only use your fire pit on your patio, choose a fire pit that fits the aesthetic of your backyard area. If you want to take your fire pit to the beach, choose a lighter standard-sized fire pit with a carrying case or a very light “portable” model. These will make smaller fires, but your back will thank you. No matter what, it’s best to go smokeless.

Q: Can you put water in a smokeless fire pit?

Do not do this. The holes in a smokeless fire pit can get clogged with wet fire debris, and dirty water will spill out onto whatever surface your fire pit is over. Instead, douse the flames with sand, wait long enough for everything to cool off, dump it, then clean it carefully by hand if necessary.

Q: Is it OK to leave a fire pit burning overnight?

Don’t do this either. First, it’s very unlikely that a fire pit fire will last all night, anyway. It’s simply not big enough, even though it’s protected from wind and moisture within the pit. Second, never leave a fire unattended, even in a relatively safe environment like a fire pit. It only takes one stray ember to cause a tragedy.

Q: Can you burn wood in a smokeless fire pit?

Yes! Most smokeless fire pits are expressly designed for wood. Many work better with wood pellets, but small scavenged firewood or commercial firewood cut into smaller pieces also works well.

Q: What makes a smokeless fire pit smokeless?

The airflow design allows more complete combustion of your fuel (usually wood or wood pellets), and more complete combustion produces less smoke, sometimes so little as to appear “smokeless.”

Final thoughts on the best smokeless fire pits

If you’re looking for a fire pit, smokeless is the way to go. There’s enough variety in the marketplace, with quality throughout, that choosing a model based on your particular needs is more involved than simply choosing the “best” model. From portable to large-scale patio-only models, our recommendations should make sure that your nights are toasty, your shadows flicker, and you enjoy fire whenever you wish.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best smokeless fire pits for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best TKL keyboards of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-tkl-keyboards/ Wed, 20 Apr 2022 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=438026
The best TKL keyboards composited

Want to nix the numpad? We've got your number.

The post The best TKL keyboards of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best TKL keyboards composited

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Razer Huntsman V2 TKL is the best TKL keyboard. Razer Huntsman V2 TKL
SEE IT

Razer’s super-responsive optical switches and sound-dampening foam make the Huntsman V2 TKL a surprisingly quiet keyboard.

Best wireless Logitech G915 lightspeed is the best wireless TKL. Logitech G915 Lightspeed
SEE IT

The Logitech G915 Lightspeed TKL is thin, sleek, and flashy.

Best for gaming SteelSeries Apex Pro TKL is the best TKL gaming keyboard. SteelSeries Apex Pro TKL
SEE IT

The SteelSeries Apex Pro uses magnetic fields that create switches with adjustable actuation.

Tenkeyless, or TKL, keyboards are the “goldilocks” size for most people. Striking a balance between standard, 104-key keyboards and compact 60% designs, the TKL looks and feels just full-size boards, but with the number pad sliced off the right side. The balance between easy typing and a smaller desk footprint makes TKL keyboards an ideal option for gamers, writers, or programmers looking to free up their desk space without sacrificing helpful navigational keys. Though not as widespread as the full-size board, there’s a large number of TKL keyboards out there, especially for gaming. In many cases, you can even find TKL versions of popular full-size models. All those options, though, make comparing and shopping a bit of a chore. Luckily, our best TKL keyboards guide has everything you need to get something great.

How we picked the best TKL keyboards

After a lifetime of PC gaming, several years as a professional writer, and dabbling in game development and media production, I’ve touched more keyboards than I can count. I’m also keenly aware a great gaming keyboard may not be a great choice for office work, for example, and there are features programmers need that writers would never touch. Our list of the best TKL keyboards reflects my own professional and personal experiences, and the understanding that some tasks require different keyboard features.

We found our selections for the best TKL keyboards through hands-on testing, research, and reviews from colleagues and trusted sources. They were judged on several factors, including price, durability, ergonomics, connection options, and typing experience. We also considered each product’s viability for playing games, writing, and programming.

The best TKL keyboards: Reviews & Recommendations

Now that you’ve had a crash course in keyboard-picking, let’s look at the best TKL keyboards you can buy right now. As we mentioned, many of these models are intended for gaming-focused PCs, but all of them are strong picks for any type of typist.

Best overall: Razer Huntsman V2 TKL

Razer

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Razer Huntsman V2 TKL is one of those rare “jack-of-all-trades” devices that manages to (mostly) overcome the “master-of-none” curse. 

Specs

  • Switches: Razer Click or Razer Linear optical switches
  • Keycaps: Doubleshot PBT
  • Connectivity: Wired USB
  • Backlighting: RGB per-key
  • Volume Roller: No
  • Special features: Extremely high 8000Hz polling, Detachable wrist rest
  • Price: $138

Pros 

  • Smooth, responsive typing experience
  • Sound-damping foam for quiet keystrokes
  • Full macro programming for each key
  • Includes wrist pad

Cons 

  • Larger keys have a slight wobble
  • High polling rate modes may impact CPU performance

The Huntsman V2 TKL is a surprisingly balanced gaming keyboard that works well for gaming, productivity, and everyday typing. Like most gaming keyboards, you can configure any key, customize RGB lighting, and program macros using Razer’s Synapse 3 desktop app. The PBT doubleshot keycaps ensure that its lettering will never fade. It even ships with a detachable wrist pad. 

But its best feature is the super-responsive typing performance. This wired keyboard features Razer’s proprietary optical switches, with the choice of either Razer Click switches for clicky (but not clacky) stab feedback, or second-gen Razer Linear switches that offer a quick, silent press. The kicker, which makes it stand out for non-gamers, is its built-in sound-dampening foam that reduces the typing noise that makes mechanical keyboards hard to use considerately in the workplace.

The Huntsman V2 also features the ability to set an ultra-high 8,000Hz polling rate, which Razer has added to some of its esports-facing gear. Polling rate, like refresh rate for TVs and monitors, refers to the number of times your mouse or keyboard sends signals to your PC. Standard 1,000Hz polling sends a signal approximately once a millisecond (ms). At 8,000Hz, Razer claims the Huntmans V2 can send signals with only 0.2ms of input lag. That higher performance comes at a cost, however: Using that high setting can lightly tax your PC in a way that using most keyboards simply does not. 

Luckily, you don’t have to use 8,000Hz polling to enjoy using the Razer Huntsman V2 TKL. It is simply a snappy, easy-typing keyboard that can work wonders for anybody.

Best for gaming: SteelSeries Apex Pro TKL

SteelSeries

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: Amazon

Why it made the cut: SteelSeries’ Apex Pro TKL can be customized to match your specific gaming preferences and playstyle.

Specs

  • Switches: SteelSeries OmniPoint 
  • Keycaps: ABS
  • Connectivity: Wired USB
  • Backlighting: RGB Per-key
  • Volume roller: Yes
  • Special features: OLED display, detachable wrist rest, USB passthrough
  • Price: $146

Pros

  • Adjustable actuation switches
  • Detachable magnetic wrist rest
  • Customizable OLED display

Cons 

  • ABS keycaps can wear out, long-term
  • Expensive

The SteelSeries’ Apex Pro is truly unique. Rather than picking a mechanical key type to create a specific feel, the Apex Pro features proprietary OmniPoint switches with adjustable resistance and actuation. Using SteelSeries’ Engine configuration software, you can change the feel of most keys whenever you want to fit your personal preferences for different tasks. The linear-style keys have a unique feel, which may be an acquired taste, but offer incredible utility for those who want to tinker and figure out exactly what they like.

The Apex Pro TKL also features a robust suite of luxury features for a TKL keyboard. It has a dedicated volume wheel for quick sound adjustments, USB passthrough, a detachable wrist rest, and an integrated OLED screen used to control the keyboard’s settings and can even display useful info for some games and apps. As with most gaming keyboards, SteelSeries Engine allows you to store multiple configuration profiles, adjust its RGB lighting, and more.

Frankly, many of the keyboards on this list are made for gaming, so if the Apex Pro’s unique approach seems risky, there are definitely plenty of great options. You aren’t going to find any keyboard quite like this one, though.

Best wireless: Logitech G915 Lightspeed

Logitech G

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: Amazon

Why it made the cut: The Logitech G915’s sleek wireless design saves even more desk space than the average TKL keyboard.

Specs

  • Switches: Logitech low-profile GL (tactile, linear, or clicky)
  • Keycaps: ABS 
  • Connectivity: 2.4GHz wireless via USB dongle, Bluetooth, or USB Wired
  • Backlighting: RGB Per-key
  • Volume roller: Yes
  • Special features: Volume roller, 5 dedicated macro keys, hot-swap among up multiple wireless connections
  • Price: $189

Pros 

  • Long battery life, even with RGB turned on
  • Low-profile switches feel good, even with less travel
  • Multiple connection options

Cons 

  • Limited macro support
  • Expensive

For a mechanical gaming keyboard, the Logitech G915 Lightspeed looks shockingly sleek. A thin, 22mm slate covered with low-profile switches—it achieves an Apple-Esque futuristic look that stands out as sharp and exciting. 

Low-profile switches are shorter, which means they offer less “travel” or distance from unpressed to fully pressed down. Among mechanical keyboards, less travel usually equates to a less comfortable typing feel, but Logitech’s proprietary low-profile GL switches find a sweet spot between laptop keyboard quickness and a satisfying press.

The “lightspeed” in the Logitech G915’s name refers to Logitech’s proprietary wireless technology. It connects to your PC using a 2.4 GHz “Lightspeed” connection via a USB dongle but also supports Bluetooth wireless for non-gaming applications. As for battery life, you can expect around 40 hours of use on a single charge as long as you keep the per-key RGB lighting on, and turning it off will naturally boost your use time.

Ultimately, the Logitech G915 Lightspeed is an outstanding wireless mechanical gaming keyboard that defies convention and looks good doing it. Whether it’s worth over $200—an extremely high price for a TKL—is up to you.

Best with hot-swappable switches: Drop CTRL

DROP

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Drop CTRL offers a fantastic typing experience out of the box, but allows for enthusiast customization.

Specs

  • Switches: Halo Clear or Halo True; Hailua Speed; Cherry MX
  • Keycaps: Doubleshot PBT
  • Connectivity: Wired USB
  • Backlighting: RGB Per-Key
  • Volume roller: No
  • Special features: Dual USB-C connectors, removable feet
  • Price: $270

Pros 

  • Swappable switches
  • PBT keycaps
  • Great typing feel whether or not you bring your own switches

Cons 

  • Cumbersome macro programming

Drop, a social marketplace for deals and user-requested gear designs, has a lot to offer for enthusiast keyboard fans. If you like to build your own keyboards, or modify them with custom keycaps and switches, it has a wealth of resources to purchase. Not all keyboards are built to let you “hot-swap” or install new switches without taking your keyboard apart. As you might expect, Drop’s pre-built options do, and they make it pretty easy.

As an enthusiast’s keyboard, the CTRL is more focused on aesthetics and pure typing feel, rather than other features. Unlike the gaming keyboards on this list, you can only customize your configuration using a clunky web-based tool.

Still, the Drop CTRL has an incredible typing feel, even if you don’t touch the switches. You have the option to play around, but you’re getting a winner even if you don’t touch a thing.

Best for Mac: Keychron K8

Keychron

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: Amazon

Why it made the cut: The Keychron K8 supports many devices and operating systems that other mechanical keyboards often overlook.

Specs

  • Switches: Gateron G Pro, Gatreon Optical
  • Keycaps: ABS
  • Connectivity: Bluetooth wireless or wired USB
  • Backlighting: RGB (15 patterns), or white
  • Volume roller: No
  • Special features: wireless connection to multiple devices, keycaps for Mac and Windows layouts
  • Price: $80

Pros 

  • Options for quieter mechanical switches
  • Adjustable typing angle
  • Supports Mac, Windows, Linux, iOS, iPad, and Android.
  • Hot-swappable switches (on some models)

Cons 

  • No macro support
  • Limited functionality on mobile devices

Apple sells a compact version of its Magic Keyboard but there are better options out there for Mac typists. If you want to go mechanical on Mac, the Keychron K8 lets you replace those chiclet keys with something that has a little more travel. 

Its sleek and simple design will fit perfectly in any office. Meanwhile, there’s a wide array of configurations for sale, ensuring you can buy a keyboard that fits your preferences. There are Keychron K8 models with six types of mechanical and optical switches, optional switch hot-swapping support, and RGB or white-only backlighting.

We wouldn’t restrict the Keychron K8 to just Mac users, however. It’s also a decent all-rounder for Windows, and even has partial support for Linux, iOS, iPad, and Android devices. It’s a simple keyboard, without any notable special features, but a good typing feel and a great, sub-$100 price.

Best budget: Corsair K70 RGB TKL Champion Series

Buy it used or refurbished: Amazon

Why it made the cut: The Corsair K70 Champion Series packs high-end specs and features at a mid-range price.

Specs

  • Switches: Cherry MX
  • Keycaps: Doubleshot PBT
  • Connectivity: Wired USB
  • Backlighting: RGB per-key
  • Volume roller: Yes
  • Special features: Esports “tournament mode,” media keys, 8,000Hz polling
  • Price: $109

Pros

  • 8000Hz polling rate
  • Dedicated “Tournament Mode” switch
  • Media keys and volume roller aren’t common on TKLs

Cons

  • Esports specialization may not be for everyone

The Corsair K70 RGB TKL is not the cheapest best TKL keyboard you can find, but it is a very strong value for its price. It features lots of little amenities, ranging from common TKL upgrades like PBT keycaps and customizable RGB lighting, to less common flourishes like built-in media buttons and a volume roller.

The Corsair K70 RGB TKL Champion Series is an esports keyboard, not just a gaming keyboard, so it also has features like 8,000Hz polling and a tournament mode switch, which temporarily turns off custom macros and other features that may interfere during official competitive play. That may seem frivolous for some, but its other quality-of-life features are novel and great for any gamer.

What to consider before buying the best TKL keyboards

The best TKL keyboards don’t vary that much from other keyboard form factors, so picking your next one won’t be much different than picking the best gaming keyboard or wireless mechanical keyboard. The most important question is whether you actually want a TKL design. The Tenkeyless falls right in the middle between 60 percent keyboards and full-size models and usually has around 87 keys. In terms of saving space, they are much narrower than a full-size keyboard but aren’t as small as a compact design. On the other hand, they retain the full-size keyboard’s spacing, so they’re arguably easier to navigate. If you like the way your full-size keyboard feels, but can confidently say you never use your Numpad, then switching to a TKL is probably a good move. 

Picking your switches

When picking a keyboard, any shape or size, it’s important to think about typing feel, which means thinking about how your keys work. Like many keyboard enthusiasts, we tend to prefer mechanical keyboards, which use a physical spring and switch to operate the keys. As a gaming-focused keyboard sub-genre, you’ll find that the vast majority of TKLs features mechanical keys.

When you pick a mechanical keyboard, you often also need to pick the kind of key switches it uses. The switch you choose will impact how much force you need to use to activate and/or fully depress a key, as well as how far down you need to press a key to actuate it, or send a signal from the keyboard to your device. There are also differences in feel and even sound that enthusiasts may prefer.

Key switch types are normally color-coded. While the nuances vary from switch manufacturer to manufacturer, there are three core categories: Linear (often “Red”), Tactile (“Brown”), or Clicky (“Blue”). Linear switches usually have the lightest touch and provide very little tactile response when you click them, so they’re preferred for competitive gaming. The tactile is the balanced option, emphasizing the “bump” you feel when actuating each key. Clicky switches are similar to tactile switches, but with a stronger emphasis on making a loud “clang” with each tap. There are many, many more options beyond these core three but most major manufacturers will offer at least one, if not all three, of these options.

In recent years, we’ve also started to see an influx in optical gaming keyboards, which use a laser to complete a circuit that actuates each key you press down. Manufacturers claim that optical keyboards minimize the already imperceivable amount of input lag in other keyboards. Companies also claim the switches may last longer.

We can’t tell you what switch will feel right. If you can’t head out to a store to try some keyboards with different switches, we recommend tactile switches for people who want a nice typing feel across gaming and work, or Red switches if you’re a competitive player who wants controls with a hair-trigger.

Connectivity

Even among TKLs, you will have the option to choose whether you want a wired or wireless keyboard. Wired keyboards are easy to set up, and never lose power. Wireless keyboards, however, give you more flexibility and keep your desk cable-free.

If you decide to get a wireless keyboard, make sure you look for one with strong battery life and connection options. For office work, any Bluetooth keyboard will do fine, but gamers will want to make sure and get a keyboard that comes with a 2.4GhZ wireless dongle, which ensures a more stable connection with minimal input lag. There are some competitive purists who will insist that you need a wired keyboard for gaming. In our experience, that is not the case.

FAQs

Q: How many keys are on a TKL keyboard?

TKL keyboards, by definition, have 87 keys (though you may see some with a few more or less, depending on the design). The layout is identical to the standard “full-size” keyboard, but without the number pad section on the far right.

Q: Are TKL keyboards 75% keyboards?

Technically, no, but they are very similar. Both TKL and 75 percent keyboards feature the same general range of keys but have different layouts. TKLs follow the design of the full-size keyboard, with gaps between certain sets of keys. The 75 percent layout compressed all of the keys into a single block, similar to 60 percent keyboards. The 75 percent design should be smaller than a TKL, but some users may find the design feels cramped, despite being only a tad bit smaller.

Q: Is a TKL better than a 60% keyboard?

Neither the TKL nor the 60 percent keyboard is objectively “better” than the other. They are simply different sizes, with their own distinctive feels. Both TKL and 60% keyboards are smaller than a full-size keyboard and lack the Numpad keys. The 60 percent design cuts the layout down, even more, nixing the function row, arrows, and other keys.

Q: Is a TKL better for typing?

Each person’s exact typing experience depends on ergonomic factors like keyboard angle, switch sensitivity, wrist support, and even keycap material which vary between models. All that said, some people feel that TKL models are easier to center on your desk for even hand placement, and provide more room for your mouse or other peripherals.

Final thoughts on the best TKL keyboards

If you can part with your number pad, the best TKL keyboards offer a great balance between the wide functionality of a full keyboard and the space-saving efficiency of more compact designs. It is a smart way to free up some desk space or complement a mobile work setup.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best TKL keyboards of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Does chicken soup really help when you’re sick? https://www.popsci.com/health/chicken-soup-sick/ Tue, 24 Oct 2023 01:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=582181
A bowl of chicken soup typically contains protein, vegetables and soothing broth.
A bowl of chicken soup typically contains protein, vegetables and soothing broth. DepositPhotos

A nutrition specialist explains what’s behind the beloved comfort food.

The post Does chicken soup really help when you’re sick? appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A bowl of chicken soup typically contains protein, vegetables and soothing broth.
A bowl of chicken soup typically contains protein, vegetables and soothing broth. DepositPhotos

This article was originally feature do The Conversation.

Preparing a bowl of chicken soup for a loved one when they’re sick has been a common practice throughout the world for centuries. Today, generations from virtually every culture swear to the benefits of chicken soup. In the U.S., the dish is typically made with noodles, but different cultures prepare the soothing remedy their own way.

Chicken soup as a therapy can be traced back to 60 A.D. and Pedanius Dioscorides, an army surgeon who served under the Roman emperor Nero, and whose five-volume medical encyclopedia was consulted by early healers for more than a millennium. But the origins of chicken soup go back thousands of years earlier, to ancient China.

So, with cold and flu season in full swing, it’s worth asking: Is there any science to back the belief that it helps? Or does chicken soup serve as just a comforting placebo, that is, providing psychological benefit while we’re sick, without an actual therapeutic benefit?

As a registered dietitian and professor of dietetics and nutrition, I’m well aware of the appeal of chicken soup: the warmth of the broth and the rich, savory flavors of the chicken, vegetables and noodles. What gives the soup that distinctive taste is “umami”—the fifth category of taste sensations, along with sweet, salty, sour and bitter. It is often described as having a “meaty” taste.

Improved appetite, better digestion

All that makes sense, because amino acids are the building blocks of proteins, and the amino acid glutamate is found in foods with the umami taste. Not all umami foods are meat or poultry, however; cheese, mushrooms, miso and soy sauce have it too.

Studies show that taste, it turns out, is critical to the healing properties of chicken soup. When I see patients with upper respiratory illnesses, I notice many of them are suddenly eating less or not eating at all. This is because acute illnesses ignite an inflammatory response that can decrease your appetite. Not feeling like eating means you’re unlikely to get the nutrition you need, which is hardly an optimal recipe for immune health and recovery from illness.

But evidence suggests that the umami taste in chicken soup may help spur a bigger appetite. Participants in one study said they felt hungrier after their first taste of a soup with umami flavor added in by researchers.

Other studies say umami may also improve nutrient digestion. Once our brains sense umami through the taste receptors on our tongues, our bodies prime our digestive tracts to absorb protein more easily.

This can reduce gastrointestinal symptoms, which many people experience when they’re under the weather. Although most people don’t associate upper respiratory infections with gastrointestinal symptoms, research in children has found that the flu virus increased abdominal pain, nausea, vomiting and diarrhea symptoms.

May reduce inflammation and stuffy nose

Inflammation is part of the body’s natural response to injury or illness; inflammation occurs when white blood cells migrate to inflamed tissue to assist with healing. When this inflammatory process occurs in the upper airway, it results in common cold and flu symptoms, such as a stuffy or runny nose, sneezing, coughing and thickened mucus.

Conversely, lower white blood cell activity in the nasal passages can reduce inflammation. And interestingly, research shows that chicken soup can in fact lower the number of white blood cells traveling to inflamed tissues. It does this by directly inhibiting the ability of neutrophils, a type of white blood cell, to travel to the inflamed tissue.

Key ingredients

To truly understand the soothing and healing effects of chicken soup, it’s important to consider the soup’s ingredients. Not all chicken soups are packed with nutritious healing properties. For instance, the ultraprocessed canned versions of chicken soup, both with and without noodles, lack many of the antioxidants found in homemade versions. Most canned versions of chicken soup are nearly devoid of hearty vegetables.

The core nutrients in homemade versions of the soup are what set these varieties apart from canned versions. Chicken provides the body with a complete source of protein to combat infection. Vegetables supply a wide array of vitamins, minerals and antioxidants. If prepared the American way, noodles provide an easily digestible source of carbohydrate that your body uses for energy and recovery.

Even the warmth of chicken soup can help. Drinking the liquid and inhaling the vapors increase the temperature of nasal and respiratory passages, which loosens the thick mucus that often accompanies respiratory illnesses. Compared with hot water alone, studies show chicken soup is more effective at loosening mucus.

The herbs and spices sometimes used in chicken soup, such as pepper and garlic, also loosen mucus. The broth, which contains water and electrolytes, helps with rehydration.

So, to maximize the health benefits of chicken soup, I recommend a homemade variety, which can be prepared with carrots, celery, fresh garlic, herbs and spices, to name a few ingredients. But if you need a more convenient option, look at the ingredients and nutrition facts label, and choose soups with a variety of vegetables over an ultraprocessed, nutrient-depleted kind.

In short, the latest science suggests that chicken soup—though not an out-and-out cure for colds and flu—really helps with healing. Looks like Grandma was right again.

The post Does chicken soup really help when you’re sick? appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
This giant bumper car is street-legal and enormously delightful https://www.popsci.com/technology/dan-hryhorcoff-bumper-car/ Mon, 23 Oct 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581743
a giant bumper car
Dan Hryhorcoff, who has a deep mechanical background, built the vehicle as a pandemic project. Kathy Hryhorcoff

Dan Hryhorcoff built the 13-foot-long bumper car as a pandemic project. Here's how he made it.

The post This giant bumper car is street-legal and enormously delightful appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
a giant bumper car
Dan Hryhorcoff, who has a deep mechanical background, built the vehicle as a pandemic project. Kathy Hryhorcoff

“I always build things,” says Dan Hryhorcoff. 

Case in point: Hryhorcoff has constructed an absolutely delightful giant bumper car, a project that he says began during the pandemic. The rest of us may have baked bread as COVID came down the pike, but Hryhorcoff, who lives in northeastern Pennsylvania and has also built a submarine, constructed an enormous blue bumper car. It gets its propulsion from a repurposed Chevrolet engine and is street-legal. 

Before he constructed the big bumper car, Hryhorcoff had made a different vehicle, starting on it around 2013 or so. “When I retired, I decided I kind of wanted to build a car,” he recalls. For that project, he chose to focus on a 1950s pedal car for children called a Murray “sad face.” “I decided to copy that and make a large one.” (Those Murray models have a front that does indeed look like a sad face, but anyone who sees Hryhorcoff’s work will probably smile.) 

Creating that big red vehicle provided him with further experience working with fiberglass, a material he had also worked with when building the submarine. “I had a lot of fun with that [Murray car] at car shows and things, and it got a lot of attention from a broad audience,” he says.

“Then COVID hit,” he adds. He wanted a new project. His thinking? “Another car project would be good.” 

Building the big bumper car

He settled on a bumper car. To get the source material he needed for the project, he turned to an amusement park in Elysburg, Pennsylvania called Knoebels, and the bumper cars they have there. Specifically, he focused on the 1953-model bumper car that was made by a company called Lusse. He liked that it had a “Chevrolet pickup truck sorta look” from the 1950s. 

“I decided to copy one of those,” he says. Spending some eight hours at Knoebels gave him the chance to get the information he needed. “I measured, and took photos, and made templates, and whatever I needed to, to copy the car as well as I can.” He chose to make his version of the car double the size of the base model. As the Scranton Times-Tribune noted in a story about Hryhorcoff in July, the bumper car ride at Knoebels dates back to the immediate post-World-War-II era.

[Related: This Florida teen is making a business out of rebuilding old-school auto tech]

Inside, the big bumper car’s power plant comes from a Chevrolet Aveo. “I took the front of the Aveo, and chopped it off, and put that in the back of the bumper car,” he explains. “And the front of the bumper car is a motorcycle wheel.” That single wheel up front means it can turn very sharply. The exterior is made out of fiberglass. All told, it measures 13 feet long, 7 feet wide, and 5.5 feet tall, making it twice the size of a regular bumper car. A pole in the back mimics the way actual bumper cars get their electricity, except this one connects to nothing. 

A project like this would likely be a bumpy ride for anyone without the experience that Hryhorcoff, 72, brings to the table. “I learned to run a lathe when I was 13 years old, with my dad, and he was kind of a jack-of-all-trades,” he recalls. (A lathe is a tool for forming metal into a round shape, and a wood lathe is the kind of equipment you could use to make a baseball bat.) He built a go-cart, tinkered with lawn mowers, and learned about auto repair in a garage. His interest, as he describes it, was “all around mechanical.” 

He spent four years after high school in the Navy in the early 1970s, where he worked stateside and repaired radios for F-4 jets, and then studied mechanical engineering at Penn State. After working for a drilling company, he started his own machine shop called Justus Machine. 

a giant bumper car on the road
The bumper car measures 5.5 feet high. Kathy Hryhorcoff

Always diving into something new

The submarine he built came from plans for a K350 model purchased from George Kittredge, and is called Persistence. “I knew I was building something that wasn’t gonna kill me, if I build it correctly,” he says. (Watch a video of the sub in action here.) That sub has gone as deep as 540 feet with no one on board, Hryhorcoff says, and he’s taken it down himself to about 150 feet deep. 

[Related: How does a jet engine work? By running hot enough to melt its own innards.]

Hryhorcoff describes himself as an engineer, not an artist, and prefers to follow plans and undertake projects in which he knows any challenges he might face are surmountable. “Any project I’ve ever chose was a project that I knew I can get through it, but I had something new to learn in the process,” he says. “There were always some unknowns.” But those unknowns, he adds, were within the realm of doable for him and his equipment, even if he had to learn new stuff along the way.

“I’d rather big projects, rather than a dozen little ones,” he adds. 

Watch a short video about Hryhorcoff and this project, below:

The post This giant bumper car is street-legal and enormously delightful appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The moon is 40 million years older than we thought, according to crystals collected by Apollo astronauts https://www.popsci.com/science/moon-age-apollo-17-sample/ Mon, 23 Oct 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581809
NASA astronaut Harrison Schmitt is standing on the moon’s surface next to a large split lunar boulder, with a roving vehicle on the other side of the boulder.
On December 13, 1972, scientist-astronaut Harrison Schmitt is photographed standing next to a huge, split lunar boulder during the third Apollo 17 extravehicular activity at the Taurus-Littrow landing site. NASA/Gene Cernan

Fresh analysis on vintage lunar samples gives us a more precise age and history for the moon.

The post The moon is 40 million years older than we thought, according to crystals collected by Apollo astronauts appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
NASA astronaut Harrison Schmitt is standing on the moon’s surface next to a large split lunar boulder, with a roving vehicle on the other side of the boulder.
On December 13, 1972, scientist-astronaut Harrison Schmitt is photographed standing next to a huge, split lunar boulder during the third Apollo 17 extravehicular activity at the Taurus-Littrow landing site. NASA/Gene Cernan

The moon is our closest neighbor in space and the only celestial body humans have set foot on, yet we are still learning about it. In fact, Earth’s moon might actually be 40 million years older than scientists previously believed. By conducting an atom-by-atom analysis on crystals that were brought back by Apollo astronauts in 1972, a team of geochemists and plenary scientists now calculate that the igneous orb is at least 4.46 billion years old. The findings are described in a study published today in the journal Geochemical Perspectives Letters.

Intertwined fates

Based on samples recovered from the moon’s surface, we know that it formed more than four billion years ago when a giant object the size of Mars crashed into a very young Earth. The largest piece of the planet that broke off during that collision became our moon, and has been intertwined with the solar system ever since. 

[Related: How old is Earth?]

“Life on Earth has evolved with the moon, and the moon has an influence on life on Earth,” study co-author and cosmochemist Philipp Heck tells PopSci. “It inspires us, which is reflected in cultural heritage, but it also has other beneficial effects like stabilizing Earth’s rotational axis.” 

Heck is a curator for the meteorite collection at the Field Museum in Chicago and a professor at the University of Chicago. He says that studying the moon also helps us understand our own planet because of the topographical differences.

“Earth’s surface is much, much younger because there’s so much geologic activity [here] from volcanism and weathering,” explains Heck. “The moon’s surface is essentially an archive of solar system dynamics. This is a record that we don’t have on Earth, but our planet’s evolution is tied to these impacts that happened in the early solar system.”

A historical perspective

In the study, the team looked at moon dust brought back by the Apollo 17 crew. The 1972 lunar landing included NASA geologist Harrison Schmidt, who collected multiple rocks to study back on Earth. His samples contain very small crystals that were created billions of years ago and can help indicate when the moon was formed.

Apollo 17 astronaut Harrison Schmitt stands on the moon's surface in 1972. Schmitt is probing various moon rocks and collecting samples to return back to Earth.
Apollo 17 astronaut Harrison Schmitt in 1972, covered in lunar dust. NASA

The energy created by the impact from the object that struck Earth and created the moon melted the rock that eventually became the lunar surface. That offers a clue to the elements that existed on the celestial body since its emergence versus the ones that appeared much later. For example, zirconium, a silver metal found on both the Earth and the moon, could not form and survive on the molten lunar surface: Any zircon crystals that are currently present on the moon must have formed after the magma ocean cooled. Determining the age of these structures can thus reveal the minimum possible age for the moon, assuming that they emerged right after the impact.

Looking atom by atom

Researchers have previously suggested that the moon is older than estimated, but this new study is the first to use an analytical method called atom probe tomography to pinpoint the age from the oldest known lunar crystal retrieved by humans.

“In atom probe tomography, we start by sharpening a piece of the lunar sample into a very sharp tip using a focused ion beam microscope, almost like a very fancy pencil sharpener,” study co-author and planetary scientist Jennika Greer said in a statement. “Then, we use UV lasers to evaporate atoms from the surface of that tip. The atoms travel through a mass spectrometer, and how fast they move tells us how heavy they are, which in turn tells us what they’re made of.”

This atom-by-atom analysis revealed how much of the zircon crystals had undergone radioactive decay—a process where atoms that have an unstable configuration shed some protons and neutrons. They then transform into different elements, like how uranium decays into lead. Based on the amount of conversion and the known half-lives of different chemical isotopes, experts can estimate the age of the sample.

A scientist named Jennika Greer works with an atom probe in a lab. She is holding a long, metal tube and looking towards a special microscope.
Lead author Jennika Greer working with the atom probe. Dieter Isheim/Northwestern University

“Radiometric dating works a little bit like an hourglass,” Heck said in a statement. “In an hourglass, sand flows from one glass bulb to another, with the passage of time indicated by the accumulation of sand in the lower bulb. Radiometric dating works similarly by counting the number of parent atoms and the number of daughter atoms they have transformed to. The passage of time can then be calculated because the transformation rate is known.”

The team working with the Apollo 17 sample found that the proportion of lead isotopes (the daughter atoms created during the decay) indicated that the crystals were about 4.46 billion years old, so the moon must at least be that old too. While this puts the moon’s age back 40 million years, that’s still a very short time compared to the universe’s roughly 13.7 billion-year history

“It’s amazing being able to have proof that the rock you’re holding is the oldest bit of the moon we’ve found so far. It’s an anchor point for so many questions about the Earth. When you know how old something is, you can better understand what has happened to it in its history,” Greer said.

From Apollo to Artemis

In future studies, clues pulled from these decades-old samples could be pooled with those from samples taken by upcoming Artemis lunar missions. Artemis III is scheduled for 2025 and will land on and explore the lunar South Pole. The Apollo 17 mission collected samples from the Taurus-Littrow valley on the eastern edge of Mare Serenitatis, so crystals from a different region of the moon could yield unimaginable discoveries. 

[Related: Scientists have new moon rocks for the first time in nearly 50 years]

“I am convinced that there is older stuff on the moon—we just haven’t found it yet. I even think we have older zircons in the Apollo samples. This is really the power of sample return,” says Heck. 

A mixture of new samples and future advances in technology could further anchor the timeline of how our solar system was formed and beyond.  “Maybe in 50 or 100 years or even later, new generations of scientists will have the tools we can only dream about today to address scientific questions we can’t even think about today,” says Heck. “These templates are a legacy for future generations.”

The post The moon is 40 million years older than we thought, according to crystals collected by Apollo astronauts appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Climate change has toppled some civilizations but not others. Why? https://www.popsci.com/environment/fall-of-the-roman-empire-civilizations-climate-change/ Mon, 23 Oct 2023 01:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580299
Sabratha - Libya
Focusing too closely on catastrophe can result in a skewed view of the past—it overlooks societies that navigated an environmental disaster and made it through intact. Getty Images

The link between environmental disasters and societal collapse, explained.

The post Climate change has toppled some civilizations but not others. Why? appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Sabratha - Libya
Focusing too closely on catastrophe can result in a skewed view of the past—it overlooks societies that navigated an environmental disaster and made it through intact. Getty Images

This story was originally published by Grist. Sign up for Grist’s weekly newsletter here.

The Roman Empire fell more than 1,500 years ago, but its grip on the popular imagination is still strong, as evidenced by a recent trend on TikTok. Women started filming the men in their lives to document their answers to a simple question: How often do you think about the Roman Empire? 

“I guess, technically, like every day,” one boyfriend said, as his girlfriend wheezed out an astonished “What?” He wasn’t the only one, as an avalanche of Twitter posts, Instagram Reels, and news articles made clear. While driving on a highway, some men couldn’t help but think about the extensive network of roads the Romans built, some of which are still in use today. They pondered the system of aqueducts, built with concrete that could harden underwater.

There are a lot of reasons why people are fascinated by the rise and fall of ancient empires, gender dynamics aside. Part of what’s driving that interest is the question: How could something so big and so advanced fail? And, more pressingly: Could something similar happen to us? Between rampaging wildfires, a rise in political violence, and the public’s trust in government at record lows, it doesn’t seem so far-fetched that America could go up in smoke.

Theories of breakdown driven by climate change have proliferated in recent years, encouraged by the likes of Jared Diamond’s 2005 book CollapseHow Societies Choose to Fail or Succeed. The Roman Empire, for example, unraveled during a spasm of volcanic explosions, which led to a period of cooling that precipitated the first pandemic of bubonic plague. The decline of the ancient Maya in Central America has been linked with a major drought. Angkor Wat’s downfall, in modern-day Cambodia, has been pinned on a period of wild swings between drought and monsoon floods. So if minor forms of climate change spelled the collapse of these great societies, how are we supposed to survive the much more radical shifts of today? 

Focusing too closely on catastrophe can result in a skewed view of the past—it overlooks societies that navigated an environmental disaster and made it through intact. A review of the literature in 2021 found 77 percent of studies that analyzed the interplay between climate change and societies emphasized catastrophe, while only 10 percent focused on resilience. Historians, anthropologists, and archaeologists have recently tried to fill in that gap. The latest entry is a study that analyzes 150 crises from different time periods and regions, going off a comprehensive dataset that covers more than 5,000 years of human history, back to the Neolithic period. Environmental forces often play a critical role in the fall of societies, the study found, but they can’t do it alone.

Researchers with the Complexity Science Hub, an organization based in Vienna, Austria, that uses mathematical models to understand the dynamics of complex systems, found plenty of examples of societies that made it through famines, cold snaps, and other forms of environmental stress. Several Mesoamerican cities, including the Zapotec settlements of Mitla and Yagul in modern-day Oaxaca, “not only survived but thrived within the same drought conditions” that contributed to the fall of the Maya civilization in the 8th century. And the Maya, before that point, had weathered five earlier droughts and continued to grow.

The new research, published in a peer-reviewed biological sciences journal from The Royal Society last month, suggests that resilience is an ability that societies can gain and lose over time. Researchers found that a stable society can withstand even a dramatic climate shock, whereas a small shock can lead to chaos in a vulnerable one.

The finding is in line with other research, such as a study in Nature in 2021 that analyzed 2,000 years’ worth of Chinese history, untangling the relationship between climate disruptions and the collapse of dynasties. It found that major volcanic eruptions, which often cause cooler summers and weaker monsoons, hurting crops, contributed to the rise of warfare. But it wasn’t the size of the eruption that mattered most: Dynasties survived some of the biggest, climate-disrupting eruptions, including the Tambora eruption of 1815 in present-day Indonesia and the Huaynaputina eruption of 1600 in what’s now Peru.

What matters most, the Complexity Science Hub’s study posits, is inequality and political polarization. Declining living standards tend to lead to dissatisfaction among the general population, while wealthy elites compete for prestigious positions. As pressures rise and society fractures, the government loses legitimacy, making it harder to address challenges collectively. “Inequality is one of history’s greatest villains,” said Daniel Hoyer, a co-author of the study and a historian who studies complex systems. “It really leads to and is at the heart of a lot of other issues.”

On the flipside, however, cooperation can give societies that extra boost they need to withstand environmental threats. “This is why culture matters so much,” Hoyer said. “You need to have social cohesion, you need to have that level of cooperation, to do things that scale—to make reforms, to make adaptations, whether that’s divesting from fossil fuels or changing the way that food systems work.”

It’s reasonable to wonder how neatly the lessons from ancient societies apply to today, when the technology is such that you can fly halfway around the world in a day or outsource the painful task of writing a college essay to ChatGPT. “What can the modern world learn from, for example, the Mayan city states or 17th century Amsterdam?” said Dagomar Degroot, an environmental historian at Georgetown University. The way Degroot sees it, historians can pin down the time-tested strategies as a starting point for policies to help us survive climate change today—a task he’s currently working on with the United Nations Development Programme.

Degroot has identified a number of ways that societies adapted to a changing environment across millennia: Migration allows people to move to more fruitful landscapes; flexible governments learn from past disasters and adopt policies to prevent the same thing from happening again; establishing trade networks makes communities less sensitive to changes in temperature or precipitation. Societies that have greater socioeconomic equality, or that at least provide support for their poorest people, are also more resilient, Degroot said.

By these measures, the United States isn’t exactly on that path to success. According to a standard called the Gini coefficient—where 0 is perfect equality and 1 is complete inequality—the U.S. scores poorly for a rich country, at 0.38 on the scale, beaten out by Norway (0.29) and Switzerland (0.32) but better than Mexico (0.42). Inequality is “out of control,” Hoyer said. “It’s not just that we’re not handling it well. We’re handling it poorly in exactly the same way that so many societies in the past have handled things poorly.”

One of the major voices behind that theme is Peter Turchin, one of the co-authors on Hoyer’s study, a Russian-American scientist who studies complex systems. Once an ecologist analyzing the rise and fall of pine beetle populations, Turchin switched fields in the late 1990s and started to apply a mathematical framework to the rise and fall of human populations instead. Around 2010, he predicted that unrest in America would start getting serious around 2020. Then, right on schedule, the COVID-19 pandemic arrived, a reminder that modern society isn’t immune to the great disasters that shaped the past. “America Is Headed Toward Collapse,” declared the headline of an article in The Atlantic this summer, excerpted from Turchin’s book End Times: Elites, Counter-Elites, and the Path of Political Disintegration

The barrage of climate catastrophes, gun violence, and terrorist attacks in the headlines are enough to make you consider packing up and trying to live off the land. A recent viral video posed the question: “So is everyone else’s friend group talking about buying some land and having a homestead together where everyone grows separate crops, [where] we can all help each other out and have a supportive community, because our society that we live in feels like it’s crumbling beneath our feet?”

By Turchin’s account, America has been at the brink of collapse twice already, once during the Civil War and again during the Great Depression. It’s not always clear how “collapse” differs from societal change more generally. Some historians define it as a loss of political complexity, while others focus on population decline or whether a society’s culture was maintained. “A lot of people prefer the term ‘decline,’” Degroot said, “in part because historical examples of the collapse of complex societies really refer to a process that took place over sometimes centuries” and would perhaps even go unnoticed by people alive at the time. Living through a period of societal collapse might feel different from what you imagined, just like living through a pandemic did — possibly less like a zombie movie, and more like boring, everyday life once you get accustomed to it.

The Complexity Science Hub’s study suggests that collapse itself could be considered an adaptation in particularly dire situations. “There is this general idea that collapse is scary, and it’s bad, and that’s what we need to avoid,” Hoyer said. “There’s a lot of truth in that, especially because collapse involves violence and destruction and unrest.” But if the way your society is set up is making everyone’s lives miserable, they might be better off with a new system. For example, archaeological evidence shows that after the Roman Empire lost control of the British Isles, people became larger and healthier, according to Degroot. “In no way would collapse automatically be something that would be devastating for those who survived—in fact, often, probably the opposite,” he said.

Of course, there’s no guarantee that a better system will replace the vulnerable, unequal one after a collapse. “You still have to do the work of putting in the reforms, and having the support of those in power, to be able to actually set and reinforce these kinds of revisions,” Hoyer said. “So I would argue, if that’s the case, let’s just do that without the violence to begin with.”

This article originally appeared in Grist at https://grist.org/culture/climate-change-societal-collapse-explained/

Grist is a nonprofit, independent media organization dedicated to telling stories of climate solutions and a just future. Learn more at Grist.org

The post Climate change has toppled some civilizations but not others. Why? appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
This private lander could be the first US machine on the moon this century https://www.popsci.com/science/nova-c-moon-south-pole/ Sun, 22 Oct 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581635
Pale craters on the moon's lunar surface, with dark shadows below.
A top-down view of the lunar south pole. NASA/Goddard Space Flight Center Scientific Visualization Studio

The NOVA-C spacecraft, launching in November, should help pave the way for Artemis astronauts.

The post This private lander could be the first US machine on the moon this century appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Pale craters on the moon's lunar surface, with dark shadows below.
A top-down view of the lunar south pole. NASA/Goddard Space Flight Center Scientific Visualization Studio

NASA plans to return humans to the moon in 2025 with the Artemis III mission. Before that, the space agency will conduct a vital preliminary mission in November 2024, when the Artemis II mission flies a crew of astronauts in lunar orbit for the first time since the 1970s. But the “important first step” toward those goals, as NASA put it in a recent blog post, is the planned launch of the IM-1 mission carrying the NOVA-C lunar lander in a few weeks. It will attempt to land several NASA science experiments near Malapert A, a crater in the southern lunar polar region. Those studies could help NASA prepare for astronaut operations in the area in 2025. 

Unlike the Artemis missions, though, NOVA-C isn’t a big NASA project. Instead, the truck-sized craft designed to ferry small payloads to the lunar surface was built, and will be operated by, the small Texas-based company Intuitive Machines. 

If it succeeds in landing near the lunar south pole, NOVA-C will be the first US soft landing on the moon since the 1970s, and the first ever commercial landing on the moon that hasn’t crashed or failed. So why is a small spacecraft built by a relatively small company a key part of NASA’s big moon program?

“There is a pattern that we have now seen of NASA trying to move to more commercial solutions and services, rather than do it all on their own,” says Wendy Whitman Cobb, a space policy expert and instructor at the US Air Force School of Advanced Air and Space Studies. It’s much like NASA’s Commercial Crew and Cargo programs, which contracted with SpaceX to fly astronauts and supplies to the International Space Station aboard its Dragon space capsules. 

[Related: Why do all these countries want to go to the moon right now?]

Now NASA is turning to commercial companies to prepare the way for humanity’s return to the moon. Intuitive Machines was one of the first companies to receive a contract—for $77 million— under NASA Commercial Lunar Payload Services, or CLPS program, back in 2019. NASA designed CLPS to fund private sector companies interested in building small, relatively inexpensive spacecraft to fly experiments and rovers to the moon, allowing NASA to simply purchase room on the spacecraft rather than developing and operating it themselves. 

A blue and black spacecraft on the moon's gray surface, in a computer illustration.
An illustration of Intuitive Machines’ NOVA-C lander on the lunar surface. Intuitive Machines/NASA

In the case of NOVA-C, five NASA payloads will ride along with devices from universities including Louisiana State and Embry-Riddle Aeronautical University. ”The NASA payloads will focus on demonstrating communication, navigation and precision landing technologies, and gathering scientific data about rocket plume and lunar surface interactions, as well as space weather and lunar surface interactions affecting radio astronomy,” the space agency wrote in a blog post about the mission. 

“We don’t still don’t know a lot about the moon,” Whitman Cobb adds. The moon has variable gravity depending on where there are more metallic materials. “Finding out where those places are, how lunar dust is going to kick up when you’re trying to land or take off—all of these things are really key.”

That’s why NASA is sending payloads to ride along with NOVA-C. But the reason NOVA-C is landing where it is, about 300 kilometers from the south pole, has more to do with how the whole world is now thinking about the moon.

NOVA-C was originally destined to land in the Oceanus Procellarum, one of the large, dark areas known as mares, or “seas,” on the lunar surface. But in May, NASA and Intuitive Machines announced the change in plans and the new target near the south pole. 

[Related: We finally have a detailed map of water on the moon]

”The decision to move from the original landing site in Oceanus Procellarum was based on a need to learn more about terrain and communications near the lunar South Pole,” NASA announced in a blog post at the time. “Landing near Malapert A also will help mission planners understand how to communicate and send data  back to Earth from a location that is low on the lunar horizon.”

The reasons NASA wants to land near the lunar south pole with Artemis, and why the recent and successful Chandrayaan 3 mission of India, and the failed Russian Luna 25 mission, both targeted the lunar south pole are twofold: research and resources, according to Richard Carlson, a lunar geologist who retired from the Carnegie Institute for Science in 2021.  

“Both north and south polar regions have permanently shadowed craters where water has been detected from orbit,” he says. ”The real question is whether that water is a one micron surface coating of water on a few grains, or whether it’s a substantial abundance of water. Water of course being useful for a lot of things, from drinking water to turning it into hydrogen and oxygen, which is rocket fuel.”

The other motivation for going to the south pole is that it’s geologically very different from where the Apollo missions landed, according to Carlson. “They all landed on a pretty small portion of the moon on the Earth facing side of the moon on the nice flat mares, and that’s a rather unusual part of the moon geologically,” he says. ”If you think of studying the Earth this way, the Apollo lunar program would have basically landed on, let’s say, just North America, and that’s it.”

The lunar south polar region is much more geologically varied, with tall mountains and ridges, as well as rocks dug out from deep within the moon and scattered over the region by impact craters billions of years ago, Carlson says. But of course, such a landscape has its downsides for spacecraft coming from Earth. 

“You look at the pictures of the places that they selected [for Artemis III] and I wouldn’t want to land there. I mean, they’re really rough,” he says. “If we land on a rock, the spacecraft is going to fall over.” Sending small, uncrewed craft like NOVA-C to the moon’s south polar ahead of Artemis astronauts will test how difficult landing there really is. 

After all, as Witman Cobb notes, touching down anywhere on the moon is really hard. Before the failed Luna 25 landing on August 21, there were two failed commercial lunar landings. The Israeli company SpaceIL saw its Beresheet lander crash land in 2019, while the Hakuto-R M1 lander from Japanese company ispace crashed in April. 

”We haven’t seen a commercial company be successful in landing on the moon yet,” Whitman Cobb says. ”That’s really fascinating when you think about our capability of landing humans on the moon in the 1960s, and 1970s. That today, with all of the technology that we now have, this is still a really, really difficult thing to do.”

The post This private lander could be the first US machine on the moon this century appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to watch TV on a computer, even if it’s live https://www.popsci.com/watch-live-tv-on-computer/ Fri, 30 Apr 2021 21:26:55 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/watch-live-tv-on-computer/
A young woman reclining on a gray couch, smiling as she watches TV on a silver laptop on the table in front of her.
Forget a separate device—you can stream live TV on your laptop. Depositphotos

Turn your laptop into a mobile television set.

The post How to watch TV on a computer, even if it’s live appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A young woman reclining on a gray couch, smiling as she watches TV on a silver laptop on the table in front of her.
Forget a separate device—you can stream live TV on your laptop. Depositphotos

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

As television shows become available online, there’s less of a need to watch your favorites on a set schedule. But if you choose to cut the cord entirely, you’ll miss out on live channels, such as news and sports. Luckily, you can still watch live TV on your computer. You have two options: Plug a TV tuner device—which catches broadcasts like an antenna does—into a USB port, or stream shows through your web browser.

Plug in a TV tuner

Network channels, including NBC, CBS, ABC, Fox, PBS, and local stations, air for free. All you need to watch them is an antenna to snag the broadcasts and a device to share them with your computer. The latter, called a TV tuner, can come in the form of a dongle or a larger box that plugs into any spare USB port.

Tuners come with bundled software that helps you navigate. When you’re getting started, these built-in applications will install the necessary drivers, scan for available channels, and display them on your computer screen. Then you can click through your options.

Once you’ve finished installation, the bundled software will help you receive channels, browse program guides, and make recordings. However, you can also download alternative applications, such as Kodi and Plex, to do the same tasks. Kodi is free but has a slightly more complicated setup, while Plex has a simpler process but requires a Plex Pass subscription that costs $5 per month, $40 a year, or $120 for lifetime access. Plex also has a handy “discover” feature that lets you track down anything you want to watch.

Buying a tuner

When you go shopping for tuner hardware, first look for compatibility with your computer’s operating system. Also consider whether the device includes extras like a bundled remote control. If you choose a model that comes with two or more integrated tuners, you’ll be able to record one channel while watching another, record two shows at once, or create a picture-in-picture effect with two channels.

We’d recommend the Hauppauge WinTV-DualHD ($80 on Amazon), though it only works with Windows machines. It includes two tuners, which lets you view or record two shows at once. Once you plug it into a spare USB port, the supplied software will take over, which makes the setup process extremely easy.

Buying an antenna

If you’ve already wired your home with a TV antenna, you can connect it to your new tuner and be good to go. If not, you’ll need to purchase an antenna to catch the TV signals flying through the air. Unfortunately there’s no easy way to figure out how many channels an antenna will catch—many factors make a difference, including the presence of surrounding buildings and nearby hills, and the distance between your home and the closest tower. You’ll just have to buy the hardware and try it out, so make sure the seller has a good returns policy, in case the reception is poor. If you live in a place where structures are few and far between, you may also want to check out our review team’s roundup of the best TV antennas for rural areas.

One of our favorite options is the Mohu Leaf Supreme Pro ($70 on Amazon), which boasts a sleek-looking design and a 65-mile range. Because it’s multi-directional, you don’t need to point it in a specific direction, so you can lay it flat or mount it to a wall. It’s meant to be used indoors, but it works great wherever you put it.

[Related: The best TV antennas]

Another choice we’d recommend is the 1byone Digital Amplified Indoor HDTV Antenna ($18 on Amazon), which is cheaper than the Mohu but has a smaller range—it only connects to transmission towers within 50 miles.

Once you’ve purchased your new gear, connect the antenna to the tuner, then the tuner to your laptop. Finally, download the free installer software (if necessary) and launch the application. It will walk you through the process of bringing up live TV channels on your laptop.

Stream channels online

Don’t want to buy new hardware? You can still watch live TV through your web browser. While services like Netflix focus on on-demand programs, other services include a live component so you can watch broadcasts—such as sports—as they happen.

If you’re only interested in watching a few channels in particular, head to the websites for those companies. Many of them—including ABC, Fox, and NBC—let you stream directly from their sites. However, there’s a catch: Different channels have different rules, and some require that you already have a TV provider or similar subscription (you have to sign in to confirm those credentials before watching). For example, you can watch CBS shows live only if you have a Paramount Plus subscription, which costs $6 per month and still includes ads.

Monthly online TV services

To get more than one channel at once, including premium options, you’ll need to subscribe to a monthly service like Hulu Live TV, YouTube TV, or Sling TV. All of these options provide a strong connection and easy setup, but they differ in the channels they offer. For example, YouTube TV doesn’t have a great spread of sports channels, while Sling TV has two plans that contain different stations but doesn’t focus on local ones. Before you invest in any subscription, test out that service’s free trial (they all offer one) to get a feel for the experience and make sure it includes the TV channels you want to watch. Here’s some more information that should help you choose.

Hulu offers four plans that include live TV, and the cheapest is $75.99 a month, but it does not allow you to access Hulu’s regular on-demand library—it’s live stuff only. You can spend $1 more ($76.99 per month) to add access to Hulu’s streaming library, Disney Plus, and ESPN Plus, all with ads. You can also pay more for additional features, such as premium channels like Showtime and Max (formerly HBO).

[Related: Watch anything you want without signing up for every streaming service]

With a slightly lower price of of $72.99 a month, YouTube TV offers access to more than 100 live channels, but you will need to enter your ZIP code to see what’s available in your area. For an additional $2 to $30 a month, you can bolt on extra ones, including NFL RedZone and Showtime. It also gives you an unlimited amount of free cloud DVR storage, so you can record as much content as you want and store it on YouTube’s servers.

Sling TV focuses on premium cable channels rather than local networks like ABC, CBS, and Fox, although you may be able to get some local channels, depending on your area. Prices start at $40 a month for a pack of 32 channels, and you can increase your subscription fee to add more. You can watch on a variety of devices besides your computer, including a smartphone or an Apple TV. Sling also offers a cloud DVR service, but you’ll have to pay an additional $5 a month to save recordings in the cloud.

Cable subscriptions

If you already pay for a cable subscription, this may be the easiest way to tune into live television on your computer. All you need are your username and password.

Take Comcast’s Xfinity Stream service. It gives subscribers access to more than 250 channels. Just navigate to the Xfinity Stream site, log in with your credentials, and start watching. DirecTV offers similar services, and you can access it through a web browser.

This story has been updated. It was originally published in 2019.

The post How to watch TV on a computer, even if it’s live appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best iPad apps for making the most of your device https://www.popsci.com/diy/best-ipad-apps/ Sun, 22 Oct 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581678
A person's hand selecting options of iPad apps in Apple's App store.
Select from the estimated 1.8 million apps available for the iPad. Depositphotos

Maximize your iPad’s potential (and your productivity) with the top apps for from drawing, planning, photo editing, and more.

The post The best iPad apps for making the most of your device appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A person's hand selecting options of iPad apps in Apple's App store.
Select from the estimated 1.8 million apps available for the iPad. Depositphotos

The latest iPads, like the iPad Pro M2, offer incredible speed and visual clarity that make them a favorite for work, school, and everything in between. However, to take full advantage of everything an iPad offers, you’ll need the right iPad apps. Your work and lifestyle will influence the apps that offer the most convenience and functionality for you. We’ve put together a list of the best iPad apps in a range of categories, from those that keep you organized to apps for editing, drawing, and taking notes.

1. Best for note-taking: Microsoft OneNote

The home page of the OneNote app, which shows a bike build list and an image of a bike on an iPad screen.
Need some help getting organized? Screenshot: Microsoft

OneNote, made by Microsoft, offers excellent note-taking features that stand out for ease of use and top-notch organizational features. The app is available in free and paid versions that come with Microsoft Office 2019 or a Microsoft 365 subscription. (Office 2019 costs $149.99 and Microsoft 365 costs $9.99 for a monthly subscription or $99.99 annually with a yearly subscription) The free version can do everything the paid version can except for storing files locally on Windows and a few stickers, which are pictures that offer another way to express yourself visually.  

The app’s organizational structure includes Notebooks, which break down into Sections, Pages, and Sub-Pages. The Notebooks display as colored tabs on the left of the screen, giving you easy access. The app takes a freeform approach to writing by allowing you to write anywhere on the page, like you would on a piece of physical paper. It automatically opens in text mode to type using an iPad keyboard or the on-screen one, but you can easily change to “draw” and use an Apple pencil to sketch pictures or leave handwritten notes. You can then tag lines of text so you can search for them later. 

A huge pro for OneNote for the iPad is the ability to draw along with taking text notes. You can add sketches, handwritten notes, or graphs to and over the top of text. The ability to draw around and through text within the same document is unique and separates OneNote from heavy competition by popular note-taking apps like Evernote and Joplin. You can also add attachments anywhere in the text so they show up where you need them to. 

The only real downside to OneNote is that there’s only local storage on Windows, yet it’s available in macOS, iOS, Android, and desktop versions. For an iPad, you’ll store your notes in Microsoft’s OneDrive, which means you’ll need a (free) OneDrive account

Microsoft OneNote is available on iOS, iPadOS, watchOS, and Android.

2. Best for drawing: Pixelmator Pro

The homepage for the Pixelmator Pro app, which features an editing app with a photo of a woman with artistically drawn text in the background.
Take your images to the next level with this powerful editing tool. Screenshot: Pixelmator

Among the many drawing apps for iPad, Pixelmator Pro rises to the top for its balance of simplicity, versatility, and price. The app offers over 100 brushes, pencils, and other tools that will let you build variety into your sketches. You can paint with watercolor or use sponge brushes to build texture in sketches in ways you can’t when drawing on paper without a bucket full of supplies. 

Pixelmator also has a photo editing system, which includes features that you can add to original drawings. For example, you can use layers, apply effects, and fine-tune colors to build depth and character to your work. You can also add shapes from Pixelmator’s library or add text with varying effects. Beyond drawing, the latest version also lets you work with RAW images, edit PDFs, and create iPhone 15 mockups.

[Related: How to unlock the hidden, more powerful camera on the iPhone 15]

We also like that you can easily export your drawings in different formats and send them directly to cloud storage like Dropbox or Google Drive. Overall, the app puts incredible creative power into your hands and gives you multiple ways to share your creations on other devices. However, the learning curve can be steep for those with little graphic experience. Pixelmator Pro doesn’t have a huge library or tutorials, so some learning will have to come from trial and error. 

Pixelmator Pro is available on iOS and iPadOS.

3. Best for planning: Todoist

The homepage of the Todoist app, which features abstract illustrations of flowers, mountains, and a man in a fedora.
Now you’ve got no excuse for procrastinating on that side project. Screenshot: Todoist

Todoist falls somewhere between the ultimate to-do list and project management. This cloud-based service syncs with any device on which you have the app, so you can access your lists from your iPad or a desktop as long as both have the app. An incredibly well-designed interface makes it easy to use despite the fact that it’s packed with features. 

You can schedule due dates, create tasks, and build lists. You can organize projects by tasks and subtasks. There are options to manually reorder tasks or set sorting options for the project. And Todoist lets you add labels so you can search among your projects later on. 

Plus, you can share it with multiple users, which is where the project management aspect comes in. The free version lets users organize five personal projects, provides space for 5MB file uploads, and keeps one week of activity history. The pro version, which costs $4 per month billed yearly, offers 300 personal projects, 100MB file uploads, and unlimited history with task reminders and task duration options. Businesses may want the business subscription, which costs $6 per month billed yearly, to get 500 team projects, unlimited collaborators, and the option to limit access and control with admin and member roles.

[Related: How to use split screen on iPad and conquer multitasking]

With the paid version, you can assign people tasks or add due dates, making it a robust way to manage a family schedule or small business team. Todoist is powerful, and the free version works well for personal organization. However, if you want to manage a family or small business using Todoist, it’s worth upgrading to either of the paid versions.

Todoist is available on iOS, iPadOS, watchOS, and Android.

4. Best for photo editing: Adobe Lightroom

The homepage for Adobe Lightroom, which features the black logo with the blue letters L and R inside and three phots of a sailboat on the water, a portrait of a woman, and a editing a photos of a mountainous area.
Lightroom makes it easy to make pro-level adjustments on the go. Screenshot: Adobe

Adobe Lightroom is a top choice when it comes to photo editing power. You upload your photos to Adobe’s Cloud, and once there, they’re available to edit on an iPad. The iPad version of Lightroom isn’t quite as robust as the desktop version, but it still offers excellent photo editing tools. You can download it for free with in-app purchases to unlock the features you need. The monthly prices for premium upgrades range from $4.99 to $49.99 per month. 

The app now has more advanced photo editing features like local adjustments, lens-profile-based corrections, and noise reduction, too. We like the local adjustments feature, which is fairly new to the iPad version. With this feature, you can select an oval or linear area in which to apply your edits rather than to the entire image. You’ve got 17 adjustment features to apply within the area, like graduated or radial filters and softness and strength adjustments. Of course, there are more traditional editing tools like photo adjusters and adjustments for clarity and shadows. You’ve also got the option to shoot photos directly in the app, which is more tempting now that iPads come with higher-quality cameras.

The downside with the app is that there currently aren’t great options to batch-edit a large number of photos, say for a wedding, which is odd considering that the features are geared more toward pros than beginners. But for individual photos, you can do everything you need from your iPad and send them to the desktop app when you’re done.

Adobe Lightroom is available for iOS, iPadOS, and Android.

5. Best for calendar: Google Calendar

The homepage for Google Calendar on a desktop, which features a Get Started button and a sample calendar with entries pulled out as an example.
This calendar can help you avoid double-booking. Screenshot: Google

Google Calendar’s versatility and collaboration options make it one of the best iPad apps for those who have a Google account. If you don’t have one, you’ll need to get one, and it’s worth considering for the range of features this calendar offers. 

You can create several calendars and view them separately or together. Organize a family calendar with your spouse and children or keep one for extended family to coordinate events. Google Calendar can be particularly helpful when working with teams because everyone can share their work calendars and schedule meetings using the app. There are options to create tasks, reminders, and recurring events. Within each, you can set times, invite participants, change colors, and add locations. Plus, you can share specific events if you don’t want to share your entire calendar. 

[Related: 5 Google Calendar tips to ensure you never miss a date]

All of that is with the free version, which, really, is all most people need unless you’re working with a large team. The premium version offers analytics and insights as well as the ability to schedule appointments or allow others to schedule appointments with you. Plus, you can sync all of your calendars to keep your life organized in one space.

Google Calendar is available on iOS, iPadOS, and Android.

The post The best iPad apps for making the most of your device appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to increase your WiFi speed https://www.popsci.com/speed-up-wi-fi/ Sun, 03 Oct 2021 01:37:40 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/speed-up-wi-fi/
A person using a phone with a WiFi signal icon on the screen, while sitting outside.
No, you cannot speed up your WiFi by tapping on the screen. georgejmclittle / Depositphotos

Boost your internet without buying a bunch of new tech.

The post How to increase your WiFi speed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A person using a phone with a WiFi signal icon on the screen, while sitting outside.
No, you cannot speed up your WiFi by tapping on the screen. georgejmclittle / Depositphotos

No one likes slow WiFi—it’s right up there with creaking doors and leaking taps as one of the most frustrating household problems. To increase your WiFi speed back to where it should be, try making these tweaks to your router and other devices.

We’ve already covered some of the hardware upgrades you can invest in to remove dead spots and boost your home upload and download speeds. So in this guide, we’ll focus on software fixes and changes you can make to your existing gear. If those adjustments don’t work, switching to a mesh network or buying a WiFi extender can also improve your wireless internet speed.

Upgrade your router software

A Netgear router connected to a lot of cords, on a wood floor.
That looks like a pretty old router you’ve got there—have you updated its firmware recently? Stux / Pixabay

Just like your laptop and cell phone, routers run their own software. In this case, it’s called firmware because it’s so tightly tied to the hardware—the manufacturer installs and configures it before shipping the device. Companies don’t often issue updates for their routers’ firmware, but many do make new versions of their software available for download. These updates fix bugs and may also include performance upgrades, as well as extra support for newer devices on the market.

The best way to find new firmware for your router is to head to the manufacturer’s website or the internet service provider that gave you the router. If you can’t find a download link, run a web search using “firmware” followed by your router’s make and model.

The exact process for installing firmware varies from router to router. Typically, you open the device settings on your computer and look for the option that lets you install an update from a downloaded file (often a ZIP archive) on your hard drive. The downloaded package usually includes installation instructions, but if you’re still not sure how to do it, consult the router instruction manual or look up the instructions online.

Change the wireless channel

The options for changing your router's wireless channel.
Most routers let you switch to a different wireless channel. David Nield for Popular Science

Here’s another trick to try with a slow router: change the wireless channel it uses. This means slightly adjusting the wireless frequency that your WiFi signal is broadcast on. Your router should have a setting that lets you modify the channel, likely listed under a heading like Wireless or Advanced. If you can’t find it immediately, look up instructions online or in the router manual.

Most routers use channel 6 by default. Change this to 1 or 11 (to minimize interference with channel 6), and you might notice better WiFi performance. All of your connected devices will also need to connect to this new channel, but the majority of your gear will do so automatically, with no need to adjust the WiFi name or password. You might have to play around a bit before you arrive at the best channel, but stick to 1, 6, or 11 for the best chance of getting the fastest speeds.

[Related: 6 router settings you should change right now]

In a related trick, some more advanced routers offer two frequency bands: the standard 2.4GHz band and the faster 5GHz band. These bands follow the same principle as the channels mentioned above, but when you switch bands, you’re shifting the frequency much further. That means WiFi-enabled devices you connect to different bands won’t interfere with each other.

If your router supports dual bands (check your model’s documentation for details), you’ll usually see two different WiFi networks you can connect to. Divide your devices across both networks, depending on the speed and range each piece of hardware needs from your WiFi. For example, the 5GHz band typically offers faster speeds but shorter range, so devices closer to your router should use that one. It’ll stream your Spotify tunes more reliably to your gaming console, but it’s not as good at blasting through walls and doors as the older 2.4GHz standard. Use the latter for devices you move around your home, such as phones, or those located farther away from the router, and you should see increased WiFi speeds on all your devices.

Not every router can handle both bands, but most manufactured in recent years support these standards. On either band, if you’re getting sub-optimal WiFi speeds and seeing buffering wheels more often than you’d like, you can still change the wireless channel used in the 5GHz range or the 2.4GHz one. Check out your router’s help pages for more information on your options.

Control the bandwidth

Speedtest.net's internet speed testing interface.
Speedtest.net will tell you the download and upload rates you’re getting. Screenshot: Speedtest.net

Internet use can quickly eat up your available bandwidth, especially on slow connections or those shared among multiple people. So if you’re struggling to get a decent speed, try investigating what else is happening on your network. For example, running Netflix alongside Hulu while you take multiple video calls probably isn’t the best way to maximize your streaming speed.

As you work, visit a site like Speedtest.net to check your internet speed and see what you’re currently getting. But taking steps to increase those speeds means you’ll have to patrol the specific use of your home WiFi network—which is up to you and the people you live with. The easiest solution for maximum speeds is turning off devices not currently in use. This will not only save you money on your energy bill, but will also make sure that those computers, televisions, and tablets can’t possibly be wasting the bandwidth you need for another application. You can also dig into individual device settings to see which apps are using up the most WiFi.

[Related: Find the perfect internet speed for you]

At the same time, you’ll want to make sure no unwelcome visitors or invasive neighbors are lurking on your home network. Your router should have come with WiFi password protection already enabled. Changing this password on a regular basis—not to mention keeping it secret—will help you keep your network to yourself and your invited guests.

Another option is to specify which internet uses you value most. Some routers include a feature called Quality of Service, or QoS, which lets you prioritize certain applications (like Netflix) or types of content (like video) over others. You could use it to make sure your video calls stay stable even if that makes the Spotify stream spotty. Some routers also let you prioritize certain devices (maybe your computer) over others (maybe your roommate’s). If your router has a QoS feature, look on the manufacturer’s website or in the supplied manual for instructions on setting it up and telling the router what you’d like to prioritize.

Avoid the fish tank (and other large, dense objects)

A Netgear router near a PlayStation video game console and headphones.
Ideally, you’ll want to keep your router as close to your devices as possible. Netgear

Plenty of innocuous household objects will slow down your WiFi—including the water inside fish tanks. Now you know why your laptop never gets a signal when it’s behind the aquarium in your study. Even if you keep a fish-free home, try moving your furniture to put as few objects as possible (including walls) between your devices and your router.

In addition to bulky objects, anything that emits a wireless signal can interfere with the WiFi your router broadcasts. That includes wireless baby monitors, wireless landline phones, microwaves, Bluetooth keyboards and mice, and even string lights. All of these generate electromagnetic interference that can reduce your upload and download speeds. In most cases, the disruption should be minimal, but it’s worth bearing in mind if you’re experiencing problems. Rearranging the aforementioned items can help boost WiFi speed throughout your home, but if that solution is inconvenient, just switch your router to its 5GHz channel: Most microwaves and other wireless gear use the 2.4GHz frequency, so the higher band should be less congested.

This story has been updated. It was originally published in 2017.

The post How to increase your WiFi speed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
This grade-A refurbished iPad mini is $80 and ships free https://www.popsci.com/sponsored-content/refurbished-ipad-mini-free-shipping-deal/ Sat, 21 Oct 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581669
A silver iPad mini on a plain background
Stack Commerce

Save hundreds with this refurbished offer instead of purchasing new. Get it before this sale ends on Oct. 23!

The post This grade-A refurbished iPad mini is $80 and ships free appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A silver iPad mini on a plain background
Stack Commerce

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

This grade A refurbished iPad mini 2 has a 7.9-inch screen, 16GB of storage, and up to 10 hours of battery life, now $79.97 (reg. $139.99) with free shipping for a limited time.

It’s hard to believe the original iPad was released over 13 years ago. On one hand, time and innovation have flown by, and, on the other, some of us have never owned the classic Apple tablet because of its three- to four-figure price tag.

Our massive fall savings event might be your chance to change that. This near-mint refurbished iPad mini 2 is $79.97 (reg. $139.99) with free shipping through Oct. 23. You won’t find this price anywhere else.

Refurbished devices are all the rage

A brand-new iPad mini 6 starts at $499, but you’re able to save hundreds on this iPad mini 2 due to its refurbished status. Refurbished is the shorthand way of referring to a pre-owned device that’s been thoroughly tested and cleaned so it can be resold at a steep discount. 

This iPad mini 2 received a grade A quality rating, the highest possible, for being in near-mint condition with little to no amounts of scuffs or scratches. Most times, these can be hidden with a case (not included).

A few years old but acceptable by today’s standards

A downside of purchasing refurbished devices is they don’t always update to the latest software. Since the iPad mini 2 is a 2013 model year, it only updates to iOS 12.5.6. But, if you’re just looking for a tablet for reading, streaming, or even holiday gifting, this iPad mini 2 still has a lot to offer:

  • 7.9-Inch HD display.
  • 16GB of storage.
  • Apple A7 Fusion processor with 1GB of RAM and 1.3GHz speed.
  • 5MP rear camera and 1.2MP front camera.
  • Up to 10 hours of battery life.

Don’t miss out on the web’s lowest price for a grade A refurbished iPad mini 2, $79.97 (reg. $139.99) with free shipping through Oct. 23 at 11:59 p.m. Pacific. No coupon is needed for this deal.

Prices subject to change.

The post This grade-A refurbished iPad mini is $80 and ships free appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
You can now track NYC subway rats in this popular transit app https://www.popsci.com/technology/transit-app-rat-detector/ Sat, 21 Oct 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581832
a rat in a new york city subway station under the benches
Ludovic Bertron / Wikimedia

New York's hottest club (for rats) is off the A line.

The post You can now track NYC subway rats in this popular transit app appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
a rat in a new york city subway station under the benches
Ludovic Bertron / Wikimedia

As cities sprout up in native ecosystems, keeping track of how our urban cohabitants are adapting to them has been a work in progress for scientists. An initiative from The Daily Telegraph and other crowdsourced efforts have been underway in the UK to count the foxes spotted in urban areas, for example. And Microsoft has been using AI to gather information about the growing population of urban monkeys in India. 

And in the biggest city in the United States, residents know that the true New Yorkers are the rats. Rats, with their complex community dynamics and resourcefulness, have taken over the town, and forced the city to come up with creative ways to fight back against them, including recently anointing a “rat czar” to head off the problem. As much as people hate to admit it, rats, though jarring whenever they appear, are a part of the urban ecosystem. Like other city dwellers, they’ve learned the ins and outs of city life, and have made the most of it. 

In its efforts to understand its rat residents, the city of New York has taken measures to collect rat stats. One project to come out of this data-gathering effort is the rat map, which indicates hot spot gatherings for rodent group hangs. Another app called Transit is taking a more citizen science approach to see where the most popular rat hubs are. Transit uses open transit data provided by city agencies to help riders visualize train and bus times in their area (it works in cities like New York, Boston, and Los Angeles). It aims to help commuters find the best and fastest way to get to their destination. Beyond ingesting schedules, the app also relies on crowdsourced information about alerts or other unexpected events. 

[Related: Open data is a blessing for science—but it comes with its own curses]

Recently, the app launched a new feature called the NYC Subway Rat Detector, which tells users how busy a certain subway station is in terms of recorded rat activity. By asking users to report rat levels at a given subway station through an in-app questionnaire called “Rate-my-ride,” Transit can garner real-time insights at the station from its 1.2 million New York users, as the developers explained in a newsletter they sent out earlier this month. This data doesn’t just get shared with fellow riders and app users, but with the app’s transit agency partners, too. 

Will it lead to change? Maybe. The last time Transit riders were asked to tattle on the state of their stations, some of the dirtiest Big Blue Bus stops in Santa Monica, California got a much needed clean-up

The rat dashboard addition certainly did not go unnoticed. Many TikTok users have since highlighted this update. One such video posted by user @smokulani received more than 1 million views. 

“The results are in. And the rats? They’re everywhere,” Transit noted on a web post explaining the feature. Through their research, they found that Manhattan boasts the most rat sightings out of all the boroughs, and the rattiest station in New York is the Grant Av A stop, followed by the Harlem 1 2 3 stop, and the Woodhaven Blvd E F M R stop. They’ve also ranked stops with the highest frequency or number of rat occurrences.

The post You can now track NYC subway rats in this popular transit app appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best audiobook apps for books and podcasts https://www.popsci.com/diy/best-audiobook-apps/ Sat, 21 Oct 2023 00:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580987
A stack of six hardcover books on a wood table with headphones around them and a blackboard in the background.
Catch up on the latest fiction and revisit your summer reading from high school. Depositphotos

Get access to your favorite titles and shows and sync between devices with an audiobook app that works for you.

The post The best audiobook apps for books and podcasts appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A stack of six hardcover books on a wood table with headphones around them and a blackboard in the background.
Catch up on the latest fiction and revisit your summer reading from high school. Depositphotos

If you struggle to fit reading into your day, the best audiobook apps let you multitask and listen to the latest releases while driving, exercising, or even making dinner. Audiobooks are increasingly popular, and by 2022, more than 140 million Americans had listened to one, according to Publisher’s Weekly

Audiobook apps vary in features and the breadth of their libraries. Many require a monthly or yearly subscription, and some offer media beyond audiobooks, such as podcasts. Voracious listeners may prefer a subscription service where you can indulge in as many audiobooks as you want in a month. But if it takes you a month or two to get through an audiobook, a pay-per-book platform will probably be more economical. 

Ultimately, the operating system of your devices, your listening preferences, and budget will all factor into the app that’s right for you as you discover your next great adventure.

1. Best overall: Audible

The homepage for Audible, which features two rows of book titles.
Audible isn’t just books, it’s home to podcasts and original programming. Screenshot: Audible

Founded in 1995 and acquired by Amazon in 2008, Audible is one of the pioneers in the audiobook space. The service lets you get your hands on almost any title that’s in audiobook form. You’ll also get access to podcasts, exclusives, and originals that are only available on the platform. 

Audible offers two membership tiers, and both provide access to the Audible ‘Plus’ catalog, which contains more than 10,000 audiobooks. The Audible Premium Plus membership adds one credit per month, so you can buy books outside of the Plus catalog, giving you access to an additional 470,000 audiobooks. Without the premium membership, you can purchase credits to listen to more audiobooks.

The platform also lets you keep access to your Audible books even if you cancel your subscription. In contrast, similar apps, like Scribd, only provide access to purchased books as long as you subscribe to the app. Others, like Hoopla and Libby, let you peruse your local library’s list of audiobooks. But they only provide access for a few weeks before you have to get on the reading list again. 

With Audible, you can leisurely listen or hop between books with no fear of losing access disappearing before the end of your novel. It also ensures that you have access to the audiobooks whether you’re subscribing or not. Not sure Audible is right for you? No worries. You get a free 30-day trial period before committing to either Audible Plus at $7.95 per month or Audible Premium Plus at $14.95 per month.

Audible is available on iOS, iPadOS, watchOS, and Android.

2. Best for iPhone: Apple Books

The home page for Apple Books, which displays an iPad and iPhone featuring titles.
You don’t have to commit to a subscription. Screenshot: Apple

Apple Books is a convenient way to get digital reads and audiobooks that sync to all of your Apple devices. Unlike many audiobook apps, Apple Books isn’t a subscription service. It works more like a digital bookstore, where you pay for each book. 

For those who only listen to a book or two a month, Apple Books might cost less than a subscription service. Plus, if you have months where you don’t have time to listen at all, you won’t be paying for an unused subscription. There’s also a decent selection of free audiobooks that includes classics such as Pride and Prejudice if your budget gets tight. 

Beyond the monetary pros and cons, the app itself offers a robust library that’s easy to navigate, thanks to effective categorization. You can browse thousands of titles by popular genres, but you can also search by other categories such as free books, new and trending, book club picks, and Apple recommendations. And you can sample short snippets before you make your final decision. 

The library goes beyond audiobooks to digital titles as well. In theory, you could do most of your reading, audio or otherwise, in this single app. Your Apple devices will require iOS 10 or later, but you can sync across the board, including iPads, iPhone, some iPods, and some Apple Watches. Bonus—you also have the option to download and import Audible titles, so add that to your Audible tips and tricks list if you find yourself moving between the two.

Apple Books is free for iOS, iPadOS, and watchOS.

3. Best for nonfiction: Blinkist

The home page for Blinkist, which displays an iPhone and Android phone and headphones and explains the subscription model.
It’s the modern-day equivalent of Cliff Notes. Screenshot: Blinkist

Blinkist isn’t just an audiobook app. It’s not even just a book app. This unique app focuses on all things learning, from podcasts and book summaries to audiobooks. It’s some of the best value you’ll get if you’re focused on nonfiction, even more so if you’re usually short on time. 

The app offers book summaries in manageable 15-minute chunks, and includes popular books like Atomic Habits by James Clear. You can download titles to access them offline or send them to Kindle. Books are arranged by topics, including love, self-help, memoirs, autobiographies, and more. Popular new releases and classics are readily available. The goal is to “feed your brain” and improve your mind and body with content that fits a busy lifestyle. 

[Related: Tips for learning two languages at once]

Blinkist is an easy way to access facts and books you might not have time to get to otherwise, and it doesn’t take long before you get personalized recommendations based on your preferences and habits. You get a seven-day free trial, then it costs $15.99 per month for the monthly plan or $8.24 per month if you opt to pay yearly.

Blinkist is available on iOS, iPadOS, and Android.

4. Best free: LibriVox

The home page for LibriVox, which is divided into two boxes that explain how users can access public domain books for free.
If you want free audiobooks, LibriVox might be the app for you. Screenshot: LibriVox

Subscriptions and monthly purchases can quickly add up. For those on a tight budget, LibriVox offers free (and legal) audiobooks. Their catalog consists of more than 40,000 books available in the public domain, read by volunteers. 

You won’t find the latest releases, but you can catch up on classics. The books are DRM-free so you can download audiobooks as many times as you’d like and listen when you’re offline or on other devices. This matters because DRM (Digital Rights Management) prevents unauthorized copying of copyrighted content, but can cause problems on your devices, too. No need to worry about all that with LibriVox, though, because every bit of its content is in the public domain. 

The interface isn’t sleek or fancy, but it offers bookmark and timer features to support your basic listening needs. If you’re up for a bit of out-loud reading, you can volunteer to read a book yourself. However, the quality of the narration varies by volunteer, so you may skip some books because the storytelling doesn’t do it justice. Still, you can’t beat free audiobooks and a platform that celebrates the love of literature. 

LibriVox is available for iOS, iPadOS, and Android.

5. Best budget: Chirp

The homepage for the audiobook app, Chirp.
Screenshot: Chirp

Chirp is where thrift store meets audiobooks. It’s owned by BookBub, an author promotion site. Thousands of subscribers scramble to get deals on new or popular books, like $5 for a Harlan Coben audiobook. The deal on any one particular book usually lasts a few days and listings show a countdown for how much longer the deal will last. Authors vie for the best promotions because of Bookbub’s extensive reach.

Chirp fits into the picture by offering discounted audiobooks. For listeners, Chirp is a win for the savings, and for authors, the platform is a great way to  find new readers. You pay by the book rather than a subscription fee. And the depth of the discounts vary.

On the downside, deals are limited, so you have to act fast when you see a book you want. The app itself is free, and you get to keep the audiobooks you purchase, so it’s a great way to build your library on a budget.

Chirp is free for iOS, iPadOS, and Android.

The post The best audiobook apps for books and podcasts appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Aging US energy grid will get a largest-ever $3.5 billion boost https://www.popsci.com/environment/electric-grid-update-biden/ Fri, 20 Oct 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581619
Many of the projects have a specific focus on improving grid reliability for rural or low-income households.
Many of the projects have a specific focus on improving grid reliability for rural or low-income households. DepositPhotos

New funding from the Biden administration aims to build an energy system more resilient against climate impacts.

The post Aging US energy grid will get a largest-ever $3.5 billion boost appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Many of the projects have a specific focus on improving grid reliability for rural or low-income households.
Many of the projects have a specific focus on improving grid reliability for rural or low-income households. DepositPhotos

This story was originally published by Grist. Sign up for Grist’s weekly newsletter here.

The Department of Energy announced on Wednesday that it would funnel $3.46 billion toward upgrading the country’s aging electric grid—marking its largest-ever investment in that part of the United States’ energy network.

The funding, which comes from the bipartisan infrastructure law that President Joe Biden signed in 2021, is intended to prepare the grid for more renewable energy capacity as the U.S. transitions away from fossil fuels, and to prevent blackouts caused by increasingly severe climate disasters.

Between 2011 and 2021, the country experienced a 78 percent increase in weather-related power outages compared to the previous decade. Twenty percent of these outages were caused by hurricanes, extreme heat, and wildfires.

“Extreme weather events fueled by climate change will continue to strain the nation’s aging transmission systems,” U.S. Energy Secretary Jennifer Granholm said in a statement. She added that the new funding would “harden systems” and “improve energy reliability and affordability.”

The new funding targets 58 projects across 44 states that, cumulatively, are expected to leverage $8 billion in federal and private investments in grid expansion and resiliency. Many of these projects involve building new microgrids, groups of dispersed but interconnected energy-generating units that can provide electricity even when the larger grid is down. For example, a solar microgrid involves lots of rooftop solar panels all feeding into a common pool of electricity—usually stored in a battery that serves as a source of backup power during an outage.

The funding will also support the development of several large-scale transmission lines, including five new lines across seven Midwestern states. These lines help carry electricity from place to place, allowing clean energy to be generated in rural areas, where land tends to be more plentiful, and delivered to population centers. 

Other projects involve more general upgrades to accommodate greater loads of electricity or improve emergency monitoring systems. Altogether, the DOE says the projects will help bring 35 gigawatts of renewable energy online, equivalent to roughly half of the U.S.’s utility-scale solar capacity in 2022. This will contribute to President Biden’s goal of moving the country’s electricity generation away from fossil fuels by 2035. As of 2021, the power sector accounted for a quarter of U.S. greenhouse gas emissions.

The Energy Department highlighted the selected projects’ commitments under Justice40, a Biden administration initiative that promises to direct at least 40 percent of the benefits of federal investment in infrastructure, clean energy, and other climate-related projects to disadvantaged communities, often defined as those that are low-income or that have been disproportionately exposed to pollution. According to the Energy Department, 86 percent of the projects contain labor union contracts or will involve collective bargaining agreements, and the agency says they will help “maintain and create good-paying union jobs.” 

Many of the projects also have a specific focus on improving grid reliability for rural or low-income households. For example, one project in Oregon aims to upgrade transmission capacity and bring carbon-free solar power to remote customers on the Confederated Tribes of Warm Springs Reservation. Another project in Louisiana will create a backup battery system that could reduce energy bills for disadvantaged communities.

Wednesday’s announcement allocates just some of the funds included in the Energy Department’s broader, $10.5 billion Grid Resilience and Innovation Partnerships Program, which is expected to fund more grid resiliency projects in the future. 

Meanwhile, experts say funding to upgrade power grids needs to double globally by 2030 in order to facilitate the transition from fossil fuels to technologies powered by electricity—electric vehicles instead of gas cars, for example, or heat pumps instead of furnaces. Otherwise, a report released Tuesday by the International Energy Agency warns that aging electric grids could become a “bottleneck for efforts to accelerate clean energy transitions and secure electricity security.”

This article originally appeared in Grist at https://grist.org/energy/the-us-electric-grid-is-getting-a-3-5-billion-upgrade/

Grist is a nonprofit, independent media organization dedicated to telling stories of climate solutions and a just future. Learn more at Grist.org

The post Aging US energy grid will get a largest-ever $3.5 billion boost appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best bird feeder cameras in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-bird-feeder-cameras/ Fri, 20 Oct 2023 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580793
four of the best bird feeder cameras sliced together against a white background
Abby Ferguson

Bird feeder cameras allow you to see your feathered friends in new ways.

The post The best bird feeder cameras in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
four of the best bird feeder cameras sliced together against a white background
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A blue Bird Buddy Smart Bird Feeder filled with seed against a white background with a gray gradient. Bird Buddy Smart Bird Feeder
SEE IT

The Bird Buddy offers stylish design, quality images, and a fun app with real-time notifications.

Best for hummingbirds A blue BirdDock Hummingbird Feeder Camera against a white background with a grey gradient. BirdDock Hummingbird Feeder Camera
SEE IT

The nectar attachment of this feeder can be swapped out to hold seed as well.

Best budget A white WYZE Cam v3 against a white background with a gray gradient. WYZE Cam v3
SEE IT

This budget option lets you see the birds without any extras.

Bird feeder cameras make documenting our feathered friends fun and easy, but they aren’t created equally. Some are best for bird-watching in your own backyard, while others are better suited to remote locations. More expensive models have features like solar panels, video options, and smart bird identification, while basic, budget models make feeder photography accessible for just about everyone. No matter what you are looking for, the best bird feeder cameras will allow you to capture quality images of the birds who call your area home. 

How we chose the best bird feeder cameras

There are dozens of bird feeder cameras on the market. Though many of them have the same basic features, they don’t all offer the same level of important features like durability, battery life, and accuracy of species detection. 

To arrive at our top picks, we relied on our own assessment of each device, including hands-on experience with multiple models. Because bird feeder cameras must be durable, weatherproof, and offer long-lasting performance, we also leaned heavily on user experiences and favored well-reviewed products. 

Features like accurate bird identification, solar panel availability, and useful accessories also helped push some models into the limelight. Other options like real-time notification and color night vision were nice to have but not essentials. Still, they didn’t tend to figure into our final decision simply because of their somewhat limited value for bird photography. 

The best bird feeder cameras: Reviews & Recommendations

Choosing a bird feeder camera can be tough. There are dozens of available models, and the prices can range from less than $50 all the way up to $400 or more. The key to finding the right bird feeder camera is not necessarily shopping by price but knowing which features are must-haves and which are not. Not everyone will benefit from AI, for example. You may even prefer to use your own knowledge to identify the birds in your photographs. Below are our favorite options, suitable for a range of situations and users. 

Best overall: Bird Buddy Smart Bird Feeder

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: Yes, identifies more than 1,000 bird species 
  • App compatibility: Android and iOS
  • Resolution: 5-megapixel photos, 720p video
  • Battery: 4000 mAh rechargeable lithium-ion battery, optional solar panel

Pros

  • Sharp images with a 120-degree field of view
  • Weatherproof from -5°F to 120°F
  • The smartphone app allows you to see feeders all over the world
  • Compatible with an optional solar panel and lots of accessories
  • Three mounting options

Cons

  • No local storage, so it can’t be used without Wi-Fi
  • Video resolution is lower than some competitors

The Bird Buddy bird feeder camera is relatively new, but it has much to offer, so it earns our top spot. The bird feeder is attractively designed, so it will look nice in your yard or on your deck with some solar lights, which is an important feature for many. It’s available in blue or vibrant yellow, so you can choose an option that fits your style best. I really enjoy the look of the blue Bird Buddy on the side of my porch, which is a big plus. 

The camera module is removable, which is important when it comes time to clean the feeder. It can take five-megapixel photos or offers 720p live-streamed video. The image quality won’t be that of your dedicated mirrorless or DSLR camera, but it is nicely detailed and properly exposed even in backlit situations. And being able to tune in to watch live as a bird chows down is pretty neat. 

The camera’s 120-degree field of view is wide enough to capture birds hanging out on the feeder’s side. You can also buy multiple accessories through Bird Buddy to extend the perch or feed different species. With the solar roof (the model we thoroughly tested and reviewed), you’ll never need to think about charging the camera. Without the solar roof, you’ll need to charge the camera every 5 to 15 days.

The Bird Buddy relies on AI to automatically recognize over 1,000 species of birds. The Bird Buddy app notifies you when you have new visitors to your feeder, which is always exciting. You can even browse other Bird Buddy devices all over the world to see species that you wouldn’t otherwise encounter. Plus, the images from your device contribute to migration information for conservation databases. You’ll be helping science progress while getting fun images of your feathered friends. 

Best trail camera: TECHNAXX Full HD Birdcam TX-165 

TECHNAXX

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: None
  • App compatibility: N/A, no app available
  • Resolution: 8-megapixel photos, full HD 1080p video
  • Battery: 4 AA batteries give it a working time of up to 6 months

Pros

  • Sturdy trail-cam style feeder
  • 6-month battery life
  • Removable water basin means it can be a feeder or a birdbath
  • Captures slow-motion video

Cons

  • No smartphone app or bird identification features
  • Memory card storage is less convenient than Wi-Fi or Bluetooth

This hybrid bird feeder camera is as tough as any trail camera. However, unlike most trail cameras, it can focus as close as 2 to 6 inches and offers a 100-degree field of view. This means you’ll get much better images of visiting birds than you would with a typical trail cam. The TX-165 takes standard AA batteries but has a working time of up to 6 months. You can leave it in a secure, remote location for a long time without worrying about the battery going flat.

The TX-165 also has a few features you won’t find on other bird feeder cameras. You can fill it with birdseed or fill the removable basin with water and turn it into a birdbath camera. It also takes impressive eight-megapixel images and full HD 1080p video. It’s also capable of 25 frames per second for slow-motion videos. 

Best for bird boxes: Hawk Eye HD Nature Cam

Hawk Eye

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: None
  • App compatibility: N/A, no app available
  • Resolution: 700 tvl (television lines)
  • Battery: None (includes a 75-foot power cable)

Pros

  • Compact, so you can hide it almost anywhere
  • Night vision lets you capture clear images in poor light 
  • Durable and temperature-tolerant to between 35°F and 105°F

Cons

  • Only shoots video 
  • Not waterproof
  • Needs to be plugged into a power supply

Birds do a lot more than just eat birdseed, so at some point, you might want to step up to a birdhouse camera. Because the Hawk Eye Nature Cam isn’t built into a feeder, it’s much more flexible than most bird cams. Its small size means you can put it anywhere—on treetops, fence posts, or even in animal burrows (though please exercise caution when putting it down a snake hole). Or it can be wired discreetly into a bird box for a 24/7 look at growing bird families, from egg to fledgling. 

The Hawk Eye Nature Cam is meant for live-streaming to your television set. The video resolution is clear and sharp, with 700 tvl (television lines) and 10 infrared diodes. This lets you view clear video even in the darkened environment of a typical bird box. Note, however, that you will need an RCA to USB adapter if you have a modern TV. 

The Hawk Eye does have a few drawbacks. It has no battery, so you’ll have to mess with a long extension cord to get it set up. It also isn’t waterproof. If you want to attach it to an unsheltered location, you’ll have to build waterproof housing or limit your use to dry weather. Finally, you can connect the camera to your PC and use additional software to grab photos and video segments from the live stream, but it’s not designed to capture high-resolution stills.

Best for hummingbirds: BirdDock Hummingbird Feeder Camera

BirdDock

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: Yes, identifies species and alerts you when birds approach 
  • App compatibility: Android and iOS
  • Resolution: 2-megapixel photos, full HD 1080p video
  • Battery: 6400 mAh rechargeable batteries provide 20 to 30 days of operating time 

Pros

  • AI can recognize around 5,000 different species, including hummingbirds
  • Rechargeable batteries provide 20 to 30 days of use
  • Hummingbird attachment is removable

Con:

  • Still photos are much lower resolution than those shot by similar feeders 
  • The app is clunky and difficult to use

The BirdDock is a flexible bird feeder camera that isn’t limited to just capturing photos of seed-eaters. It also offers a removable hummingbird attachment featuring five flower-shaped feeding ports with 0.16-inch holes to keep bees and other insects out.  When you want to switch to photographing songbirds, you can remove the hummingbird feeder and fill the device with seeds. 

Like other AI feeders, the BirdDock will identify species and alert you when one is approaching the feeder. It has night vision, too, which could help you identify other critters that visit your feeder overnight. This bird feeder camera features a 160-degree field of view and can be used with or without an SD memory card. It provides an impressive battery life of up to 30 days. You can also purchase a separate solar panel to keep the device charged in sunny weather.

The BirdDock has two primary drawbacks: It captures still photos at a relatively low resolution of only two megapixels (though it does also capture full HD 1080p video). It also doesn’t have an especially user-friendly app. Some users complain that the bird identification feature isn’t accurate and that the app frequently disconnects from the camera.

Best for bird identification: Netvue Birdfy Pro

Netvue

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: Yes, identifies more than 6,000 different species 
  • App compatibility: Android and iOS
  • Resolution: Full HD 1080p video
  • Battery: 5000 mAh rechargeable batteries 

Pros

  • Can identify more than 6,000 different species 
  • Long battery life (the manufacturer claims up to six months of use)
  • Extra features like squirrel recognition and color night vision

Cons

  • The bird identification service costs extra
  • Storing photos on the cloud requires a subscription

The Netvue Birdfy rivals the Bird Buddy with features like ease of use, durability, and photo quality. It has an impressive array of extra features like color night vision. The AI can recognize squirrels, and the built-in microphone lets you yell at them when they’re caught robbing the feeder. You can also upgrade your feeder with add-ons like a solar panel, hummingbird feeder, and perch extension.

The Birdfy has the same features as most other feeders, including automatic capture/motion detection and real-time notification. It takes clear video at close range, provides a 135-degree field of view, and even offers 8x magnification if you want to study the fine details.

Birdfy has an impressive database of 6,000 species, though reviewers note that it isn’t always accurate. When it does misidentify a bird, you have the option to submit a report via the app. This is evidence that Netvue is constantly working to improve its software. 

The primary drawback of the Netvue bird feeder camera is you may have to pay for various subscriptions depending on what features you want access to. For example, if you want to take advantage of the bird identification feature, you must pay for a subscription. Likewise, a subscription is required if you want to store photos on the Netvue Cloud for longer than 30 days. 

Best budget: WYZE Cam v3

WYZE

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: No species identification
  • App compatibility: Android and iOS
  • Resolution: 1080p full HD video
  • Battery: No battery

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Weatherproof 
  • Compact for easy mounting

Cons

  • Minimum focus distance is around 12 inches
  • No battery; needs to be plugged into a power supply

Bird feeder cameras with all the bells and whistles can be expensive. A $200 feeder might be outside your budget, or you may not need all the features that expensive bird feeder cameras offer. The WYZE Cam v3 is essentially an outdoor security camera. You won’t be able to fill it with birdseed or attach a hummingbird accessory. But you can mount this sturdy little camera next to any commercial bird feeder or install it close to a high-traffic part of your backyard. 

The WYZE Cam v3 offers all the basic features you need in a bird cam. It’s weatherproof with an IP65 rating. It takes photos when it senses motion, and it has an app so you can see what’s happening outside in real-time. 

The WYZE Cam does have a few drawbacks. One of these is the focus distance. While most dedicated bird cams can focus on subjects as close as a few inches, the WYZE Cam isn’t designed for closeups. You’ll have to mount it at least a foot away from your feeder, meaning you won’t see a lot of detail in your photos. 

The WYZE Cam is also wired. It comes with a weatherproof six-foot USB cable, so you’ll have to install it close to your home. On the plus side, once installed, you won’t have to worry about changing or recharging the battery or losing your video stream on a cloudy day.

Things to consider before buying a bird feeder camera

If you love bird watching but don’t want to sit waiting with your binoculars, a bird feeder camera will allow you to capture photos and videos of birds even when you aren’t around.

A bird feeder camera is meant for permanent outdoor use. This means it needs features you probably don’t consider when shopping for other photography gear. Here are some of the most important things you’ll want to think about when shopping for a bird feeder camera.

Durability

Bird feeder cameras can be subject to some serious abuse. The sun’s UV rays and hot temperatures can degrade plastic casings over time. These devices must also withstand storms and sprinklers, remaining waterproof from season to season. Of course, they should also be tough enough to handle the beaks and claws of visiting critters—not just the birds they’re intended for but other potential visitors like squirrels and mice.

Image quality

The image quality of bird feeder cameras is dependent on a few things. Resolution is the first thing most think of, and indeed, it is important with these devices. If you want clear, sharp images, look for bird feeder cameras with higher resolution. These compact cameras won’t offer numbers you may be used to in smartphones or mirrorless cameras, though. Five to eight megapixels for stills and 1080p for video tend to be the highest available at the moment.  However, if you aren’t concerned with high levels of detail, you could save some money and opt for a device with a less impressive resolution. 

The second factor of image quality is close focusing distance. The majority of shots taken by a bird feeder camera will be up-close. As a result, look for a device capable of getting clear photos at a very short distance. Even as close as a few inches is ideal.  Finally, birds don’t tend to sit still for long. Because of this, the camera should be able to freeze action, even in low light conditions like early morning or cloudy days. 

WiFi connectivity

WiFi isn’t necessarily a critical feature, but it’s something to consider if you’re going to keep your feeder close to your house. Most people don’t want to trek outside daily to download photos or swap out a memory card. A WiFi connection will let you see what your camera captured at any time of day in any weather. Treating it like a smart-home device will save you from having to venture into the cold, heat, or rain unless you need to change the battery or add birdseed.

Pay attention to the range of the device, too. Shy birds won’t approach your device if it is too close to your home. If it’s too far away, you won’t be able to view your photos without exiting your home.

Mounting options

Each bird feeder camera will have somewhat different requirements for how you install them. Some require a pole, some can be mounted to a fence post, and others can be hung. Depending on where you want the feeder and what tools you have available for installation, some of these options may be better than others for your particular needs.

Battery life

Some bird feeder cameras take basic replaceable AA batteries; others rely on solar panels to power internal rechargeable batteries. Either way, you’ll want to pick a camera that isn’t power-hungry. A good battery will ensure you aren’t constantly changing batteries or missing photos because your camera goes dark on a cloudy day. 

Choosing a camera with motion detection is a good place to start. These cameras only activate when there’s something to take a photo of, which helps the battery last longer.

FAQs

Q: How do bird feeder cameras work?

Most bird feeder cameras are triggered by motion. When a bird visits the feeder, the camera will capture a still photo or record video, depending on its design. Some smart bird feeder cameras can also identify species by comparing photos to thousands of stored images of each individual bird species.

Q: What color bird feeder attracts more birds?

A 2017 study found that green or silver bird feeders tend to attract the most visitors, but color preference also seems to be species-specific. Robins in the study, for example, preferred black feeders, while greenfinches and starlings didn’t seem to care about color at all. 

Q: Where should I put a bird feeder camera?

Bird feeders should be placed in open spaces but not too far from potential cover. The Humane Society recommends placing feeders 12 feet from brush and trees. This prevents predators from hiding near the feeder and gives the birds cover to fly to if they feel threatened.

Q: Do infrared cameras bother birds?

Infrared light is invisible to birds, so a camera inside a bird box will give you clear pictures while the bird remains in darkness. 

Final thoughts on the best bird feeder cameras

Once limited to nature photographers with long telephoto lenses and lots of patience, bird feeder cameras have made bird photography nearly effortless and available to almost anyone. That doesn’t necessarily mean any camera will do, though. Thinking about what you want to get out of your investment is an important first step in choosing a feeder. If you’re hoping to get up-close, detailed shots, pay attention to the example shots provided by the manufacturer and uploaded by users. Consider how important good battery life is to you, and ask yourself if you really need a camera that will identify already familiar local birds.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best bird feeder cameras in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Watch what happens when AI teaches a robot ‘hand’ to twirl a pen https://www.popsci.com/technology/nvidia-eureka-ai-training/ Fri, 20 Oct 2023 19:10:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581803
Animation of multiple robot hands twirling pens in computer simulation
You don't even need humans to help train some AI programs now. NVIDIA Research

The results are better than what most humans can manage.

The post Watch what happens when AI teaches a robot ‘hand’ to twirl a pen appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Animation of multiple robot hands twirling pens in computer simulation
You don't even need humans to help train some AI programs now. NVIDIA Research

Researchers are training robots to perform an ever-growing number of tasks through trial-and-error reinforcement learning, which is often laborious and time-consuming. To help out, humans are now enlisting large language model AI to speed up the training process. In a recent experiment, this resulted in some incredibly dexterous albeit simulated robots.

A team at NVIDIA Research directed an AI protocol powered by OpenAI’s GPT-4 to teach a simulation of a robotic hand nearly 30 complex tasks, including tossing a ball, pushing blocks, pressing switches, and some seriously impressive pen-twirling abilities.

[Related: These AI-powered robot arms are delicate enough to pick up Pringles chips.]

NVIDIA’s new Eureka “AI agent” utilizes GPT-4 by asking the large language model (LLM) to write its own reward-based reinforcement learning software code. According to the company, Eureka doesn’t need intricate prompting or even pre-written templates; instead, it simply begins honing a program, then adheres to any subsequent external human feedback.

In the company’s announcement, Linxi “Jim” Fan, a senior research scientist at NVIDIA, described Eureka as a “unique combination” of LLMs and GPU-accelerated simulation programming. “We believe that Eureka will enable dexterous robot control and provide a new way to produce physically realistic animations for artists,” Fan added.

Judging from NVIDIA’s demonstration video, a Eureka-trained robotic hand can pull off pen spinning tricks to rival, if not beat, extremely dextrous humans. 

After testing its training protocol within an advanced simulation program, Eureka then analyzes its collected data and directs the LLM to further improve upon its design. The end result is a virtually self-iterative AI protocol capable of successfully encoding a variety of robotic hand designs to manipulate scissors, twirl pens, and open cabinets within a physics-accurate simulated environment.

Eureka’s alternatives to human-written trial-and-error learning programs aren’t just effective—in most cases, they’re actually better than those authored by humans. In the team’s open-source research paper findings, Eureka-designed reward programs outperformed humans’ code in over 80 percent of the tasks—amounting to an average performance improvement of over 50 percent in the robotic simulations.

[Related: How researchers trained a budget robot dog to do tricks.]

“Reinforcement learning has enabled impressive wins over the last decade, yet many challenges still exist, such as reward design, which remains a trial-and-error process,” Anima Anandkumar, senior director of AI research at NVIDIA’s senior director of AI research and one of the Eureka paper’s co-authors, said in the company’s announcement. “Eureka is a first step toward developing new algorithms that integrate generative and reinforcement learning methods to solve hard tasks.”

The post Watch what happens when AI teaches a robot ‘hand’ to twirl a pen appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Bird Buddy Smart Bird Feeder review: A camera that’s not just for the birds https://www.popsci.com/gear/bird-buddy-smart-bird-feeder-review/ Fri, 20 Oct 2023 17:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581017
A blue Bird Buddy is mounted on a post in front of a house.
Abby Ferguson

You'll be able to capture quality photos and videos of your avian neighbors with the Bird Buddy.

The post Bird Buddy Smart Bird Feeder review: A camera that’s not just for the birds appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A blue Bird Buddy is mounted on a post in front of a house.
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Bird watching seems like one of those rites of passage as you get older. You reach a certain age and boom—you suddenly like studying our avian amigos. I have, apparently, reached that age. But I don’t always have time to tromp through fields with binoculars to catch fleeting feathers. Luckily, bird watching these days is extremely easy thanks to the arrival of bird feeder cameras. These devices are built with compact, weather-resistant cameras that typically detect motion to snap photos and videos when a bird comes to feast. They provide close-up views of the snacking species that wouldn’t be possible any other way.

One of the more popular bird feeder cameras—Bird Buddy—was launched as a Kickstarter and has taken the world of bird feeder cameras by storm. It offers an attractive yet practical design and pairs with an easy- and fun-to-use app. The Bird Buddy camera allows you to capture high-quality photos and videos of birds that visit your feeder, and AI even identifies them for you. I’ve had one up for a few months to put it through its paces and have been impressed with the device.

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Overview

  • The Bird Buddy is a modern-looking bird feeder with a removable camera that automatically snaps photos and videos of birds that come to snack. 
  • The easy-to-use app notifies you when you have a visitor and automatically identifies over 1,000 species of birds.
  • The feeder holds 3.5 cups of birdseed and comes with a scoop.
  • It comes with a few different ways to mount the feeder. Additional accessories are available for purchase separately.
  • A Bird Buddy Pro membership unlocks certain app features and higher video quality and costs $2.50 monthly for an annual membership or $2.99 for a monthly plan. 
  • The base-level Bird Buddy costs $239, but we suggest upgrading to the version with a solar roof for unlimited battery life for $299.

Pros

  • Attractive, modern design
  • Very little assembly required
  • Lots of accessories available
  • App is easy and fun to use
  • AI features automatically identify birds and other critters
  • Livestream is available
  • Records quality, highly-detailed photos and videos
  • Holds plenty of birdseed
  • Camera is removable for easy washing
  • Optional solar roof does away with charging the battery
  • Bird Buddy provides frequent updates

Cons

  • Requires a WiFi connection
  • Water pools in the bird feeder, resulting in moldy birdseed
  • Some features are locked behind a subscription paywall

Verdict

The Bird Buddy is one of the best bird feeder cameras available thanks to its excellent app usability, advanced AI, and high-quality images and videos. The sleek design is easy to install, clean, and fill, and the removable camera is a nice addition. The reliance on WiFi won’t work for everyone, but smart-home devices are increasingly common, and it allows for immediate access to your camera’s feed.

A Bird Buddy bird feeder camera is mounted on a post with a green forest in the background.
You can install the Bird Buddy in a few different ways, including mounting to a wall or fence. I went with a third-party wall mount since Bird Buddy’s version was out of stock when I was looking for one, but it has started to sag over time. Abby Ferguson

Bird Buddy setup

Setting up the Bird Buddy involves two parts: Connecting to a WiFi router along with the app and physically installing the bird feeder. The Bird Buddy doesn’t offer any onboard storage, so you’ll need access to a WiFi connection to use the camera and AI features. It uses an 802.11 b/g/n connection at 2.4 GHz plus Bluetooth for connection to the app. You’ll want to install the Bird Buddy app and pair your camera to the app before installing the bird feeder in your yard. 

I had substantial issues pairing my Bird Buddy to my WiFi and connecting it to the app, and had to call customer support for assistance. Luckily, the customer support team was incredibly helpful and patient in working through the troubleshooting, and we eventually got it all set up. It is worth noting that I had an early model, so Bird Buddy has likely solved some of those issues to make the pairing process smoother.

Physical installation is simple, depending on how and where you place your bird feeder. You can hang it, mount it to a one-inch pole with the included bottom mount, or purchase a separate wall mount for attaching to fences or walls. The camera slots right into the designated slot, and it’s easy to plug it into the solar roof (if you opt for that). 

A Bird Buddy bird feeder, filled with birdseed, is mounted on a post with a yard in the background.
The little bird prints for traction are a cute touch. Abby Ferguson

Bird Buddy design & build quality

The Bird Buddy bird feeder features a sleek, modern design with smooth curves. Though looks are subjective, I think it looks much more polished than other bird feeder cameras. It’s available in blue or vibrant yellow. Bird Buddy says it features a “bird-friendly design,” though it doesn’t specify what exactly that means. The perch features a raised bird footprint pattern, providing some grip for talons. 

The birdseed compartment—which holds 3.8 cups—is enclosed by clear plastic on both sides, allowing you and the birds to see the seed level inside. A back door at the top opens to fill the bird feeder up, though it requires careful maneuvering to get the seed inside and not spill it everywhere since it is a rather small opening. The entire back also comes off for easier cleaning. 

Bird feeders and bird feeder cameras are, naturally, outdoor items. As a result, they need to be durable, rugged, and built to withstand the elements. The Bird Buddy ticks those marks nicely. It is made of new and recycled BPA-free plastic and feels solid and sturdy. I have had it up for a handful of months, and after a quick cleaning, it looks brand new. That’s even despite the intense Florida sun constantly beating down on it.

The bottom of a blue Bird Buddy bird feeder with drainage holes and a mounting plate.
There are tiny drainage holes, but I still had issues with the seed molding after we had rain. Abby Ferguson

Water issues

My main frustration with the design of the Bird Buddy is regarding keeping rain out. There are holes in the bottom that drain water in the event of rain, but they are extremely tiny. Of course, that keeps the small seeds from falling out. Butt hose same seeds can clog the holes, preventing thorough draining. Also, the protective roof helps keep some rain out but doesn’t extend beyond the feeder very much. If there is any wind blowing the rain, it will end up in the feeder. As a result, I had issues with water saturating the birdseed and mold forming. 

Granted, this may be a function of where I reside in Florida—a state where strong thunderstorms are a near-daily occurrence in the summer and humidity levels are intense. I had to change the birdseed every week because of the molding. Birds do not like moldy seeds, so I don’t get as many visitors. That’s especially true if I don’t stay on top of cleaning things out. It also means that I’m dumping out seed regularly and cleaning the feeder frequently. Neither of these is ideal and keeps birds away for longer. It may be less of an issue with different birdseed mixes or locations, but it has severely limited the number of birds I attract. 

The camera module of the Bird Buddy rests in front of the bird feeder on a table.
The camera module pops out, which makes cleaning much easier. Abby Ferguson

Camera module details

The Bird Buddy’s camera is housed inside a plastic case. It is weather-resistant, though Bird Buddy doesn’t provide an IP rating. It does say that it can operate in temperatures between -5°F and 120°F. As a result, it will work in most locations throughout the year. The camera module measures 5.1 x 2 x 1.5 inches and fits securely in the bird feeder with the help of a magnet in the back.

The camera takes five-megapixel photos and 720p HD live-streamed video. It is capable of 1080p video clips, though you’ll need to pay for a Bird Buddy Pro membership ($2.50 per month for an annual membership or $2.99 per month for a monthly plan). The 120-degree field of view is wide enough to capture birds hanging out on the side of the feeder. There’s also a built-in microphone for recording bird songs as well, which is a fun addition.

Motion detection

Bird Buddy also built a laser motion detector into the camera. This senses movement on the perch and triggers the camera to take photos or videos when a visitor is present (much like a wireless security camera). I don’t have my bird feeder in a location where I can easily keep watch to test how well the motion detection works. But every time I heard a bird making noise, I received a “postcard” (Bird Buddy’s way of telling you a bird was at your feeder), so it seemed just sensitive enough.

You can switch to Power Saver Mode in the app settings if you want fewer notifications or conserve battery. Or turn on Frenzy Mode to see anything and everything, though you’ll have to pay for a Pro membership. 

Power

For power, the Bird Buddy camera utilizes a 4000 mAh rechargeable lithium-ion battery. Bird Buddy says it will last between five and 15 days. Of course, that depends on how many photos it takes, how much you stream live video, and the weather. When it needs a charge, it uses a USB-C cable. I was using the solar roof, which results in infinite battery life. If you want to save some money and don’t opt for the solar roof, the camera is fully removable. That means you won’t need to bring the entire bird feeder (along with any tiny creatures or germs) inside for charging.

The live stream view and gallery view of the Bird Buddy app.
The Bird Buddy app is very easy to use. It offers a live video stream and even provides information about the birds that visit your feeder. Abby Ferguson

Bird Buddy app

I’ve been very impressed with the Bird Buddy app during my testing. It is well-designed in design and usability, with many playful components. It is intuitive to use and easy to find what you need very quickly, even as you are getting used to it. It’s clean and minimal, without too many extra things going on.

The app uses AI to automatically identify over 1,000 species, which includes squirrels and rare birds. Unfortunately, I have only had Red-Winged Blackbirds at my feeder, so I haven’t been able to test how accurate the AI identification is beyond that single species. But it always got the Red-Winged Blackbird right, so there’s that. 

When a bird visits your feeder, the app notifies you with a “postcard.” These postcards are then saved to your gallery so you can pull them back up anytime. They can even show multiple photos or videos of the same bird if they stick around for a bit. Should there be photos in a set that aren’t worth saving, you can discard them to keep your gallery from getting too cluttered.

Your gallery is sorted by bird type. Tapping on each lets you open all photos and videos the camera has captured over time of that particular species. The page for each bird species will also provide information on that bird so that you can learn more. That includes personality type, what they eat, where they are typically found, how big they are, and what they sound like. For example, the Red-Winged Blackbird page tells me that they are brawlers, open lovebirds, and social butterflies who like to eat insects and seeds and are as big as a slice of pizza.

Two screenshots of the community video and photo feeds in the Bird Buddy app.
The community features are a fun way to see birds beyond your own backyard. Abby Ferguson

Community features

Beyond content from your feeder, you can see photos and videos from feeders worldwide in a few different ways. First, you can add some to your list of feeders and receive postcards from them like it is your own feeder. However, if you want to add more than one feeder for more than 72 hours, you’ll need a Pro membership.

If you don’t want to add a feeder, you can still scroll through photos and videos from the community. It’s like social media just for bird content. Birdbuddy TV is a video feed of publicly shared videos from Bird Buddy users. Or you can scroll through photos from the community, applauding people’s results. You can even help identify species by tapping the Wingbuddy link at the top of the Community page. 

A Red-Winged Blackbird sits in a bird feeder eating seed.
I was impressed with how sharp the images from the Bird Buddy were and how it handled really high-contrast scenes. Abby Ferguson

Image & video quality

A bird feeder camera doesn’t do much good if the photos aren’t clear enough so you can actually see your avian visitors. The five-megapixel resolution may not seem very impressive, especially compared to smartphones and dedicated cameras. While you won’t be able to print these images to poster size by any means, the camera does offer plenty of quality for viewing on your phone. 

The images are clear and sharp, especially when the bird hangs out on the perch. The camera can’t focus much closer than that, though. My main visitor liked to sit right in the birdseed, so it was frequently out of focus, but even still, I could see good amounts of detail with vibrant colors. The auto exposure overall does great, even in extremely high-contrast lighting situations. There were times that the bird was blurry from moving during the exposure, but that wasn’t the norm. 

The Bird Buddy video quality is also really good. The footage is clear and well-exposed. If you want higher-quality video, you can upgrade to a Bird Buddy Pro membership, though I have not tested it, so I can’t comment on how much better that video looks. 

A blue Bird Buddy bird feeder mounted to a post on a front porch.
Abby Ferguson

So, who should buy the Bird Buddy Smart Bird Feeder? 

Bird feeder cameras are becoming more and more popular, with new options seeming to pop up regularly. Spending $299 (for the solar roof version) may seem pricey for a bird feeder camera. But the Bird Buddy is priced similarly to other devices, including its closest competitor, the Netvue Birdfy Pro. So, what makes the Bird Buddy stand out? 

The Bird Buddy includes a durable yet attractive build, an integrated solar panel for infinite battery life, multiple mounting options, and an easy-to-clean design with a removable camera, which gives it the edge for most users. It’s also remarkably easy to install, with essentially no assembly beyond popping the camera into the feeder. Add to that the easy-to-use and fun app with minimal features behind a paywall, and it takes a clear lead. It’s a connected device that makes you feel a bit more connected with the natural world. If you are interested in keeping an eye on the bird species in your area, it’s hard to beat Bird Buddy. 

The post Bird Buddy Smart Bird Feeder review: A camera that’s not just for the birds appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
CVS to stop selling cold and allergy pills that FDA warns don’t work https://www.popsci.com/health/phenylephrine-cvs-ineffective/ Fri, 20 Oct 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581639
A box of a nasal decongestant called SudafedPe on a store shelf.
Some of the cold and allergy medications that CVS will no longer sell include Benadryl Allergy Plus Congestion, Vicks Sinex, and Sudafed PE. Tim Boyle/Getty Images

An FDA advisory committee declared that an active ingredient called phenylephrine is ineffective in pill form in September 2023.

The post CVS to stop selling cold and allergy pills that FDA warns don’t work appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A box of a nasal decongestant called SudafedPe on a store shelf.
Some of the cold and allergy medications that CVS will no longer sell include Benadryl Allergy Plus Congestion, Vicks Sinex, and Sudafed PE. Tim Boyle/Getty Images

As cold and flu season approaches, pharmacy chain CVS announced that they are removing some over-the-counter allergy and cold medicines from their shelves since their active ingredient has been deemed ineffective as a decongestant when taken orally. The removed medications include Vicks Dayquill, Benadryl Allergy Plus Congestion, Sudafed PE, Vicks Sinex, and others that contain a decongestant called phenylephrine.

[Related: Why adult cold medicine is not good for children.]

A CVS spokesperson told CNBC that other oral cold medications that do not contain phenylephrine as the only active ingredient will remain on CVS’ shelves. Medications that contain phenylephrine account for about  $1.8 billion in annual sales, according to the Food and Drug Administration.

In September, an independent advisory committee to the FDA declared that phenylephrine is ineffective as a decongestant when taken in pill form. The panel refused to certify the effectiveness of these medications, adding that further trials to prove otherwise were required. 

“Modern studies, when well conducted, are not showing any improvement in congestion with phenylephrine,” Mark Dykewicz, an allergy specialist at the Saint Louis University School of Medicine, told CBS News last month

In 2006, phenylephrine began to be substituted for an ingredient called pseudoephedrine in many non-prescription cold and allergy medicines. Pseudoephedrine was restricted amid reports of it being used to make the illegal drug methamphetamine. Phenylephrine cannot be used to make meth and was considered a suitable replacement. These medications with pseudoephedrine are still considered safe and can be bought without a prescription, but are now behind the pharmacy counter and require a photo ID

Allergies and respiratory infections alert the body to send white blood cells to the sinuses, nose, and throat, which causes the creation of mucus and swelling in the nasal membranes. Phenylephrine temporarily reduces the swelling in the blood vessels in the nasal passages when it is administered in the nose. Some experts say that when taken in a pill form, phenylephrine gets absorbed by the gut and metabolized so well that only a small amount of the decongestant will make it to the bloodstream. 

According to a 2015 citizen petition asking the FDA to remove drugs with phenylephrine, the amount that gets into the bloodstream is not enough to actually reach the nose and work to clear congestion. Citizen petitions like this one are a way for consumer groups, industry groups, or individuals to call on the FDA to change regulations or take other administrative action. The American Academy of Allergy, Asthma & Immunology supported this citizen petition.

[Related: Why we still don’t have a vaccine for the common cold.]

Consumers should consult a medical professional to best determine what decongestant to take, but can look for those that contain pseudoephedrine or antihistamines like Claratin or Zyrtec. Nasal sprays that contain phenylephrine are also still considered effective, in addition to those that contain another ingredient called oxymetazoline.

In September, director of endoscopic skull base surgery and a professor of otolaryngology at Stanford Medicine Zara Patel, told CNN that seeing a medication removed from store shelves like this should not be a reason to distrust regulatory agencies.

“This is how science works. As we gain more information, recommendations may change, and that’s not a bad thing. That’s the wonderful thing about science. We can use new information and change our perspective,” said Patel. She is not affiliated with the FDA committee.

Other national pharmacy chains including Walgreens and Rite Aid have not yet announced if they are pulling these medications as well.

The post CVS to stop selling cold and allergy pills that FDA warns don’t work appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to unlock the hidden, more powerful camera on the iPhone 15 https://www.popsci.com/diy/iphone-15-camera-48mp/ Fri, 20 Oct 2023 16:04:21 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581288
A man wearing a white hoodie stands outside and smiles as he looks as his iPhone 15
Make sure you're aware of the photo options on your iPhone 15. Apple

Your iPhone 15 has even more pixels than you can imagine.

The post How to unlock the hidden, more powerful camera on the iPhone 15 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A man wearing a white hoodie stands outside and smiles as he looks as his iPhone 15
Make sure you're aware of the photo options on your iPhone 15. Apple

The rear camera on your iPhone 15 (also present on the iPhone 14 Pro and iPhone 14 Pro Max) is more powerful and versatile than you might have realized. It features a 48-megapixel sensor but default settings only allow it to take 24MP snaps.

The good news is that you can delve into your iPhone’s settings to switch your camera to full capacity and get more detail in your photos. There are some trade-offs you should know about, and the exact options vary depending on the iPhone you’re using. But if you’re serious about your smartphone photography, you should learn about the modes available to you and how they work.

How the iPhone 15 cameras work

iOS menu showing image formats for iPhone 15
All iPhone 15 models let you choose between HEIF and JPEG formats. Apple

When you take a photo on your iPhone 15 without the ultrawide or zoom sensors, iOS uses  the main 48MP sensor to create a 24MP shot. There are two reasons for that—first, it keeps file size down, and second, it allows pixel binning, which means the camera combines multiple pixels to capture more light and produce a better image.

However, if you have the room on your iPhone to store the resulting snaps, you can switch to 48MP photos. Professional photographers often make the switch because capturing more pixels provides more flexibility over the final shot by letting you take control over how those pixels are processed. 

[Related: Check out some of the winners of the latest iPhone Photography Awards]

But you should know there are differences depending on the iPhone you’re using.  The dual-lens on the iPhone 15 and the iPhone 15 Plus, has a slightly inferior 48MP sensor than the triple-lens on the iPhone 15 Pro and the iPhone 15 Pro Max—the number of pixels is the same, but the pixel-capturing tech isn’t quite as good.

The other key difference is that the iPhone 15 Pro and Pro Max can capture RAW images, which Apple calls ProRAW photos. This format provides all the raw data from a digital image, providing photographers even more control and options over their work. RAW snaps take a little longer to process, use up a lot more storage space, and need some photo know-how to optimize, which is why the average smartphone photographer doesn’t bother with them.

iOS Pro image format menu on iPhone 15
The iPhone 15 Pro and Pro Max models offer a ProRAW option, which offers even more flexibility to smartphone photographers. Apple

The iPhone 15 and iPhone 15 Plus don’t have the processing grunt to manage RAW snaps, but they can still capture 48MP images in either HEIF or JPEG format. The result is still 48MP-size pictures but they’ll be slightly compressed, which takes away some of the manual post-processing control you get with RAW images. In certain ways, using a HEIF or JPEG format (which you can also do on the Pro models) goes halfway between shooting 24MP snaps and 48MP ProRAW, with the added benefit of significantly cutting down file sizes.

If you’re considering making the switch to 48MP photos, bear in mind that means a slightly longer time between tapping the shutter button and seeing your image on screen. What’s more, the dynamic range (the spread between the darkest blacks and the whitest whites) won’t be quite as good without pixel binning. 

How to change the iPhone 15 camera settings

iOS camera app on iPhone 15
Once you activate 48MP photos, the iPhone 15 lets you switch between shooting modes directly in the Camera app. Apple

Having absorbed all of that information about photo formats, you’re ready to start making changes. Head to Settings in iOS, then tap on Camera. Unless you’re already shooting in RAW, your first choice will be between High Efficiency (HEIF) or Most Compatible (JPEG) for the image format.

Which one you pick is really up to you and will depend on what you’re doing with your snaps after you’ve taken them. HEIF tends to result in smaller file sizes, but JPEG is generally compatible with a broader range of software on desktop and the web. There’s plenty of information about both online.

[Related: The easiest ways to back up iPhone photos without iCloud]

To unlock the 48MP photos, turn on Resolution Control (on the iPhone 15 and iPhone 15 Plus) or ProRAW & Resolution Control (on the iPhone 15 Pro and iPhone 15 Pro Max). On the latter models you can also tap Pro Default to pick your preferred format: The list includes HEIF Max (up to 48MP), JPEG Max (up to 48MP), ProRAW 12MP, and ProRAW Max (up to 48MP). Underneath these options, Apple lists the average file size for each format, so you have an idea of how much space each picture will take up—10MB for a 48MP JPEG, for example, and 75MB for a 48MP ProRAW.

Launch the camera on your iPhone, and the new 48MP option will appear in the corner. It’ll be crossed out to begin with, so tap the icon to turn it on and choose which format you want to shoot—HEIF Max, JPEG Max, or RAW Max. On the iPhone 15 Pro and Pro Max, press and hold on the icon to switch between HEIF/JPEG and ProRAW. Note that you won’t get the option to switch to ProRAW on the iPhone 15 and iPhone 15 Plus.

iOS camera options for iPhone 15
If you want to keep the 48MP option enabled, you can tweak the settings for the Camera app. Apple

By default, the Camera app will forget that you enabled 48MP photos when you switch to another app, so the option will be crossed out again when you come back to it. To tell the camera to keep the 48MP enabled, open the iOS Settings screen, tap Camera, Preserve Settings, and then either Resolution Control or Apple ProRAW & Resolution Control, depending on your iPhone model.

Note that because of the way the iPhone 15 produces photos, it will default back to 24MP whenever you’re taking Live Photos or macro shots, or using Night mode or the flash. This will happen no matter what settings you’ve changed simply because those different modes require different types of image processing.

The post How to unlock the hidden, more powerful camera on the iPhone 15 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Prehistoric shark called Kentucky home 337 million years ago https://www.popsci.com/science/new-shark-kentucky/ Fri, 20 Oct 2023 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581547
An illustration of a newly discovered shark species called Strigilodus tollesonae. The shark looks somewhat like a stingray, with outstretched wings, fan-like top fins, and a long tail with black spots.
An artist’s illustration of Strigilodus tollesonae. The new species is more closely related to modern ratfish than to other modern sharks and rays. Benji Paysnoe/NPS

Newly discovered Strigilodus tollesonae had petal-shaped teeth.

The post Prehistoric shark called Kentucky home 337 million years ago appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
An illustration of a newly discovered shark species called Strigilodus tollesonae. The shark looks somewhat like a stingray, with outstretched wings, fan-like top fins, and a long tail with black spots.
An artist’s illustration of Strigilodus tollesonae. The new species is more closely related to modern ratfish than to other modern sharks and rays. Benji Paysnoe/NPS

A group of paleontologists, park rangers, and geologists have discovered a new species of ancient shark in the rock layers of Mammoth Cave National Park in Kentucky. It was uncovered in a large fossil deposit that includes at least 40 different species of shark and their relatives, and even well-preserved skeletal cartilage. 

[Related: Megalodons were likely warm-blooded, despite being stone-cold killers.]

The new species is named Strigilodus tollesonae and is a petalodont shark. These extinct  sharks had petal-shaped teeth and lived about 337 million years ago. According to the National Park Service, it is more closely related to present day ratfish than sharks or rays and it was identified from teeth found in the cave’s walls. Strigilodus tollesonae likely had teeth that included one rounded cusp used for clipping and a long, ridge inert side that crushed prey the way molars do. Paleontologists believe that it likely lived like modern day skates and fed on worms, bivalves, and small fish. 

Strigilodus tollesonae translates to “Tolleson’s Scraper Tooth” and it is named after Mammoth Cave National park guide Kelli Tolleson for her work in the paleontological study that uncovered the new species. 

The limestone caves that make up the 400-mile long Mammoth Cave System were formed about 325-million-years ago during the Late Paleozoic. Geologists call this time period the Mississippian Period, when shallow seas covered much of North America including where Mammoth Cave is today. 

In 2019, the park began a major paleontological resources inventory to identify the numerous types of fossils associated with the rock layers. Mammoth Cave park staff reported a few fossil shark teeth that were exposed in the cave walls of Ste. Genevieve Limestone in several locations. Shark fossils can be difficult to come by, since shark skeletons are made of cartilage instead of bone. Cartilage is not as tough as bone, so it is generally not well-preserved in the fossil record. 

An artist’s illustration of an ancient sea that covered much of North America during the Mississippian age. A decaying shark lies on the bottom of the sea, with three live sharks and other fish swimming nearby.
The Mississippian age ancient sea and marine life preserved at Mammoth Cave National Park. CREDIT: Julius Csotonyi/NPS.

The team then brought in shark fossil specialist John-Paul Hodnett of the Maryland-National Capital Parks and Planning Commission to help identify the shark fossils. Hodnett and park rangers discovered and identified multiple different species of primitive sharks from the shark teeth and fine spine specimens in the rocks lining the cave passages.

“I am absolutely amazed at the diversity of sharks we see while exploring the passages that make up Mammoth Cave,” Hodnett said in a statement. “We can hardly move more than a couple of feet as another tooth or spine is spotted in the cave ceiling or wall. We are seeing a range of different species of chondrichthyans [cartilaginous fish] that fill a variety of ecological niches, from large predators to tiny little sharks that lived amongst the crinoid [sea lily] forest on the seafloor that was their habitat.”

[Related: This whale fossil could reveal evidence of a 15-million-year-old megalodon attack.]

In addition to Strigilodus tollesonae, the team have identified more than 40 different species of sharks and their relatives from Mammoth Cave specimens in the past 10 months. There appear to be at least six fossil shark species that are new to science. According to the team, those species will be described and named in an upcoming scientific publication.

The majority of the shark fossils have been discovered in areas of the park that are inaccessible to the public, so photographs, illustrations, and three-dimensional models have been made to display the discovery. The park also plans to celebrate the new shark fossils with multiple presentations and exhibits on Monday October 23

The post Prehistoric shark called Kentucky home 337 million years ago appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The US won’t regulate this deadly, addictive antidepressant https://www.popsci.com/health/what-is-tianeptine/ Fri, 20 Oct 2023 14:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581307
Red and white tianeptine antidepressant pills, which are unregulated by the FDA, on a hand on a red background
Tianeptine is sold in the US under many brand names, but typically the pills are red and white or just red. DepositPhotos

Multiple states have banned tianeptine, but not the FDA. Here’s why the drug can be dangerous.

The post The US won’t regulate this deadly, addictive antidepressant appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Red and white tianeptine antidepressant pills, which are unregulated by the FDA, on a hand on a red background
Tianeptine is sold in the US under many brand names, but typically the pills are red and white or just red. DepositPhotos

Tianeptine, also known as “gas station heroin,” is officially off the market—at least in Florida. The Sunshine State recently joined eight other US states (Alabama, Georgia, Indiana, Kentucky, Michigan, Mississippi, Ohio, and Tennessee) in forbidding sales of the over the counter pill, citing concerns for its high potential of abuse and addictive properties.

Florida’s attorney general issued an emergency ban in September after an increasing number of calls to the state’s Poison Control Center in the first half of 2023. A similar trend has been seen nationwide with 151 tianeptine poisoning cases in 2020. There are also reports of at least five fatal overdoses since the drug started being sold in the US. 

Tianeptine is still available at gas stations and convenience stores in 41 other states and is purchasable online. It’s up to individuals to know the dangers and avoid purchasing any related products. Here’s what you need to know.

What is tianeptine?

Tianeptine is a non-prescription antidepressant that has become a popular method of getting high in the US in the past decade. It’s even been found in powder form in counterfeit pills of hydrocodone and oxycodone. Some products market dietary supplements containing tianeptine under the brand names Tianaa, Tianna Green, Tianna Red, Tianna White, and ZaZa. Kelly Johnson-Arbor, a medical toxicologist based in Washington D.C., says some vendors claim tianeptine can improve brain function, treat opioid addiction, and help with anxiety, “but there is minimal literature supporting the use of tianeptine for these conditions.” While it may have potential to help with irritable bowel syndrome and chronic pain in medical settings, the threat of addiction appear to outweigh the benefits.

The antidepressant works by increasing the effects of serotonin, which is nicknamed the “happy hormone” because of its role in mood and emotions. Low serotonin levels are linked to depressive symptoms; while tianptine’s exact mechanism is still debated, other antidepressants like selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs) prevent the hormone from being absorbed by cells to prolong related brain activity. 

Tianeptine is not approved for any kind of medical use by the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA). Because it’s unregulated and sold in dietary supplements, little is known on the purity, efficacy, or safety of each product. What’s more, the amount of active drug can vary by brand or even by pill.

“Its unregulated status in the US also increases the potential for abuse or misuse, as there are no standard dosing recommendations [here] for this drug,” says Johnson-Arbor.

At higher doses, tianeptine starts affecting dopamine levels in addition to serotonin. This important hormone can contribute to addictive behavior by changing neural connectivity to reinforce an activity that brings feelings of pleasure and euphoria. The drug increases opioid activity in the brain, a similar mechanism of action seen in heroin.  

What are the dangers of using tianeptine?

Consumers are usually taking a gamble when they buy tianeptine products because they can’t know for sure how much of the drug they’re getting. This increases the risk of an unintentional overdose, along with other adverse side effects like lethargy, elevated blood pressure and heart rate, agitation, abdominal pain, tremors, and hallucinations.

Johnson-Arbor further warns that people may experience more unwanted side effects, including breathing difficulties, hallucinations, and excessive sleepiness, when combining tianeptine with other medications. Because of its high potential for drug abuse, those who regularly misuse the pills may exhibit withdrawal symptoms such as stomachaches and anxiety if they try to quit.

If you or someone you know develops unexpected symptoms after using tianeptine, contact Poison Control online at www.poison.org or by phone at 1-800-222-1222 for expert advice. Both options are free, confidential, and available 24 hours a day. If you’re trying to quit, help is available. Call the SAMHSA National Helpline at 1-800-662-4357 for substance use information and referrals for treatment.

Why isn’t tianeptine banned everywhere in the US?

Tianeptine is marketed as a prescription antidepressant in the European Union and some other countries. A few, including Turkey, have categorized tianeptine as a controlled substance. Johnson-Arbor says it’s reasonable to consider a similar classification of this drug in the US, but currently, there are no such plans.

The FDA issued a consumer warning about using tianeptine products in 2022 and has sent warning letters to two marketers, but hasn’t taken further action in the wake of more recent overdoses. In an email to PopSci, an agency representative wrote that “a drug sponsor would need to submit an application to the agency for review” for it to be approved for medical use, either as a controlled or uncontrolled substance. “The FDA generally cannot confirm or deny the existence of any possible product application,” he added. 

In the absence of federal regulations, state governments have stepped in to either allow or ban sales of the drug. This isn’t anything new: States have made similar decisions for popular dietary supplements like CBD products. And while there’s always a chance that pills can be poisonous when taken in the wrong amounts, with tianeptine, concerns are particularly high.

Correction (October 21, 2023): The article has been updated to clarify that tianeptine does not increase serotonin levels in the body. It either prevents re-uptake of serotonin like SSRI antidepressants or possibly enhances it to increase use of the hormone.

The post The US won’t regulate this deadly, addictive antidepressant appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
This weird-looking British ship will keep an eye out for sabotage beneath the surface https://www.popsci.com/technology/british-ship-proteus-surveillance/ Fri, 20 Oct 2023 14:00:37 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581582
The Proteus.
The Proteus. Ministry of Defence

It's called the Proteus, and it's a surveillance vessel.

The post This weird-looking British ship will keep an eye out for sabotage beneath the surface appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The Proteus.
The Proteus. Ministry of Defence

On October 10, the Royal Fleet Auxiliary dedicated a ship called the Proteus in a ceremony on the River Thames. The vessel, which looks like someone started building a ship and then stopped halfway through, is the first in the fleet’s Multi-Role Ocean Surveillance program, and is a conversion from a civilian vessel. 

In its new role, the Proteus will keep a protective eye on underwater infrastructure deemed vitally important, and will command underwater robots as part of that task. Before being converted to military use, the RFA Proteus was the Norwegian-built MV Topaz Tangaroa, and it was used to support oil platforms.

Underwater infrastructure, especially pipelines and communications cables, make the United Kingdom inextricably connected to the world around it. While these structures are hard to get to, as they rest on the seafloor, they are not impossible to reach. Commercial vessels, like the oil rig tenders the Proteus was adapted from, can reach below the surface with cranes and see below it through remotely operated submarines. Dedicated military submarines can also access seafloor cables. By keeping an eye on underwater infrastructure, the Proteus increases the chance that saboteurs can be caught, and more importantly, improves the odds that damage can be found and repaired quickly.

“Proteus will serve as a testbed for advancing science and technological development enabling the UK to maintain the competitive edge beneath the waves,” reads the Royal Navy’s announcement of the ship’s dedication.

The time between purchase and dedication of the Topaz Tangaroa to the Proteus was just 11 months, with conversion completed in September. The 6,600-ton vessel is operated by a crew of just 26 from the Royal Fleet Auxiliary, while the surveillance, survey, and warfare systems on the Proteus are crewed by 60 specialists from the Royal Navy. As the Topaz Tangaroa, the vessel was equipped for subsea construction, installation, light maintenance, and inspection work, as well as survey and remotely operated vehicle operations. The Proteus retains its forward-mounted helipad, which looks like a hexagonal brim worn above the bow of the ship.

Most striking about the Proteus is the large and flat rear deck, which features a massive crane as well as 10,700 square feet of working space, which is as much as five tennis courts. Helpful to the ship’s role as a home base for robot submersibles is a covered “moon pool” in the deck that, whenever uncovered, lets the ship launch submarines directly beneath it into the ocean.

“This is an entirely new mission for the Royal Fleet Auxiliary – and one we relish,” Commodore David Eagles RFA, the head of the Royal Fleet Auxiliary, said upon announcement of the vessel in January.

Proteus is named for one of the sons of the sea god Poseidon in Greek mythology, with Proteus having domain over rivers and the changing nature of the sea. While dedicated on a river, the ship is designed for deep-sea operation, with a ballast system providing stability as it works in the high seas. 

“Primarily for reasons of operational security, the [Royal Navy] has so far said little about the [Multi-Role Ocean Surveillance] concept of operations and the areas where Proteus will be employed,” suggests independent analysts Navy Lookout, as part of an in-depth guide on the ship. “It is unclear if she is primarily intended to be a reactive asset, to respond to suspicious activity and potentially be involved in repairs if damage occurs. The more plausible alternative is that she will initially be employed in more of a deterrent role, deploying a series of UUVs [Uncrewed Underwater Vehicles] and sensors that monitor vulnerable sites and send periodic reports back to the ship or headquarters ashore. Part of the task will be about handling large amounts of sensor data looking for anomalies that may indicate preparations for attacks or non-kenetic malign activity.”

In the background of the UK’s push for underwater surveillance are actual attacks and sabotage on underwater pipelines. In September 2022, an explosion caused damage and leaks in the Nord Stream gas pipeline between Russia and Germany. While active transfer of gas had been halted for diplomatic reasons following Russia’s February 2022 invasion of Ukraine, the pipeline still held gas in it at the time of the explosion. While theories abound for possible culprits, there is not yet a conclusive account of which nation was both capable and interested enough to cause such destruction.

The Proteus is just the first of two ships with this task. “The first of two dedicated subsea surveillance ships will join the fleet this Summer, bolstering our capabilities and security against threats posed now and into the future,” UK Defence Secretary Ben Wallace said in January. “It is paramount at a time when we face Putin’s illegal invasion of Ukraine, that we prioritise capabilities that will protect our critical national infrastructure.”

While the Proteus is unlikely to fully deter such acts, having it in place will make it easier for the Royal Navy to identify signs of sabotage. Watch a video of the Proteus below:

The post This weird-looking British ship will keep an eye out for sabotage beneath the surface appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
These lifetime cloud storage solutions are priced dropped and under $90 through Oct. 23 https://www.popsci.com/sponsored-content/these-lifetime-cloud-storage-solutions-are-priced-dropped-and-under-90-through-oct-23/ Fri, 20 Oct 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580929
PrismDrive, a cloud storage solution, pulled up on a phone and laptop.
Stack Commerce

Keep all your files in one place and access them from anywhere with this exclusive deal.

The post These lifetime cloud storage solutions are priced dropped and under $90 through Oct. 23 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
PrismDrive, a cloud storage solution, pulled up on a phone and laptop.
Stack Commerce

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The Prism Drive Secure Cloud Storage: Lifetime Subscription is only $79.97 (reg. $747) for 10TB and $89.97 (reg. $1,494) for 20TB through Oct. 23 only. 

Boasting its ability to operate rapidly, Prism Drive offers a lifetime subscription to help you declutter your iPhone, tablet, or laptop by consolidating all your files in a single location. Featuring 10TB or 20TB of cloud storage, limitless shared traffic, and top-notch zero-knowledge encryption, Prism Drive provides the flexibility to upload various file types, including MP4, JPEG, PPT, and more. Plus, you’ll be saving over $600!

Thanks to its user-friendly interface, navigating through Prism Drive is a breeze. Whether you’re a tech enthusiast or a casual user, the platform’s intuitive design makes it easy to upload, organize, and retrieve your files from any web browser, iOS device, or Android device—all without hassle. High-speed transfers and secured backup space give you plenty of leeway to easily manage and share files with team members, friends, and family. Additionally, a handy 30-day retrieval feature for deleted items allows you to recover files that were unintentionally deleted or documents you opt to retain after reconsideration.

Its essential security system is also compliant with privacy laws. It offers the ultimate reassurance regarding safety, scalability, and integration—whether stored, in transit, or in use. Best yet, everything is in one secure location. The lifetime subscription comes with state-of-the-art AES 256-bit and HTTPS encryption protocols, ensuring your files are shielded from unauthorized access. Rest easy knowing that your digital footprint is safeguarded against potential threats.

One verified customer states that Prism Drive provides “Great value[,] and tech support was superb. I’d recommend them highly for your cloud needs.”

Purchase the Prism Drive Secure Cloud Storage: Lifetime Subscription (10TB) for only $79.97 (reg. $747), or the  Prism Drive Secure Cloud Storage: Lifetime Subscription (20TB) for only $89.97 (reg. $1,494) with no coupon code required. This mega best-of-web pricing deal is only available until Oct. 23 at 11:59 p.m. PST. 

Prices subject to change.

The post These lifetime cloud storage solutions are priced dropped and under $90 through Oct. 23 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to edit photos on an iPhone—a detailed guide https://www.popsci.com/diy/how-to-edit-photos-on-iphone/ Fri, 20 Oct 2023 12:10:15 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581093
An iPhone on a wooden table, with the Photos app open to an image of shoes that someone is about to edit.
Those shoes are so clean, we're not even sure that photo needs editing. Le Buzz Studio / Unsplash

Get ready to impress with your iPhone photo editing skills.

The post How to edit photos on an iPhone—a detailed guide appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
An iPhone on a wooden table, with the Photos app open to an image of shoes that someone is about to edit.
Those shoes are so clean, we're not even sure that photo needs editing. Le Buzz Studio / Unsplash

Editing photos on an iPhone may seem intimidating, given all the options and settings, but it’s accessible to all skill levels. Thanks to its user-friendly interface and intuitive controls, you can easily enhance your images with preset effects or manually adjust settings to achieve the desired look. No expensive editing software necessary.

The iPhone’s photo editor also offers advanced features such as selective editing, which allows you to make precise adjustments to specific areas of your images. Additionally, you can easily share your edited photos directly from the app by posting them to social media platforms or sending them to friends and family. 

How to edit photos on an iPhone

Since most of us snap pictures on the fly, we are not thinking about the composition or lighting when we take the photo. We are trying to capture a moment as quickly as possible. Thankfully, that’s where post-editing comes in. Like icing a cake, editing images gives them a finished look. And editing photos on an iPhone might be even easier than messing around with gloopy buttercream.

Crop, rotate, or flip your photo

Was your selfie interrupted by a random bystander? No worries; that’s why there’s the crop tool. Cropping is one of the easiest and fastest ways to remove unwanted elements or distractions from the frame. Trimming the edges can also help improve a photo’s composition by adjusting the placement and balance of elements within the frame. In Photos, tap any thumbnail to view it in full screen. To start making changes, tap Edit, then tap the crop icon to choose one of three ways you can crop a photo.

The iPhone's Photos app, with an image open for editing, showing where to find the Edit button and crop tool.
“Edit” might be easy to find, but you may not be familiar with what the crop icon looks like. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

1. Manual crop: With the crop icon selected, drag the rectangle’s corners to enclose the area you want to keep in the photo. Tap Done to crop.

The iPhone Photos app, showing how to crop a photo by dragging the corner of the crop outline while editing.
Just drag and crop. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

2. Zoom crop: Alternatively, you can crop iPhone images by activating the crop tool and pinching them to zoom in. When the photo appears as you want it cropped, hit Done to save.

3. Use a preset ratio: Tap the aspect ratio icon in the upper right corner (a small rectangle with other rectangles stacked on top), then choose one of the cropping options, including square, wallpaper, 9:16, and 5:4. Hit Done to save the change.

  • Pro tip: If you choose a ratio crop, such as 9:16, you can select a vertical or horizontal orientation by tapping the two rectangles below the image.
The iPhone Photos app, showing where to find the aspect ratio crop tool and other crop settings while editing.
It’s hard to freehand a perfect square, but thankfully the iPhone can do it for you. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe
How to rotate a picture on iPhone

Tap the rotate icon (a square with an arrow curving around one corner) to turn the photo 90 degrees at a time. Keep going until you get the orientation you desire. Hit Done to confirm the changes.

The iPhone Photos app while editing a photo, showing where to find the picture rotation button.
Just keep tapping until you get the rotation you want. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe
How to flip a photo on iPhone

Touch the flip icon (mirrored triangles with an arrow above them) to reverse the image horizontally. Tap Done to save your edits.

The iPhone Photos app, while editing a photo, showing where the mirror flip option is.
Use this icon to get a mirror image of your photo. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

Just know that if you don’t like your crops, rotations, and/or flips at any time during the editing process, you can tap Cancel in the lower left corner of the screen, then hit Discard Changes

Straighten your image and adjust the perspective

Sometimes, you don’t notice tilted or skewed lines in a photograph until after you take it. Fortunately, altering the perspective is simple with the iPhone’s editing software. Open a photo on your iPhone, tap Edit, then hit the crop icon.

Under the photo, you will see three options for straightening the horizontal lines in the photo and adjusting the vertical and horizontal perspectives. When you choose the one you want to use, drag the slider underneath to make precise changes. There is also an Auto option at the top of the screen, which will automatically adjust the photo based on the selected adjustment.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing where to find the options for straightening the image.
You can hit “Auto” if you want iOS to do the straightening for you. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

1. Straighten: This adjustment, well, straightens out horizontal lines within a photograph.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing how to straighten a photo.
No more tilt. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

2. Vertical perspective: Corrects or modifies the perceived height or angle of objects in a photo, straightening vertical lines that may appear tilted or distorted.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing how to adjust vertical perspective.
Stretch! Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

3. Horizontal perspective: Changes horizontal lines and angles in photos, ensuring parallel lines and your desired alignment. 

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing where to find the option for adjusting the horizontal perspective.
Expand! Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

After editing the perspective, select Done to save your changes; if unsatisfied, hit Cancel, followed by Discard Changes.

Adjust light and color

Light and color are important factors when editing photos on an iPhone—and anywhere, really—because they affect an image’s overall mood and visual appeal. The right lighting will bring out the subject’s features, add depth, and make important details stand out. In the same way, changing a photograph’s colors can make the viewer feel certain emotions, set a particular mood, or even send a message. Your phone’s Photos app has several tools that will let you adjust the light and color of your pictures.

[Related: How to take better selfies]

To begin, open the photo you want to alter. Tap Edit, then swipe left under the image to view the effects you can edit. The quickest and easiest way to make adjustments is to tap on Auto, and the slider under the Auto tab will allow you to adjust the intensity of the iPhone’s suggested edit.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing how to auto edit a photo.
This one button will make multiple changes to your photo. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

If you prefer complete edit control, though, the iPhone photo editor lets you adjust each effect individually for a custom edit. The effects you can alter are:

  • Exposure: Increasing exposure can make an image brighter, while decreasing it can create a darker and more dramatic effect. 
  • Brilliance: Enhances an image’s overall clarity and vibrancy, making it more visually striking.
  • Highlights: Brings out the brightest areas of an image, adding a sense of brightness and contrast.
  • Shadows: Darkens the darker areas of an image, creating depth.
  • Contrast: Makes the difference between light and dark areas more pronounced.
  • Brightness: Changes how light or dark the photo is overall, but not as dramatically as adjusting exposure.
  • Blackpoint: Adjusts the darkest point in an image, allowing for greater control over the overall tonal range.
  • Saturation: Affects the intensity and richness of colors in an image.
  • Vibrance: Similar to saturation, but designed to enhance the colors more subtly and naturally. 
  • Warmth: Adjusts the color temperature of an image, making it appear either warmer (more yellow/orange) or cooler (more blue). 
  • Tint: Adjusts the overall color balance of an image, adding a subtle hue to the entire picture. 
  • Sharpness: Enhances the clarity and detail of an image, making edges and fine textures more defined.
  • Definition: Improves an image’s overall sharpness and clarity by enhancing the distinction between different elements and adding depth. 
  • Noise Reduction: Reduces digital noise in an image, resulting in a smoother and cleaner appearance. This helps minimize the grainy or speckled effect that can occur in low-light settings. 
  • Vignette: Darkens the corners and edges of the image, creating a subtle or dramatic spotlight effect.

To use an effect, tap on its icon and drag the slider underneath to make precise adjustments. The outline around the button indicates the degree of adjustment, and you can toggle between the edited effect and the original to see how much you’ve changed the photo.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing where to find all the editing tools to adjust the light and color effects of a photo.
The more you use the iPhone’s editing tools, the more familiar you’ll be with how they change a photo. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

Apply filters

Filter effects enable you to easily add creative and artistic elements to your photos, resulting in more visually appealing and captivating images. To apply a filter, open a photo, tap Edit, then tap the Filters button (the three overlapping circles) to pull up the filter effect options. There are nine to choose from. Use the slider underneath your chosen effect to adjust its intensity, and if you need to remove a filter, tap Original. Hit Done to confirm the edit.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing where to find filters for your photos, and how to apply them.
Filters can be subtle or dramatic. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

Portrait mode editing tips

If you’re someone who likes to use Portrait mode, you’ll need to be familiar with the iPhone’s Portrait mode-specific enhancements. These allow you to adjust the depth of field (also known as bokeh), which is the range of distance within a photograph that appears in sharp focus and makes the subject stand out. Portrait mode’s editing tools also include studio lighting effects for added flexibility and creativity. 

When you open a photo taken in Portrait mode, you will see two editing options not available in the regular photo mode. The effect at the top with the little “f” is f-stop, or depth of field. The circles at the bottom of the screen are lighting effects.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing Portrait mode-specific editing tools, like f-stop and lighting effects.
Portrait mode makes your photos look a little advanced, so the editing tools are a little advanced too. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

Adjusting the f-stop will increase or decrease blurring in the background. The smaller the f-stop, the more blur you’ll see. A larger f-stop will mean less blur. Tap the f-stop icon, and a slider will appear at the bottom of the screen, allowing you to adjust the effect.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing how the background of a photo gets less blurry as you adjust the f-stop setting.
You can see the background of these photos change as you adjust the f-stop setting. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

To adjust the lighting, tap one of the effects. You can choose from natural, studio, contour, stage, stage light mono, and high-key light mono. Move the slider to the left or right to increase or decrease the effect. 

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing how to edit Portrait mode lighting effects.
Messing around with the Portrait mode lighting effects can give your photo the look you want. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

Write or draw on a photo

It can be fun to write or draw on a picture, and the iPhone makes it easy to do so. Choose a photo, then go to Edit and tap the pen-shaped button. Use the various drawing tools and colors to draw on the picture.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing the options for writing on or drawing on a photo.
Time to scribble all over that perfectly crafted pic. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

You can tap the plus button to magnify or add a caption, text, shapes, or even your signature. Tap Done to save your changes, or tap Cancel if you don’t like them.

How to undo photo edits on an iPhone

Don’t worry if you make an editing mistake—the iPhone’s Photos app gives you plenty of opportunities to undo your edits.

Undo and redo edits: While editing a photo, tap the left and right arrows at the top of the screen to undo and redo multiple edit steps.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing how to undo photo edits.
You’re probably familiar with the “undo” and “redo” icons in other programs, and they’re essentially the same here. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

Revert an edited photo: If you save changes and decide you do not like the edit, you can open up the photo, select Edit, and then hit Revert to restore the original version. 

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing how to revert changes to any photo.
It’s OK, we all make mistakes. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

Copy and paste edits to multiple photos

The iPhone allows you to copy edits from one photo and paste them onto one or more others, an ability that is particularly useful when you’re trying to edit a series of similar photos. Start by opening the photo that contains the edits you want to copy. Then tap the More Options button (three dots), followed by Copy Edits. Hit Cancel, then the back button to return to your photo library.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing how to copy edits from one photo.
Your edits were just so perfect on this one. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

From there, tap Select, then touch the thumbnails of the photos to which you want to apply the edits. Finally, select Paste Edits from the More Options menu.

The iPhone Photos app, showing how to paste edits to multiple photos in your library.
We love a good time-saving tip. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

How to remove the subject from a photo on an iPhone

Although you can’t edit the background of a photo with the iPhone’s Photos app (you’ll need to install a separate app for that), you can cut and paste one part of the picture—the subject.

To do so, the photo’s subject and background should be clearly distinct, and the background shouldn’t be too busy or similar to the subject. Start by opening an image, then pressing and holding the subject. You should see a white glow around the subject, and a window should pop up asking you to Copy or Share. If that doesn’t work, move your finger around and try again—sometimes, it takes more than one attempt to select a subject.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing how to remove the subject from a photo.
That white glow means the subject is about to ascend (out of the photo). Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

When it does work, your iPhone will automatically separate the subject from the background, and you’ll be able to copy and paste it into another app, or share it using standard sharing options.

The iPhone Photos app with a subject that has been separated from its photo.
You can now share this object anywhere. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

If necessary, change the date, time, or location

Your iPhone stores the date, time, and location in the photo’s metadata. If you need to alter this information, you can. Open the photo you want to change, then tap the More Options button (three dots) in the upper right corner. Touch Adjust Date & Time or Adjust Location, enter the new information, and hit Adjust.

The iPhone Photos app, showing how to edit image metadata.
You have your reasons. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

To change the date, time, or location of multiple photos at once, tap Select, touch the thumbnails of the images you want to change, and follow the steps above. Don’t worry if you change your mind, either—you can undo your metadata edits by tapping the More Options button, followed by Adjust Date & Time or Adjust Location, then Revert.

FAQ

Q. Can you erase objects on iPhone photos?

You can only erase objects from iPhone photos with third-party editing apps from the App Store. These programs offer object removal tools and other features that allow you to easily remove unwanted elements from your photos with just a few taps. 

Q. Can my iPhone edit blurry photos? 

Your iPhone can help enhance blurry photos with its sharpening tools and filters. However, the iPhone cannot make an image completely clear if the photo is severely out of focus.

The post How to edit photos on an iPhone—a detailed guide appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Finally, a smart home for chickens https://www.popsci.com/technology/smart-home-for-chickens-coop/ Thu, 19 Oct 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581394
rendering of coop structure in grass
Coop

This startup uses an "AI guardian" named Albert Eggstein to count eggs and keep an eye on nearby predators.

The post Finally, a smart home for chickens appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
rendering of coop structure in grass
Coop

For most Americans, eggs matter a lot. In a year, an average American is estimated to eat almost 300 eggs (that’s either in the form of eggs by themselves or in egg-utilizing products like baked goods). We truly are living in what some researchers have called the Age of the Chicken—at least geologically, the humble poultry will be one of our civilization’s most notable leftovers.

Food systems in the US are fairly centralized. That means small disruptions can ratchet up to become large disturbances. Just take the exorbitant egg prices from earlier this year as one example. 

To push back against supply chain issues, some households have taken the idea of farm to table a step further. Demand for backyard chickens rose both during the pandemic, and at the start of the year in response to inflation. But raising a flock can come with many unseen challenges and hassles. A new startup, Coop, is hatching at exactly the right time. 

[Related: 6 things to know before deciding to raise backyard chickens]

Coop was founded by AJ Forsythe and Jordan Barnes in 2021, and it packages all of the software essentials of a smart home into a backyard chicken coop. 

Agriculture photo
Coop

Barnes says that she can’t resist an opportunity to use a chicken pun; it’s peppered into the copy on their website, as well as the name for their products, and is even baked into her title at the company (CMO, she notes, stands for chief marketing officer, but also chicken marketing officer). She and co-founder Forsythe invited Popular Science to a rooftop patio on the Upper East side to see a fully set up Coop and have a “chick-chat” about the company’s tech. 

In addition to spending the time to get to know the chickens, they’ve spent 10,000 plus hours on the design of the Coop. Fred Bould, who had previously worked on Google’s Nest products, helped them conceptualize the Coop of the future

The company’s headquarters in Austin has around 30 chickens, and both Barnes and Forsythe keep chickens at home, too. In the time that they’ve spent with the birds, they’ve learned a lot about them, and have both become “chicken people.” 

An average chicken will lay about five eggs a week, based on weather conditions and their ranking in the pecking order. The top of the pecking order gets more food, so they tend to lay more eggs. “They won’t break rank on anything. Pecking order is set,” says Barnes. 

Besides laying eggs, chickens can be used for composting dinner scraps. “Our chickens eat like queens. They’re having sushi, Thai food, gourmet pizza,” Barnes adds.  

Agriculture photo
Coop

For the first generation smart Coop, which comes with a chicken house, a wire fence, lights that can be controlled remotely, and a set of cameras, all a potential owner needs to get things running on the ground are Wifi and about 100 square feet of grass. “Chickens tend to stick together. You want them to roam around and graze a little bit, but they don’t need sprawling plains to have amazing lives,” says Barnes. “We put a lot of thought into the hardware design and the ethos of the design. But it’s all infused with a very high level of chicken knowledge—the circumference of the roosting bars, the height of everything, the ventilation, how air flows through it.” 

[Related: Artificial intelligence is helping scientists decode animal languages]

They spent four weeks designing a compostable, custom-fit poop tray because they learned through market research that cleaning the coop was one of the big barriers for people who wanted chickens but decided against getting them. And right before the Coop was supposed to go into production a few months ago, they halted it because they realized that the lower level bars on the wire cage were wide enough for a desperate raccoon to sneak their tiny paws through. They redesigned the bars with a much closer spacing. 

The goal of the company is to create a tech ecosystem that makes raising chickens easy for the beginners and the “chicken-curious.” And currently, 56 percent of their customers have never raised chickens before, they say.

Agriculture photo
Coop

Key to the offering of Coop is its brain: an AI software named Albert Eggstein that can detect both the chickens and any potential predators that might be lurking around. “This is what makes the company valuable,” says Barnes. Not only can the camera pick up that there’s four chickens in the frame, but it can tell the chickens apart from one another. It uses these learnings to provide insights through an accompanying app, almost like what Amazon’s Ring does. 

[Related: Do all geese look the same to you? Not to this facial recognition software.]

As seasoned chicken owners will tell newbies, being aware of predators is the name of the game. And Coop’s software can categorize nearby predators from muskrats to hawks to dogs with a 98-percent accuracy. 

“We developed a ton of software on the cameras, we’re doing a bunch of computer vision work and machine learning on remote health monitoring and predator detection,” Forsythe says. “We can say, hey, raccoons detected outside, the automatic door is closed, all four chickens are safe.”

Agriculture photo
Coop

The system runs off of two cameras, one stationed outside in the run, and one stationed inside the roost. In the morning, the door to the roost is raised automatically 20 minutes after sunrise, and at night, a feature called nest mode can tell owners if all their chickens have come home to roost. The computer vision software is trained through a database of about 7 million images. There is also a sound detection software, which can infer chicken moods and behaviors through the pitch and pattern of their clucks, chirps, and alerts.

[Related: This startup wants to farm shrimp in computer-controlled cargo containers]

It can also condense the activity into weekly summary sheets, sending a note to chicken owners telling them that a raccoon has been a frequent visitor for the past three nights, for example. It can also alert owners to social events, like when eggs are ready to be collected.  

A feature that the team created called “Cluck talk,” can measure the decibels of chicken sounds to make a general assessment about whether they are hungry, happy, broody (which is when they just want to sit on their eggs), or in danger. 

Agriculture photo
Coop

There’s a lot of chicken-specific behaviors that they can build models around. “Probably in about 6 to 12 months we’re going to roll out remote health monitoring. So it’ll say, chicken Henrietta hasn’t drank water in the last six hours and is a little lethargic,” Forsythe explains. That will be part of a plan to develop and flesh out a telehealth offering that could connect owners with vets that they can communicate and share videos with. 

The company started full-scale production of their first generation Coops last week. They’re manufacturing the structures in Ohio through a specialized process called rotomolding, which is similar to how Yeti coolers are made. They have 50 beta customers who have signed up to get Coops, and are offering an early-bird pricing of $1,995. Like Peloton and Nest, customers will also have to pay a monthly subscription fee of $19.95 for the app features like the AI tools. In addition to the Coops, the company also offers services like chicken-sitting (aptly named chicken Tenders). 

For the second generation Coops, Forsythe and Barnes have been toying with new ideas. They’re definitely considering making a bigger version (the one right now can hold four to six chickens), or maybe one that comes with a water gun for deterring looming hawks. The chickens are sold separately.

The post Finally, a smart home for chickens appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best TV stands in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-tv-stands/ Tue, 05 Oct 2021 18:09:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=280482
Home photo

Support your biggest screen and store your streaming boxes and consoles in style.

The post The best TV stands in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Home photo

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Walker Edison Wren Classic TV Stand overall best tv stand Walker Edison Wren Classic TV Stand
SEE IT

This sturdy and stylish option has a traditional design and comes in multiple finish options

Best with mount The Walker Edisen Wren TV Stand is the best TV stand with wall mount Walker Edison Wren Classic 4 Cubby TV Stand
SEE IT

Elevate your TV without the need to drill into the wall.

Best fireplace The Ameriwood Home Lumina Fireplace is the best fireplace TV stand Ameriwood Home Lumina Fireplace
SEE IT

A realistic fire effect to add a cozy element to your home. 

Many people choose to mount their TV on the wall, which is a fine solution with some drawbacks that can be solved using a TV stand. With a wall mount, it can be hard to get behind the panel to plug things in. And not everyone can just go drilling into the wall to hang a mount and a heavy TV, especially if they’re renting. Luckily, TV stands provide an elegant solution. These crucial bits of living room furniture hold your TV and all the important stuff that goes with it, from streaming boxes to gaming consoles. You need to choose the correct TV stand for your setup, though. Picking the right size, material, storage solution, and style can all have a serious impact on your ability to enjoy the best seats in your house. This guide will help walk you through the process of choosing from the best TV stands for your space, whether you’re hoarding set-top boxes or you’re a die-hard minimalist. 

How we chose the best TV stands

We surveyed dozens of different models looking for TV stands that offered the right mix of value, style, and durability. This list represents a wide swath of looks, materials, and sizes to try and accommodate most spaces. We have collectively spent hundreds of hours putting together flat-pack furniture, so ease of assembly is important as well. If it can’t go together with our relationships, thumbs, and mental well-being intact, it can’t go on the list.

The best TV stands: Reviews & Recommendations

TVs have gotten absolutely massive in recent years, with 55- and 65-inch models starting to feel slightly small compared to the massive 75- and even 85-inch behemoths out there on store shelves. Supporting those pricy panels is crucial. Here are our picks if you’re looking for a new home for that Samsung 8K TV (and maybe a matching soundbar):

Best overall: Walker Edison Wren Classic TV Stand

Walker Edison

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Walker Edison’s Wren Classic TV stand features adjustable shelves and comes in multiple sizes and a wide range of finishes. 

Specs

  • TV Capacity: Up to 65 inches
  • Material: MDF
  • Width: 58 inches
  • Height: 24

Pros

  • Wide finish selection
  • Multiple sizes available
  • Universally appealing aesthetic
  • Includes cord management ports on each shelf

Cons

  • No enclosed storage

The Walker Edison Wren Classic TV Stand has an appealingly simple design and can accommodate TVs as large as 65 inches. It’s made from medium-density fiberboard (MDF), an engineered wood that offers excellent stability at a lower price point than traditional hardwoods. The durable laminate finish comes in a variety of styles to suit varying aesthetics, including Rustic Oak, Dark Walnut, Whitewash, and Reclaimed Barnwood.

Two adjustable shelves allow for customization based on your electronics and accessories, and each features cord management ports so your wires stay organized and out of sight. The top surface has a maximum weight capacity of 150 pounds, while each shelf can support an additional 30 pounds.

The stand’s total dimensions are 23.38 by 15.75 by 58 inches. There’s also a larger size of this model available with an 80-inch width to accommodate larger TVs. Assembly is required, and instructions are provided by the manufacturer.

Best for gamers: Bestier 70-inch Entertainment Center

Why it made the cut: There’s plenty of room for lots of streaming boxes and gaming consoles, but the built-in RGB LED lighting helps set the gaming mood. 

Specs 

  • TV size: Up to 70 inches
  • Material: Particle and metal
  • Width: 63 inches
  • Height: 22 inches

Pros

  • Accepts large TVs
  • Lots of storage space
  • Built-in RGB lighting
  • Tempered glass shelves

Cons 

  • Pressboard construction
  • No front doors to conceal gear when not in use

You can’t have a piece of gaming-specific gear without adding RGB lighting. That maxim stays true with this 63-inch wide TV stand. It has LED strips inside the cabinet that can show off seven different colors and vary between 22 different display patterns. So, if you’re a streamer and you’re looking to create the perfect ambiance for your flagship flatscreen, this is a great way to do it without having to DIY your own solution. The lights even come with their own remote to control the display. 

As for the TV stand itself, it’s made of sturdy pressboard, but the shelves are made of tempered glass to allow the light to travel through them. There are five individual compartments, one vertically oriented space in the middle with two stacked horizontal shelves on each size. There are no doors to close in front of all your devices, so you can show them off even when you’re not playing. 

Cord holes in the back of the unit allow you to easily snake power cables through without creating a cluttered look. The carbon cellulose surfaces are smooth to the touch and relatively durable in case you spill a drink on it in the heat of the moment. 

Best with mount: Walker Edison Wren Classic 4 Cubby TV Stand

Why it made the cut: Our pick for the best TV stand with a mount, an integrated stand lifts to a 58-inch TV above the surface to make room for a soundbar or elaborate action figure arrangements.

Specs 

  • TV size: Up to 60 inches
  • Width: 58 inches
  • Height: 24 inches
  • Material: MDF

Pros

  • Attractive composite surface
  • Fits big TVs
  • Integrated mount
  • Spacious shelves

Cons 

  • No doors on the front
  • Limited finish options

If you want the look of a wall-mounted TV without having to drill into your drywall or plaster, this is the TV stand you’re looking for. It’s 58 inches wide, so you can sit a TV on top of the unit as normal if you want to. It has a capacity of up to 150 pounds. Add the integrated mount, however, and the TV can sit above the surface and away from the wall. That leaves room beneath the TV to accommodate extra set-top boxes, speakers, or a soundbar. 

That extra room up top augments an already spacious interior. There are two compartments, each with its own adjustable shelf, so they’re customizable depending on your setup. Each compartment has a cable port in the back, so it’s simple to hide wires out of the way. It’s not solid wood, but it is built to last, and it’s simple to tether to the wall so it doesn’t tip over.

Best fireplace: Ameriwood Home Lumina Fireplace

Why it made the cut: The included 23-inch wide fireplace display augments built-in LED lighting so you can set any mood you want, from romantic to gamer circus.

Specs 

  • TV size: Up to 70 inches
  • Material: MDF, particle board
  • Width: 64.75 inches
  • Height: 24.875 inches

Pros 

  • Holds large TVs
  • Built-in fireplace display (not real fire)
  • Heats rooms up to 400 square feet
  • LED lighting
  • Each compartment has three shelves

Cons 

  • Limited storage space
  • Not a real fireplace

Fireplaces are another luxury that not every home can accommodate. An easy pick for the best fireplace TV stand, this sturdy TV stand has a 23-inch fireplace display that creates a realistic fire effect while an electric heater pumps warmth out into a room up to 400 square feet. It can’t replace a real fireplace, but it also won’t involve major home renovations, regular cleanings, or the threat of melting that PS5 you waited so long to get. If you just want the fire or heat effects, they’re both available independently, too. 

The stand itself can hold up to a massive 70-inch TV. The storage underneath offers three shelves on each side. Because the fireplace display takes up space, you don’t have as much room in the storage compartments as you would on other models, so make sure you’re cool with that trade-off before taking the leap. 

Best for 75-inch TVs: Walker Edison Englewood Mid Century Modern 2-Door

Why it made the cut: The attractive design masks the fact that it’s 70 inches wide and plenty big enough to support TVs all the way up to 80 inches. 

Specs 

  • TV size: Up to 80 inches
  • Materials: MDF
  • Width: 70 inches
  • Height: 15 inches

Pros

  • Attractive design
  • Sturdy construction
  • Doors to obscure storage when not in use
  • Large capacity

Cons 

  • Short
  • Legs allow for stuff to roll underneath

This extra-long TV stand looks like something Don Draper might put in his apartment. It has a slack, minimal design with doors on each of the two side cabinets to obscure your devices. The center shelf is exposed, so you can keep your best-looking consoles or a basket in there if you want to get fancy about it.  

Despite its relatively skinny (and handsome) legs, it can support up to 150 pounds. Combined with its length, that makes this a solid option for massive TVs. It stands 24 inches tall, too, which is important if you’re watching a massive set. Get too tall of a TV stand and you’ll be looking up to see the whole screen, which is annoying. 

There are four different color options, so you can choose exactly which one matches your home vibe. 

Best easel-style: VIVO Artistic Easel

VIVO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The VIVO Artistic Easel TV stand simply consists of a slim, tripod-style mount that is both subtle and sturdy.

Specs

  • TV Capacity: Up to 65 inches
  • Material: Wood, steel
  • Width: N/A
  • Top surface weight capacity: 77 pounds

Pros

  • Swivels 360 degrees
  • Adjustable height

Cons

  • Limited weight capacity

Make your flatscreen look like a work of art with this VIVO Artistic Easel stand. It’s designed to look like an artist’s easel and elevates your TV without taking up much floor space or causing visual clutter. Because of its small footprint, it’s a perfect choice for those with small living rooms, as it can easily be tucked in a corner. The height is adjustable, and the stand swivels 360 degrees so you can get the perfect viewing angle no matter where you’re sitting.

It’s best suited for TVs ranging from 45 to 65 inches and can support a maximum weight of 77 pounds. There’s even a cable management system in the legs, meaning your cords and wires will be neatly tucked out of view. The stand is made from a combination of steel and solid wood and comes in either a light or dark finish.

Best solid wood: Simplihome Redmond

Why it made the cut: With four cabinets, two drawers, and a pair of shelves, this wood TV stand gives off a retro entertainment center vibe that we love.

Specs 

  • TV Capacity: Up to 80 inches
  • Material: Pine with plywood
  • Width: 72 inches
  • Height: 26 inches

Pros 

  • Lots of storage
  • Doors to hide items when not in use
  • Very sturdy
  • Seven color options

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Design may feel dated to some

Entertainment centers once ruled the land. Your living room wasn’t complete until it was equipped with a massive wooden piece of furniture that housed your TV and everything that went with it. This 72-inch TV stand evokes that era. The storage areas have doors to hide what’s inside. There are four cabinets with adjustable shelves, as well as a pair of drawers in the middle. They all have doors with recessed panels for an old-school look. There are also two uncovered shelves directly underneath the top surface. 

There are seven colors to choose from when you’re picking your finish, all of which involve stained pine wood material. The hardware is made of handsome brass, and the doors shut magnetically, so they don’t randomly kick open when you don’t want them to. 

Best budget: Zinus Modern Studio Collection TV Media Stand

Zinus

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This minimalist TV stand from Zinus comes at an affordable price but has a 100-pound weight capacity due to its sturdy steel frame.

Specs

  • TV Capacity: 32 inches
  • Material: Steel frame
  • Width: 40 inches
  • Height: 18 inches

Pros

  • High weight capacity
  • Sleek, modern design
  • Excellent value

Cons

  • Minimal storage
  • Not suitable for large TVs

While some households require a large media console with plenty of storage, others simply need a flat surface for their TV to fit on. This Zinus Modern Studio Collection TV Media Stand is streamlined and perfect for small spaces because of its compact design. Despite its sleek aesthetic, there is an additional shelf for storage. While the design looks simple, the stand features sturdy steel framing that provides a 100-pound weight capacity.

The stand’s total dimensions are 40 by 17 by 18 inches, and assembly is easy; all the necessary tools come in the package. Choose from two colors: Red Mahogany and Espresso. This stand’s design provides a minimalist look for modern homes and due to its open shelving, has an airy feel. There’s also an option to purchase a matching side table for a more cohesive look in your living room.

Things to consider before buying the best TV stands

You must know your home and your TV before pulling the rip cord and buying a stand. Here are some things to consider:

Materials

Most of the easily shippable stuff you’ll find online is made of material like MDF or particleboard. These materials sometimes get a bad name because they aren’t as durable as real wood, which is true in a way but not in others. They typically include laminate exteriors, which are good at resisting marks and damage from liquid. 

You can, of course, go with various types of wood, but it comes with its own issues, like a need to be polished and a predilection for dings. 

Dimensions

It should go without saying, but your TV stand needs to actually fit in your house and where it’s best to place your TV. Get a good, solid measurement before you pull the trigger so you know for sure that your new furniture has a snug place to go. If your TV is huge, you want something that’s wide enough for the feet to sit comfortably on the surface, but you also don’t want it too tall to throw the center of the screen above your eyeline when you’re sitting on the couch. 

Storage type

Modern gaming consoles are extremely chunky, so if you want to park that PS5 or Xbox Series X inside your new TV stand, ensure it will fit and the shelves can handle its weight. You’ll also want to decide whether or not you want doors in front of your cabinets to hide your shameful mess of game cases and controller charging cables when you’re not playing or watching content. 

FAQs

Q: How wide does a TV stand need to be?

Manufacturers are annoyingly inconsistent when it comes to how they support their TVs. Some use a central pedestal, while others use feet spaced far apart at the edges of the panel. You can find out exactly how wide you need the stand to be by checking your TV’s specifications, but you can also just err on the side of wider if your space can fit it. 

Q: Can I put a 55-inch TV on a 50-inch stand?

Almost certainly. Firstly, the 55-inch measurement refers to the screen’s diagonal size, which means the length and width will be shorter (remember the Pythagorean theorem?) A 55-inch TV is actually probably well under 50 inches wide, so you should be fine. Again, be sure to check your specific TV before dropping cash. 

Q: Which is better: TV wall mount or stand?

It depends on your situation. Some people can’t drill into their walls in order to mount a TV. It’s also easier to get behind the screen to plug in cables and other stuff if you can simply move the stand away from the wall. Even flexible mounts don’t make it that easy. However, mounted TVs are less likely to tip over, and you can put them at whatever height you want rather than relying on the TV stand to be the right height. 

Final thoughts on the best TV stands

You have a nice place to sit when you watch content; that amazing new OLED TV deserves the same. It may not seem like an important decision, but the TV stand can set the tone for your entire living room. It stores your important stuff, hides your wires, and holds up our good pal, the TV. By taking a few minutes to really consider your options, you can make an informed decision and get the best TV stand for your home. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best TV stands in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best telescopes under $500 in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-telescopes-under-500/ Mon, 27 Jun 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=451591
The best telescopes under $500 are a great starting point
Stan Horaczek

Looking to stargaze on a budget? We’ve got the goods on the best affordable telescopes.

The post The best telescopes under $500 in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best telescopes under $500 are a great starting point
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ is the best overall telescope under $500. Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ
SEE IT

A solid build and specs, paired with smartphone-guided sky recognition technology, makes this telescope perfect for starry-eyed explorers.

Best for viewing planets Sky-Watcher Skymax 102mm Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope is the best for viewing planets. Sky-Watcher Skymax 102mm Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope
SEE IT

This telescope punches above its weight class in size and power, making it an ideal scope for checking out neighboring orbs.

Best for kids Orion Observer II 60mm AZ Refractor Telescope Starter Kit is the best for kids. Orion Observer II 60mm AZ Refractor Telescope Starter Kit
SEE IT

The entire package is designed to inspire kids during the window where they stare curiously out of the windows.

Telescopes under $500 can provide a passport to the universe without emptying your wallet. In their basic function, telescopes are our connection to the stars. For millennia, humankind has gazed skyward with wonder into the infinite reaches of outer space. And as humans are a curious bunch, our ancestors devised patterns in the movements of celestial bodies, gave them names, and built stories around them. The ancient Egyptians, Babylonians, and Greeks indulged in star worship. But you don’t have to follow those lines to geek out over the vastness of the night sky. It’s just so cool. Fortunately, whatever your motivation for getting under the stars, there is an affordable option for you on our list of the best telescopes under $500.

How we chose the best telescopes under $500

The under-$500 telescope market is crowded with worthy brands and models, so we looked at offerings in that price range from several well-known manufacturers in the space. After narrowing our focus based on personal experience, peer suggestions, critical reviews, and user impressions, we considered aperture, focal length, magnification, build quality, and value to select these five models.

The best telescopes under $500: Reviews & Recommendations

To get the best views of the stars, planets, and other phenomena of outer space, not just any old telescope will get the job done. There are levels of quality and a wide range of price points and features to sort through before you can be sure you’re making the right purchase for what you want out of your telescope, whether it’s multi-thousands, one of the best telescopes for under $1,000, or one of our top picks under $500.

Best overall: Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ

Celestron

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Solid build and specs, paired with the remarkable StarSense Explorer app, make this telescope a perfect introduction to celestial observation.

Specs

  • Focal length: 650mm
  • Aperture: 130mm, f/5
  • Magnification: 65x, 26x

Pros

  • App aids in finding stars
  • Easy to operate
  • Steady altazimuth mount

Cons

  • Eyepieces are both low power

Newbies to astronomy today can have a decidedly different experience than beginners who started stargazing before smartphones were a thing. Instead of carting out maps of the night sky to find constellations, the StarSense Explorer series from Celestron, including the DX 130AZ refractor, makes ample use of your device to bring you closer to the stars. 

With your smartphone resting in the telescope’s built-in dock, the StarSense Explorer app will find your location using the device’s GPS and serve up a detailed list of celestial objects viewable in real time. Looking for the Pleiades cluster? This app will tell you how far away it is from you and then lead you there with on-screen navigation. The app also includes descriptions of those objects, tips for observing them, and other useful info. 

The StarSense Explorer ships with an altazimuth mount equipped with slow-moving fine-tuning controls for both axes so you can find your target smoothly. And for those times you want to explore the night sky without tethering a smartphone, the scope’s red dot finder will help you zero in on your targets. The two eyepieces, measuring 25mm and 10mm, are powerful enough to snag stellar views of the planets but not quite enough to see the details a high-powered eyepiece would deliver.

Best for viewing planets: Sky-Watcher Skymax 102mm Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope

Sky-Watcher

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This telescope punches above its weight class in size and power, making it an ideal scope for viewing planets.

Specs

  • Focal length: 1300mm
  • Aperture: 102mm, f/12.7
  • Magnification: 130x, 52x

Pros

  • Great for viewing planets and galaxies
  • Sharp focus and contrast
  • Powerful

Cons

  • Not ideal for deep-space viewing

Let’s be real—most consumers in the market for a moderately priced telescope are in it to gain spectacular views of the planets and galaxies, but probably not much else. And it’s easy to see why. Nothing makes celestial bodies come alive like viewing them in real time, in all their colorful glory.

If that sounds like you, allow us to direct you to the Sky-Watcher Skymax 102, a refracting telescope specializing in crisp views of objects like planets and galaxies with ample contrast to make them pop against the dark night sky. The Skymax 102 is based on a Maksutov-Cassegrains design that uses both mirrors and lenses, resulting in a heavy-hitting scope in a very compact and portable unit. A generous 102mm aperture pulls in plenty of light to illuminate the details in objects, and the 1300mm focal length results in intense magnification.

Two included wide-angle eyepieces measuring 25mm and 10mm deliver 130x and 52x magnification, respectively. The package also includes a red-dot finder, V-rail for mounting, 1.25-inch diagonal viewing piece, and a case for transport and storage. Look no further if you’re looking for pure colors across a perfectly flat field in a take-anywhere form factor.

Best for astrophotography: William Optics GuideStar 61 

William Optics

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Top-notch specs and an enviable lens setup make this telescope ideal for astrophotography.

Specs

  • Focal length: 360mm
  • Aperture: f/5.9
  • Magnification: 7x (with 2-inch eyepiece)

Pros

  • Well-appointed specs
  • Sturdy, durable construction
  • Carrying case included

Cons

  • Flattener is an extra purchase

Sometimes you want to share more than descriptions of what you see in the night sky, and that’s where this guidescope comes in, helping you to focus on the best full-frame image. You can go as deep into the details (not to mention debt) as your line of credit will allow in your quest to capture the most impressive images of space. Luckily, though, this is a worthy option at a reasonable price. 

The Williams Optics Guide Star 61 telescope is a refracting-type scope with a 360mm focal length, f/5.9 aperture, and 61mm diameter well-suited to capturing sharp images of planets, moon, and bright deep-sky objects. The GS61 shares many specs with the now-discontinued Zenith Star 61, including focal length, aperture, and diameter, as well as the FPL53 ED doublet lens for high-contrast images.

The scope’s optical tube is about 13 inches long and weighs just 3 lbs.—great for traveling with the included carrying case—with a draw-tube (push-pull) focuser for coarse focusing and a rotating lens assembly for fine focus. Attaching a DSLR camera to the Guide Star 61 is a fairly easy job, but note that the flattener for making that connection is a separate purchase.

Best for kids: Orion Observer II 60mm AZ Refractor Telescope Starter Kit

Orion

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The entire package is designed to get kids exploring space right out of the box.

Specs

  • Focal length: 700mm
  • Aperture: 60mm, f/11.7
  • Magnification: 70x, 28x

Pros

  • Capable of detailed views of moon and planets
  • Lightweight construction
  • Lots of handy accessories

Cons

  • Not enough optical power to reach deep space

Parents have a limited window of time to recognize and develop their kids’ interests, so kindle a fascination with the stars through a star projector and then fan it with a telescope. That’s what makes the Orion Observer II such a great buy. Seeing the craters on the moon or the rings of Saturn for the first time can affirm your kids’ curiosity about space and expand their concept of the universe—and they can get those goosebumps while learning through this altazimuth refractor telescope.

The Orion Observer II is built to impressive specifications, with a 700mm focal length that provides 71x magnification for viewing the vivid details of planets in our solar system. True glass lenses (not plastic) are a bonus at this price point, and combined with either included Kellner eyepieces (25mm and 10mm), the telescope delivers crisp views of some of space’s most dazzling objects. 

Kids and parents can locate celestial objects with the included red-dot finder. The kit also includes MoonMap 260, a fold-out map that directs viewers to 260 lunar features, such as craters, valleys, ancient lava flows, mountain ranges, and every U.S. and Soviet lunar mission landing site. An included copy of Exploring the Cosmos: An Introduction to the Night Sky gives a solid background before they go stargazing. And with its aluminum tube and tripod, the entire rig is very portable, even for young ones, with a total weight of 4.3 pounds. Find more options for the best telescopes for kids here. (And/or go the opposite direction with a microscope for kids—a love of science begets more science.)

Celestron

SEE IT

EDITOR’S NOTE: Popular Science has teamed up with Celestron on a line of products. The decision to include this model in our recommendations was made by our reviewer independently of that relationship, but we do earn a commission on its sales—all of which helps power Popular Science.

Why it made the cut: With its feature set, portability, and nice price point, this scope is ready for some serious stargazing without a serious investment.

Specs

  • Focal length: 400mm
  • Aperture: 70mm, f/5.7
  • Magnification: 168x

Pros

  • Bluetooth remote shutter release
  • Ships with two eyepieces
  • Pack included

Cons

  • Lacks optical power for deep space

Getting out of town, whether camping in the wilderness or driving in the countryside, is one of the attractions of stargazing. Out in the great wide open, far away from streetlights, the stars explode even to the naked eye. Add a handy telescope like the Popular Science Celestron Travel Scope 70 Portable Telescope—our pick for the best portable telescope under $500—and you’ll see much farther into space. The fact that it’s as affordable as it is moveable just adds to the value.

The Popular Science Celestron Travel Scope 70 Portable Telescope is a well-equipped refractor telescope built for backpacking and adventuring but without skimping on cool gadgets. Whether you’re gazing at celestial or terrestrial objects, the smartphone adapter will aid you in capturing images with your personal device, with an included Bluetooth remote shutter release.

Designed with portability and weight in mind, the entire package fits into an included pack with a total of 3.3 pounds—that includes the telescope, tripod stand, 20mm and 10mm eyepieces, 3x Barlow lens, and more. Download Celestron’s Starry Night software to help you get the most from your astronomy experience. 

Here are some other options from the Celestron and Popular Science collaboration:

What to consider when buying the best telescopes under $500

Optics

There are three types of optics available on consumer telescopes, and they will help you achieve three different goals. Refractor telescopes use a series of glass lenses to bring celestial bodies like the moon and near planets into focus easily. Reflector telescopes—also known as Newtonian scopes for their inventor, Sir Isaac Newton—swap lenses for mirrors and allow stargazers to see deeper into space. Versatile compound telescopes combine these two methods in a smaller, more portable form factor, with results that land right in the middle of the pack. 

Aperture

Photographers will recognize this: The aperture controls the amount of light entering the telescope, like on a manual camera. Aperture is the diameter of the lens or the primary mirror, so a telescope with a large aperture draws more light than a small aperture, resulting in views into deeper space. F-ratio is the spec to watch here. Low f-ratios, such as f/4 or f/5, are usually best for wide-field observation and photography, while high f-ratios like f/15 can make deep-space nebulae and other bodies easier to see and capture. Midpoint f-ratios can get the job done for both.

Mounts

All the lens and mirror power in the world won’t mean much if you attach your telescope to a subpar mount. In general, the more lightweight and portable the tripod mount, the more movement you’ll likely get while gazing or photographing the stars. Investing in a stable mount will improve the viewing experience. The two common mount types are alt-az (altitude-azimuth) and equatorial. Altazimuth mounts operate in the same way as a camera tripod, allowing you to adjust both axes (left-right, up-down), while equatorial mounts also tilt to make it easier to follow celestial objects.

FAQs

Q: What is the most powerful telescope for home use?

The most powerful telescope for home use from this list is the Sky-Watcher Skymax 102, which tops out at 130x magnification with its included eyepieces.

Q: Is a 90mm telescope good?

Yes, a 90mm telescope is good for viewing planetary features like the rings of Saturn and the Great Red Spot on Jupiter.

Q: How much does a telescope cost?

The cost of a telescope varies depending on the brand, model, and construction but there are plenty of affordable options—like the ones on this list.

Q: How powerful does a telescope have to be to see planets?

A telescope with a minimum 60mm aperture has enough power to see planets.

Q: What size telescope do I need to see the rings of Saturn?

You can see the rings of Saturn with as low as a 60mm aperture. 

Q: What size telescope do I need? 

The telescope size you need depends on what you want out of it. This list of best telescopes under $500 gives a good rundown on telescope types, sizes, and uses.

Final thoughts on the best telescopes under $500

Although this group of sub-$500 scopes is fairly diverse, the Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ stands out in our best telescopes under $500 as the best place to start your interstellar journey due to its versatility and sky recognition app, which make for a fun evening of guided tours through the star patterns, no experience necessary. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best telescopes under $500 in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best snow blowers for elderly people in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-snow-blowers-for-elderly/ Mon, 19 Sep 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=470538
Best snow blowers for elderly sliced header
Tony Ware

Don’t let the snow ruin your day.

The post The best snow blowers for elderly people in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best snow blowers for elderly sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The SnowMaster 824 QXE will power through rough snow with ease. Toro SnowMaster 824 QXE
SEE IT

Toro’s SnowMaster 824 QXE includes the power and features to clear out the roughest snowfall.

Best single-stage Clear your driveway before breakfast. Toro Power Clear 721
SEE IT

The Power Clear 721 can easily blast through fresh snow and throw it up to 35 feet.

Best two-stage The snow has got to go with the Storm 2420. Troy-Bilt Storm 2420
SEE IT

The two-stage design, self-propelled drive, and 24-inch clearing width make the Storm 2420 a monster snow-clearing machine.

Snow blowers can make quick work of clearing snowy walkways and long driveways after a major snowstorm. They make snow removal easier for everyone but can be especially helpful for older homeowners struggling with shoveling. Using one takes less time, strength, and stamina than using a shovel, which can be especially risky for anyone with joint and/or back problems. The best snow blowers for elderly people will ensure you can safely clear snow accumulation to access your car and walkways quickly.

How we chose the best snow blowers for elderly people

I’ve been writing about gear and gadgets for over a decade for sites like TechnoBuffalo, CNN Underscored, and Popular Science. During that time, I’ve covered everything from the best gallon water bottles to the best smoke detectors.

To determine how to select snow blowers for elderly people specifically, we contacted medical experts, including Dr. Claire Ankuda, assistant professor of Geriatrics and Palliative Medicine at the Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai hospital in New York, to understand what qualities, if any, might make a snowblower better or worse for older people. We found that snowblowers are easier to use than shovels when clearing large areas.

From there, we drew on our past research when recommending the best snow blowers and best snow shovels to find the most reliable options from the best brands. We also drew on recent reviews from experts and user impressions to ensure our recommendations are up to date before the coming winter season.

The best snow blowers for elderly people: Reviews & Recommendations

It can be hard to balance picking a snow blower that’s powerful enough to handle any situation and one that will actually make clearing snow safer and easier. There are a lot of variables at play, from the size of your property to the amount of snowfall you get annually, so you’ll have to use your best judgment when choosing what works best for you. That said, we think our picks for the best snow blowers for elderly people will make it easier to clear snow no matter what.

Best overall: Toro SnowMaster 824 QXE

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Toro’s SnowMaster 824 QXE includes the power and features to clear out the roughest snowfall.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 55.4 x 25.4 x 43 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 131 pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Clearing width: 24 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • Wide clearing width
  • Comparable to some two-stage models
  • Personal Pace system

Cons

  • Expensive

Toro’s SnowMaster 824 QXE is a single-stage gas-powered snow blower that features a clearing width of 24 inches and a push-to-start button. We like this model because of its “Personal Pace” system, which matches your walking speed with the speed of the blower’s wheels. It sounds unnecessary, but it allows you to set the tempo of your snow blowing and keep your footing. Personal Pace also makes it easier to stop the snow blower instantly. 

The SnowMaster 824 QXE is also relatively light at 131 pounds, making it easy to maneuver, and features a 252 cc engine for plenty of power. Meanwhile, Toro’s snow blower offers an adjustable chute and a unique auger design capable of throwing snow up to 40 feet.

Best budget: Greenworks 13 Amp 20-inch Corded Snow Thrower

Greenworks

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: This snow thrower from Greenworks will keep your walk clear and won’t cost a fortune.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 31 x 21.6 x 37 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 30 Pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Width: 20 inches
  • Power source: Corded electric

Pros

  • Corded electric design means unlimited runtime
  • Adjustable chute
  • Easy push-button start

Cons

  • Cord could get in the way

Snow blowers can be expensive, especially if you need something heavy-duty. If you live somewhere that only gets light snowfall, the GreenWorks 13 Amp is a more affordable snow blower with a clearing width of 20 inches that can throw snow up to 20 feet. For small walkways and driveways, it’s enough to keep things clear. It also includes a push-button start, an adjustable chute, and LED lights. Best of all, it’s only 32 pounds, so it’s very easy to move around. At around $200, it’s a solid deal.

Best single-stage: Toro Power Clear 721

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Power Clear 721 can easily blast through fresh snow and throw it up to 35 feet.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 48 x 21 x 42 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 84 pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Clearing width: 21 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • Simple, effective design
  • Push-button start
  • Adjustable chute

Cons

  • Only works well on pavement

Like our best overall pick, the Power Clear 721 gets high marks because of Toro’s Personal Pace system, an adjustable chute, and an electric start button. The gas-powered engine is a less powerful 212cc, but it also weighs slightly less at 125 pounds. Even with a little less power, it can still easily clear wet, heavy snow and toss it up to 40 feet. 

Best two-stage: Troy-Bilt Storm 2420

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The two-stage design, self-propelled drive, and 24-inch clearing width make the Storm 2420 a monster snow-clearing machine.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 49 x 25 x 33 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 191 pounds
  • Type: Two-stage
  • Clearing width: 24 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • More powerful two-stage design
  • Self-propelled drive
  • Larger tires

Cons

  • Big and heavy

The Troy-Bilt Storm 2420 combines a 12-inch serrated steel auger and a 12-inch impeller, enabling it to plow through deep, heavy snowfall. It has a clearing width of 24 inches, so users should be able to clear a driveway quickly. The machine also comes equipped with 13- by 4-inch X-Trac tires, giving it better traction and mobility over heavier, icier snow. Plus, of course, it has some of our favorite quality-of-life features, including an adjustable chute and an electric start button.

Best electric: Ryobi Brushless 18-inch Single-Stage Snow Blower

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The cordless design, compact size, and additional features make the Ryobi Brushless Whisper an electrifying option. 

Specs

  • Dimensions: 51.5 x 18.5 x 38.25 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 46 pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Clearing width: 18 inches
  • Power source: Battery

Pros

  • Cordless operation
  • Folds up for compact storage
  • Adjustable chute

Cons

  • Narrower clearing width

Electric snow blowers aren’t as powerful as gas-powered models, but they require much less maintenance and run quietly. (It also means you don’t need to keep gas cans around in case it snows.)

Ryobi’s compact electric single-stage blower features an 18-inch clearance width and 10-inch clearance depth, making it the perfect size for lighter snowfall. It’s cordless, powered by a 40-volt (V) battery, so it’s just as maneuverable as a gas-powered model. (There are, in fact, plug-in electric snow blowers.) It has an adjustable chute for controlled snow throwing, a push-button start, and an LED light for increased visibility at dusk or dawn. The Ryobi 18-inch snow blower can also throw snow about 25 feet and, as a bonus, its battery is compatible with other 40V products in Ryobi’s lineup.

Best gas-powered: Toro Power Max HD 828

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: With a 28-inch clearing width, adjustable chute, and two-stage design, the Power Max HD 828 was born to clear snow.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 58 x 29.5 x 31.5 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 310 pounds
  • Type: Two-stage
  • Clearing width: 28 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • Anti-clogging system
  • 28-inch clearing width
  • LED headlights

Cons

  • Very expensive

With a wide 28-inch clearing width, gas-powered engine, and adjustable chute, the Toro Power Max HD 828 is a monster snow blower built for clearing large areas after big storms. The two-stage operation can toss snow up to 45 feet, and the machine is self-propelled, so all users need to do is guide the Power Max over the areas that need clearing. It also includes features that make it easier to use, including an electric start button and an LED headlight. As with all gas-powered models, the Power Max is loud. That said, its wide clearing width and self-propelled engine ensure you’ll get the job done quickly.

Snow removal is serious business

Snow removal is a normal part of life for homeowners in large swaths of North America, so it’s easy to dismiss the fact that it’s a very taxing activity that can become quite dangerous for people with health issues. The combination of cold temperatures and intense physical exertion while shoveling a driveway can lead to an increased risk for a heart attack, according to the American Heart Association, particularly if you have high blood pressure or cholesterol. Your risk of a catastrophic health event is also higher for people with conditions like diabetes, smokers, and those of us who don’t get to the gym enough.

Ideally, older adults diagnosed with heart or physical health issues should avoid snow removal entirely. If you can, hire someone to shovel your driveway and walkway. According to Dr. Claire Ankuda, clearing snow is always a risky move for older people with physical limitations.

If that’s not an option, use a snow blower to remove as much snow from your walkways and/or driveway as possible. It minimizes the risk of muscle and back strain (or worse) and can clear a large area more efficiently while limiting your exposure to the elements. Best of all, it doesn’t require as much physical exertion as a shovel. Even then, Ankuda still advised caution:

“It’s important to physically warm up with stretching, to wear appropriate boots to reduce the chance of slips, and to take frequent breaks,” She said. “The majority of injuries that are related to snow blowers have been due to hand or finger injuries, from people reaching in to clear blockages in the discharge chute. This can be avoided by using a tool or a stick to unclog the machine.”

What to look for when picking the best snow blowers for elderly people

A good snow blower is fast, effective, and easy to use—but that’s just the baseline, the bare minimum. There are a few technical factors to keep in mind when picking out the gear that will help you get through every winter storm for the foreseeable future. For starters, there are three kinds of snow blowers; you should know which one you want. From there, keep an eye on its size and weight to ensure you can easily move them around. You should also note its clearing dimensions, which describe the swatch of snow you can remove in a single pass.

Types of snow blowers

Snow blowers come in three categories, divided by the number of mechanisms they use while clearing snow. “Single-stage,” “two-stage,” and “three-stage” snow blowers each have their advantages and disadvantages.

Single-stage snow blowers are compact, easy to maneuver, and feature simple controls, making them better suited for elderly people. They feature a spinning metal auger at the front of the machine that scoops up light-to-moderate snowfall and discharges it through a chute. Single-stage snow blowers are simple, making them the ideal option for people with physical limitations. That said, their auger blades may skim the ground during operation, which could pick up rocks and toss them out of the chute, possibly damaging nearby vehicles. You should definitely avoid single-stage mowers if you have a gravel driveway.

Two-stage snow blowers have a fan-like mechanism called an impeller, which helps throw snow out of the chute, as well as the auger found in a single-stage blower. The combination amps up the power, making a two-stage blower capable of clearing up to 23 inches of snow and ice over all types of terrain (even gravel driveways). They also feature a self-propelled transmission with forward and reverse speeds, which assists with pushing the snow blower through thick, icy snow accumulation.

A three-stage snow blower features an auger, an impeller, and adds an accelerator, which grinds chunks of ice into slush and spits it out with the snow. It’s best for moving heavy, compacted snow and ice up to 23 inches deep. In addition to being more powerful than one- and two-stage models, a three-stage snow blower should work well over unpaved surfaces and/or steep inclines. While you can find them for sale at hardware stores, three-stage snow blowers are generally considered commercial machines. We’d consider them overkill in most situations.

If you’re looking to minimize physical exertion, a single-stage snow blower is a logical choice. It’s the easiest to use and should be able to handle light-to-average snow. If your health is a concern, you should call a professional when you get heavy snow overnight, regardless of what gear is in your garage.

Size and weight

To ensure the snow blower is easy to use, we recommend looking at its size and weight. A heavier snow blower may be harder to set up and put away at the start and end of the season.

Single-stage blowers are more compact, lightweight, and easier to handle, making them an excellent choice for elderly people. Likewise, electric snow blowers tend to be light, between 30 and 65 pounds. Gas-powered models can weigh a lot more—100-300 pounds. While these models are more capable of clearing large areas of snowfall and ice, they’re also some of the biggest, heaviest snow blowers on the market, so they’re not ideal for older adults.

Clearing width and depth

Clearing width and depth indicate how much snow a blower can clear in one pass. Clearing width describes how wide a path the snow blower will create, while clearing depth tells you how high a snow pile it can process. A typical single-stage blower can clear a path that’s 11-22 inches wide through up to 8 inches of snow. A two-stage snow blower can clear a patch up to 23 inches deep and 30 inches wide in a single pass, which is great for longer driveways. 

We recommend most people use a single-stage blower for its more compact size, but a two-stage snow blower’s greater clearing width and depth might be necessary if you get a lot of snow each season. A two-stage snow blower makes sense if you need to clear a larger area with denser and possibly icy snow. 

Surface type

The surface you’re clearing will affect the type of snow blower you need. A single-stage blower is excellent for clearing flat, paved walkways and driveways. However, as we mentioned, they’re not suited for clearing gravel surfaces because they tend to pick up and throw loose rocks. A two-stage snow blower can clear diverse terrain and generally feature larger, more durable wheels that can gain better traction on icy snow. Two-stage blowers may also feature engine-driven wheels capable of handling uneven and sloped surfaces, making them far easier to push in challenging conditions.

Extra features

Beyond the core mechanisms, snow blowers can come with lots of bells and whistles that can make your experience easier and/or safer. Some of them, like an automatic safety cutoff, can prevent injuries. Others, like an adjustable throw chute, may make it easier to move snow efficiently.

Older adults may specifically want to look for a snow blower with features that make it easier to handle. Some snow blowers have power steering to reduce resistance when turning. Many electric snow blowers have a power button instead of the traditional ripcord found on gas-powered models. Some even have headlights for increased visibility at dusk or dawn. These features aren’t standard, so you’ll likely find them on more expensive models, but we think it’s worth the extra expense if they may make clearing snow easier.

FAQs

Q: How much do snow blowers cost?

Snow blower prices vary greatly depending on what you’re looking for. A single-stage snow blower generally costs around $500, with prices going up or down depending on whether you get one that’s gas-powered, electric, corded, or cordless. Two-stage snow blower prices start at around $1,000. Remember that snow blowers are heavy-duty appliances, on par with a lawn mower, which is mostly to say that they are expensive but built to last.

Q: Is an electric snow blower better than gas?

Electric snow blowers are easier to maintain and generally lighter than gas-powered models. They’re also smaller and lighter, making them easier to handle. That said, you must either charge a battery before using them or plug them into an outlet, potentially limiting their range (unless you have a portable power station). They’re also generally less powerful, so you may be unable to move as much snow.

Q: What is the difference between a snow blower and a snow thrower?

There’s no difference! A “snow thrower” is another name for a single-stage snow blower.

Final thoughts on the best snow blowers for elderly people

Older adults with health issues should avoid clearing their own snow. If you have to do it yourself, however, using one of the best snow blowers for elderly people will make digging out much easier and safer. Besides, who wants to actually shovel snow, anyway?

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow blowers for elderly people in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best smart alarm clocks of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-smart-alarm-clocks/ Thu, 19 Oct 2023 20:05:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581274
Four alarm clock product images separated horizontally by fourths
Amanda Reed

These smarty-pants alarm clocks are no snooze.

The post The best smart alarm clocks of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four alarm clock product images separated horizontally by fourths
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A Loftie smart alarm clock on a blue and gray gradient background Loftie Clock
SEE IT

Gentle wake-up sounds meet sleek design.

Best for light therapy A Philips SmartSleep clock on a blue and white gradient background Philips SmartSleep
SEE IT

Light therapy in this alarm clock allows it to do double-duty.

Best for kids An Amazon Echo Show 5 on a blue and white background Echo Show 5
SEE IT

An out-of-this-world smart alarm clock with features for kids.

For most of us, alarm clocks are a daily feature of life—they see us at our worst, tired, cranky, and out-of-sorts—but what if they could be smarter alarm clocks? That means an alarm clock with the ability to customize how you wake up and how you fall asleep. With options, in many cases, for different sounds, lights, and preprogrammed gentle-on-your-body alarm functions that have you waking up as rested and refreshed as possible (these are, after all, still alarms). You may even be able to talk to them to tell them exactly what you want them to do. To smooth out the inevitable wake-up bumps, you don’t want just any alarm clock—you want the best smart alarm clock on the market today.

How we chose the best smart alarm clocks

This preapproved selection of the best smart alarm clocks will save you time and maybe some 6 a.m. wake-up headaches. To narrow things down, we considered expert and real-world opinions and looked at what benefits each smart alarm clock delivered. Of course, not everyone wants the same thing from a smart alarm clock. Some people may want a smart alarm clock that goes the gentler route by using light therapy, while others may want nature sounds and a soothing sunrise to raise them from their slumber slowly. Ease of use and integration with apps and your smartphone, plus attractiveness on the bedside table, were also factors that helped shape our decisions.

The best smart alarm clocks: Reviews & Recommendations

While there’s not a lot of joy to be had in waking up before you’re ready, there is at least a little glee in finding a smart alarm clock that helps wake you up the way you prefer. From smart alarm clocks with preset sleeping and waking sounds to alarms that do their jobs while looking damn fine, here are our most alarming picks.

Best overall: Loftie Clock 

Lofie

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This smart alarm clock has all the bells and whistles, from a Bluetooth-enabled speaker to preprogrammed gentle wakeup sounds.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 6.5” W x 2.75” D x 2.75” H
  • Weight: 1.8 pounds
  • Power: USB-C cable and power adapter with backup lithium-ion battery

Pros

  • Two-phase alarm for a gentler approach to waking up
  • Built-in white noise and relaxing sounds
  • Bluetooth speaker to play whatever music you’d like
  • Adjustable night light (includes blackout setting)

Cons

  • WiFi required to operate
  • Night light isn’t enough to read by
  • Limited amount of programming in Loftie itself

The Loftie Clock looks like a regular alarm clock (albeit a sleek one), but it hides a lot of functionality behind its unassuming facade, doing double duty as a smartphone alarm clock with a built-in Bluetooth speaker. The big idea behind this alarm clock is that you get the modern-day technological features you might traditionally find in your phone—like meditation programs and relaxing music—but without the distraction of having your phone by your bed (no more late-night doom-scrolling). Instead of being the loudest alarm clock on the block, it’s taking the kinder, gentler route.

This smart alarm clock can fit on just about any bedside table with room to spare at a light 1.8 pounds and a small footprint of 6.5 inches wide, 2.75 inches in diameter, and 2.75 inches high. Its polycarbonate shell and steel top grill can withstand the half-asleep smacking that sometimes comes with disarming alarm clocks, while the lithium-ion battery backup is a nice feature of this device that’s normally powered via a USB-C cable and power adapter.

Just how smart is it? It’s got a two-phase alarm that sends a gentle prod first before the more traditional alarm jolt. Speaking of, you can wake up however you’d like by customizing the alarm tone and what volume it comes on for various days of the week. If you like falling asleep to white noise or nature soundscape, the clock comes preprogrammed with 100-plus sleep and nature sounds. Maybe you need a little more to drift off to sleep or wake up refreshed. In that case, its updatable wellness content includes sound baths, guided meditations, and breathwork tips. If you already have your own audio content and music you prefer, you can also set that up via Bluetooth from your phone.

The unit itself has a dimmable glow for those who like some gentle light on in their room to go to sleep (or to find your way to the bathroom for those middle-of-the-night wakeups). For those who need a pitch-black room with zero light distractions, the sleep timer with blackout mode is just the thing.

Instead of packing your bedroom with a white noise machine, light therapy wakeup lamp, alarm clock, and smartphone, you can simply rely on the Loftie Clock to play all these roles in your life. And it does so elegantly, in customizable top colors including black, white, pine, coffee, and red shell—the base is always black. And as for that promise of being able to leave your phone in the other room while you sleep, the Loftie Clock delivers, as all of its built-in features can be accessed through the alarm clock itself without the use of your phone. 

Note that you will need a WiFi connection to use most of its functions. The app is also finicky: There have been moments where we’ve tried to change an alarm via app, only to be met with a “sync unsuccessful” message. Changing the alarm on the clock itself isn’t a workaround to this, and your best bet is reconnecting the clock.

Best for the minimalist: Hatch Restore 2

Hatch

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Of all the smart alarm clocks out there, this one looks the least like an alarm clock, and that’s a good thing for the design-conscious.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 7.5 x 2.75 x 5.75 inches
  • Weight: 19 ounces
  • Power: Proprietary cable that plugs into an outlet

Pros

  • Dimmable clock for complete nighttime darkness
  • Phone-free controls
  • Free app available in Apple Store and Google Play Store

Cons

  • Paid Hatch membership is needed to access sounds beyond what’s preprogrammed
  • WiFi connection required

For those who want an alarm clock by their bed that looks nothing like an alarm clock, the Hatch Restore 2—available in the natural colors of latte, putty, and slate—does the trick. This unobtrusive fabric-covered alarm clock uses light and sound to both help you go to sleep and wake up. You get the choice of many “colored” noises, from white to pink (lower pitch, more soothing) to brown (deeper, more rumbly), plus those inspired by nature or thought to promote sleep. And you get light and dark on your terms, with a sunrise alarm clock option and a dimmable clock that stays off unless you tap it to see the time. 

Once you get your Hatch smart alarm clock set using the free companion app (accessible to iOS and Android phones), you can start your nighttime routine by pressing a button on the device itself—meaning you can keep your phone away from your sleep area, a big plus for the easily distractible. You will need WiFi and Bluetooth to operate it, and if you want a full library of content beyond the preprogrammed sounds and noise, you’ll have to sign up for a Hatch Membership after a free trial. The Hatch Restore 2 also suffers the same pitfalls as the Lofie: You’re a bit screwed if the app isn’t working.

Best for a small space: Lenovo Smart Clock

Lenovo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Google Assistant makes the interface easy to use, and the color screen adds appeal.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 4.21″ L x 8.65″ W x 3.26″ H 
  • Weight: ‎1 pound
  • Power: Proprietary cable that plugs into an outlet

Pros

  • Use voice with Google Assistant for easy operation
  • Pairs with most smart devices that use Google Assistant
  • USB charging port for phones, other devices

Cons

  • Small size may not be for everyone
  • No battery backup in case of power outage

The Lenovo Smart Clock is like having a little computer screen right next to your bed—and it’ll do what you ask thanks to Google Assistant integration, which works in Android or iOS. The fabric-covered clock has a 4-inch color screen that can display the time, weather, and your Google photos. You can customize the clock faces just like on a smartwatch. And you can even check in on your smart camera feeds and pair other smart devices that work with Google Assistant. The multiroom audio feature lets you connect your clock to a speaker group and play media like music or podcasts across multiple devices and rooms. Choose to control things like setting your alarm via voice activation or do it manually via the onscreen buttons and menus. This alarm has a slow brightening option that you can have activated 30 minutes before you want to wake up. And you can stream music, podcasts, and audiobooks via the speaker.

Best for light therapy: Philips SmartSleep

Philips

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: While on first blush, it’s the sunrise and sunset light that set this smart alarm apart; it’s the extras like the phone charging dock and app that help it shine.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 8.8″ D x 8.6″ W x 4.7″ H 
  • Weight: 3.36 pounds
  • Power: Power cord with 8-hour alarm back-up

Pros

  • 8 pre-programmed wake-up sounds to choose from
  • Easy customization of sunset and sunrise via app
  • Phone charging dock bonus

Cons

  • Not Bluetooth enabled
  • Small digital numbers can be hard to read
  • Light can only connect via 2.4 GHz WiFi router

While its main selling point is its sunrise and sunset lights, the Philips SmartSleep has a lot of smart alarm features that make it a winner in the broader smart alarm clock category, too. Nice touches like an easy-to-access midnight light on top of the device for those 3 a.m. milk and cookie runs, an FM radio for those who like to wake up to the news or their favorite station with a clock with radio alarm, and a phone charging dock put it in a class above. There’s also an eight-hour alarm power backup for when your electricity fails, a speaker, the ability to wake up to both light and sounds, an auto-dimming display, smart snooze, and an AmbiTrack sensor to measure your bedroom sleeping environment. 

Using this smart alarm clock with the SleepMapper app allows you to track your sleep, get insights into your habits, and sync sleep metrics with Apple and Google Health. You don’t need to use the app to control the device, but you’ll have easier access (and access to more features) if you do. Just note that there’s no Bluetooth, and it only works when connected to 2.4 GHz WiFi.

Best for kids: Echo Show 5

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Alexa integration makes it easy for kids to set their own alarm, play music, and make video calls—all with parental controls in place.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 5.8″ W x 3.6″ D x 3.2″ H
  • Weight: 16.01 ounce
  • Power: Proprietary cable that plugs into an outlet

Pros

  • Alexa voice assistant for ease of use
  • Built-in camera for video calls
  • Parental controls to control when and how kids use the device

Cons

  • Screen may lag a bit
  • Amazon-dependent system

The Amazon Alexa integration with this alarm clock, really a member of the Amazon family of smart speakers, means it does a whole lot more than just make sure your kids wake up in the morning. Your child can ask it questions, have it play music, stream a podcast, and make video calls to trusted contacts. There’s also a chance to interact with Disney characters using the device. And yes, your kids can use Alexa to set their own wake-up alarms, read them a bedtime story, and even turn off any compatible smart lights with your alarm clock at night. Parental controls mean that all this happens under your watchful eye.

What to consider when buying the best smart alarm clocks

Here’s what you should consider when shopping for smart alarm clocks:

How big and flashy do you want your smart alarm clock to be?

Some smart alarm clocks are the same size (or smaller) as a standard analog or digital alarm clock meant to sit on a bedside stand, while others are much larger and more noticeable. Some smart alarm clocks look like you’d expect a bedside alarm clock to look, while others are more like a computer screen, and still others don’t look like an alarm at all—and instead resemble an unobtrusive piece of art.

How smart do you want your smart alarm clock to be?

Some smart alarm clocks are just smart enough with a WiFi connection and the ability to connect to your phone for ease of programming. Other smart alarm clocks have hundreds of preprogrammed sounds, the capacity to run a sunrise and sunset light show, the ability to stream from your phone via Bluetooth (almost like tiny powered speakers, though without the fidelity), and their own dedicated apps that offer even more features that might include analyzing your sleep patterns. Sometimes, a smart alarm can also be a central access point to other smart-home devices, like a security system or room lights.

What type of technology do you want your smart alarm clock to have?

If everything in your home runs via Google Assistant, you might look at an alarm clock that includes that functionality. While if you prefer Alexa, you might prefer a different alarm clock with built-in Amazon tech. Ensure the smart alarm clock you choose integrates with your phone’s operating system. Look for either iOS or Android compatibility, although many do both.

FAQs

Q: Is it better to use an alarm clock or a phone alarm?

Both alarm clocks and phone alarms can wake you up, but there are advantages to using an alarm clock over a phone. For example, most sleep experts suggest kicking your phone out of the bedroom for better sleep (including falling asleep), and a smart alarm clock is an, ahem, smart way to do that.

Q: What can a smart alarm clock do?

Smart alarm clocks offer many ways to wake up, including by emanating a sunny glow and playing soft sounds. You can customize smart alarm clocks to help with falling asleep, too, with some models offering meditations. They can usually stream music, podcasts, and audiobooks. Phone apps make setting them up a breeze.

Q: Will a smart alarm clock work if the internet goes out?

It depends on the brand of smart alarm clock. Some have battery backups designed to ensure your alarm goes off even when the internet or power goes out, but others don’t. Before you buy, check the manufacturer’s specifications to be sure.

Final thoughts on the best smart alarm clocks

The best smart alarm clocks are easy to set up and offer many ways of waking up, whether you prefer those with lights, soothing natural sounds, or multi-step alarm options. If you’d like to ditch your regular alarm clock or phone alarm for a smart alarm clock, consider this a gentle nudge to make the switch.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best smart alarm clocks of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Elon Musk says ‘we dug our own grave with Cybertruck’ ahead of its November release https://www.popsci.com/technology/tesla-cybertruck-release-date/ Thu, 19 Oct 2023 19:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581189
Tesla Cybertruck concept art in warehouse
The Cybertruck is set to finally arrive after a nearly two-year delay. Tesla

Tesla CEO announced the release date during an earnings call this week.

The post Elon Musk says ‘we dug our own grave with Cybertruck’ ahead of its November release appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Tesla Cybertruck concept art in warehouse
The Cybertruck is set to finally arrive after a nearly two-year delay. Tesla

First officially unveiled back in 2019, Tesla’s electric Cybertruck impressed and amused the public with its angular, “Blade Runner-inspired” design and purported features including reinforced glass, stainless steel body, and a lack of door handles. Although originally slated to arrive in reservation holders’ driveways in 2021, the EV release faced numerous delays exacerbated by COVID-19 pandemic supply chain issues. This week, however, Elon Musk said Tesla’s long-delayed Cybertruck will finally roll off the company’s Giga Texas lot on November 30, when Tesla is now scheduled to begin delivery. However, the company’s CEO cautioned investors against early celebrations.

During the company’s Q3 earnings call on October 18, Musk stressed that both customers and shareholders should “temper expectations,” particularly for the Cybertruck’s initial profitability. Tesla faced various challenges with scaling and ramping up production. Musk went as far as to say, “we dug our own grave with Cybertruck” during the vehicle’s multi-year hype campaign.

[Related: Tesla’s Cybertruck is the latest lofty promise in the world of electric pickups.]

“Cybertruck is one of those special products that comes along only once in a long while. And special products that come along once in a long while are just incredibly difficult to bring to market to reach volume, to be prosperous,” Musk opined, as reported by The Verge on Wednesday.

The Cybertruck base model was initially estimated at $39,900 in 2019, but Tesla is expected to announce updated pricings during its November 30 release event. No price ranges are currently available on Tesla’s website, but customers can still put down a refundable $100 deposit for a Cybertruck with the promise to “complete your configuration as production nears.”

In the meantime, multiple companies have released their own electric truck options, including the Ford F-150 Lightning and Rivian’s R1T. During this week’s Tesla earnings call, the company stated that it had the capacity to produce more than 125,000 Cybertrucks annually. Musk said he saw a potential for Tesla to produce 250,000 Cybertrucks in 2025. Musk said that more than one million people have reserved the Cybertruck so far.

[Related: Here is what a Tesla Cybertruck cop car could look like.]

The product may not be ready, but the concept keeps iterating itself. In September, Oracle co-founder Larry Ellison teased concept art for a Cybertruck cop car including EV’s recognizable design beneath red and blue emergency lights, a bull bar, and multiple Oracle logos. “Our next generation police car is coming out very soon,” Ellison, a “close friend” of Musk, said during his presentation at the data service giant’s CloudWork conference to audible murmurs in the crowd. “It’s my favorite police car. It’s my favorite car, actually. It’s Elon’s favorite car.”

Musk’s desire to release an electric pickup truck dates as far back as 2012, when he tweeted he “would love make a Tesla supertruck with crazy torque, dynamic air suspension and corners [sic] like its on rails.”

“That’d be sweet…,” he added at the time.

The post Elon Musk says ‘we dug our own grave with Cybertruck’ ahead of its November release appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Oldest radio burst ever found could tell us what exists between galaxies https://www.popsci.com/science/oldest-fast-radio-burst-8-billion-years/ Thu, 19 Oct 2023 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581152
A radio telescope in Australia beneath the Milky Way.
The Australian Square Kilometre Array Pathfinder sensed the remarkable FRB. CSIRO

These signals emit as much energy in milliseconds as the sun does in three days.

The post Oldest radio burst ever found could tell us what exists between galaxies appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A radio telescope in Australia beneath the Milky Way.
The Australian Square Kilometre Array Pathfinder sensed the remarkable FRB. CSIRO

Of all the pyrotechnics that blast through the cosmos, fast radio bursts (FRBs) are among the most powerful—and mysterious. While our radio telescopes have picked up hundreds of known FRBs, radio astronomers recently detected one of the most fascinating bursts yet. Not only does it come from a greater distance than any FRB observed before, it’s the most energetic, too.

A superlative FRB like this defies our already murky understanding of the bursts’ origins. FRBs are sudden surges of radio waves that typically last less than a second, if not mere milliseconds. And they are very, very high-energy: They can deliver as much energy in milliseconds as the sun emits in three days. Despite all that, we don’t know for certain how they form.

The new event, what astronomers lovingly call FRB 20220610A, first appeared as a blip in the Australian Square Kilometre Array Pathfinder, an arrangement of antennae in the desert about 360 miles north of Perth. When astronomers measured the burst’s redshift, they calculated that it left its source about 8 billion years ago, as they described in a paper published today in Science

After pinpointing the burst’s origin in the sky and following up with visible light and infrared telescopes, the authors managed to develop a blurry image of merging galaxies.

[Related: Two bizarre stars might have beamed a unique radio signal to Earth]

“The further you go out in the universe, of course, the fainter the galaxies are, because they’re farther away. It’s quite difficult to identify the host galaxy, and that’s what they’ve done,” Sarah Burke Spolaor, an astronomer who studies FRBs at West Virginia University, who was not an author of the study.

FRBs aren’t exciting just because they’re loud. To reach us, a burst from outside the Milky Way must traverse millions or billions of light-years of the near-empty space between galaxies. In the process, they’ll encounter an extremely sparse smattering of ionized particles. This is the stuff that prevents the bulk of the cosmos from being completely empty—what astronomers call the intergalactic medium, which might make up as much as half of the universe’s “normal” matter.

“We don’t know much about it, because it’s so tenuous that it’s difficult to detect,” says Daniele Michilli, an astronomer at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, who also wasn’t a study author.

As an FRB crosses the intergalactic medium on its long voyage, the particles cause its radio waves to scatter, which leaves fingerprints that astronomers can pick apart. In this way, scientists can use FRBs to investigate the intergalactic medium. More faraway bursts like FRB 20220610A could allow astronomers to study the medium across wide swathes of the universe.

[Related: How astronomers traced a puzzling detection to a lunchtime mistake]

“It’s very exciting, definitely one of the great applications of fast radio bursts,” says Ziggy Pleunis, an astronomer who studies FRBs at the University of Toronto, who was also not part of the authors’ group. “Fast radio bursts currently are really the only thing that we know that interacts with the intergalactic medium in a meaningful enough way that we can measure properties.”

An illustrated yellow beam representing a fast radio burst connects merging galaxies to our Milky Way.
A yellow beam representing the FRB traveling between galaxies, in a concept illustration. ESO/M. Kornmesser

In the future, astronomers might even be able to use FRBs to study how the universe expands. To unweave that mystery, however, astronomers will need to detect FRBs from even deeper into the cosmic past than FRB 20220610A. “For a lot of applications, it’s still not quite far away enough,” Pleunis says. “But it certainly bodes well.” 

There’s a balancing act involved: Over a sufficiently long distance, the particles in the intergalactic medium will peel an FRB apart until it disperses into background noise. To survive, an FRB must be brighter and more energetic; in turn, by taking stock of how much a burst has dispersed, astronomers can estimate its original energy. 

By computing the numbers for FRB 20220610A, they found that it was the most energetic burst Earth has seen so far. (Another recently observed burst, FRB 20201124A, comes within the same order of magnitude, but FRB 20220610A is the record-holder.) A burst with this much energy throws something of a wrench into astronomers’ understanding, such as it is, of what creates FRBs in the first place.

We, again, don’t have a definitive answer to that question. Complicating the question, some FRBs are one-off flashes, while others repeat, hinting that the two types of FRBs may have two different origins. (To wit, FRB 20220610A seems to have been a one-off. But that other high-energy FRB, FRB 20201124A, seems to repeat.)

Nevertheless, astronomers have simulated a few scenarios, largely involving neutron stars. Perhaps FRBs burst from near a neutron star’s surface, or perhaps FRBs erupt from shockwaves through the material that neutron stars throw up.

But when this paper’s authors ran the numbers with their new FRB, they found that neither of those two scenarios could easily create an burst with this much energy—suggesting that theoretical astronomers have even more work to do before they can satisfactorily explain these events.

“What always strikes me about fast radio bursts is, every time we observe a new one, it breaks the mold of previous ones,” Spolaor says.

The post Oldest radio burst ever found could tell us what exists between galaxies appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Why a 3,000-mile-long jet stream on Jupiter surprised NASA scientists https://www.popsci.com/science/jwst-jupiter-jet-stream/ Thu, 19 Oct 2023 17:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581172
An image of Jupiter taken with the James Webb Space Telescope’s NIR Cam in July 2022. Researchers recently discovered a narrow jet stream traveling 320 miles per hour sitting over Jupiter’s equator above the main cloud decks. The numerous bright white "spots" and "streaks" are likely very high-altitude cloud tops of condensed convective storms. Auroras, appearing in red in this image, extend to higher altitudes above both the northern and southern poles of the planet.
In July 2022, James Webb Space Telescope’s NIR Cam captured this image of Jupiter in infrared light. Researchers recently discovered a narrow jet stream traveling 320 miles per hour sitting over Jupiter’s equator above the main cloud decks. The numerous bright white "spots" and "streaks" are likely very high-altitude cloud tops of condensed convective storms. Auroras, appearing in red in this image, extend to higher altitudes above both the northern and southern poles of the planet. NASA, ESA, CSA, STScI, Ricardo Hueso (UPV), Imke de Pater (UC Berkeley), Thierry Fouchet (Observatory of Paris), Leigh Fletcher (University of Leicester), Michael H. Wong (UC Berkeley), Joseph DePasquale (STScI)

JWST captured a never-before-seen jet stream with winds twice as strong as a Category 5 hurricane.

The post Why a 3,000-mile-long jet stream on Jupiter surprised NASA scientists appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
An image of Jupiter taken with the James Webb Space Telescope’s NIR Cam in July 2022. Researchers recently discovered a narrow jet stream traveling 320 miles per hour sitting over Jupiter’s equator above the main cloud decks. The numerous bright white "spots" and "streaks" are likely very high-altitude cloud tops of condensed convective storms. Auroras, appearing in red in this image, extend to higher altitudes above both the northern and southern poles of the planet.
In July 2022, James Webb Space Telescope’s NIR Cam captured this image of Jupiter in infrared light. Researchers recently discovered a narrow jet stream traveling 320 miles per hour sitting over Jupiter’s equator above the main cloud decks. The numerous bright white "spots" and "streaks" are likely very high-altitude cloud tops of condensed convective storms. Auroras, appearing in red in this image, extend to higher altitudes above both the northern and southern poles of the planet. NASA, ESA, CSA, STScI, Ricardo Hueso (UPV), Imke de Pater (UC Berkeley), Thierry Fouchet (Observatory of Paris), Leigh Fletcher (University of Leicester), Michael H. Wong (UC Berkeley), Joseph DePasquale (STScI)

Jupiter and its dynamic atmosphere are ready for another closeup in a new image taken with the James Webb Space Telescope (JWST). Using the telescope’s data, scientists have discovered a new and never-before-captured high-speed jet stream. The jet stream sits over Jupiter’s equator above the main cloud decks, barrels at speeds twice as high as a Category 5 hurricane, and spans more than 3,000 miles. The findings were described in a study published October 19 in the journal Nature Astronomy.

[Related: This hot Jupiter exoplanet unexpectedly hangs out with a super-Earth.]

Jupiter is the largest planet in our solar system and its atmosphere has some very visible features, including the infamous Great Red Spot, which is large enough to swallow the Earth. The planet is ever-changing and there are still mysteries in this gas giant that scientists are trying to unravel. According to NASA, the new discovery of the jet stream is helping them decipher how the layers of Jupiter’s famously turbulent atmosphere interact with each other. Now, JWST is helping scientists look further into the planet and see some of the lower and deeper layers of Jupiter’s atmosphere where gigantic storms and ammonia ice clouds reside. 

“This is something that totally surprised us,” study co-author Ricardo Hueso said in a statement.  “What we have always seen as blurred hazes in Jupiter’s atmosphere now appear as crisp features that we can track along with the planet’s fast rotation.” Hueso is an astrophysicist at the University of the Basque Country in Bilbao, Spain.

The research team analyzed data from JWST’s Near-Infrared Camera (NIRCam) that was obtained in July 2022. The Early Release Science program was designed to take images of Jupiter 10 hours apart (one Jupiter day) in four different filters. Each filter detected different types of changes in the small features located at various altitudes of Jupiter’s atmosphere.

Space Telescope photo
At a wavelength of 2.12 microns, which observes between altitudes of about 12-21 miles above Jupiter’s cloud tops, researchers spotted several wind shears, or areas where wind speeds change with height or with distance, which enabled them to track the jet. This image highlights several of the features around Jupiter’s equatorial zone that, between one rotation of the planet (10 hours), are very clearly disturbed by the motion of the jet stream. CREDIT: NASA, ESA, CSA, STScI, Ricardo Hueso (UPV), Imke de Pater (UC Berkeley), Thierry Fouchet (Observatory of Paris), Leigh Fletcher (University of Leicester), Michael H. Wong (UC Berkeley), Joseph DePasquale (STScI)

The resulting image shows Jupiter’s atmosphere in infrared light. The jet stream is located over the equator, or center, of the planet. There are multiple bright white spots and streaks that are likely very high-altitude cloud tops of condensed convective storms. Jupiter’s northern and southern poles are dotted by auroras that appear red and extend to the higher altitudes of the planet. 

“Even though various ground-based telescopes, spacecraft like NASA’s Juno and Cassini, and NASA’s Hubble Space Telescope have observed the Jovian system’s changing weather patterns, Webb has already provided new findings on Jupiter’s rings, satellites, and its atmosphere,” study co-author and University of California, Berkeley astronomer Imke de Pater said in a statement.  

The newly discovered jet stream travels at roughly 320 miles per hour and is located close to 25 miles above the clouds, in Jupiter’s lower stratosphere. The team compared the winds observed by JWST at higher altitudes with the winds observed at deeper layers by the Hubble Space Telescope. This enabled them to measure how fast the winds change with altitude and generate wind shears.

[Related: Jupiter formed dinky little rings, and there’s a convincing explanation why.]

The team hopes to use additional observations of Jupiter to determine if the jet’s speed and altitude change over time. 

“Jupiter has a complicated but repeatable pattern of winds and temperatures in its equatorial stratosphere, high above the winds in the clouds and hazes measured at these wavelengths,” Leigh Fletcher, a study co-author and planetary scientists at the University of Leicester in the United Kingdom, said in a statement. “If the strength of this new jet is connected to this oscillating stratospheric pattern, we might expect the jet to vary considerably over the next 2 to 4 years–it’ll be really exciting to test this theory in the years to come.”

The post Why a 3,000-mile-long jet stream on Jupiter surprised NASA scientists appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Kick your kitchen up a notch before Black Friday with these Ninja appliance deals https://www.popsci.com/gear/ninja-combi-multicooker-amazon-pre-black-friday-deal-2023/ Thu, 19 Oct 2023 16:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580988
Ninja appliances
Ninja

Make big improvements to your kitchen with a small amount of money.

The post Kick your kitchen up a notch before Black Friday with these Ninja appliance deals appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Ninja appliances
Ninja

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The holiday season means a lot of cooking and baking for a crowd, which is significantly more difficult if you wait until Black Friday to outfit your kitchen. Save yourself the hassle—and give yourself more time to get acquainted with your new gear—by saving on a bunch of Ninja appliances on Amazon right now. You’ll beat the holiday rush and save a bunch of money at the same time.

Ninja SFP701 Combi All-in-One Multicooker $179.99 (Was $229.99)

Ninja

SEE IT

Counterspace is premium kitchen real estate, so we’re advocates for getting appliances with multiple functions. Ninja’s multi-cooker has 14 settings, including bake, air fry, proof, sous vide, toast, steam, seat, sautee, and broil. All of these functions can be accessed from the control panel, which allows you to cycle between functions and change the multi-cooker’s temperature with the push of a button. We like that the smart oven’s buttons are large, which makes them easy to hit, and that the lights next to each current function illuminate when they’re selected.

A big part of this appliance’s appeal is Ninja’s “combi cooking” system. The smart oven comes with a deep cooking pan on the bottom, with a crisper plate and bake tray that can fit on top. This allows you to cook two parts of a single meal simultaneously. In the photo above, you’ll see baked ziti and chicken breasts, which are both being cooked by selecting the “combi meals” function. This cooking system will make a big difference if you’re frequently ordering out due to lack of time. On a big meal day like Thanksgiving, think about the appeal of having multiple sides—or even a few turkey breasts and stuffing—being ready together.

Other appliance deals that’ll make you feel like a cooking ninja:

The post Kick your kitchen up a notch before Black Friday with these Ninja appliance deals appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best video cameras for 2023 as chosen by experts https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-video-cameras/ Wed, 08 Mar 2023 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=516942
The best video cameras
Stan Horaczek

The best video cameras for filmmakers, vloggers, and content creators.

The post The best video cameras for 2023 as chosen by experts appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best video cameras
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Sony FX30 camera on a plain background with no lens. Sony FX30
SEE IT

This compact and relatively affordable camera is ready for serious filmmaking.

Best compact DJI Pocket 2 camera on a plain background DJI Pocket 2
SEE IT

Despite its small size, this camera shoots super-smooth 4K video.

Best for vlogging Cameras photo Sony ZV-1
SEE IT

This compact camera offers just about everything you need to get started.

Having a quality video camera will upgrade the production value of whatever you may be shooting. Whether working on a short film, a YouTube channel, or video content for social media, having more than your phone to capture your footage will ultimately make your final product look more professional. Although most modern cameras can shoot 4K video, when selecting a video camera, you should also consider specs like resolution, frame rate capabilities, sensor size, and bit-depth. The video cameras in this buying guide should appeal to a diverse group of videographers and fit various budgets. Of course, you can spend Michael Bay money and get true cinema rigs, but those fall outside the scope of this article because of their cost and complexity. Keep reading to learn more about the best video cameras currently available.

How we chose the best video cameras

When selecting the cameras that appear in this buying guide, we considered video cameras that fit a variety of budgets, experience levels, but also a variety of needs based on the kinds of videos that might get created. We evaluated cameras that would be a good fit for filming documentary films, capturing events, and for YouTube creators. The cameras in this buying guide were selected through hands-on experience, user feedback, and trusted editorial reviews.

The best video cameras: Reviews & Recommendations

Your phone has a video camera baked into it, but these dedicated cameras all offer something the device in your pocket can’t. Here are our specific picks to meet your cinematic (or social media) needs.

Best overall: Sony FX30

Sony

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This 4K APS-C sensor camera is optimized for video and offers a wide variety of capture formats, making it our pick for best overall video camera.  

Specs

  • APS-C sensor 
  • 10-bit 4:2:2 S-Log3 capture
  • Shoots oversampled 4K up to 60p

Pros 

  • In-body image stabilization 
  • S-Log3 capabilities with uploadable custom LUTs and S-Cinetone color profiles
  • Rig-ready body 

Cons 

  • No mechanical shutter 

The compact Sony FX30 was built with small-scale filmmakers in mind. The 4K APS-C camera features excellent in-body image stabilization, five thread holes for attaching mounts, and three command dials for straightforward operation. The FX30 can shoot oversampled 4K up to 60p, features the same Log shooting modes found inside Sony’s high-end cinema cameras, and can upload customized LUTs (Look Up Tables, which work like visual styles you can apply to footage) to judge what final image quality will look like. Although it can technically shoot stills, the lack of a mechanical shutter doesn’t make it the ideal camera for the job because moving subjects can look distorted due to sensor readout. However, since it’s a camera designed with filmmakers in mind, we wouldn’t count that as a drawback. 

Best for filmmaking: Blackmagic Design Pocket Cinema Camera 6K Pro

Blackmagic

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Blackmagic Design Pocket Cinema Camera combines a high dynamic range, excellent low light performance, and a massive sensor to offer Hollywood-style production value at a fraction of the price. 

Specs

  • Super 35 sensor
  • 13 stops of dynamic range
  • Records in 12-Bit Blackmagic RAW 

Pros 

  • Built in ND filters
  • External controls make it easy to adjust settings while rolling
  • USB-C port allows you to record to external drives
  • EF lens mount makes it compatible with Canon lenses

Cons

  • Have to build out with accessories 

The Black Magic Pocket Cinema Camera makes it easy to capture Hollywood-style video thanks to its high dynamic range capabilities and ability to record in 12-bit  Black Magic Raw. Although it’s pricey compared to many of the 4K and 6K mirrorless cameras currently on the market, it’s a much more affordable option than the ARRI and Red rigs typically found on big-budget film sets. You can shoot 50 fps at 6K and 120 fps at 2.8K. USB-C expansion ports allow you to record directly to external drives. The external controls make it easy to change settings while rolling, plus it has an extremely intuitive interface for easy operation. 

The integrated Canon EF mount gives the camera native access to Canon’s DSLR lenses. Since Canon is phasing out cameras with that mount, there are a ton of great deals out there on the secondary market for extremely high-end lenses.

Best for photo and video: Canon EOS R6 Mark II

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This second-generation Canon EOS R6 is an excellent choice for shooting stills and video, thanks in part to a design that keeps video and still settings clearly separated from one another. 

Specs

  • Full-frame 24-megapixel CMOS sensor 
  • Shoots oversampled 4K up to 60p
  • 10-bit C-Log3 

Pros 

  • Supports ProRes RAW workflow with an Atomos recorder
  • Dedicated switch for stills and video settings
  • Offers false color displays

 Cons 

  • Unreliable AF in video mode
  • Histogram unavailable when recording video 

The Canon EOS R6 II made some substantial improvements to video features compared to the original, which is why it’s our pick for best hybrid camera. It’s built around a 24-megapixel full-frame CMOS sensor, a comfortable hand grip, and an intuitive control system that keeps video and photo settings separate. It can shoot oversampled 4K video up to 60p and has an improved system for thermal management—meaning it won’t overheat while shooting. Although the autofocus isn’t always reliable when shooting in video mode, this is still an excellent option for the creator looking for something that can shoot both video and stills.

Best for vlogging: Sony ZV-1

Why it made the cut: A compact camera designed specifically with vloggers in mind, the SV-1 has excellent autofocus and a simple touchscreen interface that makes it easy to control while doing a walk and talk. 

Specs

  • 20-megapixel 1” BSI CMOS sensor
  • Shoots 4K up to 30p
  • 8-bit Log and ‘HLG’ shooting modes

Pros 

  • Has a directional 3-capsule mic for audio 
  • Supports HLG and S-Log2/3 for easy color grading
  • Real-time Eye AF 

Cons 

  • No headphone jack for audio monitoring
  • Limited zoom range

The ZV-1 is a compact, easy-to-use camera that makes it easy to start vlogging without much technical know-how. It has a clever directional three-capsule mic that makes it easy to capture quality audio while recording. It can shoot 4K up to 30p and Full HD video up to 120fps. There is a giant record button on the top of the camera and a simple touchscreen interface that makes operating the ZV-1 extremely intuitive. 

Its autofocus is fast and accurate, and settings like background de-focus and product-showcase mode are aimed specifically at content creators. If you are looking for an easy-to-use, compact camera with 4K capabilities, the ZV-1 has much to offer. 

Best compact: DJI Pocket 2

DJI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This pocket-sized all-in-one gimbal and 4K camera is great for capturing stabilized footage. 

Specs

  • 1/1.7-inch CMOS sensor 
  • Shoots 4K video at 60fps
  • Built-in 3-axis gimbal for smooth, stabilized footage

Pros 

  • Pocket-sized and easy to travel with
  • Offers 140 minutes of recording time on a fully charged battery
  • Fast f/1.8 lens 

Cons 

  • Difficult to operate when attached to smartphone
  • Subpar zoom quality 

This clever all-in-one gimbal and camera makes it easy to capture 4K stabilized footage. As the name suggests, the DJI Pocket 2 is compact enough to fit inside a pocket easily. The Pocket 2 features four mics with directional audio and a feature called soundtracking. The Pocket 2 is great as a secondary camera on a shoot or for capturing BTS footage from the day. Ultimately the Pocket offers an extremely easy way to grab some stabilized footage while shooting video.

Things to consider before buying a video camera 

Before purchasing a camera, it’s important to consider what your goals are and what kind of videos you are trying to create. You should also consider where your final video will be displayed. Streaming services like Netflix and Hulu have specific requirements for video specs that often require shooting on higher-end cameras. If you want to create video content primarily displayed on YouTube or other social media platforms, a mid-range video camera might be a more appropriate choice. Ultimately a person working on a full-length film or a short documentary will have very different needs than someone creating video for a YouTube channel. 

Camera types

One of the most important things to understand before buying a video camera is the different types of cameras available on the market. At the high-end, there are cine-cameras. Cine-cameras are some of the most expensive and largest cameras on the market because they often have the largest sensor, can shoot at very high resolutions, and allow for more flexibility when color grading. 

There are currently several mirrorless cameras aimed at videographers who don’t necessarily need a high-end cine camera. These cameras are great for creating videos that will primarily live on YouTube, making them a nice choice for vloggers, event videographers, and content creators. The nice thing about this set of cameras is that they also can shoot high-quality stills. 

Resolution

You’ll likely want to export 4K footage when you’re done editing, and you’ll need at least 4K capture for that. That’s table stakes at this point. Some cameras offer higher-res shooting which allows creatives to shoot over-sampled 4K footage to provide more detail.

Lens mount

If the camera doesn’t have an integrated lens, you’re going to have to provide some glass, and that plays a huge part in how your productions look. Camera manufacturers (like Sony and Canon) typically offer their first-party lenses to go with their bodies. Other manufacturers like Blackmagic equip their cameras with mounts that can accept lenses from a third party. Many filmmakers also use vintage manual focus lenses on their video cameras because they provide a unique look, and they typically cost a lot less than their modern high-end counterparts.

Heat management

True cinema cameras offer robust cooling because the electronics inside can get very hot as they pull in high-res footage. Dedicated video cameras are better equipped to deal with these issues than most hybrid-oriented mirrorless cameras. Manufacturers often indicate in the specs how long you can expect a camera to go before it runs into heat issues. It’s also worth noting that some modes heat things much more quickly than others. If you’re maxing out resolution and framerate while capturing a data-hungry format, things will get toasty a lot faster than if you’re shooting basic 4K footage.

FAQs

Q: What cameras do YouTubers use for videos?

YouTubers use a variety of cameras to create their videos, but most opt for compact mirrorless cameras when shooting. If there is a particular YouTuber whose style you want to emulate, take a look at the description of their videos, it’s not unusual for YouTubers to explicitly say what gear they are using and include affiliate links to purchase it.

Q: Do I need a 4K video camera for filmmaking?

Having a camera that can shoot 4K is a great tool for filmmaking because it gives you more flexibility with your footage. If your end goal is to have your film streaming on a platform like Netflix, it’s best to shoot in the highest resolution possible. For example, Netflix currently requires content streamed on the platform to be shot on a camera with a true UHD 4K sensor with a minimum of 3840 photosites across.

Q: What cameras do professionals use?

Professional filmmakers working on big-budget projects will typically be shooting on a high-end cine camera. A professional YouTuber is more likely to be shooting video on an advanced mirrorless camera. Professionals who are filming events might use a mixture of the two. Ultimately, the camera that a professional is using on the job depends a lot on the delivery requirements of said job.

Final thoughts on the best video cameras

Choosing the best video camera ultimately depends greatly on what you are shooting and where the final video will end up. It’s not unusual for videographers to shoot on various gear, depending on what a project calls for. When selecting the best video camera, you should always consider what type of gear is the best for getting the job done. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio, to video games, to cameras, and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best video cameras for 2023 as chosen by experts appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best Ethernet cables for gaming in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-ethernet-cables-for-gaming/ Mon, 01 Nov 2021 19:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=405629
Best Ethernet Cables for Gaming
Mike Epstein

Never lose a match on account of crummy cable with the best Ethernet cables for gaming.

The post The best Ethernet cables for gaming in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best Ethernet Cables for Gaming
Mike Epstein

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Cat8 DaCrown CAT8 is the best ethernet cable for gaming. Dacrown Cat8
SEE IT

Dacrown makes the best-reviewed consumer-grade Cat8 Ethernet cable that we could find.

Best braided DanYee CAT7 is the best ethernet cable for gaming. Danyee Cat7 Braided
SEE IT

Among the best Cat7 Ethernet cables, Danyee’s braided design stands out as the most stylish.

Best Cat6 Amazon Basics CAT6 is the best ethernet cable for gaming. Amazon Basics Cat6
SEE IT

Amazon Basics’ cable is the cheapest, most dependable Cat6 available in a wide variety of lengths.

Ethernet cables may not be the flashiest part of your rig, but they are an absolutely essential piece of gaming hardware. Wi-Fi is getting better all the time, and many people have effectively gone completely wireless, but even then you still need an Ethernet cable to connect the modem and router. Moreover, gamers know that having a wired connection to your PC or console is still unbeatable, whether you’re playing competitive matches, trying to maintain a steady Twitch stream, or just hoping to download the latest Modern Warfare update in time for you to actually play it before going to bed.

Though they aren’t complicated, Ethernet cables can be confusing. With new and improved standards coming out every few years, it isn’t always clear what’s changing and when you might need to upgrade your cables. We’re here to demystify terms like “Cat6” and “Unshielded Twisted Pairs” so you can find the best Ethernet cable for gaming to suit your particular needs.

How we picked the best Ethernet cables for gaming

Ethernet cables are fairly straightforward as far as consumer tech goes, so there aren’t a ton of different specs, variants, or subcategories to consider—cables do one thing. We’re looking for the ones that do it well. We combed through round-ups and reviews to see what other professionals recommended, but this isn’t a hardware category that lends itself particularly well to traditional criticism. Instead, we relied much more on collating consumer reviews to find the products that are most consistent and long-lasting.

All of this was, of course, filtered through extensive research into the history and current state of Ethernet technology, as well as decades of personal experience in home networking and online gaming—this very copy was submitted over our best flat cable. 

The best Ethernet cables for gaming: Reviews & Recommendations

Unless you’re really trying to scrimp and save, almost any Ethernet cable you’ll buy for gaming is going to be capable of handling way more bandwidth than your ISP provides. After deciding how much extra capacity you’d like to pad in, picking comes down to your particular needs—flat cables are easier to run under carpets or through door frames; extra weatherproofing lets you run cable outside and underground; braiding and colors can meet your aesthetic needs. Sometimes it even comes down to what lengths of cable the manufacturers sell. Each of these brands and specific recommendations was selected because they offer high performance and strong approval from their users.

Best Cat8: Dacrown Cat8

Why it made the cut: Dacrown makes the best-reviewed consumer-grade Cat8 Ethernet cable that we could find.

Specs:

  • Standard: Cat8
  • Frequency: 2000 MHz
  • Speed: 40 Gbps
  • Length: 5-150 ft
  • Shielding: S/FTP

Pros:

  • Extremely fast throughput
  • Durable PVC weather-proofing
    Wide range of available lengths

Cons:

  • Expensive

If you’re searching for the best Ethernet cable for gaming, then you’re going to naturally be drawn to Cat8 as the highest standard available right now. Many brands make Cat8 cables but we found that Dacrown’s edged out the competition in both consumers’ and critics’ reviews for delivering steady, high-speed internet at a relatively reasonable price. There is some debate among users about whether most consumer-grade Cat8 cable is “true” Cat8, capable of supporting the format’s full potential, but people who use Dacrown cables tend to be happy with their performance. For gaming, Dacrown’s Cat8 Ethernet cable will ensure a fast and solid connection for the foreseeable future.

Best braided: Danyee Cat7 Braided

Why it made the cut: Among the best Cat7 Ethernet cables, Danyee’s braided design stands out as the most stylish.

Specs:

  • Standard: Cat7
  • Frequency: 600 MHz
  • Speed: 10 Gbps
  • Length: 1.6-100 ft
  • Shielding: STP

Pros:

  • Excellent data speed
  • Multiple options for stylish nylon braiding
  • Flat

Cons:

  • Stiff
  • Nylon could fray

Virtually all Ethernet cables are coated in plain, monochromatic plastic. That’s fine if you’re able to discreetly run them out of sight, but otherwise magnifies the eyesore caused by poorly managed cabling. While several brands offer colored plastic, Danyee goes above and beyond with its series of premium nylon-braided Cat7 cables in four different patterns and colors. The cable is flat, which is helpful if you need to run it under carpet or through a door, and the nylon weave coating adds friction to reduce sliding around making this cable the best braided Ethernet cable for gaming. There’s one small downside: Since the cable features both nylon and PVC coating, the cable is stiffer and harder to manipulate. There are also rare reports of the nylon fraying with excessive handling.

Best flat: Jadaol Cat7

Why it made the cut: Jadaol’s sturdy, flat, and flexible cables are perfect for long and unobtrusive runs.

Specs:

  • Standard: Cat7
  • Frequency: 600 MHz
  • Speed: 10 Gbps
  • Length: 25-100ft
  • Shielding: STP

Pros:

  • Excellent data speed
  • Flat
  • Included clips

Cons:

  • Lack of length options

Standard Ethernet cables are round, but flat cables can be essential if you need to run them through tight spaces like under carpets or through walls. Jadaol makes the best flat Ethernet cable for gaming at various standards that are both durable and highly flexible, making it as easy as possible to run them around corners and through tight spaces without putting any strain on the wires within. The included nail-in clips aid this even further, making it quick and easy to neatly tuck the cable against the baseboard, around a door frame, etc. With only 25-, 50-, and 100-foot options available, it may be hard to get the exact length you need, especially for short runs. If you’re looking for a discrete, high-speed option to slip under rugs and behind furniture, though, these are the cables you need.

Best outdoor: Shinekee Outdoor Cat7

Why it made the cut: Shinekee’s heavy-duty outdoor cable delivers the full potential of Cat7 Ethernet in a form factor that’s tough enough to brave the elements.

Specs:

  • Standard: Cat7
  • Frequency: 600 MHz
  • Speed: 10 Gbps
  • Length: 25-200ft
  • Shielding: STP

Pros:

  • Excellent data speed
  • Heavy-duty PVC coating
  • Rated for outdoor and underground use

Cons:

  • Expensive

When you need to run your Ethernet outdoors, it’s absolutely worth spending a little more to get an outdoor cable that’s made to endure the elements. Shinekee’s outdoor cable has the same high-quality internals as the other cables on our list (shielded, twisted pairs of copper cable and gold connectors), but with an extra durable PVC coating that’s water- and UV-proof, and is rated for being buried underground. With a 200-foot option, it’s also the longest cable in our list by a wide margin and should maintain its full Cat7 speed at that length.

Best Cat6: Amazon Basics Cat6

Why it made the cut: Amazon Basics’ cable is the cheapest, most dependable Cat6 available in a wide variety of lengths.

Specs:

  • Standard: Cat6
  • Frequency: 250 MHz
  • Speed: 1 Gbps
  • Length: 3-50ft
  • Shielding: UTP

Pros:

  • Dependable gigabit performance
  • Good variety of size options
  • Great value

Cons:

  • Only Cat6
  • Maximum 50ft

Ethernet cables are right in the sweet spot for Amazon Basics. As a widely used commodity without much brand loyalty, it’s easy for Amazon to leverage its massive scale with inexpensive gear. If you just want dependable gigabit internet and want to pay as little as possible, Amazon Basics’ Cat6 Ethernet cable for gaming is hard to beat. It doesn’t go any longer than 50 feet, so you won’t use it for big projects, but there are more options at the short-run cables than any other brand on our list.

Things to consider before buying the best Ethernet cables for gaming

It’s very easy to get frustrated trying to look at the differences between Ethernet cables. The standard for telling cables apart is unique and confusing, making labels and product listing hard to understand. Here’s a little primer on how to separate the good Ethernet cables from the bad, whether or not you’re using them for gaming.

Pick your cable to match your internet service

Remember: The Ethernet cable is just a pipe (or a tube) for your internet connection. The maximum internet speed set by your data plan, measured in megabytes (or increasingly gigabytes) per second, sets the upper limit of what your connection is capable of. If your ISP limits you to 50 Mbps, then more advanced cables that can accommodate 10+ Gbps will be overkill. Going the other way, if you pay for a high-speed plan, then you’ll want to ensure you aren’t throttling it by using a sub-par cable.

Plan the work, work the plan

The length of Ethernet cables has a tangible impact on the quality of your service. The greater the length of the cable between a source and a receiver, the more the signal will degrade, effectively slowing down your internet. Ideally, you want to place your modem as close as possible to your router and other devices that you plan to connect via wired internet to minimize the distance of cable you need to connect them. 

To make your setup as efficient (and hidden) as possible, you should plan out your setup and figure out how to route your cables before setting up a device with an Ethernet connection. Once you know where things will be, measure the distance that the cable will need to run and then purchase a cable as close to that length as possible (while still of course giving yourself a little slack to work with). Ethernet cables are fairly cheap and the difference in price between the most and least expensive is especially small for short lengths of cable. It’s easy to justify a tiny splurge on a thoroughly future-proofed cable if you aren’t trying to wire up a whole house.

Herding “Cats”

The primary way that Ethernet cables are labeled is by “Cat,” short for category. The numbered categories—Cat1 through the most recent Cat8—refer to different generations of standards created by the Institute of Electric and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), a technology consortium that sets independent standards for many aspects of tech. IEEE standards ensure that each category is a notable jump in data transfer speed and efficiency while maintaining certain qualitative standards, including backward compatibility with older cables.

Since this list is for the best Ethernet cables for gaming, which requires fast and consistent internet, we recommend that you look for Cat7 or Cat8 cable, with Cat6 as a budget-conscious backup. All three tiers accommodate gigabit-plus internet, giving you full access to a high-speed connection. Cat5 is still in fairly common use, but the difference in price is so minuscule that you might as well at least go for six.

Cat6 supports a frequency of 250MHz, which translates to 1 Gbps over up to 100 meters of cable and 10 Gbps over up to 55 meters of cable. If you want to shoot for the moon, Cat7 runs at 600MHz, which translates to 10 Gbps over up to 100 meters of cable. It’s also more durable and features less signal distortion than lower categories. Cat8, the current top standard, jumps up to 2GHz, so it can support wild speeds of 25 or even 40 Gbps up over up to 30 meters of cable, or comfortably support 10 Gbps over 100 meters of cable. 

You may be thinking to yourself, “40 Gbps seems like incredible overkill for my 1 Gbps home network,” and you’d be right! Cat8 (like Cat6 when it was first introduced in the early 2000s) is primarily meant for enterprise applications for technology industry applications like data centers. 

That said, newer Cats are also held to higher construction standards that minimize noise and increase lifespan. If you’re buying large amounts of Ethernet cable to run through the walls of your home, you may consider spending the money to buy better cable that will last longer. While it’s primarily meant for businesses, Cat8 is available to the average consumer, and often marketed as the cutting edge of home networking.

Shielding, foil, and twisted pairs

All cables Cat6 and up are shielded from internal “crosstalk” (interference generated by other wires within the cable) by way of “twisted pairs,” which aren’t just the performative emo couple from your high school but refers to literally tangled wires that, through the magic of electromagnetics, somehow reduces noise.

Twisted pairs are just the baseline for modern Ethernet cable shielding. There are a few different varieties of cable, which you’ll want to know about when you pick your cable. UTP cables, or “unshielded twisted pair,” offer baseline protection, with no additional shielding beyond the twisting. STP cables, or “shielded twisted pair,” enhance that protection by adding a layer of shielding around all of the twisted pairs, minimizing external interference. FTP cables, or “foil twisted pair,” feature a layer of protective foil around each individual twisted pair. Finally, S/FTP cables combine the individual and outer shielding of FTP and STP cables for maximum protection against electromagnetic interference and crosstalk. 

Both Cat7 and Cat8 are required to have some shielding, so that’s another advantage to trading up. Cat6 is required to have UTP, but some cables offer more protection. Cat1-Cat5 are the wild west: They may have it, or they may not. Regardless, it’s worth checking what level of protection your cables offer.

FAQ

Q: Is Ethernet faster than Wi-Fi?

Yes. Wi-Fi has gotten fast enough that you can seamlessly do most internet browsing and even streaming video without the need to plug in, but gaming’s additional demands really highlight the gap between wired and wireless connections.

Q: Is Cat7 faster than Cat6?

As we mentioned, each generation or “category” of Ethernet cable is faster than the ones that came before it. Cat7 is capable of supporting a 10 Gbps connection. Cat6 maxes out at a 1 Gbps connection. Cat7 also has additional shielding over Cat6, which can also improve signal quality in addition to more raw speed.

That said, Cat7 cables are only faster than Cat6 cables if you have an internet service plan that can reach above a 1 Gbps connection. For many people, the cables will seem to be nearly identical.

Q: Are Cat8 cables worth it?

On the one hand, 40 Gbps is much, much more throughput than most consumer data plans allow, so very few people will be able to see the full difference between Cat8 and previous standards. On the other hand, the overall cost of Ethernet cable, especially over short distances, is low enough that you’re only paying marginally more to thoroughly future-proof your home LAN. Ethernet cables in general right now can handle far more than most home users need, so no matter what you should be able to more than meet your needs without breaking the bank.

The final word on the best Ethernet cables for gaming

Hopefully, this clears up any confusion you had about what you need to consider when buying the best Ethernet cables for your gaming experience. Wireless is fine for most things, but your PC, Xbox, or PS5 will really benefit from the speed and stability of a wired connection. The cables are relatively cheap and currently support much faster internet than most ISPs offer in most places, so Cat7 and Cat8 cables are an easy way to upgrade and future-proof your setup.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best Ethernet cables for gaming in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best tire chains of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-tire-chains/ Tue, 07 Mar 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=517417
The best tire chains will help you prepare for the storm.

Protect yourself from getting caught in a snow or ice storm.

The post The best tire chains of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best tire chains will help you prepare for the storm.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Peerless Auto Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Chains are the best tire chains overall. Peerless Auto-Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Traction Chain
SEE IT

Peerless Auto-Trac chains offer excellent traction while being one of the easiest sets of tire chains to install.

Best for trucks Security Chain Company Quik Grip are the best tire chains for trucks. Security Chain Company Quik Grip
SEE IT

These large chains offer maximum durability to support the weight of heavy duty pickup trucks.

Best budget The Security Chain Company SUper Z6 is the best tire chain at a budget-friendly price. Security Chain Company Super Z6 Cable Tire Chain
SEE IT

These large chains offer maximum durability to support the weight of heavy-duty pickup trucks.

When driving on snowy and icy roads, often the one thing that can keep you from getting stuck is a good set of tire chains. These vehicle accessories consist of metal chains that install around the wheels of your vehicle to maximize traction in snowy and icy conditions, making them a necessity for those who live in regions that see extreme winter weather each year. In fact, some states even require snow chains if traveling in certain mountainous areas during extreme winter weather. Finding the right set can be challenging, as not all tire chains are identical. They come in different sizes, materials, and tread patterns to suit different types of vehicles and varying severities of winter weather. Many models are designed to be easy to install, reducing the time one has to spend out in the cold. Learn what features are vital to consider when shopping for these winter weather vehicle accessories and find out why the models below are some of the best tire chains on the market.

How we chose the best tire chains

In reviewing more than 25 sets of tire chains for this article, we considered what sets best suit vehicles ranging from smaller cars to large SUVs and heavy pickup trucks, keeping the following considerations in mind:

Traction: Although traction isn’t the only thing, it’s clearly the most important factor in tire chains. We chose only models that provided ample traction.

Durability: I only included chains made from steel alloys that could hold up to supporting the weight of a vehicle in difficult weather conditions. This included traditional tire chains and those that use steel rollers or coils.

Installation: Tire chains are typically installed in extreme winter weather on the side of a road or in a snow-covered driveway. With this in mind, we only chose tire chains that one could capably install in these conditions. Tire chains with self-tightening features outranked those that required manual tightening.

The best tire chains: Reviews & Recommendations

Whatever kind of vehicle you drive, you don’t want to go out in the winter without the best tire chains, because even the best heated gloves, socks, and vests (even a battery-powered electric blanket) don’t keep you as comfortable as getting home and out of the storm safely. We’ve rounded up the best options on the market. from heavy-duty to budget-friendly picks.

Best overall: Peerless Auto-Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Traction Chain

Peerless Auto Trac

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: This pick eliminates the major headache with tire chains—putting them on—with an innovative design that essentially automates the installation process, making them one of the most user-friendly options on the market.

Specs

  • Material: Manganese alloy chain
  • Shape: Diamond
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • Easy to install
  • Excellent traction with a diamond-shaped pattern
  • Durable steel alloy construction

Cons

  • A little on the heavy side

Tire chains generally aren’t user-friendly. Most require you to jack the car up to properly tighten them to the wheel, which often involves paying someone else to do the work. That’s not the case with Auto-Trac’s Peerless tire chains, which use a tensioning system that automatically tightens the chains to the wheel. To install, simply attach the internal cable to the tighteners that run around the outside sidewall of the tire and begin driving to activate the ratcheting system that tightens the chains.

The diamond pattern of this set of chains not only facilitates the automatic ratcheting system, creating a tight grip around the tires, but it also makes for better performance by creating more surface area and improving traction.

In addition to being easy to install, this set is durable, thanks to its manganese steel alloy construction and heavier gauge chain links. Of course, that gauge also makes these chains on the heavy side at 15 pounds for the set. With sizes ranging from 14 to 20 inches, this set of chains is one of the more versatile options on the market, capable of fitting light trucks, SUVs, and cars.

Best heavy-duty: AutoChoice 6 Packs Car Snow Chains

AutoChoice

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: The thickness and coverage of these chains take the traction one can get from a set of tire chains to another level. And while the installation may take longer, it’s less complicated.

Specs

  • Material: Steel
  • Shape: Squares
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • Heavy-gauge chains provide optimal traction
  • Separate pieces make them easier to install
  • Fits a wide variety of tire sizes

Cons

  • Installation is more time-consuming
  • Expensive

One look at this set of tire chains from AutoChoice, and one can see that they are much beefier than other models, thanks to sets of six thick chains for each tire. With their thicker gauge and square design, these chains dig into snow and ice to provide ample traction. The chains are divided into six separate pieces per wheel—a six-pack—which attach independently. The chains have thick straps that consist of tendon material that thread through the rims and tighten to the wheel in a similar fashion to ratcheting tie-down straps.

This design has both positives and negatives. By having separate pieces, they’re easier to install, as there is no need to untangle and line up a single stretch of chain or jack up the wheel. Simply apply one set, then move on to the rest. On the flip side, attaching six separate sets of chains to each wheel is time-consuming.

While this set of tire chains is on the pricier side—you’ll need to buy a set of six per wheel—it does include some useful extras, including two pairs of gloves, a long hook to help with mounting, and a fiber-absorbent towel.

Best low-profile: Glacier Passenger Cable Tire Chain

Glacier

SEE IT


Why they made the cut: Although there is a trade-off in traction, we love the low-profile design of this set of chains, which makes them suitable for most cars.

Specs

  • Material: Steel rollers
  • Shape: Square
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • Fits type S low-profile vehicles
  • Lighter weight makes them easier to install
  • Affordably priced

Cons

  • Traction isn’t as good as standard tire chains

Tire chains can be tricky with passenger vehicles with S clearance, which means there is limited space between the wheel well and the tire. Adding the additional thickness of snow chains can damage the car as the chains scrape against the wheel well when the suspension flexes. In fact, some car manufacturers will even void warranties if they find that a car has used chains that are too bulky for the wheel well.

Glacier solves that problem by creating tire chains that aren’t really chains at all. Glacier’s tire chains actually consist of a set of hardened steel rollers that run perpendicular to the tire treads and secure to a thick gauge wire cable that runs the circumference of the tire’s outer sidewall.

The result is a tire chain with a low enough profile that it can fit S-clearance passenger vehicles. And, at 6 pounds, these chains are also easier to install than heavier sets. Keep in mind that there is a trade-off. While these roller-style chains will improve vehicle traction for snowy weather, they don’t provide the same traction as a set of traditional tire chains.

Best for trucks: Security Chain Company Quik Grip

Security Chain

SEE IT


Why they made the cut: Though they may be tougher to install, you can’t argue with the fact that these chains offer the superior traction and durability that heavy-duty trucks driving on snow-covered roads require.

Specs

  • Material: Alloy steel chain
  • Shape: Square
  • Size options: 15-20 inch

Pros

  • Durable all-chain construction
  • CAM tightening system makes installation easier
  • Thicker gauge chains provide superior traction

Cons

  • Harder to install than other types
  • Won’t work with low-clearance vehicles

Larger trucks and SUVs require heavy chains that won’t break under intense weight or extreme conditions. Thanks to their durability, these thicker steel alloy manganese chains are one of the best options for full-size trucks. They’re even rated to work with farm equipment and dual-wheeled trucks.

Security Chains’ tire chains have a square configuration design, which provides maximum start-up traction. We like this set in particular because of the integrated CAM tightening system that eliminates the need to use tensioners to tighten the chains. The Quik Grip chains that don’t have this feature are less expensive, but we think it’s worth the additional cost to save the hassle of purchasing tensioners separately.

Even with the CAM tightening system, these chains are more difficult to install than other options, but the superior durability and traction they offer make them a must-have for heavy-duty trucks that face severe winter weather. Remember that these chains won’t fit trucks with S-class clearance requirements.

Best budget: Security Chain Company Super Z6 Cable Tire Chain

Security Chain

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: These tire chains are inexpensive and versatile, capable of fitting most cars, trucks, and SUVs. We also like the design, which makes them easier to install than other tire chains by eliminating the need for manual tightening.

Specs

  • Material: Alloy steel coils
  • Shape: Diagonal
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • No need to manually tighten
  • Low profile makes them compatible with most vehicles
  • Affordably priced

Cons

  • Steel coils do not provide as much traction

This versatile set of tire chains from Security Chain is easy to install, affordably priced, and will fit vehicles with restricted clearance around the wheels. They consist of alloy steel traction coils thinner than standard chains, making them compatible with most cars. They only require a quarter-inch of sidewall clearance, so they’re suitable for most cars and SUVs as well as trucks.

These tire chains are also easier to install than other models thanks to rubber connectors that hold the coils taught, eliminating the need to tighten the chains manually.

This set of chains also preserves handling better than bulkier chains while preserving such important safety features as anti-lock brakes, traction control, and all-wheel drive. Keep in mind there is a trade-off. The low profile and limited coverage of the coils do provide less traction than larger sets of tire chains.

Things to consider before buying tire chains

Traction

Perhaps the most important trait to consider is how well the chains will keep you from getting stuck. The rule of thumb is rather straightforward when it comes to traction. The thicker the chain and the more coverage on the tire tread, the better the traction. Chains with heavier gauge steel links will dig into snow better than coils or rollers, providing better traction. Keep shape in mind as well: Square-shaped chains may provide better traction for getting started but diamond-shaped chains provide better directional traction, which means better handling.

Material

Please pay attention to what the chains are made from, which will determine their durability. Generally speaking, a steel alloy with manganese is considered “high strength” steel, which can better withstand the pressures exerted on it when functioning as a tire chain. While chains may have superior strength, steel alloy rollers and coils are also quite strong. In addition to the chains, pay attention to other materials they use to hold them in place. While rubber and thick nylon straps may be durable enough for cars and light trucks, heavy-duty trucks require all-chain construction.

Size

Size is important because the tires must be compatible with the size of the tires on your vehicle. Tire chains are not one size fits all. Most models of tire chains come in a broad range of sizes to suit different tire sizes. Tire chain manufacturers include size charts that correspond to the model numbers of their products. Check the size of your tires (printed on the sidewall of each tire) and match that size to the right model tire chain.

Installation

Most likely, you’ll be installing tire chains in inclement weather, so it’s important to purchase chains that you can install as quickly as possible. If you have a car or small truck, consider purchasing a set of tire chains that are self-tensioning. Self-tensioning chains take a little more work to install initially, but they don’t require you to tighten (and retighten) the chains manually.

FAQs

Q: Do you need tire chains for all four tires?

Legally, you only need to have one set of tire chains to travel in mountainous areas during the wintertime. However, if you have a 4×4 vehicle, it’s a good idea to have two sets. Even with a two-wheel-drive vehicle, two sets of chains can improve traction.

Q: Do chains damage tires?

When there is ice and snow, tire chains dig into them and don’t put pressure on your tires. However, driving on bare roads for long stretches can cause the chains to dig into your tires and damage them (as well as the road itself). Chains can also damage tires if they are not properly installed.

Q: Is it hard to drive with snow chains?

Although snow chains will improve traction and help prevent your car or truck from getting stuck, it is still hazardous to drive in snowy conditions. When driving with snow chains, you should never exceed 30 miles per hour.

Final thoughts on the best tire chains

Choosing the right tire chains requires finding a product balancing good traction and easy installation. The Peerless Auto-Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Traction Chain excels on both fronts, making it one of the best all-around tire chains you can put on your car or truck. If you’re looking for a set of chains to outfit your heavy-duty pick-up truck, then consider going with Security Chain Company Quik Grip, which offers superior traction and durability.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio, to video games, to cameras, and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best tire chains of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best tiki torches of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-tiki-torches/ Thu, 15 Apr 2021 16:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=282868
A black tiki torch with flame in a twilight sea background.
Oleg Illarionov, Unsplash

Give your backyard the gift of light and your body the gift of a bug-free outing with our guide to solid tiki torches.

The post The best tiki torches of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A black tiki torch with flame in a twilight sea background.
Oleg Illarionov, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Solar Solar lights make the best tiki torches TomCare Solar Lights
SEE IT

Eight hours of sunlight gives you 12 hours of torchlight.

Best for Bugs Mosquito control tiki torches Deco Home Tikki Backyard Torch
SEE IT

Keep bugs 15 feet away with this easily-refillable torch.

Best Budget Four bamboo tiki torches TIKI Brand Luau Bamboo Torches – 12 Pack
SEE IT

Get 5 hours of power at a time for less than $25.

Light the torch and let the opening ceremony of summer commence. Since our days living in caves, humans have used torches to keep the lights on and the party going. The best tiki torches are much more than simple, oversized matches. Torches made of glass and metal bring new artistic options to outdoor decor. Solar-powered tiki torches eliminate the need for fire. Tiki torches with citronella shield you and your guests from annoying (and dangerous) mosquitoes. You now have dozens of options to ignite your outdoor space with bright, beautiful light. 

From the simple bamboo firesticks to the elaborate glass vases, you can mix and match your outdoor illumination to create unique spaces for big parties and quiet nights. While you can pick up a few cheap tiki torches at the grocery store, don’t ignore the potential of specialized troches only available online and in home stores. Learn the pros and cons of these new ambiance staffs and find the very best tiki torches for your yard, deck, event or campsite with this guide.

The best tiki torches: Reviews & Recommendations

Best overall: TIKI Brand Resin Jar TIKI Torch 4-in-1

TIKI

SEE IT

To achieve the best lighting, including on your deck, you need variety and the best deck tiki torch that does it all is the Jar Tiki. The artful jar can stand on its own as the centerpiece on a table. For decks and porches, the smaller pole height works on railings thanks to the included mount. Each of the metal torches offers up about four hours of flame-time, so keep the fuel handy. It’s the best way to add varying heights to your space while maintaining the cohesive look of matching torches.

Best solar: TomCare Solar Lights

TomCare

SEE IT

The TomCare Solar Lights are the best solar powered torches thanks to lifelike illumination that flickers and flutters like the real thing. With 8 hours of sunlight beaming on the solar cells atop each torch, the flame will stay lit for about 12 hours. That should carry you through the entire night. The pole stands at 43 inches, which is shorter than most that stretch past the 60 inch mark, so make sure the height works for your space. (They are waist-level, not eye-level.) The waterproof lights stand up against most summer weather, but you want to bring these in during the harsh winter months. Installation is stratightword with the plastic stakes and everything is contained in one well-balanced solar tiki torch.

Best glass canisters: TIKI Brand King Oahu Glass Torch

TIKI

SEE IT

Bring whimsy to your outdoors with the King Oahu glass tiki torch. The modeled glass looks amazing in the day and shines and shimmers like ice at night. Fifteen ounces of fuel fit into the glass, enough for an evening of tiki wonderment. It can be used on the included pole or as a tabletop torch. It works best as a staked pole torch because on a table it can tip and fall over too easily. If you have pets on leashes, keep the leashes clear of the poles or the torches will topple. The lights are hefty, and feel strong when properly staked. Use them to outline the party space and prepare for oohs and ahhs as guests watch the tiki god, and the tiki god watches back.

Best for bug control: Deco Home Tikki Backyard Torch

DECO WINDOW COMPLETE WINDOW SOLUTION

SEE IT

The best tiki torches for mosquitoes are ones that stay lit. The Deco Home metal torch is a simple design that can handle the citronella fuel of your choice. It is a basic backyard torch—but it’s well-made and solid. Filling the torch with bug repellent fuel is easy and a full torch will last 6 hours. Loaded with citronella oil, the torch keeps bugs 15-feet away, but some biters will still break through your line of defense. You will want to add some bug spray to your arms and legs.

Best budget: TIKI Brand Luau Bamboo Torches – 12 Pack

TIKI

SEE IT

Bamboo tiki torches will last long enough for a fun, dry night in the yard and they are easy to stake and fuel. Keep a few torches on hand stored safely in the garage and bring them out as needed throughout the summer. You’ll get 5-hours of flame power with a full 12 ounce tank of fuel. The attached snuffer puts out the flame easily when the party’s over. Don’t expect too much from these cost-effective lights, and you’ll get more than your money’s worth.

How to find the best tiki torches for your outdoor space

Offering quiet mood lighting is just one of the many functions of the best tiki torches. The designs of today have become artful lighting elements with features that add usability to your backyard. Mosquito control is is one of the biggest benefits, and new solar-powered torches even provide realistic flame ambience without the danger of fire.

You can find tiki torches that can be used season after season. Metal tiki torches may lack some of the classic, delightfully cheesy design of the vintage bamboo, but these modern lights provide new, eye-catching style to any backyard. 

Of course, if the torch runs out of gas, what good is it? Tiki torches will use replaceable gas or oil to stay alight and there are a variety of fuels to choose from. Efficient design and top-quality fuel give long life to your nightlight and eliminate the need to stop the party to fill up or replace the lights. And new table-top tiki torches bring big light to the centerpiece of a table. No longer just for the perimeter of the party, these tiny (and safe) torches bring the party nice and close. 

Explore all options and choose the best tiki torches for your specific space. 

What are the best deck tiki torches?

Height is important when shopping for the best deck tiki torches on the market. A 5-foot lawn torch is great for open spaces, but won’t be useful on a deck or if you want to bring the torch closer to the party. Smaller 3-foot ones are easier to use in tighter spaces and can bring brilliant backyard lighting to decks and patios. And tabletop torches can be placed anywhere and make beautiful centerpieces.

Wherever you plan to use the torches, be sure to check that it’s a safe space that’s not directly under an awning, tree or patio umbrella. Unless it’s a small tabletop model, keep the torches 3-feet away from people, patio furniture, and buildings. You also want space between each torch—at least four feet. Too many torches crammed into a small space will lose any flickering light effect and look cluttered.

What about solar lights?

Ditch the fire fuel and draw power from the biggest tiki torch in the solar system. Solar tiki torches provide safe, flame-free/smoke-free light that shines anywhere you need it. Today’s solar torch designs offer flickering light that looks lifelike and many “flames” can be adjusted to provide unique lighting options. 

The biggest benefit of solar tiki torches is fire safety. Pets and children will knock over anything in the yard, so going flameless is a smart idea for areas prone to play. And these cool lights are also easier to use and maintain than gas-fueled torches. The water-proof casing means you can leave them staked in the ground all season. And with a day of sunshine, the solar battery should charge up a full night’s worth of light.

The downside to solar powered tiki torches will become very clear on a cloudy day. They may also be dimmer, even on a full charge, than the standard ones.

Get creative with glass

Many modern tiki torches are sleek and minimal. But a glass torch can help bring some of the fun back to the backyard with lights made to be seen. Because they are basically glass jars, they make for one of the best tiki torch canisters and will hold a lot of fuel. And glass doesn’t rust or warp in the rain. But the real benefit of glass tiki torches is that they become eye-catching works of art. 

If you’re shopping for backyard lights that make an impact, glass tiki lights on a pole or a tabletop are the perfect conversation piece. Tabletop glass torches can “glow up” even a basic picnic table and tall glass torches staked into the ground offer heavy-duty construction that minimizes spills and tumbles.

Can tiki torches help with bug control?

The smells of summer are backyard barbecue, sunscreen, pool chlorine and citronella. Citronella is a natural oil from lemongrass that has been used to deter mosquitoes for hundreds of  years. It’s safe and inexpensive. But is it effective for bug control, including when it’s used in a torch? The answer: Kind of. 

There are plenty of fuels infused with citronella and they all claim to keep bugs away. If it doesn’t seem to be working there are two issues to consider: First, citronella doesn’t work well on windy days. Once the citronella fumes mix with air, it quickly gets diluted and ineffective. Second, citronella works best in close areas. If the torches are spread too far out, it won’t deter the bugs. Keep the torches within 15-feet of the action for best results. 

If you need more help shielding guests from bugs, use the torch in conjunction with a spray-on bug repellent that has DEET as one of the ingredients. Spray your arms and legs and hopefully you’ll stop slapping yourself silly all night.

What if I’m looking for something cheaper?

If all you want is some temporary outdoor lighting, pick up a set of bamboo tiki torches for very little money. The bamboo has a classic look and it works well enough … until it doesn’t. 

While generally safe to use, the bamboo torches may catch on fire, and not in the intended way. They also create a lot of smoke so some fine tuning with the wick is expected. If you don’t need fancy metal material and elegant style, go simple and go cheap with the traditional and temporary torch.

FAQs

Q: How long does a 12 oz tiki torch last?

A 12 oz tiki torch should last between five and six hours. Sadly, there is no eternal flame for backyard fires. Even solar-powered lights will fade after 10 or 12 hours. Be prepared by stocking up fuel. Don’t try to concoct your own “emergency” fuel with rubbing alcohol or other chemicals. Leave it to the pros. DIY modification of the torch to try and get more life out of the fuel can result in dangerous fires, ruined torches, and horrible, horrible parties

Q: Do tiki torches really keep mosquitoes away?

Tiki torches can keep mosquitoes away, but don’t expect miracles. Citronella oil used in some fuels is a safe and effective bug repellent, but it works best in a small area like a porch or deck. Place the torches in a circle and keep them near the people (but not close enough to burn anyone). For best results, give your arms and legs a light coat of bug repellent. And the best trick to keep mosquitoes out of your yard is to remove standing water on the property: Birdbaths, upturned Frisbees, even small water bottle caps can become breeding grounds for mosquitoes. Give the yard a daily once-over and if you see anything that collects water, dump it out.

Q: Is it OK to leave tiki torches outside?

Yes, you can leave some types of tiki torches outside. Metal torches and solar-powered torches are designed to hold up against the elements. Glass torches won’t rust, but a strong storm can knock them over and break the glass. You should always bring the torches inside if possible during a strong rainstorm. This will ensure the torches last as long as possible. Wood and bamboo torches should never be left out in the rain or the material will crack and crumble.

A final word on shopping for the best tiki torches

The best tiki torches give new life to the outdoors. Metal tiki torches are sturdy and dependable sources of light. Solar lights/torches are safe and simple. Glass ones add style to the backyard. And the classic bamboo tiki torches bring affordable ambiance to any event. Find the best deck torches, or ones for the yard, around the pool, or for lining a walkway. The beauty of a flickering flame makes any summer night fun and memorable.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best tiki torches of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Atlantic City’s massive offshore wind farm project highlights the industry’s growing pains https://www.popsci.com/technology/offshore-wind-farm-lawsuit-ocean-wind-1-atlantic-city-new-jersey/ Thu, 19 Oct 2023 15:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581023
Orsted offshore wind turbines in the UK
New Jersey's offshore wind farm could look like Ørsted's Walney, UK project—if it ever begins construction. Ørsted

Ocean Wind 1 faces its latest legal challenge.

The post Atlantic City’s massive offshore wind farm project highlights the industry’s growing pains appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Orsted offshore wind turbines in the UK
New Jersey's offshore wind farm could look like Ørsted's Walney, UK project—if it ever begins construction. Ørsted

Back in 2015, the US Department of Energy estimated wind farms could supply over a third of the nation’s electricity by 2050. Since then, numerous wind turbine projects have been green-lit offshore and across the country. However, when it comes to building, it can get tricky, like in the case of a planned wind farm 15 miles off the southeast coast of Atlantic City, New Jersey.

Danish wind farm company Ørsted recently promised to cut New Jersey a $100 million check if the company’s massive Ocean Wind 1 offshore turbines weren’t up and running by the end of 2025. Less than a week after the wager, however, officials in the state’s southernmost county have filed a US District Court lawsuit to nix the 1.1 gigawatt project involving nearly 100 turbines, alleging regulatory sidesteps and ecological concerns.

[Related: The NY Bight could write the book on how we build offshore wind farms.]

According to the Associated Press, Cape May County government’s October 16 lawsuit also names the Clean Ocean Action environmental group alongside multiple seafood and fishing organizations as plaintiffs. The filing against both the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration and the Bureau of Ocean Energy Management claims that the Ocean Wind 1 project sidestepped a dozen federal legal requirements, as well as failed to adequately investigate offshore wind farms’ potential environmental and ecological harms. However, earlier this year, the Bureau of Ocean Energy Management released its over 2,300 page Final Environmental Impact Statement on Ocean Wind 1, which concluded the project is responsibly designed and adequately protects the region’s ecological health.

An Ørsted spokesperson declined to comment on the lawsuit for PopSci, but related the company “remains committed to collaboration with local communities, and will continue working to support New Jersey’s clean energy targets and economic development goals by bringing good-paying jobs and local investment to the Garden State.”

[Related: A wind turbine just smashed a global energy record—and it’s recyclable.]

Wind turbine farm companies, Ørsted included, have faced numerous issues in recent years thanks to supply chain bottleneck issues, soaring construction costs, and legal challenges such as the latest from Cape May County. Earlier this year, Ørsted announced its US-based projects are now worth less than half of their initial economic estimates.

Other clean energy advocates reiterated their support for the New Jersey wind farm. In an email to PopSci, Moira Cyphers, Director of Eastern Region State Affairs for the American Clean Power Association, described the lawsuit as “meritless.”

“Offshore wind is one of the most rigorously regulated industries in the nation and is critical for meeting New Jersey’s clean energy and environmental goals,” Cyphers continued. “Shore towns can’t wait for years and years for these projects to be constructed. The time to move forward is now.”

The post Atlantic City’s massive offshore wind farm project highlights the industry’s growing pains appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Atlantic hurricanes are getting stronger faster than they did 40 years ago https://www.popsci.com/environment/atlantic-hurricanes-stronger-faster/ Thu, 19 Oct 2023 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581073
A satellite photo showing the swirling clouds of Hurricane Lee and Tropical Storm Margot in the Atlantic Ocean.
On the morning of September 11, 2023, Hurricane Lee (left) churned in the Atlantic Ocean northeast of Puerto Rico, with Tropical Storm Margot (right) further to the east. NOAA

The probability of a weak hurricane strengthening to become a major hurricane within 24 hours has more than doubled in recent decades.

The post Atlantic hurricanes are getting stronger faster than they did 40 years ago appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A satellite photo showing the swirling clouds of Hurricane Lee and Tropical Storm Margot in the Atlantic Ocean.
On the morning of September 11, 2023, Hurricane Lee (left) churned in the Atlantic Ocean northeast of Puerto Rico, with Tropical Storm Margot (right) further to the east. NOAA

There is about a month and a half left in the 2023 Atlantic Hurricane season, and it’s a season that has seen some rapidly intensifying storms. In less than 24 hours, Hurricane Idalia went from a Category 1 hurricane to a Category 4 with winds near 130 MPH. The storm made landfall on Florida’s Gulf Coast as a high Category 3. Weeks later, Hurricane Lee grew from a Category 1 storm to a Category 5 in only 24 hours.

[Related: The future of hurricanes is full of floods—a lot of them.]

According to a study published October 19 in the journal Scientific Reports, Atlantic hurricanes may be more than twice as likely to strengthen from a Category 1 storm to a major Category 3 hurricane or higher in a 24-hour period than they were between 1970 and 1990. They also are more likely to strengthen more rapidly along the east coast of the United States.

As ocean temperatures continue to reach record highs due to human-caused climate change, the trend is worrying. Tropical weather systems like hurricanes and tropical storms gain strength over unusually warm sea surface temperatures. Warm ocean water is like carbohydrates for hurricanes and gives the storms more energy. Faster storm intensification has already been linked to climate change, but the changes in the intensification rates of storms across the 41 million square mile wide Atlantic Ocean Basin have been less clear. 

“Our oceans have absorbed about 90 percent of the excess warming that has occurred in recent decades due to human-caused climate change,” study co-author and Rowan University climate scientist Andra Garner tells PopSci. “I wanted to see what kinds of changes might already have occurred to the overall rates at which Atlantic hurricanes have been strengthening.”

In the study, Garner looked at every Atlantic hurricane between 1970 and 2020 and analyzed how the wind speed changed over each hurricanes’ lifespan. The storms were split into three time periods–a historical era (1970 to 1990), an intermediate era (1986 to 2005), and a modern era (2001 to 2020). To establish the maximum intensification rate, Garner calculated the greatest increase in wind speed over any 24-hour period within the hurricane’s lifespan. 

She found that the chance of a hurricane’s maximum intensification rate being 23 miles per hour or more had increased from 42.3 percent in the historical era to 56.7 percent today. The probability of a weak hurricane strengthening to become a major hurricane in 24 hours also increased from 3.23 percent to 8.12 percent. 

“The storms we’ve seen this year, like Hurricane Idalia and Hurricane Lee, align with what my research findings would tell us to expect,” Garner says. “Hurricane Idalia and Hurricane Lee both occurred over exceptionally warm ocean waters, and strengthened quickly as a result of those warm ocean waters (and other favorable conditions). I think that this lines up very well with a trend that my research indicates that we could expect to continue if ocean waters continue to warm.”

[Related: Florida’s aquatic animals prepare early for storms like Hurricane Idalia.]

The locations within the Atlantic Basin where hurricanes were most likely to see their maximum intensification rate has also changed between these eras. Hurricanes were more likely to strengthen most quickly off the Atlantic coast of the US and in the Caribbean Sea, and less likely to strengthen most quickly in the Gulf of Mexico. 

Better understanding these locations and intensification rates could help create better action plans for communities at risk. Three of the five of the most economically damaging Atlantic hurricanes have all occurred since 2017 and these storms all had rapid growth. According to Garner, this is an “urgent warning for humanity,” and it should continue without major changes to our behavior and quickly transitioning away from fossil fuels. However, there is still time to act. 

“It’s really important to remember that there is absolutely still hope. We know that we are the cause of this problem, which means we can also be the solution—and we already have the tools at our disposal (green energy, etc.) to actually be the solution,” says Garner. “So there’s hope that we could secure a more sustainable future.”

The post Atlantic hurricanes are getting stronger faster than they did 40 years ago appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best synth VSTs of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-synth-vsts/ Sat, 12 Mar 2022 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=429583
A synth VST on a computer screen
Stan Horaczek

The best virtual synths to make sure your music is fire.

The post The best synth VSTs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A synth VST on a computer screen
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Arturia Pigments is the best synth VST. Arturia Pigments
SEE IT

Deep and versatile.

Best analog u-he Diva is the best analog. u-he Diva
SEE IT

You’ll swear it’s actually analog.

Best for pros Spectrasonics Omnisphere is the best for pros. Spectrasonics Omnisphere 2
SEE IT

Sound design has never been so much fun.

There’s never been a better time to make music. What used to be a prohibitively expensive endeavor that required thousands of dollars of pricey hardware and outboard gear is now possible with a laptop, a decent set of studio monitors, and a MIDI controller. Fueling the fire of this production revolution are top-quality synth VST (Virtual Studio Technology) instruments and effects. Thanks to ever-improving computing power, the sound of these virtual synthesizers—which load into your computer as plugins in a DAW, or digital audio workstation—are now almost indistinguishable from their hardware counterparts. Whether you can hear the difference in the mix arguably doesn’t even matter anymore. Listeners surely don’t notice! And, because synth VSTs aren’t bound by real-world rules, advanced features, new and novel forms of synthesis, and astonishing, built-in effects are par for the course. And all at a fraction of the cost of hardware. There will always be a place for physical musical instruments but right now, many of the most exciting things in music production are happening in the computing realm. Here are our picks for the best synth VSTs on the market now. Viva la VST revolution!

How we picked the best synth VSTs

The VST market is already massive and companies release new versions every day. And that’s before you even start counting freeware instruments. To arrive at our list of the best synth VSTs we considered a number of points, such as sound quality, the types of synthesis (how it generates the sound), an abundance of patch-shaping parameters, extras like built-in effects and sequencers, and price—including free synths. We also looked at the level of difficulty of use. Will beginners feel comfortable with it or is it better suited for pros? After narrowing things down, we amalgamated the results of our personal experience with general industry consensus and critical response to assemble this list of the best synth VSTs.

The best synth VSTs: Reviews & Recommendations

When shopping for a VST synth, remember to keep your end goal in mind. What kind of music do you intend to make with the instrument? If your goal is synthwave, something suitably retro and vintage-sounding is in order. However, a virtual analog synth won’t cut the mustard (or even the mayo) if your musical sandwich needs acoustic and real-world ingredients. In that case, you may need a sampler. Also, remember that beyond its musical capabilities, this is a piece of software with technical specifications, so ensure that your computer and DAW can handle it—both in terms of format and CPU hit. Finally, have fun. There’s very little that’s more exciting than a new synthesizer to bring your studio monitors to life.

Best overall: Arturia Pigments

Arturia

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A synthesizer that can do it all and sound great doing it.

Specs

  • Formats: VST2, VST3, AAX, AU
  • Synthesis types: Virtual analog, wavetable, additive, sample-based, granular
  • Effects: Yes

Pros

  • Stunning sound quality
  • Variety of sound engine types
  • Plenty of modulation possibilities

Cons

  • Could be challenging for beginners
  • CPU hog

Arturia is one of the top VST synth developers in the world. It made a name for itself creating deliriously great-sounding emulations of classic synthesizers. For its first original VST synth, the French company brought all of its decades of experience to bear in Pigments, a modern instrument with a deep variety of sound engines and parameters.

Think of Pigments like a colorful build-your-own dessert bar where you get to stack up the sweet flavors however you see fit. Start with the sound-generating oscillators: You can have up to three of these, with virtual analog, wavetable, samples, and additive (building up harmonic partials) available. After this comes the filter, or actually filters, with 10 types culled from a variety of famous synths ready to slide into two slots. Modern music is all about modulation, and Pigments comes packed with envelopes, LFOs, step sequencer-like function generators, and more. Colorful visual feedback that lives up to the instrument’s name makes this relatively easy to understand. Finally, there’s an extensive effects section, including ones taken from Arturia’s many famous effect unit emulations.

Pigments is not a beginner’s instrument; it’s deep and complex and powerfully capable. To get the most out of it, you need to know your way around subtractive synthesis, how to manipulate a wavetable, and how granular synthesis works. However, this also makes it incredibly versatile and able to turn out sounds that will easily fit into any genre. The presence of a sample sound engine alone makes it usable in everything from electronic music to film-scoring. 

One caveat: all that power requires CPU so make sure your system can handle it or be prepared to freeze or bounce tracks.

With its deep synthesis options, customizable modules, and powerful modulation parameters, Pigments could be the only VST synth you ever need.

Best free: Surge Synth Team Surge XT

Surge Synth Team

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This free and open-source VST synth is ridiculously powerful.

Specs

  • Formats: VST3, AU
  • Synthesis types: Virtual analog, wavetable, FM, physical modeling, more
  • Effects: Yes

Pros

  • Free
  • Great sound quality
  • Plenty of synthesis options

Cons

  • May scare beginners off

You don’t have to spend a lot of money for quality synth VSTs. In fact, sometimes you don’t have to spend any money at all. Case in point is Surge XT, a deep and dynamic freeware synthesizer. What started as a paid synth by developer Vember Audio has now evolved into an open-source passion project by a team of volunteer developers known as Surge Synth Team. As more people come on to work on it, the synth continues to evolve almost organically.

Given its collective nature, practically every facet of Surge XT has an almost bewildering variety of options. The oscillator section alone has 12 different algorithm types, from standard virtual analog and wavetable to different FM varieties, physical modeling, and even a port from a modular synth. You could spend days just exploring the sound generation section, and that’s without mentioning the dual filters, each with a ton of different configurations, some taken from other freeware instruments like Odin and OB-Xd. Modulation is similarly deep and extensive, as is the effects section. There’s plenty more too.

If Surge XT has a drawback, it’s that it’s almost too complex. With so many options you’d be forgiven for finding yourself lost in the permutations. This can make it intimidating for beginners. Thankfully, there are presets to help get you started—unsurprisingly, almost 3000 of them. But if you’re going to have a problem, too much of a good thing is a fine one to have.

Best for beginners: Roland Cloud Juno-106

Roland Cloud

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Roland’s emulation of its classic polysynth sounds just like the real thing.

Specs

  • Formats: VST3, AU, AAX
  • Synthesis types: Virtual analog
  • Effects: Yes

Pros

  • Gorgeous sound
  • Uncluttered layout
  • Perfect for beginners

Cons

  • CPU hungry

Roland made a name for itself by releasing some of the most popular analog synthesizers of the 1980s. One of those, the Juno-106, has gone on to become something of a legend. With its uncluttered interface, streamlined signal path, and gorgeous tones, it has become classic hardware for synth-pop and dance music. The company has now released its own VST version and it’s the perfect instrument for beginners to get their heads around subtractive synthesis.

The sound starts with a single oscillator. Here called a DCO (Digitally Controlled Oscillator), it has a particularly smooth and stable tonal character. This passes through a single and lovely filter before hitting the effects section. The famous Juno chorus effect is included but Roland has beefed up this section to include distortion, reverb, delay, and other common effects. And while the signal path may be easy to understand, sound quality is not lacking in any way, with a depth and profundity to match the hardware original.

It’s not all sunshine though. As with other, modern VST synths, sound quality has a price tag and it’s usually paid by the CPU. You can reduce polyphony (the number of notes you can play at a time) to address this but this will also affect your ability to play complex chords.

Juno-106 is part of Roland Cloud’s subscription service. You can access it by paying a monthly or yearly fee or buy it outright for $149. Both options have their benefits; it’s for you to decide which is the more attractive. Either way, you’re getting access to one of the best—and easiest to use—synthesizers ever made.

Best for pros: Spectrasonics Omnisphere 2

Spectrasonics

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With both samples and unique wavetables, Omnisphere is capable of wholly original sounds.

Specs

  • Formats: VST2, VST3, AU, AAX
  • Synthesis types: Wavetable, sample-based
  • Effects: Yes

Pros

  • Deep sound design
  • Unique sample library
  • Hardware integration

Cons

  • Expensive

Some synths, like the Juno-106 (above), offer a limited palette of sounds. That’s OK. They do one thing and they do it well. And then there are synths that do pretty much everything. That’s Spectrasonics’ Omnisphere. And the clincher is it sounds like heaven.

Omnisphere combines samples with synthesis—in this case, DSP-generated wavetables. Because of the samples—many recorded bespoke by Spectrasonics itself—the instrument can go beyond the usual familiar synthesized sounds into completely uncharted territory. This makes it the go-to program for professional sound designers working in film, television, and the video game industry. Beginners beware: this is a seriously high-level instrument. Wallets also beware: Omnisphere comes with a pro-level price tag.

Spectrasonics was founded by hardware synthesizer designer Eric Persing (Roland, Alesis) so it’s no surprise that it allows you to use your real-world synth as a MIDI controller. Finally, the either/or question of hardware versus software has been answered with a resounding “both.”

When it’s time to level up in the VST synth game, Omnisphere is the obvious choice.

Best analog: u-he Diva

u-he

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Diva’s analog dream synth combines the best bits of famous instruments into a jaw-droppingly beautiful whole.

Specs

  • Formats: VST2, VST3, AU, AAX (currently Windows only)
  • Synthesis types: Virtual analog
  • Effects: Yes

Pros

  • Incredible sound quality
  • Modular approach to synthesis
  • Deep sound design

Cons

  • Heavy CPU usage

With so many famous analog synthesizers released in the 1970s and 1980s, wouldn’t it be amazing if we could somehow combine them all into one gorgeous instrument? Take, say, the oscillator section from a Moog Minimoog and combine it with the filter circuit from a Korg MS-20. That’s the idea behind u-he’s Diva, an analog-style synthesizer that offers not only this kind of flexibility, but also sounds absolutely stunning in the process.

At first blush, Diva appears to be your standard analog synthesizer. It has an oscillator section, filter, and envelopes. Move along, nothing to see here, right? Not quite. You can choose from a number of alternatives for each of these sections, building up the ideal signal path for your target sound. This offers a level of flexibility you don’t often get in traditional analog emulations. Diva goes deeper though, with additional controls for fine-tuning—even offering modifications to the “circuit” itself. It’s all finished off with a comprehensive effects section.

None of this would mean anything if Diva didn’t have the sound quality to back it up, but it does. Oh, does it ever. It can be luscious and creamy or wild and wooly, just as you expect a hardware synth to be. Close your eyes and you’ll swear you’re playing an analog synth from 1980. You do have to pay the piper in the form of CPU consumption, though.

If you’re after analog authenticity but don’t want the headache and hassle of owning a room full of cantankerous old synths, Diva is the way to go.

Best wavetable: Xfer Records Serum

Xfer Records

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Ultra-clean wavetables and plenty of modulation options make Serum a digital synth god.

Specs

  • Formats: VST2, AU, AAX
  • Synthesis types: Wavetable
  • Effects: Yes

Pros

  • High-quality sound
  • Workflow oriented
  • Effects suite

Cons

  • CPU hungry

If you’ve listened to EDM or any other kind of dance music in the last few years, you’ve likely heard Xfer Records’ Serum in action. This wavetable VST synth has come to dominate the sound of electronic music and for good reason: it’s absurdly powerful and it sounds astonishingly good.

Xfer Records didn’t invent wavetable synthesis. That honor goes to Wolfgang Palm, who made it famous with his PPG Wave instruments in the 1980s. They used dynamic digital samples to create new textures and tones. These sounds were also full of aliasing, or digital noise, however. While some find aliasing charming, Xfer Records clearly does not and has managed to wipe it completely clean from Serum. The result is a synth with all the inherent power of wavetables that is also mind-blowingly smooth and crystalline.

Serum also offers more than just the usual scannable wavetables, with a whole host of table manipulation options. You can warp them in a variety of ways, from subtle to complete annihilation. You can even import your own wavetables and draw in original manipulations.

With tons of modulation possibilities—the source of the wubs, or fluttering bass sound, so popular in dance music—plus tons of filter types, effects, and a massive unison mode for stacking oscillators into single, fat tones, Serum is your one-stop-shop for dance floor destroying sounds. Just keep an eye on your CPU meter—Serum can be a ravenous monster.

Best loop-based/best sampler/best ROMpler: Native Instruments Kontakt 7

Native Instruments

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Kontakt is the sampler to have if you work with sample libraries, want to make your own, or both.

Specs

  • Formats: VST2, VST3, AU, AAX
  • Synthesis types: Sample-based, wavetable
  • Effects: Yes

Pros

  • Many libraries available
  • Drag and drop sampling
  • Built-in filter and effects

Cons

  • Expensive

There are different kinds of VST instrument users. If you’re the type that likes working with real-world sounds like violins, guitars, and acoustic percussion, you’re going to need a sampler. Likewise, if you want to make your own sample packs. In either case, the choice is clear: Native Instruments’ Kontakt 7.

Native Instruments is a real player in the VST synth game, with an almost endless amount of famous releases in its stable (Massive, anyone?). Kontakt 6 is the jewel in its crown and practically an industry unto itself. All those expensive orchestra sample libraries aimed at composers and wannabe Hans Zimmers? They all run on Kontakt. If you have any interest at all in soundtrack work, Kontakt needs to be in your plugin folder. While third-party libraries must be purchased separately, Kontakt 6 does include a large and very usable factory library for immediate gratification.

Kontakt 6 is more than just a ROMpler, powerful though it is. It’s also incredibly useful for making your own sample packs. You don’t need to be a software developer to get the most out of it either. With drag and drop sample importing, easy editing, built-in filters and effects (many taken from NI’s own effects plugin line), and now even a wavetable engine, you’ll be sampling in no time.

What is a VST?

Put simply, a VST is a plugin instrument, audio effect, or MIDI effect that you can load into a separate application, usually a DAW (see below). The term VST can be used in the broad sense to refer to all music plugins in general (and this is how we’re using it primarily in this list) or, confusingly, a specific format of music plugin. At the format level, VST stands for Virtual Studio Technology and was invented by audio developer Steinberg in 1996 for use in its Cubase DAW. The most recent iteration of the company’s VST standard is VST3. You may see the term VSTi used. This is an older abbreviation that refers to a VST-format instrument. 

Other plugin types include AU (Audio Unit) for Apple computers and AXX (Avid Audio eXtension) for Pro Tools software. Some DAWs will accept only one format, like Logic (AU) or Pro Tools (AAX). Others, like Ableton Live, accept multiple ones (AU, VST2, VST3). Check your DAW’s technical specifications to find out what formats are compatible.

What is a DAW?

A DAW is a digital audio workstation. It’s a music-making application and, as the name suggests, a kind of virtual studio. It’s fully self-contained and allows you to make music with essentially just a computer. Some famous DAWs include Steinberg Cubase, Avid Pro Tools, Apple Logic Pro X, and Ableton Live. They are all a little different in terms of workflow but share many similarities. They allow you to record audio, work with MIDI to sequence notes, and load instrument and effects plugins. Most come pre-stocked with a selection of plugins to get you started and also accept third-party plugins, such as the ones on this list.

Things to consider when shopping for the best synth VSTs

What kind of music are you making?

As with any instrument, the first thing to address when buying a synth VST is does it match the music that you intend to make? Just as you probably wouldn’t buy an accordion to make heavy metal, a retro-sounding virtual analog synth might not be the best complement for dark trap. Or maybe it would—that decision is ultimately up to you and your creative needs.

Software support

There are also technical considerations. As computers age and operating systems are updated, software developers have to make choices about how far back they are willing to support. Make sure that the program you’re about to drop $200 on will run on your system. There’s also the matter of 32- and 64-bit apps. Modern operating systems no longer support 32-bit programs. While you should not run into any conflicts with the VSTs on this list, some older ones (and especially freeware plugins) may not work if they haven’t been updated to 64-bit. 

Format

Your chosen DAW has restrictions too. There are different plugin formats, such as VST and AU. We’ll explain this in more detail later but keep in mind that not all plugins will work in every DAW. 

Performance requirements

Finally, there’s the issue of CPU usage. Many modern VST synths are power-hungry beasts. After all, there’s a reason they can rival hardware in terms of sound quality. Make sure you’ve got a laptop for music production that is up-to-spec before spending money on a CPU vampire. Nothing kills the studio vibe like stuttering audio and drop outs.

Synthesis types

Every synthesizer, soft or hard, generates sound through a form of synthesis. Think of synthesis as sonic alchemy—the process by which raw sound gets transubstantiated into throbbing bass, searing leads, soft pads, or whooshy effects. Much like the many different kinds of chemical reactions in the world, there are a number of different ways for sound to come together. 

Virtual analog is traditionally the most popular form of synthesis for VST synths. This digitally mimics the real-world warmth and power of electricity coursing through a hardware synthesizer, like a Moog Minimoog or Roland Juno-60. This is also known as subtractive synthesis, as you start with a harmonically complex waveform and subtract frequencies and amplitude from it. 

FM, or Frequency Modulation, was the first major digital brand of synthesis to challenge analog. It involves waveforms (usually sine waves) modulating other waveforms to generate new harmonics. Yamaha’s DX7 rode FM synthesis into 1980s pop ubiquity. 

Wavetable synthesis starts with a sample that changes over time—for example, a bright brass patch that becomes progressively darker. This sample is called a wavetable and you have control over a number of parameters, such as playback position. Although this technology goes back to the late 1970s, it’s had a resurgence lately in modern music thanks to VST synths like Native Instruments’ Massive and Xfer Records’ Serum (see below). Other forms of synthesis include sample-based, granular, additive, physical modeling, and many more.

FAQs

Q: Should I buy more presets?

Most synth VSTs come bundled with a large selection of presets in a variety of styles. It’s very rare to find one that doesn’t have at least a hundred or so. Developers often hire specialists to create the presets for their instruments and will sometimes even advertise their names as a selling point. While additional official and third-party preset packs are often available, whether you decide to buy them is up to you. Presets can be a great way to reverse-engineer an instrument’s synthesis capabilities. They can also function as an inspiration for new compositional ideas. If your chosen genre isn’t represented in the pre-packed presets, go ahead and splurge for extra presets. They’re not absolutely necessary though.

Q: Will X VST synth make me sound like Y producer?

While it’s true that some producers are associated with specific VST instruments (Serum is a popular choice for EDM and dance music producers, for example), just buying that instrument is no guarantee that you’ll instantly sound like them. You can buy the same race car as a Formula 1 driver but that won’t necessarily guarantee a win. Better yet, find out what VST synths are popular for your chosen genre of music and then learn them inside out. You’ll never sound exactly like Dr. Dre or Diplo but you will sound like you.

Q: Does a VST synth sound as good as hardware?

There’s a lot that goes into making hardware sound the way it does. There’s the audio generated by the instrument itself. There’s also the signal path that it takes after leaving the instrument: cables, a mixer, possible outboard effects units, and an audio interface. All of these stages additionally color the sound. A VST synth, however, stands on its own, so the comparison is not necessarily valid. If you want the sound of hardware in the box, that is, in a DAW, start with the best-sounding VST synth you can (like Diva or Serum, above) and then add color with effects plugins that emulate the sound of top mixing desks and outboard gear.

A final word on selecting the best synth VSTs

There’s a vast world of incredible synth VSTs out there, no matter your musical style. While the sheer number of instruments on the market may initially seem overwhelming, the good news is that there are synths out there that will definitely work for you. You can also often try before you buy. Many offer free trial periods so you can make sure that the instrument will work with your genre and DAW/computer. Have fun and enjoy making music.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best synth VSTs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best music production software of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-music-production-software/ Sat, 31 Jul 2021 20:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=385817
best music production software
Vania Shows, Unsplash

If there’s a sound in your head, the best music production software can help you capture it.

The post The best music production software of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best music production software
Vania Shows, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Total Package Native Instruments Komplete 13 is the best music production software. Native Instruments Komplete 13
SEE IT

A huge and well-rounded collection of time-tested synthesizers and effects, along with recent genre sounds, best purchased at this deeply discounted bundle price.

Mixing and Mastering iZotope Music Production Suite 4 is the best music production software. iZotope Music Production Suite 4
SEE IT

This wonderland for mixing and mastering music includes innovative AI tools for helping both beginners and professionals achieve results.

One-Stop Shop Reason + is the best music production software. Reason Studios Reason+
SEE IT

The flagship Reason 11 software works as both a plug-in and a standalone music workstation, and the Reason+ subscription includes all the instruments and effects, as well as weekly sound packs.

Music and technology are two constants in human society, so it’s fitting that most of today’s artists satisfy their creative drive and the public’s insatiable appetite for sound by making music on computers. The basic setup includes a digital audio workstation (DAW) program for recording and mixing tracks, which may come free with your computer or cost a few bucks. And those DAWs often offer generous toolkits. But producers with a vision should complement their DAW with the best music production software to suit their specific goals. Are you essentially a one-person show like Tyler, the Creator? Will you stay behind the scenes, mixing and mastering songs for the next Post Malones and Ariana Grandes of the world? What about writing musical scores? All those new Netflix shows aren’t going to compose music for themselves. Fortunately, there are outstanding music-creation software options for every artistic agenda. 

The best music production software: Reviews & Recommendations

In addition to complementing the built-in features of your DAW software of choice, the best music production software complements your creative goals as well. The number of interesting individual plug-ins and virtual instruments for music-making runs into the thousands, so rather than piecing them together one by one, some of the best music production software options bundle together cohesive groups of excellent professional plug-ins for much lower prices than purchasing them separately. Each product here is a winner, so choose according to your own situation.

Best overall: Native Instruments Komplete 13 

Native Instruments

SEE IT

Germany’s Native Instruments was an early pioneer in integrating software instruments and sound effects into complete production suites. As its name implies, Komplete 13 ($599) supplies a comprehensive collection of 68 digital instruments, sounds, and processors for producing and mixing music. Thirty sample-based instruments outfit you with not only a full band’s worth of guitar, bass, drum, piano, and classic keyboard sounds, but also orchestral horns, strings, and the traditional instruments from cultures all around the world. More than a dozen synthesizer plug-ins cover recreations of classic synths and many synthesis styles, such as virtual analog and FM, and the Massive X wavetable synthesizers have been very influential in the worlds of dubstep and trap bangers. The REAKTOR modular environment lets you build instruments that haven’t existed previously.

Komplete 13 finishes off with something of almost everything in the realm of audio processing, including the Guitar Rig 6 suite of amplifier emulations and guitar-style effects, as well as a complement of reverb, delay, EQ, compressor, distortion, modulation, and other effects and dynamics plug-ins. Komplete 13 comes on a portable hard drive packing more than 36,000 sounds and 320GB of material. The high-end Komplete 13 Ultimate ($1,199) package adds another 50 instruments and effects and more than 500GB of additional audio material. Most of that comes in the form of orchestral and cinematic instruments providing brass, woodwinds, strings, mallet percussion, and complex soundscapes for modern professional scoring. All Komplete 13 plug-ins can operate within the included Komplete Kontrol software, which allows perfectly mapped hardware control from Native Instruments keyboard controllers such as the Komplete Kontrol A49 ($219) or S49 MK2 ($669). 

Best for mixing and mastering: iZotope Music Production Suite 4 

iZotope

SEE IT

Audio plug-ins like the graphical waveform-based Nectar for vocal processing, Neutron for mixing, Ozone for mastering, and RX for audio cleanup and repair were already industry favorites before iZotope imbued them with machine-learning AI assistants. Now, the latest versions in Music Production Suite 4 come with “Assistant” functions that automatically perform certain audio processes based on your input and the analysis of a growing database of thousands, if not millions of other tracks. But don’t worry, you can change any of the automated suggestions they make, whether you want to tune-up or intentionally trash a frequency. Your creativity drives the process.

The music mixing software suite also includes Tonal Balance Control 2, another of iZotope’s AI-assisted breakthroughs, which works with all the Neutron and Ozone plug-ins within a DAW session and adjusts them to meet the optimal levels of 12 tonal balance zones based on the optimal levels for different musical genres or any of your chosen reference songs. Rounding out the suite are VocalSynth 2 for beautiful-to-bizarre vocal effects and vocoding, Insight 2 for detailed track metering, three professional reverb plug-ins, and Stutter Edit 2 for rhythmic effects.

All told, Music Production Suite 4 is the best place to start for musicians who want to try mixing and mastering their own music for distribution. If its upfront price of $999 is too steep and you’d rather pay a monthly subscription, iZotope’s Music Production Suite Pro ($24.99/month) gives you most of the products in the Music Production Suite 4, including all of the AI-assisted mixing and mastering products, with the added bonus of Melodyne Essential, which can perform the kind of vocal trickery popularized by T-Pain, Kanye, and Future.

Best for synth addicts: Arturia V Collection 9

Guitar Center

SEE IT

Imagine a studio filled with the most famous vintage analog and digital synthesizers, organs, and electric pianos that fueled your favorite music from the ’70s to today: every Stevie Wonder and Herbie Hancock funk classic, every Kraftwerk and Depeche Mode synth-pop gem, and most of the glowstick-powered rave jams. When you wake up from that dream, feel good knowing that you can pack that fantasy studio into your laptop for $599 with the Arturia V Collection 9, a bundle of 32 instrument emulation plug-ins with a total of more than 14,000 preset sounds covering the best-loved timbres from beloved classic keyboards like Moog Minimoog analog synth, Yamaha DX-7 FM digital synth, the Hammond B-3 organ, Rhodes and Wurlitzer electric pianos, Mellotron, and much more. Arturia’s KeyLab keyboard controllers, like the KeyLab MKII 49 ($499), are designed to seamlessly manipulate the vintage emulations in V Collection 8 with their knobs, buttons, faders, and pads.

Best for one-stop shoppers: Reason Studios Reason+

Reason Studios

SEE IT

Since it added multitrack audio recording several versions back, Reason Studios Reason 11 really qualifies as full-fledged DAW software. But it stands out with its one-of-a-kind interface that arranges its analog-style mixer and all of its many instruments and effects into a fully configurable Rack, whose backside view allows you to connect and reconnect any of the individual devices together in infinitely creative configurations with virtual patch cords. Its unique, self-contained workflow and constantly expanding add-ons shop has made Reason a favorite among DIY music producers and songwriters since the dawn of the millennium. But these days Reason 11 is not only self-contained beat maker software but it also works as a plug-in workstation inside of any other major DAW software, allowing you to route whatever you’ve recorded through Reason’s expansive signal chain. With the Reason+ subscription ($19.99/month), subscribers get the Reason 11 standalone/plug-in workstation; 80 instrument, audio effect, MIDI effect, and audio utility devices; plus weekly sound pack downloads. The instruments comprise dozens of versatile, powerful, and fun synthesizers, samplers, and drum machines that when combined with the productivity-friendly Reason workflow, make up a musical laboratory perfect for discovering modern pop, hip-hop, and dancefloor-filling hits.  

Best for composers: EastWest ComposerCloud X

EastWest

SEE IT

Like most areas in music and pro audio, scoring music for pictures (movies, TV, video games) is a hyper-competitive field where composers would do well to differentiate themselves. One possible way to do that is to use the absolute highest-quality sound libraries for composing with the most realistic and meticulously recorded samples of orchestral instruments available. Anyone can hear a stark difference in realism between the brass and strings instruments included with Apple Logic Pro X, for example, and those of a renowned company like Spitfire Audio, which constantly strives to make more comprehensive and realistic virtual instruments that run into the hundreds or even thousands of dollars per title.

Even if composers of moderate means acquire a few libraries covering the basic orchestral needs, what do they do when they need something rarer like a sitar or a dulcimer? Enter EastWest, one of the first music-making software companies to embrace the subscription model for ComposerCloud X ($29.99/month), a collection of 70 orchestral, choir, and piano sound libraries all aimed squarely at professional scoring. In all, it grants access to more than 40,000 virtual instrument variations covering brass, woodwinds, strings, vocals, drums/percussion, guitars/bass, pianos/keyboard, and world/ethnic categories. EastWest, and its associated brand Quantum Leap, make some of the most revered products in the business and ComposerCloud X includes all newly released products as they come out, such as the recent Hollywood Orchestra Opus Edition. 

Best free: MeldaProduction MFreeFXBundle

Melda Production

SEE IT

While all DAW software now comes with at least some stock plug-ins for adding audio effects or often-crucial dynamics processors like EQ and compression, not every DAW includes every type of plug-in. And sometimes the stock plug-ins are light on perks like visual representation audio waveforms in their interfaces. Also, every reverb, distortion, or other effect plug-in is unique in some way, and it can only help to collect a few of each kind and choose your favorites (without going overboard and neglecting the actual work of making music). MeldaProduction makes a vast array of quality instrument and effect plug-ins, but you can pick up 37 of its very useful products for no cost in its MFreeFXBundle.

There are no instrument plug-ins, but this is still the most generous free bundle available. Its plug-ins cover the effect bases with the essential reverb, compressor, distortion, flanger, phaser, filter, ring modulator, and more, but there are also more rare and very useful utilities that your DAW may not include. For example, there is a stereo image widener, an instrument tuner, pitch correction, a visual metronome, a text-editing notepad, and quite a bit more. Also unusual for free plug-ins, the MeldaProduction plug-ins provide waveform displays for almost every effect that deals with audio. For example, the MAutopan performs the programmed panning of a track from left to right in the stereo image, but you can also see and adjust the waveform of the panning oscillator visually. MFreeFXBundle limits you in certain ways—the biggest being the inability to save your own presets. However, you can upgrade the entire bundle to allow preset saving, resizing of the windows, and several other features by paying a whopping $59.  

What to consider when choosing the best music production software

Assuming you have DAW software, which is the foundation for production, this guide concentrates on the best music production collections of audio plug-ins to complement that main software. There are some options, like Reason Studios’ Reason, that actually function as both a plug-in and a standalone DAW, but we’re primarily going to look at the best music production software for specific use cases. 

If you’re in a band and your focus will be on mixing and mastering songs that are mostly recorded from instruments, there are packages that emphasize tone cleaning and sculpting plug-ins over virtual instrument plug-ins. If, on the other hand, you can’t get enough synthesizer sounds or are obsessed with ’80s-esque retro-wave music, there are very synthesizer-focused collections. Composers will use a lot of virtual instrument plug-ins but need sample libraries that are based on acoustic orchestras rather than otherworldly tones, and there are options for that.

Big plug-in collections are investments in your musical career, but you can opt to make that investment as a single upfront price or try one of the growing number of subscription music software packages. Subscriptions allow you to get started producing music now if you don’t have the budget for the full-priced software, and they give you the latest updates to everything. However, many people prefer to pay once and not think about it again, and not all the best music production software is available via subscription.  

If you’re using a hardware controller to work with your DAW software, that same hardware may be able to also give you seamless, hands-on control of your music production plug-ins, as well. Both Native Instruments and Arturia make keyboard controllers that come pre-mapped to work with their music production plug-ins and also offer control over many of the best DAW programs too. 

You keep mentioning DAW software. What, exactly, is it?

Digital audio workstation software is sophisticated, deeply featured software for recording, editing, arranging, and mixing multiple tracks of audio for music, movie/TV productions, podcasting, and so on. They’re names you likely recognize, including Ableton Live, Apple Logic Pro X, FL Studio, and Avid Pro Tools. Most DAWs also support multiple MIDI-note tracks, which use virtual instruments such as synthesizers, drum machines, and samplers. Along with that comes support for third-party effects and processing plug-ins, as well as external hardware controllers. The DAW is what you use for framing the song’s structure, while plug-ins are great for the detailing.

OK, so what should I know about plug-ins?

The plug-in software that DAWs support are individual programs that work inside of the DAW. The producer “plugs in” these programs to an audio or MIDI track in the DAW. Instrument plug-ins generate sound either as digital synthesizers or by triggering audio files such as drum sounds or sampled acoustic instruments. Effect plug-ins treat a DAW track’s audio to some form of processing, such as adding echo or filtering the audio frequencies. Other MIDI plug-ins, such as an arpeggiator, determine how notes are played back, and some plug-ins are strictly visual, such as frequency spectrum analyzers, which present a display of audio waveforms.

Most plug-ins must be used within a DAW program, but some also work as standalone software. There are several common plug-in formats—such as VST, AudioUnits, and AAX—and your DAW software must support a plug-in’s particular format to work with it. All the plug-in collections in this guide support multiple plug-in formats and both Mac and Windows computers, so they will work with all the major DAWs.

FAQs

Q: What is the best music production software for beginners?

Beginners have different goals and different tolerance levels for the difficulty of music programs. But a good place to start is always with free music-making software. You can always pay for something later if you catch the music-making bug and need something better. For Mac or iPad users looking for a starter DAW, the natural choice is Apple GarageBand, the free DAW included with every Mac computer and iPad. And Windows users should check out the free DAW Cakewalk by Bandlab for Windows 7 or higher. Then add in the MeldaProduction MFreeFXBundle and see where the muse takes you without shelling out a cent. However, Bandlab also makes its free, browser-based DAW that anyone can use regardless of their computer’s operating system and without having to download and install anything. Just sign up for an account and the Bandlab online DAW lets you create multitrack songs using a surprisingly large variety of good-sounding virtual drum machines and keyboard instruments, or you can record vocals and other tracks from your computer’s built-in microphone. The DAW’s features are basic enough to not overwhelm beginners but advanced enough to actually get somewhere with your musical ideas. You can play the instruments from your computer’s QWERTY keyboard, and the response time from online DAW is quite fast with a good Internet connection. You can even save your finished song as a stereo MP3 or WAV file. 

Q: What do I need to produce my own music?

When it comes to software-based music production, the most basic setup is simply the software and the computer (or tablet) that runs it. Any DAW software, such as those discussed above or the beginner-friendly Image Line FL Studio, is self-contained enough to allow you to produce complete music with it. You can use the computer’s built-in mic for recording audio and the QWERTY keyboard for playing notes and drums from the software’s virtual instruments. Should you want to expand your setup from there, the most basic and common additions would include a MIDI keyboard for playing instruments and controlling other aspects of the DAW software. Another basic addition is an audio interface and a microphone, like the legendary Shure SM7B, for recording better-quality audio than what you get from a computer’s built-in mic. A USB microphone is essentially an audio interface and a microphone in one piece, so is a good basic option for a new music producer experimenting with home studio vocal takes.

Q: What DAW does Kanye use?

Like many other professional music producers, Kanye West uses Avid Pro Tools software, which is the closest thing to the industry-standard DAW there is, especially among big-budget, large-studio musicians and audio engineers. The highest level of Pro Tools software, Pro Tools Ultimate, is also the priciest DAW out there, setting you back $799/year for a subscription. However, Avid actually offers a free version of the software: Pro Tools First. This version limits the feature set of Pro Tools significantly, but it still carries with it plenty of power for you to get started making music, including 16 tracks of audio recording, 23 included plug-ins, and high-quality audio resolution of 32-bit/96kHz. Plus, you’ll be using the same software as a real-life presidential candidate. Now, if only someone made a free version of Yeezy’s shoes…

The final word on the best music production software

There are so many amazing music plug-ins for using inside your DAW to polish your songs into professional-sounding gems. Choosing the best music production software for you, therefore, comes down to factors other than just quality: your budget, your musical or pro audio focus, and even the compatibility of a plug-in collection with your music controller hardware. If you’re not sure, trying one month at a time of a subscription could help you narrow it down to your final choice. Just make sure you don’t sign up for a yearly commitment if you do that. You’ll soon discover that the biggest drawback to some of these plug-in collections is not enough hours in the day to enjoy them.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best music production software of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Get the leading language learning subscription Babbel for only $149.97 during this exclusive deal https://www.popsci.com/sponsored-content/babbel-exclusive-subscription-deal/ Thu, 19 Oct 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580915
Two iPhones with the Babbel language app pulled up.
Stack Commerce

Learn up to 14 languages and save extra through Oct. 23.

The post Get the leading language learning subscription Babbel for only $149.97 during this exclusive deal appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Two iPhones with the Babbel language app pulled up.
Stack Commerce

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Conquer the language you’ve always wanted to learn or give the gift of knowledge to a friend with a lifetime subscription to Babbel Language Learning (all languages), now price-dropped to only $149.97 (reg. $599) through Oct. 23.

Babbel, a widely praised language-learning platform that has supported millions of users worldwide, is offering a limited-time offer on its lifetime subscription encompassing all its languages. This exclusive deal is the perfect time to finally learn that language you’ve wanted to take on or to get a head start on holiday shopping.

This platform has been recognized as the “Most Innovative Company in Education” by Fast Company, and rightfully so. With Babbel, you can enhance your cognitive abilities and learn a new skill at your convenience using its bite-sized, comprehensive lessons that fit into your hectic schedule. Whether you’re beginning to learn a new language or looking to refine your existing skills, seize this time-limited opportunity to maximize your savings on this top-rated application.

Get the leading language learning subscription Babbel for only $149.97 during this exclusive deal

Explore a world of possibilities with access to all 14 languages, such as Spanish, French, Italian, German, and more. Unlock the potential to acquire valuable lessons, enabling you to master new skills and even pick up a second or third language. The beauty of it is that you can study at your own pace with lifetime access.

Babbel provides over 10,000 hours of practical learning exercises, cutting-edge speech recognition technology to enhance pronunciation, and personalized review sessions to reinforce learning. Additionally, you can utilize Babbel’s offline mode to access pre-downloaded lessons without an internet connection, enabling you to learn at your convenience, anywhere and anytime.

The app’s success is reflected in its remarkable user base of over 10 million worldwide, and it proudly holds an outstanding 4.6 out of 5-star rating on the App Store. What are you waiting for? Embark on the journey of learning a new language with more incredible intuitiveness.

Access a lifetime Babbel (All Languages) subscription today for only $149.97 (reg. $599). You’ll need to act fast because this special offer ends October 23 at 11:59 p.m. PST.

Prices subject to change.

The post Get the leading language learning subscription Babbel for only $149.97 during this exclusive deal appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The Opt Out: Cars are spying on us, and we’re letting them https://www.popsci.com/diy/car-data-privacy/ Thu, 19 Oct 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580441
Car with a license plate saying "data hog"
When buying a new car you probably check for features like milage and size, but never privacy. Lauren Pusateri for Popular Science

Your ride is definitely not the private sanctuary you think it is.

The post The Opt Out: Cars are spying on us, and we’re letting them appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Car with a license plate saying "data hog"
When buying a new car you probably check for features like milage and size, but never privacy. Lauren Pusateri for Popular Science

You are more than a data point. The Opt Out is here to help you take your privacy back.

AMERICANS SPEND A LOT of time in cars. Whether you have a long commute, enjoy riding with friends as they drive around, or just like sitting in the parking lot for a bit of solo time, a car might feel like an extension of your home—an intimate space for you to sing out of tune or seek silence in the middle of your day.

Unfortunately, if you’re in a car that was manufactured within the past few years, that environment isn’t as private as you think it is. Carmakers have been adding sensors, cameras, and microphones to their vehicles to improve safety and usability, but these bits of tech are also collecting a hefty amount of data that the automotive industry and other companies are selling and sharing. And don’t think this applies only to car owners: Your privacy is also at risk if you rent a car or are simply sitting in a passenger seat.  

These newer cars know what you say, where you go, and possibly even whom you’re sleeping with and how often. It’s scary, but what’s scarier is that consumers currently have little choice but to consent. 

More than computers on wheels

Cars have been equipped with onboard computers and sensors for a while now. The tools’ applications have always been rather practical—letting you know when your fuel tank is close to empty or when your machine is due for an oil change, even allowing you to get full system diagnostics via Bluetooth. But as technology advanced, so did the role of electronics within every vehicle. Now cars can help you master parallel parking, respond to your voice commands, and even alert you to the presence of other drivers as you change lanes.

“A lot of this can be used as safety features, but [car companies] are not going to let the opportunity to collect data and make money off of that slip away. They’re not just doing it for safety,” says Jen Caltrider, program director for Privacy Not Included, a series of privacy-focused consumer product reviews, at the Mozilla Foundation. 

The same navigational tool that guides you to your destination, for example, is collecting your location data, and the sensors that show which passenger hasn’t buckled up can tell if you’re alone or not, where people are sitting, and if there’s any movement. Those capabilities alone provide hundreds, if not thousands of data points every day that go straight to the car manufacturer’s servers. It’s hard to tell if any of that information is encrypted or not, Caltrider says.

Other than what your car’s sensors and cameras track, manufacturers also learn about you from other sources. If you’re buying a car, the data harvesting starts with every visit to the dealership or the brand’s website, and it continues when you enlist the help of a bank or some other type of financial institution to pay for your car. Then, when you drive home in your new ride, manufacturers keep gathering data through the car’s app. You can choose not to use the app, but it’s likely you’ll lose access to any vehicle features that require it, such as remote ignition. And then there’s what Caltrider and her team call “connected services,” including insurance companies and navigation and entertainment apps like Here and Sirius XM, which have basically become data brokers in the vehicle data industry. The bad news is that it’s unclear exactly how the information flows, how it’s shared, and where and how it’s stored. 

Your car might know too much about you

In September, Caltrider and her research team at the Mozilla Foundation launched an in-depth analysis of the privacy policies of 25 car companies doing business in the US, including the most popular ones: Toyota, Ford, Chevrolet, and Honda. The results? The Mozilla team labeled cars the worst product category it has ever reviewed for privacy.

When you read the privacy policy for any app or device, it’s common to feel confused. Tech companies have been writing privacy policies for decades, and they generally include broad or vague terms that make you feel as if they care about your data—or at least don’t make it obvious that they don’t. Car privacy policies are different: way more explicit and entirely absurd.

“Car companies are moving into the tech company world,” Caltrider says. “But they’re so inexperienced at it and it really shows.”

One of the wildest privacy policies in the Mozilla Foundation’s report is Nissan’s, which requires users to consent to the collection of sensitive information including sexual orientation, sexual activity, health diagnosis data, and genetic information. The document also says this data can be sold or disclosed to third parties for targeted advertising. It’s not clear how exactly Nissan is collecting this data or if it’s currently capable of doing so, but the fact that you’re agreeing to all of this by simply buying a Nissan is problematic enough. 

And these requirements don’t affect only drivers and car owners, as consent is murky territory in the land of vehicle privacy policies. For one thing, cars don’t grant the same control over data collection that your phone does. Most of the time, car owners will see a request for permissions on a single screen that pops up when they first set up their new car, and they may not be able to go back to it and revoke those permissions later on. 

That also means there’s assumed consent from anybody who steps inside the vehicle. Privacy policies like that of Subaru make it clear that terms and conditions affect everyone on board, regardless of whether they’re the vehicle’s registered owner or not. This means that the company burdens Subaru owners with the responsibility of informing all their passengers about the privacy policy and assumes that people are agreeing to it just by stepping into the car. It’s a safe bet that no ride-share driver or courteous coworker has ever read you a long list of types of data collection you needed to consent to before they’d give you a ride home. 

Car manufacturers, vehicle data hubs, and other actors in the industry, like insurance companies, calm concerned drivers and passengers by promising that the data they collect and save is anonymized, meaning it cannot be traced back to specific people. While anonymizing data is a common practice that’s meant to protect individuals’ privacy, research has shown that it’s not always effective and that the owner of any anonymized data can be easily re-identified when the information is combined with other datasets. This is especially true when location data is involved, Caltrider says. 

As we’ve mentioned, targeted advertising is one of the main uses car companies and third parties have for collecting data with vehicles, but it’s not the only one. More than half of the manufacturers analyzed in the Mozilla Foundation’s report say they can “share your information with the government or law enforcement in response to a ‘request.’” This leaves a lot of room for abuse, as there are no details about whether this request can be as informal as a call or an email to the right person, or if it must be a powerful document, like a court order. 

Unlike with home security cameras, it’s hard to tell exactly how many times these companies have responded to requests from police and other law enforcement agencies. But a 2021 Forbes investigation revealed that both Customs and Border Protection (CBP) and Immigrations and Customs Enforcement (ICE) had been requesting information from three companies in the vehicle data industry, including General Motors, which is the parent company of Buick, Chevrolet, Cadillac, and GMC. 

Regulation is the answer

The automotive industry in the US is huge—it brought more than $156 billion to the US economy in 2022, and more than 75 percent of Americans own a car. You’d imagine that such a rich market would include several car brands privacy-savvy users can choose from, but the Mozilla Foundation report is categorical: When it comes to data protection, they’re all bad

This leaves people who need to buy a new car with little choice but to consent to data collection. And it leaves their passengers with even less choice. Because it’s not only luxury vehicles that come equipped with sophisticated sensors and cameras—classic sedans like the Toyota Corolla and family SUVs like the Ford Escape also have them. As much as we’d like to say there’s an individualistic DIY way to snatch back your privacy, there’s not. You’ll have to appeal to the powers that be.

“Get mad and contact your elected officials,” says Caltrider. “It’s past time the US had a strong federal privacy law.”

She also recommends not using your car’s app, but acknowledges that this is a bandage solution and might not be an option for some people. Some of the features people need, like being able to warm the car in cold weather by turning it on remotely, require the use of the software. 

Using our power as constituents and asking our elected officials for laws that protect our data is the best chance we have of taking back the intimacy we once found inside our vehicles. Car companies simply aren’t going to change on their own—just like tech companies, they have no incentives to do so.

“And it’s not like they have a long history of ethical behavior,” Caltrider says. “They have quite the opposite.”

Read more PopSci+ stories.

The post The Opt Out: Cars are spying on us, and we’re letting them appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best air purifiers for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-air-purifiers/ Mon, 15 Mar 2021 15:59:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-air-purifiers-2/
A lineup of the best air purifiers on a white background
Amanda Reed

Whether you’ve got pets, allergies, or worries about wildfire season, you can look forward to better air quality with one of our well-filtered purifier picks.

The post The best air purifiers for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best air purifiers on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for large rooms Mila Smart Air Purifier Mila Smart Air Purifier
SEE IT

This all-purpose smart air purifier adapts to room size and comes with a carbon monoxide detector and sleep and white noise modes.

Best HEPA A product image of the Coway Tower True HEPA Air Purifier
SEE IT

This HEPA model features four layers of filtration in a stylish design.

Best for allergies InvisiClean Aura II Air Purifier InvisiClean Aura II Air Purifier
SEE IT

Certified to keep you safe from dangerous levels of ozone gas.

Air purifiers suck in pollen, dust, smoke, other allergens, and even viruses—pummeling them and then circulating clean, filtered air. It sounds simple enough, but not all purifiers are created equal, and there isn’t one that’s right for every person. Your particular environment and the size of your home are huge factors in choosing the best option for you. Is allergy season wreaking havoc on your sinuses? Do you live in a smoggy city? Has wildfire smoke been wafting through, blanketing everything in an unnatural haze? In short, even the finest filters aren’t guaranteed to fix all that ails you and your home. But if you’re wondering whether air purifiers are really worth it … we think so. They can help distribute cleaner air, and that’s always a good thing, considering the link between air quality and health. So, read on as we clear the air on what we think are the best air purifiers.

How we chose the best air purifiers

As pet owners and parents, we’ve experienced our fair share of smells and toxins—and that’s just from inside the house. To create this list of the best air purifiers, we relied on peer recommendations, critical reviews, online research, user impressions, and plentiful personal testing. We also examined what each air purifier claims to eliminate from the air, HEPA square footage, and MERV ratings.

The best air purifiers: Reviews & Recommendations

Pollen, pet dander, smells, smoke, germs, and other airborne goblins are no match for the best air purifiers. This list includes quiet air purifiers, ones that double as humidifiers, and even ones that claim they can help with a majority of airborne pathogens.

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This three-in-one smart device automatically adapts to changes in air quality and humidity.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: 400 square feet
  • Dimensions: 36.66 x 11.02 x 12.23 inches
  • App connectivity: Yes
  • Max decibels (dB): 59.8 dB

Pros

  • Connectivity with Siri and Alexa
  • Three products in one
  • Air quality reporting

Cons

  • Expensive

Between its TikTok- and Insta-famous Airwrap multistyler to its line of powerful vacuums, Dyson has made a name for itself in sucking—which we don’t mean negatively. The Dyson Purifier Humidify+Cool Formaldehyde proves yet again that Sir James Dyson really knows what he’s doing when it comes to pushing air out and in. This air purifier uses an intelligent sensing system and Air Multiplier technology to purify, humidify, and cool the air. You don’t even need to touch the stylish, distinctive unit—it automatically senses and reacts to changes in air quality and humidity (we’ve watched one enthusiastically spring to life time and time again after a particularly aggressive sauté session in the kitchen). It even features a solid-state sensor to detect and destroy formaldehyde emitted by household items—a boon if you’re in a newly renovated/refurbished space, as fresh carpet and new mattresses are emitting odd things.

You don’t have to worry about airborne baddies getting re-released into the air since the entire purifier-humidifier is fully sealed to the HEPA H13 standard. If you love numbers, neat tech, and data, this machine will tickle your brain when it reports your air quality in real time on the LCD screen and DysonLink app (which you can use to tweak/schedule usage). The filters are low-maintenance and easy to replace, and the machine features a deep-clean cycle to get rid of mineral build-up and bacteria that may be lurking in the water system. Although it’s almost $1,000, you’re getting three devices for the cost of one. Talk about smart.

Best for large rooms: Mila Smart Air Purifier

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This mold- and carbon monoxide-detecting air purifier comes in different filter configurations for custom air purification.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: 1,000 square feet 
  • Dimensions: 12 x 12 x 15 inches
  • App connectivity: Yes
  • Max decibels (dB): 62 dB but lowers to 24 dB while in room

Pros

  • Stylist
  • Small
  • Carbon monoxide, mold detection, and white noise machine built-in

Cons

  • Reviews note excessive air quality notifications

This classy, app-controllable large room air purifier adapts to the size of whatever room it’s placed in. It also looks great in any room it’s placed in. The filter has 45 square feet of HEPA, and with 447 CADR, it’s effective in rooms up to 1,000 square feet. Additional features include a sleep mode and white noise so that it won’t interfere with your sleeping habits. The device also features a carbon monoxide detector. It will monitor your room’s humidity and let you know if it detects any mold. If you’re not a fan of notifications, disable them if you go with the Mila—reviewers note that the Mila app sends lots of alerts.

Best for small rooms: LEVOIT Air Purifier for Home Bedroom

Levoit

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Take this lightweight, compact air purifier from room to room to experience dual-filter, three-stage filtration in your entire home.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: 161 square feet
  • Dimensions: 6.69 x 6.69 x 10.43 inches
  • App connectivity: No
  • Max decibels (dB): 52 dB

Pros

  • Aromatherapy
  • Dual-filter, three-stage filtration
  • Specifically targets hay fever

Cons

  • Not for large homes

The Levoit promises to help relieve allergies, congestion, and sneezing and is our pick for the best small air purifier. Although we can’t vouch for the unit’s specific efficacy against rhinitis, we can vouch for the fact that it has three filters (one more than most other units): HEPA for dust, pollen, and dander; carbon for odors; and polyester for lint and hair. One fun additional feature is that this one has an aromatherapy option if you’d like a little lavender to help lull you to sleep at night.

Best for quiet: Blueair Blue Pure 311i Max

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Particles down to .1 microns are no match for this quiet-but-powerful air purifier.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: Up to 929 square feet
  • Dimensions: 19 x 12.5 x 12.5 inches
  • App connectivity: Yes
  • Max decibels (dB): 50 dB

Pros

  • Removes particles down to .1 micron
  • Stylish
  • App connectivity

Cons

  • Reviews note occasional problems with auto-sensing

Blueair makes svelte cylinders with Scandinavian style packed with highly effective electrostatic and mechanical filtration. The Blue Pure 311i Max is HEPASilent but deadly … against microbes in the air. This stylish, small air purifier features five fan speeds and a one-touch auto mode with a fine particles (PM 2.5) sensor to monitor concentration and adjust speed according. This air purifier can clean a 387-square-foot room in 12.5 minutes and a 929-square-foot space in 30 minutes (there are both larger and smaller models, so something for every home). And, it snags all those particles (99.97% of them down to 0.1 micron) all nearly undetected, clocking in at 23 dB on low/night mode—louder than a quiet natural area with no wind but softer than a whisper. And it never runs above 50dB, which makes it QuietMark certified and perfect for a bedroom, TV room, any room … plus it’s only 8 pounds, so it’s easy to move around while you decide between your study and your yoga studio (or realize it’s easiest to buy two).

Is it working? We barely hear it. But we also don’t hear ourselves sneezing and wheezing and complaining about our watery eyes, so we’re going with yes. If we need more confirmation, we can look at a five-color LED that changes according to Air Quality Index (AQI), or we can reference an app that gives insight into indoor vs. outdoor pollution and lets you control mode, tweak LED Brightness, set a schedule, and more (assuming the 311i Max and your phone are connected to WiFi). And if we don’t want it to be working, Google Assistant and Alexa compatibility let us turn it off with voice commands if our phone isn’t convenient. While some reviews note that the auto-sensing feature is not as accurate as they hoped, we’ve observed the Blue Pure 311i Max react firsthand thanks to a low smoke-point cooking oil incident or two. It was lively even from across a loft apartment—and helped with the post-coming odors. And the washable pre-filter fabric cover (shown above in “Stockholm Fog” color, quietly complementing some audio-video gear) meshed effortlessly with the decor to boot.

Best HEPA: Coway Tower True HEPA Air Purifier

Coway

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Stylish-meets-powerful with this True HEPA air purifier that features four levels of filtration.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: 330 square feet
  • Dimensions: 10.5 × 32.7 × 10.7 inches
  • App connectivity: No
  • Max decibels (dB): 52 dB

Pros

  • Real-time air sensing
  • Washable pre-filter
  • Air quality indicator

Cons

  • Noisier compared to other air purifiers

Multiple fan speeds, a timer, an air-quality assessor, and a filter-replacement indicator light make this the best HEPA air purifier—not just quiet and effective, but user-friendly. At just under $200, it’s neither cheap nor exorbitant for an air purifier, and it’s also aesthetically pleasing. Reviewers note that this air purifier is noisier than most.

Best with UV light: Germ Guardian True HEPA Filter Air Purifier

Germ Guardian

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This quiet air purifier uses CARB-compliant UVC light and titanium dioxide to reduce airborne bacteria, viruses, and mold spores.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: 153 square feet
  • Dimensions: 10.25 x 6.75 x 21.5 inches
  • App connectivity: No
  • Max decibels (dB): 61.2 dB

Pros

  • Quiet
  • Reduces odors
  • Pre-filter traps allergens

Cons

  • UV light can be bad for the environment

UVC light (the most destructive of all the UVs) in an air purifier works as a UVGI—ultraviolet germicidal irradiation—disinfection method by attacking the DNA of cells floating through the air, like mold spores, viruses, and bacteria. (This means, like all other filters, it cannot do anything for particles that have settled into fabric). An activated charcoal filter reduces odors. The 22-inch purifier filters air four times per hour at maximum speed in rooms up to 153 square feet. The four fan speeds, whisper-quiet operation, and CARB compliance make this air purifier an especially good pick for allergy sufferers. California Air Resources Board (CARB) compliance means you can rest easy about its environmental footprint.

Best for allergies: InvisiClean Aura II Air Purifier

InvisiClean

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: CARB compliance plus four levels of air purification equals an exorcism for your sneezes.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: 319 square feet
  • Dimensions: 12.34 x 6.25 x 17.75 inches
  • App connectivity: No
  • Max decibels (dB): 55 dB

Pros

  • Four fan speeds
  • Quiet
  • CARB compliant

Cons

  • No auto-sensing

The four fan speeds, whisper-quiet operation, and CARB compliance make this air purifier an especially good pick for allergy sufferers. The California Air Resources Board requires purifiers to produce .050 parts per million of ozone or less, so any device with this certification keeps you safe from unsafe gas levels.

Best for smoke: Alen BreatheSmart 75i

Alen

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Detailed air quality indicators, a B7-Pure filter, and a CADR of 347 mean that this air purifier will stop smoke in its tracks.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: 1300 square feet
  • Dimensions: 12 x 19 x 27 inches
  • App connectivity: No
  • Max decibels (dB): 51 dB

Pros

  • 8 colorways
  • Quickly cleans large rooms
  • Auto-adjusts based on air quality

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Little warranty

This is an easy pick for the best air purifier for smoke, thanks to its CADR of 347 (out of 450). Thanks to automatic air-quality detection, when any type of smoke is present, the unit will kick up to turbo. When no irritants are present, the device goes into energy-saving mode. Five air quality colors give you a more detailed visual indicator of air quality—other air purifiers only include three color indicators.

Best portable: WYND Smart Plus Personal Portable Air Purifier

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Take clean air onto the airplane or into the office with this water bottle-sized air purifier developed by NASA and MIT engineers.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: N/A
  • Dimensions: 9.57 x 8.62 x 4.33 inches
  • App connectivity: Yes
  • Max decibels (dB): 55 dB

Pros

  • Small
  • iOS/Android app
  • Medical-grade filter

Cons

  • Expensive for size

This small-but-mighty air purifier designed by NASA and MIT engineers fits in a cup holder and can purify the air in a car in under 15 minutes—that’s eight liters of air per second. And that comes in handy in a world of wildfires and other pollutants you might encounter as you travel—something we know from experience, as one accompanied three passengers in a Honda CR-V through the smoke-heavy American West during fall 2021. And, if you like numbers, the WYND air purifier connects to an iOS/Android app to track real-time hyperlocalized data on dust and other particulates. It also enables you to switch between different purifier presets, like auto and night, control other WYND devices, and alerts you when encountering poor air quality. The included desktop kickstand accessory lets you position the air purifier to direct a clean bubble toward your face (as shown above), giving your nose and lungs instant access to medical-grade filtered air in an office or elsewhere.

Best budget: LEVOIT Air Purifier for Home, Core 300

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This compact air purifier tackles smoke, dust, pollen, bacteria, and viruses without hurting your wallet.

Specs

  • Recommended room size: 219 square feet
  • Dimensions: 8.7 x 8.7 x 16.25 inches
  • App connectivity: No
  • Max decibels (dB): 50 dB

Pros

  • Filter life indicator
  • Timer
  • Quiet

Cons

  • Louder than other air purifiers

This cheap air purifier targets smoke, dust, and pollen, along with some bacteria and viruses. Four specialty replacement filters include a pet-allergy option and a toxin absorber for particularly smoky or smoggy areas. Like higher-end air purifiers that are more expensive, this Levoit air purifier features timer settings and a sleep mode. And the display lights can be turned off to ensure a pitch-black room when sleeping. Although the air purifier is louder than some competitors, it resembles a whooshing fan at its highest setting—if you can deal with that, this air purifier is for you.

What to consider when buying the best air purifiers

The best air purifier for you might not be the one your best friend or neighbor loves. You want a HEPA filter with a high MERV rating that’s designed to cover the amount of space you have in your particular room or dwelling. Beyond that, consider whether you want other features like pathogen-killing UV light, smart controls, and/or odor elimination. Do you need the best air purifier for pets or perhaps something portable? Air purifiers for mold or models to get rid of smoke? Air filters work only on airborne particles. To get at anything that’s settled into upholstery or rugs, you’ll need a handy vacuum, a helpful robot, or something else that offers deep-clean suction.

Size of space

There’s an alphabet soup to make sense of when choosing the best air purifier for your home. ACH (air changes per hour) correlates to the airflow of your device. It’s calculated based on the volume of your space, ceiling height, and how many cubic feet per minute the device can cover. It’s independent of other factors, e.g., the filter’s efficacy—to calculate that you need the CADR (clean air delivery rate) rating; because a HEPA filter is more efficient, its CADR rating may be lower, which is deceptive.

The most important thing to note is that an air purifier’s efficacy cannot be calculated based on square footage alone. You can find handy calculators online to determine the proper purifier for your needs, but here’s what to consider with any device: Will it successfully rid your home of odors with carbon or other comparable filters? Is it a good choice for pet owners? Does it feature UV light? Read the fine print.

HEPA

You’ve likely heard of high-efficiency particulate air, or HEPA, filters. They are a type of pleated air filter that, according to the Environmental Protection Agency, “can theoretically remove at least 99.97% of dust, pollen, mold, bacteria, and any airborne particles with a size of .3 microns.” The smaller the particle, the more penetrating and nefarious it can be. So when you’re shopping for air purifiers, check out their filters’ MERV (minimum efficiency reporting values) rating. The higher the MERV rating, the better it is at trapping the tiniest particles.

Suppose it’s the coronavirus that has you shopping for purifiers. In that case, it should be said that though a HEPA filter should be able to catch a virus of that size, there’s no conclusive proof that an air purifier can kill airborne COVID-19-carrying air droplets. The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention has stated that any room housing a coronavirus patient “should be exhausted directly to the outside, or be filtered through a high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter directly before recirculation.”

If your main concern about your indoor air quality is lingering food or cigarette smoke odors, make sure the model you’re considering specifically targets fumes and other volatile organic compounds. HEPA filters aren’t good at eliminating odors on their own.

The HEPA filter was initially designed to capture radioactive particles when the atomic bomb was being developed because it can capture 99.97 percent of particles as small as .3 microns, which can evade other types of filters. (This is sometimes referred to as “true HEPA,” as European HEPA standards are required to trap only 85 percent of particles.) It works by ensnaring, sieving, and rerouting irritating particles.

A HEPA air purifier is considered the gold standard, but it does have limitations. Any particle smaller than .3 microns—for example, some viruses and VOCs (volatile organic compounds) like aerosols, ammonia, and other toxins—will slip right through. Changing your filter often enough is key. A HEPA filter does a great job of capturing mold. If you don’t change the filter, the purifier can redistribute that mold back into the air.

Allergies

The best air purifiers for allergies depend on what your particular triggers are because different filters work on different-sized particles. Pet hair and pollen are large particles, dust is medium-sized, and smoke is small. A combination HEPA-carbon filter is your best bet for filtering the maximum number of irritants to help reduce your allergies.

The addition of an ionizer and UV light, if you’re comfortable with it, adds a belt to your proverbial suspenders. Because UV light does create ozone particles, we recommend choosing an air purifier with UV light that’s approved for sale in California.

Smoke

Pollutants—like smoke and soot—can aggravate asthma, irritate your eyes, and stress your lungs and heart. An intuitive HEPA purifier with multiple fan speeds, maximum air circulation, and zero ozone output is the best one for allergy sufferers and people who are sensitive to smoke. The best air purifiers for smoke have a higher CADR rating. This means your device will be better at eliminating smoke and its odor, whether you’re talking about cigarettes, cannabis, or wildfires.

FAQs

Q: How much does an air purifier cost?

Even cheap air purifiers aren’t that cheap—they range between $50-$900. So chances are, if you’ve found an option that’s within your budget, you don’t need to second-guess it. Go through all the checkboxes you would for a more expensive model: Does it feature a true HEPA filter? Does your air purifier also feature a carbon filter? Is it ozone-free? If the answers are yes, then go for it. What you’re likely sacrificing are bells and whistles you may not even need, like WiFi capability or large-space efficacy, but still possibly getting other extras, like low-noise operation and triple filtration.

Q: Should I sleep with the air purifier on?

Sure, there’s no reason not to sleep with the air purifier on! An air purifier contributes to an overall healthy home environment, even while you sleep. In fact, many models feature white noise or overnight modes, so they can continue to work without disturbing you (and possibly even helping you sleep).

Q: Where is the best place to position an air purifier?

The best place to position an air purifier is probably not where you think. Don’t stick it in a corner or behind a piece of furniture to conceal it. Beyond that, if there’s a particular pollutant (smoke, food odor) that you’re trying to combat, place the purifier near it. You want it 3 to 5 feet off the ground—so on a table or sill if it’s not a tower-style—and, whenever possible, near sites of good airflow, like doorways and windows. Moving your purifier from place to place helps maximize its efficacy.

Q: Will an air purifier affect my plants?

Your plants should be safe and sound in the presence of an air purifier, with one exception: models that expel ozone. Otherwise, purified air is good for plants, just like it’s good for humans.

Q: Do air purifiers with UV light really offer extra sanitation?

Opinions on whether air purifiers with UV lights are worth it differ. UV can conquer indoor air particles that escape other filters, like bacteria and viruses, but the EPA has said there’s no way to measure the effectiveness of UV filtration. The UV lights are technically considered pesticidal devices—”an instrument or other machine that is used to destroy, repel, trap or mitigate any pests, including bacteria and viruses”—according to the EPA, and it does not review, and therefore cannot endorse, those. UV light creates potentially harmful ozone, as well, although the amount is small.

Final thoughts on the best air purifiers

In almost every category, the best air purifiers have a true HEPA filter and a carbon filter. Together, they get you the most coverage regarding the breadth of pollutants the purifier will attack. Beyond that, the most important qualities are energy efficiency and picking the right model for the size of your room. Everything else—design, whether the device is app-enabled, UV lighting—is just gravy.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best air purifiers for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
You can easily turn your iPhone into a Mac mic https://www.popsci.com/diy/use-iphone-as-mic-mac/ Thu, 19 Oct 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580924
An iPhone on a wooden desk showing the menu to use the device as a microphone.
If you own a Mac and an iPhone, you don't have to splurge on a USB mic to have people hear you clearly in your next meeting. Tyler Lastovich / Unsplash

Living in Apple's gadget ecosystem has its perks.

The post You can easily turn your iPhone into a Mac mic appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
An iPhone on a wooden desk showing the menu to use the device as a microphone.
If you own a Mac and an iPhone, you don't have to splurge on a USB mic to have people hear you clearly in your next meeting. Tyler Lastovich / Unsplash

Video calls are a part of life now, but they can be a nightmare if your hardware is not up to par. You can upgrade your setup with a USB microphone (which can come in real handy if you’re putting up video calls on your TV) but if you’re a Mac user with an iPhone, you already have all you need. 

You can use your phone as a microphone when you make video calls from your Apple computer. This functionality is part of a feature called Continuity Camera, and it’s easy to set up. Any iPhone made after 2018 and running iOS 16 or newer will work, while all Macs running macOS Ventura or newer will fit the bill.  

How to set up Continuity Camera in macOS

To use your phone as a microphone on desktop video calls, you’ll need a Mac and an iPhone signed into the same iCloud account. 

Start by making your computer recognize your handheld device as an available sound source. On the Mac, click the Apple logo in the top-left corner of the screen and open System Settings. In the left-hand panel, go to Sound, and under Output and Input, click the Input tab. 

[Related: 7 tips and tricks to get more out of Apple’s newly updated Messages app]

You will see your iPhone as an audio source—select it. You’ll automatically see a full-screen pop-up on your phone with a couple of buttons. The Pause button on your phone to temporarily mute yourself when on a call, while Disconnect will completely remove your iPhone from your Mac’s audio inputs list. Don’t hit this button unless that’s what you want, otherwise you’ll have to go through the setup all over again. 

Mac audio input settings showing how to setup an iPhone as a microphone.
Before using your iPhone as a mic, you need your Mac to recognize it as an audio input. Screenshot: Apple

Once your computer recognizes your iPhone as a microphone, you can select it as the preferred audio source from most video call apps, including Zoom, Microsoft Teams, and Google Meet. 

  • In Zoom, find the audio settings by clicking zoom.us in the upper left corner of your screen, then go to Preferences, and click the Audio tab. You can choose your iPhone under Microphone. 
  • In Google Meet, click the three dots left of the hangup button in the bottom toolbar and go to Settings. You’ll be able to choose your iPhone in the Microphone options. 
  • In Microsoft Teams, click the three-dot menu to the left of your name, click Settings, and head over to Devices. You can select your iPhone in the Microphone drop down menu. 
Zoom settings showing how to choose an iPhone as an audio input
It’s easy to choose an alternative audio source on most video call apps, including Zoom. Screenshot: Zoom

I’ve found using an iPhone as a microphone during video calls comes in very handy, particularly if I’m part of a group of people taking the call on a single device. I put the phone on the table, between everyone, while my laptop sits far enough so that we all fit into the camera frame. That usually means the microphone is too far away to pick up our voices, so the iPhone is extremely helpful—the speaker can even hold it while they talk and pass it along when they’re done, if necessary. 

[Related: 6 great features to try out in the iOS 17 public beta]

You can also use this feature to turn your laptop into a karaoke machine: your iPhone instantly becomes a wireless microphone. 

The post You can easily turn your iPhone into a Mac mic appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
It’s not too late to stop a bass invasion in the Colorado River https://www.popsci.com/environment/grand-canyon-bass-invasion/ Thu, 19 Oct 2023 10:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580758
Smallmouth bass.
Smallmouth bass. Brett Billings/USFWS

As Lake Powell shrinks, smallmouth bass threaten the Grand Canyon’s native fishes.

The post It’s not too late to stop a bass invasion in the Colorado River appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Smallmouth bass.
Smallmouth bass. Brett Billings/USFWS

This article was originally featured on High Country News.

On July 1, 2022, a National Park Service biologist named Jeff Arnold was hauling nets through a slough off the Colorado River, several miles downstream from Glen Canyon Dam, when he captured three greenish fish lined with vertical black stripes. He texted photos of his catch to colleagues, who confirmed his fears: The fish were smallmouth bass, voracious predators that have invaded waters around the West. Worse, they were juveniles. Smallmouth weren’t just living below the dam—they’d likely begun to breed. 

It was a grim discovery. Smallmouth bass, whose native range encompasses rivers and lakes in much of the Eastern United States and Great Lakes, have long plagued the Colorado River. State agencies and anglers probably began stocking them in the watershed in the mid-1900s, and they’ve since conquered much of the basin, including Lake Powell, the reservoir that sloshes above Glen Canyon Dam. Downriver from the dam, however, lies the Grand Canyon, whose sandstone depths have historically provided a bass-free haven for native fish—most of all, the humpback chub, a federally threatened species endowed with an odd dorsal bulge. Now, biologists realized, neither the canyon nor its chub were safe.

Scientists have long dreaded this development. As Lake Powell has shrunk over the past two decades, drained by overallocation and chronic drought, its diminishment has created prime conditions for bass to infiltrate the Grand Canyon. But Brian Healy, a postdoctoral researcher at the U.S. Geological Survey and Grand Canyon National Park’s former fish biologist, said that even though he and his colleagues expected the species to eventually become a problem, “we didn’t realize it would be an issue so quickly.”

Preventing a bass takeover won’t be simple, biologically or politically. The Colorado’s users expect it to simultaneously serve as a pipeline for water conveyance, a source of cheap electrons, a recreational playground, and, not least, suitable habitat for native fish. For decades, the river’s human managers have uneasily balanced these often contradictory purposes—and now they must also work to exclude smallmouth bass, an immense challenge that may well compete with the river’s many other functions. “The best way to think about this is that everything in the Colorado River is connected to everything else,” said Jack Schmidt, a watershed scientist and emeritus professor at Utah State University’s Center for Colorado River Studies. “Everything has a ramification.” 


FORTY MILLION PEOPLE rely on the Colorado River’s largesse, from Wyoming ranchers to the residents of sprawling Arizona subdivisions to the lettuce farmers in California’s Imperial Valley. Less visibly, the river is also a lifeline for 14 native species of fish. They are rarely seen by humans—the river they inhabit is as turbid as coffee and they’re rarely fished for sport—yet they require a healthy Colorado as much as any Angeleno or Tucsonan. 

“We didn’t realize it would be an issue so quickly.”

Today, however, four of those fish—the humpback chub, the Colorado pikeminnow, the razorback sucker and the bonytail—are federally listed as threatened or endangered. Lake Powell commandeered the Colorado’s payloads of silt and stymied natural floods, erasing channels and backwaters where chubs and suckers once spawned and reared. And smallmouth bass and other invasive species devastated native fish in tributaries like the Yampa River. (“Smallmouth” is a misnomer: Bass have maws so cavernous they can gulp down prey more than half their own size.) Bass arrived in Lake Powell in 1982, courtesy of a hatchery manager who, on a lark, dumped 500 spare smallmouth into the reservoir. The bass, he crowed decades later, “performed magnificently,” adding, “Anglers have caught millions of smallmouth bass over the past 30 years.”

Through it all, the Grand Canyon remained a bass-less sanctuary—thanks, paradoxically, to Glen Canyon Dam. Although smallmouth teemed in Lake Powell, they stayed in the reservoir’s warm, sunlit upper strata, well above Glen Canyon Dam’s penstocks, the massive tubes that convey water through its hydropower turbines and thence downriver. Bass never reached the Grand Canyon because they never swam deep enough to pass through the dam.

As Lake Powell withered, however, so did the Grand Canyon’s defenses. By the spring of 2022, two decades of climate change-fueled drought had lowered the lake’s surface by more than 150 feet, drawing its tepid, bass-filled top layer ever closer to the penstocks. At the same time, the warmer water flowing through the dam and downstream made the Grand Canyon more hospitable to bass. “The temperature was ideal for them,” said Charles Yackulic, a research statistician at the U.S. Geological Survey.

Last summer, after bass swam through Glen Canyon Dam’s penstocks, slipped past its whirling turbines, and apparently reproduced, managers hastened to control the incipient invasion, netting off the slough where Arnold discovered the juveniles as though it were a crime scene. The Park Service also doused the backwater with a fish-killing poison. When biologists electroshocked the river that fall and the following spring, though, they found hundreds more juveniles. The slough wasn’t an isolated beachhead; it was merely a battleground in a broader invasion.

If there is a saving grace, it is that the bass remain concentrated above the cold, clear stretch of river known as Lees Ferry. Humpback chub, by contrast, have their stronghold deep in the Grand Canyon, some 75 miles downriver from the dam, where bass haven’t shown up—at least not yet. “The worry is that you got them in Lees Ferry and they’re reproducing,” Yackulic said. “And then suddenly, you’ve just got all these babies dispersing downstream.”


THE COLORADO RIVER is at once in a state of crisis and rebirth. The decline of Lake Powell has revealed Glen Canyon, the gorgeous red-rock labyrinth that the reservoir drowned in the 1960s. Ironically, the forces behind this restoration are also imperiling native fish. “Last year was the closest we’ve had to a natural thermal regime in more than 50 years,” Yackulic noted. But for the humpback chub, it was a catastrophe.

By the spring of 2022, two decades of climate change-fueled drought had lowered the lake’s surface by more than 150 feet.

River managers thus face a conundrum: How do you preserve native species in a broken ecosystem? In February 2023, the Bureau of Reclamation, the federal agency that controls Glen Canyon Dam, released a draft environmental assessment evaluating four options for manipulating river flows to deter smallmouth bass. The plans are variations on a theme: When the Colorado gets dangerously warm, the agency  releases cold water to lower its temperature below the threshold where bass spawn. Two options—favored by conservation groups like the Center for Biological Diversity—include high-intensity “flow spikes” designed to freeze bass out of sloughs and backwaters. “We need flows that are cold enough for long enough that it prevents smallmouth bass from spawning,” said Taylor McKinnon, the center’s Southwest director. “Not disrupt reproduction—prevent reproduction.”

Managing the Colorado River to thwart bass, however, could conflict with Reclamation’s other goals. For one thing, all four options would release water through Glen Canyon Dam’s “bypass tubes,” outlets closer to Lake Powell’s frigid bottom. But the bypass tubes, as their name suggests, don’t pump water through the dam’s hydroelectric turbines — which, as the agency acknowledges, could lead to “a reduction in the revenue generated from power proceeds.” That possibility doesn’t thrill the Colorado River Energy Distributors Association, which represents electric utilities and co-ops and has warned of “measurable financial impacts” to ratepayers.

Some environmentalists may find themselves at odds with bass deterrence, too. For years, the Glen Canyon Institute has called on river managers to “Fill Mead First,” letting Lake Powell shrivel while sending Colorado’s water downstream to Lake Mead, the river’s other massive reservoir. As scientists pointed out in a 2020 paper, however, this strategy could “lead to warmer water temperatures throughout Grand Canyon” and render invasive fish control “especially problematic.” Indeed, if your sole goal were to protect humpback chub in the immediate term, Lake Powell—whose deep, chilly waters staved off bass for 40 years—might be the first reservoir you’d fill. “The decisions of where you store water in the system are going to determine the fate of native fish,” said Utah State’s Schmidt.

Although last winter’s strong snowpack should ultimately raise Lake Powell’s surface by around 70 feet, the invasion continues. Scientists have so far pulled 667 bass from the slough this year, along with thousands of carp and sunfish, two other warm-water nonnatives. The Park Service poisoned the slough again in late August, but that fix is clearly neither complete nor lasting. In February 2023, a group of researchers convened to study the bass problem by the Bureau of Reclamation and U.S. Geological Survey recommended outfitting Glen Canyon Dam with “fish exclusionary devices”—basically fancy nets—to keep bass from swimming through the penstocks. That’s hardly a new idea—biologists first recommended that the Bureau “pursue means” of preventing invasive fish from passing through the dam in 2016 —but, at an August meeting of federal managers and researchers, one Reclamation official claimed that an effective screen design is still at least five years away.

Ultimately, staving off the bass crisis may call for even more ambitious fixes. In one paper, Schmidt and his colleagues raised the idea of drilling colossal diversion tunnels that would funnel water and sediment around Glen Canyon Dam and thus restore the silty, flood-prone conditions that favor native fish. Re-engineering the Colorado would be neither simple nor cheap, but, in recent comments to the Bureau, McKinnon and other conservationists claimed that the “climate-inevitable obsolescence” of Glen Canyon Dam calls for drastic measures. If bass take over an ever-warmer river, McKinnon said, “it’s game over.”

Ben Goldfarb is a High Country News correspondent and the author of Eager: The Surprising, Secret Life of Beavers and Why They Matter. His next book, on the science of road ecology, will be published by W.W. Norton in 2023.

The post It’s not too late to stop a bass invasion in the Colorado River appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
A third of American schools don’t have a nurse, and that is a big problem https://www.popsci.com/health/school-nurses-need/ Wed, 18 Oct 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580282
Child knee with gauze bandage. Close-up view.
School nurses treat children daily for a wide range of illnesses and injuries. DepositPhotos

School nurses sometimes serve as a young patient’s only health provider. Yet many states don’t require them, and school districts struggle to hire them.

The post A third of American schools don’t have a nurse, and that is a big problem appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Child knee with gauze bandage. Close-up view.
School nurses treat children daily for a wide range of illnesses and injuries. DepositPhotos

This article was originally published on KFF Health News.

Jodi Bobbitt, the school nurse at William Ramsay Elementary in Alexandria, Virginia, is always ready to see children with a wide range of injuries and illnesses. One day during the first week of school, the parade started before the first bell when a little girl walked in with red, irritated eyes.

Then it got busy.

A student fell from the monkey bars and another tripped while playing tag. Two kids hit each other’s heads with lunchboxes and needed ice packs. A young boy had a stomachache. Bobbitt also saw her regular kiddos: one who has special needs and uses a wheelchair and another who has diabetes and gets his blood sugar checked daily before lunch.

“Every day, I’m seeing more and more [youngsters],” Bobbitt, who is a certified nurse practitioner, said with a smile. “I saw more today than yesterday, so we just have to wait and see what the year has in store.”

As the only school nurse at this suburban Washington, D.C., elementary school, Bobbitt’s responsibilities extend beyond treating scraped knees and sniffles for the school’s 600 pupils. At her under-the-sea-themed clinic, she administers medications, teaches kids about health care, and conducts routine health screenings. As the school nurse, she also serves as a public health point person—tracking student vaccinations, linking parents to local health care resources, and communicating sometimes difficult messages to them, such as warnings about sexually transmitted diseases and signs of depression.

It’s a full plate, but Bobbitt considers herself lucky. In a previous school nursing job, she split her time between two buildings within the same school district—some years three. What hasn’t changed is that school nurses play a critical role in keeping students healthy and ready to learn, but it’s an often-unrecognized field for which schools struggle to attract and retain employees.

More than a third of schools nationwide don’t have a full-time nurse on-site, according to a 2021 survey by the National Association of School Nurses. The schools that don’t have a dedicated nurse either share one with other campuses, or don’t have one at all. Meanwhile, the nation is facing high rates of chronic illnesses among K-12 students, such as diabetes and asthma, along with an unprecedented mental health crisis among youth, and school nurses are at the front lines—often, alone.

School nurses’ roles were further complicated by covid-19. Since the pandemic took hold, they’ve been tasked with tracking cases and tracing exposures. An “extreme load of work was put on school nurses’ shoulders during the pandemic,” said Kate King, president of the NASN.

They got caught in the middle between anti-maskers and maskers and anti-vaccine and pro-vaccine parents, and were the point of contact whenever students had to quarantine. “School nurses are used to interacting with parents who are angry,” said King, but because of the pandemic “that anger just got to levels we had never seen before.”

In general, kids’ attendance and learning can suffer when students don’t have access to a school nurse. “You’re going to see more absences,” she said, citing a study from the Journal of School Nursing that found students with illnesses or injuries were sent home 18% of the time when evaluated by an unlicensed school employee while only 5% went home after being seen by a school nurse.

Teachers and administrators are shouldering some of the burden by learning how to handle injuries and illnesses themselves, but “it doesn’t take the place of having a school nurse who can respond immediately,” King said.

Though there is no federal law requiring schools to have nurses on staff, the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention recommends at least one full-time nurse for every 750 students enrolled—but most states are missing the mark by miles. School nurses in California have one of the heaviest workloads in the country with a student-to-school-nurse ratio of 2,410 students for every nurse, according to the Public Policy Institute of California.

According to research organization Child Trends, California, along with 34 other states and the District of Columbia, requires schools to employ school nurses. Of those, 12 set required nurse-to-student ratios. Seven states encourage schools to have nurses on staff. Eight states don’t have mandates on the books.

Still, schools were scrambling over the summer to hire nurses.

Jessica Sawko, director of education for Children Now, a California-based nonprofit organization, said schools struggle not only to retain nurses but also encourage aspiring nurses to consider working in schools. Districts can’t compete with the salaries and benefits hospitals offer. The national median salary for school nurses is nearly $55,000 a year, but a registered nurse could make nearly $30,000 more annually working at a hospital.

In some states, school nurses need special certification in addition to their nursing degrees.

The lack of school nurses is a byproduct of a larger issue: the nation’s overall nursing shortage. Health organizations in general — even those that offer healthy salaries—are facing difficulties hiring and keeping nurses. Around 40% of nurses who participated in a 2023 survey by McKinsey & Co. said they were considering leaving their position.

As a nurse for junior high students, King said she is keenly aware that school nurses sometimes serve as students’ only contact with a health care professional, especially at her campus.

World Language Middle School in Columbus, Ohio, where King works, has a diverse student body and takes in many students who are new to the country. “So that requires school nurses like myself to have a very broad range of knowledge of diseases and symptoms,” she said.

Robin Wallin, director of school health services for Alexandria City Public Schools, said that another layer of this issue is that school nursing “is an aging cohort.” The district has at least one school nurse in each of its 18 campuses — but this year it was a challenge to fill every spot. That’s partly because many school nurses are aging out, starting to retire, she said. “We need to start to replenish our cohorts.”

Bobbitt said the nursing students who shadow her almost never imagine themselves working in a school. “They want to work in the ER, they want to work in the hospital, they want to work in the NICU, or somewhere where they can have that adrenaline,” Bobbitt said. “This is a little different,” she said, adding that it is fast paced in its own way.

Robin Cogan is a clinical coordinator at Rutgers University’s School Nurse Specialty Program in New Jersey, and she said one of the biggest learning curves for nurses who opt to work in school settings is that they are “often an independent practitioner,” which involves juggling a lot of responsibilities.

Meanwhile, Bobbitt, working in her brightly colored clinic, stays focused on her daily mission: to address the students’ needs as quickly as possible. “We don’t want them to miss very much school or much class work,” Bobbit said. “That’s our goal, right?”

KFF Health News is a national newsroom that produces in-depth journalism about health issues and is one of the core operating programs at KFF—an independent source of health policy research, polling, and journalism. Learn more about KFF.

Subscribe to KFF Health News’ free Morning Briefing.

The post A third of American schools don’t have a nurse, and that is a big problem appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Small planes are still spewing toxic lead across the US, EPA says https://www.popsci.com/technology/epa-small-plane-leaded-fuel/ Wed, 18 Oct 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580795
Small propeller plane flying in a clear sky
Piston-engine small aircraft are the only planes to still use leaded fuel in the US. Deposit Photos

The agency says the more than 220,000 piston-engine aircraft still running on lead fuel are a public health concern under the Clean Air Act.

The post Small planes are still spewing toxic lead across the US, EPA says appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Small propeller plane flying in a clear sky
Piston-engine small aircraft are the only planes to still use leaded fuel in the US. Deposit Photos

Airborne lead levels in the US have declined an impressive 99 percent since 1980 thanks to Environmental Protection Agency regulations, but leaded gas isn’t gone completely. While large jet aircraft do not use leaded fuel, according to the Federal Aviation Administration, over 220,000 smaller, piston-engine aircraft capable of carrying between two and 10 people still run on leaded aviation gasoline, or “avgas.” 

Today, the EPA took its first step towards attempting to finally phase out air transportation’s lingering lead holdouts with a new endangerment finding announcement highlighting the adverse effects of even minuscule levels of airborne lead. With the new findings, the EPA argues that leaded avgas endangers public health and welfare under the Clean Air Act—and because of this, the US could finally see its first-ever avgas lead limitations.

“The science is clear: Exposure to lead can cause irreversible and life-long health effects in children,” EPA Administrator Michael Regan via the agency’s October 18 announcement. “Aircraft that use leaded fuel are the dominant source of lead emissions in our air.”

[Related: The US can’t get away from lead’s toxic legacy.]

The federal level determination earned support from legislators including House Science, Space, and Technology Committee Ranking Member Zoe Lofgren (D-CA). “[The] EPA’s conclusion confirms what constituents in my district and Americans across the country know all too well—emissions from leaded aviation fuel contribute to dangerous lead air pollution,” Lofgren said via the announcement. She also cited the disproportionate exposure to leaded avgas in many poorer and minority communities near general aviation airports.

Lead’s neurotoxic effects have long been understood, especially its dangers to younger children, as it  negatively affects cognitive abilities and slows physical growth. In 2022, the Centers for Disease Control announced a redefinition of “lead poisoning,” lowering the threshold for toxic exposure from 5 micrograms per deciliter of a child’s blood down to just 3.5 mgs per deciliter. Even with the added stringency, however, the EPA reiterated in its October 18 announcement that there is no evidence of any threshold to fully reduce lead exposure’s harmful effects.

[Related: Leaded gas may have lowered the IQ of 170 million US adults.]

The new avgas endangerment finding does not carry any regulatory or legal weight itself. Instead, it opens the door to a future phaseout of avgas for small aircraft. Last year, the FAA and industry leaders announced their “Eliminate Aviation Gasoline Lead Emissions” (EAGLE) program aiming to “achieve a lead-free aviation system” by 2030. The FAA has already approved usage of a 100 octane unleaded fuel capable of being used by piston-engine aircraft, although the EPA notes it is not yet commercially available. A lower octane fuel is also available at an estimated 35 US airports, with plans to “expand and streamline the process for eligible aircraft to use this fuel.”

As The Washington Post notes, however, the EPA’s and FAA’s attempts to phase out avgas come as Congress considers a long-term reauthorization of the FAA that would all but require smaller airports to continue offering leaded avgas.

“While today’s announcement is a step forward, we cannot be complacent,” Lofgren added on Wednesday. “We must finish the job and protect our nation’s children from all sources of lead.”

The post Small planes are still spewing toxic lead across the US, EPA says appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best cheap electric guitars for shredding in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-cheap-electric-guitars/ Wed, 18 Oct 2023 20:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580801
Best cheap electric guitars sliced header
Tony Ware

Thes sub-$300 guitars feel and sound better than their price tags suggest.

The post The best cheap electric guitars for shredding in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best cheap electric guitars sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Blue Donner DST-400 budget electric guitar on a Southwestern rug Donner 39-inch Electric Guitar with Case
SEE IT

It strikes the ideal harmony between advanced features and affordable pricing.

Best value A red Epiphone Power Player Les Paul guitar leaning to the right on its case on a plain background Epiphone Power Player Les Paul
SEE IT

Solid construction and excellent pickups make this a great guitar to grow into.

Best kit A light green Fender Squier Affinity Stratocaster Limited Edition guitar with its case on a plain background Fender Squier Affinity Stratocaster Bundle
SEE IT

Get everything you need to start playing in one convenient box.

Learning an instrument can be expensive, but a cheap electric guitar can provide a great place to start. In this case, “cheap” doesn’t mean “bad.” Many well-known guitar brands have specific budget- and beginner-friendly lines for players just starting out. These lines often share major characteristics and similar hardware of professional guitars in higher price brackets. A cheap electric guitar also means you won’t dump too much money into your new (and potentially fleeting) hobby if you decide that you’re not ready for the rockstar lifestyle. Shred some power chords—not the cash in your wallet—with the best electric guitars. 

How we chose the best cheap electric guitars 

We don’t mean to brag, but many of the PopSci Gear team know a thing or two about guitars. Although we’ve been in plenty of bands, we’ve also been beginners ourselves. We combined our personal experience with recommendations from professional music pals. We also heavily researched reviews from trusted sources to narrow our picks. To make sure each guitar was truly cheap, we capped prices at $300. Only one guitar on this list exceeds that range, but we had very good reason to make an exception, which we’ll explain.

The best cheap electric guitars: Reviews & Recommendations

From short-lived high school bands formed in garages to far-away travel gigs where you don’t want to bring your prized, expensive guitar on a budget airline, a cheap guitar can be a valuable addition to your guitar stand or rack. One of our choices should help you live out your rockstar dreams. 

Best overall: Donner 39-inch Electric Guitar

Julian Vittorio

SEE IT

Specs

  • Body: Solid alder, gloss polyester finish
  • Scale length: 25.5 inches
  • Fretboard: Laurel, 9.5-inch radius, 22 medium-jumbo frets
  • Accessories: Gig bag, guitar strap, guitar cable

Pros

  • Includes accessories
  • Classic style
  • Versatile single-coil and humbucker pickups

Cons

  • Need proper set-up for long-term playability

The Donner DST-400 is the ideal vision for what we want in a cheap electric guitar. It’s budget-friendly, but its solid body and reliable production quality control allow it to last well past your early stages. It includes both single-coil and humbucker pickups to play a wide range of styles, and its classic design means it will never go out of style. It feels great to play and is ready to go right out of the box. 

It also includes basic accessories to get you started: A gig bag, a guitar strap, and a guitar cable. You’ll need to upgrade your amp after the beginner stages, but there’s no better deal than this Donner. 

Best for beginners: Fender Squire Sonic Stratocaster Electric Guitar

Fender

SEE IT

Specs

  • Body: Poplar
  • Scale length: 25.5 inches
  • Fretboard: Maple, 9.5-inch radius, 21 narrow tall frets
  • Accessories: No

Pros

  • Well-built for price
  • Feels good in hands
  • Recognizable body

Cons

  • Doesn’t come with accessories

The Stratocaster is one of the music scene’s most iconic and recognizable guitars. You’re in good company if you pick one up, too. Greats like Buddy Holly, George Harrison, and Jimi Hendrix have called the Stratocaster their choice guitar. Beginners can get in on the fun without shelling out too much cash with Fender’s Squire line, which gives you a reliable instrument made with low cost in mind. Its thin, lightweight body and matte neck feel good in your hands, and it has a similar feel and tone to more expensive Strats. Experienced players will hear the difference in pickups: This one comes with ceramic single-coil pickups, while a traditional Strat comes with alnico (short for aluminum, nickel, and cobalt) pickups. But to a newcomer, it’s a solid guitar that punches above its price point. 

Best for metal: Jackson JS32 Dinky DKA-M Electric Guitar

Jackson

SEE IT

Specs

  • Body: Solid basswood
  • Scale length: 25.5 inches
  • Fretboard: Maple, 12” compound radius, 24 jumbo frets
  • Accessories: No

Pros

  • Big tone for low price
  • Ready to play out of the box
  • Quality construction

Cons

  • A bit more expensive than our other choices

If you’re looking for a guitar that doesn’t cost much but shreds a lot, this is the one for you. The neck is comfortable even when playing fast, speedy passages and its lightweight body doesn’t drag you down over the course of a set. Its solid construction holds up well for years and years, and it’s another choice that plays above its price. It’s playable out of the box and sounds punchy and vicious. It’s more expensive than our other picks, but only by $100. We think its design made for shredding is worth that extra dough.

Best kit: Fender Squier Affinity Stratocaster Limited Edition Bundle

Fender

SEE IT

Specs

  • Body: Poplar
  • Scale length: 25.5 inches
  • Fretboard: Maple, 9.5-inch radius, 21 medium-jumbo frets
  • Accessories: 10G amplifier, gig bag, instrument cable, tuner, strap, picks, and instructional DVD

Pros

  • Comes with an instructional DVD
  • Lots of bonus accessories
  • Incredible price for what you get

Cons

  • Reviews note some items from bundle are missing from order

This kit is a one-stop solution if you want to buy a guitar but don’t know where to start. The Fender Squire Affinity Stratocaster is the next price step up from the Sonic series, and the medium jumbo frets make for smooth playing. The amp is perfect for practicing at home, and the included instructional DVD means you don’t have to shell out cash for lessons. Some reviews note that their order arrived incomplete; the same reviews also noted that the seller is responsive and happily sends any missing items.

Best value: Epiphone Power Player Les Paul

Epiphone

SEE IT

Specs

  • Body: Mahogany
  • Scale length: 22.73 inches
  • Fretboard: Laurel, 12-inch radius, 22 frets
  • Accessories: Gig bag, strap, picks, guitar cable

Pros

  • Small scale
  • Iconic guitar
  • Stays in tune longer

Cons

  • Not great for someone looking for longevity

The Les Paul is an iconic guitar named and created by Les Paul, a prolific jazz, country, and blues guitar player. The Les Paul guitar is one of the most versatile guitars. It can tackle rock, blues, and jazz and is perfect if you’re looking for a full and resonant sound. This one comes from Gibson’s Epiphone line, which is similar to Fender’s Squire line. It’s a great size for youths and makes for a great travel guitar for more experienced players. It has a comfortable neck and stays in tune longer compared to other student models. Plus, humbucker pickups make even the easiest of chords sound rich, warm, and heavenly. This is a guitar made with students in mind, so it might need to be replaced as the player grows. 

What to consider when buying the best cheap electric guitars

Not all axes are made the same. Here’s what to look for when shopping for the best cheap electric guitars. 

Scale length

Scale length is the distance between the nut of the guitar and the bridge. Shorter scales can be good for younger players who don’t have large enough hands for bigger instruments. A normal scale for a guitar is around 25 inches. However, guitars with a shorter scale have less string tension, which is a recipe for fret buzzing (when the note sounds “fuzzy” because you’re not pressing hard enough on the string) and intonation problems. 

The fret distance on a 25.5-inch scale guitar only differs about a thousandth of an inch from that of a 24.75-inch scale guitar. That may not sound like much, but the difference is noticeable for players. At the end of the day, it matters that the guitar feels right in your hands, and choosing the right scale helps with that. 

Pickups

Without pickups, your electric guitar would just be a quiet, terrible-sounding acoustic. These magnetic components sit under the strings and convert the vibrations from the strings into electrical current and eventually sound.

Single-coil and humbuckers (double coil) are the most well-known designs of pickups:

  • Single coil: Brighter, crisper, work better with clean sounds, more note definition between strings.
  • Humbuckers: Warmer, darker, work better with distorted sounds, less note definition between strings. 

Pickups generate two kinds of voltage:

  • Passive: Generates voltage with magnets only. Guitars with passive pickups are generally cheaper and create more expression because they’re sensitive to the vibration of the strings. 
  • Active: Generates voltage with weaker magnets that are supported by a preamp. Greater tonal clarity. They create more tonal consistency at different volumes.

Versatility

Different guitars generate different timbres (the quality of the note), which suit specific genres. You can always change the sound with the pedals on your pedalboard, but some tones come inherent to the guitar. A Fender Stratocaster is great for rock, pop, blues, jazz, punk, and heavy metal. A Gibson Les Paul is excellent for rock, country, pop, soul, and rhythm and blues.

Fretboard radius

The lower a fretboard’s radius, the more curve it has. Predictably, a higher number translates into a flatter fretboard. Why does that matter? It all goes back to how the guitar feels in your hands. Choosing a fretboard radius is based on preference. Some musicians think curved fretboards are better for chords, while others feel flatter fretboards help them with bar chords.

Player experience

You don’t need to look too deep into things like pickups if you’re a beginner. However, you can save more bang for your buck if you look for a guitar that’s great for beginners and can grow with you as you improve as a musician. The Donner 39-inch Electric Guitar is an example of a beginner-friendly guitar that’s cheap and won’t need to be replaced after a year or two of learning. 

FAQs

Q: Do I need more than one electric guitar?

It depends. If you’re using different tunings for different songs, having a specific guitar for that tuning can make it easier to switch from one tuning to another. Guitars also have certain tones, from the crisp, cleanness of a Fender Stratocaster to the absolute sonic racket of a Gibson Les Paul. 

Q: How long do cheap electric guitars last? 

With good care, even a cheap electric guitar can last between 20-30 years. 

Q: Do electric guitars hurt less? 

By “hurt less,” we assume you’re talking about the raw, throbbing pain on your fingertips when you first begin to play. Electric guitars have a thinner neck, less space between frets (making it easier to reach each note in a chord), and the strings sit closer to the fretboard. This means it requires less pressure and a lighter touch to play a note. However, the only true way you’ll “hurt less” when playing the guitar is practicing, which will build up your calluses and finger strength.

Q: How do I choose the right guitar pickups?

That is an entire article in itself! To make a long answer short, it depends on personal preference and what you’d like your signature sound to be. A pickup alone also doesn’t determine your sound: neck and body tonewoods also have an effect. There is no wrong answer when it comes to choosing a guitar pickup

Q: How much does a cheap electric guitar cost?

Depending on the build, a cheap electric guitar will run you between $140-$400.

Final thoughts on the best cheap electric guitars 

If you want to learn to play guitar but don’t want to spend a lot of money, consider a cheap electric guitar. They’re perfect for beginners who may not want to invest a ton of cash into a new hobby, or for those who want to learn guitar on a budget. Many guitar makers have specific, beginner-friendly lines that are easy on your wallet—just add a stand and a practice amp and you’re set. Now get to practicing, you rockstar. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best cheap electric guitars for shredding in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
What are carrier strike groups, the ships the US sent near Israel? https://www.popsci.com/technology/us-aircraft-carrier-strike-groups/ Wed, 18 Oct 2023 19:00:07 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580846
The USS Gerald R. Ford seen on Oct. 11 in the eastern Mediterranean Sea. The ship next to it is the USNS Laramie.
The USS Gerald R. Ford seen on Oct. 11 in the eastern Mediterranean Sea. The ship next to it is the USNS Laramie. Jacob Mattingly / US Navy

The main vessel is a 1,092-foot-long aircraft carrier, but these strike groups include other ships too. Here's what's in them.

The post What are carrier strike groups, the ships the US sent near Israel? appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The USS Gerald R. Ford seen on Oct. 11 in the eastern Mediterranean Sea. The ship next to it is the USNS Laramie.
The USS Gerald R. Ford seen on Oct. 11 in the eastern Mediterranean Sea. The ship next to it is the USNS Laramie. Jacob Mattingly / US Navy

On October 8, Secretary of Defense Lloyd Austin ordered the USS Gerald R. Ford Carrier Strike Group to the eastern Mediterranean, as part of an American response to the surprise and staggering attack on Israel’s military and civilians by the armed group Hamas. Then, on October 14, Austin sent the USS Dwight D. Eisenhower Carrier Strike Group to the eastern Mediterranean. 

The United States Navy maintains 11 carrier strike groups, which are formations including not just the namesake carrier and its aircraft, but also an escort fleet of other ships. The carriers are the most visible, tangible expression of naval power abroad, and the deployment of two carrier strike groups is both a threat of force and shows where the US most wants to attempt to deter the outbreak of further violence through that show of force.

The attack that sparked the deployment of the two US carrier groups to the eastern Mediterranean started with bulldozers, drones, motorboats, and paragliders. Gaza is home to two million Palestinians, of whom about half are under the age of 18. Hamas, the militant group elected to power in the Gaza Strip in 2006 and which has not held an election since, broke through the wall maintained by Israel around the Gaza Strip, and launched attacks killing an estimated 1,400 people in Israel, including civilians. Retaliatory airstrikes, launched by Israel’s military against Gaza, have killed over 2,700 people, including civilians, and rendered hundreds of thousands homeless. The death totals, especially in Gaza, continue to increase, as hospitals run out of supplies. The situation is evolving and has complex roots.

Beyond Hamas and Israel, there’s a chance that the outbreak of violence could expand to involve regional military players, like Iranian-backed Hezbollah north of Israel in Lebanon, Iran itself, or other countries in the region. President Joe Biden has traveled to Israel to meet with its government. 

An aircraft carrier, complete with escort ships and fighter firepower, is designed to fight the planes and ships of nations more than it is built to root out fighters with rifles hiding in city blocks. In the October 8 announcement of the deployment, Austin said the Ford Carrier Strike Group was being deployed to the eastern Mediterranean to “bolster regional deterrence efforts.” In the October 14 announcement, the Eisenhower Carrier Strike Group’s deployment was part of moves to “signal the United States’ ironclad commitment to Israel’s security and our resolve to deter any state or non-state actor seeking to escalate this war.”

To better understand the US force projection in response to this outbreak of violence, it is important to understand aircraft carriers, and the fleets that escort them.

What is a carrier strike group?

Alone, an aircraft carrier is a powerful weapon. The size of a small town, one carrier can be a tempting target. The Nimitz-class carriers, which make up most of the US carrier fleet at present, carry around 5,000 to 5,200 people. This crew is primarily devoted to operating and maintaining the ship, which is powered by a pair of nuclear reactors, while about 1,500 of that crew is dedicated to flying and maintaining the 60 or more aircraft flown from a carrier. 

Ford-class carriers, the planned replacement for the Nimitz class, are crewed by just over 4,500 people total, and can carry and launch over 75 aircraft. (Currently there is one Ford-class carrier in the fleet, which is the USS Gerald R. Ford.) Both Nimitz and Ford-class carriers are 1,092 feet long, their decks constituting the runway for takeoff and landing of planes at sea.

Because carriers are so large—by design, they have to be—they make enticing targets for enemies at war. “Carrier Group” as a phrase first appears in the Popular Science archives in a July 1985 story called “Invisible Subs” that describes ships as either “submarines or targets.” The ship-mounted weapons on carriers are largely defensive: anti-air and anti-missile Sea Sparrow missiles, Phalanx Close-In Weapon Systems designed to intercept rockets, and other projectiles with radar-targeted bullets.

Those weapons should be seen as a last line of defense for carriers. The first lines of defense are the other ships that accompany carriers as they move about the globe.

In Secretary Austin’s announcements, he names specific ships in each carrier group. The USS Gerald R. Ford is escorted by the Ticonderoga-class guided missile cruiser USS Normandy, as well as the Arleigh-Burke-class guided missile destroyers USS Thomas Hudner, USS Ramage, USS Carney, and USS Roosevelt. The USS Eisenhower is escorted by the guided-missile cruiser USS Philippine Sea, guided-missile destroyers USS Gravely and USS Mason, and is carrying the nine aircraft squadrons of Carrier Air Wing 3. In general, a carrier group has between three and four surface ships escorting it, as well as an assumed (but not announced) attack submarine traveling near the fleet underwater.

Carrier Air Wing 3 includes four squadrons of F/A-18E Super Hornets, jet fighters that can fly over 1,200 nautical miles; these jets can carry a range of weapons including anti-air missiles, anti-ship missiles, guided and unguided bombs, and more. These planes are the primary strike force of the carrier group, allowing the US Navy to attack and destroy vehicles, people, and buildings far from shore. In addition to the strike fighters, a carrier air wing includes E-2C Hawkeyes, which are big flying tactical radars; EA-18G Growlers, which carry electronic warfare weapons for jamming and obscuring enemy sensors; and Seahawk helicopters, which can be used to launch anti-tank missiles and for submarine hunting, among other roles.

The Ticonderoga-class guided missile cruisers are, as the name suggests, armed with an array of missiles, including cruise missiles to hit targets on land, as well as anti-submarine missiles and torpedoes to protect against enemies underwater. Guided missile destroyers are similarly armed, with anti-air missiles as well as part of the regular complement.

Much of the equipment of a carrier strike group is built around the particular vulnerability of aircraft carriers to anti-ship missiles and submarines—threats that are unlikely to be a factor for deployments in the eastern Mediterranean. The offensive firepower, from cruise missiles to guided bombs dropped by fighter jets, enable the carrier groups to pose an outsized threat. 

The presence of a carrier strike group can be seen as a form of deterrence, and deterrence is a strategic bet that the presence of massive retaliatory power is enough to prevent an armed group from trying to advance their political aims through violence. If the actions of other armed groups in the region can be shifted, deterred, or delayed by the presence of the US Navy, this would be the force that can do it.

The post What are carrier strike groups, the ships the US sent near Israel? appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best smart home security systems of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-smart-home-security-systems/ Thu, 02 Feb 2023 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=509217
A lineup of the best smart home security systems on a white background.
Amanda Reed

How smart is a home that doesn’t feel secure? Here’s how to feel safer in 2023 with the help of intelligent protective tech.

The post The best smart home security systems of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best smart home security systems on a white background.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A white SimpliSafe 10-piece smart home security system on a blue and white background. SimpliSafe 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System
SEE IT

Comes with everything you need for security inside and outside your home.

Best customer service A Ring 14-piece security system on a blue and white background Ring Alarm Pro, 14-Piece
SEE IT

Talk to a real person and get your questions answered fast.

Best budget A Tolviviov smart home security system on a blue and white background Tolviviov Wi-Fi Door Alarm System
SEE IT

Easy to use for people of all technical skill levels.

If you’re worried about crime impacting your household, it makes perfect sense to buy one of the many smart home security systems that have popped up over the past few years. However, with abundance comes analysis paralysis. To what system should the savvy, safety-conscious consumer turn? We investigated the market to bring you the best smart home security systems so you can pick the best choice for your living situation and loved ones.

How we chose the best smart home security systems

While nearly every product you buy enters your home at some point, there is something particularly intimate about inviting in a smart home security system. Unlike shoes—something that only needs to function well enough when called upon—your smart home security system needs to function perfectly 24/7/365. That’s why one of the bigger ranking factors this time was brand satisfaction. Cybersecurity and data protection were other key factors because, while less is often more, in the world of security more really is more. You’re only as strong as your weakest entry point.

This guide was compiled after many hours of careful research; facts and opinions were cross-examined by editors. Ordinary users were asked about their experiences using these devices, and we interacted with customer service agents throughout the course of compiling this guide. Each company’s personal website and plan information were thoroughly checked for the most up-to-date service plan information possible.

The best smart home security systems: Reviews & Recommendations

Our selection of smart home security systems comes from a wide variety of well-known and trusted brands with a broad array of attached services. While kits differ, they all typically include sensors for your doors and/or windows and an alerting mechanism. One of our picks is sure to match your budget and lifestyle.

Best overall: SimpliSafe 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System

SimpliSafe

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The SimpliSafe 10-Piece system is a very complete kit that starts the security before your door is opened.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Easy
  • Sensors: 4 door/window sensors, 2 motion sensors, 1 indoor camera, 1 outdoor camera
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: $28/mo. (Optional)
  • Smart protocols: N/A, but Alexa- and Nest-compatible

Pros

  • Outdoor cam so your security starts before an intruder enters your home
  • Comes with one free month of 24/7 professional monitoring service
  • The variety of parts gives you a more complete sense of security
  • Optics and branding

Cons

  • Must learn to set up each part correctly

If you’re looking for a system that is essentially complete directly out of the box, the SimpliSafe 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System is the kit for you. It includes a variety of sensors and indoor and outdoor cameras, meaning you should feel fully protected in your home. While each piece is easy to install in and of itself, you’ll have to learn and think about the placement of each part—however, you’ll be able to handle it on your own if you can handle a strip of 3M tape or a screwdriver. Let’s review each part individually to get a good picture of how they will function together in your home:

The SimpliSafe base can hold up to 100 SimpliSafe security devices and is the central hub for your equipment. It is also capable of emitting a 95dB alarm. The push-button keypad lets you arm and disarm the system with a PIN. Having four entry point door/window sensors will allow you to protect the primary entryways to your home, while the two motion sensors—which are designed to be pet friendly and decorative—protect the areas of your home with too many entry points or windows.

What makes the SimpliSafe 10-piece system better than the 12-piece version is the inclusion of both an indoor and an outdoor camera. Suppose you’re used to the grainy, near-worthless security cam footage often seen in local news coverage. In that case, you’ll be particularly happy with the full colors, 1080p quality, and night vision offered by SimpliSafe. For those concerned with privacy, the indoor camera comes with a stainless steel shutter, so you won’t have to worry about having your private moments enter someone’s data tables.

Finally, the package set comes with an official SimpliSafe flag that declares your home protected by SimpliSafe. While no one can guarantee that this will deter all criminals, there will be at least a few that will back down.

Best customer service: Ring Alarm Pro, 14-Piece

Ring

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Go from dialing a number to “Hello” in 1 minute, 18 seconds.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Easy
  • Sensors: 8 door/window sensors, 2 motion sensors
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: Between $4-$20/mo. (Optional)
  • Smart protocols: Z-wave

Pros

  • Fantastic phone technical support
  • Dual keypads for increased flexibility
  • Provides range extender for large homes
  • Multiple 24/7 monitoring plans to choose from

Cons

  • Overhyped WiFi functionality

The Ring Alarm Pro 14-Piece set has fantastic customer service and is a great smart home security system for larger homes. Its impressive networking and dual keypad design (some home security systems only allow for one keypad) allow for larger coverage areas than some of the best smart home security systems. With customizable ringtones, you’ll always know which door is being opened in your home. The Ring Alarm Pro even comes with Wi-Fi 6 functionality via its hub. This feature is handy but gets a bit overhyped, sometimes eclipsing what counts—there are better Wi-Fi 6 routers out there.

What should you get excited about with the Ring Alarm Pro? A very approachable DIY setup where a real human is there to help you quickly. After just a few button taps to specify exactly what we wanted, we could—right here, right now—contact a customer service agent 1 minute and 18 seconds after dialing Ring’s customer service.

Best monitoring: ADT 8-Piece Wireless Home Security System

ADT

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: ADT is amongst the most experienced and best professional monitoring companies.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Intermediate
  • Sensors: 4 door/window sensors, 1 motion detector 
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: $19.99/mo. (Optional)
  • Smart protocols: Z-wave

Pros

  • Highly experienced monitoring team
  • Perfect size for families
  • Optics and branding

Cons

  • Occasional installation snags
  • Only works in the U.S.

The ADT 8-Piece Wireless Home Security System is all you need to get started with the highly regarded ADT security model. It’s a brand that takes itself seriously, providing a yard sign to let customers proudly display their security status on the lawn. Sure, it is part marketing, but it’s also part confidence in the ADT name alone being able to ward off potential neighborhood thieves.

The package itself includes door/window sensors and a motion sensor, with the kit being targeted to owners of two- or three-bedroom homes. While not difficult, installing the sensors can take some time as you manually pair and label each one within your system. You can install them using the included adhesive backing or a more traditional screw-in technique. The time investment should feel closer to “weekend project” than “plug’n’play” for the typical first-time user.

When combined with the optional professional monitoring from ADT, it can almost feel as if you have a dedicated housesitter while you’re away.

Best modular: Wyze Home Security Core Kit

Wyze

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Wyze’s Home Security Core Kit is just that, a quality core kit that can be easily added to as needed.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Easy
  • Sensors: 2 door/window sensors, 1 motion sensor
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: $9.99/mo
  • Smart protocols: N/A

Pros

  • Very affordable and complete starter kit
  • Comes with three months of free professional monitoring
  • Can easily add on more sensors or cameras
  • Guided setup via Wyze app

Cons

  • Service plan essential
  • Only works in U.S.

If you prefer to wade through new technology instead of diving directly into the deep end, the Wyze Home Security Core Kit will be the best smart home security system for you. For starters, the core kit itself is very affordable, covers two entry points plus a room of your choice, and provides months of complimentary professional monitoring service to give you a taste of how Wyze works.

Once you’ve decided how much you like the system, you can start adding more components immediately. Finish off the rest of your home’s entry points with more door/window sensors, or transform your setup into a video surveillance system by adding a Wyze cam. Leak and home climate sensors are also available.

The modularity, as well as the stick-on setup guided by the Wyze app, gives the Wyze Home Security Core Kit a very DIY air to it. You can be confident that you, by yourself, should be able to install it. Unfortunately, the rugged individualism this inspires is dropped down a notch—it requires a 24/7 monitoring subscription for the device to truly shine. You’ll just have sensors, but the keypad won’t work after the three-month free trial runs out. The Wyze Cam add-on will also lose smart features and extended storage. Still, the service is cheaper than market averages, you probably wanted it anyway.

Most compatible: Abode Security System Starter Kit

Abode

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Abode goes way beyond just Z-wave and Zigbee.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Easy
  • Sensors: 1 door/window sensor, 1 motion sensor
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: Between $7-$22/mo. (Semi-optional)
  • Smart protocols: Zigbee, Z-wave, Homekit, IFTTT

Pros

  • Connects and works with just about anything
  • Variable professional monitoring options
  • Sub-30-minute total setup time
  • Easily expandable

Cons

  • Limited sensors in starter kit
  • Reviews note poor customer service

Can’t decide between Zigbee and Z-wave, so want access to both? Not sure if you want to use Alexa or opt for a Google home security system? Need HomeKit or IFTTT support? It’s time to look at an Abode Security System, a home security system that connects with all of these in some way.

The Abode Security System Starter Kit is a perfect way to get set up with the system, as it includes the main hub, a couple of sensors, and a key fob. You’ll find it surprisingly easy to set up and get going—even technological turtles report installation times of under 30 minutes—but will quickly find yourself wanting other pieces if you don’t have, for example, home security cameras from an existing, compatible system. If you decide to stick with Abode products, you can choose from glass break sensors, water leak sensors, smoke alarms, and indoor/outdoor cameras to tailor the system to your needs.

While all owners have access to alerts and live video feeds, more “advanced” features—such as video storage—require you to subscribe to one of Abode’s plans, either the Standard (self-monitoring) or Pro (professional monitoring).

Best budget: Tolviviov Wi-Fi Door Alarm System

Tolviviov

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is the best smart home security system under $100.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Easy
  • Sensors: 5 door/window sensors
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: No
  • Smart protocols: N/A

Pros

  • Simple to use system with keychain fob and app control
  • Very loud alarm
  • Affordable for all pricing
  • No monthly payments

Cons

  • Supported by 2.4GHz Wi-Fi network only
  • Lower brand recognition

If you’re wanting to avoid overly techy solutions to your problems and save money in the long run while doing so, the Tolviviov Wi-Fi Door Alarm System is worth checking out. Tolviviov systems, in addition to being budget-friendly, also happen to be the best smart home security systems for elderly people due to their extremely loud alarm systems and manual keychain controls. It still has app functionality, including Alexa support, for those wanting a more modern feel.

Considering the price range, it shouldn’t be surprising that the Tolviviov system doesn’t have a professional monitoring system. However, this lack comes with a silver lining, as systems with professional monitoring on a recurring monthly subscription often tie other features into it. With the Tolviviov, what you see is what you get. A loud siren to alert you to entries, app alerts that tell you what sensor was disturbed, and the option for Alexa voice support. It’s simple, but it works.

The main concerns for the Tolviviov system are its connections and brand recognition. The Tolviviov only works with the 2.4GHz Wi-Fi band. Be prepared to isolate the 2.4GHz band. Lastly, the brand recognition just isn’t there yet. Sure, the super loud alarm will make burglars scram, but you won’t get the same response from the name “Tolviviov” that you will from an “ADT” sign in your yard or a Ring video doorbell near your front door.

What to consider when buying the best smart home security systems

From the surface, the best smart home security systems appear to be quite similar, just different collections of the same parts. This is compounded by the fact that, when things are running smoothly, our residential security systems blend into the background of our lives. However, if you do even a tiny amount of digging, you’ll see that there is more complexity in both the hardware and the included customer service plans than meets the eye.

Options for 24/7 professional monitoring

If you have a smart home security system that alerts you when intruders come into your home, or when your house faces other problems, you are all in the clear, right? While it is a nice thought, it is potentially untrue if you are incapacitated or unable to reach your phone to assess the threat (such as while out at work or on vacation).

Typically, 24/7 professional monitoring services come as part of a subscription fee, usually around $30 per month. While all systems retain some functionality without the subscription, others only provide limited service without the full subscription.

Zigbee and/or Z-wave connection

Much like Wi-Fi, Zigbee and Z-Wave represent frequency bands that can connect the pieces of your smart home security system together. Zigbee systems typically run faster, but burn through batteries quicker, while Z-Wave systems can have a bit of response delay but require less battery maintenance work.

In reality, which of the two systems is better depends on your overall network. If you have a lot of Z-Wave products already, going with another Z-Wave device is great because they are all mandated to work together. Zigbee devices can usually “find” each other but don’t always interconnect in a fully functioning way, sorta like pairing non-Apple headphones to your iPhone via Bluetooth. 

Another possibility includes using neither system and operating solely through Wi-Fi and the system’s own proprietary hub. If you are looking for a smart home security system and not a full smart home network, this should be fine. Alternatively, super-compatible systems can connect to both networks and have other connection options as well. Whether you want to go with Zigbee or Z-Wave or both is entirely up to you.

Branding and flags

Some smart home security systems have a flag to stick in your lawn to scare potential thieves away. Some customers are happy to see it, but others are skeptical about the usefulness of a sign to deter thieves, who might use the info to “crack” through the system.

What does the science say? Our friends at Bob Vila took a deep dive into the research on security signs and crime deterrence. Here are some of their findings:

  • ~25% of criminals will skip a home with a security sign.
  • ~50% of criminals will skip a home with a security sign and a visible camera.
  • The optimal locations for such signs are in a place visible from the street and in the backyard.
  • Branding matters. A recognizable or easily searched-for brand name works best to convince thieves your home is really protected.

Privacy

Whenever you bring something into your home, you want to feel comfortable about your privacy. This goes doubly so for home security products that can record and monitor the inside of your home. As such, you should pay particular attention to a brand’s privacy track record.

Take, for instance, the recent controversy over Anker’s eufy brand, which promised end-to-end encryption but didn’t deliver. If that wasn’t damaging enough, the company’s initial response was to merely change their privacy commitment statement. They’ve since come clean, but the sour taste still lingers.

For full transparency, this is not the only brand to have publicly suffered a privacy breach. In 2021, a former ADT technician pleaded guilty to charges of criminal spying while employed at the company. Important things to note here are how well ADT handled the situation compared to eufy, that their internal procedures and systems have since been changed to reduce the likelihood of a similar situation happening in the future, and that this was an incident involving a single employee and not the company at large. The ADT system in this guide does not include a camera.

FAQs

Q: How much does a smart home security system cost?

A smart home security system can cost anywhere from under $80 to over $400. You should also leave room in your budget for a monitoring subscription, which typically costs between $20 and $40. Overall, smart home security systems are highly affordable and shouldn’t outprice other smart gear for your home.

Q: What is the highest-rated home security system?

The highest-rated home security systems come from SimpliSafe and Ring. With new products and bundles being released regularly, as well as shifting prices, consumer ratings for individual bundles may fluctuate over time. That being said, highly regarded product bundles from both companies can receive a coveted 4.7 stars or higher on Amazon after hundreds (or even thousands) of reviews.

Q: Is smart home security worth it?

Smart home security is worth it if you are nervous about the safety of your home or neighborhood. Some systems can check for flooding and fires as well. With 24/7 professional monitoring, you also have access to a team that is ready to help you and alert authorities in case of an emergency. People wanting smaller, less extensive security should consider smart doorbells as a potential alternative.

Q: Is SimpliSafe better than Wyze?

It depends on what you want in a system. SimpliSafe is among the highest-rated smart home security systems, and the SimpliSafe 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System is our personal pick for the best smart home security system due to its high-quality performance and complete coverage. This isn’t to say that Wyze systems are bad, as the Wyze Home Security Core Kit is a premium choice for those that want a custom, modular system.

Final thoughts on the best smart home security systems

Getting one of the best smart home security systems in 2023 is not as difficult as in years past. Installation should be smoother due to the simplicity of wireless Zigbee, Z-Wave, and Wi-Fi connections that can integrate these systems with the existing smart home gadgets you already own. With app integration and voice support, you can get the truly convenient home security you desire.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best smart home security systems of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best induction cookware of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-induction-cookware/ Thu, 23 Feb 2023 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=514216
Best induction cookware
Stan Horaczek

This top-notch cookware will keep pumping out perfect food for years to come.

The post The best induction cookware of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best induction cookware
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Carote induction cookware set in cream color on a plane background. CAROTE Pots and Pans Set
SEE IT

This set has everything you need for induction cooking.

Best stainless steel All-clad induction cookware on a plain background All-Clad Induction cookware
SEE IT

Stainless steel cookware provides one of the most durable options.

Best ceramic Caraway induction cookware on a plain background Caraway Cookware set
SEE IT

This is a practical and attractive set of pans.

Looking for the best induction cookware for beautiful, even cooking? While many people use gas-powered stoves or convection cooking that heats up whatever is directly atop the burner, others pick induction cooktops—cooking surfaces with a copper coil that creates a magnetic field to heat the pan and food. However, these appliances need the proper cookware to achieve optimal results. Don’t worry; we’ve got you covered. Some cookware is naturally induction-ready, such as cast iron, enameled cast iron, and stainless steel. And if you’re unsure if one of your pots or pants is induction-ready, you can try the magnet trick: place a magnet on the bottom of your cookware and see if it sticks. If you’re not 100% or just looking for an upgrade, however, choose one of our picks for the best induction cookware and spend the rest of your time perfecting your gnocchi recipe.

How we chose the best induction cookware 

To provide a solid recommendation list, we evaluated the best induction cookware on a few key factors. Firstly, we looked at brand reputation and reviews. How reputable is the brand, and how many active customers took to the internet to recommend their favorite piece of induction cookware? 

Second, we evaluated the value of the product. While some products may be more expensive than others, we thought more about what you are getting for that price. Is it multi-use, replacing the need for other cookware that will ultimately save you money? Are the materials highly durable and long-lasting? Does it come in a money-saving set? 

We also looked at the best induction cookware that was versatile and ready for any surface, not just induction cooktops. In addition, we considered cleanup because ease of use is super important for busy families and professionals who don’t want to slave all day rinsing and reconsidering their kitchens.

The best induction cookware: Reviews & Recommendations

When buying cookware, you must decide whether to buy individual pieces or complete packages. The best cookware sets offer the pots and pans you need without a ton of extra stuff that drives up the cost. Here are our picks for the best induction cookware—complete sets and single pans.

Best overall: CAROTE Pots and Pans Set

Carote

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Aluminum
  • Number of Pieces: 10
  • Dishwasher Safe: No

Pros

  • 10-piece set
  • Super affordable, great value
  • Over 5,000 positive Amazon reviews
  • Free of toxic chemicals 
  • Ultra non-stick

Cons

  • Exterior may wear off with time
  • Not as much brand recognition
  • Only one colorway 

We chose the Carote induction-ready cookware set as best overall because you simply cannot beat that level of quality for such an ultra-affordable price point. It has virtually all the same specs as our other contenders, yet offers more pieces for less money. 

This 10-piece set comes with a 9.5-inch frying pan, an 11-inch frying pan, saute pan with lid, a casserole dish with lid, a saucepan with lid, a steamer, and a silicone turner. The set offers all of that for less than $150.

These pots and pans are made from a harder granite material with non-stick properties. They’re also PFOS/PFOA free, so you don’t have to worry about harsh chemicals soaking into your food.

It’s suitable for all stoves, and because their non-stick game is so on point, the cleanup is quick and easy regardless of what you cook. Many reviewers say they could have just used hot water. The downside: the handle gets super hot, so you may need to get some silicone handle covers. They are also not dishwasher safe, and they only come in one colorway. But all of that can’t dampen the sheer value this set offers.

Best stainless steel: All-Clad Stainless Steel Dishwasher Safe Induction Compatible Cookware Set

All-clad

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Stainless Steel
  • Number of Pieces: 7
  • Dishwasher Safe: Yes

Pros

  • Dishwasher Safe
  • Multiple set number options
  • 3 bonded layers of stainless steel and responsive aluminum
  • Excellent quality; sturdy & durable

Cons

  • Pricey
  • Some reviewers noted that it is not easy to put in dishwasher

With a clean design and American-made, high-quality materials, All-Clad is an absolute staple for induction-ready stainless steel cookware. These beautiful pans are dishwasher safe, making them perfect for busy households that favor quick and simple cleanups.

All-Clad stainless steel pans feature a tri-ply construction, made with a responsive aluminum core bonded with 2 layers of stainless steel that allows for even heat distribution. 

The 7-piece set contains a 10-inch fry pan, a 3-quart saucepan with lid, a 3-quart saute pan with lid, and a versatile 8-quart Stockpot with lid. There are also 5-, 10-, and 14-piece options available. They are oven safe up to 600 degrees F and resist warping, so you can really abuse these pans without worry.

Best eco-friendly: GreenPan Valencia Pro Ceramic Nonstick 8″, 9.5″, And 11″ Frypan Set

Green Pan

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Ceramic
  • Number of Pieces: 3
  • Dishwasher Safe: Yes

Pros

  • Dishwasher Safe (Hand Washing Recommended) 
  • Oven safe up to 600 degrees F.
  • Nonstick & scratch-resistant
  • Free of PFAS, PFOA, lead, and cadmium
  • Good value

Cons

  • Durability may wane after heavy long-term use

GreenPan is a world leader when it comes to eco-friendly cookware. They supply healthy ceramic nonstick pans with toxin-free coating; all pans are free from  PFAS, PFOA, lead, and cadmium.

This three-piece ceramic nonstick set includes 8-inch, 9.5-inch, and 11-inch fry pans that feature diamond-infused ceramic nonstick coating, their signature Magneto induction base suitable for all stovetops, and truly high-quality materials and manufacturing. They are oven safe up to 600 degrees F.

Reviewers love that you can use metal utensils on them, they’re attractive on your countertop, and they are exactly as advertised without any surprises. Some reviewers noted, though, that durability waned after 1-2 years of heavy use. 

Best cast iron: Our Place Cast Iron Always Pan

Our Place

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Enameled cast iron
  • Number of Pieces: 1
  • Dishwasher Safe: No

Pros

  • 8-in-1 uses
  • Made from premium enameled cast iron
  • Easy to clean
  • Comes with lid
  • Lighter weight than other cast irons

Cons

  • Not dishwasher-friendly (though most cast irons aren’t)
  • No long-term seasoning, which some may prefer
  • No pour spouts

This 8-in-1 cast iron pan allows for multiple uses for cooking, so you can save space and reduce clutter. It comes with a lid and silicone Hot Grips, so you won’t be screaming in pain from hot handles.

It’s oven-safe up to 500 degrees F (or 425 degrees F with the lid) and is super easy to clean with glossy exteriors. Reviewers love that it comes in several beautiful colors, that it’s lighter in weight than many other cast irons of the same size, that it’s a good value for the price, and how much easier it is to clean than others. 

One thing you should note is that because it’s made of black matte enameled cast iron, you won’t need to pre-season it, unlike other cast irons, and it can be used to cook with acidic foods. That’s a plus, but that also means you’ll need to use more butter or oils to cook with since it doesn’t build up that seasoning over time. Some users may prefer that long-term seasoning effect and cook with fewer fats. There are also no pour spouts for removing excess oil or liquids.

Best ceramic: Caraway Cookware Set

Caraway

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Ceramic 
  • Number of Pieces: 4 + storage
  • Dishwasher Safe: Yes

Pros

  • Visually beautiful
  • Nonstick 
  • Comes with storage
  • Free of toxic chemicals
  • Even cooking

Cons

  • Handle gets hot
  • Nor dishwasher-friendly
  • Can easily ding/scratch

The Caraway cookware set is a cult favorite with almost 40,000 positive site reviews. While many social media ads can be misleading, Caraway has made a huge splash on the internet, and with good reason.

This set comes with a 10.5-inch frying pan, a 3-quart saucepan, a 4-quart saute pan, and a 6.5-quart dutch oven. They come with lids. It’s aesthetically beautiful, with a clean yet glossy look.

We love that this set comes with storage (magnetic pan racks and a canvas lid holder), is made with a non-toxic coating (free of PTFEs, like Teflon, PFOA, and heavy metals), and comes in several colors to choose from to suit your taste. It’s oven-safe up to 550 degrees F.

Reviewers love the even cooking, excellent customer service, and how there’s very little sticking with such easy cleanup. They’re not super cheap, but they’re a good investment piece for cookware that won’t cause a massive headache.

What to consider when choosing the best induction cookware

Whether you’re looking for stainless steel pots and pans, ceramic frying pans, or cast iron induction cookware, there are a few variables you should consider before taking the plunge.

Materials

When deciding on the best induction cookware, look for indicators of an induction-compatible symbol, also known as a ferromagnetic base. There are a few kinds of cookware that are naturally induction ready, like:

  • Cast iron
  • Stainless steel
  • Some aluminum (must have stainless steel plate)

You’ll also need to consider cost or, rather, value. Sometimes you’ll see a higher price tag but look into it further. Does it come as a set? Are there better, more durable materials that will ultimately save you money? 

Handles

While some cookware comes with insulated handles, others have simple metal handles that get hot along with the cooking area. In those cases, you’ll need an extra silicon grip or a glove to move the pans around. If that sounds like an annoying extra step, consider something with a built-in solution.

Before you buy

We highly recommend searching for non-stick cookware for easier cleanup and handling. Make sure it comes with a non-toxic coating, however, because many non-stick pans come with Teflon or other toxic chemicals that seep into your food and are harmful to the environment.

FAQs

Q: How do you know if cookware is induction compatible?

You can tell if cookware is induction compatible on the label/website—it should say “induction-ready,” “induction-compatible,” etc. If you want to see if your existing cookware is induction-compatible, you can try placing a magnet on the bottom and see if it sticks.

Q: What is the disadvantage of induction cooking?

Frankly, induction cookware is generally more expensive. Cast irons, for example, will require a heftier price tag than a simple old pan. It’s also a new method of cooking that might be a bit of a learning curve if you’re not used to it. 

Q: What is the average price of induction cookware?

It depends. Pricing typically varies depending on the quality and type of the materials, durability, brand, aesthetic, etc. You can find some cookware options around $50, and you can find some that are more luxury purchases in the several hundreds. 

Final thoughts on the best induction cookware

We think everyone should treat cookware like an investment. A solid set of pans can last for years and years with proper care, but you have to start with the right product. If you’re looking for a new way to cook, induction stoves range from simple hot plate-style models to advanced surfaces. The best induction cookware offers easy cleaning, simple use, and long-lasting durability to keep those asparagus tips crispy well into the future. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best induction cookware of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X review: A smart solution for smartphone audio streaming https://www.popsci.com/reviews/roland-go-mixer-prox-review/ Wed, 18 Aug 2021 00:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=389831
Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X with iPhone and microphone
With the Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X and a connected device, you can livestream audio from almost anywhere. Brian S. Hawkins

With the Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X and a connected device, you can livestream audio from almost anywhere.

The post Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X review: A smart solution for smartphone audio streaming appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X with iPhone and microphone
With the Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X and a connected device, you can livestream audio from almost anywhere. Brian S. Hawkins

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

I used to cover conventions as a producer and cameraman and that meant conducting lots of interviews from crowded show floors. Because we wanted to stay light and mobile, we ran two mics directly into the XLR audio inputs on our video camera: one for the on-air host and the other for whoever she interviewed. The set-up worked, but it had two big problems. First, we could only use two microphones, and interviewing more than one person meant having them share a mic on-camera. Frankly, that looks a little lame. Much more significantly, we had no way to broadcast live and by the time our stories were uploaded that evening from a computer, we were often scooped by teams with expensive livestreaming technology. If I could take one piece of recording equipment back in time with me and do it all over again, I’d pack the Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X. 

Combined with an LTE or Wi-Fi-connected smartphone camera, this compact audio mixer for streaming is a pocket-sized problem solver. Whether you’re a podcaster, vlogger, videographer, or musician in the studio or on stage, the Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X helps get your audio to the masses. 

Brian S. Hawkins

SEE IT

What is the Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X

The battery- and/or USB-powered GO:MIXER PRO-X features nine channels of audio for microphones, instruments, and line-level sources like music players. It also has a USB output so you can send your jam session directly to a phone or computer for livestreaming or recording. And at only 4.12 inches wide, 6.12 inches deep, and 1.62 inches high, this 8-ounce unit is ridiculously easy to transport. The $149 device isn’t any tougher on the pocketbook than it is on an actual cargo pants pocket but, at this price point, Roland had to make some choices about which features to include and which ones to leave out of the mix. With that in mind, let’s look at whether this mini-mixer for your smartphone is right for you. 

The Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X makes some modest improvements over the company’s previous model, the GO:MIXER PRO. Like its predecessor, the PRO-X features an XLR microphone input with optional 48v phantom power for use with condenser mics; a ¼-inch jack for guitar or bass; dual mono ¼-inch inputs for stereo, line-level instruments; two stereo TRS inputs for external audio from sources like music players; and, finally, a dedicated TRRS jack for connecting a smartphone’s output without losing access to its microphone. 

The Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X’s design

The Roland GO: Mixer PRO-X owes much of its portability to its small size, of course. But you can’t wander through the backcountry broadcasting your livestream if you need to plug into a wall outlet to make it all work. Thankfully, this little mixer draws power from four AAA batteries (not included). Roland claims you’ll get four-and-a-half hours of use from them; in my tests, I came in at just shy of that before I noticed little dips in the audio quality—and then the unit conked out completely. However, the mixer also draws power through its USB port, whether plugged into your phone, computer, or an external power pack. And if you’re using the mixer in a single spot, you can, of course, plug it into the wall via an adapter (also not included). Roland points out—and my tests confirm—that you’ll need to use batteries if you want phantom power for your mics. This will shorten the batteries’ run times, but I had more than enough juice to get through my recording sessions. The versatility of the dual power sources—battery and USB—is a nice touch. 

Hitting the right cords

The mixer connects to your smartphone or computer via a micro-USB jack located on the back of the unit. Much to my delight, Roland included a micro-USB-to-USB-C cable, as well as a micro-USB-to-Lightning cable, making it easy to connect to both older and new Apple and Android smartphones. The company also tossed in a TRRS cable for use with a phone’s dedicated audio output (found on Android phones and older iPhones). This makes the mixer usable straight out of the box.

The Roland GO:Mixer PRO-X improves on its older sibling by adding an attenuator switch that, when engaged, pads the guitar/bass input to help control hotter signals from instruments with active pickups. Roland also added a loopback function so you can play music from your smartphone while still recording video. Finally, they upgraded the headphone output to support headset and earbud mics. 

A strange spin on things

Roland arranged the mixer’s five knobs with enough space between them for even the thickest of fingers—or someone wearing gloves while using it outside on a chilly day. The knobs aren’t as rock-solid as those found on higher-end mixers, but they’re not flimsy either and I never felt like they were at risk of breaking when I carried it in a backpack or the pockets of my cargo shorts.  

Somewhat oddly, Roland marked each knob with an icon indicating the type of instrument they expect you to plug into the corresponding jack. I’d rather they just number them. Sure, the little keyboard icon tells me immediately which controller boosts my synth’s signal, but what if I’ve plugged a drum machine into it? If I’m setting up with a partner and they ask which channel has the DJ mixer, it’s a little confusing to tell them “the one marked with a keyboard.” How do I notate that if I’m writing everything down? Remember, when all’s said and done, an input is an input is an input, and the unit doesn’t really care what sound source runs into it. There are two notable exceptions: If you’ve got an unpowered microphone, you must plug it into the XLR input to use phantom power. And if you’ve got something that combines an output and input on one line, you’ll need to use the TRRS jacks.

I like that Roland designed the mixer with an integrated groove to hold my phone at a great angle for monitoring recordings or streams and, depending on where the mixer’s sitting, using the camera for things like Zoom calls. However, I think Roland missed a beat by not including screw-mounts on the underside for a tripod plate and on the top for a small, flexible arm to hold something like a light, phone clamp, or even a better camera. It would have been an easy way to provide a significant boost in functionality. It’s not a deal-breaker for me, but I’d love to see the company address it one day.   

Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X rear panel
The Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X can be powered via batteries and USB. Brian S. Hawkins

Is the Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X a sound choice?

Features and inputs are all well and good, but how does the mixer sound? I don’t want an interface that colors the sound or introduces noise to the signal. It’s also important that it provides a decent amount of gain. Can a tiny, inexpensive mixer hit those benchmarks? 

For my first test, I decided to make a live music video about the existential drama unfolding between two squirrels outside my office window. I plugged a drum machine, a sampler loaded up with chugging electric guitar loops, and a high-end condenser vocal microphone into the PRO-X (making sure phantom power was engaged), and then sent the signal to my favorite phone video app, Filmic Pro. Then I hit record and started playing while trying to shoot the two rodents as they ran around a tree. I won’t lie, the video stunk, but I was absolutely impressed by the quality of the audio. 

The mixer didn’t color the sound at all and provided more than enough headroom for a strong signal without any added noise. I had no trouble dialing in and recording a mix that sounded excellent when played back. The peak indicator light was handy for setting levels, though I’d prefer a meter over a single LED for accuracy. 

In my next test, I plugged two dynamic microphones into the mixer for a simple interview setup. One went into the XLR input (without any need for phantom power) and the other plugged into one of the ¼-inch jacks using an XLR-to-¼-inch adapter. Once again, I sent the signal into my phone, but this time used Zoom to livestream a conversation between myself and an artist friend to an audience of six other people who tuned in for the test. Once again, the audio sounded great in my mixing headphones and the people on the other end of the signal gave it a thumbs-up as well. 

However, during setup, I discovered a rather head-scratching design decision: The mixer’s central volume knob controls output for both the main mix and the headphones. So if I want a bit of a boost in my cans, the recorded signal’s getting a boost, too. As frustrating as that is in the studio, it’s downright problematic if you’re somewhere you need to hear yourself over lots of background noise, like at a convention or a club. In order to make your headphones louder without increasing the entire output volume, you’ll need a separate headphone amplifier. Out of all the features I’d like to see added to the Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X, a separate control knob for headphone gain tops the list. 

That said, I love that the Roland GO:Mixer PRO-X makes it so easy to livestream from my phone. It’s a great tool for anyone with a podcast or vlog, whether they’re conducting interviews, playing live music, doing a DJ set in a virtual club, or holding a conference call. It’s perfect for virtual conventions and panels, too. The mixer’s small size and light weight make it easy to take anywhere, and it drops easily into a broadcast signal chain. In fact, the size and versatility of the GO:MIXER PRO-X invites experimentation. Want to livestream your wandering minstrel troupe at the next Renaissance Faire? It’s easy—just plug in your instruments, set your levels, attach it to your phone, and then drop the mixer into someone’s backpack. If you use wireless connectors, you can walk around and entertain the masses on-site, and your followers online, at the same time. (Who cares about historic accuracy—we’re living in the future, baby!)

Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X XLR input
The Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X is a perfect supplemental system for livestreamers on the go. Brian S. Hawkins

So, who should buy the Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X?

Roland’s GO:MIXER PRO-X is ideal for anyone who likes to work with audio on the go, especially if livestreaming is a big part of their creative endeavors. This sound mixer features enough inputs for small bands to play and record together, and bloggers will find setting up audio for interviews or discussion panels a fast and simple affair. The unit’s small enough to toss into your kit bag or backpack, making it perfect for broadcasting from vacation destinations or while on tour. That said, anyone looking for more advanced mixer functionality, like separate gain stages, EQs, or even multiple XLR inputs won’t be happy with the PRO-X. Roland never intended it to replace the mixer in your home recording studio or broadcast booth, but, rather, it makes a perfect supplemental system that goes and performs wherever you do. Click here for more digital mixer options.

The post Roland GO:MIXER PRO-X review: A smart solution for smartphone audio streaming appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Why societies experience cycles of violence and peace https://www.popsci.com/science/human-society-violence-cycle/ Wed, 18 Oct 2023 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580675
An ancient brown skull with a metal arrowhead protruding from its side.
A human skull found in the Tollense valley, an ancient battlefield in Germany, with fatal trauma caused by a Bronze arrowhead. Volker Minkus

Archeological evidence shows bloodshed waxes and wanes, influenced by climate and other factors.

The post Why societies experience cycles of violence and peace appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
An ancient brown skull with a metal arrowhead protruding from its side.
A human skull found in the Tollense valley, an ancient battlefield in Germany, with fatal trauma caused by a Bronze arrowhead. Volker Minkus

Is human society becoming more violent? It’s hard to imagine a point in time containing an event as destructive as an atomic bombing. Even the most brutal acts committed by our ancient ancestors pale in comparison to the organized assaults countries have executed in the last century alone. Ongoing wars and human right violations suggest that we are living in one of the most vicious times in history. But the evidence, according to archaeologists who study historical violence, says there is no black-and-white answer.

To conclude that humans are more violent than ever, you’d need a timeline of all the aggressive actions in human history. Archaeologists have found some artifacts that weave a story of humanity’s violent past from a skeleton that could have been the first murder victim about 430,000 years ago to the ancient Mesopotamian death pits that likely held war casualties or human sacrifices. These pieces of history, though, are still not enough to paint a complete picture. 

The further we go back in time, the harder it is to assess violence and killings, explains Linda Fibiger, an archaeologist at the University of Edinburgh in the United Kingdom, who researches conflict in early human history. 

Remains alone don’t tell complete stories. Finding enough evidence to know whether humans at a certain time period were violent, or if someone’s violent death was an isolated event, is tricky. Even if an autopsy of an ancient human implies a brutal death, it can’t reveal a killer’s motive. Some ceremonial acts, for example, were interlaced with violence as people were sacrificed as tributes to the gods.

[Related: Grisly medieval murders detailed in new interactive maps]

“I don’t think prehistory was in an eternal state of warfare and conflict. But with the skeletal evidence and the percentage of individuals with violent trauma, I’m sure most people would have been aware of violence or known somebody who encountered it,” says Fibiger. She also notes whether people in the past considered an act a crime could change the perception of whether they were living in a violent time.

If perception is a factor, it’s possible we could be living in the most peaceful era to date. In his 2011 book The Better Angels of Our Nature: Why Violence Has Declined, cognitive psychologist Steven Pinker theorized that small hunter-gatherer groups were the most violent, back in the day, with the highest percentage of people dying from warfare. As communities settled into more organized states, they were better able to become more “civilized” and develop skills of empathy, reasoning, and self-control.

“We would like to believe that we’re so much more smart, reasonable, and more civilized”, says Dean Falk, an evolutionary anthropologist from Florida State University. “But I don’t think everything’s peachy now.” Falk, in her previous analysis of the evidence Pinker presented, found that he failed to consider the population sizes of the different communities in his calculations. This could have inflated the rate of war deaths in hunter-gatherer communities when comparing them to state-based societies. And although a larger percentage of a small society may have died in a conflict, Falk argues that says more about the attacks they suffered than their own violent behavior.

When Falk included the absolute number of deaths (the number of deaths for a given population scaled to their size) into the calculations, she found it was the population size, not the type of civilization structure, that determined whether a society lost their residents to warfare. And while the percentage of annual war deaths was lower among state societies, Falk says the number of annual war deaths has gone up in bigger populations. “This might have to do with big brains and having technology to invent more effective weapons to kill each other.”

There’s also no rule that states we’re on a linear path toward a more or less violent society. New research published this month in the journal Nature Human Behaviour suggests human violence has waxed and waned throughout history. Giacomo Benati, an archaeologist at the University of Barcelona in Spain and coauthor of the new study says analyzing violent trends across history often falls victim to bias, focusing on historical battle records or polarized narratives of the ancient world. 

[Related: A group of humpback whales is choosing violence]

His new work, one of the largest archaeological studies on early human violence, tries to avoid that prejudice, by examining  a large set of bones. Benati and his team analyzed any sign of cranial trauma or weapon-related wounds in 3,539 skeletons belonging to people who lived in seven Middle Eastern countries between 12,000 to 400 BCE. 

This study was particularly interesting because it tries to contextualize what’s happening, says Fibiger, who was not involved in the research. The large dataset of human skeletal remains allowed them to link traumatic deaths to ongoing conflicts, economics, and the unequal distribution of resources and wealth caused by climate. “Bringing these things together gives a better concept of people’s lives,” Fibiger says, “and what might have escalated conflict and broken down relationships.”

Interpersonal violence—murder, torture, slavery, and other cruel punishments—peaked around 4,500 to 3,300 BCE during the Chalocolithic period, Benati and his co-authors concluded. The high rates of violence could have to do with the formation of political units vying for control, which may have escalated local quarrels to larger and more organized conflicts.

Benati says the most surprising finding was the steady drop in violence across the Early and Middle Bronze period, which he suspects has to do with better living standards. “After going through thousands of photos of excavated skeletons, life before modern medicine [did] not look pretty,” he says. “It was short, and they had to live with constant ailments and pains.”

Violence rates appeared to pick up again through the Late Bronze Age and Iron Age. People may have become more violent due to a drier climate. The Iron Age ushered in a 300-year drought which contributed to crop shortages and widespread famine. This lack of water would have stressed out communities, leading to competition over resources. This possessiveness for limited resources—whether land or food—are universal motivators for violence that is still seen today, Fibiger points out. Additionally, given the worsening climate situation right now, Benati says how people reacted to extreme climate events in the past could tell us how people will react to instability in the future. Climate change, for example, may once again herald a longer period of violence. 

Given our bloody record for handling conflict, archaeologists remain divided on whether humans will ever live in a violent-free society. Fibiger believes people are not inherently violent, but may be pushed into situations where they are required to defend themselves or their livelihood. By learning from violence in the past, she believes humans can do better. Falk is less optimistic. She says it’s possible we will wipe out our species, seeing that we are just as capable of violence as our ancient ancestors. The only difference now is our access to more lethal weapons and more organized warfare. “For proof of that, just turn on your TV to the evening news.”

The post Why societies experience cycles of violence and peace appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Female honeybees may pass down ‘altruistic’ genes https://www.popsci.com/environment/honeybees-altruism/ Wed, 18 Oct 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580768
A group of worker bees surround the queen bee on a honeycomb. All worker honeybees are female and they can go to extreme lengths to serve their queen even shedding their own ovaries.
All worker honeybees are female and they can go to extreme lengths to serve their queen even shedding their own ovaries. Deposit Photos

Honeybee genes might make workers serve the queen above themselves.

The post Female honeybees may pass down ‘altruistic’ genes appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A group of worker bees surround the queen bee on a honeycomb. All worker honeybees are female and they can go to extreme lengths to serve their queen even shedding their own ovaries.
All worker honeybees are female and they can go to extreme lengths to serve their queen even shedding their own ovaries. Deposit Photos

Honeybees are a model of teamwork in nature, with their complex society and hives that generate enough energy to create an electrical charge. They also appear to be some of the rare animals that display a unique trait of altruism, which is genetically inherited. The findings were described in a study published September 25 in the journal Molecular Ecology.

[Related: Bee brains could teach robots to make split-second decisions.]

Giving it all for the queen bee

According to the American Psychological Association, humans display altruism through behaviors that benefit another individual at a cost to oneself. Some psychologists consider it a uniquely human trait and studying it in animals requires a different framework for understanding. Animals experience a different level of cognition, so what drives humans to be altruistic might be different than what influences animals like honeybees to act in ways that appear to be altruistic.

In this new study, the researchers first looked at the genetics behind retinue behavior in worker honeybees. Retinue behavior is the actions of worker bees taking care of the queen, like feeding or grooming her. It’s believed to be triggered by specific pheromones and worker bees are always female. 

After the worker bees are exposed to the queen’s mandibular pheromone (QMP), they deactivate their own ovaries. They then help spread the QMP around to the other worker bees and they only take care of the eggs that the queen bee produces. Entomologists consider this behavior ‘altruistic’ because it benefits the queen’s ability to produce offspring, while the worker bees remain sterile. 

The queen is also typically the mother of all or mostly all of the honeybees in the hive. The genes that make worker bees more receptive to the queen’s pheromone and retinue behavior can be passed down from either female or male parent. However, the genes only result in altruistic behavior when they are passed down from the female bee parent.

“People often think about different phenotypes being the result of differences in gene sequences or the environment. But what this study shows is it’s not just differences in the gene itself—it’s which parent the gene is inherited from,” study co-author and Penn State University doctoral candidate Sean Bresnahan said in a statement. “By the very nature of the insect getting the gene from its mom, regardless of what the gene sequence is, it’s possibly going to behave differently than the copy of the gene from the dad.”

A battle of genetics 

The study supports a theory called the Kinship Theory of Intragenomic Conflict. It suggests that a mothers’ and fathers’ genes are in a conflict over what behaviors to support and not support. Previous studies have shown that genes from males can support selfish behavior in mammals, plants, and honeybees. This new study is the first known research that shows females can pass altruistic behavior onto their offspring in their genes. 

[Really: What busy bees’ brains can teach us about human evolution.]

Worker bees generally have the same mother but different fathers, since the queen mates with multiple male bees. This means that the worker bees share more of their mother’s genes with each other. 

“This is why the Kinship Theory of Intragenomic Conflict predicts that genes inherited from the mother will support altruistic behavior in honeybees,” Breshnahan said. “A worker bee benefits more from helping, rather than competing with, her mother and sisters—who carry more copies of the worker’s genes than she could ever reproduce on her own. In contrast, in species where the female mates only once, it is instead the father’s genes that are predicted to support altruistic behavior.”

Pinpointing conflict networks

To look closer, the team crossbred six different lineages of honeybees. Bresnahan says that this is relatively easy to do in mammals or plants, but more difficult in insects. They used honeybee breeding expertise from co-author Juliana Rangel from Texas A&M University and Robyn Underwood at Penn State Extension to create these populations.

Once the bee populations were successfully crossed and the offspring were old enough, the team assessed the worker bees’ responsiveness to the pheromone that triggers the retinue behavior. 

A female lab technician wearing a protective covering to keep her safe from bee stings points to a bee hive on a rooftop lab.
Penn State Grozinger lab technician Kate Anton inspectS a hive on the rooftop of Millennium Science Complex at Penn State University. CREDIT: Brennan Dincher

“So, we could develop personalized genomes for the parents, and then map back the workers’ gene expression to each parent and find out which parent’s copy of that gene is being expressed,” Bresnahan said.

The team identified the gene regulatory networks that have this intragenomic conflict, finding that more genes that have a parental bias were expressed. These networks consisted of genes that previous research showed were related to the retinue behavior.

“Observing intragenomic conflict is very difficult, and so there are very few studies examining the role it plays in creating variation in behavior and other traits,” study co-author and Penn State entomologist Christina Grozinger said in a statement. “The fact that this is the third behavior where we have found evidence that intragenomic conflict contributes to variation in honeybees suggests that intragenomic conflict might shape many types of traits in bees and other species.”

The team hopes that this research will help provide a blueprint for more studies into intragenomic conflict in other animals and plants.

The post Female honeybees may pass down ‘altruistic’ genes appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Get big TV savings before Black Friday with 45% off an Amazon Fire TV https://www.popsci.com/gear/amazon-fire-tv-pre-black-friday-deal-2023/ Wed, 18 Oct 2023 16:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580681
A product image of an Amazon TV in a brick pattern on a plain background.
Amanda Reed

Skip the traditional post-Thanksgiving chaos all together by taking advantage of these stellar early Black Friday deals at Amazon.

The post Get big TV savings before Black Friday with 45% off an Amazon Fire TV appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A product image of an Amazon TV in a brick pattern on a plain background.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Black Friday gets most of the credit when it comes to cheap TVs. This year, however, you can shop Black Friday deals comfortably from your home—and you don’t even need to wait until the leftovers get cold to do so. Snag an Amazon Fire TV for 45% right now before the Black Friday rush.

Amazon Fire TV 32″ 2-Series HD smart TV with Fire TV Alexa Voice Remote $109.99 (Was $199.99)

Amazon

SEE IT

If you don’t need 4K definition but still want to watch television sans cable, the Fire TV is for you. Its 720p resolution is just enough to see rich colors and contrast without the cost. All your favorite streaming apps, like Netflix, Amazon Prime Video, Disney+, and more, come together in one central hub and the Amazon Alexa Voice Remote to easily access it all. You also get six months of MGM+ for free with your Fire TV purchase—perfect for future winter movie nights and snowy stay-ins. If you need a recommendation, we’re fans of FROM, a binge-able and gripping drama about people who can’t escape a nightmarish town once they enter. It will leave you gripping your weighted blanket in suspense.

If 720p doesn’t seem satisfying to you, the 40-inch Amazon Fire TV 2-Series 4K UHD television is $179.99, 28% off its OG $249.99 price. It bumps up the resolution to 1080p—still not 4K quality, but noticeably more detailed than 720p. Both TVs are solid if you’re watching a lot of DVD or older Blu-ray content that has trouble filling up a 4K screen anyway.

We’ve gone from fighting over TVs in-store to hoping they don’t sell out before we click “add to cart.” The latter is just as frustrating as the former—skip the chaos altogether by acting now.

Here are more pre-Black Friday home theater deals we’re watching alongside the Thanksgiving parade:

The post Get big TV savings before Black Friday with 45% off an Amazon Fire TV appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The IRS’ free online tax filing program will be super exclusive in 2024 https://www.popsci.com/technology/irs-free-direct-file-pilot/ Wed, 18 Oct 2023 15:45:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580723
A hand holding a black pen and filling in the 1040 Individual Income Tax Return Form
Most Americans only have third-party filing options outside of the old-fashioned paper route. Deposit Photos

Thirteen states will offer the no-cost Direct File pilot program, although only if you meet certain requirements.

The post The IRS’ free online tax filing program will be super exclusive in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A hand holding a black pen and filling in the 1040 Individual Income Tax Return Form
Most Americans only have third-party filing options outside of the old-fashioned paper route. Deposit Photos

After years of hints and false starts, the Internal Revenue Service will be finally testing a free federal direct tax filing pilot program for select citizens in 13 participating states in 2024. The move marks a major moment in a years’ long path towards offering Americans a no-cost federal filing alternative to third-party services such as Intuit TurboTax and H&R Block—an $11 billion industry that has come under increased Federal Trade Commission scrutiny over allegedly predatory practices, deceptive advertising, and privacy concerns.

[Related: How to avoid tax season stress]

In an October 17 announcement, IRS Commissioner Danny Werfel called the pilot stage a “critical step forward” in testing the “feasibility of providing taxpayers a new option to file their returns for free directly with the IRS.” Warfel added that information and data gathered during the 2024 pilot program will help direct future iterations of the Direct File program, as well as help the IRS assess benefits, costs, and operational challenges.

Residents of Arizona, California, Massachusetts and New York are already confirmed to integrate Direct File into their systems for the 2024 tax season, which begins in December. Meanwhile, Alaska, Florida, New Hampshire, Nevada, South Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Washington and Wyoming “may be eligible to participate” due to their lack of state income taxes. Atop the state-based restrictions, only certain filers will be eligible to participate based on specific types of income, as well as limited credits and adjustments.

[Related: Calling TurboTax ‘free’ is ‘deceptive advertising,’ says FTC]

In September, the FTC ruled Intuit must stop labeling its products as free unless a stringent set of conditions are “clearly and conspicuously” displayed to consumers. But even without proper labeling, security and privacy concerns have long surrounded the private tax filing industry. In 2022, a major investigation uncovered companies including H&R Block, TaxSlayer, and TaxAct all routinely shared customers’ sensitive financial information with third-party advertisers via the Meta Pixel.

The free code, made available via Facebook’s parent company, marks a tiny pixel on participating websites to subsequently track information regarding people’s digital activity. Roughly one-third of the 80,000 most popular websites online utilize Meta Pixel (PopSci included); the tracking cookie ecosystem provides the majority of many online companies’ revenue streams. Many of the companies profiled by the investigation have since ceased using Meta Pixel for such purposes.

But even using a federal e-file program potential requires supplying personal identification information. In 2022, the IRS announced a new policy requiring US citizens to submit a selfie via the popular, controversial third-party verification service, ID.me, to access their tax information. The IRS walked back the policy plan following an outpouring of public criticism. It is unclear if ID.me will be a mandatory component of the forthcoming Direct File program. The IRS did not respond to PopSci regarding the issue at the time of writing.

The post The IRS’ free online tax filing program will be super exclusive in 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best weighted blankets of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-weighted-blanket/ Mon, 11 Oct 2021 19:59:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-weighted-blanket/
The best weighted blankets can help you relax and get some sleep.

Experts believe these blankets can increase serotonin and melatonin levels and reduce stress. We believe they're the coziest, highest-quality options out there.

The post The best weighted blankets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best weighted blankets can help you relax and get some sleep.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Quility Weighted Blanket with Soft Cover is the best overall. Quility 20-Pound Weighted Blanket with Soft Cover
SEE IT

Helps promote relaxation and temperature control for a great night’s sleep.

Best knit Bearaby makes the best weighted blanket that's knit. Bearaby Weighted Blanket
SEE IT

This chunky blanket is hand-knit from organic cotton and looks great in your home.

Best fleece The Uttermara Sherpa Weighted Blanket is the best fleece blanket. Uttermara Sherpa Fleece Weighted Blanket
SEE IT

The smooth fleece top and wool-like Sherpa reverse offer unmatched coziness.

If you’ve tried all the usual suspects to help fall asleep at night, such as a sleep schedule, getting plenty of exercise, and avoiding caffeine, but are still having trouble, it may be time to invest in a weighted blanket. Weighted blankets can help reduce stress while promoting a feeling of calmness by evenly applying firm yet gentle pressure throughout the body, similar to getting a hug or swaddling a baby. So, if you’re sold on the idea that these products could help you achieve optimal rest, we’ve rounded up some of the best weighted blankets on the market today.

How we chose the best weighted blankets

Weighted blankets have only been seeing mainstream popularity for the past few years since a Kickstarter campaign for a product called the Gravity Blanket raised nearly $5 million. Unfortunately, the success of the Kickstarter quickly inspired countless knockoffs, which is why it’s even more important to vet these products for exceptional quality and value. With so many inferior products on the market, we took a look at roughly 25 to 30 of the highest-rated weighted blankets before arriving at the ones we chose for this guide.

One of the characteristics, in particular, that we honed in on was high-quality glass bead filling that is sewn into interior pockets so it won’t shift or even spill out of the blanket, which is common in inferior models. We also ensured that all of the products featured here use 100% cotton or bamboo fabric, except for one blanket with a reversible Sherpa and fleece cover. Most of the products listed also had removable, machine-washable covers to keep your weighted blanket clean and feeling like new for years to come.

The best weighted blankets: Reviews & Recommendations

The science behind weighted blankets checks out. The approach is called deep pressure stimulation, which uses this controlled pressure to stimulate the natural production of mood-boosting serotonin and increase melatonin levels while reducing the stress hormone cortisol. As such, many experts believe weighted blankets can improve sleep for people experiencing conditions including insomnia, anxiety, and autism.

Occupational therapists often use weighted blankets for sensory integration therapy, particularly among children and young adults with trouble processing their senses. Simulating these senses of touch can help the patient’s brain to adapt. Weighted blankets can also be soothing for the general populace, and we’ve rounded up some of the best weighted blankets on the market below.

Best overall: Quility 20-Pound Weighted Blanket with Soft Cover

Quility

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Evenly distributed micro glass beads provide gentle pressure to help even the most restless sleepers reduce tossing and turning and get through the night, making this an easy pick for the best weighted blanket overall.

Specs

  • Fabric type: 100% cotton blanket, 100% polyester duvet cover
  • Fill: Glass microbeads
  • Weight: 20 pounds

Pros

  • Even weight distribution across sections
  • Removable duvet cover
  • Seven-layer system shapes to your body

Cons

  • Beads spread out over time
  • Could be too warm for sleepers who run hot

Get better sleep with the Quility 20-Pound Weighted Blanket that wraps you in warmth and comfort. The gentle pressure of the micro glass bead filling should help reduce tossing and turning for even the most restless sleepers to make it through the night. The blanket’s seven-layer system shapes to your body for added comfort, with even weight distribution to balance the pressure across the quilted sections.

The 100% cotton material is designed to keep you cool. Although, some sleepers who run hot or live in warm climates may still think it’s too warm. So that’s something to consider if you fall into either of those categories. There’s also a removable duvet cover for easy cleaning, with a durable zipper and eight duvet tie-loops to keep the blanket in place. 

A handful of customers have also had issues with the glass beads redistributing after a few weeks or months of use but seem to be in the minority. However, those who have experienced problems also seem to have had good luck by contacting customer service.

Best knit: Bearaby Napper Organic Hand-Knit Weighted Blanket

Jen McCaffery

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This gorgeous chunky blanket is made from sustainable materials, customizable in size, weight, and color, and feels delightful to snuggle under.

Specs

  • Fabric type: Organic cotton
  • Fill: N/A
  • Weight: Available in 10-, 15-, 20-, and 25-pound sizes

Pros

  • Beautiful design
  • Eco-friendly
  • Machine-washable

Cons

  • More expensive
  • If your home is drafty, cold air can seep in
  • Some users say can be stiff at first

If you’re looking for a weighted blanket that looks as good as it feels, consider the Bearaby Napper. The company began as a Kickstarter campaign led by a former World Bank economist who was looking for a solution for her chronic insomnia. These chunky knit blankets are made with organic cotton, are free of artificial fillers, and have earned the OEKO-TEX Standard 100 for not containing harmful chemicals, so you can feel good about sleeping under one.

Bearaby recommends that you choose a weighted blanket that’s roughly 10 percent of your body weight, and provides a simple calculator to help you find the best option for your size of bed. The blankets are available in 10-, 15-, 20-, and 25-pound sizes and in a range of muted colors (Olive Night, Asteroid Grey, Moonstone Grey, Midnight Blue, Evening Rose, and Cloud White.) I tried the 10-pound version and can attest that these blankets provide a soothing amount of weight and look great at the foot of a bed or as a throw. They’re also machine-washable, and you can toss them in the dryer for a tumble dry.

Best for adults: WONAP Weighted Blanket for Couples

Why it made the cut: Perfect for couples, the soothing touch of the bamboo blanket combined with glass beads provides a deep and relaxing sleep for you and your partner.

Specs

  • Fabric type: 100% bamboo
  • Fill: Glass beads
  • Weight: 25 pounds

Pros

  • Hypoallergenic glass beads
  • Breathable natural bamboo fabric
  • Four-by-four-inch diamond design

Cons

  • Couples may find the blanket too restrictive

Both you and your partner will get a good night’s rest when using the extra-large WONAP Weighted Blanket for Couples. Constructed of 100% breathable Natural Bamboo fabric, the inner part of the blanket includes ultra-soft cotton compartments filled with hypoallergenic, non-toxic, and odorless premium glass beads. The beads are evenly distributed thanks to a four by four-inch diamond design that applies the same amount of pressure throughout the entire body for a more restful sleep.

The combination of the bamboo fabric and glass beads also creates a cooling effect to use the blanket year-round. In fact, one of the biggest problems some users have noted is that the blanket is so heavy and secure that it actually even may prevent you and your partner from getting near each other at night. Is there such a thing as a product doing its job too well?

Though the dense stitches and the durable thread of the bamboo fabric are intended to prevent leakage of the glass beads, a small number of reviewers complained of finding sand or dust in the bed after using it, so that is something to keep in mind.

Best for kids: Sivio Kids Weighted Blanket

Why it made the cut: This blanket effectively simulates the hug of a mother so your child can fall asleep faster and sleep deeper and longer through the night. It’s easily one of the best weighted blankets for kids.

Specs

  • Fabric type: 100% cotton
  • Fill: Glass beads
  • Weight: 3 pounds

Pros

  • Seven-layer design prevents leakage
  • Fun, kid-friendly designs
  • Smaller pockets evenly distribute weight

Cons

  • Suggested weight may be too light
  • Some children could use a larger size

Parents of young children with special needs or separation anxiety may find the Sivio Kids Weighted Blanket to be an absolute game-changer. This thermostabilized weighted blanket aligns naturally with your child’s body to simulate the gentle hug of a mother. Many customers who have tried nearly everything else have reported that this blanket dramatically reduces or eliminates the number of times their children get up through the night.

Parents will also rest assured knowing that the blanket is crafted with 100% natural, breathable cotton fabric, with an upgraded seven-layer design and square four by four-inch pockets to prevent the beads from leaking. Not only do these pockets make sure that the weight is more evenly distributed, but they also won’t make any noise to wake your child up during the night.

However, some user reviews have noted that the size and weight recommendations are too small and light. So if your child is on the higher end of the height and growth charts for their age or could benefit from the extra weight, you may want to size up out of precaution. In any case, that also ensures that you won’t have to replace the blanket in six months to a year.

Best throw: Baloo Weighted Cotton Blanket

Jen McCaffery

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These weighted blankets are made from all-natural cotton, chemical-free, and a portion of the company’s proceeds go toward ocean restoration.

Specs

  • Fabric type: Organic cotton
  • Fill: Glass microbeads
  • Weight: 12 pounds

Pros

  • Versatile
  • Eco-friendly
  • Machine-washable

Cons

  • Not as attractive a design

Baloo describes their weighted throws, blankets, and comforters as a hug that molds to your body and calms you down. Their satin-y quilted throws, which weigh 12 pounds and are 42 inches wide by 72 inches long, are substantial enough for curling up on the couch, but can easily double as a travel blanket for people who get nervous when they fly. The throw is also large enough to cover a twin bed and has attachments if you’d like to attach one of the company’s linen duvet covers.

The company also highlights their sustainable practices: All of their products are made from organic cotton, their packaging is plastic-free, they meet the OEKO-TEX Standard 100, and a portion of the proceeds from their sales go toward replanting mangrove and kelp forests. The cotton is breathable, which makes the blanket suitable for use throughout the year. And the throws are machine-washable and available in Pebble White, Luna Blue, and Silver Sage.

Best breathable: Brooklyn Bedding Chunky Knit Weighted Blanket

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This beautiful hand-knit blanket features an open weave that allows for plenty of cooling airflow.

Specs

  • Fabric type: Polyester jersey
  • Fill: Polyester
  • Weight: 10 or 15 pounds

Pros

  • Hand-knit
  • Promotes airflow
  • Pretty design
  • Can help reduce stress

Cons

  • Made from synthetic material
  • Only available in two weights

Blankets can sometimes look sloppy, but that’s not the case with Brooklyn Bedding’s Chunky Hand-Knit Weighted Blanket. Like the Beararby, this attractive blanket is crafted with care. It features soft polyester jersey outer shell and polyester fill—available in two weights (10 and 15 pounds) and two subtle colors (cream, shown here, and gray). Combined with the open-knit design, that material promotes airflow, making this blanket breathable and suitable for all seasons and members of the household (including furry friends enjoying their morning solar recharge, as seen above).

It’s cozy and comforting and threatens to keep you ensconced in bed or on the couch all day—partially because it provides just the right amount of calming pressure and partially because your toes might get tangled in the hand-knitted weave. Of course, we’d expect nothing less from Brooklyn Bedding—makers of the Aurora Luxe Cooling mattress, a top pick for hot sleepers thanks to its cool tech fibers and foams.

Best cooling: YnM Bamboo Weighted Blanket

Why it made the cut: Even the hottest sleepers will rest comfortably year-round with cooling, silky-soft bamboo fabric and even more glass beads for optimal temperature control.

Specs

  • Fabric type: 100% bamboo
  • Fill: Glass beads
  • Weight: 15 pounds

Pros

  • All-natural cooling bamboo materials
  • Smaller inner pockets for even distribution
  • More glass beads and thinner fiber

Cons

  • Slick bamboo may cause duvet to need readjusting
  • Not cool enough for warm climates

You can feel the difference from the moment you touch the YnM Bamboo Weighted Blanket. Made out of 100% breathable bamboo fabric and premium glass beads, this is one of the softest weighted blankets on the market while still managing to stay incredibly cool. The manufacturer is so confident of the blanket’s cooling properties that they even go so far as to describe it as “like sleeping in a pool of cool water,” except that you don’t get wet.

The seven-layer system is designed to contour to the shape of your body for maximum comfort. This cooling weighted blanket also features more glass beads and less fiberfill for exceptional breathability and better temperature control. Unfortunately, a few customers who live in exceptionally warm climates claim that they still need their air conditioning on full blast while using this product.

Two additional layers combined with a three-dimensional lock bead sewing method also ensure against leakage, and the extremely fine stitching prevents weight shifting from one compartment to another. One of the only user complaints is that the bamboo material is so slick that it can be challenging to keep the blanket inside the duvet without adjusting it frequently.

Best fleece: Uttermara Sherpa Fleece Weighted Blanket

Why it made the cut: This super-soft, super comfy heavy blanket keeps you warm by forming a gentle hug along your body without bunching up or causing excess heat.

Specs

  • Fabric type: Sherpa and fleece
  • Fill: 1-millimeter ceramic beads
  • Weight: 15 pounds

Pros

  • Smooth fleece top and Sherpa reverse
  • Unique bead-filling technology
  • Eye-catching unicolor pattern

Cons

  • Commercial washing only
  • Some users find it too heavy

The Uttermara Sherpa Fleece Weighted Blanket pairs a smooth, 220 GSM fleece top and wool-like Sherpa reverse for the softest, coziest weighted blanket money can buy. Sherpa is more resistant to fading and stain than traditional fabrics used in weighted blankets and won’t pill or shed after prolonged use. Though, on the downside, the blanket isn’t machine washable and requires commercial washing.

Still, that’s a small price to pay for the superior craftsmanship you’re getting with this high-quality blanket. Neat stitches create both an integrated look and strong seaming. The tiny 1-millimeter ceramic beads are sewn into small squares, which are further sandwiched with non-glue polyester and brushed fabric that prevent the beads from clustering or moving around when shuffled so that the blanket can be totally conformed to your body.

When choosing a size, however, one thing to note is that the fleece and Sherpa exterior may add extra weight, as some users actually find their blankets to almost be too heavy. So if you’re on the fence about which weight blanket to choose, it may be wiser to size down. Sherpa is also on the warmer side for standard weighted blankets, so it may not be ideal for those who run hot.

What to consider before buying the best weighted blankets

Size

Aside from quality, there are two primary features that you should take into consideration when deciding to purchase a weighted blanket: size and weight. As to the former point, ask yourself if you’ll be using the blanket by yourself or if you’ll be sharing with a partner. Weighted blankets do come in up to king and queen sizes to accommodate larger beds. However, weighted blankets are also not for everyone, and if your partner isn’t into the idea, you may be stuck with too large of an unwieldy blanket for just one person. 

Intended Use

Another thing to ask yourself is whether you’ll be using the blanket primarily for sleeping or lounging, and even if you’ll need a new pillow or even a new mattress to go along with your weighted blanket. However, if your objective for a isn’t for sleeping, but as a throw while you’re watching TV or reading a book, then you could absolutely meet your needs with a smaller size.

Weight

Of course, weight is perhaps the most critical factor to consider before buying a weighted blanket. Generally, most experts suggest getting one that weighs approximately eight to 12% of your overall body weight—or an even 10% is also a good rule of thumb. Depending on what you think your needs will be, you can easily size up or down, as some people say they prefer a heavier blanket while others don’t like to be weighed down too much.

We also can’t stress enough the importance of thoroughly reading user reviews. All too often, these types of products come with shoddy construction. So it’s especially crucial to choose a weighted blanket of exceptional craftsmanship and quality, that won’t tear open at the seams and leave glass sand and dust all over your bed.

FAQs

Q: How much does a weighted blanket cost?

The cost of a weighted blanket depends on the quality of the material and its size and weight. The picks on this list range from The picks on this list range from the hand-knit Bearaby Napper Organic Hand-Knit Weighted Blanket at $199 to to the budget-friendly Uttermara Sherpa Fleece Weighted Blanket at $79.50.

Q: Should you sleep with a weighted blanket every night?

Whether you should sleep with a weighted blanket every night boils down mostly to personal preference. Some sleep consultants suggest using these products for just 20 to 30 minutes at a time, while others recommend sleeping with them overnight. As you begin to use your blanket and test it out, you should feel what is personally the most comfortable.

Q: Do weighted blankets make you hot?

Despite often being thicker and heavier than most comforters, there is a common misconception that weighted blankets make you too hot. On the contrary, most people prone to hot flashes, overheating, or living in warm temperatures can still comfortably use weighted blankets. As a good rule of thumb, however, weighted blankets made from 100% cotton or bamboo tend to be cooler than blankets made from fleece, Sherpa, or synthetic materials.

Q: Can you wash a weighted blanket?

Washing a weighted blanket can be tricky since they are generally made with a heavier construction than most blankets or comforters, but many come with removable covers that can be washed separately. However, if your weighted blanket does not come with a removable cover, you may need to spot clean with gentle soaps, detergents, or stain removers.

Final thoughts on the best weighted blankets

Oddly enough, our top picks for the best weighted blanket couldn’t be more different from one another, between the Bearaby Napper and the Uttermara Sherpa Fleece Weighted Blanket. We love the Bearaby because of the combination of beautiful design and comfort. However, those who prefer a blanket that provides added warmth will likely find the super soft Sherpa and fleece of the Uttermara to be a better fit.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best weighted blankets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
What the ‘Ring of Fire’ eclipse looked like to a satellite nearly 1 million miles from Earth https://www.popsci.com/science/ring-of-fire-eclipse-satellite-view/ Wed, 18 Oct 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580642
The planet Earth, as seen from the DSCOVR satellite. Earth appears as a bright blue dot against the darkness of space, with the shadow of an annular solar eclipse over much of North America.
An image of the annular solar eclipse on October 14, 2023 taken by NASA's EPIC camera aboard the DSCOVR spacecraft. NASA/DSCOVR EPIC team

The DSCOVR satellite image depicts the moon’s shadow during the October 14 annular eclipse.

The post What the ‘Ring of Fire’ eclipse looked like to a satellite nearly 1 million miles from Earth appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The planet Earth, as seen from the DSCOVR satellite. Earth appears as a bright blue dot against the darkness of space, with the shadow of an annular solar eclipse over much of North America.
An image of the annular solar eclipse on October 14, 2023 taken by NASA's EPIC camera aboard the DSCOVR spacecraft. NASA/DSCOVR EPIC team

The recent “ring of fire” solar eclipse looked stunning across portions of North and South America and we now have a new view of the stellar event. The Deep Space Climate Observatory (DSCOVR) satellite created the image of the eclipse on Saturday October 14, depicting the mostly blue Earth against the darkness of space, with one large patch of the planet in the shadow of the moon. 

[Related: Why NASA will launch rockets to study the eclipse.]

Launched in 2015, DSCOVR is a joint NASA, NOAA, and U.S. Air Force satellite. It offers a unique perspective since it is close to 1 million miles away from Earth and sits in a gravitationally stable point between the Earth and the sun called Lagrange Point 1. DSCOVR’s primary job is to monitor the solar wind in an effort to improve space weather forecasts

A special device aboard the satellite called the Earth Polychromatic Imaging Camera (EPIC) imager took this view of the eclipse from space. According to NASA, the sensor gives scientists frequent views of the Earth. The moon’s shadow, or umbra, is falling across the southeastern coast of Texas, near Corpus Christi.

An annular solar eclipse occurs when the moon moves between Earth and the sun. The sun does not vanish completely in this kind of eclipse. Instead, the moon is positioned far enough from Earth to keep the bright edges of the sun visible. This is what causes the “ring of fire,” as if the moon has been outlined with bright paint.

The annular eclipse on October 14, 2023, as seen from Earth. CREDIT: NASA.

While this year’s event could be seen to some degree across the continental United States, the 125-mile-wide path of annularity began in Oregon around 9:13 AM Pacific Daylight Time. The moon’s shadow then moved southeast across Nevada, Utah, Arizona, Colorado, and New Mexico, before passing over Texas and the Gulf of Mexico. It continued south towards Mexico’s Yucatan, Peninsula, Belize, Honduras, Nicaragua, Costa Rica, Panama, Colombia, and Brazil

Unlike the colorful Aurora Borealis, eclipses are much easier to predict. Scientists can say when annular and solar eclipses will happen down to the second centuries in advance. The precise positions of the moon and the sun and how they shift over time is already known, so scientists can see how the moon’s shadow will fall onto Earth’s globe. Advances in computer technology have also enabled scientists to even chart eclipse paths down to a range of a few feet.

[Related: We can predict solar eclipses to the second. Here’s how.]

The next annular solar eclipse will be at least partially visible from South America on October 2,2024. One of these ‘ring of fire’ eclipses will not be visible in the United States until June 21, 2039. However, a total solar eclipse will darken the sky from Maine to Texas on April 8, 2024. There is still plenty of time to get eclipse glasses or make a pinhole camera to safely watch the next big celestial event. 

The post What the ‘Ring of Fire’ eclipse looked like to a satellite nearly 1 million miles from Earth appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Save $180 on a 2019 Apple iPad https://www.popsci.com/sponsored-content/new-2019-ipad-deal/ Wed, 18 Oct 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580636
A silver 2019 7th generation iPad with its box and charger on a white background
Stack Commerce

Gear up at a discount for a limited time.

The post Save $180 on a 2019 Apple iPad appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A silver 2019 7th generation iPad with its box and charger on a white background
Stack Commerce

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

An open box WiFi and cellular unlocked 2019 7th generation Apple iPad is on sale for just $279.99 now.

In the digital age, we’re always busy and we’re always looking for ways to stay connected. Whether you’re traveling for work or you’re setting up at a coffee shop for the day, everybody wants the flexibility to do their best work or find some entertainment with relative ease. Sometimes a smartphone or laptop comes up short. But that’s why a tablet can be so handy, and when you can get a practically new Apple iPad for just $279.99, why wouldn’t you?

Currently, in the PopSci Shop, you can get an open box WiFi and cellular unlocked 2019 7th generation Apple iPad for 39% off the original list price of $459. An open box item is one that is considered excess inventory from store shelves. They’ve been exposed to customer contact and couldn’t move from the shelves, but the retail outlet’s loss is your gain. 

This iPad has never really been used, so the A10 bionic chip hasn’t experienced any real wear and tear and the 3GB of RAM remains fresh. You can browse, work, game, and stream on a crystal clear 10.2-inch Retina display with 2048×1536 resolution and get online anywhere via Wi-Fi or by using your SIM. The iPad offers both an 8MP iSight camera and a 1.2MP FaceTime HD camera to let you take calls, document your adventures, and more while running iPadOS for a clean experience no matter what you’re working on. It’s the perfect tool for professionals, students, and the person on the go.

For a limited time, you can get an open box WiFi and cellular unlocked 2019 7th generation Apple iPad for 39% off $459 at just $279.99.

Prices are subject to change.

The post Save $180 on a 2019 Apple iPad appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
7 tips to get the most out of your Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 https://www.popsci.com/diy/z-fold-5-tips/ Wed, 18 Oct 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580473
Person taking a selfie using a Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5
A foldable phone gives you double the screens and double the options. Samsung

Make sure you're making the most of your folding phone.

The post 7 tips to get the most out of your Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Person taking a selfie using a Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5
A foldable phone gives you double the screens and double the options. Samsung

If you’re splurging on a foldable phone like the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5, make sure you’re getting your money’s worth by exploring all the options and features the handset has to offer.

When you’ve got twice as many screens as normal, you get a lot more functionalities and flexibility: From quickly getting apps running side by side, to dragging and dropping texts and images between them.

1. Customize full screen apps

Unfortunately, not every Android app is developed to run on a screen as large as the main display of the Galaxy Z Fold 5. You might see black bars at the side of certain apps, as well as other odd behavior.

But you can fix this by going to Settings, then Display and Full screen apps. Pick an tool, and choose how you’d like it to show up. Full screen is the option to go for if you don’t want any black bars, though it may cause some distortion on certain apps.

2. Drag and drop between apps

With two apps open on screen, the Z Fold 5 is very adept at transferring content between them. Try tapping and holding an image in your web browser, for example, then dragging it across to an email you’re composing on the other side of the screen. The system will drop the picture right into the message—no copying, pasting, or saving required.

[Related: 7 Samsung phone hacks you need to try right now]

Note that this feature doesn’t work in every single app, but it will run smoothly in a lot them: Google’s Gmail and Chrome, Samsung’s Gallery and Notes, and Microsoft’s PowerPoint and Outlook, are some of the apps that support dragging and dropping.

3. Bring up the Flex panel

Menu for activating flex mode on Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5
Setting up your Z Fold 5 in a right angle will give you a full screen menu with shortcuts and other utilities. Screenshot by Samsung

Flex mode is when you make a 90-degree angle with the Z Fold 5, so you have one half laying flat on a surface while the other is propped up straight. This allows certain apps to display different content on each side. Try opening the Camera app to see what we mean— you’ll see the shutter window at the top and the camera controls underneath.

There’s also the Flex panel, which will work with any app that supports multi-window use (most now do). Open Settings and then go to Advanced features > Labs > Flex mode panel, and enable the feature.

Now, when you turn your phone to landscape mode, you’ll get a little Flex panel icon (a gray diamond shape) in the lower left hand corner. Tap the icon to make the panel pop up: you’ll get a little touchpad to use with the app that’s on the top half of the screen, as well as quick access to certain features and the screenshot tool.

Try using the Flex panel with a web browser to see how useful it can be: You’ll be able to select links and elements on screen just as you would on a desktop operating system.

4. Get more content on screen

Make your way to Settings and go to Display and Screen layout and zoom. This page lets you change the size of the fonts and other elements on screen, which means you can get more content on your Z Fold 5 display at the same time—whether you’re working with one or multiple apps on the screen.

5. Switch seamlessly to the cover screen

Menu for transferring apps to the cover screen of the Galaxy Z Fold 5
Not all apps go straight from the extended screen to the cover one, but you can customize it. Screenshot by Samsung

By default, the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 treats the larger main screen and the smaller cover screen separately, so apps that you’re using on the big display won’t automatically switch over to the outer display when you close the phone.

But if you would like to transfer apps seamlessly, open up Display from Settings, then tap on Continue apps on cover screen. You’ll be able to have this happen with all apps, or only with specific ones.

6. Change how multi window works

One of the key advantages of a foldable device like the Z Fold 5 is how easily you can get multiple apps and windows up alongside each other. Most of the time the Z Fold 5 handles this perfectly well on its own, but you can make some tweaks by heading to Settings, and then going to Advanced features and Multi window.

For example, you can enable Swipe for split screen. This feature will let you swipe in with two fingers from the left-hand edge of the main display to go from full screen mode to split screen mode. When you do, the Z Fold 5 will prompt you to choose another app to go alongside the one you’re already looking at.

7. Customize the taskbar

The taskbar at the bottom of the screen is crucial for getting around your foldable phone and the apps on it, so make sure it’s set up the way you want it. From Settings, pick Display and Taskbar, and choose how many recent apps you want to see at the bottom of the screen. You can also completely hide the taskbar, if you prefer.

[Related: Samsung Galaxy Z Flip4 review: Powerful vibes]

From the Display screen you can also select Navigation bar and choose whether you want to navigate your phone using gestures or the traditional back, home and recent buttons. If you’re not sure about the differences between these two options, you’ll see explanations for them on screen. Just keep in mind that using gestures will free up more space on the taskbar for you.

Note that the apps on the left of the taskbar are the same as those in the dock on the home screen. You can drag apps in and out of the dock if you want to change this selection.

The post 7 tips to get the most out of your Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heated slippers in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-heated-slippers/ Wed, 15 Dec 2021 18:40:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-heated-slippers/
Four pairs of slippers laid out next to each other in a cutout pattern
Amanda Reed

When the big chill moves in, heated slippers guarantee you’ll be comfy from top to bottom.

The post The best heated slippers in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four pairs of slippers laid out next to each other in a cutout pattern
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall ActionHeat makes some of the best heated slippers. ActionHeat Rechargeable Battery Heated Cable Knit Slippers
SEE IT

These comfy wool slippers come with a mobile charger you can take with you.

Best microwaveable Mars Wellness Heated Microwaveable Foot Booties Mars Wellness Heated Microwaveable Foot Booties
SEE IT

These microwaveable slippers help soothe arthritis pain with heat and aromatics like lavender and peppermint.

Best indoor/outdoor A pair of Heated Slippers by Volt on a plain background Heated Slipper by Volt
SEE IT

These versatile slippers can provide up to 12 hours of warmth on a single charge.

When it’s cold out, slip into a pair of heated slippers to keep your feet as toasty as possible. You’ll get instant relief from cold floors and drafty indoor air. But it’s not just about the heat this footwear provides. Winter weather can leave feet dry, chapped, and constantly in need of an emergency pedicure. The best heated slippers also moisturize your feet while warming them up, so say goodbye to scaly roughness!

How we chose the best heated slippers

Heated slippers come in a variety of forms. Microwaveable slippers can be nuked right up to a comfortable lounging temperature. Some heated slippers warm up in the same way as heated socks, using a battery-operated module. Another type of electric foot warmer uses an internal heating pad that you power up via a USB cable. Once the slippers have reached a full charge, you can unplug them and start walking—or lounging—for hours.

Another option is foot warmers that work like a heating pad. They feel just like house shoes when you slip your feet inside. The only difference is these boots aren’t made for walking. They’re best when you’re parked in one spot, on the couch, or sitting at your desk. Your feet will be cozy and comfortable as long as the heat is on. In making our recommendations, we looked for options from top brands that spanned a variety of power sources and price levels.

The best heated slippers: Reviews & Recommendations

It’s hard to go wrong with a good pair of the best heated slippers, but the style you end up going for should depend on what you do during a typical cold day or night around the house. Or maybe you’ll be wearing them outside, too. In that case, think waterproof and non-slip. If you’ll have them on mostly while you’re working or bundled up on the couch and mobility is less important, a pair of heated slippers that you can wear and charge at the same time will get extra credit for providing warmth 24/7.

Best overall: ActionHeat Rechargeable Battery Heated Cable Knit Slippers

ActionHeat

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Included rechargeable ActionHeat batteries 
  • Sizes: S/M, L/XL, XXL
  • Levels of heat: High, medium, and low

Pros

  • Attractive design
  • Provides three levels of heat
  • Long-lasting battery

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Batteries only available through ActionHeat

These fuzzy wool slippers won’t leave your feet waiting long for heat. The soles are wear-resistant, non-slip, and lightweight. Each one weighs less than half a pound. These slippers bring the heat at three levels, ranging from high (150 degrees F, which lasts more than three-and-a-half hours) to low (115 degrees F, which lasts up to five hours). They also come with a mobile power supply that you can take with you when you venture from an outlet.

Best USB-heated: Wirziis USB Heated Slippers

Wirziis

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: USB connection
  • Sizes: One
  • Levels of heat: One

Pros

  • Convenient
  • Affordable
  • Comfortable

Cons

  • Have to be attached to power source for them to work
  • Can’t adjust temperature level

Not a fan of slippers with batteries that will eventually run out? Wirziis USB Heated Slippers are designed with a replaceable heating pad that can be powered directly by any device with a USB-C connection, such as a computer, car charger, power bank, or plug. These comfy wool slippers heat up within three minutes and are available in black, gray, and brown. That said, you can’t really adjust the temperature, but you can keep the rest of your body warm with one of the best heated blankets.

Best indoor/outdoor: Heated Slipper by Volt

Volt

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Two included USB 5V VB550 batteries
  • Sizes: Small-3XL
  • Levels of heat: High, medium, and low

Pros

  • Lasts for up to 12 hours on a single charge
  • Provides three levels of heat
  • Comes in multiple sizes for men and women
  • Can wear indoors and outside

Cons

  • Only come in one color
  • Heating pad may not provide a lot of warmth

Volt is one of the first brands to design heated slippers, and the company has continued to innovate since coming out with its first pair 10 years ago. These comfy slippers are heated with included rechargeable batteries. They provide three levels of heat (high, medium, and low) and can last up to 12 hours on a single full charge. Best of all, you can wear them indoors or outside. You can also pair them with some of the best heated gloves for extra warmth.

Best microwaveable: Mars Wellness Heated Microwaveable Foot Booties

Mars

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Microwave or freezer
  • Sizes: One
  • Levels of heat: Hot and cold

Pros

  • Provide both heat and cold relief
  • Incorporate aromatherapy
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Some users say they come off easily
  • Not easy to clean

Could your tootsies use a little TLC? These plush booties are ideal for arthritis and other foot ailments or just nice to slip into after a long day on the go. They contain 12 natural aromatic ingredients, including lavender and peppermint, and they can be used to warm up your feet after heating them in the microwave, or you can chill them in the freezer before pulling them on to cool down your feet. And they come in three colors (mauve, gray, and espresso).

Best with memory foam: Kamlif Heating Slipper Shoes

Kamlif

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Rechargeable batteries
  • Sizes: Small and large
  • Levels of heat: High, medium, and low

Pros

  • Memory foam remembers feet
  • Three levels of heat
  • Less expensive than other models

Cons

  • Some users say they don’t provide a lot of heat

These heated slipper shoes feature memory foam to remember your foot for maximum comfort. Designed for both indoor and outdoor use, they’re equipped with toe warmers and can provide three levels of heat: high, medium, and low. Powered by rechargeable batteries, these slippers can last up to five hours in low mode on a single charge. They also provide infrared-ray warmth of these slippers that can encourage circulation, and help relieve foot fatigue. They also pair well with the best heated vests.

Best budget: HotHands Insole Foot Warmers

HotHands

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Air-activated heat packs
  • Sizes: One
  • Levels of heat: One

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • Inexpensive
  • Provides up to nine hours of heat

Cons

  • Some users said they don’t provide a lot of warmth
  • Not sustainable

If you’re looking for a quick solution to keep your feet toasty that doesn’t require you to spend a lot of cash, HotHands Insole Foot Warmers may be just the ticket. Open the package, slip these air-activated insoles into your shoes or boots, and these heated insoles can provide warmth for up to nine hours. The peel-and-stick adhesive backing keeps them secure in place inside your shoe. Although you must discard them after each use, 16 pairs ensure that one package will keep your feet warm for a week or two (and you can pick up some similar hand warmers while you’re at it).

Things to consider when shopping for the best heated slippers

Buying a pair of heated slippers is more of an investment than your average pair of bunny slippers. You’ll want to keep in mind where you want to wear them, the level of heat you’re seeking, and whether you want to move around with them. Here’s how to narrow down your options.

Do you want USB charging?

When you spend a lot of time working at your computer or just browsing the Internet, cute and comfy slippers that plug into your laptop with a USB connection are a convenient choice. Although you can wear these heated slippers while puttering around the house for at least several hours at full charge, if you are tied to your computer, you can work and wear them while they’re charging. There’s no need to worry about replacing batteries.

Even if you aren’t the workaholic type and will be spending long days just vegging out on the couch, you can charge these heated slippers anywhere near a power bank. By the time you’re ready to get up and move around, they’ll be fully charged and ready to keep your feet warm for at least a few hours.

Need warm slippers for the outside as well?

If you live in an apartment, you’ll probably be happy with a good pair of heated slippers designed for walking around and relaxing indoors. For those living in houses with backyards who need warm slippers for the outside as well, a pair that travels is in order, especially when the forecast calls for rain or snow.

For those short trips outside, you’ll need slippers that are made of sturdy enough fabric to withstand the elements. The soles should be wear-resistant and non-slip. Rubber ones ensure they provide enough traction for both indoor and outdoor wear. Since your backyard is likely to be wetter than inside, be sure you opt for a fabric that’s waterproof. You don’t want your heated slippers to be soaked and useless just when you need them most.

Heated slippers can help with medical conditions like arthritis

Like heated socks, heated slippers have benefits beyond keeping your feet from freezing. Foot warmers and slippers can help with some medical conditions too! Ones that are heated by the microwave can offer foot relief if you suffer from arthritis or if you have stiff muscles, pain, or circulation issues. Some are infused with cloves, cinnamon, eucalyptus, and other ingredients that create moist heat and soothe achy feet.

Although it sounds like you just put your house shoes in the microwave, the process can be more civilized than that. Wrap them up in a towel before nuking them to avoid leaving your microwave smelling like feet. And if that still sounds too unorthodox, some aromatherapy booties come with a scent pouch that you warm up in the microwave before placing it inside the slippers. It’s like an at-home DIY spa treatment for your feet.

Love the slippers you already have? Try heated insoles

Heated slipper insoles are another surefire way to keep your feet warm in cold weather, and they can fit right inside a pair of slippers you already own. You can get ones that are battery- or microwave-powered, and they’re available in both single-use options and ones that you can wear over and over.

These aren’t technically heated slippers since they are separate items, but they do just as good a job of heating up your feet. Another bonus is that you can wear them with multiple footwear, not just your house shoes. If you’re going to be inserting them into your outdoor boots, make sure they’re waterproof in case you encounter rain, sleet, snow, or pesky puddles.

FAQs

Q: How much do heated slippers cost?

Although they may sound like a pretty big financial investment, you can still enjoy warm and fuzzy slippers on a budget. In fact, you can scoop up a new pair at a wallet-friendly price that’s well below $100. As with all things, the quality will vary, but you don’t have to go high-end to keep your feet well-heated. There are plenty of excellent options for under $50.

Q: How do heated slippers work?

Heated slippers work in a variety of ways. Some are heated by a battery-operated pad, while others are USB-powered. You can also get a pair that will heat right up in the microwave.

Q: How long will the slippers stay warm?

Heated slippers will stay warm for at least a few hours. If you get a pair that works with USB charging, you can wear them while they charge without worrying about them going cold.

Q: Can you wash heated slippers?

You can wash heated slippers; just don’t do it in the washing machine or submerge them in water. Spot drying is generally a safe option, but to keep everything fully functioning, carefully follow the cleaning instructions included with your pair.

Final thoughts on the best heated slippers

Heated slippers do an excellent job of keeping your feet extra warm around the house (and even outside) when the temperature dips, and you don’t have to be a big spender to get a good pair. These warm and comfy slippers come in several styles—including USB- or battery-operated and microwaveable—that cover a number of household activities, from doing chores to working at the computer to just sitting around watching television. And if you intend to wear yours outside to get fresh air in the backyard, non-slip rubber soles will take you there and back safely.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated slippers in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heated gloves in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-heated-gloves/ Fri, 12 Aug 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=461459
Best heated gloves sliced header
Tony Ware

Don’t let frozen fingers spoil your fun.

The post The best heated gloves in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best heated gloves sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A pair of black Savior Thick Battery Heated Leather Gloves on a plain background Savior Thick Battery Heated Leather Gloves
SEE IT

Savior’s heated leather gloves bring the heat, along with touchscreen-friendly fingertips and a removable battery.

Best for cycling Sealskinz Waterproof Heated Cycling Glove product image Sealskinz Waterproof Heated Cycle Glove
SEE IT

The Sealskinz heated cycle glove offers maximum protection from the elements.

Best for work Volt Resistance Work 7v Leather Heated Gloves are the best for work. Volt Resistance Work 7v Leather Heated Gloves
SEE IT

Volt Resistance’s Work 7v Leather Heated Gloves have extra padding and cold-weather protection.

If you, like me, still enjoy spending time outdoors in below-freezing temperatures, you’ve probably considered purchasing heated gloves. I resisted for years, relying instead on chemical hand warmers and plastic bags. But, since winters seem to be getting colder and I start feeling the chill in my bones quicker than ever, I finally decided to see what all the hubbub was about. In the dead of winter, you want to keep your fingers toasty for a long time, whether you’re working up a sweat or just trekking out to the store. The best heated gloves are comfortable without impeding manual dexterity in your fingers, so you can ski, cycle, or do whatever you want in the freezing cold.

How we chose the best heated gloves

Living in New York City, I do not own a car, and while I have nothing against the city’s subway system, I prefer my bicycle as my mode of transportation. I ride/commute all year long, even through the winter. The only thing that keeps me off the bike is an active blizzard. I’ve also been lucky enough to spend months at a time cycling or trekking in remote mountain environments, like the Pamirs in Tajikistan and the Karakorum in northern Pakistan. I’ve been testing and writing about outdoor gear for over a decade for a variety of outlets, including HuffPost, BBC Travel, and Adventure Cycling. I am on a perpetual quest for cold-weather gear that works well and makes me forget that I’m even wearing it.

I tested these battery-operated heated gloves by using them like any other pair: taking them out on a bike ride or two. Cycling actively tests a glove’s grip, warmth, and wind resistance. You get to know a pair of gloves very well when you have a sustained stream of frigid wind blowing on your hands. I specifically noted how easy it was for me to operate my bike, the glove’s flexibility, and, when appropriate, their water resistance.

The best heated gloves: Reviews & Recommendations

As an outdoor and adventure lover whose hands and feet get cold easily, I feel as if I’ve spent an inordinate amount of time (and money) trying out a wide range of gear and techniques. While I admit to occasionally resorting to the wool socks and plastic bags on my feet method of combating freezing temperatures (I should try heated socks), my glove choices trend toward the more high-tech, as maintaining mobility and grippiness is almost as important as keeping warm. Here are some of the best heated gloves we’ve found for a variety of outdoor activities, and they’re a big step up from basic hand warmers in your mittens.

Best overall: Savior Thick Battery Heated Leather Gloves

SAVIOR HEAT

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These Savior gloves are very warm and have all the features we could want for a cold day out.

Specs

  • Heating elements:  Far-infrared fiber
  • Temperature range: 113°F (low) – 150°F (high)
  • Power source: 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2200 mAh
  • Material: Soft lambskin and polyester; cotton inner layer
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive index finger and thumb, anti-slip material on palms
  • Sizes: XS-3X

Pros

  • Soft and flexible
  • Anti-slip
  • Versatile
  • Warm even without heating element turned on

Cons

  • Not as effective in temperatures below 10°F
  • Not waterproof

Savior’s rechargeable heated gloves provide the best, most versatile protection from the cold that we’ve felt in a pair of gloves. They are well suited for a variety of outdoor adventures and reasonably priced, to boot.

In a field full of very similar products from companies with little reputation, they serve as a good example of what to look for in a pair of heated gloves. First and foremost, they’re quite warm with or without the heat turned on. They have three temperature settings, water-resistance and windproofing, heating elements that cover the back of your hand and fingertips, and touchscreen-sensitive material. Meanwhile, a leather palm ensures you won’t lose your grip when you need it the most.

They’re a bit on the thick side but still flexible enough for shifting gears on a bicycle or holding ski poles. My one personal complaint about these gloves is that the “on” indicator light is oddly bright when it’s on in the dark—but I’ve always had issues with bright lights in darkness being distracting.

All in all, it’s exactly what you’re looking for, and you don’t need to spend too much to get it.

Best for cycling: Sealskinz Waterproof Heated Cycle Glove

Sealskinz

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Made specifically for cycling, the Sealskinz waterproof heated cycle gloves keep your hands dry like no other.

Specs

  • Heating elements: Carbon fiber
  • Temperature range: N/A
  • Power source: 4-volt polymer rechargeable batteries
  • Battery life: 2200mAh
  • Material: Soft goatskin leather and polyester, Primaloft synthetic insulation
  • Special features: Waterproof, reflective details
  • Sizes: XS-XXL

Pros

  • Lifetime product and waterproof guarantee
  • Designed specifically for cycling
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Sizing runs small so make sure to purchase a size larger than normal

I first learned about Sealskinz products on an uncharacteristically cold, windy, and rainy group bicycle ride across the French countryside. Of the fifteen of us on the ride, all but one of us ended up with painful frozen fingers. The one guy whose hands were fine had a pair of Sealskinz waterproof gloves. I bought my own pair soon thereafter.

Many cold-weather cycling gloves do remain waterproof under sustained wet conditions, but Sealskinz’s cycling gloves keep your hands dry no matter how long you stay out. I have biked through rain, snow, and sleet storms (driving, relentless sleet for up to an hour), and very little moisture permeated the three-layer bonded construction. It features an insulation layer and a reflective layer that directs the body heat you’re generating back into the glove, keeping you extra warm. The integrated heating element produces heat for up to six hours.

A properly heated cycling glove is, in general, a rare find. Most heated gloves, while plenty warm, are often too bulky for gear-shifting and make braking cumbersome. They may also make it hard to grip your handlebars long-term properly. Sealskinz’s cycling gloves have a cycling-friendly design with a leather palm, enabling a better grip, and plenty of reflective details. (You can never have too many when commuting on dark, winter mornings.) In so many ways, it is the perfect winter cycling glove.

Best for motorcycling: Kemimoto Heated Gloves

Kemimoto

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Kemimoto’s heated gloves are very warm and durable, making them an excellent choice for motorcycle rides in the blustery cold.

Specs

  • Heating elements: Thin wires woven into fabric
  • Power source: 7.4V rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2500mAh 
  • Material: Faux leather
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips, waterproof
  • Sizes: S-XL

Pros

  • Long-lasting heat—up to 9 hours on lowest setting
  • 3 heating levels
  • Good price

Cons

  • Thick

Kemimoto’s heated gloves really emphasize the “heated” facet of the heated glove. They feature 2,500MaH batteries that can last up to nine hours on the lowest setting. Kemimoto gloves offer three heating levels.

Looking at the glove itself, it features a water- and windproof outer layer. The wrist buckle and velcro closure at the cuff allow for a secure fit that will block out a cold wind no matter how fast you’re going. These feature an anti-grip palm and have protective knuckle guards and reflective coating.

Best for work: Volt Resistance Work 7v Leather Heated Gloves

Volt Resistance

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Volt Resistance’s 7v Work gloves are much more durable and made for working outside in extreme cold.

Specs

  • Heating elements: “Zero layer” heat system: Thin wires bonded to the lining fabric
  • Power source: 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2500 mAh
  • Heat settings: 4
  • Material: Leather, tricot lining
  • Special features: Extra leather on palm for durability
  • Sizes: S-XXL

Pros

  • Extremely durable
  • Padded palms for added comfort
  • Heats entire hand

Cons

  • A bit bulky around the fingers

I grew up in northern Ohio near Lake Erie. My dad did a lot of work outside, including many wood-cutting expeditions to my Grandparents’ woods to procure fuel for our wood-burning stove. He had this amazing pair of yellow leather, fleece-lined work gloves that he’d wear on these trips. I liked to wear them around the house because I was fascinated with how they’d molded themselves into the exact shape of his hands and with how small my own hands felt inside them.

Constructed from durable yellow-stained leather with padded, reinforced palms, these heated work gloves from Volt Resistance remind me of the ones my dad wore. Heating wires extend through the entire glove, including the fingers, thumbs, and palms to provide full coverage across your hand. There’s a clear window on the back of the glove near the wrist that clearly shows how much power remains in the batteries. 

I bought a pair for my dad last Christmas. His review: “Wow, what will they think of next? You know, back in the day, we just put plastic bags on our hands under our gloves. These are definitely way better than that.”

Best for fingertips: Savior Thick Electric Heated Mittens

SAVIOR HEAT

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you’re a mitten person, this heated version from Savior is the warmest pair we’ve found. 

Specs

  • Heating elements:  Far infrared fiber heating wires
  • Power source: 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2200 mAh
  • Material: Polyester, neoprene, cotton
  • Special Features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips
  • Sizes: XXS-XXL

Pros

  • Great for winter sports
  • Soft and flexible
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Battery is bulky at the base

This updated version of Savior’s heated mittens has double the heated wires and elements in the thumb area as the previous model. My thumbs are always the first of my digits to be affected by the cold, but these kept me warm during an ice canyon tour and skating on Mildred Lake in Jasper, Alberta, in February.

I wouldn’t use these for cycling or any other activity where flexibility and dexterity are super important. Still, they’re cozier than most gloves and a perfect fit for low-key outdoor events.

Best for skiing: Akaso Heated Gloves

AKASO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The anti-slip surface of these splashproof and breathable Akaso gloves makes them perfect for gripping ski poles.

Specs

  • Heating elements: Carbon fiber heating panels
  • Power source: 7.4V rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 3200mAh 
  • Heating levels: 3
  • Material: Faux leather, cotton
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips, waterproof
  • Sizes: S-XL

Pros

  • Splash proof
  • Breathable
  • Reflective strip
  • Warm up quickly

Cons

  • Limited long-term waterproofing

Featuring a layer of 3M Thinsulate material that retains heat 1.5 times better than down, anti-slip gripping material on the palms, and a cuff drawstring to secure them around your wrist, these Akaso heated gloves offer the right kind of protection for skiers and snowboarders.

Carbon fiber heating panels cover the back of the hand, fingers, and thumb (not the palm). The heating elements are covered by water-repellent nylon and the 3M Thinsulate, which keeps your hands warm with or without the electric heat on. They’re warm and comfortable in good weather but don’t fare as well in the rain or snow. With a steady stream of precipitation, you will eventually feel moisture penetrate the outer layer and start to pool inside the glove. That said, they’re perfect for clear, sunny, ski days.

Best thin: Sun Will Heated Glove Liners

Sun Will

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These heated glove liners from Sun Will are so light you’ll almost forget you have them on.

Specs

  • Heating elements: Far infrared fiber heating wires
  • Power source: 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2200 mAh
  • Material: Polyester, lycra, fleece
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips
  • Sizes: XXS-XXL

Pros:

  • Thin and light
  • Soft
  • Can wear under another pair of gloves
  • Great for arthritis and blood circulation

Cons:

  • Not as durable as thicker, bulkier gloves

Made from lycra and fleece, these gloves are intended to fit close to your hand and be worn under a waterproof glove shell when needed. If you already have a favorite pair of waterproof gloves you wear while hiking or skiing, add these as an underlayer on particularly blustery days. You can, of course, also wear them on their own. 

Thin heated gloves are also especially useful if you suffer from chronically cold hands, even when indoors. They’re excellent for stimulating blood circulation, whether you need to warm up from the cold or need help with symptoms caused by arthritis or Raynaud’s Syndrome.

Best budget: Hot Hands Heated Fleece Glove/Mittens

HotHands

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you want to keep your hands warm without spending much money, a pair of cheap gloves and hand warmers will do the trick.

Specs

  • Heating elements: iron powder, salt, water, activated carbon. Oxygen reacts with the iron and salt to form iron oxide, which releases heat
  • Power source: Chemical air-activated hand warmers
  • Battery life: N/A
  • Heating levels: N/A
  • Material: Fleece, leather palm
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips
  • Sizes: M/L-L/XL

Pros

  • No batteries or charging required
  • Inexpensive
  • TSA approved
  • Made in USA

Cons

  • Not very breathable
  • Not waterproof

Chemical hand warmers are the original, low-tech way to keep your hands (and feet) warm while out in adverse conditions. Working on outdoor TV productions in cold weather, we buy them in bulk and dole them out to cast and crew like candy. Any actor you see filming outside on a blustery day very likely has a hand warmer shoved into each of their pockets.

These fleece hybrid glove/mittens from Hot Hands, one of the biggest names in hand warmers, have a handy pocket to insert a warmer and hold them in place. Each individually sealed warmer is air activated when removed from its package and stays warm for 10 hours. That’s as long as you’ll get from any battery-powered heated glove. On the other hand, you’ll have to buy more hand warmers after using the single pair that comes with the gloves. A box of 40 additional warmers costs about $22.00, though, so you’re still spending less than you would on our top pick.

The gloves themselves are the kind with fingers and a foldable mitten you can pull over your fingers when needed. They’re made from toasty warm fleece with a TruGrip leather palm. Are they as warm as our other picks? No. Do they offer the same wind and water resistance? Not really. But they’re very affordable, and those hand warmers will keep you warm in a pinch.

What to consider when buying heated gloves

While the majority of heated gloves available offer similar features, each one feels slightly different than the others and performs differently when worn out in the elements. Everyone also has their own personal criteria when evaluating apparel. I personally look for a pair of gloves that I don’t have to think about too much while I’m out in the cold. With that in mind, here are some things you should look for when buying your next pair of heated gloves.

How do heated gloves work?

Heated clothing has ultra-thin metal wires or fibers built into it that warm up when electricity passes through them. These wires or far-infrared fibers, most commonly made from carbon or a metal composite, are woven or fused directly into or onto an internal fabric layer. The voltage of batteries used in heating clothing like slippers and insoles and vests is low enough that there is no chance of electrical shock.

Fit and size

To ensure your glove provides maximum warmth without restricting manual dexterity, you should measure your hand and make sure you get the right size. Gloves are not one-size-fits-all. Moreover, the measurements for each size vary from manufacturer to manufacturer, so that you may require a medium from one brand and a large one from another.

In a properly fitted glove, your fingertips should reach just shy of the end of the glove—about a ¼ to 3/8 of an inch—so you have a full range of movement. The wrist portion of the glove should run far enough up your arm to tuck into or extend over a jacket sleeve, preventing cold air from getting under it.

Most manufacturers will have a size chart on their websites, showing you how to measure your hand and find the right size with each brand.

Waterproofing

To waterproof or not to waterproof? That is the question. Waterproofing measures generally make clothing less breathable so that body sweat will get trapped inside. In other words, your waterproof gloves may soak up sweat and start to smell more quickly than a less water-resistant pair. On the other hand, you don’t want to get completely soaked and end up with gloves full of water. 

Many heated gloves have a waterproof fabric on the outside part of the glove and something breathable on the palm area, giving you the best of both options (kind of like how packable rain jackets sometimes have strategically more breathable panels). Breathable fabric on the underside of your hand reduces the chances of sweat building up in your palms, which could affect your ability to grip a ski pole or climbing rope. Having waterproof fabric on the outside of your gloves—the part that is most often exposed directly to snow and rain—means excess water won’t be able to penetrate the glove. As a general rule, if you’re likely to find yourself outside when it’s actively snowing or raining, go with a waterproof option.  

Battery life

Most heated gloves are powered by 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries, which usually last between 2 and 8 hours, depending on the temperature setting and other factors. Rather than presenting battery life estimates, which can vary quite a bit, we recommend looking at the raw battery capacity, measured in milliamp hours (mAh), which should give you a general idea of how long it should last compared to other gloves.

Some, but not all, heated gloves feature removable, replaceable battery packs. If you plan on being outside for extended periods of time, we recommend choosing gloves with replaceable batteries so you can swap them out as needed.

Touchscreen capability 

Gloves and smartphones don’t always get along. Between the padding and materials, capacitive touchscreens don’t pick up taps and swipes as easily when your fingers are covered. Having to take a glove off while in inclement weather in order to use your phone is annoying at best, and excruciating in extreme cold.

Some gloves have an outer layer over your fingertips with a special material made from copper fiber conductive yarn, making it easier to use a touchscreen without removing your gloves. Essentially, the copper in the fabric allows the gloves to interact with the electrical current produced by touchscreens. Most commonly, the material is used only on the tips of one or two fingers in a small enough area that overall warmth isn’t really affected. 

At this point, these features are fairly common, but you should check for them when picking a cheaper glove or something from a less technical brand.

FAQs

Q: How much do heated gloves cost?

Most of our favorite heated gloves cost around $100. There are alternatives, like our budget pick, which cost considerably less. That said, there isn’t too much variation between major and minor brands, so you should expect to spend $100 or more for high-quality heated gloves.

Q: Where do I recycle my heated gloves?

Recycle heated gloves anywhere that takes clothing and textiles as long as you remove the batteries beforehand. To recycle rechargeable lithium-ion batteries properly, you will need to find a local recycling center that’s certified in handling electronic waste. Check with your local recycling and waste disposal service to find out where.

Q: Are heated gloves or mittens better?

It’s largely a matter of personal preference. Gloves are the obvious choice if you’re doing something where you need your fingers to move individually. If you’re doing nothing, literally standing still, mittens may be better because your fingers keep each other warm. That said, the materials and design in modern technical gloves and mittens both keep your hands very warm.

Q: Are heated gloves worth it?

Heated gloves are definitely worth it if your fingers are always cold and you enjoy outdoor activities in the winter months. Frozen, stiff fingers will spoil the fun every time—and could be potentially dangerous. Heated gloves don’t really cost more than conventional winter gloves without a heating element, and are more convenient to carry around than a heated blanket

Final thoughts on the best heated gloves

Heated gloves are great when you need to work or want to play out in extremely cold weather. By giving these naturally warm gloves a nice, battery-powered boost, you can keep your hands toasty for hours on end. There are plenty of extra warm gloves out there, though, so you have tons of options.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated gloves in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heated socks in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-heated-socks/ Tue, 15 Feb 2022 16:30:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-heated-socks/
A lineup of the best heated socks on a white background
Amanda Reed

When the weather outside is frightful, these socks will ensure your feet feel delightful.

The post The best heated socks in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best heated socks on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for skiiing SNOW DEER Heated Socks SNOW DEER Heated Socks
SEE IT

The cozy heated socks will keep your feet warm and dry throughout even the chilliest ski day.

Best battery-powered The VELAZZIO Heated Socks are the best battery-powered heated sock VELAZZIO Heated Socks
SEE IT

These high-powered socks heat up in less than 30 seconds—so you don’t need to wait to stop your cold feet.

Best budget Winter Foot Warmer Socks for Men and Women Electric Heated Socks Thermal Insulated Socks
SEE IT

Heated socks can be a hefty investment, but with this budget pair you can have toasty toes without breaking the bank.

Whether you’re adventuring in snowy mountains, shoveling the driveway, or snuggling up at a chilly cabin, a quality pair of socks can stop freezing toes in their tracks, and heated socks will warm you from the bottom up. Heated socks provide a toasty barrier between your feet and any cold surface they walk on and make outdoor activities in frigid temperatures feel like a breeze. If the warmth these special winter socks provide isn’t enough to convince you to spring for a pair, consider this: The socks can also improve your circulation, which will help stop your feet from going numb from the cold in the first place. And while everyday winter socks are nice when you’re mostly inside, you’ll want to take things up a notch when you plan to be outdoors for an extended period. Heated socks are suitable for almost every winter situation—and make the most frigid months of the year much more bearable and enjoyable. They may require a bit more TLC than your normal wash-and-tumble-dry pairs, but if your feet are the first thing to go cold in winter, the best heated socks are well worth the investment.

How we chose the best heated socks

Heated socks are an investment in your comfort during colder months—so we wanted to be sure your money was well-spent on quality socks that suit a variety of needs. We compared over 40 heated socks while looking at reviews, battery life, design, thickness, and price. We also have reported on heated insoles and heated slippers to keep you toasty till you get back to your heated blanket, so we used knowledge from those topics and applied it here.

The best heated socks: Reviews & Recommendations

You can wear heated socks while at home, or you can wear them with your shoes to keep cold winter air away from your feet when you go outside. And with slim battery packs designed to look like your average pair of socks, you might even forget you’re wearing super-charged protection against blustery winter weather. All of these picks have the reliability and warmth to help you endure frigid temperatures.

Best overall: VOLT 3V Heated Socks

Volt Resistance Heated Clothing

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Moisture-wicking micro polyester and up to 10 hours of warmth keep your feet warm and dry.

Specs

  • Material: Polyester; spandex
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high
  • Approximate heat time: 3 hours on high; 8 on low
  • Machine washable: Yes (remove batteries first)

Pros

  • Long battery length
  • Battery-powered or rechargeable
  • Machine washable

Cons

  • Expensive

These extra-thin heated socks provide all-day heat on a single charge and fit like a glove thanks to spandex interlocking fabric. The sock’s moisture-wicking micro polyester keeps your feet dry for extra comfort—no swamp foot here. The socks come with two rechargeable 2 oz. lithium batteries, a dual charger, and a wireless remote to cozy up without bending down. The battery tucks into the sock’s small storage pocket. And a hook-and-loop closure ensures it won’t end up in the snow as you traverse the tundra. They may be on the pricier side, but we think the quality—and warming up your feet—is worth the price. If you’d like longer heating time, the company sells a 3.7V/5000 mAh battery that provides more than 8 hours of heat on high and more than 20 hours of heat on low. You can purchase them on Amazon or directly from the company on their website.

Best machine-washable: Gobi Tread Heated Socks

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: After getting 12 hours of warmth, simply throw these socks in the wash the next time you use them.

Specs

  • Material: Cotton
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high (113°F-140°F)
  • Approximate heat time: 12 hours
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Separate keychain remote
  • Slim battery pack
  • Long-lasting

Cons

  • Expensive

With a range of heat settings from a balmy 113 degrees to a toasty 140, these machine-washable heated socks from Gobi can last up to 12 hours on the lowest charge. The toes are designed with their own individual heat zone to keep your pinky from feeling frozen, plus the slim battery is easy to tuck into your boot or shoe.

Best for skiing: SNOW DEER Heated Socks

Snow Deer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Heating elements on both sides of your feet mean you can hit the slopes without getting cold feet.

Specs

  • Material: Cool Max polyester, elastic; spandex
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high (100°F-131°F)
  • Approximate heat time: 4 hours on high; 10 hours on low
  • Machine washable: Yes (remove batteries first)

Pros

  • Heats top and bottom of foot
  • Secure pocket for batteries
  • Rechargeable batteries

Cons

  • Could be longer-lasting

Aside from the battery pocket at the top, these rechargeable, heated socks could pass for any attractive pair of socks. They come in four different sizes, but since the included rechargeable lithium polymer batteries last only up to six and a half hours on a full charge on the lowest setting, if you like to turn the heat up high (four hours of power), you might want to bring along a few extra back-up sets just in case.

Best for lounging around the cabin: Men’s Thick Heat Trapping Insulated Boot Thermal Socks

DG Hill

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Show off your style in the ski lodge with 17 design options to choose from.

Specs

  • Material: Acrylic blend
  • Power level settings: N/A
  • Approximate heat time: N/A
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Powered by your body heat
  • Insulated
  • Stylish

Cons

  • Not for extremely cold climates

Back at the ski lodge? Slip into these cozy heated socks. They have a winter-wonderland look, and the synthetic-fiber blend provides the ultimate heating benefits. They’re ribbed at the top, so they won’t slip inside your shoes and let in cold air. Feel free to take them outside for a hike, a sleigh ride, or a few trips down the slopes.

Best with the thinnest heating module: ActionHeat 3.7V Rechargeable Battery Heated Socks 2.0

ActionHeat

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Strategically placed heating panels don’t interfere with walking, running, hiking, or even lounging around.

Specs

  • Material: Cotton blend
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high (up to 145°F)
  • Approximate heat time: 7 hours on the lowest setting
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Thin
  • Comfortable to walk in
  • Wide heat settings

Cons

  • Expensive

The batteries for these electric socks are thinner and slightly curved for a more comfortable fit, and the heating panels located at the toes use advanced ultra-fine fibers so they won’t interfere with your walking, hiking, or skiing. The heat can go up to 140°F, while battery power lasts up to seven hours on the lowest setting.

Best battery-powered: VELAZZIO Heated Socks

VELAZZIO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Get warm feet in less than 30 seconds thanks to a nanofiber heating wire and two-zone heating.

Specs

  • Material: Polyester
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high
  • Approximate heat time: 4.5 hours on high; 7.5 on low
  • Machine washable: No

Pros

  • Remote controlled
  • Fast heating
  • Long-lasting

Cons

  • Pocket not completely secure for batteries

Made for men and women, these heated socks have a design that’s a bit on the simple side, so you’re going to get function (a lot of it) over fierceness. They come with three different heat settings and warm up in less than 30 seconds. They pull up over the calf, and you can tuck the battery packs into the pocket in the inner top cuff. The best part is that the heat will last. The fully charged batteries can last up to 7.5 hours when worn on the lowest heat setting. And they include a remote that lets you control the heat without hiking up your pant leg.

Best for hiking: Autocastle Unisex Battery Powered Heat Insulated Socks

Autocastle

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Cotton allows your foot to breathe, and the 6.5-hour battery life on low keeps your tootsies warm from Raynaud’s to Rainier.

Specs

  • Material: Cotton
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high
  • Approximate heat time: 3.5 on high; 6.5 on low
  • Machine washable: Yes, but remove batteries beforehand

Pros

  • Rechargeable
  • Machine washable
  • Not bulky

Cons

  • Pocket not completely secure for batteries

The knee-high design and cotton makeup of these hiking socks mean they won’t be uncomfortably bulky by the boot opening. There are three different heat settings, which makes them an ideal fit for even your chilliest hikes. You can turn the heat up as you ascend or it gets colder. These have decent battery life, too—up to 3.5 hours on the warmest setting and up to 6.5 on the coolest.

Best budget: Winter Foot Warmer Socks for Men and Women

MGOGO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Don’t break the bank to be warm all winter long with these electric socks.

Specs

  • Material: Cotton
  • Power level settings: 95°F-113°F
  • Approximate heat time: N/A
  • Machine washable: Yes (remove battery packs)

Pros

  • Unisex
  • Cotton for breathability; fleece for warmth
  • Have a supportive arch

Cons

  • Not a wide range of temperature settings

These unisex heated socks come in three different sizes that can fit men with shoe sizes from 6 to 15 and women from 8 to 13. The fleece material provides breathability and sweat absorption as well as warmth even when the heat isn’t on. Each sock requires three AA alkaline or rechargeable batteries, which are not included. While they may not have bells and whistles, they can keep your feet warm for short outdoor activities.

What to consider when buying the best heated socks

Although electric socks will not be the cheapest ones you ever buy, they’ll definitely be the warmest socks you ever own. Plus, you can make the best snow boots even warmer. With so many to choose from, where do you begin making your choice? Fabric is a good place to start. Cotton, merino wool, and synthetics are all warm options. Still, since the first two hold moisture (look out for fungal infections!), we recommend synthetic fibers like nylon and lycra to keep your feet warm, dry, and free of microbial pests. As for other important variables to look for when shopping for the best heated socks, snag your winter hat and read on.

Pick the right pair of socks to match your winter adventure

Although you’re perfectly welcome to wear your heated socks while hibernating at home all winter long, if you’re the adventurous type who lives to hit the slopes, you’re in luck. Depending on what you like to do once you’re up in the snowy mountains, you can choose between heated ski socks and cabin socks.

The latter can be pretty much the same warm socks you wear when you’re lounging at home. But for going down the slopes, you’ll want a pair of heated socks with long-lasting batteries in a fabric that will continue to keep your feet warm even if the batteries run out. These cozy socks should also be thick enough to fill out your boots and, most importantly, comfortable.

Choose heated socks that put comfort first

The heating modules of the best heated socks will add a bit of volume, but they don’t have to be obtrusive. Most of the battery packs are slim enough that you won’t even notice them tucked away in the little pocket that sits right under the cuff. The wires that connect the batteries to the heating panels in the sock may be more noticeable underfoot, but you can get a pair with ultra-thin wires that you’ll hardly feel.

Size matters; the more sizes the socks come in, the merrier your feet will be. The one-size-fits-all design of some of the cheaper brands might leave you with too much wiggle room for your feet or not enough. If you don’t want to reach down to change the heat setting constantly, some heated socks come with a remote control for temperature adjustment, and others can be controlled with your smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. If one foot tends to get colder than the other, look for one with an app control that allows you to adjust the heat of each sock individually.

Decide how much battery life you need your heated socks to have per wear

Time matters when it comes to heated socks, and if you are going to be doing activities where recharging batteries isn’t an easy option, you should look for a pair with batteries that last longer on a full charge. Unfortunately, that often means the battery pack will be bulkier and less comfortable—and you may have to dish out more money, too. The key is finding the right balance to suit your needs and always having a good backup plan (extra batteries). That said, if your socks are thick and warm on their own, you’ll still have ample foot protection if your batteries die on you while you’re gliding down the slopes.

Pack your warmest heated socks for a winter hike

If your snow boots are made for hiking, the best heated socks can be, too. Since hiking can be rough on your feet, you’ll need heated socks that are as durable as they are warm. The best winter hiking socks should also be high enough to provide a complete barrier between your feet/lower legs and your shoes. Other things to consider are cushioning, fit, and fabric. Wool, polyester, nylon, silk, and spandex are the most popular materials for hiking socks. There are pros and cons with each one, so to get the optimal benefits, it’s best to go with a blend that will offer comfort, warmth, and durability.

Don’t feel like you have to blow your budget on heated socks

The best socks are going to cost you more than a bargain-rack three-pack, but they don’t have to leave you broke. That said, you’ll have to pay a bit more for some of the features that will make them more comfortable and functional (like long battery life and Bluetooth connectivity). The ones you can get for $40 or so will do what they are supposed to do, but they may have extra bulk or come in only one size. If you want a pair of socks with all the trappings, be prepared to pay up to a few hundred bucks for them. They might end up costing more than your snow boots, but if you get the right pair, they can last just as long. Still, you can find cheap heated socks that will do the trick and keep your toes warm and toasty.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best heated socks cost?

The best heated socks cost between $20-$200 based on materials and battery life.

Q: How do heated socks work?

Heated socks work by a heating panel hidden in the soles, heels, or toes that connects via wiring to a battery pack that acts as a miniature thermostat. The wires are separated by a waterproof membrane to make them safe when the socks become damp. If you don’t want to bend to adjust the heat, some allow you to do it with a remote control or a smartphone app with a Bluetooth connection to your socks.

Q: How long do heated socks last?

All good things must come to an end, but if you buy heated socks made of sturdy fabric and take care of them by following the washing instructions to the letter, heated socks last a couple of years—and even as long as your favorite snow boots.

Q: How do you wash heated socks?

Since stinky, fungus-infected feet are just as bad as cold ones, it’s important to know how to wash heated socks. After detaching the battery pack, a thorough hand-cleaning followed by air-drying in a well-ventilated area will do the trick. Never wring them (which can damage the wiring) or throw them into the washing machine or dryer.

Final thoughts on the best heated socks

The best heated socks will cost you a bit more than the cheap socks you wear during summer, but the warmth they provide—and the improved circulation as well as relief from arthritis and joint pain—make them worth the investment. If you get a pair with ultra-fine wires and a slim battery compartment that rests above the top of your boots, the only difference you might notice from regular socks will be the increased comfort and warmth that’ll make them much more comfortable as you enjoy the great wintry outdoors.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated socks in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best heated throw blankets in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-heated-throw-blanket/ Thu, 11 Feb 2021 13:59:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-heated-throw-blanket/
Grey and blue heated blankets separated into fourths horizontally on a white background.
Amanda Reed

Stay cozy even when it’s frosty outside.

The post The best heated throw blankets in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Grey and blue heated blankets separated into fourths horizontally on a white background.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best machine washable Sunbeam Premium Electric Heated Throw Blanket Sunbeam Premium Electric Heated Throw Blanket
SEE IT

Just toss this blanket in the washer to keep it clean for everyday use.

Best for two Brookstone N-A-P Cozy Plush Heated Blanket Westinghouse Electric Blanket, Twin Size
SEE IT

Fight over the blankets no more with this pick that lets you control the temperature for two people.

Best budget Beautyrest Brushed Long Fur Electric Throw Beautyrest Brushed Long Fur Electric Throw
SEE IT

This affordable pick comes with three heat settings and is machine-washable.

Did you know that a heated throw blanket is actually considered a household appliance? While that might sound a little strange, if your heated throw has a plug and runs on electricity—well, that’s an appliance. And these appliances have improved dramatically over the years and are safer and cozier than ever. The best heated blankets will provide safe, customizable warmth and complete comfort with no discernable wires and only a feeling of plush, decadent warmth. Finally, some heated throw blankets use a traditional plug-in, while others harness the power of a battery pack, making them portable outside the home. The best heated throw blankets have timers that allow for pre-warming and automatic shut-off, which is a nice safety feature.

How we chose the best heated blankets

Heated blankets come in various colors and materials, can be weighted or lightweight, and come with several heat settings. Heated blankets are available in various sizes: big enough to share or small enough to use on your favorite armchair when you’re not shuffling around in your heated socks and heated slippers. To find the best heated throw blankets, we looked at critical reviews and user recommendations and then combined that with heavy research.

The best heated throw blankets: Reviews & Recommendations

Invented over 100 years ago, the prototype blankets were bulky and dangerous. In the 1920s, they were commonly used in tuberculosis sanatoriums, as these patients were prescribed fresh air. The heated blankets were used to keep patients’ bodies warm while their lungs breathed in the cold, fresh air. It wasn’t until the late 1940s and 1950s that these types of blankets were commonly used in homes. Today, we are fortunate enough to have more options than ever. Any of our choices are some of the best you can buy.

Best overall: Pure Enrichment PureRelief Plush Heated Throw

Pure Enrichment

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 50 x 60 inches
  • Fabric: Micromink, Sherpa
  • Heat settings: Warm, low, medium, high
  • Timer: Auto shutoff after two hours

Pros

  • Soft
  • Lots of heat settings
  • Auto shutoff

Cons

  • No adjustable heat times

This soft, stylish, reasonably-priced heated blanket offers a grey microfiber faux fur material on one side, and an off-white sherpa on the other. The blanket’s heat can be adjusted to accommodate warm, low, medium, and high heat settings. It also features an automatic shut-off after two hours for optimal safety.

Best machine washable: Sunbeam Premium Electric Heated Throw Blanket

Sunbeam

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 50 x 60 inches
  • Fabric: 100% polyester
  • Heat settings: Low, medium, high
  • Timer: Three-hour auto shutoff

Pros

  • Machine washable
  • Reversible
  • Soft fleece

Cons

  • Cord is heavy and annoying

This soft velvet throw blanket offers three heat settings for adjustable comfort and a three-hour automatic shut-off timer. Machine washable and dryer safe, this is practical for everyday use.

Best for two: Westinghouse Electric Blanket, Twin Size

Westinghouse

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 84 x 62 inches
  • Fabric: Flannel
  • Heat settings: 10 heat levels
  • Timer: 1- 12-hour auto shutoff

Pros

  • Temperature can be adjusted freely
  • Machine washable and dryer-safe
  • Large

Cons

  • Some reviews note that half of the blanket sometimes doesn’t heat up

This heated blanket is the best heated throw blanket for couples because it’s large enough for two and features six heat settings so that the blanket can be customized according to personal comfort. Conveniently, this is machine washable and dryer safe when following the manufacturer’s directions. Extra safety features include customizable auto-shutoff.

Best cordless: The Cozee Battery Powered Heated Blanket

Cozee

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 60 x 60 inches
  • Fabric: 100% polyester
  • Heat settings: Low, medium, high
  • Timer: 2-3 hours, depending on heat settings

Pros

  • Water-resistant
  • Great for sporting events
  • Can charge your phone using included battery

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Only lasts for two hours at highest setting

This battery-powered heated blanket is a great solution for added warmth without wires, making it the best cordless heated throw blanket. The electric blanket includes cables to charge the battery at home or in the car, as well as two USB cords so you can even charge your phone. At a high setting, the cordless heated blanket can only stay warm for two hours, which may be an issue depending on your intended use.

Best budget: Beautyrest Brushed Long Fur Electric Throw

Beautyrest

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 50 x 60 inches
  • Fabric: 100% polyester
  • Heat settings: Low, medium, high
  • Timer: Auto shutoff after two hours

Pros

  • Machine washable
  • Super soft
  • Not bulky

Cons

  • Not that many heat settings compared to others on list

A great choice for your couch or chair, this electric throw blanket can be adjusted to your comfort with three heat settings. The plush fabric is comfortable, available in various colors, and can be machine-washed.

Things to consider when shopping for the best heated throw blanket

When shopping for a heated throw blanket, select an item with the features you need. The best heated throw blankets offer washability, customizable heat, and a stylish look that seamlessly fits your space.

Want lots of temperature control?

When it comes to comfort, the “right” temperature is subjective. The best heated throw blankets will let you control the temperature setting. Versatile heat settings also let you keep your overall thermostat lower, which is better for saving money, better for the earth, and often better for your sinuses.

In order to prevent the blanket from heating too much, these blankets have a temperature control unit that helps manage the amount of current entering into the heating elements or insulated wire inside the blanket. Another popular feature is an automatic shut-off, which ensures the blanket will turn off even if you forget to do it yourself.

Do you need portability?

If you spend a lot of time in and out of your vehicle, you may want to consider a portable heated blanket designed for use in cars. The best heated car blankets will be soft (duh) and wired to distribute heat, utilizing the car’s 12-volt sockets or cigarette lighter. With the help of the car’s battery, they will deliver power and heat to your heated car blanket.

In case of a vehicle breakdown, these can be handy on a cold night while you’re waiting for the tow truck. Emergencies aside, a heated blanket can help during long drives by warming up your shoulders, which can hold a lot of tension. Similar to heated blankets for use at home, it’s helpful (but not always necessary) to have an automatic shut-off feature so temperatures won’t get too high in case it’s left plugged in. Another feature to consider is cord length; a longer cord will also allow this blanket to be used in the back seat.

How key is washability to you?

The best heated throw blankets can be machine-washed, but you should always check the manufacturer’s directions carefully. When it comes to heated blankets that have wiring, electrical components, or batteries, washability isn’t always possible.

Typically, the first step before throwing your blanket in the wash will be to detach the cord and remove it completely from the blanket. You also want to inspect the blanket for any wear and tear or visible damage. If there are tough stains, you can use some mild detergent and presoak the blanket for 10 to 15 minutes in cool water. Afterward, you can expect to wash the blanket on your machine’s delicate settings with a gentle detergent. Harsh detergents should be avoided because they can damage the fabric, wiring, and components inside your blanket. Some blankets can even go into the dryer—but be aware the dryer has to be large enough, and the heat setting must be low. Err on the side of caution and take your blanket out after a maximum of about 15 minutes and finish the rest of the drying on a clothes rack. Do not plug the blanket in until it is completely dry.

Do you need to accommodate two sleepers—and two different temps?

If you share a bed, you have surely been in battle for bed sheets or blankets at some point. We all prefer different warmth levels, so sharing blankets, especially heated blankets, can pose challenges. The best heated throw blanket offers specialized heating in two zones, also known as dual temperature zones. The design is similar to single-zone heated blankets, except the heating elements are divided, usually equally between two sides of the blanket. Instead of one temperature controller, there are two.

Dual-zone heated throw blankets are typically on the larger side, as they are designed to share with two people. You should expect to find all the same features with a dual-zone as you would want with a single zone. The best dual-zone heated blankets will be large enough to share, plush, machine washable, and feature customizable heat and automatic shut-off settings.

Prefer a cordless option?

Whether you’re an outdoor sports enthusiast, a camper, or just someone who just wants to head out into the cold and enjoy the winter landscape, you may want to consider a cordless heated blanket. The best cordless heated blankets will be soft and warm and allow for both pre-heating or turn-on-and-use heat. The battery will need to be fully charged, and when attached to your blanket will warm up the heating elements in the blanket evenly.

Want the best heated throw blanket for a tight budget?

Heated blankets are available in all different price ranges, and it’s possible to find a good one for under $50. When you start going down in price, though, you’ll find fewer features like dual heating zones. Sometimes a smaller price tag means a smaller, thinner blanket. However, a throw-size blanket for use on a chair or couch is not designed to be that large anyway, so it’s easier to find budget blankets in that size range. Blanket for one, please!

FAQs

Q: How safe are heated throw blankets?

The best heated blankets are very safe when following the proper directions for use and care. Older, damaged electric blankets can pose hazards and should not be used. In general, heated blankets should be gently rolled or hung up for storage, and should be placed on top of you—not you on top of it. Even if your blanket has an auto shut-off feature, you should still try to turn it off yourself whenever it’s not in use.

Q: Are heated blankets worth it?

Heated blankets do not cost a lot to run, but they do require some attention and care when used and stored. Ask yourself how much comfort this type of blanket will provide you. For example, if you have a particularly drafty room in your home, plugging in and snuggling under an electric blanket to read a book or watch a movie can be an amazing treat that might be worth it to you.

Q: Do heated blankets use a lot of electricity?

When used properly, a heated blanket will not double your electric bill—or even increase it by much at all. The best heated blankets will allow for adjustable heating levels, which helps to save heat while also allowing you to control the comfort it gives you. When compared to turning up the heat in a room, the use of a heated blanket is actually cost-effective.

Final thoughts on the best heated throw blankets

The best heated throw blankets will keep you warm and cozy all winter. They will offer customizable heat controls, automatic shut-off safety features, plush stylish fabrics, and even heat distribution throughout the blanket. It’s important to take full stock of exactly how and where you think you’ll use a heated blanket the most, as this will help you determine size and style. If you’re looking to use it in a small, drafty room for one, you’ll be considering different things than if you’re part of an avid outdoorsy couple looking to sleep under it on frigid nights. Finding the right blanket is easy once you know your own cozy expectations.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated throw blankets in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Giant quake that shook Mars for hours had a surprising source https://www.popsci.com/science/mysterious-marsquake-source/ Tue, 17 Oct 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580492
An artist's illustration of a cutaway of Mars along with the paths of seismic waves from two separate quakes in 2021. These seismic waves, detected by NASA’s InSight mission, were the first ever identified to enter another planet’s core.
An artist's illustration of a cutaway of Mars along with the paths of seismic waves from two separate quakes in 2021. These seismic waves, detected by NASA’s InSight mission, were the first ever identified to enter another planet’s core. NASA/JPL-Caltech/University of Maryland

NASA's InSight lander captured the 4.7 magnitude seismic event in 2022.

The post Giant quake that shook Mars for hours had a surprising source appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
An artist's illustration of a cutaway of Mars along with the paths of seismic waves from two separate quakes in 2021. These seismic waves, detected by NASA’s InSight mission, were the first ever identified to enter another planet’s core.
An artist's illustration of a cutaway of Mars along with the paths of seismic waves from two separate quakes in 2021. These seismic waves, detected by NASA’s InSight mission, were the first ever identified to enter another planet’s core. NASA/JPL-Caltech/University of Maryland

A giant seismic event on Mars—a “marsquake”—that shook the Red Planet last year had an unexpected source, surprising astrophysicists from around the world. They suspected a meteorite strike. Instead, enormous tectonic forces within Mars’s crust, which caused vibrations that lasted for six hours, caused the quake and not a meteorite strike. The findings are described in a study published October 17 in the journal Geophysical Research Letters.

[Related: Two NASA missions combined forces to analyze a new kind of marsquake.]

NASA’s InSight lander recorded the magnitude 4.7 marsquake on May 4, 2022, which scientists named S1222a. Its seismic signal was similar to those of previous quakes that were caused by meteorite impacts, so the team began to search for an impact crater. 

In the new study, a team from the University of Oxford worked with the European Space Agency, Chinese National Space Agency, the Indian Space Research Organisation, and the United Arab Emirates Space Agency to scour more than 55 million square miles on Mars. Each group examined the data coming from its own satellites to look for a crater, dust cloud, or other signature of a meteorite impact. Because the search came up empty, they now believe that S1222a was caused by the release of huge tectonic forces from within the Martian interior. 

That doesn’t mean Mars’s tectonic plates are moving the way they do during an earthquake. The best available evidence suggests the planet is remaining still. “We still think that Mars doesn’t have any active plate tectonics today, so this event was likely caused by the release of stress within Mars’ crust,” study co-author and University of Oxford planetary geophysicist Benjamin Fernando said in a statement. “These stresses are the result of billions of years of evolution; including the cooling and shrinking of different parts of the planet at different rates.”

While Fernando explains that scientists do not fully understand why some parts of Mars seem to have more stress than others, these results can help them investigate further. “One day, this information may help us to understand where it would be safe for humans to live on Mars and where you might want to avoid!” he said.

Mars photo
This spectrogram shows the largest quake ever detected on another planet. Estimated at magnitude 5, this quake was discovered by NASA’s InSight lander on May 4, 2022. CREDIT: NASA/JPL-Caltech/ETH Zurich.

S1222a was one of the last events recorded by NASA’s InSight mission before its end. The InSight lander launched in May 2018 and survived “seven minutes of terror” to touch down on Mars, where it studied the planet’s interior and seismology for years. The last of the spacecraft’s data was returned in December 2022, after increasing dust accumulation on its solar panels caused InSight to lose power. 

[Related: InSight says goodbye with what may be its last wistful image of Mars.]

In its four years and 19 days of service, InSight recorded more than 1,300 marsquakes. At least eight of these events were from a meteorite impact; the largest two formed craters that were almost 500 feet in diameter. If the S1222a event was formed by an impact, the team estimates that the crater to be would have been at least 984 feet in diameter.

The team is applying knowledge from this study to other work, including future missions to our moon and the tectonics that are similar to California’s famed San Andreas fault located on one of Saturn’s moons named Titan. They also hope that it encourages additional major international collaborations to study the Red Planet and beyond. 

“This has been a great opportunity for me to collaborate with the InSight team, as well as with individuals from other major missions dedicated to the study of Mars,” study co-author and New York University Abu Dhabi astrophysicist Dimitra Atri said in a statement. “This really is the golden age of Mars exploration!”

The post Giant quake that shook Mars for hours had a surprising source appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best electric kettles in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/best-electric-kettles/ Fri, 18 Dec 2020 19:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-electric-kettles-2/
The Best Electric Kettles
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Electric kettles are kitchen accessories no home should be without.

The post The best electric kettles in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The Best Electric Kettles
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Cuisinart CPK-17 Cuisinart CPK-17
SEE IT

This electric kettle from Cuisinart features six temperature control pre-sets for making any kind of hot beverage.

Best glass Pohl Schmitt 1.7L Electric Kettle Pohl Schmitt 1.7L Electric Kettle
SEE IT

The Pohl Schmitt 1.7L Electric Kettle is made from borosilicate glass and features a micro stainless steel water filter.

Best budget Mueller Austria Ultra Kettle: Model No. M99S Mueller Ultra Kettle: Model No. M99S
SEE IT

With an affordable price, a large capacity, and several useful safety features, this Mueller kettle is a great choice for most households.

An electric kettle is a staple of modern kitchen accessories. These self-contained cookers are safer to use because they don’t require an open flame. Plus, they offer more precise temperature control and even boil water quicker than their stove-reliant counterparts—making them essential kitchen tools. While there are several styles from which to choose, the best electric kettles have a gooseneck spout that allows for precision pouring. This is useful for brewing more delicate coffees where a heavier-flow kettle might over-agitate the grinds. Here are the best electric kettles that fit the bill.

How we chose the best electric kettles

While it’s easy to assume that all electric kettles offer similar performance, a number of factors affect their functionality. Several years of experience covering home goods and appliances and extensive recent product research went into choosing our final curated selection. We reviewed over 30 kettles and weighed several practical considerations before making our recommendations.

The best electric kettles: Reviews & Recommendations

Below, you’ll find standard-sized kettles with capacities of between 1 and 2 liters, which are the most popular choice and work best for most users. We opted only to include kettles made with stainless steel or glass and excluded plastic kettles, as growing health concerns make them unpopular with modern shoppers. We also preferred models with added features like temperature control, a keep-warm setting, and a cordless design.

Best overall: Cuisinart CPK-17 PerfecTemp Cordless Electric Kettle

Cuisinart

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Cuisinart CPK-17 PerfecTemp Cordless Electric Kettle allows tea drinkers and coffee aficionados to brew themselves the perfect beverage by selecting one of this model’s six temperature pre-sets.

Specs

  • Capacity: 1.7 liters
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Power capacity: 1,500 watts

Pros

  • Includes precise temperature controls
  • Features a Keep Warm setting
  • High power capacity means it heats up quickly
  • Includes automatic shutoff

Cons

  • High price

Our top pick is this electric kettle from Cuisinart. What sets this model apart is that it comes with six temperature presets, allowing users to customize their water temperature to best suit the beverage they’re preparing. Cuisinart recommends 160 degrees for delicate teas, 175 degrees for green tea, 185 degrees for white tea, 190 degrees for oolong tea, and 200 degrees for French press coffee.

The Cuisinart heats up quickly due to a 1,500-watt power capacity, taking just a couple of minutes to bring 1.7 liters (7.2 cups) of water to a boil. Additionally, a Keep Warm button maintains the water’s temperature for 30 minutes, which is perfect for those prone to forgetting about the kettle after setting it to boil. Automatic shutoff and a dry boil prevention feature are handy additions for added safety.

Best gooseneck: COSORI Electric Gooseneck Kettle

COSORI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: There are a number of gooseneck kettles on the market, but users love the precise temperature controls and trendy look of this model from Cosori.

Specs

  • Capacity: 0.8 liters
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Power capacity: 1,200 watts

Pros

  • Features temperature control pre-sets
  • Maintains the temperature for 60 minutes
  • Water boils in under 5 minutes

Cons

  • Low capacity

Those looking to pour water over coffee grounds or tea leaves will appreciate the slim gooseneck spout of this kettle from Cosori. It’s made from stainless steel with a trendy matte black finish that will look striking in a modern kitchen. Since it’s designed for coffee and tea experts, it has several temperature presets for different types of beverages: 170 degrees (white tea), 180 degrees (green tea), 195 degrees (oolong tea), 205 degrees (coffee), and 212 degrees (black tea). As an added bonus, a Hold Temp button maintains the water’s temperature for 60 minutes. A full carafe boils quickly, in between 3 and 5 minutes.

Because it’s designed primarily for making delicate teas and pour-over coffee, it has a low capacity of 0.8 liters. While this is sufficient for preparing a couple of hot beverages, it’s not the ideal choice for households that need large quantities of boiling water on a regular basis.

Best glass: Pohl Schmitt 1.7L Electric Kettle

Pohl Schmitt

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This glass kettle from Pohl Schmitt is simple but well-made, featuring one-touch control and durable construction.

Specs

  • Capacity: 1.7 liters (7.2 cups)
  • Material: Glass
  • Power capacity: N/A

Pros

  • Made with borosilicate glass
  • LED indicator light
  • Features a micro stainless steel filter

Cons

  • Lacks temperature control

Glass kettles are becoming increasingly popular, but they’re not all created equally. This model from Pohl Schmitt is constructed with high-quality borosilicate glass, which is durable and resistant to scratches and scuffs. All plastic components in the kettle’s construction are encased in a layer of stainless steel to prevent them from coming into contact with the boiling water. A micro stainless steel filter prevents sediment and calcium buildup from pouring into your beverage.

It’s able to heat up water in between 3 and 7 minutes. The heating element is concealed, making for a sleek visual appearance. A blue LED light alerts users when the kettle is powered on and turns off when the water has boiled. Thirty seconds after the water has boiled, the kettle shuts off automatically. The kettle can also detect when there’s no water inside and will not power on to prevent dry boiling.

Best retro: Smeg KLF03PBUS Electric Kettle

Smeg

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This kettle from Smeg merges style and function, featuring a vintage-inspired design, stainless steel construction, and modern technical features.

Specs

  • Capacity: 1.7 liters (7.2 cups)
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Power capacity: 1,500 watts

Pros

  • Fun retro design
  • Available in 7 colors
  • Includes automatic shutoff

Cons

  • High price
  • Lacks temperature control

Kettles aren’t exactly known for being remarkable in terms of their aesthetics. Still, Smeg has made a name for itself by creating vintage-inspired appliances that stand out in any kitchen. The company’s products merge modern technology with nostalgic design, and Smegs’ kettle is no exception. It’s constructed from stainless steel but features a powder coating that gives it its distinctive appearance. The kettle is available in 7 colors to best suit the style of your kitchen: red, pastel blue, black, white, pastel green, matte champagne, and pink.

Its practical features include an automatic shutoff, a non-slip base, an integrated cord wrap, and a stainless steel filter. While this model doesn’t provide temperature control, the brand does offer another model that allows users to control the temperature. And it sure looks good on Instagram.

Best budget: Mueller Ultra Kettle: Model No. M99S

Mueller

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Mueller Ultra Kettle is made with durable borosilicate glass and allows users to watch the water boil with the added effect of blue LED light.

Specs

  • Capacity: 1.8 liters
  • Material: Glass
  • Power capacity: 1,500 watts

Pros

  • Features automatic shutoff
  • High power capacity
  • Constructed from borosilicate glass

Cons

  • Lacks temperature control

A high-quality kettle doesn’t need to be a major financial investment. This one from Mueller features translucent glass construction, allowing you to watch the water boil, and it’s lit with a blue-toned LED light, which enhances the visual effect. It’s made with borosilicate glass, which is an ultra-durable type of glass that is crafted to withstand dramatic temperature fluctuations, like the ones a kettle experiences when it boils cold water. This prevents the glass from shattering.

Many budget kettles are smaller with a lower water capacity, but this one has a high capacity of 1.8 liters. For added safety, this kettle has both automatic shut-off and dry boil protection. One downside is that this model lacks temperature control, so while it’s ideal for those who mostly use boiled water for cooking and making black tea, it may not be suitable for more discerning tea and coffee drinkers.

What to consider when choosing an electric kettle

With so many electric kettles on the market, choosing the right one for your home requires careful consideration. Keep the following factors in mind while making your purchase.

Size and capacity

The capacity of a kettle is measured in either quarts or liters. It’s important to choose the size that best suits your household’s needs. Generally speaking, kettles have capacities of between 1 and 2 liters (4.2 and 8.4 cups). A larger kettle is handy when boiling water quickly for cooking while a smaller model is a great choice for those with limited counter space.

Temperature control

While the most basic electric kettles simply bring water to a boiling point, more high-end models have advanced temperature control capabilities, allowing users to customize the exact temperature of the water as needed. This comes in handy when you want a lower temperature for brewing delicate tea leaves or making pour-over coffee. Kettles with temperature control tend to be more expensive than those without.

Material

Electric kettles can be made from a variety of materials, but the most popular are stainless steel, glass, and plastic.

Stainless steel kettles are the most commonly available option on the market. They are durable, affordable, and stylish, matching other stainless steel kitchen appliances. One potential downside is that stainless steel may rust over time. Glass kettles are a relatively new innovation and provide a fun visual effect, allowing users to watch the water as it boils. They often have built-in lighting to enhance the experience. Plastic is used for budget electric kettles but is decreasing in popularity because of safety concerns about the potentially harmful chemicals that certain plastics produce, especially when heated.

FAQs

Q: Which is better, an electric kettle or a stovetop kettle? 

Choosing between a stovetop and an electric kettle is largely a matter of preference. Electric kettles are marginally more eco-friendly and work well in an office, dorm room, and other situations where using a stovetop model isn’t possible. 

Q: What temperature should water be for tea? 

When brewing black tea, water should be at a full boil or 212 degrees. More delicate tea leaves—like green tea—are best brewed at a lower temperature of 180 degrees. 

Q: What temperature should water be for coffee? 

Coffee tastes best when brewed at temperatures between 195 and 205 degrees. 

Q: What is a gooseneck kettle used for? 

A gooseneck kettle has a narrow spout and gives users more control when brewing tea or pour-over coffee. 

Final thoughts on the best electric kettles

Our recommendations cover a variety of types and styles of electric kettles to suit different needs best. The Cuisinart CPK-17 PerfecTemp Cordless Electric Kettle is our top pick because of its precise temperature control pre-sets and range of additional features. Our recommended choice for those on a budget is the Mueller Ultra Kettle: Model No. M99S, which offers trendy glass construction at an affordable price.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.


The post The best electric kettles in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best water filter pitchers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-water-filter-pitchers/ Tue, 17 Oct 2023 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580475
four of the best water filter pitchers against a white background
Abby Ferguson

When we asked the ocean to suggest water filter pitchers it just waved, so here are our carefully researched picks.

The post The best water filter pitchers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
four of the best water filter pitchers against a white background
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Brita Large Water Filter Pitcher against a white background Brita Large Water Filter Pitcher
SEE IT

This Brita filter offer a large capacity and long-lasting filter.

Best glass pitcher A blue LifeStraw Home Water Filter Pitcher 7-Cup against a white background LifeStraw Home Water Filter Pitcher 7-Cup
SEE IT

Skip the plastic with this glass filter pitcher.

Best budget Hydros | 40oz Water Filter Slim Pitcher against a white background Hydros | 40oz Water Filter Slim Pitcher
SEE IT

Save room in your fridge and budget with this slim pitcher.

Staying hydrated seems like an ongoing quest—at least judging by the popularity of gallon-sized jugs and those bottles marked with how many ounces to drink by specific times—and water filter pitchers can help keep it a healthy endeavor. Daily water goals can be made easy and affordable by opting for water filter pitchers instead of one-time-use bottled water. On a basic level, water filter pitchers improve the taste and smell of tap water. Some models also reduce contaminants like heavy metals, forever chemicals, or microplastics. Whether you’re sipping it yourself, filling a coffee maker, or preparing to cook, we’ve gone through dozens of options to find the best water filter pitchers for you.

How we chose the best water filter pitchers

Water from U.S. public water treatment plants is considered among the safest in the world, but exceptions like the lead in Flint, Michigan’s water supply can make people nervous. We focused on water filter pitchers that result in crisp, clean-tasting water. The fundamental technology in many of these filters is similar, though some reduce or remove other potential contaminants while others aim to retain good-for-you minerals. We also highlight when products meet or are certified for standards set by the NSF International/American National Standards Institute and the Water Quality Association, independent third-party auditors.

The best water filters: Reviews & Recommendations

Most water filter pitchers rely on the same design: an upper and lower reservoir with a filter between the two. Fill the upper section with tap water, then wait for gravity to pull it through the filter and into the lower area. But there are plenty of other choices to make, like figuring out how much water your household consumes and the space in your fridge. In addition to the cost of the pitcher, you’ll need to consider how much filters cost and how many gallons they can clean before replacement (because some of us are really obsessed with keeping our water bottles refilled).

Best overall: Brita Large Water Filter Pitcher

Brita

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 10.4 x 5.7 x 10.2 inches 
  • Weight: 1.5 pounds
  • Capacity: 10 cups 
  • Filter: Brita Elite filter (proprietary active filtering agents)
  • Filter lifespan: Replace after 120 gallons or about six months

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Flip top for easy refilling
  • Long-lasting filter
  • Electronic filter indicator
  • BPA-free container
  • Certified NSF/ANSI Standards 42, 53, and 401

Cons

  • Slow filtering

The Brita Large Water Filter Pitcher is our best overall water filter pitcher due to its relatively large 10-cup capacity, affordability, and long-lasting filter. Known as the Tahoe, the pitcher’s flip top allows faster refilling than models that require taking off the whole top. It also sports an indicator light that shows when the filter is good, going, or needs to be replaced.

We recommend the upgraded Elite Filter, certified to reduce lead, mercury, Bisphenol-A, and some pesticides and forever chemicals. It catches more contaminants than the standard white filter and lasts six months—three times longer. However, some customers note that the filter can get clogged after a few months, shortening its lifespan. A year’s worth of filters cost around $35, assuming nothing needs to be replaced sooner.

Best glass: LifeStraw Home Water Filter Pitcher 7-Cup

LifeStraw

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 11.25x 5.8 x 5.8 inches 
  • Weight: 0.9 pounds
  • Capacity: 7 cups
  • Filter: LifeStraw Home (2-part filter includes membrane filter and activated carbon/ion exchange filter)
  • Filter lifespan: Replace membrane filter after 264 gallons (about a year); carbon/ion exchange after 40 gallons (about two months)

Pros

  • Borosilicate glass w/ silicone boot
  • Removes 30 contaminants
  • Removes bacteria
  • Certified NSF/ANSI Standards 42 and 53
  • Meets dozens of other standards as tested by independently certified labs

Cons

  • Slow filtering
  • 2-part filter requires two different schedules
  • More expensive filters than other brands

Many people know LifeStraw for its survival and camping water filters, but the company also designs good-looking, effective products for your home. For about $65, LifeStraw Home Water Filter Pitcher offers multiple colors of a modern, rounded glass pitcher that may appeal to people trying to minimize plastic in their homes. The coordinated silicone boot is a nice touch to prevent scratches and dings and adds some grip.

The filter is a two-part system that tackles 30-some contaminants that many other pitchers don’t. It holds NSF/ANSI certifications for reducing chlorine, mercury, and lead. It also meets dozens of different standards as tested by certified labs for pesticides, herbicides, and some forever chemicals, and can clear up water clouded by sand, dirt, or other sediment. The company claims you can use the filter during boil water advisories, but I’m still boiling water if that happens in my neighborhood.

The upside of the two-part filter is the lengthy list of contaminants the LifeStraw Home can remove. The downside is each part requires replacement at different times. The membrane lasts about a year, while the smaller carbon and ion exchange filters must be replaced every two months (or about 40 gallons). A year’s worth can cost about $75, higher than most other pitchers on this list. Users also note that filtration is slow, so refilling the container before sticking it back in the fridge is best. (And by the way, that’s a polite practice for the rest of these pitchers.)

Best budget: Hydros | 40oz Water Filter Slim Pitcher

Hydros

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 10.4 x 4.2 x 4.2 inches 
  • Weight: 0.8 pounds
  • Capacity: 5 cups 
  • Filter: Hydros Fast Fill filter (coconut shell carbon)
  • Filter lifespan: Replace after 40 gallons or about two months

Pros

  • Slim design
  • Fast filtering
  • BPA-free
  • Optional colorful filters
  • Meets NSF/ANSI Standards 42

Cons

  • No handle
  • No indicator for filter replacement

The Hydros 40oz Water Filter Slim Pitcher eschews the standard two-reservoir filtering system, instead opting for speed. This small but mighty pitcher uses a coconut shell carbon filter attached to remove 90% of chlorine and 99% of sediment. It doesn’t target other potential contaminants. This five-cup repository doesn’t have a handle but is easy to grip and fill and is our best slim pitcher pick.

A household with little kids who insist on pouring their own drinks may consider the lack of a handle a bad thing, but it makes it easy to slip into fridge doors without hogging all the space. The Hydro Slim Pitcher also features a colorful boot, and filters come in several colors like magenta, lime, blue, and red to add an extra pop of personality. A water infuser can also be attached to the filter to add a touch of flavor from fruit or herbs.

The Hydros filters need to be changed every two months, which will set you back about $30 for a year. They are interchangeable with Hydros’ other products too.

Best for fast filtering: Brita Large Stream Filter as You Pour

Brita

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 10.8 ix 5.6 x 10 inches 
  • Weight: 1.4 pounds
  • Capacity: 10 cups 
  • Filter: Brita Stream filters (activated carbon in a BPA-free housing)
  • Filter lifespan: Replace after 40 gallons or about two months

Pros

  • Low upfront costs
  • Filters as you pour
  • Flip top for easy refilling
  • Electronic filter indicator
  • BPA-free container
  • Certified NSF/ANSI Standards 42 and 53

Cons

  • Taste/odor-focused filtering only
  • Frequent filter replacement

The Brita Large Stream Filter as You Pour is the pitcher for people who hate to wait. It’s all in the name: Water flows through a spout-mounted, activated carbon filter as you pour. Anyone who has tried to fill a gallon-size water bottle knows this is a multi-step process with a typical pitcher. It will take at least one refill of the pitcher and wait for it to go through the filter. It only takes a few minutes, but you know the saying: Watched water never filters. The Brita Stream eliminates the waiting part.

The tradeoff is that it’s not a heavy-duty filter for pollutants. It’s certified to remove chlorine taste and smell but retains fluoride, minerals, and electrolytes. It’s a spongy filter, unlike the familiar plastic-encased versions that fit other Brita products. Filters need to be replaced every 40 gallons, and with multipacks, a year’s supply would cost about $38.

Best pitcher without a single-use filter: Aarke Purifier

Aarke

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 12.6 inches tall by 8.54inches wide by 6.45 inches deep
  • Weight: 2.5 pounds
  • Capacity: 10 cups 
  • Filter: Aarke filter granules
  • Filter lifespan: Replace after 32 gallons

Pros

  • No single-use filters
  • Glass carafe with rubber base
  • Stainless steel filter system
  • Food-grade silicone gaskets

Cons

  • Pricey
  • More frequent filter granule replacement than average filters
  • No advertised certifications

The Aarke Purifier is a splurge at $150, but it’s made of premium, hygienic materials such as glass and stainless steel and features a refillable filter. It’s probably the most sustainable choice on this list because it doesn’t rely on plastic filters that get tossed in the trash after use. Instead, the system relies on filter granules Aarke created with BWT, a water technology company.

The granules reduce chlorine, heavy metals, and limescale, which helps avoid spotting on cookware. Granules last about 32 gallons before they must be changed. The company offers two types of granules: Pure and Enriched, which adds magnesium and changes tap water into alkaline water. Each three-pack runs from $20 to $30.

Best with an app: LARQ Pitcher PureVis 1.9L/ 8-Cup

LARQ

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 9.84 x 9.45x 9.06 inches 
  • Weight: 2.25 pounds
  • Capacity: 8 cups 
  • Filter: LARQ filter (plant-based carbon) and UV light
  • Filter lifespan: Replace after 60 gallons

Pros

  • Two-step filtration process
  • Self-cleaning with UV light
  • Comes with app to track water consumption and filter life
  • Meets NSF/ANSI Standards 42, 53, and 401

Cons

  • App is iOS only
  • Pitcher must be charged
  • Expensive filters

The LARQ Pitcher PureVis offers something different: The water pitcher uses a two-step process to filter water and inhibit bacteria growth. First, water flows into a plant-based Nano Zero filter to remove chlorine, mercury, cadmium, and copper. Then, the pitcher’s “UV wand” emits light that fights bacteria and viruses in the water.

The LARQ must also be charged every two months with the included USB-A charger. The whole kit and caboodle also comes with an iOS-only app to help track when to change filters and how much water is consumed. The gadget-ified pitcher will run about $170 but may appeal to folks used to smart appliances and tracking all sorts of personal metrics (the reason the company also makes our favorite smart water bottle). LARQ offers two levels of filters, and even though they’ll last a bit longer than many on this list, a year’s supply will set you back between $100 for entry-level filters or about $150 for advanced versions.

Best dispenser: PUR PLUS 30-Cup Water Filter Dispenser

PUR

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 10.1x 5.3 x 15.3 inches 
  • Weight: 4.2 pounds
  • Capacity: 30 cups
  • Filter: PUR PLUS faucet filters (activated charcoal)
  • Filter lifespan: Replace after 40 gallons or two months

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Filter change indicator
  • Slim design
  • Large capacity
  • Certified NSF/ANSI Standards 42, 53, and 401

Cons

  • Frequent filter replacement

Households with a lot of people or anyone challenging themselves to drink a gallon of water a day may want the PUR PLUS 30-Cup Water Filter Dispenser. This high-capacity dispenser features a slim, deep design and a no-leak spigot for about $70. The PUR PLUS filter is certified to reduce 70 other contaminants, including lead, mercury, and some pesticides. It’s made of activated carbon from coconut shells. It features a mineral core to replace some natural minerals—like calcium and magnesium—for a fresh taste with no chlorine taste or odor. But they only last for about 40 gallons or two months. Stocking up for a year is usually around $50 when buying multipacks.

What to consider when buying the best water filter pitchers

How much water you should drink is a personal number, not the standard eight glasses we grew up hearing. Having clean-tasting water on hand will help hit whatever your hydration goal is. Water filter pitchers are often more affordable than stocking up on single-use bottled water and are more environmentally friendly. Here are a few things you’ll want to consider to find the right pitcher for you.

Materials

Plastic is the default for many pitchers and a key material of many filters. While finding an entirely plastic-free product is difficult, there are options. Some offer premium materials like glass, stainless steel, or food-grade silicone parts. Check the manufacturers’ guidance to see if you’ll be handwashing components or running them in the dishwasher. Water filter pitchers’ popularity has also led to more makers considering aesthetics, so it’s not hard to find an attractive option you’d happily leave on the counter.

Filters

Filters vary in cost, design, and what they reduce or remove. Most of the filters in this roundup are activated carbon, which can absorb chlorine and reduce asbestos, lead, mercury, and volatile organic compounds. Review performance data on manufacturer websites if you have specific concerns, like removing a particular chemical or heavy metal.

We’re not a lab, so we prefer products that are certified by NSF International or the Water Quality Association. However, we point out products that “meet” the standards verified by independent labs.

Here are some of the common standards in this roundup:

  • NSF/ANSI Standard 42 This is a common standard, which indicates a filter can remove chlorine taste and odor or chloramines.
  • NSF/ANSI Standard 53 Another common standard that indicates the reduction of some heavy metals like lead, arsenic, and mercury, as well as some pesticides and herbicides.
  • NSF/ANSI Standard 401 This indicates the filter removes or reduces up to 15 kinds of “emerging impurities,” such as bisphenol A (BPA), ibuprofen, DEET, microplastics, and some pesticides and herbicides.

Water consumption

Consider how much water your household drinks and how many gallons a filter can handle before it needs replacement. Filters must be changed for a pitcher to remain effective. Some handle as few as 40 gallons, so a parched or large household may need to change a filter far sooner than the estimated two months. Filters designed to last longer may be a better option. And don’t forget to do a little math to how much you’ll splash out for a year’s worth of replacements.

FAQs

Q: Who should use a water filter pitcher?

Water filter pitchers are best for people looking to improve the taste of their tap water—something all the pitchers on this list will ably do. Some water filter pitchers remove additional contaminants and pollutants, some of which aren’t regulated yet, like forever chemicals. (And just FYI, the Environmental Protection Agency issued proposed rules for PFAs in March.) 

If you’re curious about your water quality, you can check annual water quality reports on the EPA’s website, the Environmental Working Group’s database of what’s been measured in tap water, or get an at-home water quality test.

Q: Do water filter pitchers remove bacteria?

Water filter pitchers usually do not remove bacteria. Most water filter pitchers rely on types of carbon or ion exchange filters, which do not reduce microorganisms like bacteria. However, the LifeStraw Home and the LARQ can reduce or inhibit some bacteria using a membrane filter and UV light, respectively. If fighting bacteria is a priority, look for water purification options or entirely different filtration systems that use reverse osmosis.

Q: How do I wash my water filter pitcher?

Check your user guide to see which parts must be washed by hand and what can be tossed in a dishwasher. However, do wash your pitcher. Bacteria mold and general funk can collect in any kitchen container, and water filter pitchers are no exception.

Final thoughts on the best water filter pitchers

There’s no need to stay thirsty, my friends. We’ve identified the best water filter pitchers for your home, whether you’re prioritizing affordability, sustainability, or a great design. The Brita Large Water Filter Pitcher for Tap and Drinking Water with SmartLight Filter Change Indicator + 1 Elite Filter, our pick for the best overall, updates the classic Brita with a better-fitting top, ample handle, and a longer-lasting but cost-conscious filter. But whichever you pick, remember to change the filters regularly to get the most benefit and least contaminants.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best water filter pitchers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The world’s hottest chili pepper is worse than bear spray https://www.popsci.com/science/guinness-world-records-hottest-chili-pepper/ Tue, 17 Oct 2023 19:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580407
A yellow-ish pepper named Pepper X sits on a crystal dish. Pepper X is the new hottest chili pepper in the world. It was crossbreed with Carolina Reaper and a mystery pepper.
Pepper X is the new hottest chili pepper in the world. It was crossbreed with Carolina Reaper and a mystery pepper. Courtesy of First We Feast

Guinness World Records crowns Pepper X as the new spicy pepper king.

The post The world’s hottest chili pepper is worse than bear spray appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A yellow-ish pepper named Pepper X sits on a crystal dish. Pepper X is the new hottest chili pepper in the world. It was crossbreed with Carolina Reaper and a mystery pepper.
Pepper X is the new hottest chili pepper in the world. It was crossbreed with Carolina Reaper and a mystery pepper. Courtesy of First We Feast

The Guinness World Records officially dubbed Pepper X the world’s hottest chili pepper earlier this year, going public with the announcement on October 9. Pepper X has a rating of an average of 2.69 million Scoville Heat Units (SHU). On the SHU scale, zero is considered bland, while a regular jalapeño pepper registers at about 5,000 SHU. For a non-food comparison, pepper spray used in self-defense is about 1.6 million SHUs and bear spray is about 2.2 million.

[Related: Spiciness isn’t a taste, and more burning facts about the mysterious sensation.]

Winthrop University in South Carolina calculated this off-the-charts Scobille score with specimens collected over the past four years. Pepper X has a greenish-yellow color with grooves and ridges. According to the five brave souls who have eaten it, Pepper X has an earthy flavor once the heat begins to subside.  

It dethroned the 10-year reign of the 1.64 million SHU Carolina Reaper, but both peppers were created by the same chili pepper expert to be extra spicy. Ed Currie is the founder of Puckerbutt Pepper Company and has been working on Pepper X since the bright red Carolina Reaper first took the title in 2013.

When creating a new breed of pepper, it can take several years for the desired traits to emerge through selective breeding. It takes about 10 generations for hybrid peppers to stabilize with predictable traits and consistent fruit.

Pepper X was a crossbreed with Carolina Reaper and a mystery pepper that Currie did not disclose. His goal was to create an extremely hot pepper that also had some sweetness. The spice of Pepper X even made an expert like Currie wince in pain.

“I was feeling the heat for three-and-a-half hours. Then the cramps came,” Currie told the Associated Press. “Those cramps are horrible. I was laid out flat on a marble wall for approximately an hour in the rain, groaning in pain.”

Currie unveiled Pepper X on an episode of hit YouTube series Hot Ones.

A chemical in peppers called capsaicin is what causes the burning sensation when eating a spicy pepper like the Carolina Reaper or Pepper X. Humans and other mammals will perceive capsaicin as a threat when eaten, which sends the strong burning signal throughout the body. 

According to University of Tennessee epidemiologist Paul D. Terry, the short-term effects of eating extremely spicy foods range from enjoying the sensation of heat to a more unpleasant burning sensation on the lips, tongue, and mouth. Spicy foods can also cause various forms of digestive tract discomfort, headaches, and vomiting, so it is best to avoid eating them if you experience these effects. 

[Related: Leftovers of a 2,000-year-old curry discovered on stone cooking tools.]

Capsaicin is painless except when eaten in large quantities and is likely not harmful over a long period of time. Some experts generally agree that spicy food does not cause stomach ulcers, but the association with stomach cancer isn’t as clear.

The burning sensation also releases endorphins and dopamine. Currie began growing peppers after overcoming addiction to drug and alcohol and says that kick is a natural high for him. He shares the peppers he creates with medical researchers, in hopes that they can be used to explore new cures for disease or help those with chronic pain or discomfort.

Correction (October 21, 2023): An earlier version of the story mistakenly said that capsaicin is harmful except when eaten in large quantities. It should have said that capsaicin is not harmful.

The post The world’s hottest chili pepper is worse than bear spray appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Get an LG gaming monitor for 35% off at Amazon with this early Black Friday deal https://www.popsci.com/gear/gaming-monitor-pre-black-friday-amazon-deal/ Tue, 17 Oct 2023 18:25:29 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580443
computer monitors on a pattern on a white background
Amanda Reed

You don't need to wait until the Thanksgiving leftovers are cold to get a great deal on gaming monitors.

The post Get an LG gaming monitor for 35% off at Amazon with this early Black Friday deal appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
computer monitors on a pattern on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

You don’t need to wait until after Thanksgiving dinner to get incredible pricing on big-ticket items. Take this 49-inch curved gaming monitor at Amazon, which is a whopping 35% off.

LG 49-inch UltraGear DQHD (5120×1440) Curved Gaming Monitor $846 (Was $1,299.99)

If you’re looking to completely immerse yourself, look no further. This 49-inch curved gaming monitor from LG gives you massive real estate. Combined with its VESA DisplayHDR 1000, that means brightness, color, and contrast for high-res gaming that feels real. A 240HZ refresh rate prevents pesky lag, and a four-pole headphone jack with DTX Headphone: X tech gives you a cinematic sound experience.

They say patience is a virtue; that may be true, but why not take advantage of a good deal when you see one?

Here are more early Black Friday gaming monitor deals:

The post Get an LG gaming monitor for 35% off at Amazon with this early Black Friday deal appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The new electrified E-Ray is the quickest Corvette ever https://www.popsci.com/technology/chevrolet-corvette-e-ray-review/ Tue, 17 Oct 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580341
2024 Chevy Corvette E-Ray driving down the road
The 2024 Chevy Corvette E-Ray. Chevrolet

The car's smart software knows exactly how to employ the Vette's new electric motor. Here's how it all works.

The post The new electrified E-Ray is the quickest Corvette ever appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
2024 Chevy Corvette E-Ray driving down the road
The 2024 Chevy Corvette E-Ray. Chevrolet

There used to be a joke that if Microsoft made cars, your car would crash twice a day for no reason at all. But the reality of software-defined cars (that is, vehicles in which clever coding has as much say as masterful machining in determining a car’s characteristics) is demonstrated by the 2024 Chevrolet Corvette E-Ray, whose smart software lets the car’s new electric motor deliver supplemental power to the front wheels so imperceptibly that the driver would have trouble guessing that the latest version of America’s sports car has all-wheel drive.

That’s because the Corvette’s signature 6.2-liter, overhead-valve, LT2 small block V8 is still roaring, powering the rear wheels with its 495 horsepower, just like in the base Stingray model. But now there’s that 160-hp electric motor up front, running off a 1.9 kilowatt-hour array of LG lithium-ion batteries deftly tucked into the car’s central tunnel.

This $104,295 vehicle is a regular hybrid-electric, with no external power plug, so the battery is small and gets its juice entirely from the gas engine and from regenerative braking that turns the electric motor into a generator when the car slows. Having that extra 160 hp and 125 lb.-ft. torque on tap is “like having a nitrous oxide tank that fills itself,” remarked chief engineer Josh Holder, referring to the “NOS” gas made famous by The Fast and the Furious movie franchise for giving combustion engines a burst of extra power.

The quickest Corvette ever

But rather than the explosive power delivery from NOS, the E-Ray’s omnipresent electric motor “torque fill” just makes the car constantly more muscular. This power, combined with the traction of all-wheel-drive, makes the E-Ray the quickest Corvette ever, with a 0-60 mph acceleration of 2.5 seconds and a 10.5-second quarter mile time.

Those times are achieved using the E-Ray’s Performance Launch mode, which uses the car’s various software-controlled systems to optimize power delivery from the gas and electric motors to deliver the fastest possible acceleration.

The driver can keep the E-Ray’s battery topped off so that it is ready to deliver that boost by pressing the Charge+ button. If you ever watch Formula 1 races, you’ll see a car’s rear light flashing when the driver is building the state of charge in its battery in preparation for a passing attempt on a car ahead. The E-Ray’s Charge+ button on the center console, down by the driver’s right thigh, ensures that the battery’s virtual NOS tank is fully topped off with electrons.

The Corvette Z06 we tested last year is nearly as quick, but that car produces its power with more noise and drama. The E-Ray appeals to the enthusiast who wants a comfy ride that also happens to be ludicrously fast. And if you need to sneak out of your neighborhood in the morning without annoying the neighbors, let the small block V8 sleep late and cruise out on electric power alone using Stealth mode to reach speeds as high as 45 mph.

Other driving modes with pre-set performance parameters include Tour, Sport, Track, and Weather. Each of those optimizes the car’s sound, power delivery, stability control, traction control, and dynamically adjustable magnetic suspension damping to match those conditions. Additionally, drivers can select their own preferences in My Mode and Z Mode.

Driving the Corvette E-Ray on and off the track

The E-Ray rolls on the same wide wheels wrapped in meaty Michelin rubber and enclosed by the same 3.6-inch wider fenders as the Z06, but the rubber on those wheels is Michelin’s Pilot Sport all-season tire to make the E-Ray compatible with rain and snow. I didn’t encounter those conditions on the roads around Denver or during my track drive at Pikes Peak International Raceway, but I could feel the E-Ray’s stability and surefootedness.

In addition to the all-weather tires, the E-Ray is also available with the same Michelin Pilot Sport 4S summer tires as are used on the base Stingray version. And as on that car, these excellent tires provide the consistent grip, comfort, and durability drivers want in everyday driving. And as I found track testing the Stingray, these tires are really not at home on the track, where they quickly turn hot and greasy compared to true track tires, losing their grip after thrashing through just a few hard corners.

No matter, that’s not the E-Ray’s purpose. Yes, it is fast, but the similarly priced Z06 ($111,295) is the weapon of choice for track rats. The E-Ray is for drivers who want that kind of speed in a car they can enjoy every day in comfort.

Even with its all-wheel-drive traction, the E-Ray is not penalized by sluggish steering response on corner turn-in, as is typically the case with cars that route power through the front wheels. That’s because the computer is smart enough to know when and how much power to send from the electric motor to the front wheels.

It can even let the driver induce a drift in corners, spinning the rear wheels without the front-drive power interfering with the sideways-sliding fun. That car-straightening front power is welcome when driving home from work in bad weather, but it can spoil the fun on the track, so the E-Ray knows when to have the electric drive step back and let the V8 do the work.

A weighty issue 

Just as the E-Ray rolls on the same wide wheels as the Z06, it also packs the same Brembo carbon ceramic brakes inside them to help slow the car. This is in addition to the E-Ray hybrid-electric regenerative braking, which does much of the car’s stopping. 

But the big brakes are important, because while the hybrid system adds braking power, it also adds mass. Chevrolet says the E-Ray weighs 3,774 pounds as a coupe and 3,856 pounds as a convertible, which means that it is about 350 pounds heavier than the Z06 and 400 pounds heavier than the Stingray.

This is in spite of a huge effort by the car’s engineering team to minimize the weight penalty of the electric motor and battery pack. “We put the highest bounty on weight of any car we’ve ever done,” recalled Holder. Even with that effort, electric motors and batteries are still heavy. “It is the heaviest Corvette we’ve ever done,” Holder acknowledged, adding, “but it is the lightest hybrid we’ve ever done.” 

The E-Ray matches the slower Stingray’s EPA fuel economy rating of 19 mpg in combined driving, with a score of 16 mpg city and 24 mpg highway. The Z06’s rating depends on the exact equipment, but it is either 14 mpg or 15 mpg in combined driving. City driving in either case is a dismal 12 mpg.

The added mass is low in the chassis, with the electric motor between the front wheels and the battery pack in the central spine running between the seats in the cockpit, so the center of gravity is low. Engineers mask that weight with savvy chassis control with the magnetically controlled adaptive dampers and the aforementioned massive brakes, so the E-Ray never feels heavy on the road.

As with the seamless power delivery, credit the brainy calibration by the Corvette team’s programmers in creating the reality of their choice rather than the one suggested by physics. It turns out that software-defined vehicles are far better than the old Microsoft joke predicted.

Take a look at my track drive, below:

The post The new electrified E-Ray is the quickest Corvette ever appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
NASA’s Psyche spacecraft will blaze an unusual blue trail across the solar system https://www.popsci.com/science/nasa-psyche-hall-thrusters/ Tue, 17 Oct 2023 16:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580168
Red-capped Hall effect thrusters being attached to a spacecraft body by two engineers.
Engineers prepare to integrate four Hall thrusters onto the Psyche spacecraft at NASA's Jet Propulsion Laboratory. NASA/JPL-Caltech

Its thrusters are going to get 10 million miles to the gallon of xenon.

The post NASA’s Psyche spacecraft will blaze an unusual blue trail across the solar system appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Red-capped Hall effect thrusters being attached to a spacecraft body by two engineers.
Engineers prepare to integrate four Hall thrusters onto the Psyche spacecraft at NASA's Jet Propulsion Laboratory. NASA/JPL-Caltech

Last Friday, NASA launched the Psyche spacecraft toward an asteroid of the same name. Psyche is blazing a trail as the first mission to a metal asteroid, and it’s also about to blaze a literal blue trail. The source of its bright wake—the probe’s remarkable propulsive system—will switch on within the first 100 days of the mission.

A mechanism known as a Hall thruster will propel the Psyche through space. This thruster glows blue as it ionizes xenon, a noble gas also used in headlights and plasma televisions, to move the spacecraft forward. This is the first time this tech, which has only been available for NASA spaceflight since 2015, has been used to travel beyond the moon—but what makes it so special, and why is Psyche using it?

When planning a space mission, engineers are focused on efficiency. Carrying chemical fuel along for the massive interplanetary journey would be like trying to drive around the entire world while having to keep all the gasoline you need in the trunk, because there are no rest stops along the way—it’s just not feasible. To get to its destination, Psyche would need thousands and thousands of pounds of chemical propellant.

[Related: How tiny spacecraft could ‘sail’ to Mars surprisingly quickly]

To get around this problem, engineers turned to electric thrusters. These come in many flavors: “There are many different types of electric thrusters, almost as many as there are different makers of cars,” explained NASA’s Psyche chief engineer Dan Goebel in a blog post. But space travel uses two kinds in particular, known as ion thrusters and Hall thrusters. “They can probably be considered the Tesla versions of space propulsion,” Goebel wrote. Rather than burning fuel, electric thrusters rip off the electrons from the propellant’s atoms in a process known as ionization. Then they chuck those ions out at some 80,000 miles per hour. This generates a higher specific impulse—which Goebel says is “equivalent to miles per gallon in your car,” but for spacecraft—than chemical fuels, enabling a thruster-powered spacecraft to go farther on less propellant.

A pair of thrusters, one with an electric blue glow.
An operating Hall-effect thruster (left) and one that’s not on (right). NASA/JPL-Caltech

Ion thrusters use high electric voltages to make a plasma (the fourth state of matter) and spew ions into space. NASA’s Dawn mission used these to get to dwarf planet Ceres, but they’re not the fastest—according to NASA, it would take the spacecraft four days to go from 0 to 60 miles per hour. Definitely not race car material

[Related: Want to learn about something in space? Crash into it.]

Hall thrusters, on the other hand, use a magnetic field to swirl electrons in a circle, producing a beam of ions. They don’t get quite as good “mileage” as ion thrusters, but they pack a bigger punch. The Psyche team picked this system because it allowed them to make a smaller, and therefore more cost-efficient, spacecraft. 

For the thrusters to work, the spacecraft needs power—which it gets from the sun, via solar panels—and something to ionize. For Psyche, that’s xenon gas. “Xenon is the propellant of choice because it’s inert (it doesn’t react with the rest of the spacecraft) and is easy to ionize,” explained Goebel. It also gives the thrusters their remarkable blue shine. Psyche carries about 150 gallons of the stuff, and gets about 10 million miles per gallon

Now that the mission has launched, the team will spend the next 100 days checking out all the spacecraft’s systems to ensure they’re ready for the journey. At some point in this period, those glimmering blue thrusters will turn on.

If Psyche proves to be a success, Hall thrusters will be likely to make an appearance on future space missions. They offer “the right mix of cost savings, efficiency, and power, and could play an important role in supporting future science missions to Mars and beyond,” said Steven Scott, program manager for the Psyche mission at the company Maxar, which built the thrusters, in a press release. Thanks to these propulsive devices, Psyche should reach its destination in the asteroid belt in just 3.5 years—and we can’t wait to see what lies at the end of its electric blue trail.

The post NASA’s Psyche spacecraft will blaze an unusual blue trail across the solar system appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Europeans ate a lot more seaweed 8,000 years ago https://www.popsci.com/environment/seaweed-ancient-european-diets/ Tue, 17 Oct 2023 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580386
Coral Beach on Scotland’s Isle of Skye, dotted with various types of seaweed.
Coral Beach on Scotland’s Isle of Skye, dotted with various types of seaweed. Deposit Photos

There are about 10,000 different species of seaweeds around the world today, but only 145 species are regularly consumed.

The post Europeans ate a lot more seaweed 8,000 years ago appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Coral Beach on Scotland’s Isle of Skye, dotted with various types of seaweed.
Coral Beach on Scotland’s Isle of Skye, dotted with various types of seaweed. Deposit Photos

The ocean’s diverse seaweeds are full of nutrients and can be very tasty. While seaweed is common in many Asian dishes, it is not as popular in many traditionally European cuisines. However, this was not always the case. New archaeological evidence also shows that early Europeans ate seaweeds and freshwater plants 8,000 years ago. The findings are described in a study published October 17 in the journal Nature Communications and anchor the plants in the past.

[Related: Why seaweed is a natural fit for replacing certain plastics.]

In the study, researchers examined biomarkers that were taken from the calcified dental plaque of 74 individuals found at 28 archaeological sites from northern Scotland to southern Spain. The plaques revealed “direct evidence for widespread consumption of seaweed and submerged aquatic and freshwater plants.”

The samples where biomolecular evidence survived showed signs that red, green, or brown seaweed and freshwater aquatic plants were eaten. One sample from Scotland’s Orkney archipelago also had evidence of a type of sea kale. The researchers also found that seaweeds and freshwater plants were continually eaten in Europe into the Early Middle Ages. 

“Not only does this new evidence show that seaweed was being consumed in Europe during the Mesolithic Period around 8,000 years ago when marine resources were known to have been exploited, but that it continued into the Neolithic when it is usually assumed that the introduction of farming led to the abandonment of marine dietary resources,” study co-author and University of York bioarchaeologist Stephen Buckley said in a statement.

The nutritional benefits from eating seaweed were likely very well understood by ancient European populations. Some historical accounts report laws related to collection of seaweed in Iceland, France, and Ireland dating back to the 10th Century. Sea kale is also mentioned by Roman naturalist and writer Pliny as an anti-scurvy remedy for sailors on long sea voyages. Through the 18th century, seaweed was considered a famine food and is featured in a popular Irish-language folk song

[Related: Why seaweed farming could be the next big thing in sustainability.]

Currently, there are roughly 10,000 different species of seaweeds around the world, but only 145 species are regularly consumed. Depending on the type of seaweed, the plants are a great source of fiber, iron, and potassium among other vitamins and minerals. Cultivating seaweed can also be very environmentally friendly, as the seaweed produces oxygen while absorbing excess nitrogen in the water.

“Our study also highlights the potential for rediscovery of alternative, local, sustainable food resources that may contribute to addressing the negative health and environmental effects of over-dependence on a small number of mass-produced agricultural products that is a dominant feature of much of today’s western diet, and indeed the global long-distance food supply more generally,”  study co-author and University of Glasgow archaeologist Karen Hardy said in a statement. “It is very exciting to be able to show definitively that seaweeds and other local freshwater plants were eaten across a long period in our European past.”

The post Europeans ate a lot more seaweed 8,000 years ago appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Unraveled nerves and mesmerizing caffeine crystals: 10 sensational glimpses of the microscopic realm https://www.popsci.com/science/10-microscopic-images-nikon-small-world-gallery/ Tue, 17 Oct 2023 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=579496
A fluorescent microscopic image, magnified 20 times, of a rodent nerve.
Rodent optic nerve head showing astrocytes (yellow), contractile proteins (red) and retinal vasculature (green). Hassanain Qambari & Jayden Dickson/Nikon’s Small World Photomicrography Competition

Photos from the Nikon Small World competition reveal a world that appears unreal.

The post Unraveled nerves and mesmerizing caffeine crystals: 10 sensational glimpses of the microscopic realm appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A fluorescent microscopic image, magnified 20 times, of a rodent nerve.
Rodent optic nerve head showing astrocytes (yellow), contractile proteins (red) and retinal vasculature (green). Hassanain Qambari & Jayden Dickson/Nikon’s Small World Photomicrography Competition

For nearly half a century, Nikon’s Small World Photomicrography Competition has celebrated the beauty captured by extreme magnification. This year, the photomicrography contest was stacked: a panel of journalists and scientists selected winners from 1,900 entries submitted by researchers and photographers in 72 countries. Subjects as diverse as mutant fish, chemical reactions, and a speck of space rock became works of art when seen really, really up close.

Above, in first place, is a rodent’s optic nerve head. Blood vessels, each only 110 microns in diameter, radiate outward like the fizzing arms of a firework. The yellow star-like shapes surrounding the vessels are astrocytes, cellular helpers that maintain neuronal systems. Vision researchers at the Lions Eye Institute in Perth, Australia—Hassanain Qambari, assisted by Jayden Dickson—imaged the optic disc at 20x magnification as part of a study of diabetic retinopathy; this condition can cause blindness in people with diabetes.

“The visual system is a complex and highly specialized organ, with even relatively minor perturbations to the retinal circulation able to cause devastating vision loss,” Qambari said in a news release. “I entered the competition as a way to showcase the complexity of retinal microcirculation.” Below are other top photos, and you can see even more at Nikon’s Small World site.

A zebrafish head magnified 4x with purple and blue highlights.
20th place. Adult transgenic zebrafish head showing blood vessels (blue), lymphatic vessels (yellow), and the skin and scales (magenta). Imaged with a 4x objective lens. Daniel Castranova & Dr. Brant Weinstein/Nikon Small World Competition
A close-up of a match igniting.
2nd place. Matchstick igniting by the friction surface of the box. Imaged with a 2.5x objective lens. Ole Bielfeldt/Nikon Small World competition
Caffeine crystals under 25x magnification.
8th place. Caffeine crystals under 25x objective lens magnification. Stefan Eberhard/Nikon Small World Competition

[Related: 15 remarkable JWST images that reveal the wonders of our vast universe]

A rainbow of defensive hairs on a plant leaf.
5th place. Auto-fluorescing defensive hairs covering the leaf surface of the Russian olive, Eleagnus angustifolia, exposed to UV light. Imaged with 10x magnification. David Maitland/Nikon Small World competition
A black micrometeorite on a golden metal mesh.
18th place. A cryptocrystalline micrometeorite resting on a #80 testing sieve. Imaged with a 20x objective lens. Scott Peterson/Nikon Small World competition
9th place. Cytoskeleton of a dividing myoblast highlighting the cellular components tubulin (cyan), F-actin (orange) and nucleus (magenta), magnified 63x.
9th place. Cytoskeleton of a dividing myoblast highlighting the cellular components tubulin (cyan), F-actin (orange) and nucleus (magenta), magnified 63x. Vaibhav Deshmukh/Nikon Small World competition
Blue wave-like folds of a sugar syrup.
11th place. Crystallized sugar syrup in polarized light, seen via a 25x lens. Diego García/Nikon Small World competition
7th place. A mouse embryo imaged with 4x objective lens magnification.
7th place. A mouse embryo imaged with 4x objective lens magnification. Grigorii Timin & Michel Milinkovitch/Nikon Small World Competition
A spider fang, really zoomed in.
4th place. Venomous fangs of a small tarantula seen using 10x magnification. John-Oliver Dum/Nikon Small World competition

The post Unraveled nerves and mesmerizing caffeine crystals: 10 sensational glimpses of the microscopic realm appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
This 4-in-1 30W wireless power charging station is a tech enthusiast’s dream https://www.popsci.com/sponsored-content/30w-wireless-power-charging-station-sale/ Tue, 17 Oct 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=579996
A wireless power charging station on a gray background
Stack Commerce

Get speedy and efficient charging with this gadget, now $63.99.

The post This 4-in-1 30W wireless power charging station is a tech enthusiast’s dream appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A wireless power charging station on a gray background
Stack Commerce

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Make carrying around pesky charging cables a thing of the past with the Mag 4 GaN 30W 4-in-1 Power Charging Station, now on sale for $63.99 (reg $79). 

Are you constantly concerned about your devices running low on power during crucial moments? Smartphones, tablets, smartwatches, and laptops have become integral to our daily lives, necessitating a reliable and efficient charging solution. The Mag 4 GaN 30W 4-in-1 Power Charging Station provides a convenient answer to swiftly and effectively charge your devices without the hassle of lugging around various cables.

Offering a convenient 4-in-1 compact design with multiple ports, including USB-C, USB-A, and wireless charging capabilities, Mag 4 caters to various devices (smartphones, tablets, earbuds, and more) simultaneously. The USB-C port supports Power Delivery (PD) technology, enabling rapid charging for various compatible devices. This is a game-changer for those who are always on the go, providing a quick and efficient power boost to their devices.

Central to the functionality of the Mag 4 charging station lies Gallium Nitride (GaN) technology, a semiconductor material at the forefront of transforming the power electronics sector. GaN chargers are recognized for their elevated efficiency, diminished heat production, and smaller form factor when compared with conventional silicon-based chargers. The Mag 4 maximizes these benefits, providing an accelerated and more effective charging encounter.

Regarding safety, the charging station incorporates advanced features such as overcurrent protection, overvoltage protection, and temperature control, providing peace of mind while charging your valuable devices. Plus, with a magnetic wireless charging zone, you can easily snap your phone to the charger and adjust the angle at up to 60° to your liking. No matter your charging needs, you can adapt the device for photo shooting, video calling, and more.

Stop worrying about taking various chargers with you while on the go with this simple yet powerful solution.

Purchase the Mag 4 GaN 30W 4-in-1 Power Charging Station today at only $63.99 (reg. $79).

Prices subject to change.

The post This 4-in-1 30W wireless power charging station is a tech enthusiast’s dream appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How this programmer and poet thinks we should tackle racially biased AI https://www.popsci.com/technology/racial-bias-artificial-intelligence-buolamwini/ Tue, 17 Oct 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=568750
row of people undergoing body scan show by having grids projected onto them
AI-generated illustration by Dan Saelinger

The research and poetry of Joy Buolamwini shines a light on a major problem in artificial intelligence.

The post How this programmer and poet thinks we should tackle racially biased AI appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
row of people undergoing body scan show by having grids projected onto them
AI-generated illustration by Dan Saelinger

THE FIRST TIME Joy Buolamwini ran into the problem of racial bias in facial recognition technology, she was an undergraduate at the Georgia Institute of Technology trying to teach a robot to play peekaboo. The artificial intelligence system couldn’t recognize Buolamwini’s dark-skinned face, so she borrowed her white roommate to complete the project. She didn’t stress too much about it—after all, in the early 2010s, AI was a fast-developing field, and that type of problem was sure to be fixed soon.

It wasn’t. As a graduate student at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology in 2015, Buolamwini encountered a similar issue. Facial recognition technology once again didn’t detect her features—until she started coding while wearing a white mask. AI, as impressive as it can be, has a long way to go at one simple task: It can fail, disastrously, to read Black faces and bodies. Addressing this, Buolamwini says, will require reimagining how we define successful software, train our algorithms, and decide for whom specific AI programs should be designed.

While studying at MIT, the programmer confirmed that computers’ bias wasn’t limited to the inability to detect darker faces. Through her Gender Shades project, which evaluated AI products’ ability to classify gender, she found that software that designated a person’s gender as male or female based on a photo was much worse at correctly gendering women and darker-skinned people. For example, although an AI developed by IBM correctly identified the gender of 88 percent of images overall, it classified only 67 percent of dark-skinned women as female compared to correctly noting the gender of nearly 100 percent of light-skinned men. 

“Our metrics of success themselves are skewed,” Buolamwini says. IBM’s Watson Visual Recognition AI seemed useful for facial recognition, but when skin tone and gender were considered, it quickly became apparent that the “supercomputer” was failing some demographics. The project leaders responded within a day of receiving the Gender Shades study results in 2018 and released a statement detailing how IBM had been working to improve its product, including by updating training data and recognition capabilities and evaluating its newer software for bias. The company improved Watson’s accuracy in identifying dark-skinned women, shrinking the error rate to about 4 percent. 

Prejudiced AI-powered identification software has major implications. At least four innocent Black men and one woman have been arrested in the US in recent years after facial recognition technology incorrectly identified them as criminals, mistaking them for other Black people. Housing units that use similar automated systems to let tenants into buildings can leave dark-skinned and female residents stranded outdoors. That’s why Buolamwini, who is also founder and artist-in-chief of the Algorithmic Justice League, which aims to raise public awareness about the impacts of AI and support advocates who prevent and counteract its harms, merges her ethics work with art in a way that humanizes very technical problems. She has mastered both code and words. “Poetry is a way of bringing in more people into these urgent and necessary conversations,” says Buolamwini, who is the author of the book Unmasking AI

portrait of Dr. Joy Buolamwini
Programmer and poet Joy Buolamwini wants us to reimagine how we train software and measure its success. Naima Green

Perhaps Buolamwini’s most famous work is her poem “AI, Ain’t I a Woman?” In an accompanying video, she demonstrates Watson and other AIs misidentifying famous Black women such as Ida B. Wells, Oprah Winfrey, and Michelle Obama as men. “Can machines ever see my queens as I view them?” she asks. “Can machines ever see our grandmothers as we knew them?” 

This type of bias has long been recognized as a problem in the burgeoning field of AI. But even if developers knew that their product wasn’t good at recognizing dark-skinned faces, they didn’t necessarily address the problem. They realized fixing it would take great investment—without much institutional support, Buolamwini says. “It turned out more often than not to be a question of priority,” especially with for-profit companies focused on mass appeal. 

Hiring more people of diverse races and genders to work in tech can lend perspective, but it can’t solve the problem on its own, Buolamwini adds. Much of the bias derives from data sets required to train computers, which might not include enough information, such as a large pool of images of dark-skinned women. Diverse programmers alone can’t build an unbiased product using a biased data set.

In fact, it’s impossible to fully rid AI of bias because all humans have biases, Buolamwini says, and their beliefs make their way into code. She wants AI developers to be aware of those mindsets and strive to make systems that do not propagate discrimination.

This involves being deliberate about which computer programs to use, and recognizing that specific ones may be needed for different services in different populations. “We have to move away from a universalist approach of building one system to rule them all,” Buolamwini explains. She gave the example of a healthcare AI: A data set trained mainly on male metrics could lead to signs of disease being missed in female patients. But that doesn’t mean the model is useless, as it could still benefit healthcare for one sex. Instead, developers should also consider building a female-specific model.

But even if it were possible to create unbiased algorithms, they could still perpetuate harm. For example, a theoretically flawless facial recognition AI could fuel state surveillance if it were rolled out across the US. (The Transportation Security Administration plans to try voluntary facial recognition checks in place of manual screening in more than 400 airports in the next several years. The new process might become mandatory in the more distant future.) “Accurate systems can be abused,” Buolamwini says. “Sometimes the solution is to not build a tool.”

Read more about life in the age of AI: 

Or check out all of our PopSci+ stories.

The post How this programmer and poet thinks we should tackle racially biased AI appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to start hiking barefoot, if you’re into that kind of thing https://www.popsci.com/diy/barefoot-hiking/ Tue, 17 Oct 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580076
A person walking barefoot across a fallen tree trunk in a forest.
When you're hiking barefoot, you may decide to take the smoother, narrower path, than the rough wide one. Michał Parzuchowski / Unsplash

Hear us out: no shoes in the forest.

The post How to start hiking barefoot, if you’re into that kind of thing appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A person walking barefoot across a fallen tree trunk in a forest.
When you're hiking barefoot, you may decide to take the smoother, narrower path, than the rough wide one. Michał Parzuchowski / Unsplash

Modern adults are rarely without footwear, all too eager to cover their feet for everything from walking to the mailbox to relaxing on the back porch. And while shoes are, of course, frequently required (like for your morning coffee run, grocery shopping, and dinner out with friends), the outdoors offer a stellar opportunity to kick off your shoes and free your feet for a change.

Yes, despite the presence of dirt, sticks, mud, and uneven surfaces, you can—and perhaps should—ditch your shoes for your next ramble in the woods. Because going barefoot offers holistic health and wellness benefits, strengthens your feet, improves balance, and is just plain fun. Here’s how to do it safely and why you might want to consider hiking barefoot on your next outing.

The benefits of walking barefoot

There have been numerous studies documenting the benefits of walking barefoot, including strengthening foot and leg muscles, improving balance, and potentially reducing inflammation.

The physical effects stem from the fact that when barefoot, the small bones, muscles, and ligaments in your feet can move more freely than they would in typical footwear that reduces natural movement. This restriction can lead to physically weaker foot muscles, less stabilization when walking, and even flat arches.

The potential anti-inflammatory effects may be attributed to the practice of grounding or earthing, which involves your bare skin touching natural surfaces—as it would when walking barefoot. Grounding has been shown in small studies to reduce pain and inflammation, but more research is needed.

There are also more immediately tangible results to hiking in unshod feet, explains Paul Thompson, a podiatrist and founder of The Barefoot Movement, who specializes in barefoot neuromuscular training in New South Wales, Australia. “Traditional shoes often encourage compensations in our natural gait,” he says. “By returning to a barefoot state, we can utilize our entire body in a more balanced and efficient manner. This not only improves the efficiency of walking but also allows us to adapt more effectively to varying terrains.”

Translation: hiking barefoot could improve your balance and reduce your risk of injury. Thompson says that’s because the “heightened sensitivity translates into improved reaction times, enabling hikers to swiftly respond to terrain changes and avoid potential discomfort or injuries.” 

[Related: Learn how to use trekking poles]

But strengthening your feet, just like other parts of your body, takes time, so if you’re new to barefoot hiking, take it slow to protect your soles.

Transition wisely

Much like transitioning to barefoot-style shoes, slow and steady is the way to go when attempting barefoot hiking. After all, if you’ve spent most of your life in cushioned, overbuilt footwear, walking barefoot on any surface is likely going to take some getting used to.

So start with short barefoot walks on soft surfaces like grass. Then incorporate foot exercises into your daily routine. Perform heel raises by planting the balls of your feet and lifting your heels off the ground while squeezing a tennis ball between your heels. Or a technique called “short foot,” where you stand up straight with bare feet, spread your toes, and strive to raise your arches while keeping your heels and the balls of your feet firmly planted.

All of this will strengthen your feet and condition them to the novel feeling and workload of being barefoot for extended periods of time. When you’re ready to hike, Thompson says one short stroll a week is plenty at the start. As your feet become stronger and your soles toughen, you can progressively increase hike duration.

Safety first

When you hike, bring along a first aid kit and a pair of shoes or sandals in case you come to a section of trail you’re not comfortable traversing without foot protection. Slide them on when you need to and back off again whenever you’re ready.

[Related: First aid basics for your adventure in the wilderness]

Then, take it slow. You’ll likely need to pay more attention to where you’re planting your feet than you do while wearing shoes. That means you may end up hiking a bit more slowly than you’re used to, but it also means you’ll be experiencing your surroundings in a more immersive way. So take your time and enjoy the journey.

Find a trail

When it comes to picking the perfect trail for a barefoot hike, some destinations can be more accommodating than others. In Celerina, a small town located in the Swiss Alps, for example, there are dedicated trails specifically for barefoot hiking.

But those are few and far between in the US, so depending on where you’re located, you may have to do a bit of research. One way is to find a local barefoot hiking group, several of which are scattered around the US. If there’s not an official club near you, check websites like Meetup or Facebook for barefoot-friendly hiking events. Even if you don’t want to join a group hike, you can ask for trail recommendations in your area.

If you’re searching on your own, focus on finding trails with ideal surfaces for hiking barefoot, at least when you’re starting out. These include grass, soft dirt, and sand. Even mud is often more fun barefoot than in shoes—plus, going shoeless keeps your boots clean.

Though there aren’t many high moors left in the world, Katharina Moosbrugger, hiking guide and founder of Naturerfahren, a nature-focused tour company in Austria, says these landscapes are an excellent place to walk barefoot thanks to the soft, spongy surfaces. But because these open tracts of land can hide deceptively deep bogs, you’ll want to opt for a guided hike through such areas if you’re not familiar with them. Otherwise, you could easily sink up to your shoulders in wet mud.

Once you’ve found a few ideal spots and are ready to liberate your feet from shoes, have at it. Just remember to take it slow, pick trails wisely, and enjoy the experience of being outdoors as nature intended.

The post How to start hiking barefoot, if you’re into that kind of thing appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How seriously can we take Tesla and Rivian’s right-to-repair pact? https://www.popsci.com/technology/tesla-rivian-right-to-repair/ Tue, 17 Oct 2023 10:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580020
Tesla steering wheel
Tesla and Rivian signed a right-to-repair pact. Repair advocates are skeptical. DepositPhotos

Despite a “landmark” agreement, automakers and the repair industry are still fighting over who controls car data.

The post How seriously can we take Tesla and Rivian’s right-to-repair pact? appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Tesla steering wheel
Tesla and Rivian signed a right-to-repair pact. Repair advocates are skeptical. DepositPhotos

This story was originally published by Grist. Sign up for Grist’s weekly newsletter here.

Leading American electric vehicle makers Tesla and Rivian are supporting a controversial pact between carmakers and automotive repair organizations that critics say is an attempt to undermine legislation that would make it easier for Americans to fix their cars.

For several years, the American car industry has been feuding with automotive service groups and right-to-repair advocates over who should control access to telematic data, information about speed, location, and performance that cars transmit wirelessly back to their manufacturers. Many in the automotive repair industry say this data is essential for fixing today’s computerized cars, and that it should be freely available to vehicle owners and independent shops. Increased access to telematic data, repair advocates argue, will drive down the cost of repair and keep vehicles on the roads for longer. This is particularly important for EVs, which must be used as long as possible to maximize their climate benefits and offset the environmental toll of manufacturing their metal-rich batteries.

These arguments have led members of Congress from both parties to introduce a bill called the REPAIR Act that would grant car owners, and the mechanics of their choosing, access to their telematic data. But the auto industry, which stands to make billions of dollars selling telematics to insurers, streaming radio services, and other third parties, contends that carmakers should be the gatekeepers of this data to avoid compromising vehicle safety. 

In July, ahead of a congressional hearing on right-to-repair issues, an automotive industry trade group called the Alliance for Automotive Innovation announced it had struck a “landmark agreement” with repair groups regarding telematic data sharing — an agreement that ostensibly preempted the need for legislation. A few weeks later, Tesla and Rivian, neither of which is a member of the Alliance for Automotive Innovation, announced their support for the agreement. The only problem? Major national organizations representing the automotive aftermarket and repair industries weren’t consulted about the agreement, don’t support it, and claim it won’t make cars easier to fix.

The new agreement “was an attempt by the automakers to distort the facts of the issue and create noise and confusion in Congress,” Bill Hanvey, president of the Auto Care Association, a national trade association representing the aftermarket parts and services industry, told Grist. The Auto Care Association is among the groups that was not consulted about the agreement.

This isn’t the first time the auto industry and repair professionals have reached a voluntary agreement over right-to-repair. 

In 2002, the Automotive Service Association, one of the signatories on the new agreement, struck a pact with vehicle manufacturers to provide independent repair shops access to diagnostic tools and service information. Then, shortly after Massachusetts passed the nation’s first right-to-repair law focused on vehicles in 2013, manufacturers and organizations representing the aftermarket, including the Auto Care Association, signed a memorandum of understanding, or MOU, nationalizing the requirements of the law. That law granted independent mechanics explicit access to vehicle diagnostic and repair information through an in-car port. 

Gay Gordon-Byrne, executive director of the right-to-repair advocacy organization Repair.org, believes automakers signed the 2014 MOU “in order to prevent more legislation—and particularly more legislation that they would not like.” Automakers objected to including telematics in the 2014 MOU, according to Hanvey. “Because, at the time, the technology was so future-looking, the aftermarket agreed to get a deal in place,” he said.

Telematics is no longer technology of the future, however. Today, manufacturers use telematic systems to collect reams of real-time data related to a vehicle’s activity and state of health, potentially allowing manufacturers to evaluate cars continuously and encourage drivers to get service from their dealers when needed. Independent mechanics, meanwhile, need drivers to bring their vehicles into the shop in order to read data off the car itself—if the data is accessible at all.

In 2020, Massachusetts voters passed a ballot measure called the Data Access Law requiring carmakers to make telematic repair data available to owners and mechanics of their choosing via a standard, open-access platform. Shortly after voters approved it, Alliance for Automotive Innovation sued Massachusetts to stop the law from going into effect, arguing that it conflicted with federal safety standards. The federal judge overseeing the lawsuit has delayed ruling multiple times, keeping the requirements in legal limbo for nearly three years. In June, Massachusetts Attorney General Andrea Campbell decided to begin enforcing the law, lawsuit notwithstanding. 

While fighting Massachusetts’ Data Access Law in court, automakers were also negotiating their own rules on data sharing. The agreement that the Alliance for Automotive Innovation announced in July included the imprimatur of two repair groups: the Automotive Service Association, a not-for-profit advocacy organization that lobbies states and the federal government on issues impacting automotive repair, and the Society of Collision Repair Specialists, a trade association representing collision repair businesses. 

Dubbed the “Automotive Repair Data Sharing Commitment,” the new agreement reaffirms the 2014 MOU by requiring carmakers to give independent repair facilities access to the same diagnostic and repair information they make available to their authorized dealers. In a step beyond the 2014 MOU, the new agreement includes telematic data required to fix cars. But carmakers are only required to share telematic repair data that “is not otherwise available through a tool,” like the in-car port used today, “or third party-service information provider.”

Because of those caveats, critics say, the agreement effectively changes nothing about telematic data access: Carmakers are still able to decide what data to release, and in what format. Independent shops may still be forced to read data off cars that manufacturers and their dealers have immediate, over-the-air access to, or they may have to subscribe to third-party services to purchase data that dealers receive at no charge. 

What’s more, the qualification about dealerships suggests Tesla and Rivian wouldn’t have to provide any telematic data whatsoever, since neither company works with dealers. That’s especially problematic, Hanvey said, considering both companies make cars that rely heavily on telematic systems. In a pair of class action lawsuits filed earlier this year, Tesla customers alleged that the company restricts independent repair by, among other things, designing its vehicles so that maintenance and repair work rely on telematic information Tesla exclusively controls. 

“The EVs are much more technological, much more reliant on code, and the repairs are much more complicated,” Hanvey said. “It’s difficult enough getting them repaired today, and if you take out the aftermarket, it’s going to be even more challenging for consumers.” 

Neither Tesla nor Rivian responded to a request for comment.

The voluntary nature of the agreement weakens it further, critics say. The Massachusetts Data Access Law and the REPAIR Act under consideration in Congress—which would also require manufacturers to give vehicle owners direct, over-the-air access to telematic repair data via a standard platform—would carry the force of law. By contrast, “there’s no distinction about what happens if this MOU is violated,” Hanvey said. 

Gordon-Byrne told Grist in an email that carmakers haven’t universally complied with the 2014 MOU. “And outside of Massachusetts there isn’t any statute to force compliance,” she said. 

“The problem,” Gordon-Byrne continued, “is lack of enforcement. If the parties don’t like the arrangement—they can talk about it once a year.” Indeed, the new agreement includes a yearly review of the terms by the signatories, as well as the establishment of a panel that will meet biannually to discuss any issues parties have raised regarding repair information access and to “collaborate on potential solutions where feasible.”

The Automotive Service Association and the Society of Collision Repair Specialists don’t represent all of the stakeholders who care about telematic data, which in addition to carmakers, dealers, and mechanics, includes companies that sell and distribute aftermarket parts. In fact, these two signatories appear to represent a small slice of the auto repair industry, which included more than 280,000 U.S. businesses this year, according to market research firm IBIS World. The Automotive Service Association did not provide membership numbers when Grist asked, but there were 1,243 U.S.-based businesses listed in its online directory as of this week. (Several major carmakers are also affiliated with the group, including Nissan, Ford, and Audi.) The Society of Collision Repair Specialists, which didn’t respond to Grist’s request for comment, includes approximately 6,000 collision repair businesses, according to its website

The Auto Care Association, meanwhile, represents over half a million companies that manufacture and sell third-party vehicle parts, and service and repair cars. And it’s not the only group that feels the new agreement doesn’t go far enough: So does the Tire Industry Association, which represents roughly 14,000 U.S. member locations that make, repair, and service tires, MEMA Aftermarket Suppliers, representing several hundred aftermarket parts manufacturers, and the Auto Care Alliance, a group of state and regional auto service provider networks with 1,200 members across the country. None of these groups was consulted in advance about the new agreement.

The data sharing agreement “is history repeating itself once again,” Ron Turner, director of the Mid-Atlantic Auto Care Alliance, said in a statement, referring to the voluntary industry agreements of 2002 and 2014, which the organization claims stymied national legislation and have not been adequately enforced. The groups promoting it, Turner said, “are slowing down much-needed legislation and enforcement the automotive industry has needed for decades.”

The Alliance for Automotive Innovation feels differently about voluntary agreements. Brian Weiss, vice president of communications at the trade organization, told Grist in an email that the 2014 MOU “has been working well for almost a decade” and the new data-sharing agreement builds off it. Weiss declined to respond to specific criticisms of the agreement, offer examples of telematic data that carmakers would have to release as a result of it, or explain why the Auto Care Association, a signatory on the 2014 agreement, wasn’t included in the new one.

Robert Redding, a lobbyist for the Automotive Service Association, told Grist that voluntary agreements have worked for its members, too, citing the service information agreement the group negotiated with carmakers in 2002. (The Automotive Service Association was not a party to the subsequent 2014 MOU.) The new agreement, Redding said, was the result of a yearlong negotiation process, and he believes parties came to the table “in good faith.”

“We feel very good about the agreement,” Redding said. “This worked for service information, and we believe it’ll work for vehicle data access.” 

The groups backing the new agreement are already using it to argue that further regulation is unnecessary. In a September 22 court filing in the lawsuit concerning the Massachusetts Data Access Law, the Alliance for Automotive Innovation touted the agreement as evidence of the car industry’s “ongoing effort to ensure that consumers enjoy choice with respect to the maintenance and repair of their vehicles.” 

Several days later, at a September 27 hearing of the House Energy Subcommittee on Innovation, Data, and Commerce, Automotive Service Association board of directors chairman Scott Benavidez testified that the new data sharing agreement “nullifies the need for the REPAIR Act.” It was similar to an argument the group made nearly 20 years earlier when it opposed a national right-to-repair act for vehicles, arguing that the voluntary agreement it negotiated with carmakers in 2002 rendered legislation unnecessary.

Dwayne Myers, CEO of Dynamic Automotive, an independent auto repair business with six locations in Maryland, was disappointed to see the Automotive Service Association publicly oppose the REPAIR Act. Myers has been a member of the organization for about a decade, but he says he wasn’t consulted about the new agreement in advance of its release and he doesn’t believe it should be used to undermine laws guaranteeing access to repair data.

“They could have just remained quiet and let their MOU sit there—they didn’t have to oppose the right to repair,” Myers said. “To me it just felt bad. Why as an industry aren’t we working together, unless you’re not on our side?”

This article originally appeared in Grist at https://grist.org/transportation/tesla-and-rivian-signed-a-right-to-repair-pact-repair-advocates-are-skeptical/

Grist is a nonprofit, independent media organization dedicated to telling stories of climate solutions and a just future. Learn more at Grist.org

The post How seriously can we take Tesla and Rivian’s right-to-repair pact? appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best search engines for finding results and securing your privacy https://www.popsci.com/diy/best-search-engines/ Tue, 17 Oct 2023 09:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580097
A bearded man with glasses looking at a desktop computer screen with a search function displayed.
The best search engine is definitely not the one this guy's using. Depositphotos

Find what you need online and protect your privacy.

The post The best search engines for finding results and securing your privacy appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A bearded man with glasses looking at a desktop computer screen with a search function displayed.
The best search engine is definitely not the one this guy's using. Depositphotos

Your choice of search engine makes a big difference in the relevance (and privacy) of your search results. The first search engine, known as Archie, was developed by a student at McGill University and released in 1990. Today, there are more than 20 search engines that range from powerhouses like Google to lesser-known, more specialized options

Some search engines, such as Google, highlight their AI assistants, but the truth is that artificial intelligence has been behind search engines for years. But if you want an assistant to winnow search results, AI can help you get more relevant results. 

Even if you use a browser with a built-in search engine, you’re not beholden to it. You can, for example, add search engines to Google Chrome, giving you extra options when you want to perform photo searches or need extra privacy. Before you set your default search engine, though, consider how you use searches and how you feel about data privacy. These factors can direct you toward the top search engine for your inquiring mind.

1. Google

The Google search engine in a Google Chrome browser window.
The undisputed leader of search. Screenshot: Google

Google is the No. 1 search engine used today, handling more than 83 percent of searches, according to Statista. That number may rise or fall depending on the month, but needless to say, Google’s got the majority of the market when it comes to searches. 

Google is a robust search engine that powers sites like YouTube and integrates full-service features like Google Workspace. It’s much more than a search engine that allows you to gather everything from your latest curiosity to professional collaboration in one place. 

In February 2023, Google introduced Bard, an AI-powered search assistant. Search engines have used AI algorithms for years to identify patterns and customize search results and ads to individual users, but we’re entering a new age of heavy focus on AI. If you’re hoping Bard will hold up to OpenAI’s ChatGPT, though, it’s got a ways to go. That said, with the speed that AI adapts, it may not be long before Google has a leading assistant for generative as well as search purposes. 

This engine also gets high marks for the layout and variety of features like snippets, knowledge panels, and “people also ask” sections that can help you further refine results. On the downside, Google is a data hog and hangs onto your information to customize your experience. On one hand, you’ll see ads and results that are more relevant to your likes and preferences. On the other hand, privacy issues and data usage are real concerns. Some people find Google more than a little invasive.

2. Bing

The Bing search engine in a Google Chrome browser window.
Earn rewards for all that search time. Screenshot: Bing

If you’re looking for search engines other than Google, Bing is a top contender. Bing doesn’t have nearly Google’s market share, but it’s second in popularity worldwide. Microsoft created Bing in 2009 and has developed it into an impressive search engine, especially when it comes to the integration of AI. 

[Related: Ditch Google for good with these apps and gadgets]

ChatGPT powers Bing Chat, Bing’s search bot, which remembers query context to help you refine searches. It also includes sources in search results, helping you assess the validity of your results. That said, Bing can give short, almost nonsensical answers at times. 

The Bing search results pages on Bing look eerily similar to Google’s. Many users may have a hard time telling the difference between the two. However, Bing’s image, video, and map searching abilities are some of the best, with the video and image features topping the market.

Bing also offers a rewards program, which earns you points every time you shop or search with Bing. After you’ve accumulated enough points, you can redeem them for gift cards or use them to donate to your favorite charity. You earn about five points per search, so doing a lot of online research could earn you a few bucks each month. 

Like Google, Bing collects data to customize the ads and searches that appear, which you may or may not appreciate. Consequently, Bing, like Google, might not be the best choice if privacy is your top concern.

3. DuckDuckGo

The DuckDuckGo search engine in a Google Chrome browser window.
Increased tracker blocking and encryption on DuckDuckGo help protect user privacy. Screenshot: DuckDuckGo

If all that data collection has your skin crawling, DuckDuckGo is worth a try. If you compare Google vs. DuckDuckGo vs. Bing, DuckDuckGo might not be as comprehensive, but it puts privacy over pure search power. It doesn’t store your data, track you, or collect cookies. You’ll still see ads, but they won’t be customized based on your searches. 

This search engine uses its own crawler and incorporates a few other search engines, but not Google. The company skips the monster search engine in an effort to provide a different user experience. It’s organized similarly to other search engines, with search categories at the top for images and videos that match your search.

[Related: 7 ways DuckDuckGo can help you find exactly what you need]

However, there’s only one results page per search, which is kind of nice if you’re easily overwhelmed by Google’s millions of results when all you’re doing is looking for the best WiFi routers. While DuckDuckGo isn’t set to dethrone Google, it’s gained a steady following with the privacy it offers.

4. Startpage

The Startpage search engine in a Google Chrome browser window.
Skip the targeted ads when you search with Startpage. Screenshot: Startpage

Startpage approaches search with a philosophy that’s similar to DuckDuckGo by focusing on security and privacy. It keeps prying eyes (and advertisers) from following your every virtual move by refusing to log your search history or save your personal data. That does mean some searches take a little longer. But some users find it worth it for the privacy that remains after they hit exit. 

Startpage uses Google to populate results, which means you’ll get robust results without the targeted ads. The uncluttered search page is a breath of fresh air from some of the larger engines, which can feel like ads are slapping you in the face while you scroll.

This engine also offers an Anonymous View that lets you visit pages without sharing any information about yourself. The process works by removing your IP address before sending the query. Startpage also offers the option of StartMail, a secure email platform.

5. Yahoo

The Yahoo homepage and search engine in a Google Chrome browser window.
Yahoo is powered by Bing, so they may display similar results. Screenshot: Yahoo

Yahoo has been around since 1994 and uses Bing’s search engine to create results, so expect similar groupings, but it uses its own tech for certain searches, including trending ones. Though not as elegant as Bing or Google, Yahoo’s search page offers categories like weather, news, sports, and trends as well as access to Yahoo’s email service. Yahoo Finance is another big draw and provides quick access to the latest in what’s happening on the stock market. 

If you’re primarily after news and finance info, Yahoo’s got it in spades. You don’t even have to do a Yahoo web search to see the latest headlines with eye-catching photos to boot. Yahoo Maps is another place that sets this engine apart, thanks to an open-source Open Maps service. 

Yahoo also offers subscription-based services like Yahoo Finance Plus for even more insight into the market, investments, and companies on the rise. And, of course, it includes free features like Yahoo Mail.

The post The best search engines for finding results and securing your privacy appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best snow cone machines of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-snow-cone-machine/ Mon, 22 Nov 2021 22:38:30 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=387027
A lineup of snow-cone makers on a white background
Amanda Reed

These icy instruments can make your dessert dreams come true, giving you a sweet treat to beat the sweltering heat any day of the week.

The post The best snow cone machines of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of snow-cone makers on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Hawaiian Shaved Ice Snow-Cone Machine is the best snow cone machine overall. Hawaiian Shaved-Ice Snow Cone Machine
SEE IT

A great option for at-home snow cones to feed the family. 

Best commercial grade The Zeny Ice Crushers Machine is the best snow-cone machine. ZENY Ice Crushers Machine
SEE IT

A commercial-grade snow cone machine that can churn out shaved ice at lightning speeds.

Best old-school The Nostalgia Snow-Cone Cart is the best snow-cone machine. Nostalgia Snow Cone Cart
SEE IT

An old-timey snow cone cart that will please party-goers. 

Snow cones can be traced all the way back to the mid-1800s during the American Industrial Revolution, with the first proper snow cone machine hitting the market in 1919 at the State Fair of Texas. Today, sweet shaved ice is, without a doubt, one of the best warm-weather treats around. It’s a simple snack with endless flavor options to satisfy everyone’s sweet tooth. While combining ice and flavoring is certainly not a complicated process, crushing the ice into small bits can be quite tricky without the aid of a snow cone maker. Whether you’re looking for an everyday treat or a fun trick to roll out at parties, the best snow cone machine will keep you supplied with shaved ice all summer long … and beyond. 

How we chose the best snow-cone machines

No offense to the Snoopy snow cone machine of your youth, but a quality snow cone machine should turn your refrigerator ice into a fluffy, chilly cloud—not a chunky pile of frosty shrapnel. To find the best snow cone machine, we tested the machines ourselves (yes, we have consumed too much Red Dye 40), conducted user testing, and performed heavy research. The snow cone machine has a rich history—one which we honor by presenting products that have been thoroughly vetted and are reliable. Snoopy and Woodstock simply must step up their game if they want to be on this list.

The best snow cone machines: Reviews & Recommendations 

Once you know more about where you’ll use your machine and who you want to serve, you can start your search for the best snow cone machines. Soon, you’ll be able to enter the world of the best ice cream makers for even more cool treats. Add an outdoor misting fan, and you’ve got instant summer refreshment without retreating indoors. To help you get started, we’ve compiled a few of our favorites, from hand cranks to commercial-grade models. 

Best overall: Hawaiian Shaved Ice Snow-Cone Machine

Hawaiian Shaved Ice

SEE IT

Specs

  • Syrups included: Yes
  • Dimensions: 15.25 x 10.25 x 7.25 inches
  • Weight: 8.5 lbs.
  • Servings: 1-2 six-ounce servings

Pros

  • Syrups included
  • Can fit on a table or countertop
  • Easy-to-use

Cons

  • Not good for making large batches at once

This complete kit from Hawaiian Shaved Ice supplies you with everything you need to create delicious snow cones right when you open the box. The machine is electric and features 25 snow cone cups, 25 spoon straws, and six-bottle pourers to help control syrup flow. Plus, it comes with six 6-pint bottles of syrup flavors: cherry, grape, blue raspberry, tiger’s blood, lemon-lime, and piña colada.

Best commercial grade: ZENY Ice Crushers Machine 

ZENY

SEE IT

Specs

  • Syrups included: No
  • Dimensions: 14 x 6 x 11 inches
  • Weight: 12.19 lbs.
  • Servings: 143 lbs. of shaved ice per hour

Pros

  • Commercial quality in a small size
  • Produces a high output of ice
  • Protected against rust

Cons

  • Expelled ice does not go directly into a cup

A party full of hot, hungry guests will be no match for this ZENY ice slush machine. With an impressive motor and hefty size, this machine can churn out 143 pounds of shaved ice per hour—more than enough to satisfy a crowd. The high-end blade turns ice into extremely fine particles to create the ideal snow cone. The machine is protected against rust, and a heavy cast base dampens sound and secures its position on a countertop or table. You won’t need to use specialized ice molds—simply pop cubes out from your at-home ice tray, play them in the ice receptacle, and push down on the handle. Keep in mind, however, that this machine is designed to process a high volume of ice. So, rather than collect neatly in a snow cone cup, the ice will be expelled into an included, attached stainless-steel bowl, which you can then scoop from. 

Best old-school: Nostalgia Snow-Cone Cart

Nostalgia

SEE IT

Specs

  • Syrups included: No, but it comes with empty bottles
  • Dimensions: 21 x 16.5 x 53 inches
  • Weight: 33.8 lbs.
  • Servings: 72 cones

Pros

  • Can crush 2 pounds of ice quickly
  • Vintage-inspired
  • Can move or become stationary

Cons

  • Heavy

An aptly named company, Nostalgia makes wonderfully festive, old-school snow cone machines. While they have several countertop models, our favorite has to be this snow-cone cart. Not only is this machine a treat for the eyes, but it’s one of the best functioning models on the market. Its stainless-steel blades can crush up to two pounds of ice in 90 seconds, and it holds enough snow to dole out around 72 cones. The cart has a paper-cone dispenser and a side shelf-cum-prep station holding three individual snow cones. The top of this cart even separates from the bottom if you need to ditch the wheels for a stationary experience. 

Best for shaved ice: Great Northern Premium Hawaiian Shaved-Ice Machine 

Great Northern Popcorn Company

SEE IT

Specs

  • Syrups included: No
  • Dimensions: 15 x 12 x 30.5 inches
  • Weight: 55 lbs.
  • Servings: 350 lbs. per hour

Pros

  • Shaves ice quickly
  • Can shave large cubes
  • Can prep snow cones the night before

Cons

  • Heavy

This heavy-duty snow cone maker can get through more than 350 pounds of ice an hour and roughly 6 pounds in a minute. The machine applies pressure and slices through large ice blocks up to 8 inches in diameter and 6.5 inches tall. If you can’t get to a store with ice blocks, you can prepare the night before you plan to serve your snow cones by filling up a paint bucket or using a classic milk jug with the top removed. This shaved ice machine employs a highly efficient motor, adjustable stainless-steel blades and weighs roughly 55 pounds. 

Best budget: MANBA Ice Shaver

MANBA

SEE IT

Specs

  • Syrups included: No
  • Dimensions: 7.28 x 5.1 x 7.87 inches
  • Weight: 0.317 ounces
  • Servings: 1-3

Pros

  • Easy-to-use
  • Portable
  • Versatile

Cons

  • Hand crank

This portable ice crusher from MANBA measures just 7.28 x 5.1 inches and features an easy-to-use hand crank. All you need to do is fill the top portion of the canister, turn the crank until you feel minimal resistance, and then empty the ice into the bottom reservoir with a quick push. This shaver comes with a 15-piece ice tray to throw in the freezer so you can stock up before you head out on the town. For an even easier snow cone, consider filling the ice tray with fruit juice so you can crush the ice and immediately eat without needing to bring additional flavoring. 

What to consider when buying the best snow cone machines 

There are a few major considerations and decisions to make before adding a snow-cone machine to your home appliance collection. Think about who you’ll want to serve these sweet treats to—do you need something you can take to the park or beach? Should you invest in an old-school cart? We’ll walk you through some essential questions to get you started. 

Performance

While it may seem straightforward to some, it never hurts to consider what exactly your new machine is doing to execute those perfectly fluffy ice crystals. Snow-cone makers provide custom ice molds or take common household ice cubes and turn them into veritable snow. With an electric model, all you’ll typically need to do is apply a little bit of pressure, pushing the ice through a specially designed blender that grinds it up without melting it. Depending on the machine you purchase, the ice will be doled out into those quintessential snow cone cups, and you can add the flavoring of your choice. 

Capacity

If you’re looking to keep a snow-cone machine around to satisfy your family’s summer dessert cravings or serve a few friends, a standard countertop model will suit your needs. While each snow cone will be made to order, you don’t need an industrial-strength machine to serve four or five treats at a time. However, if you’re looking to host a more significant event, consider investing in a commercial-grade model. These machines will be slightly larger and produce more than 100 pounds of crushed ice per hour. You can also look for a model with an ice reservoir. That way, you can grind up a healthy amount before continuously serving. Just make sure to store any machine with a reservoir in a cool place—you don’t want to spend time crushing the ice only for it to melt. These high-end snow cone makers will help your guests avoid a line and save you any additional stress. 

Portability 

If you don’t have any access to power, consider purchasing a portable snow cone maker with a hand crank during an outdoor park party. While they’re more tedious than their electric contemporaries, hand-crank models are easy to use and often come in small sizes that you can quickly pack away in a cooler or travel bag. Remember, smaller models can only handle a certain amount of ice at once, so make sure you pace yourself if you need to churn out multiple rounds. 

Accessories

A snow cone is much more than plain pieces of tiny ice. You need flavor (and cups). With most machines, you will need to supply your own ingredients, but there are a few complete kits out there that will help you get started. These kits are particularly great for folks who need a snow cone maker on short notice or don’t want to go through any hassle trying to select the perfect flavors for an upcoming party. 

If you want to venture out on your own to create a classic snow-cone experience, plan to add spoon straws, snow-cone cups, and syrup flavors with pouring tops to your shopping list. 

FAQs

Q: How much does a snow cone machine cost?

Commercial-grade snow cone machines will be more expensive than ones for casual use. They can start at $20 for an easy-to-use tabletop machine and go up to $250 for a professional-level, free-standing appliance like the one you’d see at a field day or county fair.

Q: What should I look for in a snow-cone maker?

The simplest rule of thumb is to look for a machine from a reliable home appliance brand. The caveat is that you’ll need it to fit your space, so be sure to look at the product’s dimensions and measure the spot you’re most likely to keep in your home. Pay particular attention to the product specs and look for a snow cone maker that can handle more than a couple of pounds of ice per hour. 

Q: How much ice does a snow cone machine use?

Each snow cone maker is different, so the amount of ice you’ll need varies from machine to machine. It’s also dependent on how many snow cones you want to make. Generally, most snow cones use between four and six ounces of ice, meaning a 20-pound bag of ice could make almost 50 snow cones. If you have special ice molds for your snow-cone machine, read the instructions, which should tell you how much ice you’ll need to prepare. 

Q: What snow cone maker produces the most snow cones?

The Nostalgia Vintage Snow-Cone Cart can produce more than 70 snow cones, making it one of the most productive machines on the market. A commercial-grade machine like the ZENY Ice Crushers Machine might have a smaller receptacle, but a fast motor means as long as you can refill the machine, you can serve as many as 20 people in under five minutes. 

Final thoughts on the best snow cone machines 

Celebrate warm weather with a fun, new at-home home appliance to help you beat the heat. The best snow cone machine will supply you, your friends, your family, your coworkers, your neighbors, and pretty much anyone else who could use a pick-me-up with a quick frozen snack. Our favorite all-in-one kit is the Hawaiian Shaved-Ice Snow-Cone Machine. If on a budget, we’d go with the MANBA Ice Shaver. All you really need to do is pick a manual or electric machine that can handle the size of your party, grab your favorite syrups, and you’re in business. You’ll have a simple, thirst-quenching dessert in your hands whenever your heart desires. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow cone machines of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>